Skip to main content

Full text of "Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal."

See other formats 


_> 


>. 
" 
ty) a 


r iN ha 


JOURNAL & PROCEEDINGS 


OF THE 


ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL. 


New Series, Vol. IX. 
1913, 


[SIRWILLAMJONES] 


MDCCXLV]-MDCCXCIV 


CALCUTTA : 
PRINTED AT THE BAPTIST MISSION PRESS, AND PUBLISHED BY 
THE ASIATIC SOCIETY. 1, PARK STREET, CALOUTTA. 
1918. 


DATES OF PUBLICATION. 


Journal, pp. 1-88 Proceedings, pp. 
> 2 : 22 9 : 


tii 16th June 1913. 
t A 


XVii st August ., 
o° 


xxix-Ixxxi fe 
lxxxiii-lxxxv 18th ,, 


30th: .,, 
10th Sept. ,, 


Xevii-xevili eg aan 
Ci 2 


6th D 
ciii-ev 11th March 1914. 
ch 


 evii-cix 20th Mar 


DIRECTIONS FOR BINDING. 


The pages of ae ae should be bound ph after the 
; erals. The 


continuation of the Proceedings. 


Plates i-v to follow page 88 
ee We og nes 
ee vii ae See 

a3 Vie, fs RAG 

se 1s: Pea Ps) 

oo x1 5 482 

a Xli-xiv ,, e 258 

. XV-xvVi ,, 3 pe 

on 0 » ol4 

. EVE » 424 
2) SEP ey 8 , 290 

* >t San gEr », 390 

ae xxvi ,, face .» 465 

ce) 23 477 


- xXVH. ;, 


ERRATA. 


P. 348, eee jine from bottom of page. For “ Laiop- 
ery.’ read ‘ Laiopteryx’ 
' Pp. 403, Opcones the nam Bader Spelaea (Dobson)”’ 
add in the third column after the word 
‘ own” the words “in Burma.’ 
P. 409, aap op. cit., Vol. IV, p. 485) retracts the 
“Collocalia francica (Gmel.) ” in favour of 
EO elieatad unicolor 
P. 409, Fourth line from bottom of page. For “ridleyi, 
Boulenger” read “‘ridleyi, Butler” and add 
reference: Journ. Bombay Nat. Hist. Soc., xu, 
p. 425. 


LIST OF PAPERS AND ABSTRACTS 
ARRANGED ACCORDING TO AUTHORSHIP. 
Ananp Kou: See Koun, ANAND, 


ANNANDALE, N. 


An Account of the gb tino of the Lake of ‘iota with obser- 
vatio gilli 
Tneasaebdon to a Report on the gee of ee Lake of Tiberias 
ber. 


The Leeches of the Lake of" Ti 


Notes on the Fishes, Dateashi«’ rea Reptiles of the Lake of 


ae 1as es 
Note on a Sponge e-Larva from the iad of Tiberias . . 
The Polysea of the Lake of Tiberia: tes 


ANNANDALE, N., and Stantey Kemp 
The Crustacea Decapoda of the Laks of Tiberias 


ANNANDALE, N., J. Coaain Brown, and F. H. Grave ty. 
The Limestone Caves of Burma and the Malay Peninsula 


BANERJEE, RAKHALDAS. . 
Laksmanasena 


Brown, J. Coae 
The A- aia (Maingtha) Tribe of Hohsa-Lahsa, Yunnan 


Brown, J. Coaain, N. ANNANDALE, and F. H. GRAvEty. 
The Limestone Caves of Burma and the Malay Peninsula 


Brunetti, E. 
Some Noxious Diptera from Galilee 


Burr, Macon. 
Indian Dermaptera collected by Dr. A. D. Imms 


CARPENTER, GEORGE H. 
A New Springtail from Galilee 


CurpBer, H. M. 


On a in the Flowers of Limnanthemum shes 


Curistiz, W. A. K. 
The Composition of the Water of the Lake of Tiberias 


CiueGHorN, Maupe L. 
Notes on the Pollination of Colocasia Antiquorum 


Das-Gurta, Hem CHANDRA. 
On Two-Shouldered Stone Implements from Assam. . 


Page 


271 


137 


313 


291 


viii 


Datta, Rasrk Lat. 
The ge eres of Nitrosyl Chloride on Secondary Amines. Methyl- 
nitrosamine and Ethylbenzyinitrosamine 
The Bionerseiie and — ee of | Monochloro and Di- 
chlorobenzylamine 
Datta, Rastk Lat, and Haripas MUKHERJEE. 
The Double Mercuri- ~periodides of substituted Sapa eprne Bases 
Tetrapropylammonium Mercuri-periodide 
Diesy, E. 
Nor’westers and Monsoon Prediction. 


Epwarps, F. W. 
Tipulide and Culicide from the Lake of Tiberias and Damascus 


EKENDRANATH GHOsH: See GuosH, EKENDRANATH. 
FIRMINGER, Rev. W. K. 
Two Letters of Major James Rennel 


GuHosH, EKENDRANATH. 
On ee Internal Anatomy of the Blind ante of ego Scan 
aris galilea, Calman) 
Gitte, Rev. A. 
sages of an Expedition among the Abors in 1853, By Rev 
Krick (of ae epee ar Paris and i ca of the 
South Tibetan Mis: 
GRAVELY, F. H., N. ANNANDALE, and J. Gouaix Brown: 
The Limestone Caves of Burma and the Malay Peninsula 
GURNEY, RoBER 
becca: from the Lake of Tiberias. . 
Haripas, MukerseEE: See MuKkerser, Haripas. 
Hemconanpra Das-Gupta: See Das-Gupra, HEMCHANDRA- 


Hipayar Husain: See Husain, Hwayar. 


Hoopsr, Dr. Davin. 
Sarcocolla 


Horvata, G. 
— _ Semi-aquatic ae from the Lake of Piberiems 
d its immediate vicin 
Hosten, Rev. H. 


Earliest Jesuit ctiate in India. From the J ane of the Rev. 
Cecilio Gom pipiens S.J. pris casei. by e Rey, L. 
Cardon, § os a sae 


Y ad age 


<a ee 


177 


477 


Page 

HostEn, Rev. H. 
Firoz Shah’s Tunnajs at Delhi. Ixxxviii 
The Pitt Diamond and the Eyes of J agannath, Puri 189 


The Pitt Diamond and the be of Jagannath, Puri. A further 
note 
The — fe Ber nard. among the Abors, and the Cross as a 
o Mark (18 A no 
The Twalve Prcatras or and dlords ‘of Ben nga al 
Two pete tl re ions in the Ropero Temple of Mali- 
pur (Madras). 


Husain, M. HipayartT. 


The Life and Works of Muhibb Allah of Bihar 
The Mirza Namah (The Book of the Perfect Gentleman) of Mirz& 
Kamr4n, with an English Translatio 


Jana, SARATCHANDRA. 
New Compound of Ethylacetoacetate with Mercuric Oxide .. 


JAYASWAL, KASHI-PRASAD, 
The Date of Asoka’s Coronatio 
The plays of Bhasa. and King Thikceokal of Magadha 


Tenmitona Nats Raxsuir: See Raxsuir, JIreENDRA NATH. 
JIvaNJI JAMSHEDJI Moptr: See Moni, JIVANJI JAMSHEDJI. 
Kasut Prasap JAYASWAL: See JAYaswaL, KAsHI-PRASAD. 


Kemp, STANLEY, and N. ANNANDALE. 
The Crustacea Decapoda of the Lake of Tiberias 


Krrxpatrick, W. 


A ash ngage bet dened | of the Language of ‘ahabioitemes Gyp- 
or Romnichal, and Colloquial Hindustan 


The Marriage Ceremony and. cna i Customs oe the Gehara 
Kan , 


Kour, ANAND. 
History of Kasmir . 
Larptaw, F. F. 
Note on the Dragonflies of Syria and the Jordan Valley 


TER, A. 
The Mint-Town Zainul-Bilad .. 
Mop!, JIVANJI JAMSHEDJI. 
India in the Avesta of the Parsis 
MuKHERJEE, Harias, and Rasix Lat Dorr 
The Double Mercuri-periodides of Substituted Ammonium Bases. 
Tetrapropylammonium Mercuri-periodide 
OxupEensBere, H. 
A Note on Buddhism ey ae v. 


XCV 


317 
259 


123 


Page 
Preston, H. B. 
A Molluscan Faunal cae of the Lake of rite, seh with Descrip- 
tions of new Spec ae we 
RAKHALDAS BANERJEE: See BANERJEE, RAKHALDAS. 
RaksHit, JITENDRANATH. 
Action of Stannic Chloride on Phenylhydrazine Rds | 
A Double Compound of Mercurie oxide with Acetone lxxxviii 
Rastk Lat Darra: See Darra, RastK Lat. 
Rovussetet, C. F. 
Note on Rotifers from Galilee. . a ve ieee 
Sarat CHANDRA JANA: See JANA, SARAT CHANDRA. 
SEWELL, Carr. R. B. Szymour. 
Notes on the Biological work of the R.I.M.S.S. ‘“ PERERA 
during Survey Seasons, 1910-11 and 1911-12 329 
STEPHENSON, Masor J. 
Aquatic Oligochaeta from the Lake of Tiberias i Se teqa tea). 
WESTHARP, ALFRED 4 
Psychology of Indian Music .. i ey ee | 7 
WHITEHEAD, R. B 
A Find of Ephthalite or White Hun Coins ae aerer - 1! 
WHITEHOUSE, R. 
The apie of the Lake of Tiberias .. ie vr, 459 
ZAMBAUR, E. V. “a 
The Oldest British Murshidabad Rupee .. re an 489 


JOURNAL 
ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL. 
New Series. 

Vol. IX.—1918. 


~— —>-—— 


1. The Mirza Namah (The Book of the Perfect 
Gentleman) of Mirzéi Kamran with an 
English Translation. 


By Mawtavi M. Hipayat Hosa, 
Lecturer, Presidency College, Calcutta . 


Last year during the vacation I was invited by my much 
esteemed friend Qadi Muhammad Mahmid Sahib of Chakdah 


prudence, Tradition, etc. Among them I came across this 
unique MS. entitled Mirza Namah.' He generously lent it to 
m is in a bad shikastah and consequently I took a 
long time to decipher it and make the transcript for the press. 
Although the title-page goes to prove that this was written 
by Mirza Kamran, yet there is nothing in the context of the book 
which might establish the identity of Mirza Kamran the learned 
son of Emperor Babur with this Mirzi Kamran. The only 
persons mentioned as his phetiantinir ty in this pamphlet are 
Rafi‘-i-Shirazi, Jalala-i-Ardastani and Qadi Zada-i-Girahridi. 
Mirza Rafi 4-Shirazi was the author of the Tazkirat al-Mulik, 
and he has mentioned in his preface that in the year 1017 
A.H. when his age was seventy years he began this book. 
8 onag ar the ‘‘Catalogue of Persian ie of the British 
SMisnotinns p. o. V, mentions another work of same name and says 
the work, eek. is anonymous, was oleae pines in India. It 
ins: 


Et AS lat tO ols ai pow gles 
A copy of this book also exists in the library of the Asiatic Society 
of Bengal. It contains the author’s name which is Mirzé Mu ,ammad 
Khalil. 


2 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. |January, 1913. 


According to this statement Mirza Rafi‘ was born in 947 
A.H. whereas Mirza Kamran, son of Emperor Babur, died 
$64 a.H., so that when Rafi‘ was about 17 years, Mirza 
Kamran died. 

So far as I can ascertain this pamphlet is not the work of 
the Prince Mirzé Kamran, because at the age of 17, Rafi‘ 
Shirazi could not have been such a scholar that Prince Kamran 
would write about him thus:— ly oS Gspelo wryip “He 
(the Mirza) must consider him the best of his contemporaries.’’ ! 

_ However there is no doubt about the pamphlet belonging 
to the eleventh century Hijra. 

e word Mirza is a short form of Amir Zadah. Mirza 
was used in ancient times for kings and princes only. The 
Timuride sovereigns from Tamerlane down to Babur are called 
Mirza, Babur is the first sovereign of the dynasty who gave up 
the title of Mirza, and used the title of Badshah. We find the 
following statement in the Ma’ asir-i-Rahimi® oypa> sVyt a5, wf 
wit lool eb (2d OSES is? Hee ty cgi pdaale “up to this time 
(913 a.H.) the descendants of Tamerlane were called M trea, but 
from 913 a.H. they were called Badshah.’’ In India this word 
began to be used for Muharrirs (clerks) from the time of Nadir 
Shah’s invasion. It is found in the Bahar-i-‘Ajam that, from 
the time Nadir Shah came and conquered India, people who 


the wise that (while travelling) through Hindustan, the abode 
of safety, in the year 14th, according to the dictates of fate, 


(He observed that), as accident would have it, a body of reck- 


1 This occurs in context, p. 5, 2 Vol. I, p. 495. 


peas J. esa eels 


Vol. IX, No. 1.] The Mirza Namah of Mirza Kamran. 3 
[NV .8.] 


Mirza is based. It being a matter of great importance, I 
thought I ought to bah a dae on this subject, which may 
become the guide of mankind, so that no one may venture to 
claim this great a re ‘eithoat deserving it. 


Verses. 


(Though) you may know much (but) speak little ; 
Do not speak one as a hundred (or do not exaggerate), 
(but rather) make one of a hundred. 


It ought to be known, that, as I have become a Mirza 
y the force of personal exertions and the practice of laudable 


good will, Though my words are mixed with wit and 
humour, yet this pamphlet will effect certain conclusions, each 
one of which may be called the guide of Plato and the he Iper 
of Avicenna. In short, if any careless and dull-headed fellow 
forms a slight opinion of my work owing to his defective intelli- 
gence, what fear has the Sun from the inattention of the bat, 
and what anxiety has the firmly-seated mountain from the 
undermining of the wild rat. 


Verses. 


A few unskilful fellows, ignorant of their own selves, 

Take delight in defects, thinking them to be merits. 

(Their self-conceit and vanity) act like smoke vo they 
reach the brain (making it cloudy and defectiv 

(And) act like the wind, if they reach the light As clear 
intellect, by extinguishing it). 


one has a fancy for becoming a Mirza, should 


If any 
‘attain to the state defined in this treatise. But eh e fails, 


why should he attempt such a hazardous idiekival, and 
er! let a large body of Lena distinctly see into his mean 
gin and vain aspirations 


Chapter I.—On the Main Rules of the Code of Mirzaship. 


It should be known, that, in the code of Mirzaship, there 
are ten main rules or principles , and several subsidiary ones. 
Among the main principles, the first is, that (an aspirant qin 
Mirzaship) should know God, because the perfection of every 
individual is shown by his knowledge of God. The second is, 
that he should acquire knowledge and virtue, with a view to 

himself from the deception (or betrayal) of es, and 
not with an aim (simply) to gain eminence. the begin- 

ning he must swiftly pass through the subject of Accidence 
and Syntax (or Grammar); and an acquaintance with these 


7 


4 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (January, 1913. 


two branches of learning must be deemed necessary by him 
so far as to enable him to be correct in his everyday conversa- 
tion and modes of writing and speaking Arabic and Persian 
words. In society he should try to guard against the shame of 
committing any mistake in conversation, for such incorrectness 


. . . - - . 


in speech is considered a great fault ina Mirza. The thi 
at the age of thirty (2). The fourth is, that he should possess 
a knowledge of men (and the world), because it is the best of 
all perfections ; and he must not be carried away by the words 
of every impudent fellow or deceitful person, who says that he 
has captured the genii several times, unless he sees all these 
with his own eyes, but even then there is room for suspicion; 
inasmuch as those who know such things are usually silent, 
while those who do not know pretend to such powers in order 
to deceive the simple. The fifth is, that he should not engage 
himself in a literary controversy with a student fresh from the 
nook of the college, who will destroy the tranquillity of his 


fit) companions (for him). The seventh is, that he must 
know the Arabic, Persian, Hindustani and Turkish languages. 


But he should know the other questions of philosophy, but 
only to an extent that he may be able to say “ I know.’” 


with those ten. If they have named him Mirza Jalal al-Din 
Yusuf, he must not encumber himself with all this, but shorten- 
ing it style himself Mirza Yisuf. When purchasing a thing 
wanted by him, he should not make any difficulty about 


1 Died 690 a.n. 


Vol. IX, No. 1.] The Mirza Namah of Mirza Kamran. 5 
[N.S.] 


the price, and ought not buy like traders. Ruby should be 
regarded by him as the best among all jewels, and the palan- 
quin as the best of all conveyances. He should like a water- 
melon as the best of all fruits. If he wishes to keep his head 
and hands entire or unbroken, let him not accompany an army 
through Kashmere. Rice boiled with spices should be preferred 
by him above all other eatables. He should keep pure love on 
a high arch, and if possible, he should have no connection with 


it at. al e should not follow a beautiful person whose 
demeanour displays tokens of wickedness, and he must not 
make ch use of tobacco. As | as he is in India t 


the best of his power he should try to keep himself safe from 
the attack of diseases, so that he may not have the need to see 
the face of the court physician. If heis introduced to a family, 


paying is ee he may continue to frequent the place, 
otherwise he should not trouble himself for nothing, and incur 
dishonour, because respect, once lost, is hardly to be regained. 
He should regard Lahore as the best of the townsin India. He 
should recognize the fort of Agra as unequalled in the whole 
world. If there be no controversy or dispute on that point, 
then he must think /sfahan as the best town in Persia. Ina 
multitude he must always be on the alert from attacks of 
swords kept under the garment. He must have funds enough 
to supply him with twenty rupees for the expenses of palan- 
uin and a door-keeper. He must not hire a room in any inn 
for it is beggarly todo so. He must value life and should not 
go near war. If he happens to be in a battle-field he must keep 
out of the reach of musket-balls. If victory takes place, he 
must not pursue the defeated and flying army; on the con- 
trary if his party suffer a defeat, he must run away as fast as 
The compositions of a Mirza should be full of expres- 
sion, and in a short compass of words should convey a number 
of ideas and meanings. If they are not so, what is then the 
difference (between a Mirza and others). Wherever he ma 
see (or meet) the narcissus, the violet and the orange, he 
should take all three. He must know the bad people, but 
should not call them bad for this is contrary to wisdom. He 
should know the game of dice, but must not turn a nuh 
and should not bet thousands while playing chess. He m 
not be fond of obscure verses (and spend his time in tryi oh 
understand them), because this precious life should not be thus 
wasted away. He must not follow a companion who is a fast 
rider, and should let him go wherever he likes. If a friend of 
the Mirza ‘ask what his salary is, he may tell the man if he is 
sure that the latter will not be appointed in his place ; other- 
wise he should run away from him to a distance of about 


6 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [J anuary, 19133. 


twenty kuruh,' i.e. forty miles. If a Mirza happens to sit at 
the same table with a Mufti (or lawyer), he should not take 
anything, and in case he dies of hunger (by so doing) he shall 
have a great reward in next life. Ifa Mirza has beauty and 
good voice, he may without inconvenience recite a verse or 
two before his companions; but if he sings regularly at some 


d 
if the Mirza happens to get the better of him, he should com- 
pletely defeat him, but if it be otherwise, then he must make up 
with his adversary. If a Mirza happens to be in company 
with some persons of eminence, and if the topic of conversation 
refers to one’s income and ability, he should try to get the 
topic changed; if not, he should leave the house to its owner 
and run away as fast as his feet can carry him, and must not 
look back at all. The Mirza should visit Egypt because it is 
worth seeing. If he wants to settle in a place, let him take up 
his abode in Syria where nice bread, cheese, and sweet melons 


honour of anyone. He must not joke with every good-for- 
nothing fellow, nor allow all people to eut jokes at him. He 
should meet his friends occasionally, and when seen once, he 
must not go to them again that very day, because this will 
cause a recurrence (of the visit). With a monthly salary of 
Rs. 109 let him allot Rs. 10 for the belt and embroidered badge. 
And if these are supplied by his master he must not sell them. 
If he spends Rs. 50 for a fur, it will not be prodigality. He 
must not speak while people are playing draughts. He should 
not bring courtesans to other people’s house, especially if the 
eee a 
1 Kurth is a road-measure of about two miles. 

? One of the sect cf the shitahs or followers of Hadrat ‘All. 

8 ind of garment. 


eR a eS ee ee ee a 


Vol. IX, No. 1.] The Mirza Namah of Mirza Kamran. 7 
[N.S.] 


master of the house happen to be richer than he. If dirt 
happen to be on his auspicious face, he must wash it out with 
salt and vinegar; and he should not rely upon anyone except 
a worthy darvish. In reciting a he should not omit the 
first line of a poem, evenif it be simple. Ifa man recite the 
first line off a couplet, the Mirza wat not read out the second 
line. In India if he secures a house, he must not be in search 
of mere architectural beauty, but must pay due consideration 
to its stability lest he may not suffer an untimely death in the 
rainy season. In a bath he must not allow the body of a sick 
barber to touch his body, but he should be civil to his son. 
He may pour from the store a small quantity of water on his 
head, if he has bathed in a narrow reservoir used by several 
persons. If he wants to avoid insults, he must drive out from 
his head the weakness of sitting in a prominent place. In 
India he should not expect intelligence and good ee 
from those who put big turbans on their heads. If he doe 
not want to undergo insult and disrespect, he must not mee 
tain expectations from familiar pa Sway with people, say- 
in I am going to see such and such a rich man; he will 
give me a thousand rupees and Sacto many presents.” In 
India do not make the taking of Paludah' and Firnt® grow 
into a habit, for this brings in idleness and loss of spirit. 
With the rank of a centurion (Mansab-i- Sadi), the Mirza must 
not cause the cover of his hubble-bubble to be made of silver 
and put silver on the reins of his horse, because they would 
not remain with him. If he is riding with a superior officer, 
he must keep a step or two behind him; but on reaching a 
bridge he must lead the way, and return to his old place when 
the bridge is passed in safety. In times of misfortune he must 
not take anything i in a brass pot if its edges are engraved, for 
dust remains there and is not removed even by washing. If 
get he should not open his mouth at the door of the inn 
Sambal Khan, for there are many absurd reasoners. -He 
sek keep himself aloof from a few things, if he wants to render 
himself free from trouble. If any one begins a long story, he 
should not attend it, because it is styled t the prison-house of 
intercourse ; he must in no case discuss anything with those 
who are addicted to discussion, because this is a plague of 


tion is the book, called Kaiilah wa Damnah.’ In an assembly 
where fect} Bore: have been invited, the Mirza must not go 


1 A kind of sweet Seiauia made of water, flour, sugar, etc. 
; = kind of sweet dish prepared by flour, milk and sugar 
very famous work of ne tales, tra nstated into Arabic by 
‘Abdulls bin al-Muqaffa‘, died a.p 


8 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (January, 1913. 


first, because if he does so, he shall have to do respect to many 
people, and this case is called char mawja-i-tkhtilat (four-sided 
waves of intimacy, i.e. a case productive of troubles). How- 
ever if any one has a fancy to become a Mirza let him consult 
this treatise first. 


pomyl yoy! al) pa 
a5 yen 


ru 


wl yo lyre 

Riyeh H st wld aS cele ty gtd olay urbe y den 
rame pda phe sho dye y cubs | 299 = Githee wliglave 
Ui in 50 25 ales yin pine Oh) y)~ plny aif, sale allighe yabune 
Re glas acne presi yaw 5! O81 liwgaia boy! No yd oRUt comm 
3S gee Sa es slay p22Y Ribbit ty cee REO oy! 
rer? Hine cma) I dod BEBO Cope IS Socld 3} Lo whszeie 
ee wil a eda It on pot crt Glasi~| I) BOS. yom - ditd]on0 
Ue, aS ore) bly - gy% ait, sire e195 eyes 59 oy gid y Nai 
15-9) Dat Usut yyiws as Caont pth yot pot ost a rddyd oly wl eyo 

SS teobe salbo ria oul dots Gast.) jt ep® Code - asf 
sr Sil) de she do ty go 59 S51 pity slaw ae 


yr? BOYD GIRS nny caeilsy yyis griz wr A Sauity os 


re 
D182 OA G9 yp Ase wt Oia Gulls Ler cat UST J3* 3 
a345 Pa ast wth ras Paes wind wts3 estes hiner, web dst colors, 
Byrd Estey? ee sth Gls Dybese Ch cae hy pods giles, & os» J! csr 


- hit ae bly Goby BoE AS 11) BY IS B96 5 — Igy oe 


a a NN a) i 7 i alt 


Vol. IX, No. 1.] The Mirza Namah of Mirza Kamran. 9 
[NV.S.] 

Te eS Ooh ns AS gt og jp dip he 

dw) ost ly y! Oi ga ob dbwsy pssloas s dye d9d 

Sdue ous os) we eat obs} wo yo stl ets) Iy wows 5S 
emits duly & silae alho od Esilers 02 9 PB pS 9 ty ore 9 - doy5 
ASF Jot Joel Hem 3! - obe pgs yg Cml 89 yet iio wy 59 af 
gsi lod 4} gst at st 3 sey! a lek aS owls, 1) GghoS wh us” 
whe 3 ty CyB 8ST sty? oss dans wm asf poise mt day5 us” pele 
ye ple 3! Joist yo 5 - oS ) gbic a yblay gins ow 9 - of Use 
£'a)} eres sly Sale jot ple 90 wit bey - 26 o95 psd y 

. ‘ : . ; Prd a 
‘. q we . . att ve 3 
uvtbe ti BS i Kins oo ble & silk Ey2s0 By 39) ble sJlsa 3 
ike ee ee ” 

OTT gph a8 8 oh 2358 Woe peed JL Gyoig af ough af woh y 
ast pry <i SOS csi ty wBea! 3 oaf pbb! RNAS) aT y ough dss 
& as Ryors) yb oe os a) soaJ Awe Ovo es 3! 3b pic wl b 
; 5 rere fron oe 
wae sh&l 2 Lb 8837 pics e of Paes waurk Sis) 3! bes Kye oye 
ws 8 a ips WL} AST pide — aulis | o9S Cause pe ye - ouyh 
oss IF LES , Owls rath (grie af pine - oF sh Sy 5 cs 5 
Bye 9 ists Glan ele yo aSt re! : xT etnies’ as aleil,S roe as 
BIBS Ad soko ilye jI AST pas - OBL Sigh Jere Lol oSl alts 


~ nih ity « pitane af 7% odtoy oT gohan llbe phys 


10 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (January, 1913. 


ey’ Walog de » wb 

- db abel ob 0 Sinss 9S) amo Uns 9  Ijyx0 Ble 5) Yt 

Phys Soa aes pink sd gb 5B yy Dey pnd? Cohde yb oS, 
ys20F aye to as Bld yyy - 5) 9 OF sia po Tf tino ae yb 
yee Sty - 5 Cw 49 of LA} 5) io @bF ol oy pot Ss 4 oidh 
by 3} AF OAS @dy ayy) wylae by} yo DdBL BaF Ab ty 41 dogs Qual file 
WS aside OBL If 9 ty gl auf ead D9 = iS dogs tyne 
Kecsbame corte by sly 9 - ola site egies ty eagdls g - oy aitySiggue y 
dle oul AS 5 oe DatyS St - did lOgne Cys yi ly Baye 9 - oily 
(Pe 4g = dy loslab jf & 1, glse Ly aSad y - ogy Sa) Ly pres Bly yo 
wea pale, 0861, 64 oly ews Sty aif oil Glb ty sh 
B48 99 - IG SLT Lt sty - 9955 g! Gade abl Alb 931 wt) d LT af 
Ways Qvabe Curb goa) & - oul abslsre Ley leas jf ty Spd Nty5 s* G 
Js! 3y B33 4 - loeys 'y Oech 423,00 Ko ggd LAT af ie yd = dyn Osh 
By leo 54 st pyre Ee - yd Tats, dele y) Les pygd — oyd LST af 
- of we ads 97 aF a5 ER a2) E18) ty ded 4 sly dp wl 
- Sto phle wlaald dig, ty BST aald 5 - sity ois cs! ye® 31 21) yyad 
29.9 - Ss oly olOyS Wuyi ty who oii yb 9 AUS ase Sy 
&u;,, Bit, comp Goal, ploys gsr! pies a: a 5! wy aty 
seman (gl0S aS opt sme tye yoy - Obl addiar wlysy eae 
ole ay ape SI = yy Sin Ligh alts eicuis Ih wha - a8 0 
BianSt $5) ga 51 oales Coys et Sty ~ dL ows find US as 
pM 9 - pike Woh GT o9d Bip ke gt oy = ay 8 asus 

phy - of yo! pines give BM soil 4 o2b wyhe yy af ol ostl y 
Aw 70 5! ody af loye |, Ih 2 ABE 4 nF - oli Ae OSs LI 
~ ad ere Sip AF O91 OLS) as Lol lke ty glory - sak 


PEEL AEN > A alee see 


Vol. IX, No. 1.] The Mirza Namah of Mirza Kamran. 1} 
[N.S.] 

grt dBi 5 - 339 Ih glo eizh® yo - adi 5b jL5 bel ator ty oy) ob 
Ny Sp ml BF gary yg - ot st Sey es ailei1S yee as aah gla 
SRS 9 - ogy? Mtg BF sim gp UG sfdG = ayds gh oho iS ole 
1h yee yS - Boxe, &eeo azy Ld Ki lale BF Omer y OSL hy Cg bT as 
if ByyS Same oly Che 51 9 oughs OaS coed g! Gages ty gf AF Io 
cla jf crmed Hyte ay Crtyd Lyne b gside Spt FQ ysl - 352 
dix} y sie 9 wm Iyyxe_yS! - ojo erbe Je! oyte shies Jf 5 xl « dass 
Sys sla Sy oye HIRT wipes Gepae ad Ylalac lb orb 
I pk? 9 oda y® gS 801} GPUS creel BOIS AF OS Lom ty Gl 8595 4 dull 
- Slo Fy vlyelas oy DG 1 oliyt giles! Vay cojl* ey 
ly idee gh5 9 = 216 eee gd Gb oS SN FS die En! ypirdyo ys 
OF IE gp! Ih p89 oy Bly SY GS Nhyne Kilgoys pS} - 25S nic 
dy° Die a cgwlre yd - DIF Hylove ead b aml wSeys $1 9 oi pai 
ObsyS o3y> od stonbwt y Bele oh Sy 9% y OSL aid hy? 9 je 58 
ale Hy las aif Gli alo & oSl Ail sya ay OSI hype 
pre ly 2g ~ OSS Srbdas IG 4 ogy? aslo oh wd U abmad ailerale 
Se 9 wh a& oyled Cyky alo yo d9% sgdieshes Dated SF - ayto wous a5 WF 
coliye Sawoe Sh let et lads Sty 9d days! osto wie Boyd y 
g7hdle elinegoi® yy = ues god CRUD (jadi AF oydu vist (Slolave 
dyed eeu ayb pox? b cplre yy - OGLE og Gye Gale y ome 
we dt lolye aF syly Bortiga ato a atone y - too ol os lepad 
ope BE yy lege apd (coals Ghraie GU abb aday gS) sft - ay gh 
porby GS Satle af o98) Glo Jit! SK 5o cgilige ell yo - oy% 
= 24953 mS Gugell Gray - vito pile gllOLS fa I) jledy wT Ge 
I GUUAT - 2805 at) o9dy 1) US p# Aulbe y - 016 aylbe Glnene z@ & 
4429) 89 ALal« Sdiy) Oe L - soe w* ys aS dule ty oo 9 dias 8s 52f 


12 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (January, 1913. 
ok calle uF Sarg 8) OB) role yl 9 Od Aol Kye 9 SryeS creak 
98.7 Eg jle ay US yy - com lyeel OBO?) per cred dig, slr Pie 
iis ce estla yo Lepad ays pe dla yo oy - 855 Gye 
jt OL ahs (BS lee Coys 9p Se Hy = OSL UHI Gy ala Gale 
JA 999 BG yahet Coykior 61S Cshagyo jf gat y - oupdy Kas y a5, 
eskts wh 5! af cepae = OSL ym ages! dilgay 1) elho Que Woilyd 
silos) ae BL St Bh® Nog - oStgau aS It ty ne gree ol wi 
SSH pl yo a a alld pmo» 5B) Yyty a Gripe 1) Gale 
D6 UST yd Gow fy la Gti elma yo plea yo9 - aye del ue 
DMB19 B95 abe yloens poy? a SiS &ls,s ~ WLS ees dle pire pmsl y 
“dd Habe Sty! ep! B55 3! =) ese pee} wT wary m5, » 
Paz? HOM y9 9 - 4S 59d pe HH 1p cola YL rye OES VBS oalyd 5S 
olds csilesy Oalyd St - dob aldo ) gad C393 we 5) S52 Dyado 
Anta 2% 9 Me paly> 1) Gp wF af 5905 pope LMA! py aul ob) 
srs Soply ty oak Oko 9d 9 -OyF OB1gA shams (SbSYy 4 oy O@IFa wr 
soe rato UY - oie (92 ly Seay sl2l aS lepte wole pryeo Kila 
sere U- aile dalrti Ih ne U af Seo $85 ty at clad ale Vary” 
Uo} - SOP BRAT fy Sst lhe gt englBi cls & aoe GH, 5 x1, Us 50 
pile Foely 5 yp gp cvellenn'y a3fail tay Jy a9S Ouny oo Oy yo 
MAL BAS Hy WT US AF we Gorb yp siltayy all yoy - oylei syles 
S28 ooh Sle cat oper y aintd ye gt By ye SF oy gi flab 
lSuT yo Sm é a 033 Gym odh Lsywre 5) wh dain aly Sats 
nF - OES yh af oalyd 55! abs lis ty SoS Sag Oba ity — camel Lae 
Sls css ty toe Gul a 2,5 gf Uklarve sis wpb JRL ex st 
O3tg5 (S - comet SMES well SF yin rb Som, = cols : diy 95 LMA] 


ae ee ae ee 


CF ee a ee pe ee ae Pen et eee ee ee 


Vol. IX, No. 1.] The Mirza Namah of Mirza Kamran. 13 
[N.S.] 

as gilosas su a3 Ht 9 BOAay? Sa: esle ous m0 EMAY 035 ph os 

eo)” as wine » ST Pr | wl sat oS otf oy Sk diwy 3 alls Us as 

61 aS Iys5 ~ agp oh ad ih pbog a 00U Kye OBL toll lige Jes 

1) awoke Gils o,f Sel} OL pase plot Le o9% Sto ued de 3! sey 

IH gre 59 iy Curt! eaS 1 p08) gy - Odyf EMR! Boye je 


a 
y: Se : 
epee un: 
ree 


A REPORT ON THE BIOLOGY OF THE 


LAKE OF 


TIBERIAS. 


First SERIES. 


List of Subjects dealt with in First Series. 


Introduction .. 
~ ee of the Water of 
e Lake 

Pet: Batrachia iad Rep: 
tiles 

Some oe ‘Divi 

Culicidae and Tipulidae 

Aquatic Oligochaeta. . 

Sponges 


N. Annandale, D.Sc., F.A.S8.B. 


W. A. K. Christie, B.Sc., Ph.D. 


N. Annandale D.Sec., F.A.S.B. 
E. Brunetti ae he pte: 
IF. W. Edwards, B.A. 


ee J. Stephenson, D. ie A M. 8. 


N. Annandale, D.Sc., F.A.S.B. 


Page 


2. Introduction to a Report on the Biology of the Lake 
of Tiberias. 


By N. ANNANDALE, D.Sc., F.A.S.B. 


The papers to be published in this series are the result of 
five weeks’ visit to Palestine and Syria in October and Nov- 
ember, 1912. The object of the visit was, if possible, to trace 
the genera of sponges, coelenterates and polyzoa characteristic 
of the fresh waters of India and tropical Africa northwards up 
the Jordan valley, should they prove to have a distribution in 
any way similar to that of the Jordan fishes, whose African 
affinities have long been known. Collections of other inverte- 
brates, more particularly the crustacea, worms and mollusca, 
were also to be made. For this purpose it seemed best in the 


resident European community, among whom I may mention in 
particular Herr R. Grossmann, the proprietor of the Hotel 
an ardent naturalist. I was also indebted for 
much valuable information to Dr. D. W. Torrance and the 
Rev. 8. Semple. 
I was provided with a twelve-inch dredge of the type sup- 
plied by the Marine Biological Association at Plymouth and 
with various tow-nets and hand-nets, but, although the dredge 


exit of the Jordan and thence eastwards to the village of 
Semakh: from Tiberias across the lake to Wad-es-Semakh on 
the western shore, and from the former place northwards to 
Mejdal or Magdala. The tow-net was used over this area both 
by day and by night and also at a point further north than 
any of the places hitherto mentioned, off the mouth of the 
Jordan. The fountains at Ain-et-Tineh and Tabghah were 
carefully examined and also the stream in the Wad-es-Semakh 
and the.Jordan at its entry and exit, while a more cursory 


18 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [January, 1913. 


investigation was made of the springs in the plain of Gennesa- 
ret. A few specimens were collected later in the R. Barada 
at Damascus and in the Dog River (Nahr-el-Kelb) near Beirut 
on my way to the coast, but only one day was devoted to col- 
lecting in each locality. A few blood-sucking and “ house ” flies 
were also obtained at Nazareth and at Kefr Kenna, half way 
between Nazareth and Tiberias, but no attempt was otherwise 
made to collect purely terrestrial animals. 

e Lake of Tiberias (also known as the Sea of Galilee) is 
termed in modern Arabic Bahr Tubariya.' It is a pear-shaped 
mass of water through which the Jordan flows from north to 
south, its length being about 13 miles and its greatest breadth 
about 43 miles. Tiberias, the only town that now exists on its 
shores, is situated on the west side a little south of the broadest 


_ On maps of the lake numerous streams are depicted enter- 
ing it. Most of these streams are, however, in summer either 
dry ravines or else merely the outflow of Springs that rise at a 


consist of more or less saline water and some of them are 
warm. Near Tiberias there are, on the margin of the lake, hot 


; In this and other place-names I follow the spelling of Bartholo- 
mew s most recent map of Palestine. 

> Recent surveys have not confirmed Lortet’s statement that there 
are pockets of over 250 metres deep in the neighbourhood of the mouth 
at which various species 
of molluscs occur are contradicted by my own intesiigationan See 
Lortet, Arch. Mus. d’Hist. Nat. Lyon III, pp. 104, 108 


Vol LX, No. 1.] The Biology of the Lake of Tiberias. 19 
[NV.S.] 


sulphur springs, yee have enjoyed, at any rate since the 
first century-a.D., a reputation for their curative virtues 
i 


cally the only supply to which the people of Tiberias have 
access. One artesian well sunk in the town produces a copious 
supply of water that can be drunk without ill-effect or unplea- 


¢ 
é 
o 


a 


LAKE OF TIBERIAS 


*\Tiberias- 


from another borin ng only a few hundred yards away was 
strongly impregnated with brine. 3 W. A. K. Christie has 
kindly promised to analyze ones | of water I brought back, 
and I propose | to discuss his analys A 

The climate of Tiberias is eactically Noone in character, 
the highest shade temperature recorded being 117° F.: in 
summer the shade ote sic aass's often reaches 110° F. and during 


20 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. {January, 1913. 


my visit in October it rose on several occasions to 106° F. 
The rainy season is in winter, the first heavy showers usually 
falling in October or November. 


of oleander and thorny shrubs. The banks of the streams, 
whether true streams or merely the outflow of fountains, sup- 
port a fairly dense growth of gigantic reeds and, if the water 
is fresh, permit thickets of willow, wild fig and Ricinus to 
flourish. In the pools themselves there is often a dense growth 
of Ranunculaceous water-plants. 

Later I propose to discuss in detail the effects that local 
and geological conditions have had on the fauna: at present 
it will be sufficient to call attention to one or two of its most 
outstanding features. 

As is the case with most if not all lakes the edges of which 
are covered with small stones, there is a marginal or inter- 
mediate fauna. This merges gradually into the true terrestrial 


tween the village of Semakh (which must not be con- 
fused with Wad-es-Semakh) and the exit of the Jordan there is 


a 


a es 


Pre, ee ee 


Vol. LX, No. 1.] he Biology of the Lake of Tiberias. 21 
[N.8.] 


In the short distance (not more than two hundred yards) that 
intervenes between the channel and the southern shore, although 
the water is at some points nearly as deep as the channel itself, 
the sandy clay washed down from the cliffs, which are in a 
state of steady disintegration, interferes to some extent with 
animal life, to which the organic débris deposited immediately 
opposite the village is even more detrimental. Molluscs of the 
genus Melania are fairly common in a living condition in 
the channel just west of Semakh, but only their dead shells 
are to be found in the Jordan itself immediately on its exit 
from the lake. It was in the channel also that I dredged the 
only non-operculate gastropod molluscs seen in the lake, as well 
as the only polyzoon of the genus Plumatella and three of the 
four sponges of the subfamily Potamolepidinae obtained. 

he zooplancton of the lake was not, at the time of my 
visit, abundant or conspicuous in any way. It consisted for 
the most part of minute copepods and rotifers, only a few 


species of each group being represented. ew small muddy 
pools on the shore microscopic life was abundant, but none 
of the larger entomostraca were seen pep 


hironomidae were well represented, as well as adult water- 
beetles and Rhynchota. 


any of the fountains is the blind prawn Typhlocaris galilaea, 
which is only found in one pool among the springs of Tabghah. 
Its habitat will be discussed later in a separate paper. 
ish and mollusca are certainly the most richly represented 
groups in the lake itself. The latter live to a large extent on 
the minute algae that are extremely abundant. The almost 
complete absence of non-operculate gastropod genera is a note- 
worthy feature. The higher crustacea are not well represented, 
the only common decapod being the crab Potamon potamios. 
Several species of the Amphipoda and Isopoda are, however, 
abundant round the edge. 
Except in the small muddy pools already referred to, the 
ime of my visit w 


8 ; 
under stones at the edge of the lake. Only two species of this 
group were, however, observed as adults, and even dragon-flies 


22 ~=Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (January, 1913. 


could find no representative of the group in this position, 
although at least two species were common in small streams on 
and near the shore. 

wo species of Polyzoa Phylactolaemata and five of fresh- 
water sponges were obtained. The only coelenterate I saw was 
a single specimen of the common Green Hydra (H. viridis, 
Linn.), which I found among weeds in a little limestone basin at 
Ain-et-Tineh. 


Several distinguished naturalists, among whom the names 
of Giinther, Tristram, Lortet and Locard are prominent, have 
devoted their attention to the fish! and molluscs of the Lake 
of Tiberias, and although the less conspicuous groups have 
not been so strictly investigated, the collections of Dr. Th. 
Barrois and Dr. E. Festa have provided material for two valu- 


1 Dr. E. W. G. Masterman of Jerusalem has published a very 
interesting account of the inland fisheries of Galilee including those of 
the lake, in his Studies in Galilee (Chicago: 1909). ” 

2 Only a comparatively small number of Dr. Festa’s specimens were 
actually from the Lake of Tiberias. 


Vol. IX, No. 1.] The Biology of the Lake of Tiberias. 23 
[N.S.]. 


for help in the preparation of which I have to thank a number 
of naturalists in Europe and America as well asin India. I 
have also to thank the Council of the Asiatic Society of Bengal 
for publishing the papers in separate instalments and for liberal 
treatment in other respects. 


EXPLANATION OF PLATE I. 
PHOTOGRAPHS OF THE LAKE OF TIBERIAS. 


Fig. 1. View on the western shore, looking north : to show 

the loose stones on the lower surface of which 

Ephydatia fluviatilis syriaca, : udospongilla mappa 
and Fredericella a occu 

A corner of the city-wall of "Tiberias abtens out 

into the lake. The upper margin o e pale 

streak on the wall represents the level cision by 

the water in winter. The photograph was takenin 

the middle of October, before the rainy season had 

commenced. 
. Outflow of asmall spring in the Plain of Gennesaret 
(October): to show the pebbly beach. 

Fig. 4. Outflow of the Jordan, looking towards the village 

of Semakh from the western bank of the river. 

The strip of water shown outside the actua 

exit, which is well defined by projecting spits, is 

the only known habitat of the sponge Cortispon- 

gilla barroisi (Topsent) and other endemic species. 


bo 


Fig. 


i? 

_e 
= 

i) 


3. The Composition of the Water of the Lake of 
Tiberias, 


By W. A. K. Curistiz, B.Sc., Pa.D. 


The sample of water from the Lake of Tiberias whose 
analysis is given below was collected by Dr. Annandale at 7-30 
a.m. on October 27th, 1912, a mile south of Tiberias. It was 
token at the surface from a steamer plying on the Lake. 
One true liter contains the following i inorganic constituents 
in grams, the results being expressed in the ionic form 


Na 0°12] 
Mg 0°023 
Ca 0°049 
Cl 0-239 
So, 0016 
Co, 0:075 
SiO, 0-013 


TotaL .. 0°536 
Its err is 536 parts per million, its specific gravity 


100043 (5 :) or 0°99775 (= in vacuo J. 


24° 


The amount of water peat for analysis was unfortu- 
nately insufficient for an exact or detailed examination, and 


rom perfect analytically, and though the composition of the lake 
water will undoubtedly vary with the locality of the sampling 
place and the time of year, the figures are sufficiently accurate 
to show how remarkably the water of the Lake of Tiberias 
differs from that of other lakes with an outflowing stream, and 
from that of rivers, with which the water from lakes with an 
outlet has of course many similarities. The prevailing charac- 
teristics of analyses of ordinary lake and river waters are a high 
percentage of carbonate and of calcium, and a low percentage 
of chloride and alkalies. Here we have the reverse. The compo- 
sition of this water resembles that of no other river or lake 
with an outflow of which I have found data, with the excep- 
tion of some ofsthe rivers flowing from arid saline regions in the 
middle of the United States, and of the Jordan itself. On the 


; ! Published with the permission of the Director, Geological Survey 
of India 


26 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. {January, 1913. 


other hand, the composition of we soluble constituents resem- 
bles that of the reservoirs of many enclosed basins—where 
chlorides predominate over oasoniine and alkalies over 
calcium ; and though its salinity is much less than is generally 
the case with waters which accumulate in areas of internal 
drainage, it is still considerably greater than that of the average 
lake with an outflow. The water of the Caspian Sea may be 
taken as an example for comparison. A is the mean of five 
analyses by C. Schmidt ! of water solinobad: off Baku, B is one 
by H. Rose* of water collected 80 kilometers 8.-W. of the outer- 
~ most delta island of the Volga, and C is the above analysis of 
Tiberias water, all calculated to the same percentage form. 


A. B. C. 


— Caspi | Caspian ‘Tiberias. 
'(Schmidt).| (Rose). 


Na 24-70 
54 || 93-6 22:6 
Rb 02 | 
Me [Ns OR 3-9 43 
Cs 2-29, 9-5 91 
42-04 
sg ae i 34:5 44:6 
SO, 23:99 | 195 3-0 
Co. ‘37 9-0 140 
SiO 03 ae 2°4 
a6 10000 =: 100°0——=s—«*2100°0 
Salinity (parts per million) 12940 | = 1820 _~| 536 


The satiteat in the southern part of the Caspian is much 
greater than that of the Sea of Galilee, and even in the north, 
where the water is diluted by the Volga and the Ural, it is 24 
times asigreat, but with the exception of the replacement of 
carbonates by sulphates the analyses resemble one another 
reasonably close 

The immediate reason for the peculiar composition of the 
water of the Lake of Tiberias is not far to seek, if the water 
from the springs at Tiberias is at all representative of many of 
its other sources of supply. An analysis of the water from one 

Bull. Ac. Se. St. Peter z 
lated by F. W. Clarke, Bull. U8 Ged 3 I Surv wi91, 091), p15 
Poggendorff’s Annalen, 395, (1835), p 


q 


DT Renee Se ras, ee | RE ee Te 


Vol. IX, No. 1.] The Water of the Lake of Tiberias, 27 
[N.S.] 


of these springs, Birket el Ezair, is given by M. Blankenhorn.! 
The sample was taken in i 
Reduced to the percentage ionic form, the results are— 
NGS eee Ie 
Ge. kee 
Ol. Er % 
SO ees 


CO; SBS Y 
SiO; 22 P12°%, 
100-00 


The salinity is 3544 parts per million. Another analysis is 
given by Blankenhorn (loc. cit., p. 344) of water from the 
octagonal pool described below or from the stream stated to 
flow out of it. Recalculated to the same form, it is— 


Na 30°7 % 

a 8-1 9, 

Cl 473%, 

CO. ie}, 

SiO rs % 
100-0 


The salinity is 1350 parts per million. This pool is the 
only known locality of the blind prawn Typhlocaris and a sample 
for analysis was therefore collected by Dr. Annandale on October 
28rd, 1912. His description of the place is as follows :-— 

‘* The octagonal pool in which 7'yphlocaris occurs is situated 
about 200 yards in a direct line from the edge of the Lake of 
Tiberias, in a little plain containing other springs of varying 
salinity and temperature; it is probably the largest pool in 
the immediate neighbourhood of the lake. The circumference (if 
the eight sides be equal, as is apparently the case) is 58 metres, 
and the greatest depth of water is stated to be in spring about 
3 metres; in October it was 6 to 10 cm. less. The local name 
of the pool is Birket ’Ali edh Dhaher, ’Ali edh Dhaher having 
been a local robber-chief of the eighteenth century, who is said to 
have repaired many buildings in the neighbourhood of Tiberias. 
A description of the pool is given in vol. I of the Memoirs of the 
Survey of Western Palestine, another in the unabridged editions 
of Thomson’s Land and the Book, and a third in Masterman’s 
Studies in Galilee. The water is entirely enclosed in walls that 
are clearly of two different dates, the lower part being of large 
well-dressed stones, and the upper of much smaller and more 
irregular stones covered with plaster, of which remains still exist. 


1 ** Wissenschaftliche Studien am Toten Meer und im Jordantal,’: 
p. 344. Berlin, 1912. 


28 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. {January, 1913. 


The lower part may be Roman, as I am inclined to believe; 
but some authors regard it as good mediaeval Arabic work. 
The name of the place is et-Tabgha, which recent authorities 
believe to be a corruption of the Greek Heptapegon (‘‘ seven 


pool to work a water-mill or water mills in a totally different direc- 
tion from that of the existing water-course. There is, indeed, 
evidence that the distance to which this water was conducted 
was different at different periods. I believe that now, whatever 
may have once been the case, there is no connection between 
the pool and the lake. In October, 1912 the whole surface was 
overgrown with floating grasses of great size. 

At 11 a.m. on October 22nd, the air-temperature imme- 
diately above the surface of the water in the pool being 30°C., 
the water itself at the surface had a temperature of 27°C. At 
the same time that of the existing mill-race, at the point at 
which it issued from the ground, was 25°C., all being in the 
shade. Bubbles of gas were observed ascending almost con- 
tinuously from the bottom of the pool at this time, but no 
smell could be detected.’’ 


The specific gravity of the water is 1:00295 (55) or 


24°. 
1-00026 pu vacuo ), the salinity 3710 parts per million. 
One true liter contains, in grams, : 
Na 901 
K ‘0576 
Mg 0874 
Ca “3538 
1 2-074 
so, ‘0251 
0248 
Co. ye: 
S10 ‘0260 
Total: } 7907 


The percentage composition of the inorganic matter in 
solution is given below 


Vol. IX, No. 1.]| The Water of the Lake of Tiberias. 29 
[N.8.] 


Na... 24°21. 

| EE Ean 

Mg 2°35 % 

Ca 9°51 % 

Cl 55°74 9, 

SO, 07 2, 

8 167% 

CO; 4°60 % 

SiO, .. ak 

100-00 

ough the assumption of the presence of definite salts in 
such a solution is purely arbitrary, it ma ointed out as 


than the European balneologist considers necessary for the 
designation ‘‘ sulphur spring.’’ In composition and salinity this 

water resembles that represented by M. Blankenhorn’s analysis 
of Birket el Ezair water much more closely than it does the 
sample collected ws him on the same day from the Birket Ali 

h Dhaher or, as he calls it, el-Hasil. The similarity of all 
three analyses with that of the lake water is sufficiently 
obvious. 

The strata from which these springs take their rise must 
be very saline in character, and it may weil be that they repre- 
sent the leachings of the d deposits of the inland sea which, 
according to E, Hull,! filled the present Jordan Valley in Plio- 
cene times. 


** Geology and i Gecechy of coe « Petraca, P Palestine and adjoin- 
ing Districts, »” p. 79 et seg., London, 


ity 


ies 


fs 


Fos 


ea 


4. Notes on the Fishes, Batrachia and Reptiles of the 
Lake of Tiberias. 


By N. Annanpag, D.Sc., F.A.S.B. 
(Published by permission of the Trustees of the Indian Museum.) 


was not part of the plan of my visit to Palestine to 
collect vertebrates of any kind and only a few specimens were 
obtained incidentally ; but it will be convenient to commence 
this series by considering the aquatic vertebrates of the lake, 
although the papers will be devoted mainly to the inverte- 
brates, about which there will be more that is strictly original 
to be said. 

I. FISHES. 


(a) AN ANALYSIS OF THE FisH-FaunNa. 


The following list is compiled for the most part from well- 
known works, among which I may mention in particular Gin- 


enger’s The Fishes of the Nile (1907) and Catalon of the Fresh- 
water Fishes of Africa (1909-10).!_ The two last works in par- 
ticular have been of the greatest use in settling the somewhat 
complicated synonomy of genera and species, although they 
refer only to African fish. I have added to this compilation a 
few notes on species actually observed and have analyzed the 
pccareunion! distribution of the fish in some detail, leaving all 
discussion of origins for a later paper. 


List oF THE FIsH OF THE LAKE OF Li AND THE 
NEIGHBOURING Fountain 


Fam. BLENNIDAE. . V. socialis (Hckl.) 


hoe 
Se) 
o~ 
s 
ee 
~ 
& 
vs) 
° 
5 
2 
ao) 


6 
8. Barbus canis, C. & 
9. 


Fam. CyPpRINIDAE. 


. Discognathus lamta rufus, 10. B. longiceps, C. & V. 
Hekl. 


11. Leuciscus zaregi, Hckl. 

12. Alburnus sellal, Hckl. 

13. Nemachilus galilaeus, 
Gthr. 


i) 


Varicorhinus damascinus 


~ 


(C. 
& Vi. syriacus (Gthr.) 


1 Owing to the sakage that takes place it in » the distribution of cette 
oes ig periodicals, Dr. Pe sllegrin’s account of the fish collected in Syria 
y M. a8 au de Kerville is not yet faaek, 1913) eeaitatae for reference 

ie Y Caloute 


32. ~— Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, (January, 1913. 


Fam. CypRINIDAE (continued). 


14. N. leontinae, Lort. Fam. CICHLIDA 
Wows Hi paciee 19. Hemichromis sacra, .. Gthr. 
15. Clarias lazera (C. & V.) 2. oa mag dalenae 
Fam. CYPRINODONTIDAE. 21. Tilapia zillit (Gervais). 
16. Cyprinodon richardsoni, 22. 7. nilotica (Hsslqt.) 
Blgr 23. T. galilaea (Artedi) 
4d...C. sophiae, Hekl. 24. 7’. simonis (Gthr. 
18. C. mento, Hckl. 25. T’. flavi-josephi (Lort.) 
The twenty-five species in the foregoing list can be sepa- 
rated into four Boorse mon! categories as follows :—I. “ Pales- 
tinian’’ species, that is to say species that do not occur east, 


wie jor south of Palestine or north of Asia Minor: IT. “ Afri- 
species, an neither i in Europe nor east or north of Syria 
in Anil: TIT. * Asiatic ’ x ir found in Mesopotamia or 


ranean: IV. i editatanane * species that occur in European 
streams entering the Mediterranean but have not been found 
east or south of Palestine. The various species may be tabu- 
lated as follows :— 


I. PALESTINIAN SPEcIEs. 


Fam. CyPRINIDAE. Fam. CYPRINODONTIDAE. 
Varicorhinus socialis. Cyprinodon richardsoni. 
V. damascinus 
Barbus canis. Fam. CICHLIDAE. 
B. beddomei. Hemichromis sacra. 
B. longiceps. Paratilapia magdalenae 
Leuciscus zareyi Tilapia simonis. 
Nemachilus tae T’. flavi-josephi. 
N. leontina 

II. Arrican Spectzs. 

Fam. CICHLIDAE. Fam. Smuripar. 
Tilapia zillit. Clarias lazera. 
T. nilotica 
T. galilaea 


III. Astatic Sprotss. 


Fam. CyPRINIDAE. Fam. one 
Discognathus lamta. de lg sophiae 
Varicorhinus syriacus. . OC. m 


IV. MEDITERRANEAN Spxciss. 
Fam. BLENNIIDAE. 
Blennius varus. Blennius lupulus. 


| 0S Se ec ehh Rann pees eo ve 


a 


ee ee ee ee 


Vol. IX, No. 1.] The Fishes, etc., of the Lake of Tiberias. 33 
[N.8.] 


A glance at these lists will show that there is a consider 
able endemic element in the fish fauna of Palestine, represented 
by no less than fourteen of the twenty-five species nown from 
the Lake of Tiberias. We may rot divide the species 
named under the first heading as follow 

(a) Species pee, known from the vee and the surrounding 
fountains :—Varicorhinus sauvagei, Barbus beddomei, 
Tpilehsons ‘zaregi, Nemachilus galilaeus, N. leontinae 

and Hemichromis sacra (6 in all). 

(b) shane only known from the Jordan system :—Va 
corhinus socialis, Barbus canis, B. longiceps, Tides 
stmonis and 7’. flavi- josephi (5 in all). 

(c) Loree’ of wider range in Syria and Palestine :—Vari 

rhinus damascinus, Maia sellal and Piiiaene: 
peiiaalonas (3 in all). 


Most of the species apparently confined to the lake are 
small, inconspicuous or exceedingly rare, _ although it is 
possible that its dépths may provide a suitable habitat for 
species which cannot exist in any other pa et of the Jordan 
system, there is no reason to regard the fish-fauna of the lake as 
distinct in any very marked manner from that of other parts 
of the system with which it is in direct communication. Onl 
a small proportion of the endemic species, however, have suc- 
ceeded in extending their range beyond the Jordan, its aftluents 
and its lakes. 

The African element in the fish-fauna of Palestine is the 
one that has hitherto attracted most attention. As will be 


as in Syria, but one (Discognathus lamta) has a much more 
extraordinary range, various races being common in all parts 
of India in which “rocky streams are present. The race that 
occurs in the Lake of Tiberias is not, however, identical with 
the typical Indian weir of the species or even with that of the 
North-West Himala 
The two Marien sar fish belong to a genus whose mem- 
bers frequent the extreme margin of streams and of the sea 


t. 

Five families of fish are represented in the Lake of 
Tiberias, the Blenniidae, the Cyprinidae, the Siluridae, the 
Cyprinodontidae and the Cichlidae. Neither the Holarctic 
Salmonidae! nor the Ephiopian Mormyridae extend into it or 


44 trout (Salmo trutta macrostigma) occurs at Smyrna but does not 

ene its way southwards into Syria, es it occurs = Teheran in 

and also in North Africa. See Boulenger, Ann N ist. 

) VIEL p. 153 (1896), and Cat. Daidicater Fishes a soe a ss p. 167, 
g. 1 909). 


34 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (January, 1913. 


into any part of the Jordan system, and all the families that 
do occur have a wide range in different geographical regions: 
except the versatile Siluridae and Blenniidae, they are essen- 
tially freshwater fish. The Cyprinidae are found all over the 
world except in South America and Australasia ; the Cyprino- 
dontidae are common in ull warm and tropical parts of both 


Hemispheres, except in Australasia and the east of Asia. One 
genus (Htroplus) is found in India and Ceylon. The Siluridae 
include many freshwater species in their ranks, and some of the 
blennies frequent brackish, a few fresh water. The Galilean 
species are among these few, in Europe as well as in Palestine. 
There is, therefore, no marine element in the fish-fauna of the 
Lake of Tiberias, unless Blennius lupulus and B. varus be 


regarded as‘comparatively recent immigrants from the Medi- 


terranean Sea, a view that has little evidence to support it. 

re is no endemic genus of. fish in the Jordan system. 
Perhaps the most interesting genera that have been found in 
this system are those that belong to the family Cichlidae, 


=~ 


sacra) is quite distinct from the Nilotic one. In the opinion of 


gascar as well as in continental Africa. Chromis is essentially 
a tropical African genus, occurring on both sides of the con- 
tinent and making its way down the Nile and up its various 


Introduction to the Siudy of Fishes, p- 229 (1880). Mr. Bou- 
peci: ere ¢ Hemichromis 


toire naturelle d. 


e Lyon 
2 Pishes of the 


Nile, p. 460. 


Fin ae eee aL m ee 


Vol. IX, No. 1.] The Fishes, etc., of the Lake of Tiberias. 35 
[N.8.] 


(Clarias) includes a large number of African species, many 
but not all of which are tropical, and is also represented, 


soni is found as far south as Sind, occurring also in north- 
eastern Africa and south-western Asia The other two Syrian 


t 
known from Persia, but in Peninsular India the genus is re- 
placed by Haplochilus and Panchax. Some authors! separate 
the African and Asiatic species under the name Lebias from 
Cyprinodon s.s., which they retain for American forms: but 
there is little justification for this course. 


(6) NoTEs ON SPECIES OBSERVED. 


The following are a few notes on species actually examined. 
Tam much indebted to the assistance of Mr. B. L. Chaudhuri 
in their preparation. 


Blennius varus, Risso. 


This little fish is extremely common at the very edge of 
the lake, where it hides among small stones the upper surface 
of which is frequently dry. On two occasions (in October) I 
found what I take to be its eggs. They were deposited in a 
flat’ mass, sometimes one egg and sometimes several eggs deep, 
on the lower surface of a stone, and on each occasion an adult 
blenny was observed apparently on guard just outside the 


! See Gorman, Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool. Harvard XIX, 29 (1895). 


36 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. {January, 1913. 


cavity formed by the stone and the bottom. Unfortunately I 
was unable to catch either of these fish. One lot of eggs was 
seen off the mouth of the stream of the Wad-es-Semakh, the 
other just off the exit of the Jordan. In each case the water 
was less than two feet deep. 


Discognathus lamta (Ham. Buch.) 


Race rujus Heckel. 


careful comparison of specimens from northern Bengal (fig. 2 

(as the Province was formerly constituted) and my Syrian exam- 
ples (fig. 3) brings out the following differences :— 

(1) In the Bengal form the anterior barbel is distinctly 

longer than the posterior, while in the Syrian race 

the posterior barbel is usually the longer of the 


two. 
(2) In the Bengal form the sucker formed by the lower or 
posterior lip is almost semicircular, while in the 
rian race it is subtriangular. 
(3) In the Bengal form the anterior lip is broader and the 
mouth situated further back than in the Syrian 
race. 


(5) The ventral profile in the Bengal form is almost 
Straight, while in the Syrian one it is distinctly 
sinuous, becoming markedly concave between the 
pectoral and the pelvic fins. 


As Mr. Boulenger points out, the Asiatic species of Discogna- 
thus are in need of revision. At least four races occur in the 


northern Assam, and an undescribed form from Manipur. 
The common Assam form! is distinguished from the others by 
the small size of its eye and by the fact that the barbels are 
practically equal. The snout of the male is constricted in 


: Platcara nasuta, 5 Tees 
Discognathus modestus is perh aps the female. Geuta, of which Day 


~ + 


San ag eT ae ee 


On eR a ee ——ee 


ili je i eal el 


Vol. IX, No. 1.] The Fishes, etc., of the Lake of Tiberias. 37 
[NV .S.] 


front of the eyes. In the W. Himalayan race the snout of the 


specimens. In the typical form from Bengal no such appendage 
is produced and the snout is not strongly constricted, although 


ation. 
Giinther’s D. macrochir, also from Assam, probably represents 
a fifth race; in it the belly is bare as far back as the base of 
the pelvic fins and the pectoral fins are greatly elongated. The 


Fie. 1.—Discognathus lamta (H. B.), Fic. 2.—Discognathus lamta rufus, 
forma typica from Chota Nagpur. Heckel, from Tabghah, Galilee. 


race that occurs near Aden is apparently very like if not iden- 
tical with that of the W. Himalayas. 

The typical form of D. lamta is a dweller in rapid-running 
streams, in which its labial sucker is of great use in enabling it 
to adhere firmly to the bottom or sides. In the fountains 
round the Lake of Tiberias, however, the race rufus lives for 
the most part in still water. If a man puts his bare feet 
into the water the fish frequently clings to them by means 
of the sucker and apparently attempts to suck or nibble 
at the skin. Owing to the fact that the mouth is ventral, 


Tabghah numbers of individuals attacked the bones of chickens 
and pigeons that were thrown into the water fastened to 


38 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (January, 1913, 


strings, often turning over in order to nibble at them. A 
dead fish of their own species was thrown in in two pieces. 
At first they left it alone, but after about half an hour attacked 
and devoured it. They appeared to be unable to carry off any 
but the smallest particles bodily. 

As has already been pointed out D. lamta includes several 
local races in India, Assam and Burma and also occurs in 
southern Arabia. The form common in Mesopotamia, and also 

in the Helmand basin, is not D. lamta but D variabilis, Heckel, 
a very distinct species as species go in the genus. D. variabilis 
is also found in Syrian rivers. e form from Abyssinia 
referred by Blanford ! to D. lamta has been separated therefrom 
by Boulenger® under the name D. blanjo: ig It would seem 
probable that a race or races of D.lamta occur in central 
Arabia, but the ichthyology of that aay is still unknown 
and all that we can say is that one race is found in Syria and 
Palestine, another, probably identical with one from north- 


Fie. 3.—Young of Hemichromis sacer (nat. size). 
western India, near Aden, and others in Bengal, Assam and 
Burma. § 


Hemichromis sacer, Giinther. 


A young individual (fig. 4) of this species was taken in one 
of the limestone pools at Ain-et-Tineh. As this species is said 
- breed in ae my specimen was probably about four 

onths old. It measures 53 mm. in total length and is 
restos deeper thea the adult fish. The snout is also 
less prominent. The colour is silvery grey and there are nine 
or ten vertical dark bars on each side of the body. Those on 
the caudal peduncle-are somewhat indistinct. The fin-mem- 
branes are greyish, faintly marbled with white on the dorsal 
fin. There is a black spot on each operculum. 
nly other fish of which I obtained specimens were 
Clarias lazera, Cyprinodon richardsoni, C. mento, C. ne e, 


! \ Geob Zool, Abyssin., p. p. 460 ( 
(ii), 


eee s 
2 Zool. Soc. 1901 P- 160; 1903 Wi sal. Di wwe, 
Cat. Freshvate Fishes of Africa I, p. 349. aS bee A 1909 a 3 


> Tristram, hers Flor, Palest., p.168. Lortet, A Mus d’ Hist. 
Nat. ae TIL p. 149. . reh. r 


ee ot a ee 


Vol. IX, No. 1.] The Fishes, ete., of the Lake of Tiberias. 39 
[WV.S.] 


—— zillia and 7. is re three Cyprinodonts are 

nh among water-weeds i e Jordan both at its entry 
fata pin its exit from the lake eat also in the pools at Ain-et- 
Tineh. I did not see them in the lake itself. Together with 
them, in each locality, — of the little Atyid prawn 
Atyaéphyra desmarestii were take 


II. BATRACHIA AND REPTILES. 


The following notes are based on a few specimens taken 
incidentally and on a collection generously  eegaing to the 
Indian Museum by Herr R. Grossman of Tiberia 


(a2) AQuaTIC SPECIES. 


he list of aquatic or rather amphibious reptiles and 
batrachia that inhabit the shores of the Lake of Tiberias is a 
short one, and I Rave no species to add. It comprises only the 
following names 


Rana ees ridibunda, Pallas. 


lemmys caspica rivulata, Valenc. 
Emys orbicularis (Linn.). 


With one exception (that of the tree-frog), these forms 
occur in south-eastern Europe; while two of them have also a 
wide distribution in western and central Asia—Rana esculenta 


the g o 
through Persia, ‘ASichasiiagal and central Asia: that of the latter 
is even more extensive, including Kashmir and north-western 
India. Hyla arborea savignyi is common throughout Asia 
Minor and Syria and has also been found in Egypt ; “the species 
of which it is a race has, like Rana esculenta, a habitat only 


northern Palestine, being replaced in Persia by the typical 
form of the species. mys orbicularis is oe hee in southern 


ante does not occur in Egypt or in Asia south of Pale 

Of the two African amphibious reptiles (Crocodilus ‘niloti- 
cus, Laur., and Trionyx triunguis ,Forsk.) that occur in Palestine 
proper and i in Syria, neither has been reported to exist in the 
Lake of Tiberias, and I could obtain no evidence of their. 
occurrence, aidiodeh the mud-turtle has been found as far north 


40 Journal of the Asiutic Society of Bengal. (January, 1913. 


system 
1. Rana esculenta ridibunda, Pallas. 


Boulenger, P.Z.S. 1891, pp. 375, 376, 377. 

This race of the edible frog is very common in the small 
fountains round the lake, and I also found it occasionally under 
stones at the edge of the lake itself. Mr. Boulenger tells me 
that he has examined specimens of very large size from this 
neighbourhood. 


2. Hyla arborea savignyi, Aud. 


Boulenger, Cat Batr. Sal. Brit. Mus., p. 380. 

found a small specimen sitting dead but apparently unin- 
jured on a stone at the edge of the lake, and at N azareth, I saw 
many adults clinging to the walls of a large cistern lined with 
cement. In about half of them the dorsal surface was uniform 
leaf-green ; in some it was pale clay-colour and in others of a 


udouin ; in none is there any trace of a line onthe groin. The 
colour-characters on which the racial distinction of the form is 
based seem, therefore, to be constant. 


3. Bufo viridis, Laur. 
Boulenger, op. cit., p. 297. 
is toad is common at Tiberias b 


: ut not often seen as it is 
strictly nocturnal in its habits. 


4. Clemmys caspica rivulata, Valenc. 


small pools and springs 
bask in the sun at the edge, 
ed and immediately dive and 
he bottom. Probably the older 
f, but they are seldom seen. I 
watched a half-grown individual eating grape-skins that had 
been thrown into a pool at Ain-et-Tineh, 


| Boéttger, Ber. Senck. Ges. 1880, p. 208. 


Vol. IX, No. 1.] The Fishes, etc., of the Lake of Tiberias. 41 
[V.8.] 


5. hy orbicularis (Linn.) 


Bauett. op. cit., p. 
e European aren is said to reach a great size 
in the lake, but I did not obtain specimens. 


(6) TERRESTRIAL REPTILES. 


e smal collection : terrestrial reptiles brought back 
comprises the following species :— 


H emidactylus turcicus ie ) 
yphlops simoni a r. 

Eryx jaculus (Linn.) 

Vipera libetina xanthina (Gray). 
Except the Typhlops, these are all common species in Galilee. 

tmont is, however, a ently scarce. It was originally 
described from Haifa on the coast of Palestine by Béttger as 
Oe stmont ,! ite most remarkable feature being the 

compression and production forwards of the rostral scale to 

form a flattened triangular snout bo cag oa edges. A speci- 
men from Tiberias given me by rrossman differs from 
Bottger’s figures (and from his and Boulenger s descriptions) in 
having the eyes visible as minute black spots. _ It has also a 
rather longer tail than the specimen figured by Bottger. I 
cannot, however, detect any other difference. 

Living specimens of J'estudo ibera, Pallas, and Chamaeleon 
vulgaris, Gray, were also observed in ee neighbourhood of 
Tiberias, as well as lizards of several ener 


| Ber. Senck. Ges. 1878-1879, 58. See also the same igre for 
ga p. 135, pl. IIT, fig. 1, and ictosigae? s Cat. Snakes, Brit. Hs 


SLL LNA NLD at a al gt A A at 


5. Some Noxious Diptera from Galilee, 


By E. Brunetti. 


The specimens noted here eg taken in Galilee by Dr. N. 
Annandale in October, 1912. separate report will be pub- 
lished on his collection of Culjaidae 


Family MUSCIDAE. 
Sub-family Musctnagz. 
Musca domestica, L. 


Several specimens of both sexes, the species common in 
houses at both Nazareth and Tiberias. One specimen is labelled 
‘‘sucking blood of horses,’’ Kefr Kenna. (This specimen 
was taken full of blood. It had evidently been sunGleg blood 
at the wound made by some other fly.—N. A.) 


Musca sp.? nov. 

and 5 9 Q represent a species that does not agree 
with such ‘descriptions of Palaearctic species as are available 
for reterence. It is rather smaller than domestica, and the 
thorax has a whitish ps appearance, with two narrow black 
stripes. The abdomen has. an ill-defined dorsal black stripe, the 
hind edges of the segments are black, and in the single ¢ the 
general colour of the abdomen is yellowish instead of dark grey. 

Common in houses, Nazareth and Tiberias. 


Philaematomyia insignis, Aust. 


Two 2 2 of rather pay size than usual, but undoubt- 
edly of this common and widely distributed species labelled 
‘* sucking blood of horse ,’’ Kefr Kenna, 12-x-12 (This was by 
far the commonest blood- sucking fly on horses and cattle.—N. A.) 


Stomoxys calcitrans, L. 


Four 2 2, including a dark variety devoid of distinct 
spots. tk houses, Nazareth and Tiberias. (Also seen com- 
monly on cattle.—N. A.) 


Lyperosia minuta, Bezzi. 


Asingle 2 , Tiberias, October. (The specimen iu caught 
biting my hand at night. What I take to be t 


44 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [J anuary, 1913, 


very troublesome, especially in the early morning and at sunset, 
on the shores of the Lake of Tiberias, easily piercing ordinary 
flannel with its proboscis. e wound is not very painful and 
does not as a rule become inflamed.—N. A.) 


Sub-family ANTHOMYINAE. 
Limnophora tonitrui, Wied. 


This is reported by Dr. Annandale as the commonest of the 
‘‘house flies’’ after Musca domestica. The specimens seem to 
form a local race as the usual broad black transverse stripe is 
broken up into three large spots, in only one instance out of 2 
3 & and 5 Q Q being entire (a 7). 

There can be no reasonable doubt as to the identity of the 
species, which is quite common in houses, greenhouses, and 
similar habitats in India. Nazareth and Tiberias. (This fly 
is just as troublesome in its habits as Musca domestica, so 
far as settling on the face and hands is concerned.—N. A.) 

N.B.—In addition to L. tonitrui there is a single specimen 
of a second species of Anthomyinae from Nazareth (‘fin house ’’) 
which I am unable to identify. 


Family HIPPOBOSCIDAE. 
Hippobosca equina, lL. 


Four specimens from Tiberias, Nazareth and (‘sucking 
blood of horses’’) Kefr Kenna. (Very common on_ horses 
and cattle.—N. A.) 


[By far the most troublesome blood-sucking flies at Tiberias 
and Nazareth in October are the so-called sand-flies of the 


Medicine, who has been kind enough to examine the adult 
specimens I collected, finds only two species (Ph. papatasi Scop. 
and Ph. minutus Rond.) among them, thus confirming the pre- 


he found the same two Species, and them only, in a large collec- 
tion from Aleppo. Phlebotomus apparently occurs at Tiberias 
amascus, in which 
ntirely disappeared before 
n Ph. minutus at Nazareth 


it is troublesome in summer, it had e 
the end of October. I did not obtai 


Vol. IX, No. 1.] Some Noxious Diptera from Galilee. 45 
[N.S8.] 


and at Tiberias it was much less common than Ph. papatasi. 
Another irritating blood-sucker common at Tiberias in October, 
though much less so than Ph. papatasi, is a minute Chiro- 
nomid of the subfamily Ceratopogoninae. Like Phlebotomus 
it is ae: in habits. 

erias is notorious even in Palestine for its fleas | Bed 
1 irritans) but in the German hotel in which I stayed I saw 
and felt none.—N. Annandale.]| 


6 NS eS oe See a 


6. Tipulidae and Culicidae from the Lake of Tiberias 
and Damascus. 


By F. W. Epwarps, B.A., F.E.S.! 


The collection = Tipulidae and Culicidae made by Dr. 
Annandale in October 1912, and forwarded to me for deter- 
mination, though far from numerous either in sta cidtials or 
species,—only three species of Tipulidae and seven of Culicidae 

eing present,—has yet proved of very considerable interest. 
Three species at least are new to science, one of them (the 


Palaearctic region. The occurrence of Conosia irrorata makes 
a notable extension of the known range of this widely spread 
species. 
TIPULIDAE. 
l. Geranomyia annandalei, sp. n. 


¢. Whole body dingy ochreous-brown ; antennae, pro- 
boscis, tips of femora, _wing-veins and knobs of halteres darker 


be 
End of first longitudinal vein turned sharply up to the costa 


long as broad, the vein arising from it — equidistant 
at their base. Great cross-vein exactly at base seal cell 
in the type, slightly before it in one paratype, slightly after 
in the other. 

Length of _— (without proboscis) 5°5 mm., of proboscis 
3 mm., of win 

Three on te Plain of Gennesaret. ‘‘ Taken on limestone 
cliff overhanging spring. Dancing in the air and then alighting 
on iis cliff and swaying up and down.’ A.) 


! Published by permission of the Trustees of the British Museum. 


48 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. |January, 1913. 


ype in the British Museum, paratype in the Indian 
Museum, Calcutta. 
e unspotted wings distinguish this species from all others 
found in the Palaearctic region, and there is no describ 
Oriental species which it resembles at all closely. 


2. % Antocha opalizans, O.S. 


One male and one female taken on lower side of stone af 
edge of stream, R. Barada, c 

These specimens may represent a species distinct from 
A. opalizans, as the wings are blackish-grey instead of milk- 
white; they are however immature, and so hardly fit to 
describe. In general colour and in the structure of the genitalia 
they closely resemble British specimens of A. opalizans. 


3. Conosia irrorata (Wied.) 
Aus. Zweif. Ins. I, p. 574 (1828). 
One male, Wad-es-Semakh, L. Tiberias, ‘‘ taken among 
— at the edge of small stream flowing into the lake” 
(N. A.). 


CULICIDAE. 
_ 4 Anopheles palestinensis (Theo.) 
hay ee palestinensis, Theo., Mon. Cul., iii, p. 7! 
Pyretophorus nursei, Theo., Mon. Cul., iv, p. 66 (1907). 


Pyretophorus cardamitisi, Newst. and Cart., Ann. Trop. 
Med., iv, p. 379 (1910). 


5. Anopheles culicifacies, Giles, 


Anopheles culicifarcies, Giles, Ent. Mo. M ) 
; : ; ‘ ., p. 197 (1901). 
Pyretophorus sergentii, Theo, } ied 
ace ee ee eo., Mon. Cul., iv, p. 68 (1907). 
These specimens differ from 
having about five distinct pale 
of only two, but otherwise 


the typical Indian form in 
spots on the wing-fringe instea 
they are perfectly normal. A 


Vol. IX, No. 1.] Diptera of the Lake of Tiberias. 49 
[NV.8.] 


similar variation occurs in the closely allied Ethiopian species, 
A. funestus. 

The collector has made the following note on this species. 
‘* Between October 2nd. and October 20th. I saw only one 
Anopheline mosquito at Tiberias. On October 16th the first 
rain of the season fell and on the morning of the 20th. I 
noticed numerous Anophelines of both sexes flying into my 
room through the window. The same species continued to be 
common in ‘the tise vantil I left Tiberias on October 27th, I 
found the larvae in small pools and springs among stones at 
the edge of the lake. Some of the springs were slightly 
saline.’” The single larva sent was too denuded to be of any 


6. Stegomyia fasciata, F., Syst. Ant., p. 13 (1805). 
Tiberias, 22. ‘‘ Not uncommon (N. A.).’’ 


7. Culex modestus, Fic., Boll. Soc. Ent. It., xxi, p. 93 
(1890). 
One female under stones, edge of L. Tiberias. 
Determined by comparison with specimens sent from Hun- 
gary by Dr. Kertesz. There are very small pale a ep lateral 
spots on the abdominal segments. 


8. Culex pipiens, L., Syst. Nat. Ed., x, p. 602 (1758). 
Nazareth, in house, 12 ; Tiberias, 2 2 ; Plain of 
Gennesaret, 1 3. 

I have mounted a hypopygium of the male specimen, 
and find it to correspond exactly with typical C. pipiens from 
North Europe. It may be mentioned in passing that Dyar 
and Knab’s figure of the hypopygium (Proc. Ent. Soc. Wash- 
ington, xi, 1909, pl. ii, fig. 4) does not show the parts in their 
normal positions, ore ee the figure having been made from 

pecimen moun flat on a slide. There is also an error in 

their ong gaa op: cit., p. 33): ‘* fourth’’ plate should read 

** firs mos dorsal ‘* upper ’’ should be ‘‘ second ’’ 
and ‘ nuns ony tea 

One female — “Tiberi has the usual pale bands of the 
abdomen reduced to inconspicuous white lateral spots, but it 
has the long first submangina al cell as in normal C. pipiens. 

have seen specimens (of both sexes) similar to this from 
Gibraltar, and (females) from British East Africa. 


9. Culex laticinctus, sp. n. 

3. Head dark, clothed with the usual ‘‘ narrow curved ’’ 
(whitish) and upright forked scales (black). Proboscis black- 
scaled, a little shorter than the abdomen. Palpi dark brown, 
exceeding the proboscis by less than the length of the last 
joint. Last two joints ie very slightly hairy, small 


50 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [January, 1913. 


patches of whitish scales towards their bases beneath, extend- 
ing apically as a narrow ill-defined whitish line, not so con- 
spicuous as that of C. pipiens. Hairs of antennae dark brown, 
golden towards the base. 

orax light brown, scarcely at all tinged with red, mesono- 
tum and scutellum clothed with narrow light ochreous scales 
not very closely placed. Median lobe of scutellum with about 
eight, lateral lobes with about four bristles. Wings : lateral 
vein scales very narrow, almost hair-like; median short and 


Upper fork-cell about as long as its stem, its base slightly nearer 
the base of the wing than that of the lower. Halteres light 
brown, knob blackish. Legs black scaled ; femora (especially 
the hind pair) whitish beneath ; fairly distinct white spots at 
the apices of the femora and tibiae. Claws of fore and mid 
legs each with a single tooth. 

Abdomen.--Each of segments 2-7 clothed with blackish 
brown scales on its apical half (or rather more), white scales 
on its basal half. The white bands are somewhat indented on 
each side of the middle, leaving a median projection, the last 
two being somewhat expanded laterally. Venter whitish. 
Hypopygium: Side pieces with a distinct tuft of hairs at the 
apex, plainly visible with a hand lens, but apt to become 


lower one toothed. 

- Resembles the male. Palpi black scaled, about one- 
fifth as long as the proboscis. Upper fork cell about twice as 
long as its stem, its base considerably nearer the base of the 
wing than that of the lower. 

emarks.— 'This species comes near C. pipiens, from which, 
however, it is abundantly distinct by the lighter thorax, shorter 


which it most resembles in coloration is the Oriental C. pallido- 
thorax, Theo. ( = C. albopleura, Theo. = Culiciomyia annulo- 
abdominalis, Theo.), but that species has very different fork- 
ceils, the base of the lower being nearer to the base of the wing 
than that of the upper ; it also has the row of transparent out- 
standing scales on the male palpi characteristic of the genus (or 
group) Culiciomyia, which is certainly not present in C. lati- 
cinctus. 

Occurrence.—Tiberias, 2¢ {including type, in the British 
Museum), 52. Also Gibraltar, July 1909, 5¢, 52 (Major 
C. E. P. Fowler). 


ee ae | ee kr ness 


ase 


Paes ee 


Vol. IX, No. 1.] Diptera of the Lake of Tiberias. 51 
[V.8.] . 


10. Uranotaenia unguiculata, sp.n. o&. 

Head black scaled, a rim of bluish-white scales round the 
eyes and a patch of similar ones on the nape. Proboscis, palpi 
and antennae dark b 

Thorax dark bein, ere black towards the margins of 
the mesonotum ; a line of flat bluish-white scales extends from 
the wing-base forwards to the very front of the mesonotum, 
not, however, meeting its fellow; a similar line of scales, 
parallel with the first, extends across the pleurae and protho- 
racic lobes. Wings with dark brown scales, except for a short 
space at the base of the first longitudinal vein, where the 
scales are white. Lateral vein scales about three times as long 
as broad. Upper fork-cell rather narrower, but almost as long 
as lower. Halteres dark-brown, stem light brown. Legs dark- 


fied, except that the claws are much larger than usual and 
unequal ; they are not, however, so unequal as those on the 
mid legs, which are normal. 

Abdomen clothed with dark-brown scales above, except 
the — segment, which is white. Venter pale. 

Rema In two respects—the unusual front claws, and 
= prolongation of the upper of the two lines of bluish scales 

the fro the mesonotum—this species differs from all 
cae Oriental or Ethiopian species of the genus, and its 


mayeri ; the former however has banded hind tarsi and 
no pale line on the middle femora, and the latter has white at 
the base of — fifth (not first) vein, and has white markings 
on the abdom 
ecurrence. i Tiberios, 1g (type: in the Indian Museum, 
Calcutta). 


mame eRe ee ee Oem ee 


7. Aquatic Oligochaeta from the Lake of Tiberias. 


By J. Srepuenson, D.Sc., Mayor, I.M.S., 
Professor of Biology.in the Government College, Lahore. 


N. Annandale, of the Indian Museum, Calcutta 


several other forms, which were cel areca immature and 
therefore unidentifiable. These comprise one Enchytraeid, two 
Tubificids, and one Lumbricid (Hisenia or Helodrilus). 


Criodrilus lacuum, Hoffm. 


In wet mud under stones at edge of lake, near Tiberias, 
Palestine; October 18, 1912, October 24, 1912: in a similar 
situation near Mejdal (Magdala), on Lake Tiberias: October 25, 
1912. A number of specimens, both mature and immature. 

is worm has previously been recorded from Syria and 
Palestine by Rosa (Boll. Mus. Torino, vol. viii, no. 160, 1893), 
whose specimens were quite typical. The specimens in the 


present collection which I assign to this species show, however, 
certain peculiarities and a short description is ’ therefore 
appended. 


Length 6-7 ins.; breadth 4mm. at broadest part, diminish- 
‘aie blue wee near the posterior end. The shape of the 


So ikata s 303. 
Prostomium wiganeeem anus dorsal. The gens 
= may be broken off; one specimen, whic gh 
mmature, probably ee to ‘this species, there were two 
ponte otige near the posterior end, one of which, at one part 
of the circumference, was deep enough to open into the body- 
cavity. The constrictions are exaggerations of the inter- 
segmental furrows, and would seem to represent an attempt at 
autotomy. 
The setae are closely paired ; te is greater than aa 


pepe the centre of the slit is a little outside the line of 
ae b. The papilla reaches on its outer side nearly half way 


54 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [{January, 1913. 


between lines of setae 6 and c: where the pore is on xv, the 
papilla takes up the whole length of xv and xvi, and quite half 
of xiv. 

(In what follows, the description will assume that the male 
aperture is on xv. 

e female apertures are*situated in obliquely running 
cracks which bound the male papillae anteriorly and internally, 
these apertures are in line with setae a. 

A ‘ genital area’ may be described as follows: the fissures 


t 
xvii, or even partially on to xviii, between and behind the 
male papillae. 

On a certain number of segments behind the male apertures 
the setae of series a are implanted in small circular papillae ; 
this may be the case in xvii, Xvili, xix, xx and xxi, but the 
oe of the papillae may not be the same on the two 
sides. 
' The clitellum is very indistinct, and seems to vary ; it 
seems to begin anteriorly about xxi-~xxiy (once about xv), and 
to extend posteriorly to xxxvi or xxxvii. 


the long axis of the oval was parallel to the surface of the body, 


prostates in Ovary, funnel, and ovisac were all prominent 
structures in the normal situations. There were no sperma- 
t 


What were probably large sporozoan it ben ihaaen 
those described by Benham (Q 5 M.S., eae es, simila 


Vol. IX, No. 1.] Oligochaeta from the Lake of Tiberias. 55 
[N.S] 


The chief points of interest in the foregoing description 
re 

i) The clitellum. Hoffmeister (quoted in Vejdovsky, 
System u. Morphologie der Oligochaeten, Prag, 1884) and ined 
(Q.J.M.8., ns., vol. xxvii) found no clitellum. Benha 
estimate of its length (Q./J.M.S., n.S., vol. xxvii) is on the ee 
hand considerably greater than 

(ii) The distribution of the venitat papillae differs from what 
is given by Orley, or by Michaelsen (Oligochaeta, in Tierreich). 

(iti) With ae and Benham, whose statements are 


therefore, it may not have developed, owing perhaps to their 
eing in an early stage of sexual maturity ; that this was so 
is perhaps indicated by the fact that in one specimen the testes 
and funnels were noted as being large and conspicuous ; Ben- 
ham, who found the testes deeply situated eg difficult of 
discovery, probably had later stages to deal w 

v) The shape of the spinosa is however not 
reconcilable with earlier observations, e.g. Hoffmeister (ap. 


part of the 6-8 mm. long tubular spermatophore described by 
the latter author has regularly been broken off, leaving only 
the basal portion. 


Helodrilus (Dendrobaena) lacustris, sp. nov. 


In wet mud under stones at edge of lake, near Mejdal 
(Magdala), Lake Tiberias, Palestine ; October 25, 1912. With 
Criodrilus lacuum. Three specimens. 

Length 1} ins.; breadth 1-1} mm. ; colour greyish, with 
blue am anteriorly. Segments 71-87 

Prostomium proepilobous (in one case only slightly so). 
Clitellum saddle-shaped, xxiv or xxv~xxx, = 6 or 7; with 
lateral ridges xxvi-—xxvili or xxix at its ventral limit on each 
side. 

Male pores xv (only made out in pepe’ Copulatory 


56 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. {January, 1913.] 


there is a small interval in the middle line between the medially 
situated areas of the two sides. As seen in sections, the integu- 
ment of the ventral surface of segment xv also contains more 
glandular cells than neighbouring regions, though no difference 
was noted externally. : 

The setae are not arranged in pairs, and the intervals 
appear to be a little variable. In one case these were estimated 
as aa=ab=be=cd=} dd approximately; in another aa slightly 
> ab, ab=cd, aa approx.=be, dd=21 cd. The length of an 
ordinary seta is °3 mm. 

Setae a and 6 in segment ix may be described as genital 
setae. They are implanted in the middle of the copulatory 
areas, and are long and straight ; the setal sac and its muscles 
go much deeper into the body in the case of the genital than in 
the ordinary setae. A perfect seta was not obtained in any 
ae section; the length however is probably approximately 
“49 mm. 


The specimens being so small, the internal anatomy could 
only be investigated by sections; the first 22 segments of one 
specimen was therefore sectioned longitudinally. 

e oesophagus shows dilatations in xi-xii and in xiii-— 
xiv, with longitudinal ridges projecting into the lumen. In xv 
is a larger thin-walled dilatation, with vascular walls, but no 
marked ridging. The gizzard extends from 4 xvi-xix = 3}. 
he last heart is in xi. 


and of about the same size. The sacs in ix are paired, as also 
those in xii, those these latter meet dorsally over the intestine ; 
in x and xi the sacs of each segment are completely fused above 
the gut. 

The spermathecae are in segments x and xi, they are slightly 
ovoid, almost spherical sacs, paired, with narrow and some- 


ays , and in the presence o 
the large seminal vesicle in segment x; indeed, in respect of the 
: : ts ix and x (small in ix, 
large in x) it appears to be peculiar in the subgenus. 


ae. S,hlUC ehh 


i 
j 
4 


8. An Account of the Sponges of the Lake of Tiberias, 


with Observations on Certain Genera of 
Spongillidae. 


By N. AnnanpaLe, D.Sc., F.A.8.B. 


(With Plates II to V.) 


TABLE OF CONTENTS. 


Introductory Note 


eer ects: Systematic ACCOUNT OF THE COLLEC- 


Key te the Sponges of the Lake of Tiberias. . 

Subfamily Spongillinae 

Subfamily Potamolepidinae, n 

Key to the genera of Patginelepidiriss and § some other 
freshwater genera i to be confused with them . 


Dermal pore-cells i in the Spongillidae 


Section 2.—BioLoGy AND DISTRIBUTION OF THE Spon- 
GES OF THE LaKE OF TIRERIA 

Conditions under which the different species are found.. 
Hardness of most of the species: its apparent object 

Production or non-production of gemmules . 

Central cavity of Cortispongilla and Pachydictyum 

Function of the skeletal! cortex in ee lla 

Geographical distribution 


Section 3.—-CLASSIFICATION OF THE POTAMOLEPIDINAE 

AND OF SOME OBSCURE GENERA OF SPONGILLINAE. 

Relationship of Veluspa, Miclucho- onion ta to the ent 
lidae 


Virsdapemples Annandale 

Uruguaya, Car 

Potamolepis, } Marshall ° 

Pachydictyum, Weltner 

pearl of the genera puede’ and Nudospongil 
of the family ee 

suis a 

BIBLIOGRAPHY i 

DESCRIPTION OF pare 


Page 


58 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (January, 1913. 


IntRoDUCTORY NOTE. 


The sponges of the Lake of Tiberias are of considerable 
interest. They fall naturally into two groups, one of which is 
represented by a race of the widely distributed Ephydatia flu- 
viatilis, while the other consists of four species confined, so far 
as we know, to the lake and its immediate vicinity. The latter 
group includes representatives of two genera that seem to claim 
recognition as new, although I have been acquainted for some 
years with forms belonging to one of them. 

ollowing is a list of the species obtained :— 

1. Ephydatia fluviatilis syriaca, Topsent. 

2. Nudospongilla reversa, gen. et sp. nov. 

3. N. mappa, sp. nov. 

4. N. aster, sp. nov. 

5. Cortispongilla barroisi (Topsent), gen. nov. 


perhaps not really allied to the Potamolepidinae, but liable to 
be confused with genera included among them. 


paper. The following key may be useful to naturalists who 
visit the lake :— 
Key to the Sponges of Lake Tiberias. 


1. Sponge soft, by no means to : 
gemmules present if conditions are 


smooth; birotulate gemmule-spi- 
cules as a rule more than 0-03 mm 


long) : : .. Ephydatia fluviatilis 


J . 59). 
2. Sponge hard; no gemmules. ple Bah 


Tee ase 


Vol. IX, No. 1.] Sponges of the Lake of Tiberias. 59 
[N.S.] 


A. Sponge massive, with deep - 
round oscula i na al adie beee bar- 
st (p. 67). 
B. Sponge encrusting the lower 
surface of stones; oscula never 
consisting of large rounded 
apertures. 
a. Oscula consisting of deep 
open eet es of a simple 
chara < .. Nudospongilla rever- 
sa (p. 63) 


6. Oscula approached by deep 


by the dermal membrane... N. mappa (p. 64). 
ule 


groups on Mer surface with- 
out a ite osculum; 
BC Oras oak more mas- — 
sive, less regular and more 
friable than in other indi- 
genous species. . .. NV. aster (p. 65). 


Fam. SPONGILLIDAE. 
Subfamily SPONGILLINAE. 


To this subfamily I assign all the freshwater sponges in 
which true microscleres are foun 


Ephydatia fluviatilis syriaca, Topsent. 
(Plate iii, fig. 1.) 
Ephydatia fluviatilis, Topsent, Rev. biol. Nord France, 1893, 


i eee 
H. fluviatilis var. syriaca, id., Bull. Soc. Amis Sci. Nat., Rouen, 
909, p. 1. 


Specimens 2 Ephydatia pet oor were not uncommon in 
October 1912, on the lower surface of stones standing in the 
water at the Bae of the lake near "Tiberias, “Mejdal and Tab- 
ghah. They formed small crusts not more than two or three 
millimetres thick and three or four centimetres in diameter. 
In places were sunlight penetrated under the stones they had 
green corpuscles in their parenchyma-cells, and were as a rule of 
a bright leaf-green colour. In some places, however, notably 
in the neighbourhood of Mejdal, the green was ma yore but not 
altogether obscured, by a blackish tinge due to minute dark 
particles, apparently inorganic, in the smbenkeynnaceli In 


60 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. {January, 1913 


places to which little or no light penetrated, the sponge was of 
a dirty white 

On two occasions I found (near Tiberias) specimens that 
had become completely or partly desiccated owing to the sea- 
sonal shrinkage of the lake. These contained numerous gem- 
mules and were in a state of partial disintegration. 

Topsent in describing his ‘‘ variety ’’ syriaca laid stress on 
two points, (2) the presence of spined as well as smooth macros- 
cleres and (zi) the large size of the gemmule-spicules. In none 


relatively slender. ‘They are very variable in size, those that 
were actually incorporated in the skeleton varying in length 
rom 0°285 to 0°374 mm. and in greatest transverse diameter 
from 00123 to 00205 mm. Smaller spicules were observed 
lying free in the interstices of the skeleton, but resembled the 
larger ones in outline. 

e gemmule-spicules were also variable in size, being 
from 0:0246 to 0-046 mm. long; but very few were as short as 
0-03 mm. The spines on the shafts were as a rule more slender 
than those represented in Topsent’s figure of the gemmule- 
spicules of the form syriaca. They thus provide a link between 
the gemmule-spicules of typical European specimens of the 
species and of the form from Lake Huleh and the Barada. 

8, however, they are on an average distinctly larger than 
those of the former, I consign my specimens to the race syriaca. 
can detect no bubble-cells (cystocytes) in the parenchyma 

of well-preserved specimens. 


Subfamily POTAMOLEPIDIN AE, nov. 

_ This subfamily is distinguished from the Spongillinae (that 
is to say from the remainder of the Spongillidae) by the total 
absence of true microscleres. In some species there are two 
kinds of macroscleres, but although one of them is usually more 
slender than the other, there is no marked difference in length. 
semmules are as a rule completely absent: if they are present 
they lack not only microscleres but also pneumatic coverings 
and foramina. ; 

The sponges of this subfamily are, as a rule, at least mode- 
rately hard; they have not, however, the stony hardness of 
Uruguaya, and some are much less hard than others. 


Vol. LX, No. 1.| Sponges of the Lake of Tiberias. 61 
a4 


To the subfamily Potamolepidinae I assign the following 
genera :— 
Nudospongilia (gen. nov.), Pachydictyum, Weltner, Corti- 
sg bea (gen. nov.) and Potamolepis, Marshall. Whether or 
i) s Metschnikowia'! should be associated with these 
Santa is "doubtfal. 
e two new genera are described below, being represented 
by species from the Lake of Tiberias, and in the third section 


prove of use in distinguishing all these genera. — The names of 


mules, are Gasikbed 3. the names of those genera in whieh 
gemmules are kiows oe occur are marked with | an asterisk. 


Key to certain genera of Freshwater Sponges. 
Minute birotulate microscleres present 
in the parenchyma. (Sponge hard; 
skeletal fibres as a rule somewhat ill- 
defined ; neonate stout vertical 
fibres sometimes present). . -. [Corvospongilla.*| 
Il. No microscleres 
trace of a subdermal cavity 
or of efferent grooves under 
the dermal membrane in th 
neighbourhood of the oscula. 
(External membrane delicate; 


~ 


i ise in strong chitinous 

substance) . (Veluspa.*) 
200A subdermal cavity “usually pre. 

sent effer ubderma 

grooves as a mp well ee 

oped. 
A. Athick chitinized external 

membrane present. 


bres similar; sponge o 
stony hardness) [Uruguaya.*} 
B. External membrane delicate. 
A The aisahige’ s s originat daanion is not atailabies but canes genus is 
redescribed by Dybowski in the paper ci ited in the bibliography opposite 
his name. 


for) 
bo 


Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [J anuary, 1913. 


6. A skeletal cortex pro- 
uced a short distance 


enin of transverse. 


in central part of 


ar aC . Cortispongilla, 
b'. No skeletal cortex. 
(Vertical fibres better 
developed than trans- 
verse ones). 
B. Large elliptical central cavity. 
(Sponge hard) .. Pachydictyum. 
B. Central cavity small and ill- 
defined. 
6. Sponge not more than 
moderately hard, fri- 
able ea .. Nudospongilla.* 
b'. Sponge very hard, not 
friable ., .. Potamolepis. 
NUDOSPONGILLA, gen. nov. 


Sponge as a rule moderately hard; never very soft ; friable. 
No well-defined central cavity ; oscula sm 


afferent subdermal cavity well developed: A chitinous basal 
membrane usually present. Cystocytes apparently absent. 
Skele ariable, never very stout: both. 


moderately slender 
mooth but sometimes 
siliceous bodies in any 
Gemmules, if present, devoid of foramina, pneumatic coat 
and spicules, adherent at the base of the sponge, ovoid in 
outline and somewhat flattened. 

T ype-species. Spongilla coggini , Annandale. 

Distribution.—The type-species is from Western China, 
whence a second species (NV. yunnanensis) also comes. Three 


Vol. IX, No. 1.] Sponges of the Lake of Tiberias. _ 63 
[W.S.] 


Galilean forms are described below ; but I am not fully satis- 
fied that they are actually congeneric. ‘Three species from 
Central Africa (S. tanganyikae and S. moorei, Evans, and 
S. (4) cunningtoni, Kirkpatrick) and at least one from Gelebes 
(S. (@) — Weltner) should also be assigned provisionally to 
the g 


Nudospongilla reversa, sp. nov. 
(Plate ii, fig. 2; plate iii, figs. 2, 2a; plate v, fig. 3.) 


ponge hard but friable, forming crusts or lamellae on the 


delicate chitinous membrane. On the upper surface there are 
broad, deep, patent oscular grooves which are not covered by 
the dermal membrane except at their narrower extremity, 7.¢. 
at the extremity furthest from the larger exhalent apertures. 
The main efferent channels open directly into the sides of these 
grooves, running a slightly oblique, but ee horizontal 
course through the substance of the nge. Some of the - 
channels measure as much as 3 mm. in iiarcter the greatest 
depth of the grooves is 4mm. and the greatest width 5 mm 
‘hen the surface of the sponge is examined with a lens the 


the main horizontal channels the network is of a more definite 
nature, but the vertical fibres are not much more distinct than 
the transverse ones; at first sight both appear to be thick, but 
a closer examination shows that each fibre is composite, con- 
sisting of at least two strands not quite parallel to one another. 
The spines on the surface consist of much more slender fibres, 

as a rule not more than three spicules thick, projecting upwards 
through the dermal membrane. At the base of these fine fibres 
there is a distinct horizontal network of iplutiles, but it is not 
thickened or compressed to form a cortex. The meshes of the 
skeleton are small throughout. There is not very much chiti- 
nous matter present. 

Spicules.—The skeleton-spicules are short, smooth, moder- 
ately stout wo feebly hey and by no means sharply 
pointed. ey ro o 0°34 mm. long, but the 

majority are approximately of a sca length ; ay greatest 
transverse diameter varies from 0-024 to 0°029 m few 
smaller and more sharply painbed amphioxi occur in ‘all spicule- 
sl praia sana but these lie loose in the interstices of the skele- 
n, and are probably immature or abortive spicules. 


64 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. {January, 1913. 
a 


No gemmules were found. 

Type.—Z.E.V. No. 2° Ind. Mus. 

Habitat.—Lake of Tiberias, Palestine. The unique speci- 
men was taken (15-x-1912) close to the edge in less than one 
metre of water and within a few hundred yards of the exit of the 
Jordan on the east side, but not in the actual channel of the 
river. It grew on the lower surface of a stone, projecting out 
under another stone, and including a small twig in its substance. 
The free portion was about 5 mm. thick and some 30 mm. long 
and broad, but the shape was irregular. 

e most remarkable feature of N. reversa is the manner 


run sideways into a deep groove. The great breadth of these 
channels and their regular horizontal course are also character- 
istic. The spicules are intermediate in form between those of 
Cortispongilla barroisi and those of Nudospongilla aster. They 
are considerably stouter than those of N. mappa, specimens of 
which were taken together with the type. 


Nudospongilla mappa, sp. nov. 
(Plate ii, fig. 4; plate iii, figs. 3, 3a; plate v, figs. 2, 2a, 2b.) 


Sponge hard, forming thin films on the lower surface of 
stones, bright green in sunlight. white or yellowish in the dark. 
€ upper Surface is very minutely hispid; the lower surface 
‘bears a delicate chitinous membrane. On the upper surface 


sponge. The pores are larger than is usually the case in the 
Spongillidae, measuring about 0-052 mm. in diameter. They 
are grouped together immediately over the mouths of the main 
efferent channels, which run vertically downwards into the 


.—Except near the surface of the sponge, the 
pe ese reticulation is not well defined, but slender vertical 
res 


-such well-defined spines as in N. reversa. On the surface there 
is @ very distinct transverse reticulation, which, viewed from 


Vol. IX, No. 1.] Sponges of the Lake of Tiberias. 65 
[N.S.] 


above, looks’ very regular, the meshes being nearly circular in 
outline ! STAR v, fig. 

—The spicules are more slender and more sharply 
pointed ‘hae those of the other species of Nudospongilla found 
in the lake. 

No gemmules were found. 

Type.—Z.B.V. No. *23° Ind. Mus 

Habitat.—Lake of Tiberias and R. Jordan at and near 
its exit therefrom. N. mappa was found at every spot 


to smaller stones covered by fairly large ones. The largest 
specimens were taken actually in the adaan near its exit. 
None were taken in more than one metre of w 

mappa resembles some species of Stratosponita in 
structure, but I could find no trace of mules in any 
of the many a examined both preserved raat in a living 
condition. Desiccated sponges of the species were often found 
above ‘He pipet water-level. 
From £. fluviatilis syriaca the new species, which resembles 
it in external appearance, can be at once distinguished by 


is not a feature of any importance in the Spongillidae, in 
which species with spiny ng seen are often closely allied 
to Species with smooth ones 
Nudospongilla aster, sp. nov. 
(Plate ii, fig. 3; plate iii. figs. 4, 4a). 
Sponge hard but very friable, forming a crust of no great. 
and shells. Th 


ea, stones shells. e main efferent channels open 
poi re on the surface, as a rule in little star-shaped groups, 
so that there is no true osculum. Sometimes —. eae 


distal st are only covered by the dermal membra: The 
external surface of the sponge is smooth. The atone is . car 


The pare iahpoies is bulky in spite of the compactness of the 
skeleton, and the cartion offerent apg nels have stout and clearly 
marked walls. Their tubular character is reflected to some extent in the 
skeleton of the sponge, but gives it a L oiokter appearance of regularity 

than it actually possesses. 


66 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (January, 1913. 


leaf-green or dull grey, the former shade being due to the 
presence of intracellal corpuscles. There is no definite chitin- 
ous basal membra: 
eleton. = Tie! reticulation of the skeleton fibres is some- 

what loose in the basal part of the sponge, but traces of thick 
transverse and horizontal fibres can be detected. In the upper 
part it becomes more compact, a noteworthy feature being the 
fact that single transverse fibres often run obliquely for a con- 
siderable distance through the sponge; but the reticulation is 
nowhere of a regular character, although extremely massive 
at all points. On the surface the transverse network is close 
and the fibres stout, but vertical fibres do not project upwards 
through the dermal membrane in the form of spines 

Spicules. —The spicules closely resemble those of N. reversa 
but are longer and relatively more slender 


of C. barroisi, and I have little doubt that the patch sire 
a young sponge of the former species. The specimen was ta 
close to the spot at which two of N. aster were obtained. 

The best developed and largest of my specimens of this 
species, and also the only one (with the exception of the 
‘*green patch’’ just alluded to) that exhibited the colour 7 
chlorophyl, was the one taken off the exit of the Jordan. 
the river flows out of the lake obliquely, the specimen pbs. 
rently did not come from its actual channel, but from what 
may be regarded as the main area iad the lake. 

Although harder than N. reversa, N. aster is more friable 
than any other species of Poladilenaiins from the lake. Its 
‘smooth surface distinguishes it, if it be examined with a hand- 
lens, from either N. reversa or N. mappa. It is much harder 
than Ephydatia fluviatilis and differs from “Oorkivoonals 
barroisi, apart from other characters, in having no cent tral 
cavity or well-defined oscula, 


CORTISPONGILLA, gen. nov. 


Sponge hard, but not of stony hardness, more or less friable, 
with a well-developed branching central cavity from. which 
a large osculum opens directly. In large sponges several sys- 


a et a oe 


Vol, IX, No. 1.] Sponges of the Lake of Tiberias. 67 
[V.S.] 


tems of the kind are found. The subdermal (afferent) her 
is poorly represented or absent, but efferent channels covered 
only by the dermal often be detected in the ieee 
bourhood of the oscula. “Cystocytes are apparently absent. 

Skeleton.—The skeleton consists of well-developed vertical 
fibres crossed at frequent intervals by less well-developed trans- 
verse ones. Near ie external surface the latter fibres are 
greatly thickened so as to form a strong casement or it 

eyond which t feleeined vertical fibres project upwards, su 
porting the dermal membrane, which is not strongly ohitinized, 
but apparently somewhat collenchymato ous. 

Spicules.—In the only known species a skeleton-spicules 
are sient and rather blunt amphioxi. More slender a 
amphioxi are occasionally found, but appear to be sasealy im- 
mature spicules. Spherical siliceous bodies have not been found. 

emmules.—No o gemmules have been foun 

Type-species (unique).—Potamolepis barroisi st, Topsent 

Distribution.—Only known from the Lake of Tiberias on 
the Jordan system in Palestin ne. 

The only other genus that approaches Cortispongilla in 
structure is Pachydictywm, Weltner, from which it is distin- 
guished chiefly by the formation of a regular skeletal cortex. 
The hardness of the sponge is due in a very large measure to 
this structure (pl. iv, figs. 3, 4). In the genus Veluspa, Miclu- 
cho-Maclay, which apparently occurs both in Lake Baikal (fresh 
water) and in Arctic Seas, a somewhat similar cortex is formed, 
but in an entirely different manner and not quite in the same 
position (pl. iv, fig. 5). 


Cortispongilla barroisi (Topsent). 
(Plate ii, figs. 1, la; plate iii, fig. 5; plate iv, fig. 4.) 


Potamolepis barroisi, Topsent, Rev. biol. Nord France, v, (1892). 
Weltner, Wiegm. Archiv. f. Naturgesch., Ixvii (1), p. 195 
(1901) 

My specimens of this species, which were taken in October, 
appear to be in a different phase of growth from those taken 
by Barrois in May, and also perhaps are somewhat better pre- 
served. It seems probable, to judge from Topsent’s figures, 
that, between these two months, the whole outer part of the 


I x 
amine ements of one of Topsent’s co-types. It is evident 
that this specimen was heavily parasitized by an alga and 
therefore sot probably more fragile than my own and some- 


external parts. There can, however, be no question as to the 
specific identity. 


68 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (January, 1913. 


1 obtained five specimens, which varied in size from 35 x 
23 x 21 mm. to 85 x 75 x 60 mm., the last measurement being 
that of the greatest depth of the actual sponge in each case. 
Two. approached the largest specimen in bulk, and one was 
only a little bigger than the smallest. The colour in life was 
dull grey with a tinge of glaucous green. This tinge has com- 
pletely disappeared from dried specimens, but traces of it still 
remain in fragments preserved in alcohol. An examination of 
both living and preserved material convinces me that it was due 
not to intracellular, but to extracellular parasitic algae such as 
Topsent found in much greater profusion in his examples. 


case, and sometimes in that of the main oscula also, there are 
radiating channels entering the osculum on the surface and only 
covered by the dermal membrane. 

e dermal membrane is not easily separated from the 
sponge. Although not greatly thickened, it has a somewhat 


he dermal pores are minute, but I have not been able to 
detect pore-cells on the external surface or in any other part 
of the sponge, although I have made a careful examination of 
well-stained histological material. 

The most characteristic feature of the skeleton did not at- 
tract the attention of the author of the species, probably 
because his material was imperfect. I mean the skeletal cortex 
formed by the apparent thickening of the transverse spicule- 
fibres a short distance below the dermal membrane. ‘The distal 
part of the vertical fibres, which are interrupted in their 


Vol. IX, No. 1.] Sponges of the Lake of Tiberias. 69 
[V.S.] 


upward course by the cortex cutting across them, is also greatly 
thickened, containing a large number of spicules lying more or 
less parallel. In both cases, however, the apparent thickening 
is due not to a thickening of individual fibres, but to a massing 
together of separate fibres. In the cortex the individual fibres 

can be seen crossing one another at right angles, and in a verti- 
cal section the spicules of some of them are always cut through 
the middle. The thickened ends of the vertical fibres are also 
composite and have extra transverse fibres linking them to- 


Of the internal soft part of the sponge there is, in the pre- 
sent state of our knowledge, very little that can be said with 


g abundan | 

although the sponge-cells are well preserved in some of m 
specimens, the vegetable cells are not and I can say little about 
their peste 

ave been unable to find any trace of gmmules. Sper 
dietiler Gulla are abundant in one specimen and another contains 
young embryos, which resemble those of Spongilla and Ephy- 
datia 


I only found C. barroist on small pebbles in the actual 
channel of the Jordan as it runs through the south end of the 
Lake of Tiberias between the village of Semakh and the exit of 
the river from the lake. The water in this channel is from 
4 to 8 metres deep. apeerees Barrois found his specimens in 
exactly the same spot; the differences between them and 
my own are to be attributed, directly or indirectly, to seasonal 
changes. 


Notre oN DeRMAL PORE-CELLS IN THE SPONGILLIDAE. 


Owing to its pei a and to the comparatively large size of 
its pores, NV. affords unusually good material for the 
study of the donsat gece Some of my specimens are very 
well preserved, having been fixed in picro-formol-acetic solu- 
tion, and I have been able to eigen aobangsot preparations 
of the dermal membrane and in some cases even of the whole 
sponge, that exhibit the structure “of that membrane with 
great clearness. ! 


method of preparation, originally sug; nines hed an accident, 
A nsv 


70 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (January, 1913. 


The pore-cells in N. mappa are highly specialized (plate 


area varying from about 12 to about 20. The orifices vary in 
diameter from 0°045 to 0°0675 mm. They are naturally circular 
but in mounted preparations are liable to distortion. Each 
pore-cell consists of a slender ring of cytoplasm which stains a 
little darker than that of the ordinary flattened epithelial cells 
and has an obscurely reticulate structure. The nucleus is ellip- 
tical in form, measuring about 0:006 x 0-003 mm., the greater 
axis lying parallel to the circumference of the aperture, on 
which the cell encroaches in the form of a slight bulge opposite 
the nucleus. So far as I have been able to discover there is no 
break in the continuity of the ring formed by the pore-cell. 

In specimens of the sponge that have been dried after 
careful preservation in a liquid medium (plate v, fig. 2) the 


to stand out in sharp contrast to the imperforate roof of the 
branching exhalent grooves. In part of the type of NV. reversa 
(plate v, fig. 3) which I have dried there is a comparatively 
large area of perforate membrane, but it is not confined to the 
orifices of the inhalent channels or defined in any exact manner. 


either in N. reversa, N. aster or Cortispongilla barroisi. The 
mechanical difficulties involved in a careful examination of the 
lermal membrane in the two last species are, however, con- 
siderable. 


so readily, are more difficult to detect. They resemble those of 
N. mappa in structure but are smaller, the aperture of the 
largest pores having a diameter of about 0-02 mm. 

My specimens of N. mappa and E. fluviatilis syriaca were 
scraped from stones with a knife before being preserved, but 
notwithstanding this violent treatment, their pore-cells appear 


upon the cover and rotated until the glass is broken and the section 
completely crushed. The fragments of glass and all but the smallest 
fragments of sponge are then removed with a pair of fine forceps and 4 
new cover-glass is put on. 

* 


Vol. IX, No. 1.] Sponges of the Lake of Tiberias. 71 
[V.S.] 


to be fully expanded. I havé pointed out elsewhere,!' it is 
doubtful whether the pore-cells of Spongillidae can contract in 
such a way as to obliterate the aperture they contain. 

re-examination of old preparations and a careful com- 
parison between them and those recently made leads me to the 
conclusion that highly developed pore-cells actually exist in the 
dermal membrane of most Spongillidae but can only be detected 
in unusually well-preserved specimens. In serial sections it is 
difficult, if not impossible, to see them. Their arrangement 
differs in different species; in some they are grouped as in 
N. mappa; in others they are practically confined to the edge 
of the sponge; in others again they occupy more or less clearly 
defined areas on the surface, and in some they are probably 
scattered. In those species such as Spongilla cartert in which 
the inhalent apertures appear to be comparatively large in 
ordinary well-preserved material, they are probably protected 
in the living sponge by a delicate dermal network in which the 
meshes are outlined by pore-cells. 

atever the exact origin of the pore-cells of the Spongil- 
lidae may be, and this is a problem that calls for a careful 
embryological iieatibation: that would be foreign to my own 
inquiries, they appear to be highly differentiated as mature 
cells from the ordinary pinacocytes of the dermal anaes 
In Spongilla crassissima, apart from their ring-like form, t 
closely resemble the cells that line the orifices of the ciliated 


crescent-shaped cells of similar structure joined together at the 
tips to enclose the aperture between them. My mistake was 
due to a slight folding of the membrane in some of my prepara- 
tions whereby two cells were brought into unnatural relations 
with one another. 


2. BIOLOGY AND ee ae OF THE SPONGES OF THE 
LAKE oF TIBERIAS. 


From a biological point of view the sponges of the Lake of 
Tiberias fall into two groups in accordance with the precise 


of the Jordan as it traverses the lake. The former group may 
be conveniently known as the littoral sponges; the latter as the 
sponges of the Jordan channel. 


! Faun. Brit, Ind.—Freshwater Sponges, etc., p. 32 (1911). 
2 Ree. Ind. Mus., I, p. 271 (1907). 


72 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (January, 1913. 


The littoral sponges (of which N. mappa was very, and Z 
fluviatilis syriaca fairly, common in October, 1912) were found 
without exception either on the lower surface of stones of large 
or moderate size or, much more rarely, on the upper surface of 
small stones covered and protected by large ones. Only one 
specimen of N. reversa was preserved, but I did not distinguish 
this species from N. mappa in the field and have reason to 
think that many specimens I failed to collect, actually belonged 
to it. While NV. mappa and the Ephydatia invariably form 
adherent crusts, this species sometimes extends outwards from 
its support in thin lamellae. There was no difference in the 
manner of growth of the former two species, except that while 
single sponges of N. mappa often covered an area of moderate 
extent, those of the Ephydatia were always quitesmall. In the 


as to have the appearance of a mosaic. N. mappa is certainly 
commoner on fragments of basalt than on pieces of limestone, 
but was found on several occasions on the latter. 

The two sponges of the Jordan channel as a rule adhere 


pieces and washed 


-™ 
great advantage in stormy weather, when the waves beat 
on the stones to which it is attached. The largest specimens of 


a 


Se ee eS Fee ee SR ee ee 


ee Pe ee er i Ee eR ee 


| A ae aes eee 


Vol. IX, No. 1.] Sponges of the Lake of Tiberias. 73 
[N.S.] 


this species I obtained were, moreover, actually in ‘the Jordan 
just after it had left the lake, and when i n flood the stream 
must flow with great strength at this point. 

The case of the sponges of the Jordan channel in the lake 
is not quite the same. They cannot be affected by storms to 


but that there is a considerable current, perhaps increased in 
wet weather, in that part of the lake in which they live, is 
proved by the fact that the bottom is there devoid of fine silt 
and covered with coarse grit and small stones. Only a very 
small part of the channel has yet been explored, but, so the as is 
at present known, Cortispongilla barroisi is confined to an area 
of not more than two square miles. This was found to be the 
case both by Barrois, whose investigations were made in om 
d by myself in October. N. aste er, on the other hand, 


tural peculiarities of C. barroisi and their biological significance 
I shall deal presently, but it is noteworthy that N. aster is by 
far the most friable of the Potamolepidinae known from the 
lake. 

A most important question both from a taxonomic and a 
biological point of view is that of the production or non-pro- 
duction of gemmules by the Potamolepidinae. The evidence 


Galilean species that gemmules are at any rate not habitually 
produced, and we know that in a few species (Nudospongilla 
caggini, N. moorei and N. Be pp a: of the sub-family these 
bodies are sometimes fou I have found them also in a 
ar of Veluspa Pa from Lake Baikal. In all these 
sponges they are devoid not only of microscleres but also of 
asta coat and foramina. In Spongilla (Stratospongilla) 
clementis from the Philippines, the structure of which closely 
resembles that of Nudospongilla generally, and especially that 
of the type-species NV. coggini, the gemmules are few in number 
d bear remarkably attenuated microscleres ; while imper- 

fect development of the pneumatic coat is a common feature 
of the species of Stratospongilla, a Ithough in one species (N. 
bombayensis) it is less degenerate in a variety or local race 
(pneumatica) than it is in the typical form. The disappear- 
ance of the gemmule is therefore not a character of so funda- 
oe a nature as might appear at first sight to to be the case 

e find some species in which it has lost the elaboration 
diacterate of the Spongiltidas as a family, and others in 
which it has apparently been suppressed altogethe r. 

The evidence that the latter statement is true lies, so far 
as the sponges of the Lake of Tiberias are concerned, in the 


74 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. {January, 1913. 


the case in much warmer weather if the water were deeper. 
The water-level of the Lake of Tiberias is lower in October 


stones that are partly or completely dry. I made a very 
careful study of those that had become desiccated or partially 
desiccated in this way, and I found that whereas Ephydatia 
had produced gemmules, NV. mappa had not done so. Changes 
in environment, as I have pointed out elsewhere,! do not 
necessarily have the same effect on di 


bable that WN. mappa, 
mules, would do so whe 
steady desiccation. 
Evidence, moreover, is accumulating that the adoption of 
a limnic as distinct from a fluviatile mode of life is liable to 


(vars. abortiva and 
or less degenerate. 


‘|! Faun. Brit. Ind., Freshwater Sponges, etc., p. 5 (1911). Journ. 
As. Soc. Bengal, 1912, p. 50. 
2 Proce. Roy. Irish Acad., xxxi, pt. 60, p. 64 (1912). 
5 Proc, Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia, 1887, pp. 191, 192, 


# < ine Sire cata 
rN EE aie te ep oe ee ee SUE Peet ene Tae ae 


ee eS ee ON 


A wa ee eee ee ee = ee ae Po ee RG ne 


A TT a ge eee ae) a ee 


Vol. IX, No. 1.] Sponges of the Lake of Tiberias. 75. 
[N.S.] 


It is easy to see that a sponge living in a warm climate in 
a lake in which a considerable depth of water is maintained 
throughout the il has not the same need for the production 
gemmules as one from a small pond or stream that is liable 
to be dried up or oi solid. Marshall has advanced the 
view that an important function of the gemmule-spicules is that 
of weighting the gemmules, in order that they may not float 
away too readily. If so, it is not — that in species in 
which the gemmules are adherent their microscleres should 
disappear, and as the main See of the pneumatic coat is 
that of oes the gemmules to float, this coi might also be 
expected, on d@ priori grounds, to be eliminated in the same 
circumstances, just as the eyes of cavernicolous animals are 
eliminated in the dark. 
mbryos were found in all species of Galilean sponges 
examined in October, proving that sexual solace as well 
as vegetative growth is vigorous at that time of y 
As Cortispongilla barroisi is the most aoe ‘specialized 
species oa the sponge-fauna described in this paper, it will be 
iscuss the a ee of its peculiarities. 
itl 


for the production of a skeletal cortex and for the possession 
of a well-defined and almost symmetrical central cavity. (It 
would be misleading to call the latter a gastral cavity, for 
there is no evidence that it is homologous with the gastral 


sponges that live in still water. It is almost obliterated in speci- 
mens attached to bushes the supra-aquatic parts of which are 
agitated by the wind, its place being taken in this case by super- 
ficial branching channels, and also in races from south-western 
India and eastern Europe as to the biology of which we are igno- 
rant. The only freshwater sponge in which a cavity is found 
comparable to that of C. barroisi in regularity is Pachydictyum 
osum from Celebes,” in which the relative size and the actual 
ene of the cavity are greater than in the Galilean species. 
ig was found attached to the shells of living Gastro- 
pods in a ake in Celebes. The production of a cavity of the 
kind, which is one with the presence of a large circular 
osculum, is apparently a provision to assist in the elimination 
of mud or sand pre into the system through the pores, the 
exhalent channels being strong enough to keep the osculum 
I have noticed that if Spongilla proliferens is kept alive 

in an aquarium, the number of oscula (and consequently tl oP 


. As. Soc. Bengal, 1906, pl. i 
: Wallac itera Arch. f. eho ty a, ok vi, fig. 3 (1901). 


76 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (January, 1913. 


total oscular area) is invariably increased owing to the appear- 
ance of oscula on areas from which they were previously absent. 
This is apparently due to the fact that the sponge experi- 
ences difficulty, in unnatural surroundings, in getting rid of 
waste or extraneous matter. Barrois’s heavily parasitized 


that Nudospongilla aster, which inhabits the same environment 
as C. barroisi, is a peculiarly compact sponge without any trace 
of a central cavity is noteworthy: but it is not unusual for two 
species that live together to adopt diametrically opposite means 
to attain the same end, and if the particularly well-developed 
exhalent system implied in the production of a central cavity 
opening by a large osculum, is advantageous in getting rid of 
silt that has entered the sponge, a compact structure may be 
equally efficient im preventing the silt from entering at all. 

e other main peculiarity of Cortispongilla, viz. the skele- 
tal cortex, renders the sponge harder and less friable than it 
would otherwise be, but I have no suggestion to offer as to the 
precise reason why its development should be particularly 
acvantageous to this genus. An interesting point is its analogy 
to the skeletal cortex of the freshwater species of the genus 
Veluspa in Lake Baikal. Possibly the cortex performs a similar 
function in the two genera. In Veluspa, as has already been 
noted, it is produced by a splaying out of the extremities of 
the vertical skeleton-fibres, whereas in Cortispongilla it is due 
to an agglomeration of fibres a short distance within the sponge. 
In the species of Veluspa chosen for illustration (pl. iv, fig. 5) 
the difference is, however, more clearly seen than it is in some 


beca 
well developed and the vertical fibres are very distinct one 
from another even at their distal extremities. 


as yet of the lower invertebrates of fresh water of other parts 
of Western Asia or of North Africa. The sponges of te ake 


= iT a a etal he 
OS ea ee 


a 


: 
j 
} 
1 
3 
; 
j 
q 
J 


Vol. IX, No. 1.] Sponges of the Lake of Tiberias. 77 
N.S.) 


differ considerably from those of European, tropical African or 


tropical Asiatic fresh waters. The one endemic genus (Corti- 
spongilla) appears to be related to Pachydictyum, which is en- 
demic in a lake inCelebes; but the relationship may not be very 
close. The genus Nudospongilla, if it is to be accepted as a 
natural group, is probably of wide distribution in the hotter 
parts of the Old World, but none of the species found in the 

ake of Tiberias exhibit a clear connection with any species 
from elsewhere. It is possible, moreover, that N. mappa has 
some actual affinity with Grimm’s genus Metschnikowia, which 
is only known from the Caspian Sea. The fact that the race of 
Ephydatia fluviatilis found in the lake is distinct from the 
typical European form of the species is in itself evidence of 


but has produced comparatively few local races. 
such relationship as exists is with Syria only, for the race is not 
known to occur any further afield. 


3. CLASSIFICATION OF THE POTAMOLEPIDINAE AND OF SOME 
OBSCURE GENERA OF SPONGILLINAE. | 


In dealing with the sponges of the Lake of Tiberias I have 
found it necessary to examine a large amount of material from 
different parts of the world. As the collection of freshwater 
sponges in the Indian Museum is probably the largest an 
most nearly complete in existence, all known genera being 
represented, I take this opportunity to discuss certain genera 

f obscure status. The genera are Corvospongilla, Annandale ; 
Uruguaya, Carter; Potamolepis, Marshall; and Pachydictyum, 
Weltner. A consideration of their essential features will render 
it possible to indicate more precisely the relationship of 
Cortispongilla and Nudospongilla, and of the Potamolepidinae 


tion is Veluspa, Miclucho-Maclay, from which I find it 


family circle. In a short pa P ve 
pointed out, in agreement ‘with Korotneff * and Svartzevski,’ 
that some of the species assigned to Lubomirskia by Dybowski * 
actually conform to that author’s diagnosis of Veluspa, an 

have further advanced the view that the sponges of Lake Baikal 
probably present a complete transition between the two 


! Ann. Mus. Zool. Ac. Sci. St. Pétersbourg, 1913 (ined.). 

2 Biol. Centralbl., xxi, p. 306 (1901). 

8 Zapiski Kiev. Obshch., xvii (2) (1901). 

4+ Mem. Ac. Sci. St. Petersburg (7) xxvii, No. 6, p. 11 (1880). 


78 Journal of the Asiatic Sociely of Bengal. [January, 1913. 


supposed genera as defined by Dybowski; Miclucho-Maclay’s ! 
original description of Veluspa being of too general a nature 
to carry much weight. The courtesy of the authorities of the 


St. Petersburg has recently enabled me to examine a large 
collection from Lake Baikal in which four of the species 
assigned provisionally to Veluspa are well represented. These 
are V. batcalensis (Pallas), V.bacillifera (Dybowski), V. abietina, 
Svartzevski, and V. intermedia (Dybowski). They may be taken 


ing with the biology of Cortispongilla (antea, p- 76), the most 
obvious generic character of Veluspa (Lubomirskia) is the fact 


urning from the peculiar Baikal sponges to species that 
must be assigned definitely to the Spongillidae, I propose first 
to consider two genera (Corvospongilla and U ruguaya) that un- 
doubtedly belong to the Spongillinae. 


Fam. SPONGILLIDAE. 
Subfam. SPONGILLINAE. 
Genus CORVOSPONGILLA, Annandale. 
(Plate iv, fig. 1.) 
"Ree. Lad, Moses nay ee 
g 
detail. My only reason for introducing it here is to point out its 


& 
type-genus of the Potamolepidinae. The skeleton-spicules, as 


1 Ibid. (7) xv, No. 3, p. 2 (1872). 


Vol. IX, No. 1. ] Sponges of the Lake of Tiberias. 79 
[V.8.] 


in Potamolepis, are often stout, smooth amphistrongyles mixed 
with a much smaller number of relatively slender amphioxi, 
but the skeleton is remarkable for the fact that the spicule 
fibres are usually, despite its compactness, of a somewhat ill- 
defined nature, thus differing from those of Potamolepis. 


which are often of two kinds, any specimen of Corvospongilla 
can as a rule be readily distinguished from any specimen of 
Potamolepis by the fact that minute birotulate spicules can be 
found lying free in the parenchyma of the former. In some, if 
not in all, species, however, the number of these spicules present 
is variable; sometimes it is so small that they can only be dis- 
covered with difficulty. 


Genus URUGUAYA, Carter. 
(Plate v, fig. 4.) 

ae Ann. gs Nat. Hist. (5), vii, p. 100 (1881); Pina 

wbid., (6), ii ae Pha Wiegm. Arch. f. Nat 

gesch., Ixi (i). p. 130 (1 

Sponge of stony ee forming crusts or nee 
growths with more or less cylindrical vertical branc The 
external surface is covered by a thick, chitinous membrane in 


spaces occur, having the appearance of granules. The sub- 
dermal efferent grooves take the form of ramifying channels of 


- small calibre, but it is impossible to say, after examining dri 


ed 
specimens only, whether there is a true afferent subdermal 
vity. 


Skeleton forming a dense net-work of vertical and trans- 
verse fibres firmly welded together. The individual fibres are 
very stout and contain a large amount of chitinous material, 
but the sheath it forms is never so regular: as in Veluspa. 
The vertical fibres are not distinguished in any way from the 
horizontal fibres and do not project upwards on the surface of 
the pI 

pi -—In all known species the skeleton spicules are 
stout amphietrumarion, but free amphioxous macroscleres also 
some. There are no free microscleres. The micros- 
clere of the gemmule consists of a short, comparatively stout 
shaft bearing an undivided rotule at either end. The rotules 
are equal and have the form of concave saucers, the sigh 
being in the same direction in the two belonging to each 
spicule. 

Gemmules.—The gemmules, which are small, adhere to the 

base of the sponge, and are poorly provided with or altogether 


lacking in pneumatic coating. Apparently they have no 


foramina. 


80 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (January, 1913. 


Type-species.—Spongilla corallioides, Bowerbank. 
Distribution.—Tropical and subtropical South America on 
the Atlantic side of the Andes. 
ollowing, species belong to the genus :—Uruguaya 
corallioides (Bowerbank), U. repens, Hinde, U. macandrewi, 
Hinde, U. pygmaea, Hinde, and U. amazonica, Weltner. U. 
amazonica is represented in the collection of the Indian Museum 


In describing the genus Potamolepis Marshall confessed 
that the only consideration which prevented him from uniting it 
with Uruguaya was a geographical one, and, so far as the origi- 
nal descriptions of the two genera go, there is no reason for 
considering them to be distinct, except that one group is found 
in Africa, the other in South America. This reason, as all 
students of the Spongillidae would probably now agree, is a 
very poor one. 

inde, however, since Carter and Marshall published their 


appearance is concerned, in his figures. I refer to the thickened, 


race (reticulata) of Spongilla lacustris and in S. crassissima ; 


S. moorei; but I know of no freshwater sponge except the 
species of Uruguaya in which it has the minutely and apparently 
granular (really pneumatic) structure characteristic of that 
genus. 
Subfam. POTAMOLEPIDINAE. 
Genus POTAMOLEPIS, Marshall. 
(Plate iv, fig. 2.) 


! Quart. Journ. Mier. Sei., xli (new series), p. 476 (i899). 


Vol. IX, No. 1.] Sponges of the Lake of Tiberias. 81 
[NV .S.] 


one species (P. chartaria) the amphioxous macroscleres are 


species of Corvospongilla. 

T'ype-species.—Potamolepis leubnitziw, Marshall. 

Distribution.—Tropical Africa. 

The species that certainly belong to Potamolepis are P. 
chartaria, Marshall, P. leubnitziw, Marshall, and P. pechueli, 
Marshall. P. weltneri, Moore,! is a doubtful species, possibly 
composite and possibly in part at least to be assigned to 
spongil e only specimen in the Indian Museum appears to 
represent P. pechueli.* 


Genus PACHYDICTYUM, Weltner. 


(Plate iv, fig. 3.) 


Wiegm. Arch. f. Naturgesch., Ixvii (1), p. 188, pl. vi, figs. 1-4 
and 6-26 (1901). 


! Moore, *‘ The Tanganyika Problem,’’ p. 323 (1903). : 
? It is from the Upper Luarula River, the Anarene being Isan- 
gila, a place on the Congo about 150 miles up stream from the sea. 


82 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [January, 1913. 


The foregoing discussion of the genera other than Corti- 
spongilla and Nudospongilla that belong to the new subfamily 
Potamolepidinae, and of the Spongilline genera liable to be con- 
fused therewith, has cleared the way for a consideration of the 
precise taxonomic position of the sponges of the Lake of Tiberias. 

‘he new genus (Nudospongilla) is proposed, and placed in 
the Potamolepidinae largely as a matter of convenience, in 
order to facilitate the classification of those freshwater sponges 
in which there is some evidence either that gemmules are never 
produced or, being produced, are devoid of microscleres and 
other characteristic features. In other words, there is evi- 


absolutely free of microscleres and could only be assigned to 
it because their skeletal structure was identical with that of 


stand the test of research and criticism, I think its recogni- 
tion convenient as an aid to future investigations. Even i 
Spongilla lacustris or any other typical species of any recog- 
nized gemmule-bearing genus could be proved by actual 


Vol. IX, No. 1.] Sponges of the Lake of Ttberias.. 83 
[V.8.] 


experiment to lose its power of producing gemmules in peculiar 
circumstances, the fact would not provide a valid argument 
against the retention of a separate genus of which the chief 
generic character was the invariable absence or degenerac 
of the gemmules. In any case, it seems to me more satisfac- 
tory to call species of a certain facies in which no microscleres 
have been found, by some such name as Nudospongilla, rather 
than to refer to them vaguely as ‘‘ Spongilla (*) sp.’’; for it 
has been recognized that the specific characters of many such 
species are well marked, and specific names have been conferred 
on fend although their genus has been queried. 

ortispongilla stands on a somewhat different footing, for 
it possesses positive structural characters that separate it from 


all other freshwater sponges. It is perhaps actually related to 
wae eset its resemblance to Veluspa (Lubomirskia) being 
apparently superficial and due to convergence rather than 


genetic a nship. 

ecognition of the subfamily Potamolepidinae as here 
dagnade Renna to some extent on the fact that no gemmules 
have been found in any species that can be definitely assigned 
to the genus Potamolepis. This genus is known from but a 
few specimens, although it is apparently far from uncommon 
in certain parts of the Congo basin. None of these few speci- 


gotten that many encrusting Spongillidae (notably some species 
f Corvospongilla) produce gemmules that adhere firmly to 


Specimen is removed for preservation. There is, therefore, a 
considerable chance of their being overlooked when it is exam- 
ined in a museum. We know that some Nudospongillae do 
produce gemniules, but that these gemmules, which are not 
always present, are less highly organized than those of the 
Spongillinae and entirely lack microscleres. Possibly those of 
Potamolepis are of a similar nature, if they are ever produced : 
those of Veluspa are not very dissimilar. If so, no difficulty 


pewnandtrantiog I am inclined to think that this stadt may 
ultimately prove necessary. Perhaps, however, the genera 

ictyum and Cortispongilla will be f found, a the minute 
anatomy of the Moxaxonida is better known, to be widely 
different in organization from all eae bedsiwites genera and 


84 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [January, 1913. 


recognized as component parts of a family distinct from the 
Spongillidae. For the present it seems convenient to make the 
presence or absence of microscleres a test for the separation of 
the freshwater sponges other than those confined to Lake Baikal 
into two subfamilies, the Spongillinae with microscleres and 
the Potamolepidinae without them. Most of the sponges of the 
Lake of Tiberias belong to the latter subfamily. 


SUMMARY. 


1. It is convenient to divide the Spongillidae into two 
subfamilies, the Spongillinae, in which microscleres are pre- 
sent, and the Potamolepidinae, in which they are apparently 
not produced. 


belongs to the Spongillinae. This race (syriaca, Topsent) has 


and from the R. Barada near Damascus. 

. The four species of Potamolepidinae fall into two genera, 
both of which are described as new, viz. Cortispongilla and 
Nudospongilla. 

4, former genus is monotypic and the one species 


: n ur in. 
China and probably in Central Africa and Celebes. Possibly 
Nudospongilla is related to M etschnikowia, Grimm, a genus 


e 
certain sponges of the genus Veluspa (Lubomirskia) from Lake 
Baikal are 1 


relationship, 


Vol. IX, No. 1.] Sponges of the Lake of Tiberias. 85 
[N.8.] 


ach of the species of Nudospongilla that occurs in the 

lake exhibits very marked structural peculiarities probably of 
an adaptive nature, but the genus itself is distinguished from 
the Spongillinae, more especially from Stratospongilla (a sub- 
genus of the type genus Spongilla) by negative rather than 
positive characters. 

i the sponges of the Lake of Tiberias are in a state 
strong vegetative and reproductive vigour in October (i.e., 

wards the end of the hot dry season), unless they are actually 
undergoing desioation at the margin of the lake. 

ars to be possible to separate the sponge-fauna 

of the lake ato two localized groups, one ie which (consisting 
of Soran fluviatilis syriaca, Nudospongilia mappa 


the lake. 
BIBLIOGRAPHY. 


Annandale, N. . Some animals found associated with 


pp. 55-58 (1906). 
a ‘<The nature of the pores in Spong- 
illa,’’ Rec. Ind. Mus., i, pp .270-71 
907). 


(i 

yi a Freshwater Sponges, where = and 
Polyzoa.’” The Fauna of British 
India including Coflon and Bata 
(1911). 

» “The Freshwater Sponges of the 


Malabar Zone,’’ Rec. Ind. Mus., vii, 
pp. 382-87 (1912). 

>» ‘* Notes on some Sponges from Lake 
Baikal in the collection of the - 


Petersburg,’’ Ann. Mus. Zool. Ac. Sci 
St. Pétersbourg, 1913 (ined.). 

Carter, H. J. .. ‘* History and coca otis 2 of the 
known Oiaeine pongilla,’’? Ann. 
Mag. Nat. Hist, ae vii, pp. 75, 107 

; (188 

Dybowski, W. .. “Studien uber die gprs gona des Russi- 
schen  Reiches besonderer 
Berucksichtigung "dee Spongien- 
Fauna des Bai ees,” Mem 


Ac. Sci. St. Petérsbourg, xxvii (7), 
No. 6, pp. 1—-71 (1880). 


86 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [January, 1913. 


Evans, R. .. ‘* A description of two new species of 
Spongilla from Lake Tanganyika.’’ 
Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., xli (n.s.), 
pp. 471-88 (1899). 
Hinde, G. J. .. ‘On some new species of Uruguaya, 
Carter, with remarks on the Genus,’’ 
Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (6), ii, pp. 1-12 
(1888). 
emp, S. W., and 
Annandale, N. .. ‘‘ Observations on the Invertebrate 
Fauna of the Kumaon Lakes, with 
special reference to the Sponges and 
Polyzoa,’’ Rec. Ind. Mus., vii, 
pp. 120-45 (1912). 
Kirkpatrick, R. ‘* Zoological results of the Third Tang- 


Sa ne es 


on species from the Nile and 
Zambesi,” Proc. Zool. Soc., 1906 (i), 
218-27 


Korotoneff, A. .. **Faunistische Studien am Baikal See,” 
Biol. Centralbl., xxi, pp. 305-11 

(1901). 
Marshall, W. -- ‘On some new Siliceous Sponges col- 


lected by M. Pechuél-Lésche in the 
Congo.’’ Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (5) 

; xii, pp. 395-412 (1883). ‘ 
Miclucho-Maclay, N... ‘‘Uber einige schwimme des Nord- 
: lichen Stillen Oceans und des Eis- 
meeres,’” Mem. Ac. Sci. St. Péters- 


Potts, E... 


Sponges with descriptions of those 
named by other authors and from 
all parts of the World,’’ Proc. Acad. 
Nat. Sci. Philadelphia, 1887. 
‘Clare Island Survey, Freshwater 
Porifera,’’ Proc. Roy. Irish. Acad., 
xxi, pt. 60, pp. 1-18 (1912). 
- ‘Materialen zur Spongien-Fauna des 
| Baical-Sees,”” Zapiski Kiev. Obshch., 
Xvii, (2) (1901). (In Russian). 
Topsent, E. — - -. ‘Sur une Eponge du Lac de Tibériade 
(Potamolepis barroisi, n. sp.),’’? Rev- 
biol. du Nord de la France, v, No. 3 


Stephens, Miss J. 


Svartzevski, B. 


(1892), 
‘ +» “Sur une Ephydatia (£, fluviatilis 


Vol. 1X, No. 1.] Sponges of the Lake of Tibervas. 87 
[N.S.] 


auct.) du Lac de aaron eters 
ord de 


Rev. biol. du ance, V, 
No. 8, p. 1 (18 
Topsent, E, ts “ Description Hie variete nouvelle 


d’Eponge d’eau douce (Ephydatia 
fluviatilis, auct., var. syriaca, Top- 
sent),’’ Bull. Soc. eae des Sciences 


de Rouen, 1909, p. 
Weltner, W. iy ed Spongillidenstudien, “OT. Katalog 
und Verbreitung der bekannten Suss- 
wassersoh War me,’ iegm. Arch. 


f. Naturgesch., 1xi (1), pp. 114-144 
1895 


~ a ‘« Susswasserspo ongien von Celebes 
(Spongillidenstudien, IV),’’ Wiegm. 
Arc f. Naturgesch, Ixvii (1), 
pp. 185-294 (1901). 


EXPLANATION OF PLATES. 
Puate II. 


Photographs of Sponges from the Lake of Tiberias. 
(nat. size.) 


Fig. 1.—Large specimen of Cortispongilla barroiss (Topsent) 
attached to a small stone. The dark depressed mark close 
to the single large osculum shown in the photograph prob- 
ably represents a young sponge of Nudospongilla aster. 
Fig. la.—Vertical section through the osculum of a rather 
smaller sponge possessing one one oscular system: to 
show the branched central cavity. 

Fig. 2.—Part of the type-specimen of Nudospongilla reversa, 
showing the deep oscular grooves. 

Fig. 3.—Type-specimen of Nudospongilla aster (on a flint 
nodule). 

Fig. 4.—Type-specimen of Nudospongilla mappa. 


Puate IIT. 


Skeletons and pisces of Sponges from the Lake 
Tiberias. 
Fig. 1. ee a fava syriaca, Topsent. A. Skeleton- 
spicules, x Gemmule-spicules, x 1 
Fig. 2. Skeltonapicules of Nudospongilla reversa (A. 20: 
B. Fig. 2a.—Vertical section of part of pe i 
feat oF ‘skeleton, x 20. 


88 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [January, 1913.] 


Fig. 3.—Skeleton-spicules of Nudospongilla mappa (A. x 120: 
B. x 40). Fig. 3a.—Vertical section of part of skeleton 
from the external surface to the base of the sponge, x 20. 

Fig. 4.—Skeleton-spicules of Nudospongilla aster (A. x 120: B. 
x 40). Fig 4a.—Vertical section of part of external region 
of skeleton, x 20. 

Fig. 5.—Skeleton-spicules of Cortispongilla barroisi (Topsent), 

x 40. 
N.B.—In all the figures of vertical sections of the skeleton 
the upper profile represents the external surface. 


PuaTte IV. 


Vertical Sections of the External Region of the Skeleton 
in Five Genera of Freshwater Sponges: all x 16. 


Fig. 1.—Corvospongilla burmanica bombayensis, Annand. (from 
Idar State, Bombay Presidency). 

Fig. 2.—Potamolepis pechueli, Marsh. (from the Liapulu RB., 
Central Africa). 

Fig. 3.—Pachydictyum globosum, Weltner (schizotype). 

Fig. 4.—Cortispongilla barroisi, (Topsent) (topoty pe). 

Pig. 5.—Veluspa abietina, Schki. (from Lake Baikal). 


PLATE V. 
Dermal Pores, etc., in the Spongillidae. 


Fig. 1.—Spongilla proliferens, Annand.: a dermal pore-cell, x 
ta (fixed in absolute alcohol and stained with haematoxy- 
in 


Fig. 2.—Nudospongilla mappa: photograph of a part of the 
external surface of the type-specimen (dried), x 7; to show 
the circular pore-areas. Fig. 2a.—A single pore-area with 
the supporting skeleton as seen from the external surface 
(fixed with picroformol-acetic solution and stained with 
borax carmine), x 50. Fig. 2b.—Part of the same prepara- 
‘ion, x 200. 

Fig. 3.—Nudospongilla reversa: photograph of a part of the 
external surface of the type-specimen (dried), x 7; to show 
the scattered pore-areas. 

Fig. 4.—Uruguaya amazonica, Weltner : vertical section through 
an osculum, x 40; to show the thickened pneumatic exter- 


te 
nal membrane and the skeleton-spicules lying parallel to 
it. 


Note.—In figure 2b. the nuclei of the pore-cells are not clearly 
differentiated from chance accumulations of granules as 
was the case in the original drawing 


pie ses els Seas aes 


oi Sar ees rae 


PLATE I. 


Journ. As. Soc. Beng., Vol. 1X, 1913, 


‘sviuasdilL 3O 3xNV1 BSHL 3O SHdVYDOLOHd 


y 


Plate I. 


Jour. As. Soc. Beng. Vol IX, 1913. 


Bemrose, Collo, Derby. 


Photo by-AC.Chowdhary, 


SPONGES FROM THE LAKE OF TIBERIAS. 


Jour. As. Soc. Beng. Vol IX, 1918. 


[ \ A | 
/ \ 

| ale 

os Avene Z Wy pL 


4y / J? 
fi & We fA La BSNS 
ie ANT eg aN =a TAZ N= S 
LSS — > a = S\G Z es Ze 4) 
' aS \ ee \ NE fe a i Shy 
ee ff \ AV AG 
= sh ti Se MY N A= 


= Ses a | 
~ : ° Sen \ 


ms 


Lae 

eo if ~ f = 

Aa 
SSS 


y 
y 
4 Z. 
\ Py 


Lay 4 
may f h WY 


Yo —\ JAS 
es Yl \= 


— SF | 


Ww 
») 


SS 
= 
ria = 
WV = 


| 
S 
—t— 
hy 


D.N. Bagchi, del. 


SPONGES OF THE LAKE OF TIBERIAS. 


Bemrose, Collo., Derby. 


Plate fil 


Jour. As. Soc. Beng. Vol IX, 1913. Plate IV. 


We dal 

YA I, 

ZG iy xy Ys 
_~ Hil a\\ 


KK 


———4 


— 


ES 


ae Bagchi, del. Bemrose, Colle. Derby. 


SKELETON OF FRESHWATER SPONGES. 


Jour. As. Soc. Beng. Vol IX, 1918. Plate V. 


Bemrose. Collo., Derby. 


S.C. Mondul, del. 


DERMAL PORE-CELLS, Etc., OF SPONGILLIDAE. 


9. The Marriage Ceremony and Marriage Customs 
: of the Gehara Kanjars. 


By W. KrrKpatrRIck. 


The *‘ bride price’ among these people is ‘‘ nine twentys,”’ ! 
or one hundred and eighty rupees for a virgin, and in the 
case of a widow ‘‘six twentys,’’ or one hundred and twenty 
rupees. The father of the bridegroom is liable for this pay- 
ment to the bride’s family, or if the bridegroom is adult he has 

RZ. 


to pay the ‘bride price’’ himse e ‘‘divorce price,’’ 
which th Scibernor: is also liable for, is similarly ‘‘ nine 
twentys © os 


or ae pies keep an account of all the expenses 
incurred from the day of betrothal and the sum total of these 
have also to be paid for by the new husband to the divorcée. 

e pour parlers connected with the betrothal are intricate. 
When it is more or less decided who is an eligible bride, and the 
bride’s party are agreeable to receive the advances of the 
bridegroom’s party, the latter open negotiations by sending 
& messenger to the bride’s party or sept or family with Re. 1-4. 
(twenty annas), and a formal request for an interview or meet- 
3 he message is received and considered by the bride’s 
party with much ceremony and the merits and demerits of 
the bridegroom and his ‘side’ or party or sept are freely dis- 
cussed, If the request or ‘‘ offer ’’ is accepted, as it usually is, 
the preceding negotiations being part of the formality, a meet- 


or Rs. 10 being distributed i in daru eins spirit) and bdtasds 
and sweetmeats. The Panchayat offer the first glass or cup of 


a aving quaffed the wine and possessed himself of 
the rupee the bride’s guardian stands up and announces, “ I 
have given away the girl.’’ The whole party, or it may be 
0 the imn and bridegroo 


now form a procession and walk round in a circle seven times. 
This is on the first of the seven days during which the 1 marriage 


& 
o 
By 
5 
4 
3 
z 
r= 
& 
ae 
28 
oe 
Ee 
nm 
5 
Re 
a8 
= 
a’ 
r 
Ps] 


1 See J.A.S8.B., Vol. VII, No. 6. 


90 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. |February, 1913. 


reeds and khas khas'; in the middle of this grass a Jota full of 
water was placed. In the case of a widow marrying I was told 
that instead of a plain bamboo a gaidala or bamboo with a 
rough iron spear head was used. This gaidala is the implement 
used by Kanjars and allied tribes of the ‘‘ hunting state’’ for 
digging for khas khas roots and killing wild animals. To 
return to the first day’s ceremonies ; after this Mundha has 
been set up, oil is distributed to everybody taking part or inter- 
ested in the ceremony. In the next five days the marriage 


bridegroom walking once round the Mundha. On the seventh 
day all the really important events take place and the details 
are remarkably interesting. No doubt in various camps, as 
Hindu influence increases and as time goes on, the ceremonial is 
varied according to the inclinations and tastes of individual 
Chowdhris (Headmen) and their Panch or counsel, but for all 
that there is strong evidence of the survival of many primitive 
customs. 

On the seventh day the bridegroom and his attendants 
proceed to the hut or encampment of the bride carrying with 
them two chattis or gharrds of earthenware—filled with water— 
and after an immense amount of discussion and issuing of 
instructions by every one who has ever been at a wedding 

efore, and wrangling and shouting as a sort of preliminary to 
emphasize the importance of what is about to take place, the 
first part of the ceremony begins with what is called Cowri 
Khélna—playing with cowri shells. First one ghara of water 
is placed in front of the bridegroom and the other before the 
bride—they are said to be ‘‘ given to them.’’ The water from 
the bride’s ghara is then mixed with the water in the bride- 
groom’s ghara and vice versa. The eldest ‘‘ son-in-law ’’ of 
the goth or sept of the bridegroom then places seven cowrt 
shells in each ghard. It should be noted that these people are 


1 The following note is from ‘‘ Hobson-Jobson,” Yule and Burnell, 

p. 219: ‘Pers. H. Khaskhas. Proper Hindi names are usir and lala, The 

‘roots of a grass which abounds in the drier parts of India, V4 
" . 


ous@.-+- 
‘* These roots are well known in France by the name Vetyver, which 18 
‘‘ the Tamil name Vetliveru (ver = root).” : 
gging for khaskhas roots and making tatties therefrom is to this 
day one of the principal of the ‘+ peaceful” avocations of those people 
in Delhi—and I fervently hope that whoever has the ordezing of the 


CUORERD SIE, Ete ine Ca aaa en 


Vol. IX, No. 2.j Marriage Customs of the Gehara Kanjars. 91 
[V.S.] 


divided up into exogamous septs so that the ‘‘ son-in-law ”’ of 


> . 


) 
Kanjars, J. & P. A.S.B, vol. VII, No. 10. The bride and bride- 
groom are now seated with their respective gharas in front of 
them and at a signal they simultaneously make a grab for the 
cowries in the water. If the bride ‘ grabs’ more cowries out. of 
her ghara than the bridegroom does out of his she is declared to 
have jitgid—or won, and the winner is greeted with applause 
and much laughter. The suggestion of course is obvious and 
the idea simple—that if the bride for instance ‘ wins’ she will 


usually are that the marriage will be a happy one. The couple 
are now taken apart by their respective relations and are 
bathed in the water from their gharas—and are then dressed 
in clean clothes. And now comes the second item of the cere- 


and a mock combat takes place. The bride and bridegroom 
are each armed with an imitation Khanda or large knife made 
of sirkhi! (Saccharum sara Roxb.) in one hand and a chunni 
or chaj, a sort of sieve made also of sirkhi, in the other. This 
chaj represents a shield. A few grains of rice are thrown into 
each chaj and in the air. The Khanda is, I am told, a weapon 
the tribes’ forefathers used for decapitating cattle. After a few 
nd th 


applied to an 
nited Provinces. 


92 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [February, 1913.] 


hog or the Rs. 10 is distributed as follows :— 

4 of the hog or Rs. 5 goes to the bride’s party, 

1 of the hog or Rs. 2-8 goes to Panchayat. and 

4 of the hog or Rs. 2-8 goes to the bridegroom’s party. 
These are recognized fees and are called Khhari Tekha. When 
the accounts have finally been ‘‘ found,”’ the total is recorded 
as being the price the husband shall recover from the co- 
respondent in the event of a divorce. 

There is one little detail of the ceremony which is inter- 
esting to record. On to the bamboo pole or Mundha very often 
a wooden representation of a parrot is tied. Now a parrot is 
one of the general totems of the tribe and is with the dog 
about the only live creature which they may not and do not 
kill or eat. 


10. A Comparative Vocabulary of the Language of 
European Gypsies or Romnichal, and 
Colloquial Hindustani. 


By W. KIRKPATRICK. 


According to the Shah Nameh of Firdausi it was during 
the fourth or fifth century a.p. that Behram Gour (A.D. 420) 
received into Persia from India some ten or twelve thousand 
musicians of both sexes who were known as Liris. It had 
been reported to him that the indigent classes of his kingdom 
q ; 


assigned an appropriate residence, just as to-day we are 
attempting to settle the Doms near Gorakhpur or the Haburas 
near Aligarh. . 


‘taking their asses they should load them with their chattels 
“and support themselves by means of their songs and the 
‘‘ strumming of their silken bows.’? The Liris agreeably to 
this mandate ‘‘ now wander about the world seeking employ- 
“ment, associating with dogs and wolves, and thieving on. the 
“road by day and by night.’’ Thus wrote Firdausi nine 
hundred years ago! 2 ‘bei 
e Gypsies in Persia to this day are called Liiris . 
Another Arabian historian, Hamza of Ispahan, we have it on 
the authority of De Goeje confirms this fifth-century Liri 
migration. Hamza appears to have written some fifty years 
earlier than Firdausi, and this author relates that Behram 
Gour caused 10,000 musicians called Zott to be sent from India 


! See ‘‘ Contribution to the History of the Gypsies’’ by M. J. De 
Goeje—in MacRitchie’s ‘‘ Gypsies of India. : 


94 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (February, 1913. 


Zotts or Jats in Turkey who are also known as Tchinjane we 
may take to be the same as the Zingani, Zingari or Zigeuner 
and are identical with the Persian Liris who in Palestine are 
called Zatts or Nawari or Nauri or Nuri. From here the 
gypsiologist will trace the migration to Western Asia and South- 

ast Europe, and we finally have definite proof of the location 
of Gypsies in Europe for the first time in Hungary in 1417." 
From this date we hear authoritatively of the Zigeuner or 
Zingaro or Gypsy race spreading all over Europe into Rou- 
mania, Wallachia, Roumelia, Bulgaria and Transylvania and 
all speaking a veritable Gypsy language. 

‘‘ They are all so alike,’’ says Borrow, speaking of various 
European Gypsy dialects, ‘‘ that he who speaks one of them can 
make himself very well understood by those who speak any of 
the rest.”’ : 

Although I do not accept the linguistic test as by any 
means an infallible test of pedigree, it is no mere assumption 
to ascribe the obviously Oriental, if not actually Indian, origin 
of European Romnichal to the Liri migration mentioned by 
Firdausi. 

Ido not pretend that the comparative list of words I have 
here collated is any more than a revision of similar vocabu- 
laries which are familiar to anyone interested in Gypsy lore, 
but Ihave, I believe, identified a certain number of words which 


common to Romnichal and the Argot of the Kanjars alone 
and to no other languages or dialect that I know. 


Romnichal. Kanjar. 
Malla, Myla, an ass. Mail, a horse. 
Jookal, Jukel. a dog. Shukal, a dog. 
Lubni or Loobni or Luvni, Loobhar or Lubhar, a woman. 
a wench, 


! See ‘‘Contribution to the History of the Gypsies’ by M. J. De 
Goeje—in MacRitchie’s ‘‘ Gpysies of India.’’ 


. 


Vol. IX, Me 0.2.] Vocabulary of Language of European Gypsies. 95 
[W.8.] 


Note.—There is a striking similarity of purpose in the 
Romnichal use of the affix mengro (or engro when the wo ord to 
which it is xed ends in a consonant) and the colloquial use 
of the affix ok or wallah in ce cana Mengro and engro 
are used in fact by European Gypsies just as wala would 
be used by Europeans in the gt whieh serves for Hindustani 
in Calcutta. This word (engro), s Borrow, ‘‘ affixed to a 
noun or verb turns it into sornetah figurative, by which they 
designate, seldom very appropriately. some object for which 
they have no positive name ’’; remarks which apply equally 
to the use of wala in colloquial Hividiaetaik 

rrow himself gives as example ‘ kawn engro,’’ which sig- 
aa ear-fellow—a hare; in Hindustani patois one would say 
0 kan wala janwar : that ear-fellow animal ! 

In Romnichal o represents the masculine and ¢ or ni the 
feminine, for example rom a man or bridegroom, romni 
woman or bride ; or boro rei a great gentleman and bori rani a 
great lady. In Hindusta ani we have jat, jatni; dom, domni ; 
barra raja, or bara rais ; barri rani, and so on 

Though I dare say it is of no ee interest I would 
draw attention to what has struck me as an apparent simi- 
larity in the pronunciation of some Hindustani words by Ben- 
galis and by Romani Ryes. 


>> 


The Romnichal In Heed it is 


unce 

For instance.— Bara, big, great . boro Borr 

% Nanga@, bald, naked .. nongo ee longo. 

es Sikha, dry . shuko  Shuka. 

“a Disra, second duite ae 

Bs Kal or Kalko, to-morrow Me 

s Do, two ° doo Dooi. 
and so on. 

My Romanes vocabulary I have taken almost entirely from 

Smart and Crofton, a few words from Borrow and also from 


Colonel Harriot’s paper.!. Smart and Crofton have relied for 
the identification of many words in their vocabulary on Paspati 
in his ‘‘ Etudes sur les [chinghianes ’’ and on Dr. Liebick in 
his ‘*‘ Die Zigeuner,’’ etc 
The strongest argument: which can be used in support of 
Romnichal being Indian in origin is supplied by the etymology 
of the words of this vocabulary, in that some ‘of the words are 
searly Sanskrit while others are of Persian — 
i ‘ See Bibliography g given in Pasi Boli of Kanjars, J.A.S B., vol. vii, 
oO. 


96 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. 


Acquaintance .. 
Alive 


ir 


All 
Ancient, old 
Ant 


re 
Barefoot 
Beak 


i February, 1913. 


| 
Gypsy. 


C 


1 See J.A.S.B., vol. vil, 


. | Jongar 
. Doomo 


Bes one 
ae 

i o Peero 
Chines nok 


es | Monto, Moa. 


i. sok 


ats 
. | Bauro, boro 
heriklo 


| 
} 


. Dander, dan 
 Kaulo 


Coppur 
s | Beeno, beano 
. | Dooi 


| Raklo 
| Tootchi, cuci 
Baulesko, bal 
Bauro 


. | Ka 


No 7, pp. 368 et seg. 


Hindustani. 


. Upar. 


Dukh. 
Burha ooo purt amr, - 
pura 


. Chin aA 

. | Jsta, pone (dialectic). 
| “ee bayar (badal a 
Fea. 
Sara. 


. Purana 
. |Compare kird, an insect. 
| Pichh. 


. Sota. 
.. Mailisahorsein Kanjar 


Nanga, naked. 

| Nanga, Hora 

| Nanga ; 

| Chiria ir tio would be 
a bird’s nose. 


ry 
| Dant marna, to bite. 
Kala. A Bengali iar 
pronounce kala 
kaulo. 


apra. 
| Biyai—given birth to. 
Donon 


PB | Lapka. 
.. | Chachi. 
.. | Bal is Hind. for hair. 


| Bara sa, chowra sa a would 
: be very broad. 


a 


Vol. IX, No. 2.] 
(V.9.] - 


Vocabulary of Language of European Gypsies. 97 


English. Gypsy. Hindustani. 
Brandy i | Tatto paani .. Hind. tatta is hot and 
pani water. 
Bride . Romni Compare Dom and Dom- 
Bridegroom Rom ny a Dom 
‘yr is very comm 
ech verible with ‘* “d, i 
ni is a common Hind. 
feminine termination. 
Candle Mumbli Mum, wax. 
Chill Bauroshil — il, very damp. 
Chamber Kamora 
Jlergyman Rashi Rishi. a saint or sage. 
Coal (fire) Wongar, wangar.. Angar, embers. 
old hil : il. 
Comb, n Sena congli .. Kanght, kanghia. 
Comb, v Kon .. Kanghi, kav 
Coat ha ss Srink an overcoat. 
Come . | Av, Avel a. 
Copper _Hauro a Hari green. 
orn | Chiv rehun. 
Count Ghinya, gin | Gin*na 
ow vni aeet 
Create 
ow Kaulo chiriklo Kali chiryd, black bird. 
Crown (5s.) ansh kol anch, five. 
ross | Trihool Tirsil. 
Cry | Rov Rona, to cry 
Do, to | Kair ar. 
Dance . Kel .. | Khel, to play. 
Dark .. Kaulo .. | Kala sa. 
ie | Mer Mar. 
Did, | Kerdo Kar diya. 
Distance Lt pe | Dir. 
Distant | | 
og . | Jookel . | # decir is Kanjar Argot 
| fo 
i Pi and pind, to drink. 
bes as Sukha. By a Bengali, 
the Hind. word would — 
be pronounced very 
| like she 
Drunk .. Motto, mato Matwa 


l the TARR. vol. vit, No.7 


98 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [February, 1913. 


English. Gypsy. | Hindustani. 


Chik .. Kichar, muddy; chhi! 
chhi! an exclamation, 
al dirty. 


Dirt, earth 


Ear “ | Kan, kaun Ka 
Eight . | Oitoo ae 4th. 
Eye is | Yok, yak -. | Ankh. 
Hiqual, alike .. Simen .. Saman. 
Face -. | Moa -- Munh. 
Famine .. Bauro bukaloben.. Bari bhuk, great hunger. 
Far Door ees) Dur 
Fasten .. Pander ..  Bandhna 
Father .. Dad, ba .. | Abba, ba, athens dada, 
grandfat 
Feather .. | Pur, Por <7) Par 
Finger : | aoe e% | Angusht. 
Fire «| Yog . | Ag. 
First . | Yekto Be BL. on 
Fish | Matcho, matchi .. Machhi. machhia or 
| machhli 
Five ; | Pansh, pansch .. Panch. 
Flea -s | Pisham, pishen .. Pissit. 
Flour ! | Atos .+ Ala 
Foot ae a piro ‘Pair, paon, feet. 
Gentleman iiet Re is Jide 
: | Rakli ee a a form of trans- 
position common inall 
Indian dialects. 
Give .. | Del, De .. Dé (dena). 
Go Jova, jaw 6) ee 


'In a grammar and vo cabulary of the ‘“‘Nawar or Zutts the 
Nomad Smiths of | alestine,’’ Journal of the rote — bier ia iii, 
No. 4, by R. A. Stewart pee ea M.A,, F.S.A 

given as examples of ords nominative nailer wh “any pei in 
consonants we see a caewksble similarity to modern colloquial Hindu- 
stani. 


English. Zuth, Hind. 
Tongue A g's. be 90. 
Fire . Ag Ag 
Flour .. Atos eee 
Grandmother .. Dad 
Tinder .. Cokmak ; : eek 
Sister ce BOK - Bahi 

ke Sa San 
Night . Arat Rat 


Vol. es . Y i 2.] Vocabulary of Language of European Gypsies, 99 


English. 


Goat 


Gold 


ood * 
Grandmother .. 


Happiness 
glad) 


e 
Hark ! 
Harlot 


Head 
Hawker 
Hay 
Heart 


Heat 


& 
3 
< 


mon 


Hindustani. 


| | 
. Lavines  bokro. | 
| Lavines is a com- 


Gypsy or | 
_ Romnichal piel — bakrs. 


i Soonakei 


| Kooshko 
| Bauri-dei, dade 


Bauro 


>of oe 


| 
| K capa 


ws | Shoonia 


~— Lubni 


_ Shéro.. 
_ Bikomengro 
Kas, cas 


- | Zee 


‘ | Tattoben 


Son 


; “Kish happiness. 


| Dadi, grandmother ; 
dayya, cae 
ara. 


Bal. 


| In Kanjar Argot lubhar 
(see J.A.S.B. No. 7, 


_ vol. vii). 
Sir. 


Bikri-wala. 
| Kas, rushes, reeds. 
Ji, life, soul, spirit, 


mind. 
/Taita, very hot (col- 
Si ial). 

Sun 


Sing 
.. | Garna, to bury. 
| Bhik. 


ure 

Janna or chinna, to dis- 
tinguish. 

pie a wife. 

Lamar, lang, limp 

| Bar 


Palla. 


100 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [February, 1913. 


English. 


Leather 
Lice , louse 


ong 
Vere long way.. 
Look 


Night 


Old 


. | Cham ss 
-- | St, Spode iateed 
.. | Shoon : 


i 


a Dooveri—doovori.. 


- Gairo, manoosh .. 


Hindustani. 


| Chamra. 
Jin, j002. 
Sun! 


dt 
- | Dur, far. 


«© Dur dit ae 
_ Dekh. 


, jovr. 
‘Kam, love, desire. 


. 
| 
. | L 


. Pari ‘ume, full age. 
| Manus, colloquial Hind. 
wu. 2. 


Kona : | | Khaini. 
Mas _, | Mas, Mans. 
_Charvo, chara ; | Chherna : 
-Tood .. | Didh. 
| Chein . Chand. 
Dei _ | Dai, a foster-mother ; 
daya, oh mother. 
Rov .. Ro, Rona. 
Mooi et Mun. 
Booti . | Bahut. 
| bee Hind. kechar, pee 
| also chhi! = 
Chik pression pets Pit 
\ | | jabi chikar. 
++ Meiro .. | Mert or mera. 
di Non ..  Nanga 
>| Nav . | Nam. 
- | Sooy, su .. | Sus 
| Neye .. Naya 
| Raati, arat _. | Rat 
es, rar Be | Rais, revs. 
ok | Nak. 
Pooro | Purana, piri ‘wmr, full 
_age. 
Opré U par. 
| Yek | Ek. 
M | Mera 
| Dooka | Dukh 


Vol. IX, No. 2.] Vocabulary of Language of European Gypsies. 101 
[V.8.] 


English. Gypsy. | Hindustani. 
Play -. | Kel .- | Khel: 
Plank .. | Kasht .. «| Math. 
Plunder .. | Loor » tthAbhe 
Pray .. Mong .. Mang, ask, beg, p 
Prostitute oo Lubni, Luoni .. | The Bacar dialodt ies 


| Lubhar, a wife. Cf. 
Sanskrit Lubha, to in- 
flame with lust, from 
which the English word 
ote is derived. 


Queen .. Rani et 
Rabbit .. Shoshi is ‘Sassi (Sanskrit sasak). 


| Gin ‘ 
Brishindo, brishen | Barish, barsat. Sans. 
| brish. Mod. Greek 


| | Bpegu:ov. 
Red .. Lolio, lullo de 
Red herring . Loli matcho e | tal machhi, red fish. 
Religious, con-. 
verted shel \sSherenfe vel | Hind. noble, eminent = 
| sharif 
Riband | Dor Y . Dori. 
Rich ‘| Bary Bara, great. 
Ring id Vong vongushi Angtth 
River 6 eee Darya 
Roast sie Pek .. Paka 
Rob ok .. | Ltt. 
Room .. _ Kamora | Kamra 
Sack, see bag . | Gono, gunno_..._- Of. gunny-bag.! Sans 
: _ gont. Mahratti, goni- 
| | gon, a sack, sackin ng. 
Saddle 2 We Ze Zen Lin. 


! 1785, Tippoo’s Letters, 171. ‘‘ We saci two menrelg dir ect- 
ing them  Tinpoo' despatch 1 000 goonies of grain to that person of 
mi - degree.’’ 

ate a article, Journal Gypsy Lore Society, p. 217, No. 3, vol. iv, 
by Augustus John, he gives a vocabulary from among which I have 


ick. eycies 
hehe Romani. English. Hindustani. 
Cuci Breast .. Chichi. 
Darana Fear - Dar. _ 
Kanglt Comb Kanghi. 
Pani, pai .. Water .. Pani. — 
Surt .. Knife .- Chhuri. 
Saddle Zin. 


Zen 


102 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (February, 1913. 
gesy ) 3 7 
English. | Gypsy. Hindustani. 


Salt se: | Lon Non, nin, lan, lon. 

Scent _ Soongimus ~ 

: stinks, ake Sunghna@, to smell, active 
mell 


smell. 
Scissors ee Cate hes a4 homes 


wa ee | Darya (the sea, a river): 
| barra pani, lana pani. 
Second | Duito | Diisra. 
See | Dik De kh. 
Sell . | Bikin, bik pele. bik gya, sold. 
Serpent | Sap 
ew _Siv oe sila, sewing. Sans. 
siv. 
Sheep-stealing . . | Bokra chorines .. | Bakri churana. 
Sheep .. Bokro, Bokra _ Bakri, a goat. 
Silver fie | oop | | CE. roopee, rupya. 
Sing .. | Ghit ghiv | Git, song. 
Single ..  Yekind Rc | Aki la. 
Sister .. | Pén, bén .. Bahin 
it | Besh Bengali, bosho. 
Slay a _ Mar 


eep | Sov ooter .. So, sona. 
Smell (see scent) | Soon, soongomis. . aed 
Soul | Zee zs the heart, mind. 


Son-in-law! .,. _Jamuiro 


\ Sele Vist 


English. fae, Hindustani. 

Father oe Ce Abba, bap. 

Rain :» Brisindo -- Barish. 

See (sight) -. Dik .- Dikhai dék 

Dog Jukel .. Jookal is en ual Asie dog 0 
the language of t S  Kenjers 
of Up 

rem .. Jamuiro -. Jamai. 

To-morrow -. Kaliko .. Kal, kalko. 

To do, make .. Ker -. Kar, karna. 

Nos .. Nak . Nak. 

Thou Reged ky cpm Ka 


Vol. IX, No. 2.] Vocabulary of Language of European Gypsies. 103 
[N.S.] 


English. Gypsy. 
Snake : | Sap 
Spirits . Tattoo pan 
Stomach oo Per 
Steal .« | Chor 
Stranger -- Perdas 
tra a | Poos, pus 
String -+ | Dori 
Sword ; | Bauro choort 
Tailor : | Sunengro 
Take Lel, lé 
Take care of Rak 
eeth 4 Danyaw oe 
Telescope Door-dikomengro. . 
There Odoi 
Thief Chor, choromengro 
looremengro 
in ero 
Throat .. | Karlo, curlo 
hou .- | Too, tootr 
y .. | Teero, tookt 
ot ; 


aes declare, an- 
swer, spea 


o-morrow 

noha te 
ongue 

too 

Town (see vil- 
lage) he 


Trout 
True 
Turkey 


Twenty 


Cok ma 
Pander, pand 


Pukker 
Koliko, collico 


Callico 
Chib, chiv jib 
Dan 


ge; = town or vil- 
Reies SLs at hi (the 
gentle folks” fish ) 


Tatcho .e 
Kaui rani (iit. 
black queen or 
lady) “ 


San 
Tate pani, lit. hot water. 
| Ohors, chor, a thief. 


| Pardesi 
| 
| 


eee 


| Hind. bars churt j is liter- 


Khabar dari sé rakh. 
Dan 
Dir pub. see ata dis- 


Chak mak. 
Band, bandhna, 


Pukarna, to call. 
kalko. 


Gaon, a village. 


Reis or rais ki machchhi, 
(the fish for gentlefolk). 
Sachcha. 


Pert, kali rani in Hind. 
ns black queen. 


104 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [February. 1915. 


English. Gypsy. Hindustani. 
Two .. | Door heap #7) 
Uncle .. | Koko .- | Chacha (colloquial ka ka). 
Up, upon .. | Opre, apre re Upar. 
rine j | Mut. 
Urinate ) Muter, mutra | Mitna 
Js .. | Men -. Main. 
Very ‘. as boots -- Bahut. 
Village ‘ Gaon. 
Walk es | J al also peer, piriv Pair, foot or phirna and 
chal chalna, to walk. 
Warm ae | Tatto -» | Tatta (colloquial) or 
|  Thhatta. 
Water cs, | We pant | ani. 
We ae | me Ps 
Weep “ ae «| RO, 
Whale es | Bauro matcho .. Bard pane te = big fish. 
Wheat sige | hiv Gehiin. 
Where io | wean oe tero ker = 
is your 
titmase) -» Kahan, kahan tera ghar: 
| | where is your house ? 
Who K .. | Kaon 
Wife . .. Romi, romni se Goiipais dom, domni: 
| see bride. 
Without >. |e (prep.) - | Bé. 
00 -. Poo, -- Pashm, pashmina. 
Wood (plank) . eal | Rath. 
Wor pe « iN -» | Lafz. 
Worm ~-. | Re | Kira 
Year or Besh, ” Bereh Baras 


to-morrow) ..  Koliko -- Kal, kal ka. 
Y onder -. | Odoi, adoi - Udhar. 

1 Too, toot Pu. 

Your, yours Teer . | Tera. 
Numerals 

One -<| Fek ~. | BE. 
Two -. | Dooi E : 
Three Trin -- | Ten. 
Four | Stor «» | Char. ; 


1 Compare Lavengro or Lavolil, the Word Book of Romany. 


Vol. oe No. 2.] Vocabulary of Language of European Gypsies. 105 
[V.8.] 


English. — | Gypsy. Hindustani. 


| 

Five Pansh | Panch 
ix . Sho | e 

Seven ! . | Ajta .. | Sat 
Eight . | Oit | 
Nine .. Enneah (or desh sore- 

_ but ek). |v 
Ten .. | Desh -- | Das. 
Eleven .. | Desh ta yek .. Das aur ek. 
Twelve cet) spy oy ORE ‘ oie aD, 
Thirteen ; gy eile rs 
Fourteen jyangy MOOR yy 08Gr 
Fifteen >> 4 pands 5.9» panch 
Sixteen id. ae gp One ohhe 
Seventeen ste ~*~ Li gi ie ea: 
Eighteen 5 Si hy RA: 
Nineteen jp ae oe sorebut 

yek ,, das kam ék. 

Twenty | Bho, dos deshenc 2 Bae, oo Ba 


ace at that few of the English bypass are i og with 
this word—consequently when they w ish to ex press the mber seven 
without belie understood by outaiders, they say duo trins ta yeck, which 
in Hindustani would be do tin aur 2k. 


ee 
=f 
i “es j 


oh 


oe ee 


11. Account of an Expedition among the Abors in 1853. 


By Rev. Fr. Kricx (of the Foreign Missions of Paris 
and Superior of the South Tibetan Mission). 


Translated by the Rev. A. Ginte, S.J. 


[Fr. Nicholas Michael Krick, born at Lixheim (France) in 
1819, came out to India in 1850. From Gauhati, where he 
made a short stay, this plucky missionary set out alone, with 
his cross, his flute, his sextant and his médicine-box, on his 


tory of the Mishmis, he succeeded in passing the Tibetan fron- 
tier and settled in the village of ‘‘Sommeu”’ or Samey. But 
as short-lived: after three weeks the Yong forced 


missionaries were ruthlessly massacred by Kaissa, a Mishmi 


getting scarce; moreover 
will impart additional inte 
and customs. 

The following is the title-page of the book : 
en 1852/et d’ un voyage 
M. l’abbé Krick/De la 


Latry./ Paris/A la li é 
d’ Auguste Vaton/50 Rue du Bac/1854./ 


Fr. Krick’s relation on the Abors goes from p. 169 to 
G 


p. 201. —A.-G.] 


p- 170. 


p- 171. 


108 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [February, 1913 


CuaPpTer I, 


Journey among the Abors.—Difficulties to know their country. 
—Vain aitempts of the English to penetrate into it.—Ceremonies 
attending my reception.—General assembly at my arrival.—Super- 


and missionary from Europe.—Description of a fire.—Supersti- 
tious practices to extinguish it and drive away the fire-spirit.— 
Other accidents happening in the village attributed to my presence.— 
My expulsion decided. —Departure.—The village of Mimbo. 


Deak Sir, ! 

I sent to Mr. Foucaud* the journal of my expedition to 
Thibet ; to-day I send you the account of a shorter and less 
dangerous journey among the Abors or Padams. 

As n ropean has ever gained admittance into this 
country, it is difficult to have an idea of its geographical 
features. en, as you know, it would require long an 
familiar intercourse with a people, to give anything like an 
accurate description of its customs. Nothing short of master- 
ing its language and living its home-life would qualify one for 
suc ; 

This remark is never so true as when a traveller is called 
upon to describe a savage tribe such as the Padams; they are 


“unfamiliar with the first rudiments of the* most ordinary 


knowledge, they possess no written language, and profess the 
strictest abstention from all intercourse with strangers. I am 
therefore hardly qualified to speak of the Abors with authority, 
though I am the only foreigner who has stayed among them 
for some considerable time 

Since the English first occupied Assam 29 years ago, 
several agents of the East India Company have tried to gain 
access into this country, with a view, if possible, to enter into 
commercial relation with Thibet, and to ascertain whether the 
Siang, known to the English by the name of Dihong, is really 
the famous Zang-po, which crosses Thibet from East to West, 
and which has been such a puzzle to the geographers of the 
last centuries. But the Padams knew the ‘‘Timeo Danaos 
et dona ferentes.’’ ‘If we allow,’’ so they said, ‘‘ any English- 


In their Opinion, any white skin, any nose somewhat 
rotruding is of English make. This will make you understand 
the trouble I had in getting their consent to receive me. My 


' This account was sent to Dr. Bousquet, surgeon at th Necker 
Hospital, Paris, under whom Fr. Krick had taken some lessons in medi- 
cine. . 


2 Professor of Tibetan. 


Vol. IX, No. 2.] | Fr. Krick among the Abors (1853). 109 
[N.8.] 


cross so similar to theirs and my reputation of a French priest 
were my only passport. My reception was accompanied with 
ceremonies peculiar enough to find place in this letter 
Eighteen young men met me at the foot of the mountain. 
No sooner did I move on, than the two youngest of the band 
proceeded to cover my body with leaves, whilst singing words 
utterly unintelligible to me. They meant of course to purify 


ted with all sorts of devilries and monsters pierced with arrows, 
and in striking attitudes that baffle description. This piece of 
architecture was fearful to behold, as well it might be, for it 


through the first barricades; the most vicious devils would 
retreat before such a terrific uproar. The spirits being thus 
settled to everybody’s satisfaction, I had now to lend myself 
to the curiosity of the crowd. 

In an instant, I was surrounded by a circle of eager men 
and women, studying every detail of my figure. I was re eated- 


low, and his flabby ears, 
admiration. The crowd kept watch the whole night ; fleas were 
o less anxious to get to my. skin; with so many guests, sleep 
of course could not be very long. 
ext any. general ‘abet which the whole village was 
convoked. The six chiefs sat down in a circle, right in the 
The president of this uncouth senate 
sit at his right, and without previous 
ad with a reed helmet of monstrous size, 
s hair, and another 
of bear’s fur, two bear’s tusks crossing eac n mM} 


This was the signal that opened the meeting. After 


p. 175. 


p- 176. 


110 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (February, 1913. 


was to accompany me, I demanded permission to wait for him. 
«Yes, yes,” they all replied with one voice, ‘‘ and if you cure 
our sick, we shall keep you for ever, and we shall build you 
a house,’’ and in evidence of their sincerity, the chiefs put the 
guard-house at my disposal. 

No sooner was I settled down in my new home, than 


I rit 
the appearance of a hospital of incurables: here is a young 
woman whose arm is covered with a horrible ulcer. ‘‘ When 


evil spirit got hold of me, and he has done his work.’’ Another 
patient has his stomach swollen to awful dimensions. I see 


cures, they would not believe me- 
y power was in the touch of my hand. And so they went on 
repeating: “‘ You are the most powerful Dondai (priest) ; 2° 


“‘spirit can resist you ; y 
this the practical consequ 


Vol. No. 2.] Fr. Krick among the Abors (1853). 11) 
[N.8.} 


thing with my hand, even the most disgusting wounds. I was 
not given a minute’s rest. At every moment some one came 
rushing to me: ‘‘ Father, some medicine! Come quick !’’ At 
early dawn I went out to see my patients only to return at 
midday thoroughly fagged. 


‘from the common house. The next morning, the presid 
came to inform me of what had happened. ‘‘ Migom,’’ he 


‘‘ Migom, we have at last made those cowards understand the 
‘folly of their behaviour, and that, instead of expelling you, 
“we ought to keep you to look after our sick. Besides, are 
** you not our father ? Did you not, at an early period, bring p. 178. 
“us the blessing of the cross? And now, after having been 
‘‘round the world, you have been restored to us. When you 
‘‘ will have mastered our tongue, who knows what new benefits 
**you will have to bestow on us? Therefore stay, it is the 
‘‘ wish of the whole village.’’ ls 

But the devil, who has no worse enemy than the mission- 
ary, was not to be so easily beaten. Two days later, woeet 
t 


prevented the accident. 


p. 189, 


p. 181. 


112 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (February, 1913. 


The next thing to do was to imprison the spirit of fire 
on the scene of the disaste~. The burnt houses were hedged in 
and surrounded with devil-scaring emblems. In spite of these 
precautions, it was feared that the devil might escape and take 
refuge into some odd corner of the village, so the very next 
day all the men, armed to the teeth, with beating of drums, and 
fearful howls, set out in pursuit of the devil, far into the jungle. 

The two families whose dwellings had been burnt down, 
were banished for one year, for if any of their members were 
to set foot in a house within those twelve months, the building 
would not escape from the flames. ; 

Useless to add that my presence was made responsible for 
all those accidents. The loss of two mitous (wild cows) sus- 
tained by my next neighbours increased the public distrust. 
Great, however, was the embarrassment of those poor people ; 
on the one hand, they had found in me a friend, ready to do 
anything to bring relief to their bodily as well as to their spiri- 
tual ills; on the other hand, fright chilled their attachment to 

The diplomats of the village could not bear to see me 

settling so close to Assam ; as for me, I delayed my departure 

s much as I could, as I was anxious to give to my confrére, 
Mr. Bourry, sufficient time to join me. 

Eventually, on Good Friday, whilst all the huntsmen were 
gathered at my house for a hunting-meet, Lendemk, the great 
chief, said to me :—‘* I order you to leave the village to- 
‘“ morrow.’’—** All right,’’ Isaid. ‘‘I had come to give you 
“my affection, and to offer you my services, but as you refuse 
‘“my benefits, I will carry them elsewhere.’’——‘‘ Oh! I don’t 


‘* the reason that induces me to go,’ I answered. ‘‘ The very 
rst accident that happens in the village, you will attribute it 
to m 3? 


20’ (Greenwich). 


_ Then I cast a long parting glance towards the village of 
Mimbo which I was so sorry to leave. | 


Vol. ie bg 2.| Fr. Krick among the Abors (1853). 113 
S.] 


The village was situated at a height of 600 ft. above the 


foot of the mountain. Towards the South, the eye rests on 
the smooth plains of Assam, where the famous Siong or Dihong P. 182. 
of the Assamese shoots up, reflecting the rays of the sun across 
the sky 

Now a few words on the race to which the Padams be- 
long and on the marvellous signs which I have discovered 
among them. 


CHAPTER II. 


To what race do the Padams belong ?—T heir origin as told by p. 183. 
themselves.—The four kinds of crosses worn by this people.—T heir 
opinion on the meaning and origin of this symbol.—Conjectures 
on the subject.—Costumes.—Ornaments.— W eapons.— Government. 


nners. 
Hospitality —Religion.—Their extreme superstitiousness.— Pen- 
ances to appease the demons.—Character of the Padam.—Some 
words of his language. 

The Padams stand midway between the Mongolian and 
the Caucasian races. They are beardless; hair and eyes ar 
black ; the skin is brown; the eyes stand at right angles with 
the nose. The forehead is flat, the face broad, the nose short, 
the cheek-bones somewhat prominent, and stature moderate. 

This 1s how they account for their origin: °’ When the 
‘ earth was but a mass of mud, God came down from Heaven ; 

‘‘ with a handful of mud he made two brothers and two sisters. p. 184. 
‘‘ The Padams descend from the elder, and the Miris from the 
Hence the Padams are a privileged race, 

ble on the battle-field.’ 

en; the pattern 
ristian origin.! The majority 


1 We venture to suggest that in this e or 1 
marks Fr. Krick was unduly influenced by his zea as a missionary. 


here is, we , no reason to atte 
from Christian sources, as the cross —one of th est designs imagin- 
rm or another in all sava, ornamentation. 


on Abor men or women are iar 
ck’s observation would lead one to 
detailed in Sir George Dunbar’s 


ose, and ail will be found full 
h cua tet af the Abors and Galongs.— 


sup 
forthcoming memoir on the anthropology of 
J. Coggin-Brown and S. W. Kemp. 


p. 185. 


114 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (February, 1913. 
> 


colour §{{; others wear the ordinary cross + with the vertical 
beam running along the nose, and the cross-bar above the eyes. 
Others wear the Lorraine-cross +. with the upper cross-beam 
on the forehead, and the lower lying across the bridge = mh 
nose. hers again wear the Maltese cross on their ca : ; 
The women have the Maltese cross tattooed on the upper lip, 


? 
and on their legs the Lorraine-cross with two St. Andrew’s 
crosses drawn on either side, as shown in figure 


XX#XX 


have as a rule their chin tattooed with — 
vertical and parallel lines; the women have five or seven ~ 
them, as the case may be, on the chin, and four on the al 
ip, two on either side of a cross, and the whole set is bracketed. 


Srepcee) 


“* once received into heaven.’? ««B "a “1 diaowi 
‘‘ sign?’ T asked; ‘ Where is he to go ?’’—-** God will dis 
‘him and cast him off,’? ! 


a letter, dated Saikwock, Ist December, 1851, Fr. Krick thus 
describes his first interview with the Abors :— 5 shies 
September I landed at Saikwock, situated along 


Captain Smith, commander of the 
ly. 


he v » Captain Wath, who was organising an ae 
pedition for the protection of the Dihong gold-washers. invited me 


d see me safe to Tibet. ‘‘ We can hd 
; **he would come to grief,—and we are respon 
for our guests.’? 


a struck me most during this conference was, ae their 
Savage dress, the typically European Physiognomy of those peopte._ 

But I soon noticed, at a closer examination, most yovdoetacr 30 
@ cross neatly designed and painted in blue on t re 
©m wore it on the forehead, others on the are: i 
had a double horizontal beam, the vertical line runn 


tattoo-marks: it 
faces. Most of th 
of these crosses 


Bch in 
Ree 


Vol. ee No. 2.] Fr. Krick among the Abors (1853). 115 
[N.S. 

I may be allowed to hazard here a suggestion with regard 
to the origin of these signs. It is my opinion, and all those 
who have come in contact with the Padams agree with me 
that the pattern, as 1 have described it, is the Christian cross. 
These are briefly my reasons : 


lst. No other marks are tattooed on their bodies./ 

2nd. Their crosses are altogether similar in shape to p: 186. 
our four crosses : the ordinary cross, the Maltese, 
the St. Andrew’s and the Lorraine crosses. 

3rd. The spiritual meaning attached to them by the 
natives strongly confirms my conjecture. 


What then would be the meaning of the vertical lines, 
always numbering 3, 5 or 7, with which they tattoo their chins ? 
Might not the number 3 be a reminiscence of the Blessed 


Fr. Athanasius Kircher in his in-folio bearing the title ‘‘ La 
Chine illustrée’’ mentions several missions established in 
Thibet, China and Tartary from the time of the Apostle 
St. Thomas. This book was printed at Amsterdam in 1665. 
Healso published a map, roughly drawn, but giving accurately 
enough the chief towns and districts ; on it he traced the route 
followed by Frs. Francis! Dorville and John Grabére* from 
Peking to Goa,’ throvgh China,/Tartary, Thibet and Bengal. P- 187. 
These Fathers travelled from Lassa to the North of the Padam 
country, whilst according to their information Fr. Andrada 
went as far as the Thibetan town Radoc. Now we are told 
that in this country they discovered evident traces of the 
Christian religion, proving to a certainty that the Gospel had 
been preazhed to those tribes. They speak of three men who 
bore the names of Dominic, Francis and Anthony.* 


from the forehead down to the tip of the nose; others had only one single 
cross-beam running either across the nose or above the eves. 
h : 


I made them understand I was a priest, a teacher of prayer, and 
that I had come to explain to them the mysterious power of the cross 
i i i in turn 


Cf. Annales dé la Propag. de la Foi, 1852 (1853 2). 

! His istian name was Albert. 

2 To be spelt: Griiber or Grueber. 

8 Not Goa, but Agra. 

4 Neither Father A. de Andrade nor Fathers Dorville and Grueber 
had anything to do with the Abors. Their journey lay hundreds of miles 


116 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (February, 1913. 


In 1826 Colonel R. Wilcox, on discovering the use of the 


since the twelfth century there existed a mission in the South 
of Thibet among a tribe called Shokhaptra.! 


d by Grueber in 
a@y from A The three native Christians mentio one 
Kircher’s China illustrata (Amsterdam, 1667, not 1665) must have been 


they Our 
Chris ee in pad ak 8 te the wears 1661- 63, when a aga wren 
of Portuguese, English, Dutch and Armenian urers helpe 
Jumla in his conquest ‘of A 


episode is related very spiritedly in Relation du see d’un Vaisseau 
landois, Nommé 


Hollan ’ mé Ter Schelling fay copy is a fragment of a collec ae 
PP. vi+131-276), pp. 250 sqq. The treasures end i pee a 
tombs of t gs of Assam were prodigious. Mir Jumla himself ca ; 

way are illio he Po a 
(half-castes) settled at Rangamati, a 


yg mati. 0 C i 
neighbourhood before 1695, the Chr isti 
d 


number of similar instances, ranging over countries very far apart, — 
the explanation of which is extremely c ] As suggested by Mes 
J. Coggin- rown an: 


: gi emp, the use of crosses as tattoo-marks 4 t 
have not the slightest Miiinaxion with Christianity; on the other hand, 
hould 


is no imipeaeibie that the Ab have borrowed the sign fro pe 
Tibetans. it bee d more recognized that the sigh © 
he cross—not stitka—found among the aad she etans 
is due to the influence of Nestorianism, an influence all too little arya 
edged heretofore. 1 refer the reader to the Lodges Sinologigues ae ? 

- GaILnarD, §.J., Croi « et Swastika en Chine, Edn., Changhai, ni 
primerie de la Mi ission 


Catholique, fois pp. 154-155, where Fr. Krick 
observations are mention Hi. 
1[E 


to 
very tel a ely gone tianity in India would like 
know whence Father Krick sae ok t this informati ist ? Is anything kno +? 
about the date and authorship of that t map or again about any of Wilco 


Vol. IX, No. 2.] Fr. Krick among the Abors (1853). 117 
[N.S.] 


Now, I have entered Thibet by the South-Eastern frontier, 
without coming across any traces of our holy religion: several 
other travellers entered it by the South-West with no greater 
success. So, it is quite possible that the Shokhaptras be a 
tribe occupying the South of Thibet, in the vicinity of the 

adam country. As a matter of fact, I have often been told 
by the Padams that there existed towards the North, before 
reaching Thibet, a tribe which shunned all intercourse with the 
Padams, and from which they pretended to have received the p- 188. 
cross. The Padams, being their next neighbours, must have 
been struck by the importance those people attached to the 
cross, and may have adopted it for their own use without 


tattoo themselves with the cross ; or anticipating, perhaps, that 
the missionary’s death would leave them without a pastor, the 
natives may have wished in this manner to preserve a precious 
deposit of their faith. 

I once met a Thibetan who was marked with the same 
sign; on my asking where he had learned to wear it, he pointed 
towards the Padam country, adding that he had received it 
from the savage mountaineers. 

ress, government and customs will not be devoid of 
interest for a Frenchman; so a few details on that subject will, 
I expect, be welcome. I have very little to say about their 
mode of dressing, as their clothing is reduced to a minimum 
somewhat too primitive; however, the full dress sometimes p. 189. 
worn by men deserves a short notice. 

It is composed of eleven pieces : Ist, a loin cloth ; 2nd, a 
in front, and sprinkled all over with 
; 3rd, a cuirass 
camel hair; it covers the chest and 


t assing through a hole in the centre, and is 
ate cad ae Fi ni t the thrust of the lance ; 


are imported from Thibe 
resemblance to the hatch 
sword; 7th, a small basket ; 


iis be identified? Fr. A. Desgodins, 
the Tit Se ee a@ Cia who had travelled all over 


speaking 
i < «6 i lower part of the Tsangpo as f 
ee ee See tage (inhabitants of the South) 
ts of the South).’’ From the lama’s 
godins did not hesitate to con 
were the Abors. Proc. A.S.B., 18: p- 
1 Possibly the Nepalese kukri.—[A. 


p 190. 


p.19. ft, 


p. 192, 


118 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. {February, 1913. 


into an umbrella when it rains; 9th, bow and arrows ; 10th, a 
long knife; llth, a pouch containing tobacco, a pipe, @ tlint- 
stone and similar articles. 

Neither women nor men are fond of long hair; they do 
not allow it to grow beyond 2 or 3 inches in length. 

The women wear heavy yellow necklaces, iron or wi a 
bracelets ; but the most peculiar article of their ornamenta 
apparel is their ear-rings ;—these are long spirals of wire shee 
two inches thick, sufficiently heavy to tear the ears, an 
stretch them out of shape, so that the ornaments dangle on 
the shoulders. The men wear but one kind of necklace; it 18 


adams are not a nomadic people, but possess large 
and fine villages. Their system 


i Women have no share in the 

government ; they cannot even set foot in the council-room. 
ivery male, reaching 
member of any assembly. 
six chiefs elected for life b 


y the people, sanctioned by the council, 
and promulgated by the president. Every decision is suppos 
to come from the people ; the chiefs have no right but to ap- 
prove and enforce it. Hence, the people proposes, the council 
sanctions, and the president promulgates. - 

Every ing, all the men gather in the spacious council- 
room to discuss the topics of the day, which means: (1) t0 
inform one another of what has been seen or heard ; (2) 1 
discuss the political questions put forth by one of the chiefs; 
(3) to settle what the village will do on the next day, for ye 
is understood that no one is free to dispose of his time as he 
ee ee eee 

l } 3: ibes 4 
similar ornament eee ree aes eas eet of Manipur, p. 32, describe re 
often inserted (into the pierced lobes) and the yo 
advantage of an empty cartridge case as a pers 
will make Fr. Krick’s meaning more intelligible.—[ A. G.] 


Vol. IX, No. 2.) Fr. Kriek among the Abors (1853). 119 
[NV.S.] 


thinks fit; his daily work is cut out, discussed and officially 
decreed by the majority of the council. Hence, every evening, 
between 10 and 11 o’clock, boys are sent about the village 
shouting at the top of their voices : ‘‘ To-morrow, tiger hunt ! 
‘To-morrow fishing! To-morrow, field Jabour! To-morrow, 
‘““genna, t.e. obligatory holiday !”’ 

These injunctions are obeyed to the letter, for this people p. 193. 
is as law-abiding and respectful to the powers that be, as it is 
proud of its liberty. To call a Padam a slave is an insult that 
would make this proud mountaineer gnash his teeth and grasp 
at his bow. 

The council-house is also used for extraordinary gatherings 
convoked to deal with a sudden emergency, such as was my 


men above 17 or 18. All of them, except the married men, 
sleep at the barracks. : 

The Padams are hunters by taste, and farmers by neces- 
sity; yet, they are excellent cultivators. The roads are planted 
on both sides with fruit-trees. The only farming-tools they 
know are their arms and their hands, and their backs are their 
only means of transport. Yet their granaries are well stored 
with rice, gums, maize, bobossa and several other products. | 

The bow is their favourite weapon, and they use it with 
great dexterity. It is their vade-mecum, the first toy of the p. 194 
child, who shoots from morning till night. 


m el one 
But if their dwellings are roughly built, their athena 
Our admiration. Their construction is solid ; the floor 18 3 Fe 
network of rattan palm twigs, and so elastic that it yields to 
the pressure of the foot and rises like a spring. 

« ommerce is insignificant. The following are the pagent ak 
animals: Ist, the mitou or wild cow, SO ee a pete es 
sively reared for the slaughterhouse ; 2nd, small ros at 
much appreciated by the Padams; 3rd, fowls; 4th, dogs, s 
and lean, but excellent hunters. 

Rice and herbs form their staple food; they aM me 
without either salt or butter. Meat and fish are 


p. 196. 


p. 197 


120 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (February, 1913. 


popular dishes. The ordinary drink is fermented rice beer or 
bobossa water ; pure water is never used at meals. 

The Padams are naturally hospitable; the guest is first 
expected to give a present to make friends with his host, but 
it is the meal that sanctions and seals friendship for ever; as 
soon as you have touched food, ‘‘ you are friends till the sun 
falls,’’ as these savages are wont to say. 

ect for old age is pushed to its extreme limits, a 


calamity is dreaded as much as the curse of an old man. 
One day, as I called on the chief Leudouck, I saw an old man 
whom the chief had called in to the sick-bed of his child. 1 
asked him whether he wasa priest. ‘‘ No,’’ said the chief, ‘* but 
the words of an old man are a powerful blessing ; God endows 
it with a divine efficacy.’’ Old age is, as you see, a mos 
desirable condition among the Padams ; all honours are due 


a stone rolls from the mountain, if a leaf drops from a tree, 
it must be a spirit on a stroll; if the wind blows through the 
forest, the gods are indulging some healthy exercise; if the 
wind shakes the trees and howls through the valley, the deos 
or spirits are quarrelling. : 

The priest makes it his constant business to appease the 
wrath of the good spirits and to fight it out with the bad 
ones. 
The soul survives the body and is in its future life re- 
warded for its virtues and punished for its crimes. Priests and 


t 

wonders a man works, the events he predicts, are so many 
signs of his vocation to the priesthood. 

he priest expels the spirits and forces them to restore 
the soul to the dying man. This is how this extraordinary 
feat is performed :— - 

t a crowd of singing and howling attendants all 
standing around the patient, the officiating priest, armed with a 


Vol. 1X, No. 2.] Fr. Krick among the Abors (1853). 121 
[N.S.] 


long sword, performs a wild dance. Without ceasing to whirl 
sapidly round, he throws in the air a handful of rice, the grains p. 198. 
of which go in search of the soul of the patient. As the grains 
drop on the blade of his sword, this skilful performer catches 
the soul in its flight, proudly shows it to the onlookers, fast- 
ened on the point of his sword in the shape of an unfledge 
bird, and runs to tie it on the top of the patient’s head. If 
the soul returns to the body, the patient will not die; but 
he would be hopelessly lost, should the bird succeed in freeing 
itself and fly away on its miraculously acquired wings and 
feathers 
My in nformants were sorely disappointed at my incredu- 
lity, and swore that every sine word of theirs was the truth 
ure and simple. ‘‘ We have often witnessed the facts as we 
“« describe awed so they asia, ‘* and we can’t understand how, 


‘* priest’s power. The first time a man will fall sick in the 
‘* village, we shall take you to him, and you will see the 
“< truth for yourself.’’ 

What appears more certain and more tangible are 404 
penances and privations these ag are ready to undergo 
propitiate or appease the spirits. They unhesitatingly ce: p. 199. 

y mortification and trial, except that of visiting the sick; 
for to see a sick man, or to have wen tose 3 to do with hi 
would be running into the j jaws of a bad spiri 

» When I was staying at Mimbo, the silken went out 
cutting rattan twigs for the construction of a bridge ; iit of 


acy. 
The bridge was erie sale the protection of a ae 
spirit who received sacrifices to his heart’s content. To ave 
proof of still greater generosity, the whole village made genna,! 
t.c., took a three days’ h holiday in honour of the spirits. 


odour of sanctity with the deos. At the birth ‘of a child, the 
whole family is impure for a number of days varying accord- 
ding to oe sex of the child. 
ts do not marry before the age of 18, though it cord p- 200. 
happen ant a younger bride be received into the bridegroo 
family and treated as a daughter of the house. For the first 
five or six years of her marriage life, the wife continues to 
es 
The N Tribes of Manipur, p. 164), 
: srteasehe ig Heh vat ine aa s ‘anything forbidden or orohibi ibi eee 
Tt is is likely pin among apr Abors, genna is but a taboo upon 


p- 201. 


122 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [February, 1913.] 


stay with her parents, unless she begets children in the mean- 


- time and is thus entitled to set up a separate household. 


Should the parents disapprove of the alliance, the girl may 
leave them and marry lawfully without their consent. 

e Padam is very active, jolly, a lover of freedom and 
independence, generous, noble-hearted, plain-spoken, more 
honest than the average Oriental, not over-moderate in ne 
and drinking, at least as far as quantity is concerned. I hav 
not lived long enough among them to be able to speak of their 
morality. I confess I have never been able to discover what 
they understand by modesty; they seem to possess much of 
the child’s simplicity, and Mimbo is undoubtedly less cor- 


rupt ere Paris. Dancing is the bodily exercise these people 
love m 


I nerbwith join a short glossary as a specimen of their 
language. 
Man -. Ammie. I (nominative case) .. Gno. 
Woman imeu. Me (genitive case) .. Gnok. 
ale .. Milbong. ,»» (accusative case) .. Gnom. 
Female .. Neng-eu You (sing., nom. case).. No 
Youngman.. Jame , (genitive case) ok 
i mS immoo me __,, (accusative case) .. Nom 
Old man .. Midjing. He (nomin. case Bu. 
Old Woman.. Eudjo. ,»» (genitive case) Buk 
Friend .. Sangue. »> (accusat. case) . B 
Wood .. Isching .. Gnoloa 
Water ri Si. You . Noloo 
Boiled rice.. Amu. They Booloo 
Fire : eu Sun ee .. Domie. 
House .- Eukoumeu. Moon “3 «<j, EDs 
1 love you oy om aiang. 
Why do you fear? .. Kapilla pussoie ? 
Come quick .. Soallabangmenu 
Go away Guigueto. 
Don’t fear Peussu menpeka 
I am hungry ie ak, 
Give me some meat .. Adine bi. 


What is your name? .. Nok amine evkoa ? 


NON I Ne 


12. A Note on Buddhism, 
[Read before the Society on 30th January, 1913.] 


By Pror. Dr. H. OLDENBERG. 


the pleasures which the European Indologist 


your own. The idea of the Society which I carried in m 

mind now is replaced by vivid intuition, and my connexion 
with the Society thus acquires a deeper, more real meaning 
or me. 

It would be a source of high gratification to me if, on this 
occasion of meeting you, I were in a position to place before 
you some new results of labours of mine, and to consider to- 


not prepared to do so. I have come to India not with the full 

literary apparatus which would be required for an attempt of 

the kind, but only with the light equipment of the tourist. I 
i i able to plac 


you any detailed account of recent investigations. I must 
considera 


I must ask for your indulgence ; in trave 
quite in the same way as one works 
work, i ’s quiet study. 

Then thirty 4 rst entered the arena of Bud- 


en rs ago I fi 
dhistic research 4 fe myself surrounded by the turmoil of the 


124 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [March, 1913. 


battle that was then being fought regarding the relative posi- 
tion and value of what at the time was called Northern and 
Southern Buddhistic literature. On one side there was the 


texts give a picture of Buddhism essentially differing from 
that presented by the Nepalese ones. The Northern Buddhism 


human figure of the Buddha was 


and thanks to its resources Pro : 
tators have been able to publish 
ore important texts of the Sutta and the Abhi- 


dharma Pitaka. And, whatever lacunae still were left are now 


Vol. 1X, No. 3.) A Note on Buddhism. 125 
[N.S8.] 


_we owe to the munificence of the late King of Siam, and by 
the Burmese writers. ‘The former, unavoidably rather imper- 
fect and indefinite, idea of the Pali texts was thus replaced by 


being filled by the fine edition of the entire Tripitaka which 
a) db 


the series of those great explorations which were initiated by 
Stein—now Sir Aurel Stein—and continued, with results 


advance in the reconstruction of the history of ancient Bud- 
dhistic literature. In fact, the basis on which such @ recon- 
struction has to rest, had now become an infinitely wider and 
securer one, Burnouf had been unavoidably compelled to 
advance through the texts on which he bas 

‘Introduction,’ with very rapid steps i 
wonder at the multitude of things which that greater investi- 


or broken—we in fact av 
philological methods which ma enable us to penetrate into 
the history of the origination of the texts, to discern the layers 


126 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (March, 1913. 


which have gradually deposited themselves on their first form. 
Now, as soon as this procedure began to be applied to the. 
comparison of the Northern and the Southern Buddhistic 
texts, a very clear and remarkable result at once declared 
itself. The northern texts—such as the Lalita-vistara, the 


characteristics as the Pali texts, nay often agrees with the 
latter almost verbatim through long passages. This I think 
absolutely decides the question of relative priority, in favour 
of the southern type of literature. The question is fully 
decided because we find now that the northern texts also 


well as in style, and often in words and phraseology. 
again arrive at the result that to the type called ‘Southern’ 
the north also bears witness. 

It remains to mention another interesting fact. If we 
recognize within the northern literature an element of southern 
character forming a kind of old substratum as 1t were on which 


p, we on 
the other hand also find, in a certain way, the northern litera- 
ture within the southern one. But where does it meet u 


two literatures fully characterized and determined by the way 
in which in each of them we meet with the particular features 
of the other ? We recognize the main characteristics of the 
southern literature in the northern one as soon as we descend 
from the surface of the northern texts to the oldest, so to 8aY 


Vol. 1X, No. 3.] A Note on Buddhism. 127 
[N.8.] 


subterranean layer. On the other hand, the characteristic 
features of the northern literature shine out from the southern 
one, when from the southern texts we advance to the com- 
mentaries, i.e. if we penetrate into a layer which clearly is 
younger than that of the texts themselves. I venture to hope 
that on the basis of considerations such as I have sketched, 


attempt, in peace of mind, the reconstruction of the oldest 


the Pratimoksa Sitra. Our sources further show us, I think, 
with great clearness how those thoughts and ordinances have 
me, the advances made in 


uddhism, of which I attempted 
ketch in outline—the Buddhism not of the 
ot just what 


this transitory world begi 
Upanisads and becomes t 


belief t escape 
f that a man may Pp dicant first appears in 


d 
palpable forms. Buddha 
true descendants of that 
aj Aranyaka places before us— 
aan tr whee ee iad with, its distinction of 
object and subject fills with deep dissatisfaction, and spaphoste 
this home, which is no true home, pass over into t i “Ke 
lessness of spiritual life. Is it thinkable that men, aig pe 
those deep and imperious wants of the heart which all thos 
texts reveal to us, should have found their satisfaction in 


128 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengai. {March, 1913. 


listening to amusing legends or in making collections of 
Jatakas? I believe that those spiritual wants could not but 
lead on to asystem of thought, and a scheme of life which 
connected themselves with altogether different centres—to 
a system of thought which endeavoured to fathom the mystery 
of the suffering of the world ; to a scheme of life which in all 
its details had no other aim, but to escape from that suffering. 
Ido not overlook the circumstance that the enormous fer- 


thought. It goes without saying that the task of thorouglily 
investigating those legends, in the first place the Jatakas, must 
not on that account be neglected; and the accomplishment 


> 


which are contained in texts such as 


We can attack the important question 
of the Jatakas, which we know to be no 
of commentators, truly represents the 
ich have to be presupposed 

In especially lucky cases the tradition 


iti rates with thern 
traditions, and by Merle: ith the southern and nor 


beautifully done in the case of the JA th 
six tusks. It is true that we ee ee See 


Vol. IX, No. 3.] A Note on Buddhism. 129 
[N.S] 


Jataka texts in their entirety were not a separate possession 
of the southern literature, but a general possession of Buddhism 
as a whole. Is there any hope of our being put in possession 
of a Northern Jataka corpus also? Brian Houghton Hodgson 
mentions among the manuscripts which are said to exist in 
Nepal a Jatakamala of about 560 sections. This number 
approximately agrees with the number of the Pali Jatakas, 

ut is somewhat higher. May we consider this as pointing to 
the existence of a northern recension of the entire Corpus of 
Jatakas ? Is there any hope of the manuscript to which 
Hodgson’s note refers being actually found? The hope, I am 
afraid, is only a faint one. An enquirer who himself had the 
most ample opportunities to experience good and bad fortune 
in his search for MSS. in Nepal, M. Sylvain Levi, writes to me : 
‘*Qne can no more direct one’s search for MSS. in Nepal 
towards some particular work, than the fisherman can choose 
his particular fish.’’ He may be right. But should we on that 


we some day succeed in getting hold of a northern book that 


—truly my imagination is not sufficiently powerful to form 
an adequate idea of the splendour of the triumph which that 
would mean ! 

B must break off. I have attempted shortly to 
indicate the direction which the finds and researches of recent 
times have as it seems to me assigned to the treatment of 
some of the fundamental problems of Buddhistic research. 
Work done in India or in Asia generally, and work done in 
Europe—both are jointly contributing towards our advance. 
And if to-day I have the great good fortune of standing at the 
place which forms the centre of all the work that is done in 


that has ad el and is being done, by this Society. Ladies 
and Gentlemen, be pleased to receive my sincerest thanks for 
the kindness with which you made it possible for me to meet 
you in this place and have afforded me an opportunity co 
giving utterance before you to what necessarily engrosses the 
thought of a European Indologist coming amongst you—what 
engrosses his thought and what moves his heart. - 


eg ct aye eat nie Sa 


13. Action of Stannic Chloride on Phenylhydrazine. 


By Jir—EnDRa Natu RaksHIT. 


The preparation of phenylhydrazine by the reduction of 
diazonium chloride with the simultaneous oxidation of stannous 
chloride to stannic chloride in aqueous solution (Meyer, Lecco, 
Ber, 1883, 16, 2976) is a proof that the reducing property of 
phenylhydrazine as salt is less than that of stannous chloride 
in solution. This investigation was undertaken with a view 
to ascertain whether the reaction is reversible under different 
conditions, with the base in the free state and stannic chloride 


Both phenylhydrazine and stannic chloride being liquids, 
no solvent is necessary to bring about the reaction; on the 
contrary, when they are brought into contact the reaction 
commences with such vigour and so much heat is evolved, that 
if any compound like diazonium chloride were formed it would 
not exist at that temperature; necessarily, the formation of 
such compounds can only be inferred by isolating their pro- 
ducts of decomposition. Diazonium chloride decomposes ac- 
cording to the equation :— 

C,H,N : NCl=C,H,Cl + Nz. 
ack to diazonium salt the 


Now if phenylhydrazine comes b ming that 


following equation will represent the reaction, assu 
stannic chloride becomes stannous chloride, giving off two 
atoms of chlorine,— 
C,H,HN.N H, + 2Cl,-—> C,H,N: NCl+3HCl 
te OFLC + Ns. 

Even if there be formed a compound analogous to C,H, 
N,Cl, Cu, Cl, (Erdmann, Annalen, 1893, 272, 144) that would 
not be likely to decompose, yielding chlorobenzene, at tha 

igh temperature :— 
C,H,;N Cl, SnCl, =C,H,Cl + N, + SnCl,. 

The fact that chlorobenzene is not a product of the reac- 
tion is however no proof that diazonium chloride is not an 


132 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [March, 1913. 


intermediate product. Chlorine in combination with phos- 
orus, arsenic, or boron does not decompose the base but 
forms definite compounds (Michaelis, Oster, Annalen, 1892, 
270, 123), whereas stannic chloride causes complete rupture of 
it. Again, the decomposition of the diazonium salt in the 
presence of a hydroxyl group is much influenced by the radical 
with which it is combined. Phenol and nitrogen are forme 


by its decomposition in aqueous solution :— 
C,H,N,Cl + H,O=C,H,OH + N, + HCl. 


n alcoholic solution the products are not quite similar, 
the alcohol causing partial reduction of benzene diazonium — 
salt, being itself oxidized to aldehyde (Griess, Annalen, 1866, 
137,69; 18:3, 217, 189: Ber... 1876, 9, 899). 

(1) C,H,N: NCl+C,H,OH =C,H,OH + N, + C,H,Cl. 

(2) C,H.N: NCl + CH,CH,OH=C,H, +N, + HCl + CH,.CHO. 
The formation of benzene may be increased by reducing 
the diazotate with alkaline stannite (Friedlander, Ber, 1889, 
22, 587). . 

Under conditions such as will be described, pure benzene is 
formed by the action of stannic chloride on phenylhydrazine ; 
this can be explained either with the assumption of the inter- 
mediate formation of diazonium chloride or without it. The 
following equation will represent the reaction if diazonium 
chloride is formed :— ; 


RHN.NH, + 2Cl,=RN: NCl+3HCI. 


Now since autoreduction is possible in the case of phenyl- 
hydrazine (Chattaway, Trans. Chem. Soc., 1911, 99, 404), the 
diazonium salt may next take up hydrogen from another 
.molecule of phenylhydrazine :— . 

R 


% 
NeW 


ee a eee 
nN: No! Hi 
Nise oP roel 


H | 
The intermediate formation of diazonium salt is probable, 
considering the explosive violence with which the reaction 
takes place. : 
The other equation that may represent the reaction is— 
C,H. J, De es 
N. N | 


a eae, 
fe ae 
but such behaviour of chlorine of stannic chloride is not ex- 


pected from the existence and properties of the molecular 
compounds of ammonia and stannic chloride, Sn Cl, (NH), 


= O,H,+N,+2HCl. 


Vol. IX, No. 3.] Action of Stannic Chloride. 133 
(NV .S.] 


(Persoz, Ann, Chem. Phy. 1830, (2) 44, 322) and Sn Cl, 
(NH), (Rose, Annalen, Ph. Chem., Pogg. 1832, 24, 163). 

It is very interesting that ammonia forms a stable com- 
pound with stannic chloride, whereas hydrazine, so similar to 
it, undergoes complete rupture. 

thing, however, can be inferred from the liberation of 
hydrochloric acid; according to the first method two mole- 


diazonium salt or not cannot be quite concluded and remains 
to be settled by further experiments. 


EXPERIMENTAL. 


In a litre distilling flask, 20 c.c of phenylhydrazine is 
poured; it is then fitted with a condenser and kep im- 
mersed in a large quantity of water. 15 c.c of redistilled 


being filled with dense white fumes. After the fumes have 
subsided the cold water is replaced by boiling water. It is so 
arranged that the whole of the flask is heated with steam. 


. a 
all of which distilled at 80° C. The gas evolved was found to 
be nitrogen. If the flask is not carefully cooled during the 
reaction, so much heat is disengaged that part of the phenyl- 
bydrazine undergoes decomposition according to Chattaway's 
(loc. cit.) equation,— 

2RHN.NH,=R.NH, +N, +NH;+RH. 


For the quantitative estimation # the evolved nitrogen 
the apparatus figured below has been designed. 

0-2 c.c of phenylhydrazine was placed in the flask mga hed 
of stannic cloride in the tap funnel. The temperature a e 
water bath surrounding the flask was 23° C, that of air being 
23°C. After adjusting the level, the reading of the burette 


contraction of the gas 


134 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [March, 1913. 


practicable. Next the temperature of the bath was regulated 
to 23° C and the gas generated was found to be 25 c.c at 23°C. 


lated percentage for C,H,N_H., HC1 is 19°37. 


aa ees the substance is pure phenylhydrazine hydro- 
privet wee different experiments, Adding Seiad of pepe 
of shen thea, been performed, and the ratio of the molecules 
and nes = wk phenylhydrazine hydrochloride, benzene 
the li Ae n has been found to be 2: 1: 1:1 varying within 
taad es Wee cy, error. Blank experiments have 

) determine whether stannic chloride decomposes 

Sar ylhydrazine hydrochloride or not, and it has been ound 

at it has no action under ordinary conditions. 


The vadou “ase ea ak. cs saa 
RiP ies pOrinidiian' pressure of the benzene liberated by the reaction has 
a ae eotien Ptagrove in the calculation and the figures for nitro- 
yielded similar peaaile: eee Nigh, Reversl: otter, deter 


Vol. eae 3.] Action of Stannic Chloride. 135. 


After the decomposition of one molec 
: ule of phenylhydra- 
zine two molecules of hydrochloric acid are seed: ene 


C,H,H.N.NH, + SnCl, = C,H;.H + N, + 2HCl + SnCl, 
and if these two molcules of hyd ic aci i 
ydrochloric acid require two 
vem of free phenylhydrazine for their patuminlics the 
nal reaction would be represented by the equation— 
3C,H,H.N, + SnCl,=C,H, + N, + 2C,H;H;N,HCl + SnCl, 
but what really happens, as can be deduced from the data 
obtained, is represented by the equation— 
2C,H,H,N, + SnCl,=C,H, + N, + SnCl, + C,H,H;:N,, 2HCl. 


chloric acid ; consequently the formation of some double salt 
with the chlorides of tin was suspected. Thorough search was 


cadmium, cobalt, zinc, mang e, 
ao a by Moitessier (Centralblatt 1897, 2, 297), but none 
as ] i 


have been combined with two molecules of hydrochloric acid, 
and this conclusion is further supported by the existence of 
two salts of the base with hydrofluoric acid, — 
C,H,H,N;,HF and C,H;H,N,,2HF 

(Thieme, Annalen, 1893, 272, 209). The acid salt with hydro- 
chloric acid decomposes in aqueous solution, neutral salt and 
free acid being formed. 

have much pleasure in expressing 
cher P. C. Ray for the interest he has ta 
ions. 


my best thanks to 
ken in my investiga- 


CHEMICAL LABORATORY, 
Presidency College, Calcutta. 


14. ‘* The A-ch’ang (Maingtha) Tribe of Hohsa-Lahsa, 
iinnan.’’ ! : 


By J. Coeain Brown, M.Sc., F.G.S., 
Geological Survey of India. 


[With Plate IX.] 


The A-ch’angs are one of the smaller groups of the lesser 
known tribes of the Burma-China frontier, whose exact position 


a matter of controversy. In view of the growing tendency of 
some Indo-Chinese anthropologists to include them with one or 
other of the various branches of the Tai family, it appears to 
me to be desirable to collect the scattered references we have 
regarding this interesting group of people, and to reconsider the 
question of their origin in the light of later knowledge gained 
during a short residence in their headquarters, the twin States 
of Hohsa and Lahsa. 

These twin States are situated about Lat. 24° 27’, Long. 
97° 56’; ata height of some 4,500 feet above the level of the sea. 
They lie across the Burma border and are governed by semi- 
independent chieftains who own allegiance to the Chinese Re- 
public, being in the days of the late Manchu dynasty under the 
direct jurisdiction of the T’ing of Téng-yiieh, whose immediate 
superior was the prefect, or Fu of Yiing-ch’ang Fu. This pre- 
fecture formed part of the ‘‘ J-hsi-dao’’ or western division of 
the province of Yiinnan. Both States are in the valley of the 
Nam-hsa, a tributary of the Ta-ping which breaks through the 


Kachin frontier hills in a narrow gorge, and enters the Irra- 


ever, include tracts of country in the surrounding hills, though 
the true A-ch’ang population is confined to the plain. High 
bounding ranges rising to 6,000 and 7, feet, separate the 
States on the north from the Chinese-Shan State of Kanai 
(Méng-na), and on the south from Mong-wan. It would be 


forest-clad slopes of the almost uninhabited frontier ranges 
further west. ‘ The whole of the plain is devoted to rice cultiva- 


1 Published by the permission of the Director, Geological Survey o 
India. . 


138 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (March, 1913. 


tion which is carried on to an intense degree, the villages being 
removed to the lower slopes of the bounding ridges that none 
of the available paddy land may be lost. Seen from the sum- 
mits of the hills around, this well-watered valley seems rich 
enough, but as a matter of fact the appearance is deceptive, 
for the soil is poor and the crops suffer accordingly. The rice 
grown is not sufficient for the needs of the population, and as 
a consequence large numbers of the inhabitants emigrate year 
by year to neighbouring States, and across the frontier into the 
towns and the villages of Upper Burma and the Northern Shan 
States, where they are well known as the blacksmiths and car- 
penters who travel over the country in the cold weather seek- 
ing for employment. Such conditions are also aggravated by 
Chinese immigration, for the State has a high altitude and a 
mild and healthy climate, so that the ubiquitous Ytmnnanese 
highlander can live and prosper therein. As a general rule the 
elevation of the Shan States in Yiinnan is low enough, and the 
climate bad enough, to prevent wholesale Chinese settling, and 
the Shans are left mainly to themselves for the greater part of 
the year. The A-ch’angs have been referred to as gipsies, 
nomads, born wanderers, and great travellers; it is hoped that 
the explanation given here will end these fallacious descriptions, 
for such peoples never leave the boundaries of their own special 
territories ‘‘en masse,’’ except under the unalterable influence 
of some very strong external pressure. 

The Chinese element of the population is powerful and is 
tending to become more so every day. Chinese-Shans are also 
found in the valley, whilst the hills around are peopled by 
Chingpaw and a few Lisu and Palaungs. 

From the days of the eatly writers on the tribes of Burma 
until the present time, the origin and relationships of the 
A-ch ang have puzzled the scientific observer. John Anderson 
in 1871 gave the first connected account of the tribe, but he 
was so uncertain about its affinities that he hesitated to speak 
with any degree of confidence.! A smiliar spirit of uncertainty 
pervades all literature, thus Morgan Webb has this year stated 
that it is ‘‘highly questionable,” and a “matter of much 
hesitation,’’ to classify the A-ch’angs with the Marus, Lashis 
nie i who are of undoubted and identical Tibeto-Burman 

An A-ch’ang when questioned at first calls himself a Shan. 
This is due to the fervour of the proselyte, and also to the 
natural desire on the part of the smaller tribal clans in the law- 
less frontier regions, to ally themselves with some more powe!- 
ful faction for safety’s sake. The Shan himself does not hesi- 
A ee 
of Ree bo P- 100. (Numerals in brackets refer to works quoted at end 

? (2), pp. 201 and 263. 


Journ., As. Soc. Beng., Vol. 1X, 1913. PLATE IX 


‘ 
ye 
1" 

Nan oS 


ng air 
ie ward 
VW \e9 


whe 
Se 

iS 
ln eae 4 


ortie, 2 

‘. ~ 
awrraglihio re 

my eA 


is , x 
ig A0t7 Erg 
fic & 
Zi ieee ie yuig 


cea distribution 


Map of the Burma-China Frontier, Bhamo-Myitkyina area, real 
of the principal tribes, and the ore of the A-ch’ang c 
(Some of the smaller groups ar ded on the authority o ty ae sss 
From sheet 92. India and varegie pode Scale about 1,000,0 


Vol. IX, No. 3.] The A-ch’ang (Maingtha) Tribe. 139 
[N.S] 


Burmese they are known as Maingtha, which is a corruption of 
Mong Hsa. On close questioning the A-ch’ang admits readily 
enough that he is not a Shan, a view which was also expressed 
to me by the Sawbwa of Lahsa. I have never succeeded in 
persuading any individual to own his kinship with the despised 
*“yeren,’’ the wild men of the hills, a term applied by the 
Chinese to Chingpaw, Lisu, Maru and all such peoples. Hohsa 
and Lahsa are governed by sawbwas or chiefs who trace their 
ancestry to Chinese military commanders, sent from Ssu-ch’uan 
some 40U years ago to quell rebellions on the Yunnan border. 
For their successful services these leaders were given not only 
the present A-ch’ang States, but the Chinese-Shan States of 
Kanai and Nantien as well, which their descendants now rule. 
The families have intermarried to a great extent with the 
indigenous peoples, and have lost the typical Chinese cast of 
feature, though they invariably assert their Chinese ancestry. 
When I visited the A-ch’ang country in 1910 the Hohsa 
Sawbwa was a youth about 16 years of age, who was engaged 
to marry one of the daughters of the Kanai chief. The Lahsa 
Sawbwa was an elderly man. with the dress and habits of a 
pure Chinese. 
I 


flatter faces, and more prominent cheekbones than the typi- 
cal Shan. Anderson remarked, ‘‘The breadth between their 
eyes is considerable, their mouths are generally heavy, and the 
lips more or less protruding.’’* To the practical anthropo- 
metrist these differences are very apparent, and venturing 
a suggestion in the absence of detailed measurements, the 
average A-ch’ang appears to me to bear a closer relation to the 
Chingpaw type of the Tibeto- Burman family, than to the Shan, 
as far as features and outward appearances go. 


1 (3), p. 258. % (1), p-: 101. 


lav Journal of the Aswutic Socrety of Bengal. (March, 1913. 


The dress of the male A-ch ang is much the same as that 
of the Chinese Shan, but the woman’s dress has many distine- 
tive features. i : 
excellent descriptions, which appear to have been overlooked 
by other writers. therefore propose to rescue them from 
the unmerited oblivion of an ancient report and to reproduce 
them here:— . 

‘‘The costume of the male peasantry is a double- 
breasted loose jacket reaching to the loins, and buttoned 
down the right side. The buttons are frequently jade, am- 
ber orsilver. Their turbans are thick blue cotton cloth, 
with a long fringe at the free end, which is usually wound up 
with the pigtail, and brought round the outside. In rainy 
and sunny weather a very broad straw hat, covered with 
oiled silk, is worn over the turban. Their trousers are 
very loose, and reach only a short way below the knee. 
The shins are bound round with long strips of blue cloth 
to protect them against injury, a fashion that seems to 
prevail not only among the Shans and Kakhyens, but also 
among the Chinese peasantry generally. Their shoe uppers 
are made of thick blue, almost felt cloth, embroidered 
with narrow braid, and with thick leather soles.’’ ! 


With regard to the women’s dress Anderson writes :— 
‘«They wear the Shan jacket, and loose trousers like 
the men, but with the ends unhemmed. The back half of 
the jacket is prolonged downwards to below the knees like a 


the apron is about six inches broad, and dilates behind into 


ing feature in their attire, and consists of a hoop about 
six inches in diameter, made of cloth wound round a rat- 
tan, and placed on the crown of the head, with the hair in 
front transversely divided and gathered up, with that of 
the back, into the centre of the hoop, and plaited into the 
ends of a flat chignon of the dimensions of the internal 
diameter of the hoop. The latter is kept in position by 
about 25 to 30 silver pins fastened into the chignon and 
mass of hair, with their heads resting on and completely 
: hiding the hoop. The pin heads are large, thin, flat plates 


1 (1), p. 102. 


Vol. rks 3.) The A-ch’ang (Maingtha) Tribe. 141 
[V.S.] 


of silver, placed longitudinally to the length of the hair, 
and either embossed or engraved with figures of leaves or 
of flowers. The result of this arrangement is that the 
crown of the head is encircled with a silver wreath of the 


pins, four much larger, usually richly-enamelled, ones are 
worn at the front, back, and sides of the circle. ........ 
Full dress chignons and their pins are a foot in diameter. 
The head of a pin of this kind is eight inches in length, by 
two in breadth, and of the most intricate construction. 
The simplest is made of silver wire, and flat pieces of the 
same metal cut into fantastic figures and representations 
of trailing plants, in full flower, the colours being given by 
various enamels, of which green, blue, purple, and yellow 
are the chief. In some the leaves are worked out in the 
finest filigree, and in one specimen I purchased, there is a 
figure resembling a swan resting on its outstretched wings 
among a bed of flowers.’” ! 


For the sake of comparison I give here Anderson’s descrip- 


tion of the dress of the ordinary Chinese-Shan woman of Kanai 
or Nan-tien, the neighbours of the A-ch’angs on the north, 
and with whom the latter are constantly confused :— 


‘‘Their ordinary garb is very sombre, but their peculiar 
head-dress, like an inverted pyramid, gives them 
outré appearance in the eyes of a stranger. It consists of a 


tened at the neck, 
and down the centre, by a number of thin, square, enam- 
elled plates of silver; and in full dress, the shoulders and 
a line down the back, and another in front, are covered 


1 (1), p. 104 


142 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Benga!. {March, 1913, 


with large hemispherical silver buttons, richly embossed 
with figures of birds and flowers, enamelled in various 
colours. The sleeves are rather loose from the elbow, and 
usually folded back, showing a massive silver torque-like 
bracelet. A tight, thick cotton skirt, frequently ornament- 
ed round the lower third with squares of coloured silk and 
satin or embroidered work, with a pair of close-fitting leg- 
gings made of the same material, and handsomely embroi- 
dered shoes, with slightly turned-up toes, complete their 
external attire. On particular occasions, a richly embroid- 
ered clcth is worn over the skirt.’’ ! 


omen wear ear-rings, finger rings, neck hoops and 
bracelets which exhibit great variety of decoration and effect- 
iveness. A common form of ear-ring, a specimen of which 
I have in my collection, consists of a flat open ring of silver 
wire, massively enriched with smaller silver strands, and 
carrying two engraved silver bosses near the opening in the 
circumference. From it is suspended a bell-shaped structure, 


Their use of silver wire, filigree, and delicate decoration in 
enamel is unsurpassed by any of the surrounding tribes. 


hy The A-ch’angs are a quiet, inoffensive people. fervent Bud- 
dhists and exceedingly shy. In most of the Chinese-Shan States, 
the religion of Gautama is not followed with the zeal which 


manner. In Hohsa and Lahsa, however, the priests are more 
orthodox, and their example is followed by the common people, 


so that the religion has retained its pristine simplicity, and is © 


free from the laxity which blemishes Shan Buddhism, and 
which is doubtless due to th- superstitions largely borrowed 
from surrounding Animistic tribes. The Hohsa Valley is shut in 
a its se thing extremity by a low range of foot hills 
ich is crowne a group of p é , nl 
met with in Heiss Ca on ee 
‘chang houses are usually built of bricks on the ground, 


1 (1), p. 102. 


* 


Vol. IX, No. 3.] The A-ch’ang (Maingtha) Tribe. 143 
[N 8.] 


and not Kaien like those of the Shans and Burmese. Each 


hedge, and stands sheltered in its own grove of bamboos or 
other trees. The residences of the chiefs are built after the 
fashion of an ordinary inese ‘‘ yamen,’’ and the walls are 


decorated with drawings of dragons, which is also a Chinese 
custom 
It e A-ch’angs speak Shan, and many of them know 
some Chinese as well It is owing to these facts and to their 
conversion to Buddhism that their true Tibeto-Burman origin 
has been lost sight of. ey most certainly use their own 
tongue to a very considerable extent amongst themselves, and 
it was by the study of this dialect, influenced and added to by 
Shan as it is, that Major Davies was able to point out its canned 
association with the speeches of the Zi, Lashi an aru ,—the 
curious stranded eee of people left ‘by the Buimeat in the 
highlands of the N’mai Hka valley during their immigration 
from the north into the plains of the Irrawaddy basin.! 
Davies’ evidence was sufficient to bring so high an Lipiatseaged 
as Sir G. A. Grierson to regard the A-ch’ang speech as more or 
less closely connected with Burmese, and to place the ail 
of the Zi, Lashi, Maru, Hpon, and A-ch’ang in a grou 
Kachin and Burmese hybrids. This distinguished author, how- 
ever, is careful to point out that it is possible that pay lan- 
guages are not hybrids but independent forms of spee 
A full and careful examination of these~ Selene is very 
urgently called for, the tribes themselves are being merged into | 
more powerful neighbours with an amazing rapidity, and the 
oppo tunity cannot last very much longer in the case of some 
of them. As it is, the material which is now available, and 
‘which will go far to solve the foundations of the problems con- 
nected with Burmese civilization and culture, is vanishing 
without being recorded. 
propose to summarise mrs the views of the principal 
oe on the A-ch’ang peo 
the first volume of the ‘‘ fn on the Census of Burma 
of 1891, * Mr. H. L. Eales with the assistance of Mr. B. Hough- 
ton, and the late Dr. Cushing, placed the pani pee dialect with 
those of the Chinese Shans, *Ahoms, Hkamptis and Burmese- 
Shans in the Northern subdivision, of the Taic Shan group, of 
the Pol “ey family.* 
In th ft a of Upper Burma and the Shan States ’ 
Eat nein in 1900, Sir George Scott taking the researches of 
Captain (now Major) Davies as a basis, estimates that about 


: she f ” A-ch’ang dialect appear to be connect- 
ie . ph ieee a with Bhan: These age are 


passin Sse 
1 (4). 2 (6), p- 382. Ai 


144 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (March, 1913. 


as names for things of which they knew nothing until they met 
the Shans and were converted to Buddhism. The A-ch’ang 
language is thus shown to be very closely connected with 


Maru, and Lashi is still more remarkable, while with the 
dialect of the Hpon of the upper defile of the Irrawaddy, it has 
many pointsincommon Unfortunately Sir George Scott while 
considering the A-ch’ang a distinct race groups them with the 
Tarens, Tarengs or Turengs, who are said to be found on the 
western border of the Chinese-Shan State of Santa, and in 
Hkamti Long.! 

In a later work Sir George Scott has abandoned this defi- 
nite position and taken up an agnostic one. He now writes 
(1906), that the Maingthas should rather be called dragoman 
Shans than Burmese, ‘‘and that their speech should be called 


his industry suggests the Chinaman; and his features suggest 

intermarriage with the Chingpaw. He will probably come to 

e called a worthy mongrel.’’? We are not concerned 

here with what the Maingtha may, or may not, eventually 

become, but with what he originally was, believing that in 

spite of admixture of blood and general racial disintegration, 
ed 


Chinese or Chinese-Shan affinity eir home is said to lie for 
the most part near Hkamti-Long. Attempts have been made 
at different times to prove that the Tarengs ngs or 


. i 3 OF 
Shans), into Tairong, and finally into Turung. He relates that 
they are generally regarded as Shans in the neighbourhood of 
the Hkampti country, and this in spite of the fact that the 


ae i 
has fallen into the old, but unfortunately still prevalent, mis- 
take,—the classification of a partially absorbed Tibeto-Burman 
clan with a Tai race, owing to the consequent masking of their 


1 (7), 2 (8), p. 95. 3 (9), i‘ 78. ia % (10). 


Vol. IX, No. 3.] The A-ch’ang (Maingtha) Tribe. 145 
[N.S.] 


tendency however is to regard Mr. Errol Grey’s Tarengs, 
Turengs or Turungs as Chingpaw pure and simple.! 

While I am unable to admit the identity of the Tarengs 
or Tarens with the A-ch’ang, it is interesting to note that the 
western borders of the Chinese-Shan State of Santa in Yiinnan, 
are peopled for the greater part by Zis, a very closely allied 
people. 

In a more recent work (1910), Mr. C. C. Lowis reiterates 
his previous opinion, that the Maingtha are probably merely 
Chinese-Shans, and that there is a far fainter Tibeto-Burman 
element in their language than was at one time supposed. He 
therefore no longer regards them as having a place in the same 
dubious category as the Hpons, who are now proved to be a 
Tibeto-Burman race which is in the last stages of absorption 
by the surrounding Shans.’ 

In the last Burma Census Report (1911), Mr. Morgan 
Webb, I.C.S., only places the A-ch’ang speech in the same 
compartment as that of the Zi, Lashi and Maru, as a tentative 

easure, and remarks that the ‘‘ Maingthas have adopted the 


admits that it is probable that their ancestry is a complex of 


h 
administered and enumerated areas in Burma, over which the 
poorer stragglers from the headquarters of the race have to 
er, owing to circumstances beyond their own control. 
This surplus population in any case is less likely to approximate 
closer to the original ancestors of the race, than the settled 
members, living in their own country, and bound together by 
all the ties of communal interest. Beyond a doubt the race 
is fast disappearing, its manners and customs well nigh 
absorbed in those of the Shans, and its language rapidly becom- 
ing extinct, owing to the supremacy of the tongues of numer- 
i i The process however has not 


suppose ,— otherwise a 
nearly vanished. 


1 (12). In this connection see also (12), pp- 16, 17, where the views of 
re mentioned. This valuable work was not avail- 


able until this paper was in the press. 
2 (11). 3 3 


146 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengai. (March, 1913. 


The clue to the mystery was obtained by Davies, and it is 
certain that further knowledge will go to strengthen the con- 
nection between the A-ch’angs on the one hand, and the Maru, 
Lashi, Zi, and Hpon tribes on the other. Far from being the 
waifs and strays which recent literature might well lead the 
reader to imagine, these dying races have preserved for us the 
records of the immigration of the Burmese themselves into the 
regions which they now occupy. The unusual resemblances of 
tlhe Maru, A-ch’ang, Zi, Lashi and Hpon speeches with Burmese, 
is not the family likeness of the other Tibeto-Burman tongues 
with that language, but ‘‘is sufficiently close to warrant the 
belief that at some not very distant period these races spoke 
one tongue.”’ ! 

The N‘mai Hka valley is still the home of the Marus, who 


ards across the frontier a short way into the province of 


on the west about the confines of the Bhamo and Myitkyina 
districts the greater number of Lashisarefound. ‘hese tribes, 
with the Hpons, were the last stragglers of the Burmese immi- 
gration, or perhaps settlers in the hills, who preferred to remain 
where they found themselves than to travel further down the 
great river with the main body. I do not think there is any 
evidence for supposing that the Lashis and Zis are side bran- 
ches from the Maru, the probability being rather that they are 
of common stock and origin, and that their present distinctions 
are later growths, consequent on the varying external influen- 
ces to which they have been subjected. Each of the five 
groups has suffered by absorption into more powerful neigh- 
bours, and owing to intermarriage, warfare, and the practice of 
slavery there is now little left by which they can be distin- 
guished. The Marus, Lashis and Zis are surrounded by Ching- 
‘paw, and ‘‘there is now very little outward difference between 
2 Ay : + 


e 
they belong to the Lepai clan of the Chingpaw, and although 
not recognized by the latter as such, the process of absorption 


civilizing action of Buddhism,—a factor of greater importance 


1 (4), p. 363. 2 (11), p. 33. 


Vol. IX, No. 3.) The A-ch’ ang (Maingtha) Tribe. 147 
[N.S.] 


than is often supposed when dealing with hybrid Indo-Chinese 
races. The introduction of the principles of Gautama, the 
influence of a literature, the growth of a priesthood, and the 
development of education would quickly tend to spread the 
speech and manners of the stronger tribe. In this respect the 
sacred book of the priest, and the trade route of the merchant, 
are every whit as potent as the conquest of the soldier, or the 
raid of the slaver. 

Before concluding this paper, I would again draw atten- 
tion to the necessity for a thorough and sympathetic study of 
the languages and customs of this interesting group of tribes, 
before they are finally submerged. In the words of Sir George 
Grierson, most of the dialects belonging to the Burmese group 
are all but unknown, and the same could be asserted with 
respect to the general ethnology of many of the tribes. 

n this paper I have attempted to show briefly :— 

(1) that, the language, appearance and dress of the A-ch’ang 
or Maingtha is sufficient to indicate their near relationship to 
the Maru, Zi, Lashi and Hpon tribes which form the Burmese 
section of the Tibeto-Burman group of languages ; 

(2) that, originally they had no connection with any branch 


out. Their absorption into the Shan race has been largely 
brought about by their conversion to Buddhism, as a result of 
the accident of geographical position ; 

(3) that, the Maru, Zi, Lashi, A-ch’ang and Hpon tribes, 
as they are now known, are stragglers or settlers from the 
main Burmese immigration down the N’mai Hka into the Irra- 
waddy plains. The first three tribes were headed off and 
eventually separated from the main stock by Chingpaw clans, 
by whom they have been largely assimilated. The latter two 
coming into contact with Shans suffered the same process, 
complicated in the case of the A-ch’ang by extensive Chinese 
immigration ; 

(4) that, in view of the rapid decay of the customs and 
language of these people, by their absorption into stronger 
races, and also of their great importance in settling the origin 

d early movements of the Burmese, further research is 
urgently called for at once. This should not only be linguis- 
tical, but anthropometrical and ethnological as well. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY. 


(1) Anderson, J. ‘‘ A Report on the Expedition to Yunnan 
via Bhamo.’’ Calcutta, 1871. 

(2) Morgan Webb, C. ‘‘ Census of India,’’ 1911, Vol. IX, 
Burma, Part [. : 

(3) Rose, A., and Brown, J. Coggin. ‘“ Lisu (Yawyin) Tribes 


148 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [March, 1913.] 


of the Burma-China Frontier.’’ Mems., Asiat. Soc. 
Bengal, Vol. III, No. 4, 1910. 

(4) Davies, H. R. “ Yiinnan, the Link between India and 
the e Yangtze ”’ 1909. 

(5) Grierson, Sir G. A. ‘‘ Linguistic Survey of India, Vol. III, 
Tibeto- Burman Family, Part t It, Specimens of the 
Kuki-Chin and Burma Groups.’’ 1904. 

(6) Eales, H. L. ‘‘ Report on the Census of Burma.”’ 189] 

(7) Scott, Sir George. ‘‘ Gazetteer of Upper Burma and the 
Shan States.”’ 1901 

(8) Scott, Sir George. ‘‘ Bur ma, A Handbook of practical, 
commercial and political information.’’ 1906. 

(9) Lowis, C. C. ‘‘ Census of India, 1901, Vol. XII, Burma.’ 

(10) Gurdon, P.R. ‘On the Khamtis.”? Jour. Royal Asiat. 
Soc., 1895, pp. 157-164. 

(11) Lowis, C.C. ‘‘ The Tribes of Buima.’’ Ethnographical 
Survey of India, Burma, No. 4, 1910. 

(12) Wehrli, eis | as Beitrag zur Ethnologie der Chingpaw 
(Kachin) von Ober-Burma.’’ Leiden 1904. 


15. Earliest Jesuit Printing in Indi 
From the Spanish of the Rev. Cecilio Gomez Redetea; S.J. 


Translated by the Rev. L. Carpon, S.J., and edited by the 
Rev. H. Hosten, S. 


The present article is a translation from the Spanish of 
part of Imprentas / de los Antiguos Jesuitas / en las / Misiones 
de Levante / durante los siglos XVI al XVIII / Datos Aig jocoued 
por el P. Cecilio Gomez Rodeles / de la Compania de Jesiis,'/ pp. 
4-17. The complete reprint of Fr. C. Gomez Rodeles’ articles 
comprises pp. 56; for he retraces the origin and development 
of Jesuit printing, not only in India, but in Macao, Japan, China 

and Indo-China. To us here the chapter on Jesuit printing in 
ths commends itself as the most interesting. 
lock-printing, a Chinese invention, was known and 


at 16, however, a well acknowledged fact that the Jesuits 
were the pioneers in India of the European process of printing 
with movable type; but, whereas it was generally supposed 
that Jesuit printing began i in 1577 under Bro. John keg 


guese. This early introduction of printing into India reflects 


more backward. The printing-press of the Danish Missionaries 
of Tranquebar was the first after those of the Jesuits (1712). 


Rachol, Cochin, Ambalacata, Angamale and Cranganore. 
certain number of the books printed were in Portuguese. Fr. 


nt ( Articulos viblinalldl en la Secogtel = y Fe) + algo! Edicién. | 
Madrid / Establecimento tip. ‘‘ Sucesores de Rit pre din »? | Impresores 
de la — Casa | Paseo de —— eiapee non: 80: / 1912. |] 
Cc RA Sen, Hist. of Bengal lang. and literat., 
Caloutta, 1911, p. 849. 
f. East ani West, March 1902, p. 550, quoting Dr. Busteed’s 
Echoes — res ‘alcutta 
oO presses esses must have been the same as that of Vaipicota, 
which was piceenan: shifted. 


150 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [April, 1913. 


C. Gomez Rodeles limits his inquiry to the work done by Jesuit 
writers for the Indian vernaculars: Konkani, Kanarese, Mara- 
thi, Malayalam, and Tamil. Some works were also printed in 
Ethiopic, and a large number of translations into Syriac was 
prepared for the use of the St. Thomas Christians. 

To-day, when most of the Indian vernaculars have been 
thoroughly studied and classified, it is not easy for us to 
realize the hesitations felt by our predecessors in discriminat- 
ing and denominating some of our allied dialects. Our early 
missionaries applied the term ‘‘ Malabar’’ to both Malayalam 
and Tamil; Kanarese was long a misnomer for Konkani; the 
‘*Bracmana’’ tongue did not necessarily mean Samskrt; at 
Goa it meant rather Konkani or Marathi; Badaga was Telugu, 
while Hindostani applied even to Marathi. These points, if not 
unknown to Fr. C. Gomez Rodeles, have not been touched upon. 

Though the Catholic Missionaries of the West Coast must 


5 Ale S.J. (Oriente conquistado, Lisboa, 1710, vol. I, conq. 


Manoel, whom the University of Salamanca had honoured 
with the title of Doctor utriusque juris, robbed a Brahman 
Pandit of his MSS., of 18 volumes of the ‘‘Gita Veaco’’ and 
other authors ancient and modern.'! He brought them to Goa 
and translated the substance of them into Portuguese. Fathers 


(Mogor) , Beschi (Madura), Calmette, Coourdoux, Pons (Carnatic), 
Mosac (Chandernagor), Bischopinck, Hanxleden, Pimentel, Hau- 
segger (Malabar), Tieffentaller (Mogor). It is chiefly through 


the letters of some of these that the attention of European 
i e 


not appear to have busied themselves with the study of 
Samskrt. The term ‘‘Bracmana” as used by them is to be 


__1 The story is given at full length bi ie A. de Quadros, S.J. (Dec. 
1559) in ‘oe Indice. De Stvpendis Rebvs .. in India.. 


, Lovanii, 
1566, pp. (292-2 9. “* Veacus ’’ is there supposed be some ancient 
author In libris nescio cuius i, que qua principem 


- ~ . . 7 t . 
coriphet estimant ; uiq; 18. Cémentariori volumina in patrias leges, 
aliasq ; cdstitutiones variorti doctorti suo tépore reliquit.’” sha appe 
under the form ‘‘ Risinus,’’ p. 298. In another letter from Goa (1560) 

Guita’’ is taken for a person (p 376). 
* Cf. the chapter on Sarnskrt in Fr. J. Dan~tMANN, 8.J., Die Sprach- 
kunde und die Missionen, Freiburg, 1891. 


Vol. IX, No. 4.] Earliest Jesuit Printing in India. 151 
[NV.S.] 


explained by such other terms as we see them use, viz., 
‘* Bracmana-Marasta,’’ ‘‘ Bracmana-Canarim,’’ and ‘‘ Bracmana 
vulgar,’’ under which we recognize Marathi and Konkani 
Sir H. Yule (Hobson-Jobson, s.v. Canara) shows how the 
term Canarijs is applied by the old Portuguese authors to the 
Konkani people and language of Goa. _ The Jesuit Missions in 


Konkani. The large admixture of Marathi, which they con- 
tain, has made some look upon them as written in Marathi 
rather than in Konkani. The efforts made by Bro. John 
Goncalves (ante 1579) to cast ‘* Canarim”’ types must, probably, 
be understood of Konkani to be printed in Kanarese type, 


for recording Konkani.! Eventually, the Kanarese alphabe 

was made use of, we are told. (CE. Dr. G. A Grierson, Lin- 

guistic Survey of India, Vol. VII, p. 167.) Our impression, 

however, is that as Portuguese ioe a printed 

Konkani in Rom e.g., Fr. Thomas Steph (Cf. Fr. J. 

Dauimann, Die Syibnohbutda und dies inencme arta 1891, 
-22.) 


A similar confusion obtained between Malayalam and Tamil. 
Yule (Hobson-Jobson, s.v. Mal abar) i is correct, we believe, when 
he Aree out that the « u ‘Malabar?’ np wee in which Fr. ui 


a ‘*Grammaire pour apprendre Ja Nada Tamoul plguirement 
appelée le Malabar... Faite a Pontichéry et achevée le 18° 
Novembre 1728 par un Mi se tae de la Compagnie de Jésus 
de la Mission du Carnate.’’?* The Catholic Missionaries of 
‘sass still pone: of their Tamil Christians as ‘‘ nos Mala- 


There can be no doubt that Badaga meant Telugu (cf. 
Yule’s Hobson-Jobson, s.v. Badega). Fr. de la Lane was the 
author of a Telugu Dictionary and a Telugu Grammar. A 
copy of the Jatter in the Bibl. Ristionale of Paris is inscribed 
ndre la langue Telenga dite vul- 
I r un 


rr Cf. Imper. Gazett. of Sages h x Sac 007. No. Le 


a yn R 
2 The author was Fr Cf. Junien Vinson, Rev. 
de oe ‘a on ee comparée, Paris, Maisonneuve, 1899. Vol. XXXII, 
is 


3 C Ch ibid, re 


152 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [April, 1913. 


It must be understood that, though we have pone 
Fr. G6mez Rodeles’ spon for the names of some of ou 
vernaculars, we have left others in the form ener by the 
early missionaries, in order to avoid worse confusi 
ny words or passages within [ ] are ours. 
H. Hosren, S8.J.]. 


GOA. _—When St. Francis Xavier landed at Goa on May 6, 
1542, he may be said to have taken possession of that town. 
Here, in course of time, and under the visible protection of 
God, the number of the Jesuits and the sphere of their civiliz- 
ing action went on increasin 

Goa was to become <a Jesuit seminary for the whole 
East, for it was here that young men fresh from Europe, and 
the sons of Europeans chosen by God in India as evangelical 
recruits, completed their sition and prepared shemasl vet for 
the apostolate. ? 

t was at Goa that the new missionaries took rest after 
their long and dangerous journey, that they learned one of the 


Sun, for the most part under the sway of paganism 

Goa, finally, gave shelter with due haae to those who 
had sacrificed their health and strength in unwholesome climes, 
until they either recovered their former vigour or were called 
away to receive in heaven the reward they had nore by 
their apostolic labours. 

In 1573, thirty years after the arrival at Goa of the 
Apostle of the Indies, that capital with its neighbourhood i 
a population of 90,000 Christians, 2,500 of whom had bee 
that very year regenerated i in the waters of ee ROE. 

s many as 500 children were taught in our Goa schools 
the rudiments of letters, the Christian Doctrine’ and Christian 
morality ; these together with a handred orphans were main- 
tained at the expense of the college. 

n the beginning of the year 1576, nearly the whole island 
of Goa was Christian, and, though the number of evangelical 
labourers in the East was rather small, yet there were at Goa 
“it Jesuits, mostly students perfecting themselves in virtue and 
earnin 

iv illy , that great city was the emporium of Portuguese 
trade i in India and the seat of the colonial Government. 


1 Mon menta Xaveriana, t. I, 250 sqq.; Fr. F. de ape 8.J., 
——  conguitado a Jesu “ee puts I, conq. I, div. I., “ag and 17. 
R. SAcoHint, S.J., H t. Soe. Jesu, p. Il lib. I,n 
By Christian Doctems. nse stand throughout the Caiechism ] 
Annu, 1573 and 1574. [Pyrard de Laval speaks of 2000- 
vaste in 1610, all educated gratis. | 


eee 


Vol. IX, No. 4.] Earliest Jesuit Printing in India. 153 
[N.S] 


Alive to its advantages, the Superiors realized from the 


also in order the help the numerous Christian communities in 
formation in the East, by procuring books to the missionaries 
and to the new converts to our holy faith. 

A Spanish Coadjutor Brother, Juan de Bustamante, 
-brought from Europe the material of the first printing press 
with movable types which appeared in India. It started work 
in 1556, by printing the philosophical theses for a public dispu- 
tation of our students.! 

Though for some time it was of little use for want of a 
man who could manage skilfully the types an and the press,” 
Guttenberg’s invention proved most useful by printing books 
in several Indian languages. 

The Catechism, composed in Portuguese by St. Francis 
Xavier for the instruction of the faithful, specially of the 
children, had been in everybody’s hands in manuscript form. 
In 1577, 3 it came out of the Goa press type-printed: a piece of 
gh which one can fancy was no less useful than remark- 
able. 


Eas aside the Portuguese books printed in the College 
of Goa, whenever there is no special reason to mention them, 
we shall review those printed in other languages, after a brief 
mention of the services rendered to the Ethiopian Mission by 
the printing-presses of Goa 

GOA.—ETHIOoPIC. --The Mission of Abyssinia or Ethiopia, 
had long been wished for by the King of Portugal D. Joao III, 
by St. Ignatius of Loyola and the Sovereign Pontiffs Julius Ul 
and Paul [V, and when, after careful preparations and at the 
cost of no small sacrifices, it was at last established in spite of 


were far from corresponding, in the beginning especially, to 
the high hopes it had called forth and the care bestowed on it. 
of trustworthy documents relating to that 


| Fr. pe Sousa, 8.J., Oriente Conquistado a Jesu sr ons pei cong. 
V, div. 1, n. 22: Fr. Craupio Cremente, Tables chronoldgicas 
1642 .., anadidas hasta 1689 por el lic. age « Joseph Miguel, Pinos 
ig afio 1556, p. 244; Fr. Saconint, 8.J., Hist. Soc. Jesu, p. II, lib. i, 
52. 


Fr. Saconint, 8.J., Hist. Soc. Jesu, p. IV, lib. V, n. 180, ann. 
1577 (587 ? 
3 [The me should be 1557. Cf. Orient2 Conquistado, I, so 
4 Fevipzr Neri Xavier, Resumo historico «>» VIGO. : oo. 
Xavier, p. I, cap. 1X; a ae Op. cit., p. I, cona. I, ‘div. n. 23; 
Monumenta Xaveriana, t. Ip. 


154 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (April, 1913. 


for the Society, and are received with applause and gratitude 
by all lovers of history.' 
famous Prester John had asked from Europe, clever 
typographers and artisans of every kind.? 
This happened probably in 1514 or shortly before. Among 
the things which the Emperor asked from King D. Manuel 


Cony 
° 
> 
5 
2 
oS 
Qu 
eo 
° 
% 
oO 
5 
N 
° 
Qu 
@ 
cS 
° 
s 
7) 
fa?) 
5 
oe 
be 
a 
a 
oF 
io) 
jor 
~ 
os 
= 
Lous 
[a 
ta] 
ie] 
2 
4 
ie) 
<s 


bringing them to their destination. Besides many other things, 

Leite was to procure for the Emperor two organs, an organist, 

and two painters, and the King added: ‘* You shall also take 
77 


to the Emperor. Almost half a century later, they tried to 
comply with his wishes in another way; for, in 1560, while 


1536 and admitted to the Society of Jesus in 1555, joined to 
the study of Rhetoric the office of Prester John’s printer. 
After completing his studies in Goa, the typographer of 
Valencia was ordained a Priest in 1564, his death taking place 
on August 23, 1588.4 
© possess concerning this first printing-press in India 
some trustworthy particulars which Father Beccari has just 
brought to light in his tenth volume, and we proceed to give 
ere a summary of them. 
The first batch of Jesuit missionaries embarked at Belem, 
on the Tagus, and left for Ethiopia on March 29, 1556, four 
months before the death of St. Ignatius of Loyola. It consisted 


_' Ten volumes in large 4°, accompanied by erudite prefaces and 
copious indexes have been published under the title Rerum Athiopicarum 
Scriptores Occidentales Inediti a seculo XVI ad XIX, curante C. Beccari, 
S.J. Rome excudebat C. de Luigi, 1903-1910. 


n 


de Bibli - »y Postaphos et in omni genere artifices.’’ Cf. Boletum 
vwolrographia Portugueza e Revista dos Archivos Nacionaes, Coimbra, 
1880, vol. II, n. I, p. 17. 
8 Cf. Boletim, Op. cit pp. 18-23. The original li isb 

; a etim, Op. cit., pp. : ists are at Lisbon, 
- — Rega da Torre do Tombo, Corpo edivoaokoghed. parte 1a, mago 
Peg Som. MSS. le Aicsts Registro de Cartas do Collegio de S ae 
ly 9gg-, quo the Boleti h J - ti. 
loguea of vaste oe y oletim de Bibliographia, p. 17 


) 
the Patriarch; Fr. John Gualdames, three Brothers of the 
Society, and some young men who were soliciting admission 
into it. One of the Brothers was Juan de Bustamante just 
mentioned, who knew the art of printing. 

King D. Joao III, the royal family, and other friends had 
been munificent towards the members of the expedition. The 
King adjoined to the Patriarch an Indian of good character, an 
able and experienced printer, to help Brother Bustamante, who 
was taking with him a printing-press to Goa. An eye-witness 
gives us this information. ! 

n reaching Goa on September 6 of the same year 1556, 
the press was set to work without delay; for, according toa 
letter of the Patriarch written to Fr. Louis Gonzélez de Camara 
and dated Goa, November 6 of the same year, the Brothers 
studying Philosophy had had a public disputation, and the 
Theses, or propositions to be defended, had been printed, besides 
other things, by Brother Juan. He was performing his office 
well, and they expected he would make further progress. 

At the time the Patriarch wrote this letter, there was 
question of printing the Catechism of St. Francis Xavier, a 
work from which all expected great advantage for the Ethiopian 
Mission.” 

One of the books published by Brother Bustamante in 1560, 
was a treatise in Portuguese, in which Fr. Gonzalo Rodriguez, 
basing himself on the Councils and the Holy Fathers. estab- 


great number of copies of the same, and this cannot be done 
easily unless we print them, we beg of Your Most Illustrious 


1 Rerum Aithiopic. Script., vol. X, pp- 53-61. Letter of Fr. Gaspa 
Calaza to St. Ignatius. Lisbon, Apri! 30, 1556. : 
2 Ibid., pp. 62-67 , in Portuguese, Goa, 
November 6, 1556 ; another of Fr. Andrew de Oviedo, also in Portuguese, 
Goa, November 7, 1556. [The Theses were defended by Francisco Cabral 
and Manoel Teixeira and presided over by Fr. Antonio de Quadros. Cf. 
noo, ron. S.J., tome VI, pp- 783-784. The Patriarch wrote : 


oO 
o 
ce) 
° 
wh 
ry 
8 
an 
° 
Se 
° 
Z 
=] 
fe 
»@ 
N 


Master Francis.’ Cf. Beccart, Rer. hiop. Scriptores, t. X, p. 6 -] 

8 Fr. Gonzalo Rodrigues: born at Calleiros P-iseige me in 1527; 
went to the Indies in 1551; was a missionary at Goa, Ormuz an 
Ethiopia; died at Goa on March 5, 1564. Cf. Fr. SoMMERVOGEL, 
Bibliotheque de la Comp. de Jésus, t. VI, col., 1968. 


156 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [April, 1913. 


Lordship to send us a press with the Ethiopic types that are 
found in Rome, as also one or two rersons knowing the art of 
printing.’’ ! 


Even this time it does not seem that the wishes of the 
missionaries were realized: for Father Manoel de Imeida, 
Pedro Péez, Manoel Barradas and Alfonso Méndez, who wrote 
most accurately and minutely the history of Ethiopia, make no 
mention of a press in their beloved Mission. 


of their great undertaking. We krow : 
their possession the Ethiopian types presented by the Congrega- 
tion de Propaganda Fide for the benefit of the persecuted 


ce 
real 
° 
a 
S 
i) 
va 
S 
® 
<j 
a 
i) 
Q 
_ 
S 


Magseph assetat, or ‘‘ The wh'p against falsehoods,’’ a treatise 
in which he refutes the errors of the schismatical Raz Athema- 
teot. It was printed in St. Paul’s College, Goa, in 1642. 


the Emperor’s reque 


composed others in Armaranic or 


God.’’ The Patriarch translated it into Portuguese, and it 
was printed in St. Paul’s College in 1652.8 


' Goana-Malab., Epist. 1580-89, fol. 2, document 143. The Ethiopic 
types found in Rome were probably those used in printing a 4° work, 
about which St. Ignatius of Loyola wrote to Fr. Diego Mirén in Portugal 
on August 22, 1555: ‘* These last years, during the pontificate of Paul 
III, of happy memory, while there were here in Rome some learned 
Abexins and other persons zealous for the spiritual welfare of the king- 
dom of Ethiopia, they prepared and printed the whole New Testamen 
in the Abexin language, the chief one used in their writings and liturgy.’’ 
—— oe Series I, t. IX, p. 487. 

* #tome, Archives of the Congregatio Fide, Lettere 
latine, 1622-1628, vol. I, fol. 178 se : mpegs neiaeh : 

3 SOMMERVOGEL, Bibliotheque, t. IIT, cols. 646 and 647; ALEGAMBE 
and Sorwat,, Jesu, pp . [A copy of it, which 
Martinus N ijhoff, the antiquarian of The Hague, priced 250 florins, was 
sent for description in the beginning of 1912 to M. l’Abbé E. M. Riviere. 


Vol. 1X, No. 4.] Harliest Jesuit Printing in India. - 157 
[NV.S.] : 


Fr. Manoel de Almeida in his Historia Ethopie is full of 
praise for Fr. Antonio Fernandez, and gives an account of the 
books which he wrote. It is through this author that we know 
that Urban VIII sent from Rome to the Patriarch Fr. Alfonso 
Méndez, the Abyssinian or ihaldesn type used for printing 
Tene Whip against falsehoods.’’ 

The services rendered by We Ethiopic press extended to 
the Mission of Angola. From 1617, Fr. Francisco Pazconio, a 
native of Capua, worked for many vears in this impor‘ ant and 
difficult enterprise. He wrote two Catechisms in Fithionio, and 
returning to Portugal died at Lisbon on November 16, 1641. 

GOA.—Booxs 1n Kox SKanI.—To the west of India, nice 
the coast, lies a country called Koakan, with a language of its 
own. Among the missionaries who cultivated this vineyard, 
was Fr. Michael de Almeida, born at Gouvea (Portugal) in 
1607, and received in 1623 into the Society at Goa, where he 
became Rector and later Provincial. According to some, he 


"The ame year 1658, he sent also to the Goa press the 
uciaces of the Konkani language composed by Fr. Diego 
Ribeiro and enlarged by himself, as also five discourses on the 
versicle Hxurgens Maria.? 

Fr. Diego Ribeiro, for fifty years a aii in Salsete, 
died at Goa in 1635. He translated i o Konkani era Flos 
Sanctorum of Fr. Ribadeneira and had it arene: at 

Many other books, also in Konkani, issued from the Rachol 
press, as we shall see presently. 

304.—“ Bramana.’’-—Fr. Sommervogel fase out the 
ey 


For the complete ves of the Sain, rd ko aornaage cf. . Riv. 
Corrections ap dditions a la Bibl. de la C. de J., Bs nie 8 (Toalouse, 1 1913) 
poke : ‘este sat que o Padre oni 
sae Mee Mendes peli iopia na sy Sg della, aqui em Goa 
i f Goa, Sept. 30, 1 
ney Bk ay Mate ahi Reru : Se Liopi- pel vol. VII, 
r. Fernandez 


Bk. Sh of 
pp. 472-477. Fr. ‘Almeida sate the author refuted by 
; £40; SommERVOGEL, t. VI, c 
spi PP. 2895 ie cols. 188, 189. “At the foot a as title-page : 


be Gon, typis Collegii Societatis Jesu, 1658. 
4 Ibid., t. VI, col. 1 


158 ~ Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [April, 1913. 


existence of the following work: ‘‘The Pastors’ Garden, com- 
posed in the Bramana tongue by Father Miguel de Almeida, of 
the Society of Jesus, a native of Gouvea. With permission of 
the Holy Inquisition and the Ordinary. Printed at Goa in St. 
Paul’s College of the Society of Jesus. Year 1658.”’ 4°.! 
It is very probable that this was not the only book printed 
at Goa in this language.” 
OA.—Tue Prorsssep Hous. - ‘‘BRACMANICO-MARASTA.” 
—It is clear that, for a time at least, there existed a press in the 
Professed House ; for we find that a work by Fr. Stephen de la 
oix was printed there in 1634. It consists of two folio 
volumes, and is in ‘‘ Brahmanico-Marasta ”’ verse, this language 
being the dogmatic one used by the litterati 
his Father was one of the chief pillars of that Mission. 
Born at St. Pierre du Bosguérard (Eure) in 1579, he became a 
Jesuit in 1599 and went to India in 1602. He studied at Goa, 


he composed many books, among others a Poem of the Passion, 
which the Christians sang every Friday of Lent in the Church of 


1 SoMMERVoGEL, Op. cit., t. I, col. 189. ‘Jardim de Pastores, 
composto em lingua Bramana pello Padre Miguel de Almeida da Com- 
panhia de Jesus, natural deGouvea. Com licenea da Sancta Inquisigao @ 
Ordinario. Impresso no Collegio de Sam Paul de Goa da Companhia de 
Tesus. Anno 1658.”’ 

? [From what has been said above of Fr. de Almeida under 
‘ Books in Konkani,’’ it is evident that ‘‘ Bramana’’ here means Kon- 


ant. 

5 Discursos sobre a vida do Apostolo Sam Pedro. Compostos em 
versos em lingoa bramana marasta. -Empressos em ; asa Professa 
de Jesus i 


th 

that of the College; the necessary material and the workmen were per- 
aps removed to the Professed House to facilitate for the author the cor- 

rection of the proofsheets. {There is a copy in the National Library, 
Lisbo . ° - bs . B ib 2 m 


ie INTO D ; o. Port.; ILVA, Y 
t.—We suggest that this life of St. Peter might bo a translation of @ 
Portuguese text o : 
hod 


. Peter. 
: ; of Fr, de la Croix: <‘* Entre les autres grands person- 
nages que je trouvai en la maison d i 
Salsete, 1621], j’ 


. : 0 
mieux que ceux mémes du pays, et avait imprimé plusieurs livres en l’une 
ot en l’autre qui sont estimés de tous; ot je vis un fort beau podme de la 


Vol. IX, No. 4.] Earliest Jesuit Printing in India. 159 
[V.S.] 


The Professed House of Goa was started in 1585.! 

VAIPICOTA.—PrintInG In ‘‘Matapar,’’ SyRIAC AND 
** KanaREsE.’’—The famous Christians of St. Thomas lived i in 
the mountains of Malabar to the number of about 70,000, follow- 


corrupt practices, thes were very ‘anxious to return to the purity 
of the Roman fai 

The decrees of ‘the first Council of Goa for the extirpation 
of those abuses were most prudent ; yet, the inhabitants of the 


forbidden to them.’ Prudence and patience, however, suc- 
eeeded in calming them down. 

Having gained this much, Fr. Alexander Valignano, the 
visitor of the Missions of India, Japan and China, had an 
Abraham, the Archbishop of the St. 
Thomas’ Christians. He offered him costly presents and ob- 
tained in writing ample facilities for the Fathers of the Society 
to exercise their apostolic ministry and settle among his dio- 
cesans. 

A place for a residence was found not far from the fort of 
St in the town of Vaipicota which was subject to the 

of Cochin, a friend of the missionaries. A church was 
built under the invocation of the True Cross, and immediately 
Fr. Bernardino Ferrao, spe with Pedro Luis, a native priest, 
began in 1577 to compose in the Malabar tongue a small work 
containing the orthodox Grist doctrine 

The chief difficulty was how to have it printed. I[n this 
as in all the rest, Divine Pivviitehie had provided by bringing 
to Goa me Spanish Coadjutor Brother Juan Gonzalez 

ived into the Society in 1555, this Brother ‘united to 
no puma sanctity talent, a sound judgment and a rare skill 
in his office of ironsmith and clock-maker. These cer pt rd 

e him most useful to the Ethiopian Mission. He died at 
ee in 1579, siete a sweet remembrance of his virtues. 


eur gue les chrétiens chantaient en |’église sur le 
nag get ee hip tb %s -? a pokey durait une grande 


soir de tous les vendredis du caré 

partie de la nuit, avec un sr a e de Oe: re beard 
douze mille efsonnes pour assister & ce 

Seven he aiecone du P. A de Rhodes, ch. IV 


Sousa, Oriente conquistado, pt. II, — 2 iv. I, n. 105. 
ita 3 i i i is i bariam inter 


chaldaici, Hstranghelo dicti. Me 
Ori 

to confound here the dispositions of the Council 
thos of ° Bt. Thomas Christians in Malabar with those 
the Hindiis in Salsete of Goa.] 


i 

8 [The a 
against et errors of ¢ 
against t By capone ‘rites of 


160 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. {April, 1913. 


This clever artist ccntrived the matrices:of the ‘‘ Malabar ”’ 
types, cast the type, and in a short time the College issued 
| 


The third Provincial Council of India, held at Goa, on 
June 9, 1589, gave a new impulse to the typographical and 
editorial movement in Western India. The Archbishop and 
Primate, Frey Vicente de Fonseca, } resided over the Council, 
assisted by the Archbishop of Angamale, the Bishop of Cochin, 
his Procurator of Malacca, Fr. Alexander Valignano, Provincial 
of the Society of Jesus, together with some Fathers and several 
Prelates of other Religious Orders. 

The Council having ordained by its seventh decree the 
translation into Syriac and ‘‘ Malabar’ of some books required 
for the proper management of that Christian community, the 
Fathers of the Society of Jesus were entrusted with the task 
of carrying out the Council’s intentions 

€ most important step had already been taken, when 
Fr. George de Castro, after overcoming great difficulties, had 
established the Seminary of Vaipicota. where both these 
languages, as unlike to each other, says Fr. de Sousa, as 
English and Greek, were being taught. ‘‘Malabar’’ is the 


in the said Seminary. At the same time, they had to teac 
tin and ‘‘Kanarese.’’? This last language was spoken in 
Kanara, also in the west of the Indian peninsula. 
The professors applied themselves to the task, and not 
only translated from Latin into Syriac a commentary of the 


composed in ‘‘ Malabar’ a voluminous Prayer-book, a Cate- 
chism, and a booklet of devotional exercises for the Sundays 
and chief feasts. 

These publications and the preaching of the Fathers, 


i he Ry DE Sousa, Oriente conquistado a Jesu Christo, pt. II, cona. I 
div. IT, nos. 12, 33; Fr. Sac ist. Soc. Jesu, p. V1 V, 2. isl; 


» India Or. Christiana, p. 181; 
« Vinson : = 
p. 74. [It is difficult to see why ‘‘ Malabar’? books should have been 
printed at Goa, and not at Vaipicota or Cochin. I do not believe in the 
*‘Malabar ’’ printing of Goa], 
2 [Read ‘* Malabar.’’] 


Vol. IX, No. 4.] Earliest Jesuit Printing in India. 161 
[N.S.] 


assisted by the priests educated in the ‘hearted confuted the 
errors of paganism, while the knowledge, lov ~~ practice of 
the true faith spread among the new Christia 

ad been Brother Juan reteoet cima to ne 


works in that eneue were sitntedl especially at Rachol, as we 
shall dpe see.® 
HOL.--PotyeLor Printinc.—A man who deserved 
well or ve vedeed oon communities in- ‘dia was the English Fr. 
Thomas Steph He was born in 1549 in the diocese of 
Salisbury ce was ike first English Seauit to work as a mission- 
ary in India. 


t 

published at Goa and Rachol. He died at Goa in 1619, aged 
seventy years, forty-four of which he had passed in the Society 
and yee Bae as a Missioner in Salsete.* 

t Rachol, near [within] the Bi ang fort, a printing- 
se was working in St. Ignatius’ College from 161 6 at the 
latest to 1668. It published books in Pieagene, Kanarese , 
Malabar, and Syriac 

H are some ‘of the: ones productions of Rachol, as 
given by Fr. Sommervoge 

‘¢ A discourse on the coming into the world of our Saviour 
Jesus Christ. Divided into two treatises. At Rachol, in the 
Gulleze of the Society of Jesus, 1616. e 


: FR. DE Sousa, tbid., pt. II, ¢ conq. I, div. 1, 1 nos, 93, 106. 
e Sousa agers A length of the diffiéulties special to Kanarese 
Soin Ibid., p. 64. [The reference is wrong. It might be 7bid., 


3 [Can it be proved that the Jesuit press issued Kanarese or Konkan 
ks in the native character before the middle of the XVIIth mines 
ater ? 

ee - ae is a ioned among other authors by Fr. Parricnani, Meno. 
rn December 15; Fr. DE GUILHERMY, Ménologe, Assist. de Germanic, 
2e série, 2¢ partie, Sept. 19: Fr. SommERVOGEL, Bibliotheque, cols. 
469. 

: Fr. Saccaint, Hist. Soc. Jesu, p. IV, 1. V, n. 180. 
bre a vindade Jesus Christo, nosso Salvador ,20 mundo, 
dividide en dous tratados. Em Rachol, no Collegio da Companhia de Jesus 
anno de 16 ge Cf. Sommervocen, Biblioth., t. Il, co , art. ‘* Bus- 
ten”; Id. tionn. des ouvrages Anon., col. ‘an. a ‘is phigior ee un- 
likely ‘that a poem of 11,018 saciies of four verses each—should 


162 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (April, 1913. 


A second edition appeared also at Rachol in 1649, and a 
third was printed ‘‘in St. Paul’s College,’’ Goa, in 1654. 

It appears to have been written first in Portuguese and 
then translated into Konkani. In the second and third editions 
it bears the title of ‘‘ Purana It is a poem of 11,018 stanzas 
of four verses each concerning By history from the crea- 


have been first published in 1616 in geen We read in /ettere 
Annue del Giappone, China, Goa, et Ethio .. anni 1615, 1616, 
1617, 1618, 1619 .... Napoli, Lazar 0, Scorrigio re pe. AXI, pp. 112, 
113: * (Fr. e ; 


n his par 
as satisfaction on the part of his superiors. e made himself thoroughly 
master of the Canarine [Konkani] tongue, and reduced it to grammatical 

seg with such profit to ours that, whereas at edi no one was able to 
ar the confessions of those p eople, he saw his Grammar produce in hi 
i 


tion of his superiors, he began printing in that sprit a volume of verse on | 

the chief o— es of the faith, ‘the creation o the world, the fall of our 

first parents Sigiette me of the chief prophecies concerning the advent of 
i is ork is so aateoatie that not only do the Christians derive 


language a Christian Saagpibes LCavecht sm]. Itw ee printed when 
the Age se was na otled a better life bot the fruit, whic is bound to 


ve 

with other Catholic Puranas, e.g.: that of . Francisco. Vaz de ui- 

maraes, panne to that of Stephens, which was big ie: da isbon in 1659 

in Portuguese characters, at Bombay in 1845, and perk poets in 1879. 
ishe = 


n 
by J. A. ocr Cf. E. M. Riviire, S.J., Correct. et = a la Biol. 
dela C. de J., IL (Toulouse, 1912), col. 289, a vi ery interest- 
ing articles appeared | in that connection in the  aet yr iallee 0 St. 
Aloysius Colleg 
Biographical and other notices on the “ first Wf ORE in India ’’ 
~ hes _ n Ribadeneira, ny Backer, es Parsons, More, H 
a Cu 


I + Bi icc. p j 

nos sec. XVI, XVII, XVIII, pp. 29-43, wae e os estrang., 
EL P.,:Voli-k: oe 385 ;—J. DAHLMANN, 8.J., Die aa a de und die 
Missionen, Op. cit ;—Mangalore Magazine, first three vols. passim ;—Dr. 
G. A.  Garmnson, Eien Survey of India, VII, p. 167.] 


Vol. ete 4,] Earliest Jesuit Printing in India. 163 
8] 


tion of the world up to Our Lord’s Ascension. In 1785, the 
Christians, who suffered martyrdom under Tippu Sahib, ‘were 
comfsrted by the reading of this book. 

‘*Christian doctrine in the Bramana-Canarim tongue, in 
the form of a dialogue for the teaching of young children. 
Rachol, 1632,’ by Fr. Stephens. It is, perhaps, a translation 

f Fr. Ign atius Martins’ booklet: ‘ Cartilha da Doutrina 
Christaa.’’! 

‘‘ Explanation of the Christian doctrine, compiled from 
oe Robert isesaamiongg a .and other authors, and composed 
in vernacular Bramana by Father Diogo Ribeiro.. Printed 
in St. ‘Tgnatius se ie of the Society of Jesus, Rachol. Year 
1632 

«« Jesus, Mary. The Art of the PRR language, com- 
osed by Fr. Thomaz Esteuad of the Society of Jesus, and 


Society. With permission from the Holy Inguisition and t 
Ordinary. Rachol, in St. Ignatius’ College of the Society of 
Jesus, 1640,’ by Fr. Thomas Stephens 
Several other Fathers mastered the languages of the. 
country, ee preached and wrote in them 
The Neapolitan, Fr. Leonardo Cinnamo, or Cinami, joined 
the Society in 1623 when he was yet but a lad. He had such 
decided vocation for the Indian Missions that he bound 
himself by vow to solicit them. His wish sag been gratified 
in 1644, he wrought wonders of zeal in Kanara, and later on 
during twenty | years in Salsete and other parts. 


1 i Pduteiaa Christ&é em lingua Bramana- uae dete, 


Pat ‘ 
tte Gartitha by Fr. Marcos Jorge, since de Sousa Ovtheds Cong., Pt. I, 
says that the wo: ork of M. Jorge superseded the Catechism of St. 


1, 

1688, 1609, 1614. Fr. Ignatius Martins, a Jesuit between 1547-1598, en- 
iarged it, and these pidaions + are found in several editions of Fr. Jorge’s 
Ca 

a ik ‘ Declaragam da Doutrina Christam, collegida do wanes Roberto - 
Belarmino .. e ou ie s autores, composta em lingoa pello 
Padre Diogo Ribeiro .. Impresso no Collegio de Sancto lena o da Com- 
panhia de Jesu em —" achol. Anno de 1632.’’ Cf. Bibhoth., 7 VI, col. 


1759. 
3 ** Jesu Mar Arte da lingoa Canarim composta pello. Padre 
Thomaz Estoud om Companhia de Jesus, e acrecentada salia P Diogo 


Jesus de 

also Biblioth.. t. VI, col. 1709, ‘* A. Vocabulario...” [This is a Konkani 
Grammar, which was reprinted by J. H. da Cunha Rivara at Nova Goa 
in 1857.] 


164 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [April, 1913. 


India is indebted to him for a most complete ‘‘ Catechism 
of the mysteries of the Faith,’ a compendium of the Christian 
Doctrine in elegant Kanarese, for the instruction of the 
neophytes, as also for sundry Lives of Saints and an Apology of 
the mysteries of the faith, with a refutation of pagan sects and 
superstitions. Availing himself of his deep knowledge of 

<anarese, he also composed a Dictionary and a Grammar.! 

Fr. Joio de Pedroza born at Coimbra in 1616, and received 


admiration. He was Rector of the College of Rachol and of 
the Novitiate of Goa, where he died in the Professed House on 
May 12, 1672. He wrote a book of Soliloquies of the Soul 
with God, and an Instruction about making a good confes- 
sion.” 

Though of Portuguese extraction, Fr. Antonio de Saldanha 
was born at Mazagan (Africa) in 1598. He proceeded thence 
to the Indies to try and make his fortune in the military 
profession. But God called him to another sort of warfare. 
Faithful to the promptings of grace, he entered the Novitiate 
of Goa in 1615. During forty years he devoted himself to the 
Salsete Mission and died at Rachol on December 2, 1 He 
wrote several books in the ‘‘ Bramana’’ tongue, which were 
printed at the Rachol press.* 

PUNICAEL.—Tamm Parintine.—Fr. Joao de Faria was 
labouring strenuously on the Fishery Coast, contending, like 
the rest of the Missionaries, with the lack of men and books 
written in the vernacular. In 1578, prompted by his zeal, he 
contrived to engrave on wood the characters of the Tamil 
anguage. Four years later, in 1582, he died at Goa and went, 
we hope, to receive the reward of his labours. 

The press of the Fishery Coast was working at Punicael in 
1578, since a Flos Sanctorum or Lives of the Saints was printed 
there that year in Tamil types.* 

Fr. de Sousa adds that Fr. de Faria not only engraved but 
cast Tamil type, ‘‘ with which were printed this year [1578] 
the Flos Sanctorum, the Christian Doctrine, a copious Confes- 


1 SorwEL, pp. 548; 649; Sommervoeet, t. IT, cols, 1187 and 1188. 
2 SorweEt, p. 486; SommeRvoGeEt, t. VI, col. 419. 

One hem, though written in ‘‘ Bracmana’’ bears this title: 
‘‘Tratado dos Milagres, que pelos merecimentos do Glorioso Sancto 
Antonio .. foy Nosso Senhor servido obrar .. No Collegio de Rachol, 

665.” Sotwex, p. 84; Sommervocen, t. VII, cols. 459; 460 [where 
the date is 1655]. 
* SommervoceEL, Biblioth., t. III, col. 545; t. VI, cols. 1241; 1242 


Vol. IX, No. 4.] . Earliest Jesuit Printing in India. 165 
[NV.8. 
Christians tried to obtain these printed books and prized them 
ighly.’’! 


MBALACATA.—Tamit, BapaGa anp “ poeogmret 
Printinc.—After this first step, it became easy to print other 
books which proved not less useful to the faithful ea! to the 
Missionaries. 

work which deserves a special mention is the ‘* Tamil 
Vocabulary with the meaning in Portuguese, composed by Fr. 
Anthony de Proenga of the Society of Jesus, a Missionary in 
Madura. Ambalacata, 1679.’’ The author, Fr. Proenca, was 
born at Ramella in 1625, entered the Society on July 13, 1643, 
went to the ee Mission in 1647, and died at Tociam on - 
gre ee * 


For composition of this great work, Fr. Proenca availed 
himself > ob abours of Fathers Ignatius Bruno, Robert de 
Nobili and Man Martins. His Vocabulario was furthe 


arranged by Fr. Balthasar da Cos 

The printer was a native Lata Aichamoni. Though 
the types engraved by Aichamoni were elegant, they got worn 
out by constant use and owing to the softness of their material, 
wood, as we have said.é 

Many are the writers who speak of the extraordinary 
merits of Fr. Robert de Nobili, whom we have just mentioned. 


his zeal and austerity making him adopt an extraordinary mode 
of life. 


had a great command of the teas languages most 
Pa in the country, Tamil, Badaga alabar. He 
wrote and published many books in them, chiefly during the 
last five years of his life, which he spent in retirement at Jaffna 
and Meliapur, dying at the latter place on January 16, 
We find that one of his works, the Candam or Christian 
Doctrine, in four volumes, was printed at T'ragambar [Tranque- 
bar].* 


3 Oriente conquistado, hs aL, es ~~ nal if, 
2 Fr. Franoo, S.J., . da vt piper '@ Evora, p- 661; 
Ib., Ann. glor., p. 738; Fr. grt ola Me enologio ig a 10; Fr. Gor- 
HERMY M e.— Assist. de Portug., t. I, Déc. 27; SoMMERVOGEL, 


Biblioth., = ae col. 1241. 
conquistado a Jesu Christo, pt. II, cong. I. 
div. It, n. "69; ny ‘PavLINUS a 8. Bartuot., Ind. Or. Christ., p. 182 ; 
, Examen hist.-critic Codicum ees dicor. ver Prop. Pade, Rome, 1792, 
p- 65; fomiustooni, , Biblioth-, cols. 1 
+ SOMMERVOGEL, "Biblioth., i: v, , eile "17705 1780; 1 pennies pp. 724; 
725; Fr. Pauxuinus a 8. BARTHOL. »P 


166 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [April, 1913. 
COCHIN.—‘‘ ManaBar’’ Printinc.—A small book on 
the Christian Doctrine composed in Portuguese at Fr. Marcos 
Jorge ! and translated into ‘‘ Malabar ’’ by Fr. Henry Anriquez 
Pegraneel, was printed at Cochin in the College of the Mother 
f God on November 14, 1579. Fr. Manoel Martins had it 
peiiied in Tamil, but we do not know where? 
We do not know either how long that press was activ 
r. Sommervogel gives in Latin from Sotwel the different 
works peter by Fr. Anriquez or Henriquez in Tamil,? or in 
the ‘‘Malabar’’ tongue spoken along Cape Comorin. Fr. 
Anriquez was born at Villa-Viciosa about 1520 and died at 
Punicael on February 6, 1600. 
MALE AND CRANGANOR.—CuaLpEAN PRINT- 
Inc.—Fr. Francis Roz was the father and protector of the 
Malabar Mission. Born at Geronain 1557 and received into the 
Society of Jesus in 1575, he embarked for India in 1584 and, 
after zealously labouring as a Missionary in vitheiog was ap- 
pointed Bishop of Angamale on January 25, 
This loving Prelate devoted all his cares his beloved 


ooks. By order of Clement VIII, Fr. Albert Laerzio 
brought from Europe Chaldean types in ‘order to supply eae 
clergy at once and plentifully with the necessary books. 

most important was the Roman Ritual, translated from ‘is 


a 
Pope , Paul V. The zealous prelate ended his days at Parur on 
Pohiuaey 16, 1624.4 


We shall close this complicated subject of the Indian 
printing-presses by making an honourable mention of an. 
eminent Missionary, a great linguist and prolific writer : = 
Joseph Constantius Beschi, born at Castiglione (Venice) 0 
November 8, 1680, and admitted into the Order of St. Tgnatins 
on October 21, 1698. 


ee epee ee ee ge ae 
1 SOMMERVOGEL, Biblioth:, t. IV, se 821; 822. 
it og , t. IV, col. 822; t. V, ol. 
3 Ibid., t. IV, cols. 276; 277. 

4 JouvANcY,. Hist. Soc. Jesu, parte V, t. II, lib. XVIII, § 5; 
SOTWEL, p. 249; Sommervocen, Biblioth., t VII, ‘cols. 263; 264; DE 
Sousa, Oriente conquistado. pt. II, conq, I, div. Hn 93: PAavLINUS A 
BartHot., India Orient. Christ., pp. 63; 64, 


Vol. IX, No. 4.] Harliest Jesuit Printing in India. 167 
[N.S.] 


He studied in Rome with extraordinary success Hebrew, 
Greek, Latin and Portuguese, ree Italian, hoping all along 
to be selected for the Indian Mission 

ile in Madura, he applied himself with advantage to 
ot Telenga [Telugu], and especially Tamil. After five 
years he had thoroughly us ere pare a. and poetry. 
He pant the next twenty eadin e chief books in 
that language. The =e of Tritchirapalli rTvichinopoli made 
him his Prime Minister.! This remarkable po olyglot died at 
Manapad about 1746, leaving after him, edited or in manu- 
script, a great number of works in prose or in verse. 

esides Fathers Busten [Stephens] <3 Beschi, there were 
in India other European Missionaries who clothed the sublimity 
of their religious and moral teaching in aie: attractive garb of 
poetry and the grace of sonorous rhythmical cadence, thus stir- 
ring up not only the intellect, but the will and the imagination 
of their neophytes. The Life of Our Lady composed in Tamil 
verse by Fr. eed de Nobili was sung in many places by all 
classes of the peo 

We shall not even try to mention the many countries of 
India won over to the Catholic Church by the ean 
during the XVIIth and XVIIIth centuries, with which we a 
chiefly concerned, nor the excellent fruits of holiness which 
Christian India produced, thanks to the colby of the Gospel, 
assisted by the printing-presses created by 

The eloquent testimony which w fie in oe first History 
of the Jesuit Missions in India, Bthiopia and Japan, written in 
Portuguese, apparently by Fr. Manoel Teixeira, is worth many 
others. In the second part. chapter VIII, this eye-witness of 
the events says: 

‘* The Father Patriarch, Joio Nufiez, Fr. Francisco 


y 
guese and the [native] Christians were by its means “pt 


Conscience by Beker stores 
om that time to this very day it is in everybody’s 
bests in Tadia: to the great advantage of the faithful and of 
confessors. As a rule, all know how to make a good confession. 


1 [This is generally recognized as merely a native legend. Cf. 
BerrranD, 8.J., La Mission du Maduré d’aprés des documents ie 


EN VINSON, 
Philol. comparée, Paris, Vol. XX XIX, pp. 123-146; Vol. XL, pp. 1 1-45. 
Prof. Vinson throws doubts on Beschi’s knowledge of Te lugu.] 


i68 Journal of the Asiatic — of Bengal. |[April, 1913.] 


This Prayer-book; in fact, brought about a great change among 
the people.’ 


1 [The present paper, excellent in itself, raises several sivapibeblnt i and 
difficult questions which I shall discuss at length in a separate article.—- 
H. Hosten, S.J.) 


ON NNR Ss i 


16. Two Portuguese Inscriptions in the Kapalesvara 
Temple of Mailapur (Madras). 


By Rev. H. Hosrtey, 8.J. 
Dr. J. P. Vogel sent me from Lahore on April 12, 1912, 


estampages of two inscriptions from the Kapalesvara Temple at 
Mailapur. They had been sent him by the Archeological 


Dutch inscriptions; but it did not require much study on Dr. 
Vogel’s part to convince him that they were Portuguese. 
Inscription No. 1 was found on the floor of the front 


The first line is to be read thus: 
{fale—] 
CEV - NA- ERA. (=died in the year). 


The second line is more puzzling. The following combina- 
tions suggest themselves :— 
1. Since the last figure is a 3 followed by a full stop, it 
might seem that the date is [1] 463. It was a common practice 
among the Portuguese to omit in their dates the figure for the 


date 1463 is, however, unlikely on more grounds than one. 1 
am told by a distinguished archeologist in Europe, who wishes 
his name to remain unknown, that Portuguese inscriptions of the 


170 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [April, 1913. 


XVth century are in Gothic, not in Roman characters. Even 
should an exception to this rule have been made, there would 
remain the astonishing fact that a Portuguese inscription of 
Mailapur would antedate by 38 years the arrival of Vasco da 
Gama off Calicut (May 20, 1498). In the light of history, this 
would not be entirely repugnant. We have on record the visit 
to Mailapur of Marco Polo (1293); of Giovannida Montecorvino 
(1292-93), one of whose companions, Niccolo da Pistoia, a 
Dominican, died there; of Giovanni de Marignolli (1349). and 
Niccolo de’ Conti (1425-30). In fact ,intercourse between Europe 
and India was not so rare in the XIIIth and XIVth centuries 
as is commonly supposed, and we must not imagine that the 
Venetians and the Genoese were the only Europeans who traded 
with India or visited it in the XVth century.'! Anyhow, a 
Portuguese inscription at Mailapur at such a date is in itself 
highly improbable. What might mean, besides, the two first 
letters in the second line? Dfe] G[raca]=of grace, would be 
epigraphically unusual, and so would D{e] C{bristo}. More- 
over, the second letter (2nd line) cannot be a C, since we have 
a C of the usual type in CEV (lst line). 

Hence, if any simpler explanation can be devised, it 
ought to be preferred. 
Could the second line mean D [e] [1] 6 & 63? This 
would not be unusual in Portuguese epigraphy; but the central 

l 


friend in Europe. The second line must be d [ ] 
646°, leaving out the figure 3. The date was originally [1] 643, 
but was corrected later. As the 3 is fainter than the 


other figures, there must have been an attempt at obliterating 
it, and the second 6 seems from its cramped appearance to 
have been squeezed in between 4 and 3. The full stop after 
this interpolated 6 is significant. It would seem then that the 
inscription was made considerably later than the date of burial, 
since the date first recorded was three years too early 

is explanation, it is hoped, will be found satisfactory. 
It places the inscription in modern times, while the political 


1 About 1893 two tombs of Franciscan Missionaries of the XIVth 


: y- Ct. Compte-rendu des séances de la Soc. de Géogr- 
e Parts. Janv. et Fevr. 1893. Art. of M. Romanet du Caillaud. 


Vol. IX, No. 4.] Two Portuguese Inscriptions. 171 
[N.S.] 


troubles so frequent in the a pais ea of Mailapur would 
account for its removal to a Hindu temple. 
the Museum of Diu (cf. pee Portug., viii, 183) 

there is an epitaph with the words...NA ERA A.D. 1667, 
where the word A[nno] is redundant after ERA. In the 
Mailapur inscription there was no room for A [nno}], as is plain 
from the se outlines of the stone shown on our plate. 
Hence D = D[e 

Inscription No. 2 was found on the floor of the 
Kalyana mandapam of the op iaet as Temple. It is in 
Portuguese, too, and runs thus :— 


E-DE SEVS.- HE 
RDEIROS (=And of his heirs). 


The shape and the seeie of the letters go to show that 
pe era does not belong to No.1. Moreover the breadth 
th stones differs ee ewny It is from 60 to 61 
inte in ms 2; 74 inches in No l. 
Since fragments of Christian funeral inscriptions have been 
worked into the floor of this Hindu temple, it is not impossible 
that there be — fragments with their faces turned down- 
ards. We hope that the Archeological Department of 
Madras will do the needful to examine into the matter. 


NS 


17. Two Letters of Major James Rennell. 


By Rev. W. K. Firmincer, B.D., F.R.G.S. 


Mr. T, D, la Touche prints as an appendix to his Journals 
of Major James Rennell (Memoirs of the Asiatic Society of 
APO Vol. III, No. 3 pp. 95—248) a letter of Rennell’s 

hich I came acrossin 1910 when inspecting the proofs of 
baa printed and unpublished records of the Comptrolling 
Council of Revenue at Murshidabad. Last year, while studying 
the Consultations of that Council preserved at the Record 
i sr of the vee hon e, I came across the two following 


s ’teens, who has made a mess of Rennell’s arene and 
even given **Thos’’ instead of ‘‘ Jas’’ as part of the signature. 

In the Major’s map of Bengal, reproduced in Mr. D. la 
Touche’s Memoir, the spelling of the following places mentioned 
in the letter is as follows :— 


In the letters— In the map— 
Beleuchy. 
Radshy Raujeshy. 
Pucharyah Pookareeah, 


‘*Mustan Ghurr’’ is, I take it, Mustangur marked on the 
map as on the road between Seebgunge and Seerpore rat r 
in Bogra District). Mustanghur may be identified with Mahas- 
than, the ancient capital of the Pods. This identification 
suggests points of great historical interest. 


Comptrolling Council Revenue, Murshidabad. 
Consultation, 14th Feb. 1771. 


To SamMvurEL MippierTon, Esq., | 
Chief of the Comptrolling Council of Revenues. 


BELUCHY. 
10th Feb., 1771. 
Str, 
I think it is my duty to inform Mie that there is now in 
this part of the country a large b of fakirs who are laying 
all the principal towns. under Sostabatsba. They were yester- 


174 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [April, 1913. 


day at Lutchinpore, 4 coss from this place; and, after receiv- 
ing two hundred rupees from the Gunge Darogha, marched 
southwards into the Pucharyah districts. By the accounts 
I have from an intelligent person, whom I sent to watch their 
motions, they are about a thousand in number and tolerably 
well armed. They came from the western provinces about a 
month ago, and traversed the Dinagepore and Goragaut 
districts in their way. 

As there is no force in this part of the country, I imagine 
they will continue in it till they have plundered all the princi- 
pal places. I have met several of their detached parties, which 
are indeed scattered over the whole provinces of Radshy and 
Goragaut. I have enclosed a route to this place and a sketch 
of the country, in case you may think proper to send any force 
after these miscreants. The country hereabouts is so entirely 
intersected by rivers and nullas that there is scarce any possi- 
bility of travelling with guns. 

I am, etc., 
Jas. RENNELL. 


Consultation’s Do., 7th March, 1771. 
The Chief lays before the Board the following letter from 
Capt. Rennell :— 
To SamMuEL MrippteTon, Esga., 
Chief of the Comptroliing Council of Revenues. 


SEERGUNGE. 
Ist March, 1771. 


their camp and baggag 
Sheik Mun Jenoo, fled on horseback to Mustan Ghurr (a dirgah), 


are dispersed in such a manner that two of them cannot be 
found together, so that it is impossible to pursue them with the 
sepoys. They all throw away their arms in their retreat, and 
the villagers falling on them killed great numbers. 

I marched to Mustan in hopes of taking the Chief prisoner, 
but on my arrival found the place empty, and was informe’ 
that he went off with a few followers on the road towards 


Vol. IX, No. 4.| T'wo Letters of Major James Rennell. 175 
[W.S.] 


Purnea. Upon this I sent a Jimautdar’s party after him with 
orders to follow his route four or five days’ journey ; and I am 
in hopes that the Jimautdar will be successful, as Mun Jenoo 
is diseased and cannot travel fast. 

e picked up provisions in our march which, together with 
that taken by Lieut. Feltham, shall be sent to Moorshedabad. 

s it is probable that some of the fakirs dispersed over 
these districts may unite again and commit depredations, I have 
directed Lieut. Taylor to remain at this place with 45 sepoys, 


h e 

the City, as soon as they have refreshed themselves, for which 
I have allowed them four days. 

wrote to the Supervisors of Dinagepore and Purneah to 
inform them of the event, that they may take measures for 
intercepting any parties that may retreat through their provin- 
c Jenoo is an inhabitant of Morampoor, I suppose 
he will area i to retreat to that country. 

As Mr. Grose has occasion for the sepoys under ene 
Feltham, I have directed that officer to return to Rungpo 

must be eg leave to mention to you the behaviour of Lisi. 
Feltham, whose bravery and vigilance have contributed so 
much to the success of the expedition. 

As the service on which I was sent is now finished, I have 
left the command to Lieut. Taylor, and shall return to the 
business which I was before employed on 

Having examined the hill and dirgah of Mustan Ghurr, 
I think it my duty to inform you that its natural strength, 

e 


with thick woods. The dirgah there @ affords a pretence to the 


they are furnished with arms of all kinds, and commonly sally 
_ forth from thence 2000 strong. This in particular has been the 
case last vear 
I am, etc., 
Jas. RENNELL. 


The service in question having been successfully accom- 
plished, the Chief acquaints the Board that he has recalled 
Lieut. Taylor’s party, and i leave to recommend, in conse- 
quence of the account Capt. Rennell gives of ohne gah of 
Mastangur, that a small Rie of sepoys be now 
and Beot co continually stationed there in order to sascurame the 
future rendezvous of these banditti. 


18. Sarcocolla. 
By Davip Hoorer 
(With Plate VI.) 


Sarcocolla is the name of an eastern drug remarkable for 
its supposed virtues in agglutinating wounds, hence the name 
by which it is known to Europeans is derived from two Greek 
words signifying ‘‘ flesh glue.’’ In Persian itis called Kun-judah 
or Gunjidah, and in Arabic Anzarut or Unjeroot. Guzar is the 
common name of the drug in the Bombay market. 

y writers recognize the origin of the drug to bea spiny 
shrub growl ng in Persia and Arabia. Mir Muhammad Husain 
(1771) in Makhzan-ul-Adwiya informs us that. Unzeroot is the 
gum of a thorny tree called ‘‘Shayakeh’’ which is about six 
feet high ; ; it has leaves like those of the frankincense (pinnate), 
and is a native of Persia and Turkistan. Dr. J. E. T. Aitchi- 


Kein, Birjand and Yezd, and also not far teem Turbat. Haidri 
in Persia. 


In 1908 » Major (now Sir) P. Z. Cox, H.M. Consul at 


oo friend of his, who had been trained as a doctor. The 


and in October dry white pods are found. The trees are not 
allowed to grow to a great size because the branches are cut 
off and taken away as fuel. The gum forms on the twigs and 


mass of gum which psoas dries and consolidates. It is 
said that the more frequently it is removed the whiter the gum 
ecomes. 
The plants collected for Sir P. Z. Cox were forwarded to 
Kew, and identified as Astragalus fasiculifolius, Boissier, Flora 
Orientalis, No. 484. Natura! order, ears 


1 Pharm. Journ., Dec. 11, 1886, 468. 


178 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [April, 1913. 


This ae is described as a tall shrub with long white 
hoary tomentose spines. The flowers are shortly pedicelled. 
Calyx adpressed, ‘tabulate: opening with five lanceolate, subulate 
teeth. Vexillum oblong. Pod as large as a grain of rice in the 
husk, covered with a tomentum of white, cotton-like down, con- 
sisting of long simple hairs matted together; some of the pods 
are abortive and full of gum. Seed vetch-like, diameter } in. ; 
when soaked in water it swells and bursts and a mass of gum 


protrudes. 
Dymock gthetes the plant in 1891 in ‘ th 
Indica ’’ as A. ocolla. Aitchison in 1892 considered it pre- 


mature to ns it as a new species as in all probability , 
he said, it would be found to be a species described by Bunge 
or Boissier. This supposition has been confirmed. 

It is remarkable that some ee have attributed the 
source of sarcocolla to species of Penaea as P. mucronata, P. 
sarcocolla and P. squamosa, plant from ‘Ethio ia and Cape of 
Good Hope. The source of this peculiar error is indicated in 
Dr. Ainslie’s Materia Indica, who refers to an account of the 
(Penaea) plant in so ‘* excellent Edinburgh Dispensatory ”’ by 

r. Dunean, Juni 

Dr. Aitchison refers to Microrhynchus spinosus, Benth.., 
another Persian plant, of the composite order, as the origin of 
false recat a substance having a most nauseous and offen- 
sive odou 

The Fe rug consists < spongy light yellow gummy or 
resinous grains, from the size of a pea to a sandy powder. It 
has the appearance of Scathied resin, bread crumbs or a form 
of brown sugar, but more irregular. The tears are whitish, 


1 A sample of the gum from the Lahore bazar was attacked by 
insects. These were identified as Lastoderma testaceum, Redt. and Tre- 
lobivm erie) Fabr. 

2 imp.J. i, ¢. 
& Ca, anon Med lib. i, ack ii, ve 


Vol. IX, No. 4.] Sarcocolla. 179 
[N.S.] 


emplastri imposita.’’ The Arabian physicians gave sarcocolla 
to the extent of two drams, Schroder not more than one dram. 
In Ulfaz Udwiyeh sarcocolla is classed as *‘ caustica’’ with 
blue vitriol, verdigris and burnt wood. and ‘ cicatrizantia 
with red lead and native gubhates) To sum up its medical 


Sarcocolla is a Moghul medicine and is used specially by 
Yunani physicians throughout India. Tavernier! (1665) men- 
tions it as one of the drugs obtainable in Surat, a large e 
porium in the seventeenth century. Dr. Ainslie ( 1826) Saiene 
it as a Madras drug. Dr. R. H. Irvine omar it in a cata- 
logue of drugs of Ajmeer” in 1841, and of Patna® in 1848. Dr. 
Honigberger* states in 1852 that it was officinal in Lahore, 
where also Baden Powell collected and described it in 1868. 
The Indian Museum possesses specimens from Bombay, Delhi, 
Amritsar and Lahore. In Europe, according to Pomet,* it was 
known in 1694 as a medicine from Persia; and Guibourt® 
describes it, probably as a Museum specimen, in 1849. The 


ting opium, for securing the corks of large glass flagons in 

which rose-water is exported, and it is eaten by ladies of the 
harem to improve their appearance and to give the skin a gloss. 
There is no secret regarding the admixture of opium with this 
gum, in fact it appears to be a recognized ingredient. Opium 


mi 
os cent. of other ingredients with ‘‘ Schire’’ opium boiled 


arédiante used are sarcocolla, or an extract rom 


as Teriak-i-lub ; this preparation sells at 250 m. per seven 
nds. 


Professor Joseph Feil of Ohio, reported’? in sie the 
presence of sarcocolla as an adulterant of ie eee th, edi 
cinal gum obtained from other species of Astragalus, we grow- 
ing in Persia. Professor Feil experimenting with a sample 
of powdered tragacanth, quoted at a low rate, found it to be 
oo soluble in alcohol, and to have the odour and taste of 


1 Travels, Vol. II, p. 20. £ Densohaphy of ‘aaa 

5 Materia Medica of Patna. 4 Thirty-five years in the East. 
5 Histoire Generale des drogues, Paris 

5 Histoire naturelle des drogues simp!. 

7 Bulletin of Amer. Pharm. Ass., 1908, 379. 


180 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [April, 1913. 


liquorice. In short it had the characteristics of sarcocolla 
which had been accidentally or fraudulently mixed with the 
imported tragacanth. Daniel Hanbury on the 27th October, 
1870, made a note to the effect that sarcocolla was offered for 
sale as mastic in the London market. 

Gum sarcocolla is imported into Bombay from the Persian 
Port of Bushire in bags which contain two hundredweights. 
Dr. Dymock observed that from twelve to twenty bags could 
be seen in a single warehouse. The total quantity imported 
must be considerable, and as the foreign export is trifling, the 
consumption of the gum in the country must be very large. 

. The chemistry of sarcocolla is of great interest. It was 
examined by Pelletier of Paris! seventy-seven years ago, who 
separated, by means of alcohol, a substance called sarcocollin. 
Sarcocollin is described as a brownish, semitransparent, amor- 
phous mass with a sweetish and afterwards bitter taste. It is 
soluble in cold water and alcohol, but not in ether. If softens 
when heated, and finally burns away with the odour of caramel, 
without leaving any residue. The body resembles glycyrrhizin, 
and it was composed of 57:13 per cent of carbon, 8°34 per cent 
of hydrogen and 34°31 per cent of oxygen. According to John- 
ston* sarcocollin is a mixture of various resins which may be 
separated as lead salts. 

A sample of Ganjideh from Bushire had the following com- 
position :— 


Moisture zy te eee ot 
Sol. in spirit 90% a .. 740 
ol.in water .. ot ie oe 
Insoluble fibre 8:4 
Ash oes 23 
100°0 
Nitrogen “4 


The alcoholic extract was pinkish in colour, brittle and 
transparent, soluble in water, but insoluble in ether and chloro- 
form. The aqueous solution was neutral in reaction, sweetish 
in taste and frothed when shaken. With sulphuric acid the 
dried extract gave an orange solution passin 
purple; with nitric acid it turned yellow. It contained no nitro- 


1 Ann. Ch. Pharm., VI, 1836, 32. 
2 Watt’s Dictionary of Chemistry, V; 196. 


Journ., As. Soc. Beng. Vol. 1X, 1913. PLATE Ah gtesucehyes 


Astragalus fasiculifolius Bois 
(The Sarcocolla Plant.) 


Vol. IX, No. 4.] Sarcocolla. 181 
(N.S.] 


Carbon 4 ee Paee fies 
Hydrogen... aie Soe 
oe o yee 


an 


19. Indian Dermaptera collected by Dr. A, D. Imms. 
By Matcotm Burr, D.So., F.E.S. 


I am indebted to Dr. A. D. Imms, Forest Zoologist to the 
Government of India, for the opportunity of examining & num- 
ber of earwigs from various parts of India, the list of which is 
well worth publishing. A large proportion of the specimens 
were collected by him while touring, and are in the collections 
of the Forest Research Institute, Dehra Dun. 


Family PYGIDICRANIDAR. 


1. Diplatys falcatus, Burr. 

Shamkhet near Bhowali (Kumaon). 1¢. 

Hitherto recorded from Simla and from the Dawna Hills 
in Lower Burma. 

Also several immature, and therefore not accurately deter- 
minable specimens of the same genus, from Sat Tal, Airadeo, 
and Dehra Dun. 

2. Kalocrama picta, Guer. 

Calcutta. 19. 

3. Cranopygia cumingi, Dohrn. 

N. Coimbatore hills, 5th Aug., 1902. 2. (No. 1076). 

Also a male (No. 1074) in poor condition, which resembles 
this species, but the locality being Tharrawady, in Assam, it is 
probably distinct, as C. cumtngi is a South Indian and Sin- 
halese species. 


4. Echinosoma sumatranum, Haan. 
Denra Don: Jhajra, 2nd Febr., 1912. In dead 
al wood. ¢ 2, and larvae. 
a Karwapani, 7th Nov., 1910. ¢. 
Kueri Forsst Division: Bankatti, 28th Febr., 
12. Under bark of 
Sal (Shorea robusta). 


Burma: Tenasserim, Salween River, 15th March, 
1905. 1 


5 Tharrawady, 22nd Oct., 1905. Nymph. 
Himatayas, Kumaon: Bhowali (5,700ft.) 9°. 
Dharmoti (5,000 ft.) 9. 


33 93 


184 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [May, 1913. 


Family LABIDURIDAE. 


5. Anisolabis annulipes, Luc. 
D un: Underground. 23 ¢. 
6. Psalis dohrni, Kirby. 
HimMatayas, Kumaon: Takula. 2¢ 9. 
> ifs Dharmoti. 
7. Pealis femoralis, Dohr 


n. 
Deura Don: At light, 12th July, 1910. 3#, 1 
mph. 


Also several Psalid larvae, probably of the three species 
above, but not accurately determinable from various localities. 
8. Labidura bengalensis, Dohrn. 
Drnra Dun: 15th April, 1912. Underground. 18th 
an., : 
. Garhi, 3rd-12th April, 1912. Many 
specimens, : 
ALLAHABAD : 20th Oct., 1908. 2a 4. 
9. Labidura riparia, Pall. 
Kuripi Javnsar: 17th Dec., 1910. 3. 
Denra Dun: 23rd March, 1912. 2¢¢. 
Both stunted specimens, and several larvae. 
10. Nala nepalensis, Burr. 
Himatayas, Kumaon: Bhowali. ¢°. 
09 " meswar. 9... Under 
stones at the edge of a 
stream. 
ll. Nala lividipes, Duf. 
3 DrHra Dun: 29th Oct., 1910. 2Ist Nov., 1911. 


Himanayas, Kumaon : Bhowali. 9°. 
12. Forcipula pugnaz, Kirby. 
Hiatayas, Kumaon: Bhowali. 8¢ ¢ Mf ee 
13. Forcipula trispinosa, Dohrn. 
Denea Dun: 25th Oct., 1910. 
14. Pseudisolabis immsi, sp. n. 
Small: slender: black : 
segments rather short: head shining black, depressed, broad, 


> : on 
dull black, the sides yellow : legs slender, femora blackish, 
en dull 


amc an 


Vol. IX, ee 5.] Indian Dermaptera. 185 
[N.S.] 


2 strongly narrowed: penultimate ventral segment 3 broad, 
gently rounded: Forceps with branches ¢ remote, very slender 
and cylindrical, long and regularly arcuate almost in a semi- 
circle; in the 9 simple, short, straight, contiguous, 


3 ge 
Length of body 95 mm. 8°5 mm. 

= ,, forceps 3°5 1 
N. Soke: Base of Himalayas at Kuridi in Jaunsar, 
9000 ft. 17th Dec., 1910. ¢@ and 9? 


ea 


—. 


Peeudisolabis immsi, sp.n. Forceps of male, x 6. 


This wp roma little species, which is dedicated to Dr. A, D. 
Imms, is close to P. burri, Bor., from Kashmir, but the 
sides of the 5-7th abdominal segments in that species are more 
or less acute and rugulose : the forceps are much stouter and 
shorter than in P. immsi, and bowed apically instead of 
entirely and eeularly arcuate. 


Family LABIDAE. 


15. Chaetospania thoracica, Dohrn 
Deura Don: 15th ‘April, 1912. 


16. Labia curvicauda, Motsch. 
Tuano, 9th Febr., 1912, under bark of dead Sal 
tree (Shorea robusta). 
Dexura Down: Jhajra, in dead Sal wood, 2nd Febr., 


1912 
Kuert Forsst Division: Bankatti, 27th Febr., 1912. 
Under bark in rotten wood of standing Sal roe 
Denra Dun: Karwapani, 7th Nov., 1910. / 
¥ 7th Nov., 1910. 9?. 


17. Labia mucronata, Stal. 
Burma: Tomeetn Salween River. 8th March, 
1905. 


18. Labia lutea, Bor 
Urrer Teac: Katha, 21st Febr., 1905. 9. 


186 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [May, 1913. 


19. Spongovostox semiflavus, Borm. 
DeHRA Dun: Lachiwala, 16th Febr., 1912. Under 
bark of Sal (Shorea robusta). 


Family FORFICULIDAE. 
20. Allodahlia macropyga, Westw. 
HiMaLayas, Kumaon: Dharmoti. 39 2. 
em 3 near Bhowali. o¢ and 5 
larvae. 


21. Homotages jeae, Borm. 
Himatayas, Kumaon: Dharmoti. 2 ¢ 2. 
= es Bhowali,2¢ 97,19. 
= Jaunsar: Kuridi, 17th Dec., 1910. 
$5,699. 
= Mussoorie: Oct. 1907. ¢ and 2. 
22 


Elaunon bipariitus, Kirby. 
IMALAYAS, Kumaon: Dinapani. ¢@. 
2 re) mora, 2. 
Denra Dun: 8th July, 1910. o. 
Himatayas: Naini Tal, Baldoti Plantation, 8th 
June, 1908. 29 9. 


23. Forficula beelzebub, Burr. 
Hrmatayas, Jaunsar: Kuridi, 17th Dec., 1910. 


= iat Mussoorie, Oct. 1907. 2? 
(reddish form). 

Dera Don: Sept. 1901. 

Himatayas, Kumaon: Almora (5200 ft.), 21st June, 
1912,239 9,499. Nu- 
merous larvae. 

Himalayas: Binsar (8000 ft.) 2¢¢. 


e Bhowali. 492 9 

_ Dharmoti. 4¢¢. 

fe Shamkhet, near Bhowali. 5¢ ¢, 
eo. 

ae Sat Tal (4000 ft.) 

$s Simla. June 1909. A larva on a 
Deodar trunk. 


After examining the ample material quoted above, I feel 
convinced that F. aceris and F. beelzebub are one species: t 
colour ranges from a bright blackish red to deep black; the 
armature of the dilated portion of the forceps varies, as 
the sculpture, with the size and development of the individuals. 
t is possible to arrange a long series, the extremes of which 
are totally different, but it is impossible to say where F. aceris 
ends and F’. beelzebub begins. _ 


Vol, IX, No. 5.] Indian Dermaptera. 187 
[N.8.] 


24, Hypurgus humeralis, Kirby. 
Drura Don: Sept. andl Oct., 1910. @. Approach- 
ing the sanded for 
25. Hudohrnia metallica, Dohrn. 
Himatayas, Kumaon: Bhowali, ? 


tntatnat ee ee 


20. The Pitt Diamond and the Eyes of Jagannath, Puri. 
By Rev. H. Hostey, S.J. 


In a previous paper under this title (J.A.8.B., 1912, 
pp. 133-144) we showed that there was no evidence to prove 
that the Pitt Diamond was stolen from Jagannath’s statue at 
Puri. We found that the theft was attributed to a variety of 
persons: to an Englishman, to a Frenchman, to a Portuguese, 
or to a jeweller belonging to no particular nationality. We were 
disappointed at the time in meeting with no variant of the 
Dutch burglar. 

The Dutch, however, were not above suspicion. We have 

w come across a text in which a Dutchman is charged with 
the theft. It would seem that the caiiead of the temple 
knew how to modify their story, so as to suit the national 
antipathies of their European inquirers. In this case, they 
told the story to a Frenchman, Anquetil du Perron, who was at 
Puri on June 6, 1757. Shortly, before, he had been at Chander- 


had plucked out a precious stone from one of the eyes of the 
ne while the Chandernagorians boasted in 1711 that a French- 
n had done it, the precious stone being then a ruby. For 
08 reasons, Anquetil du Perron discredits the story alto- 
gether. 
‘**T entered Jagrenat,’’ he writes, ‘‘ by the street leading 


Brahmans to let me in: [ had to be satisfied with examining 
the outside of the precincts . 

‘*The theft of the ruby, ‘which formed one of the eyes of 
the statue of Jagrenat, was confirmed to me: but I was told 
that the culprit was the Chief of a small Dutch Factory. The 
other eye, it is said, consists of a big carbuncle. I should 
think, however, that those phage stones and the immense 
treasures said to be contained in the Temple of Jagrenat are of 
the nature of the Pagoda [idol] ee massive gold and forty-two feet 
high, which l’Abbé de Choisy saw at Siam (Voyage de Siam, 
p. 28 eu The Rajahs and Brahmans of Fupenis are too greedy 
to set in wood or stone precious ornaments which they could 
easily replace, oe the sake of the people, by mere gilt, or bits 
of glass, or false rubies placed in the proper light.’’ 


1 Cf. AnquEeri, pu PERRON, Zend-Avesta, Tome I, Pt I, Paris, 
1771, p. lxxxii, 


at,--On Variations in the Flowers of Limnanthemum 
indicum, Thwaites. 


By H. M. Curpeur, M.A. 
Acting Professor of Botany, Gujarat College, Ahmedabad. 


The observations recorded in this note on the flowers of 
Limnanthemum indicum were made on the 19th hee od 
1912, on the specimens collected by me from a Fae 
sein in Thana District of the Presidency of Bomb 

The plants have a floating aquatic habit. The stem and 
roots are submerged. The orbicular leaves are floating, and the 
flowers are slightly raised above the water. It was not practi- 
cable from the trailing habit of the stem _— water to recog- 
nize and isolate the individuals. Hence the enumerations 
made refer to several individuals taken aogaa ly. 

mnanthemum belongs to one of the gamopetalous orders, 
viz. Gentianacee. The majority of plants of this order are of 
the herbaceous erect or procumbent type occurring in more or 
less wet places. The genus Limnan ee is an exception to 
the type as it grows in waters several feet 

Dimorphism within the order in ese ollie than Limnan- 
themum has been observed in Canscora diffussa (Prof. W. 
Sioa unpublished notes) in which pra have been noted to 

in two different lengths on the same plant. Dimorphism 
in thee genus under consideration has been noted in all system- 
atic works. A short description of the flowers of Limnanthe- 
mum indicum may be given at this point. 

The flowers arise in clusters from anode. The node also 

roduces a bunch of roots, a single branch, and a single floating 
—- pg ogi leaf, whose petiole is in a line with the 
wer buds are a erat tcabegie im are under 

sere The Bad ds come up one by every evening to open. 
The flower remains open eee the night aah early part 
of the pes day. The pedicel again bends downwards to 
mature the fruit under water. The following technical descrip- 
tion is et e om Cooke’s Flora of Bombay fl graced 
rt Pedicels 2’-5” long; bracts ovate, acute sae til Calyx 
3i a one deeply aac tig sata ie - long, “oblong, * subacute. 


Crary one celled ; st entas 2,  eateral: : poh ion or ees 
stigma two lobed; Capsule subglobose, in diameter. 
numerous (30 or more), not muricate, nae, yellow.’ 


192 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [May, 1913.] 


The flowers collected and examined by me revealed a great 
deal of variation which is recorded at the end of this paper ina 
tabular form. It will be noticed that altogether 457 flowers 
were examined. Thenumber of stamens always agreed with 
that of the petals in the same flower. The sepals agreed in 
number in 80% of the total with the petals and stamens, showed 
a deficiency in 5%, and an excess in 15% of the flowers 
examined. The variation in the number of parts in all the three 
whorls lay between 5 and 8. Fifty-one per cent of the flowers 
showed six parts in the petals and stamens (but not in the calyx 
at the same time) and 38% presented six parts in all the three 
outer whorls in the same flower. The pistil was trimorphie while 
the stamens were only dimorphic. Of every hundred flowers 
51 had long stamens and 49 short ones. Regarding the pistil, 


differences but also the trimorphism of the pistil, we get 
altogether fifty-five different forms of the flower. I am not 
aware of this record exceeded anywhere. 


VARIATIONS IN THE FLOWERS OF Limnanthemum indicum. 


(K=Calyz; C=Corolla; A=Stamens; G=Pistil.) 


Cs Ag Cs Ag Cy Ay Cs As Torars 
S ee 
K; C5 As|Kg Cg Ag) Ky 0, A, (Kg Cg Ag E wigs) . 
(e) = 
Sree eo ce 2| 3 lox 
Ge | Gz | Go | Gg | Go| Gz| Gy} Gy Got > | Bibs . 
Be ed iE FIRS RE! Con dD Se OO Ee 
Style short s| 2|6¢/19| 60/14! 01 6 | 5 
Style long 6} O4584 6 ST) -81 81-82-38 
Style and stig. long .. 2-0 | 26 | 4 2) SY ON | 4 
G,| 16 147 | 9 Par a 138! 108 50| 294 
| Be 88 | 
Separate Totals < G; 2 | 29 | 26 | | 12] 40} 18] 11) 69 
\ | } SSB Ef uae ae |e Nena Oe 
Gy | | | | 1 S| 2 2 
Combined Total 18 | 176 | 147, | 24s :'178| 126, 61 F 
(80%) 
| Bs Ce As ee Tact abs | Kr Os As eee 
| 
Gg | Gz | Ge Gs | | Ge G3 | | G2 | Gs | 
Style short 4 3 | 1 1 1 | 1 | | 
Style long l 2. 310. 0 ea | | 
Style and stig. long .. Ba ee Ua. ee 0 | | 
| | 
G| 6 | 6 | 1 | | | 5} 3) 8} 
Separate Totals ; | — —— 
, Gs | 0 Pet 5 a ee ae 
Combined Total ae 2 pice i! 5 2 18 
Ky C5 As GR Kg C Ay Se 
Ge | Gs | Ge | Gs | Gal Gy | | 
Style short of imal SiS | | | 
Style long ci ee a Toh ae oe fee ee ee | 
Style and stig. long . 1 | $1 © | | 
Ge} 1] 30 7 | | 19 11] 8 38 
Separate Totals . | 
G. | 0 9 3 | 8 1 3 12 
Combined Total 1 po | 271 14 9 50 
{ INg Cg Ag Kg vi Aq i ee 
| { | ; 
Ga | Gs | Ga | Gs | | | 
pig short oe | 2| 1 | 10 2 | | 
tyle long te cad Bi Ol Mire 4 | 
Sts and stig. long . oe 0 | 0 | 112 
Gi 5 | | 13 | 12} Bl 1 18 
Separate Totals 
G3} | Ra oa | a, 
| j 
; | 
Combined Total | ee | is 668 24 
E 23 ) Er geaeraaas ae & ri 125 61) 363 or] 79°37 
xr) / 
. Gs 2 42 /35| | | 13] 64 24) 14] 920} 20% 
se Gy | (244 | a} | Sor 15% 
be ' i j 
5 Total! 25 230 tb ws 231 151 75 457 
8 I I j 
gi Percmege 9% | IS 9% 5% [51% 38% )18% 


Oe ee. ee er 


. 


eG nS es 


22, History of Kasmir. 


By Panpir Ananp Koon. 


A BRIEF accouNT oF Hasan, THE HISTORIAN OF KASMiR. 


Moulvi Hasan Sah was born at a village ae vimgmie 
a mile to the south east of Bandipur in KaSmir, in A.H. 
(1832 a.D.) and died at the same village in 1316 4.u. (1898 A.D.) 
at the age of 66 years. He came of a family of Pirs or 
Muhammadan priests, distinguished in Persian and Arabic learn- 


other teachers which he practised until the closing years of his 


age. 

In 1875-78 a.p. occurred a terrible famine in Kasmir whose 
ravages assumed appalling proportions. Hasan wrote out a 
pamphlet in Persian verse in which he described the true char- 

acter of the calamity and made certain sensible suggestions for 
the improvement of the situation. He sent this pamphlet to 
Diwén Anant Ram, the then Prime Ministe r, to be Shes 
to His Highness the late Maharaja Ranbir Singh who was at 
that time at Jammu. The Mahdrdja conferred a Khilat of 
sind upon Hasan as a mark of recognition of “his literary 
meri 

Alter this, Hasan wrote three books in Persian and Kaé- 
miri mixed, which are greatly admired by the public. Their 
names are —Gulistdn-i-’ Ikhlaq, Kharita Asrar, and ’ Ajdz-t-Gari- 

He once went to R4walpindi and there came to know that, 
there was a Persian History of Kasmir written by Mula Ahmad 


possession of a man named Mulah Muhmid. This History is a 
very rare book. It is said to be the translation of an ancient 
book called Ratndkar Purana containing the accounts of thirty- 
five kings who ruled in Kasmir five thousand years ago, and also 
of seven kings who ruled in Kaémir from the end of second to the 
beginning of sixth century of Christian era, which accounts 
were lost to history. Ratnakar Pur4na had been discovered in 


196 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [{May, 1913. 


the time of Zain-ul-Abdin who reigned in Kasmir from 1422 to 
1474 a.D., and under his orders Mulah Ahmad, the poet laureate 
of his court, translated it into Persian. Ratndkar Purana is 
now again untraceable, and on this account the above-men- 
tioned translation is of immense importance. 

Hasan went to Pindori and took a copy of this History. 
Bape to Kasmir he wrote a History of Kasmir of his own, 

which he embodied the important facts he had found in 
Mulah Ahmad’s History of Kasmir. This copy of Mulah 
Ahmad’s History was subsequently lost by him in a flood in 
which his boat capsized, he being thrown into water together 
with the book and rescued but alas! without the book. 

In 1902 a.p. the Kasmir Durbar tried to secure a copy of 
Mulah Ahmad’s History, but Mulah Mahméd, from whom 
Hasan had got his copy, had since died and his family had 
removed to Kabul at the invitation of His Majesty the late 
Amir Abdul Rahman Khan 

Hasan gave a subtle touch of humour mingled with 


her mother-in-law was often quarrelling with her, and asked 
for a charm so that the quarrels might cease. Hasan gave 
her a charm, enjoining upon her that whenever her mother- 
in-law would be egin to utter harsh words to her she should 
at once put the charm under her own teeth and press it 
hard. e Pir’s instructions were faithfully followed. The 
daughter in law having the charm pressed under her teeth 
could not open her mouth to remonstrate with her mother-in- 
law for her abitaeations and the latter’s-fury would fas 
quently at once abate. The result was that there was soo 

peace between them. The simple woman ascribed this ohinaga 
not to her own silence, but to the efficacy of the charm, for 
which she came to the Pir and thanked him. Another time a 
woman told him that whenever she sat down to spin, it would 
happen that she had to go away to do some other more urgent 
work and she, therefore, requested to be given a charm in order 


went to spin, taking care that the thread would not break. ‘The 
result was that she thought of nothing but the thread which 
the Pir had said must not break, and the consequence was 


thing else while spinning. The ignorant woman ascribed 
this to the wonderful efficacy of the charm and had firmer faith 
in the Pir. 

_ Sir W. R. Lawrence, when Settlement Commissioner of the 
Kasmir State, was supplied by Hasan with much historical 


Vol. mae No. 5.} History of Kaémir. 197 
[NV.S.] 


infonnHOR and was also taught the Kasmiri language by him. 
In page 454 of his Valley of Ets fabliad Sir Walter thus expresses 
his gratefulness to the man 

** What else (Kaémiri hbziat I have learnt, I owe 
Pir Hasan Sah, a lear ned KaSmiri, whose work has settle 
been sie 8 the villagers.’’ 


in KaSmir asking Hasan to come to Simla to be presented to 
His Excellency, but the pies came too late, as Hasan had 
died just a few days befor 

asan had only one son, named Gul4m Muhammad Ali, 
who died in 1311 a.n. (1893 a A.D.) in his 35th year of age, leav- 


Sa’id, behind. These are now at their native village engaged in 
their hereditary occupation of priesthood of a large number of 
uhammadans, and are also doing agriculture. 


In Part II, Chapter I of my paper on the History of 
Kasmir published in this Journal for April 1910, I stated that 
Kalhana had written in his Rajatarangini that the reign of king 
Randditya extended over 300 years. Itis needless to remark 
that attributing such a longevity to a human being is simply 
extravagant. It was evidently intended to cover a great break 
of which no record of the succession of kings was forthcoming 
in the time of Kalhana. Even an orthodox Hindu will shake 
his head on hearing it, remembering that in this Kaliyuga age 
the span of man’s life is only 120 years, beyond which even 
the incarnation of Visnu, i.e. Krisna, could not live. 

Hasan, the author of the Persian History of Kasmir, how- 
ever, says that Ranaditya reigned for only 60 years and 3 
months, which of course seems probable, and seven kings 
ruled, six preceding and one following him, whose accounts 
have been omitted in the Rajatarangint. According to this 
author this period extended over not 300 years but 329 years 
and 5 months. He has given the names as well as the accounts 
of the rule of these seven kings, one of whom is Vain inya- 
ditya, who, though not mentioned in the Rajatarangini, is 
well remembered even to the present day by every household 
in Kas to have been an extremely good an _— 
ruler. ‘His. name has descended down from generation 
generation and his fame in ae. has equalled, if not ae 
that of Vikramaditya of There occurs in the Raja- 
tarangini (Book V. 97-100) a Saipk by the name of Vainy4a- 

svamin about whose founder no mention is made therein any- 
where, but it proves that there was a king of the name of 


\ 


198 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [May, 1913. 


Zain-ul-abdin, who reigned in Kagmir from 1422 to 1474 4 ee 
had got prepared from Mulah Ahmad, the poet-laureate of his 
court. I have already attempted to discuss the reliability of 

asan’s History in the above-mentioned paper and it is 


So this is the second gap in the Réjatarangini. The first 
is for a period for which Kalhana stated that he could not get 
the accounts of thirty-five kings who had ruled during it, which 

ry 


in the above-mentioned paper. Need I say how important it 
is to the historians to find this second gap also filled up? 


kings who ruled during the above period, of which, as I have 
stated above, 300 years are incorrectly ascribed to only one 
king (Randditya) by Kalhana. 


Tunjina—191-234 a.n, 

Tufijina was the second son of Yudhisthira and after the 
death of his brother, Narendraditya, proclaimed himself King 
of Kasmir. Narendraditya had a son named Sradwal whom 
Tufijina appointed as his minister. In course of time they fell 
out with each other and the result was that Sradwal was 
murdered. Sradwal left a son named Sarabsena, seven years 
old, and this poor helpless boy, out of fear of Tufjina, escaped 
with his mother to Nagarkot. 
to have him, and he subsequently gave him his own daughter 
in marriage. When he attained majority, he collected some 


Sarabsena —234.82 a.p. 
After Tufijina, Sarabsena ascended the throne. He estab- 


He went to India twice and invaded and conquered many 
countries. His queen was the daughter of the King of Kanauj. 


e built a temple of Bhutesvara at Vicirnag (the northern 
suburb of Srinagar 


arabsena died after reigning for 48 years. 


Gandharbsena—282-319 a.p. 


Gandharbsena, son of Sarabsena, now sat on the throne. 
His reign was marked with slothfulness diversified with cruelty. 


. 
| 
. 
. 


Vol. IX, No. 5.] History of Kasmir. 199 
[N.S.] 


Taking advantage of his weak rule, the Chiefs in India, who 
were considering themselves under the suzerainty of the King 
of Kagmir, shook off his control. It is said he had brought a 
dancing girl from India, and was passing day and night in her 
company. Consequently the government fell into disorder. 

Lachman, grandson of Tufijina, was then a Jagir-holder 
at Dachinpor. He took the opportunity, and coming with some 
troops laid siege to the palace. For seven days the struggle 
continued. The king’s troops, who had become disgusted 
with his conduct, went over to the intruder 
then the king had to surrender. Lachman captivated him and 
took possession of the kingdom 

Gandharbsena ruled for 37 years. 


Lachman—319-52 A.D. 


Lachman ascended the throne in 319 a.D. and ruled well, 
checking the tide of extortion and misgovernment. The Chief- 
tains of the distant parts of Kasmir, who had revolted in the 
time of his predecessor, were brought again to submission by 


: e 
arrived in the Panjdb,»a mishap occurred. He was sleeping 
under a tree with a red handkerchief spread over his face. 
An eagle taking it to be a piece of flesh pounced upon him. 
Its sharp talons pricked down through the handkerchief right 
into the king’s eyes and pulled them out. The king had a 
very severe pain and in three days died. 

He reigned for 32 years and 6 months. 


Strak --352-403 a.p. 


Lachman’s brother, named Sitrak, succeeded him. He 
completed the expedition successfully which his predecessor 

commenced. Sukaram Pal, Chief of Multan, retired into a 
fort and held out for one month, but ultimately made peace, . 
agreeing to pay a tribute to Stirak. After this the victorious 
king returned to Kasmir. 

Later on, a chief, Dardu by name, rebelled and coming 
into the Kamraj plundered the villages. Sitirak with his troops 
went out to oppose him and Dardu together with his men 
retreated and fled away into the hills, but Stirak pursued them. 
He went too far without circumspection until Dardu’s men 
entrapped him and his force between two hills and cut off their 
supplies. They also rolled down stones from the hills upon 
them and killed all the troops. The king was taken prisoner 
and detained in a fort at Pattan. i 

Vajraditya was the son of king Lachman. He went with 
a force to get his uncle released. He first marched over the 


200 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [May, 1913. 


country of Dardu, sacked it and massacred its inhabitants and 
then came to Pattin and took the fort by storm but too 
late, as just at his approach the enemy cut off the head of 
Strak and threw it down over the walls of the fort. 

Stirak’s reign extended over 51 years. 


Vajraditya—403-14 a.p. 


Vajraditya ascended the throne in the year 403 a.p. He 
had, however, to contend with the son of Sarak named 
Jayendra. They fought in the Maraj Division for one year 
without either of them getting vanquished. At last Vajraditya 
accomplished his purpose in a particularly cruel and treacherous 
manner. He negotiated and made peace with his foe and when 
the latter came over to his camp, he basely murdered him. 
Jayendra’s troops got frantic and indignant at this treachery and 
fought with Vajraditya until 10,000 troops were lost on both 
sides. Vajraditya, however, won the field and returned to his 
capital. He was a good ruler. He built many temples and 
repaired Vijajeshvare temple. In his time the grains were very 
cheap, husked rice selling at 8 pice a Kharvdr (96 seers). He 
reigned for 10 years and 8 months. 


# 
Ranaditya —414-74 a.p. 


Ranaditya succeeded his father in 414 a.p. He was a 
glorious king,—powerful, just, generous and good. His head 
was formed li shell. He had a beautiful queen named 
Rana-rambha. There is a legend that he was in his former 
birth a gambler. Having lost all his property in gambling and 


Bhramara-vasini and could not be a wife to a mortal. But 
he insisted that he would ask for no other boon, and if she 


Vol. IX, No. 5.] History of Kasmir. 201 
[NV.8.] 


was to keep her word she should accede to his request. She 
then told him that it would be so in another birth. After this 
he committed suicide by throwing himself down from a tree at 
Prayaga (the junction of the Sindh river with the Jhelum near 
Sadipur) in the hope of taking a fresh birth in union with the 
goddess. He was born as Ranaditya and she as Rana-rambha. 
The latter was found floating in the ocean by the king of the 
Cholas (Tanjore) named Ratisena, who picked her up and 
nourished her. When she was grown up, several kings asked 
for her hand but Ratisena would not consent. Randaditya also 
sent his minister for this girl and Ratisena was about to give 
his refusal when Rana-rambha declared to him that this king 
should be her husband. She then related to him the whole 
story of her origin and thereupon Ratisena sent her to the 
residence of one of his friends, the king of Kuluta (Kulu) where 
the nuptials were to be celebrated. Ranaditya went to Kulu 
and married her, As she could not touch a mortal, she never 
touched him. She used to deceive the king by keeping in bed 
a phantom woman resembling herself and would herself go out 
at night in the form of a bee. 


as it represented Sakti alone without Siva. Siva then put 
together into a lump. all the jewels brought as marriage 


hands Ravana who used to worship them at Lanka 
(Ceylon) and after his being killed by Rama were carried away 
by the monkeys to the Himalayas. These beasts after satisfy- 
ing their curiosity dropped them into the Uttara-manasa 
(Gangabal) lake.’’ The queen further said—‘‘ | have already 


ext morning the king’s happiness knew no bounds to see 
them come just in time, and he began first to consecrate the 
Ranesvara Siva-linga when the image of Ranasvamin, through 


202 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. {May, 1913. 


the power of Rana-rambha, seated itself miraculously on the 
pitha. The queen offered her property to the latter image, 
and several villages were presented to it by other worshippers. 

It is said there was a water-carrier, named Brahma, who in 


by the people, he moved through the air pr  consecrating the 
Ran-eivara Linga and consecrated the Ranasvamin secretly. 
The queen erected a grand hall in honour of this Siddha which 
she called Brahma-mandapa. 

Ranaditya and his —_ also built the ee i of Rana- 
rambha-svamin and Rana-rambha-deva and a Matha for men- 
dicants on the Hari Parbat hill, probably on its southern side, 
which gave Rainavari (eastern suburb of Srinagar) its name. 
The king also established a hospital for the sick and suffering 
poor, in order to ward off a danger threatening his another 
queen, Sena-mukhi. He erected a temple of Martanda (Sun) 
at the village of Simha-rotsika which ia called Ranapura- 
svamin. The modern name of Simha-rotsika is Sumra-bug 
village near Pantachuk (5 miles from Srinagar on the Anant- 
nag road) on the left bank of the Vitasta. At Pantachuk is the 


ey 
2 
© 
5 
> 
S) 
= 
4 
E: 
Q 
= 
ct 
= 
fa) 
ra 
° 
1S 
ed 
on 
at 
SS 
Es 
re) 
Lar} 
-_ 
all 
oO 


a 

aman and then went to Nandi-sila (Nund-kol lake). After- 

wards he entered the cave of Namu chi ene near the 3rd 
The 


ty hi 
Island), probably the small island called Rupalank or Silver 
Island in the Dal lake. 
Ranaditya’s rule lasted 60 years and 3 months. 


Vainyaditya—474-521 a.p. 

Cr a sat on the throne of his father, Ranaditya, 
in 

He went, when yet a boy eleven eed old, to visit different 

oc une? in India in company with his nele, Mangaladitya. 

— visiting various places of tants be: went to the Sivalik 

untains where he saw a recluse, named Ganapat, who h 
bias living in a cave since 100 years. Vainyaditya remained 
with him, and, under his guidance, practised penances for 


ee ee een ee ee 


Vol. IX, No. 5.]. History of Kaémir. 203° 
LW.S.] 


twelve years, taking no food except a cup of milk each day. 
He became a perfect ascetic and after twenty years returned to 
Kaésmir at the bidding of his spiritual guide. Here he stayed 
for one — in the Ji8teSvara temple on the top of the Takht-i- 
Suleman 

When ‘Randditya retired into the cave of Namcibal, the 
courtiers approached Vainyaditya and requested him to sit 
on 


Gagribal built an abode for himself near which two vaults were 
constructed. In one of these vaults the revenue of the Maraj 
Division and in the other that of the Kamraj Division was to 
be deposited. He then issued an edict to the effect that 


sources was collected by day was distributed among the poor 
in the evening, nothing being left for the morrow. For his own 
subsistence he used to cultivate himself a piece of land and out 
of it the value of the tenth part was, like other cultivators, 
given to the treasury as government share. Till the end of 
his reign every cultivator used to pay his dues himself, and 
anyone failing to do so somehow came to grief. Anyon e 
taking what did not legitimately belong to him suffered in some 
way or other ; and anybody attempting to steal got his hand 
withered. Under these halcyon state of affairs none had an 
trouble. Being an ascetic himself, whatever he would utter 
at the riverside, would happen » once. Any person commit- 
ting an offence got punishment by his curse. All his life 
through he wore a quilt like a aula: and never tasted flesh meat. 
He built the temple of at Messy at Trigam at the 
confluence of Sindh with the Vitas 

This noblest and purest of Kaka kings died after 47 
years’ peaceful and happy rule. 


eS Se 


aa te autos 
: 
> 
Peace Pcie tok aq fe 
: St Prat — we 4 ae areer uae 
; se bape if Ae 
= ae te + 2 
i a3 Ff see £5 7 
; E 9 . 
i ‘ . jt 4 t neal +> De hubey 
: : ei tMiee a Seg 
Huet tA 
i Bere pao pee peti ri 
Sones Yee ol - ae, St Bn, hee ka ots oe 


hy 


ge ee eS ee ee ee ee ee Oe ee ee 


et ee ee eee 


23. The Double Mercuri-periodides of Substituted Ammo- 
nium Bases. Tetrapropylammonium Mercuri-periodide. 


By Rasix Lat Datra and Haripas MUKHERJEA. 


In a paper to the Chemical Society (Trans. Chem. Soc., 
1913, 103, 426), it has been pointed out by one of us that when 
platinic chloride or cupric chloride is added to substituted 


the case of double platinic eh the platinic iodide itself is 
stable and no special care has to be taken for preparing the 
double salts, but in the case of oy salts with cupric iodide, 
the cupric iodide is unstable, decomposing into cuprous iodide 
and ee 
as been pointed out before that the heavily substituted 

eae bases form with remarkable facility the double 
tig’ iodides, since they contribute materially to their forma. 
tion by reason of the affinity of those bases for iodine. It is 
for this reason that no double salt of cupric iodide has been 
ress with the iodides of alkali metals and lightly substi- 

ted ammonium bases, while the platinic iodides form double 
iodides with them with great ease. 

There is, then, a strong affinity of the substituted ammo- 


This strong affinity of the bases for iodine suggested to us the 
area “of formation of double salts in which there are 
uigher valencies in existence as regards iodine and accordingly 
the pe gbgces of double Born gal ax oe was undertaken. 
n this case the method of preparation has been varied 
a little froin the usual method of double serge gaies a in as 
much as the hexavalent mercury atom has not been realized in 
the case of any salt of mercury. In the case of cloubie salts 
with cupric iodide, we had a parallel valency in cupric chloride 
and hence the method of double decomposition was feasible. 
The following direct method has been used successfully for the 


dissolved in a solution of potassium iodide. The resulting 
solution contains presumably Hgl, in a very loose "added of 


206 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [June, 1913.] 


the iodine and mercuri-periodide comes out as a precipitate in 
double combination. 


TETRAPROPYLAMMONIUM MERCURI-PERIODIDE. 
5N (C;H,), I, HgI,. 


The solution of mercuric iodide and iodine was prepared 
by dissolving weighed quantities in potassium iodide and the 


mo- 
nium iodide. The precipitate thus obtained was triturated in 
a mortar with the mother liquor, filtered and washed with a 
small quantity of water, since on the addition of a large quan- 
tity the salt decomposes with the liberation of iodine, as ob- 
served in the case of double cupric iodides. The precipitate 
was dried in a desiccator over sulphuric acid and had a brown 
colour. 

The salt on analysis gave the following results :— 


0°3631g gave 0:0308 HgS; Hg=7'48 
0°1190g gave 0°1195 Agl; I1=54-29 
Calc. for 6N (C,H,),I, HgIl,; Hg=7°91; 1=55°28. 


mercuric iodide, having a formula 2N(C,H,),I, HglI,. The 
decomposition that takes place might be represented thus :— 


5N(C;H,),1, HgI, = 2N (C3H,),, HgI, + 3N(C;H,),I + 21, 


We are at present engaged in preparing a series of double 
mercuri-periodides with various substituted ammonium bases 
and also other persalts by similar methods. 

e take this opportunity to express our best thanks to 
Professor P. C. Ray for his kind encouragement. 


POLONIA GER PL RPT OG 


24. The Action of Nitrosy] Chloride on Secondary 
Amines, Methylbenzylnitrosamine and 
EthylbenzylInitrosamine. 


By Rastx Lat Datta. 


The action of nitrosyl ee on ee amines was 
studied for the first time by Solonina (J. Rus 0C., 
1898, 30, 43). For this purpose, ae added an sitet solution 
of nitrosyl chloride to a solution of the amine in ether. The 


and nitrosoisobutylene were formed. Ethylamine gave nitro- 


isobutylamine, seine el hee aby and nitrosopiperidine from 
the corresponding secondary 
To study the general -applinabllity of the method and also 
the action of this reagent on tertiary cyclic bases, this abr apenok 
tion was undertaken. In this communication, the results are 
described of the action of nitrosyl chloride on two neoondary 
giv 


1912, 28, ). 

Nitrosyl chloride was prepared according to the method of 
Tilden (Journ. Chem. Soc., 1860, 13, 630). For this purpose a 
mixture of nitric acid (Sp. Gr. 1-42) and hydrochloric acid (Sp. 
Gr. 1-16) was heated and the dried vapours passed into a solu- 


acid forming nitrosylsulphuric acid, while antl latter esca 
The nitrosylsulphuric acid thus obtained was h 
anhydrous sodium chloride, when a stream of Finan chloride 
was obtained. 
nstead of using an ethereal solution of nitrosy] chloride as 
did Solent, the gas was directly passed into an ethereal solu- 
tion of the amine, when secondary nitrosamine and amine 


208 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (June, 1913.] 


hydrochloride are produced, the former remaining in solution 
and the latter precipitating out. 


METHYLBENZYLNITROSAMINE. 


The amine used was obtained from Kahlbaum. Nitrosyl 


Lieb 

analysis indicated that it was methylbenzylnitrosamine. 
0°1722 gave 29 c.c. N, at 31° and 760 m.m.; N=18°30 
0°2089 gave 4832 CO, and 1276 H,O; C=63:09, H=6°77 

Cale. for C,H-CH.N (NO); C=64:00; H=6°66; N=18°66. 

t is a yellowish oil, insolubie in water and soluble in 
alcohol and ether. It possesses a peculiar smell by which 
means it can be readily detected. Its boiling point could not 
be determined as the quantity prepared was too small. This 
and other constants will be described in a future paper. 


ETHYLBENZYLNITROSAMINE. 


Ethylbenzylnitrosamine was prepared similarly to methyl 
benzylnitrosamine by passing nitrosyl chloride through an 
ethereal solution of the amine, filtering off ethylbenzylamine 

tion in air Ethylbenzyl- 


lysed : 
0'1422 gave 21 c.c. N, at 28° and 760 mm.; N=16-43. 
Cale. for C,H,.C,H,N NO; N=17-07. 
is a yellowish oil, insoluble in water but soluble in 
alcohol and ether, possessing a peculiar 


our. 
he action of nitrosyl chloride on cyclic and tertiary bases- 
is under investigation. 


erm 


A REPORT ON THE BIOLOGY OF THE 
LAKE OF TIBERIAS. 
SECOND SERIES. 
List of Subjects dealt with in Second Series, 


Pi 
Leeches (Hirudinea) .. N. Annandale, D.Sc., F.A.S.B. .. yi 1 
Collembola (Cyphoderus) .. Prof.G.N. Carpenter, B.Sc., M.R.I.A. 215 
Dragonflies (Odonata) -. F. F. Laidlaw, F.Z.8., F.E.S., F.L.8. 219 
Larva of the Sponge Nudo- 
spongilla a. ae 


N. Annandale, D.Sc., F.A.8.B.  ., 221 

Polyzoa rials sy -+ 223 

Rotifers (Rotatoria) = G F. ESS F. R. M.S 1+ 2e0 

Crustacea Entomostraca .. Robert Gurney ~- 231 
Anatomy of the Prawn ei 

phlocaris ie Ekendranath Ghosh, B.Sc. s« 283 

Crustacea Decapoda { “G W ea kis Ms res soe Fies Be 


The first series of papers in this Report was published in Vol. IX, 
No, I, of this Journal, pp. 17-88 (1913). 


| 
: 
F 
| 
; 


ee eT ee ee et 


ih ct a te i a rah Se, Tt 


Te: eee Se ee Le ee 


WIE reo eke 


NS as ee ee ee ae 


25.. The Leeches of the Lake of Tiberias. 
By N. Annanpae, D.Sc., F.A.S.B. 


(Published by permission of the Trustees of the Indian Museum.) 


The Hirudinean fauna of the Lake of Tiberias is a poo 
one and may now be regarded as well known, for three Seperate 
collections from the district have agreed with one another. 
These three collections are (i) that made by Dr. Th. Barrois in 
1890; (ii) that made by Dr. Festa in 1893; and (iii) that made 

y myself in 1912. The two former were described by Prof. 


own collection includes specimens of three et one 
of which was not taken in the immediate vicinity of the lake, 
although doubtless it occurs there. I have found it ache 
to recognize the local form of one common species as a distinct 
race or subspecies. The species are— 

Placobdella catenigera (Moq.-Tand.). 

I found a large specimen under a stone in the stream that 
runs through the Wad-es-Semakh. It was full of blood and 
had probably just left a tortoise, for the species is parasitic on 
aquatic Chelonia. A very young leech possibly of this species 

was found under a stone at the edge of the lake near Mejdal. 
< catenigera is widely distributed in Eastern Europe and 
Western Asia. 
aemopsis sanguisuga (Linn.). 

Several specimens were obtained from ha village fountain 
at Kefr Kenna between Tiberias and Nazareth. The species is 
common in such situations in Palestine nite probably shares 
with Limnatis nilotica' the habit of entering the throats of 
animals and persons who drink incautiously at springs, causing 
thereby great discomfort and even dan . 

Herpobdella (Dina) lineata (O. F. Miiller). : 

This is the only leech at all common in the lake. It is 
discussed in the following note — 


eS (Dina) lineata i F. Miiller). 
blasei, Blanchard, Att. Soc Sci. Nat. Geog. III, 
No. 4 (1892). Rév. Biol. Nord France Mi p. 45 (1804) + “Boll. 
Mus. Torino VIII, No. 161, p. 3 (1893 


1 CF. Mabberinisn , Parastioloyy Y: p- - 282 (1908). 


212 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [June, 1913. 


Nephelis gallica, id., Bull. Soc. zool. France XVII, p. 172 


(1892). 

Dina latina, id., Att. Soc. lig. Sci. Nat. Geog. III, No. 4 
(1892). 

Dina quadristriata, id., Boll. Mus. Torino 1X, No. 192, p. 60 
(1894). 


Herpobdella lineata, Johansson, Zool. Anz. XXXVI, p. 379 


(1910). 
Herpobdella lineata, Rousseau, Ann. Biol. lacustre V, p. 79 
1913). 


This species has, especially in the last few years, been 
subjected to many change s of name:! there seems little doubt 
that it is the one called Hirudo lineata by F. O. Miiller and 
that lineata is therefore the correct specific designation. The 
generic name, however, has also been called in question. In 
1893 Blanchard made it the type of his new genus Dina, 
because it differed from other Herpobdellidae in that the third 
ring of the somite was enlarged and divided longitudinally by 
a superficial furrow. This feature, which is shared with at 
least one other European species (Dina absoloni, Johansson), * 
is evidently constant, although often difficult to detect, and 
sand be regarded, as Johansson (1913) suggests, as of subgeneric 
valu 


The typical form of the species is widely distributed in 
Europe, North and Central America and occurs also in 
Madeira and the Azores. Varieties or local races have been 
described (in Russian *) from Siberia and Mongolia 

aerpeaahs (1894) describes the colouration of “< Dina quad- 
ristriata’’ as follows :-~‘* Venter pallidus. Dorsum cinereum aut 
subviride, adele taeniis nigris ornalum, maculis albidis aut 
subfiavis praesertim supra primum an nulum somiti notatum. 
But, although the living individuals I saw in Palestine and 
Syria varied | somewhat in the exact shade of the dorsal surface, 
they agreed in being absolutely devoid of all trace of definite 
markings. : lal seed therefore, to regard the race as distinct 
under the n 


Subsf. concolor, nov. 


This race is Sees from the typical form of the 
species by the absence of all trace of the longitudinai stripes 
which are usually a conspicuous feature of the colouration. 
The ventral surface is devoid of superficial colour, while the 
back is uniformly suffused with black pigment, to a different 


: See J rieaprastgal s paper ‘‘ Zur Kenntnisder oes gon cae 
ands,’ Zool. Anz. XXXVI, p. 379 (1910), and Rous ee 
Hiradinges d’eau pen d’Europe,’’ Ann. a Pe ames ¥, p. » 286 (1913). 

ool. Anz, XLII, nr. 2, p. bd ge 
8 Plotnikow, Ann. Mus, Zoo 2, Bob. Bt St. oe X, p. 153 (1905). 


Pa 
Bei 


ERRATA. 
In Journal, Vol. IX, No. 6, 1913, page 212— 


Line’ 22, from top, for ‘divided longitudinally’? read 
‘* divided transversely.’’ 
From Hexen line 1, for ‘‘St. Pétersbe’’ read ‘St. 
erbs. 


From ml line 7, for ‘*Subsf.” read ‘‘ Subsp.” 


Vol. IX, No. 6.] The Leeches of the Lake of Tiberias. 213 
[NV.8.] 
depth of tint in different individuals. As a rule small indivi- 


have seen large ones ied were quite pale. The blood is red 
and gives the living animal a pinkish tinge, the depth of 
which soot ha Sencadé ss on nthe degree of pigmentation of the 
integum 

My eee specimens, killed in “y oo condition, are 
35 mm. long by 3 mm. broad and 2 m. deep. In life they 
were flatter and, viet at a distinctly broader. 

Distribution.—Lake of Tiberias and neighbourhood; R. 
Barada. There are eit of this race in my collection 
from near Damascus and from several of the springs round the 
lake as well from the Lake itself, in which it is one of the 
commonest animals. 

Johansson and Rousseau both mention cases in which the 
stripes are faint or obsolete, but in Europe these are apparently 
aberrations. Dina absoloni of the former author entirely lacks 
pigment and is distinguished by the fact that the oe pores. 
are separated by three instead of five complete rings. 

Blanchard says (1893) that ‘‘ D. quadristriata’’ is ‘* littér- 
alement banale en Syrie.’’ This I can confirm from my own 
observations both at Tiberias and at Damascus. In = gen 
I took most of my specimens on the lower surface of s 
the edge, on one occasion finding no less than 23 individnale 
adhering to a single stone of not more than 15-0 sq. cm. in 
- area. In this position the food consisted mainly of small Oligo- 
chaeta, which were swallowed whole. A large but very pale 
individual was dredged from between 6 and 8 metres in the 
Jordan channel in the lake near Sema 


No other species of leech is actually known to inhabit the 
Lake of Tiberias, but Blanchard in recording the occurrence of 
‘Placobdella carinata (Diesg.) in one of the tributaries of the 
R. Orontes states that Barrois took a large number of speci- 


The list of Hirudinea known from the lake must, therefore, 
stand for the present as follows :— 
Fam. Glossiphonidae. 
1. Placobdella catenigera Peet et a eg 
2. ? Placobdella carinata (Diesing). 
Fam. Herpobdellidae. 


3. Herpobdella (Dina) lineata (O. F. Miller). 
though one of these species occurs in North Africa and 
even in localities outside the Palaearctic Region, they may all 


214 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (June, 1913.] 


be hides tig as sie proaiged representative of the European 
fauna. No one of them can be stated to be either Oriental or 
Ethiopian in ane and they afford no evidence, except in the 
peculiar colouration of the race of H. lineata found in the Lake 
of Tiberias but also in the R. Barada, of long-continued isolation. 
The species are lacustrine and not related to marine forms. 


ae Sioa SP ieee Ne oe Ra Sa 


26. A New Springtail from Galilee. 


By Proressor George H. Carpenter, B.So., M.B.I. As, 
Royal College of Science, Dublin 


Communicated by Dr. N. ANNANDALE. 


(Plate VIII.) 


. N. Annandale’s ep is researches in and around 
the Lake of Galilee in October, 1912, have resulted in the dis- 
covery of a single species of ia Co liewibolé or “‘ Springtails ’’ 

which proves to be of considerable interest, and I am oo 
grateful to him for having kindly entrusted his specimens to 
for study and description. He found the frail white rset: 
referable to a new species of the genus Cyphoderus, beneat 
stones at the edge of a brackish spring on pes oe of the lake, 
about two miles north of the town of Tiber 


Order COLLEMBOLA. 
Family ENnTroOMOBRYIDAE. 


Genus CypHoperus, Nicolet. 


f oO 
termites, and in correspondence with their dark dweltiogipleses: 
are white and blin d. 


Cyphoderus genneserae, sp. nov. 


Length 15mm. Feelers twice as long as head. Foot with 
apical hair tapering, not clubbed, claw with a large and a small 
basal tooth. Spring with dens and mucro together as long as 
diinapabieiaens: dens two and a half times as long as mucro ; mucro 
with three teeth (one apical and two dorsal). Colour white. 

ity. In salt spring on ape eg near Tiberias. 
Types in tndkati Museum, Calcutt 


216 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [June, 1913. 


The above short diagnosis serves | believe to define this 
species from others of Cyphoderus. As usual in this genus 
there is no trace of eyes. The four segments of the feeler (fig. 1) 
have approximately the proportional lengths, 1:3:2:5. I 
one specimen, one of the feelers has only three segments, the 
second of these being three-quarters as long as the terminal 
(fig. 2). The foot is remarkable for the replacement of the usual 
clubbed tenent hair by a slender tapering bristle. In connec- 
tion with the base of the foot-claw there is a small anterior — 
tooth-like outgrowth (fig. 3, 4, 5) in addition to the prominent 

inder one, which characterises this genus generally (fig. 3, 
4, a). The lamella of the claw has no teeth. The empodial 
appendage or ‘‘inferior claw’’ has the three characteristic 
lamellae very distinct, the inwardly and forwardly directed one 
(fig. 3, 4, c) being pointed and leaf-like. The fourth abdomi- 
nal segment is four and a half times as long as the third. The 
dens of the spring (figs. 1, 5) has six pairs of rather narrow 
scales (fig. 5d), arranged along the two sides of its dorsal or 
hinder edge, and a large broad scale (fig. 5e) inserted close to 
the base of the mucro. The latter structure (fig. 5m) has 
three prominent teeth, one terminal, which is slightly hooked, 
and two dorsal. 
the presence of three teeth on the mucro, C. genneserae 
differs from the European species C’. albinus, Nic., and from the 
B C. simulans, Imms (1, pp. 115-6, pl. xii, figs. 90, 91), 


dition to the three teet 
dorsal tooth. 

In both these Sudanese species, however, the lamella of 
the foot-claw is conspicuously toothed, and the large scales on 


the many well-known corres 
pondences between the flora and fauna of the Jordan valley 
and those of tropical Africa. 


LITERATURE. 
(1) A. D. Imms. On some Collembola from India, Burma, 
Bas Pee Proc. Zool. Soc Lond., 1912, pp. 80-125, pls. 
—_ i i : x 


(2) EB. Wahlgren. 
Sudan. Results of th 
and the White Nile, | 


Apterygoten aus Aegypten und dem 
e Swedish Zoological Expedition to Egypt 
901, no. 15, Uppsala, 1906. 


Journ., As. Soc., Beng., Vol. EX. 1913, PLATE VIII. 


Cyphoderus genneserae, sp. nov. 


Vol. IX, No. 6.] A New Springtail from Galilee. 217 
[N.S.] 


Puate VIII. 
Fie. 1. Cyphoderus genneserae. Side view. ~* 50. 
Abnormal feeler. x 50. aS 
Tip of fore-foot: side view showing claw with its 
two tooth-like basal lamellae (4 and 6) and em- 
podial appendage with leaf-like lamella (c). 
x ca. 466. 


er pO 


,, 4. Tip of middle foot, outer view; lettering as in 
fig. 3. x ca. 46 


,» 5. End of dens, with paired (d) and terminal (¢) 
scales, and mucro (m). x ca. 466. 


or 


27. Note on the Dragonflies of Syria and the Jordan 
Valley. 


By F. F. Latpiaw, F.ZS., F.E.S., F.LS. 


Communicated by Dr. N. ANNANDALE. 


t 
them in abundance round its shores in open country, but 
among the dense vegetation that surrounds many of the pools 
and streams in the vicinity several species of Agrionidae are 
to be found in fairly large numbers.—N. Annandale.] 


The Odonata of Syria and of the Jordan Valley are still 
imperfectly known. 
lements at least enter into the composition of the 


sentatives recorded from Syria, as well as the species of the 

genus Sympetrum occurring in the area under discussion. 
Secondly there occur a number of species belonging to 

the tropical old world fauna, and more especially to the 


were collected by Mr. Annandale, viz. Trithemis annulata 
(Palisot de Beauvois) and Brachythemis leucosticta, Burm. 


are Anax immaculifrons, Burm. described from Tonkin and 
Indo-China; and Psilocnemis kervillei, Martin, a new species 
belonging to a characteristic Indo-Malayan genus, which is, 
Owever, represented in Madagascar, and is exceedingly closely 
related to the Mediterranean Platycnemis. 

Ris has recently published an analysis of the known 


220 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (June, 1913.] 


dragonfly fauna of the Egyptian Soudan. He groups the species 
as follows :— 

1. Palaearctic; 2. Palaearctic-Mediterranean ; 3. Aethiopi- 
an, with Northern extension ; 4. Typica | Aethiopian ; 5. Aethio- 
pian with _ Eastern extension ; 6. Oriental (reaching only to 

ez); 7. kaiserl. Akad. 
open ges Wien ; mathem.-naturw. Klasse: Bd. cxxi, Abt. 
1; April, 1912). 

Probably all of these except 4 will be found to be repre- 
sented in — pies Valley and Syria ; possibly even group 4 
may be ih 

Mr. 


Pils? s two species on this classification fall most 
naturally into group 5. 


ge ig ti gti, ln ctl gt ty, iy oS Tes 


28, Note on bi Sponge-Larva from the Lake of Tiberias. 
By N. ANNANDALE, D.Sc., F.A.S.B. 
(Published by permission of the Trustees of the Indian Museum.) 
(Plate VII, fig. 3.) 


In a small aquarium which I kept at Tiberias I found on 
October 22nd certain little organisms which I took at the time 
for the larvae of Phylactolaematous polyzoa. As they differed 


proved them to be sponge-larvae, and as Nudospongilla ma 
was the only sponge living in the aquarium and as sponges of 
the species were actually full of embryos at the time in the 
lake, there can be no doubt that the larvae belonged to that 
species. 

The larvae were in life of a milky white colour, with a 
more opaque patch (representing the solid part of the organ- 
ism) clearly visible with the aid of a hand lens at one end. 
A 


though they did not gyrate on their longer axis as the larvae 
of Phylactolaemata usually do, Their form was very broadly 
ovoid, approaching the spherical. The broader end was direc- 


Single org ut course the polyzoon is much more 
highly organized than the sponge at the time each is set free 
e N al ppa is, in the case of pre- 


served specimens, about 0-44 mm. long by : 

little more than half of the bladder-like body is hollow, the re- 
mainder being filled with the primitive dermal cells. Amongst 
these latter certain cells have already taken on the function of 


222 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [June, 1913.] 


scleroblasts, and, indeed, spicules are already well developed 
and have begun to be arranged in fascicles or fibres. 

n the specimen figured a certain distortion of the narrower 
end has been brought about by shrinkage in the preservatives 
used (picro-formol-acetic solution followed by 90% alcohol) and 
it is probable that the projection of one fascicle of spicules 
through the ciliated membrane is not natural. 


is no means certain that all the possibly heterogeneous 
species which I have assigned provisionally to the genus have 
acommon origin ; the skeleton of N. mappa in particular is 


1s;1t may be claimed with confidence that N. mappa at any 
rate is a true Spongillid, for its larva hardly differs from that 
of Spongilla except in being more nearly spherical. Advanced 


Plate VII, fig. 3. 
Fig. 3. Larva of Nudospongilla mappa Annand., x 100. 


The specimen had been stained with picro-carmine and 
mounted, after clearing, in Canada balsam. 


Sit = tai lig giligs epee pe ee 


29. The Polyzoa of the Lake of Tiberias. 
By N. AnnanpDae, D.Sc., F.A.S.B. 
(Published by permission of the Trustees of the Indian Museum.) 
(Plate VII, figs. 1, 2.) 


Although a careful search for Polyzoa was made and a 
large number of specimens obtained, only two species are repre- 
sented in my collection from the Lake of Tiberias. I have 
called them 

Fredericella sultana blasted subsp. nov., 
and Plumat tella auricomis, 


one eS character from any other species hitherto criti- 
cally examin 


Fredericella sultana jordanica, subsp. nov. 
This race differs from the a Fredericella sultana 
(Blumenbach) in the neaat tty characters :— 
1. Even when wing pate the _—, — not 
form free Ep raunhes of more than two zooec 
2. The ectocyst is usually quite colourless, bat in old 
colonies the covering of some zooecia situated in the 
oldest part is often thick and dar 
3. The zooecia are never circular in cross-section but 
always possess a ie | dorsal keel containing a 
longitudinal furrow 
These characters are not, in my opinion, oa specific value, 


but as they are constant in a large of specimens 
examined both in the a the sees ahr: they may be 


arule they are distinctly flattened on the lower surfac 
keel and furrow are particularly well marked on © old oes, 


. 


224 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (June, 1913. 


but even on young branches can as a rule be detected. They 
become clearer in disintegrating zooecia the polypide of which 
as died. : 
: The polypide resembles that of the typical race, except 
that the tentacles, about 20 in number, are perhaps longer. 
The velum at their base is very narrow but distinctly festooned. 
The statoblasts are smooth on both surfaces and in other 
respects resemble those of European colonies; but they are 
perhaps as a rule more elongate and less frequently kidney- 
shaped. They are more numerous in some colonies than is 
usual in the European race. ae : 
e type of Fredericella sultana jordanica is preserved in 
spirit in the Indian Museum, its number in our registers being 


aving now had the opportunity of examining a consider- 


they can be distinguished at present : 


Forma typica, Indica. Jordanica. Duplessisi. 


Colony, when luxuri- Colony 


recum-| Colony _recum- | Colony free in 
ant, with long free} kent, adherent. bent, adherent.| mud. 
br es, erent 
ati 
Zooecia a 


st cylin- | Zooecia with ‘ 
drical, with aslight | dorsal keel and| gal keel andfur-, most cylin- 
dorsal keel onolder | furrow more or row well devel- | drical. 
| less distinct. oped. 
Statoblast with| Statoblast with | Statoblast un- 
one surface; both surfaces| known. 
sculptured. smooth. 


Zooecia with dor- | Zooecia al 


zooecia. 
Statoblast with _both 
surfaces smooth 


| Faun. Brit. Ind., Freshwater Snon es, pg i . 245 (1911), and 
Rec. Ind. Mus. VIL, pp. 136, 140 (1913). . ne 
2 Proc. Zool. Soc. London, 1907 (2), p. 254, 


Vol. IX, No. 6.] The Polyzoa of the Lake of Tiberias. 225 
[V.S.] 


F. sultana (typical) is found all over Europe, in the West- 
ern Himalayas, in North America, and probably in North 
Africa ; possibly also in Natal. F. australiensis! from New 


dard, but the chief characters on which he bases his diagnosis 


Fredericella from Australia. 

F. sultana jordanica has only been found in the Lake of 
Tiberias and in the R. Jordan at its exit therefrom. 

F, sultana indica, although scarce, is apparently of general 
distribution in the Indian Peninsular area. 

F, sultana duplessisi was obtained from considerable 
depths in the Lake of Geneva. It is doubtful whether it is 
more than a phase of the typical form that lives free in mud. 
The only specimen I have seen supports Loppens’s contention? 
that it only differs from the typical form in that it is not fixed 
to any solid object; but this specimen, which was shown me 

r. C. Rousselet in London, was imperfect, and no stato- 
blasts have as yet been discovered. 

n October, 1912, I found F. sultana jordanica abundant 
on the lower surface of stones round the edge of the Lake? 
of Tiberias. I also noticed many dead colonies in a similar 


rar 
id not obtain specimens below 8 metres. I could find none 
free in mud; but some of the stones on which old but 
apparently vigorous colonies grew were half buried in the 
dense silt that covers the bottom of the lake where it is not 


shallows of the lake, as soon as it was exposed by a stone 
being turned over. : 
ree-swimming larvae of Fredericella were obtained among 
weeds at the edge of the lake on several occasions in October, 
and others were produced by colonies living in a small aqua- 
rium. They were about 0-9 mm. long and of a milky white 


! Proc. Linn. Soc. N. S. Wales XXXIV, p. 489 (1909). io 

2 Fide Zschokke, Die Tiefseefauna der Seen Mitteleuropas, p. 
(1911). : ; 

3 Cf. Barrois, Rev. biol. Nord du France vi, p. 289 (1894). 


226 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [June, 1913. 


colour. In progression the broader (morphologically posterior} 
end was directed forwards. Their movements were compara- 
tively slow and they did not gyrate on their long axis so fre- 
quently as the larvae of Pectinatella burmanica,'! which they 
resembled closely in appearance. In structure they agree with 
normal larvae of the typical race as described by Braem,* but the 
apical mass of nerve cells at the ‘‘ posterior’ extremity appears 
to be larger than his figures* would suggest and the cavity 
within the external membrane is decidedly greater. Thelarvae 
refused to settle on the walls of the aquarium or on the stones 
and weedsit contained, probably on account of the high tempera- 
ture of the room. 

While some colonies from the lake, more particularly those 
from stones, contained statoblasts in October, others had none, 


or only a few in an early stage of development. The thickening 


buds of the Paludicellidae, if not an actual homolo 


and becomes also to some exte 
thick and dark. All statoblasts, even in this race of F. suliana, 
are not produced in zooecia with thickened walls ; but it seems 


1 Annandale, Faun. Brit. Ind., Freshwater Sponges, etc., p. 237. 
1908). 


directly into resting buds. th i 
tat not absolutely complete, | pred ip ie ae 3 
ud. 


Vol. IX, No. 6.} The Polyzoa of the Lake of Tiberias. 227 
[NV.8.j 


generally to be the case that if the walls of a zooecium contain- 
ing statoblasts persist after the polypide has degenerated, they 
tend to become specialized in this way. 


Plumatella auricomis, sp. nov. 


Colony smail, recumbent, with short horizontal branches 
closely pressed together. 

Zooecia short, stout, L-shaped, cylindrical, with no trace of 
a dorsal keel or r furrow; ectocyst greatly thickened, colourless, 
hyaline, stiff and neither contractile nor seca of being thrown 
into furrows by the retraction of the pol 

Polypide slender, deeply pigmented, the ited katy canal 
being of a deep o range-brown, darker on the stomach than 


tentacles pale golden yellow, long, slender, comparatively few 

in number ; velum at their base very narrow. 
Statoblasts. No free statoblasts were observed. One colony 
contained a single fixed statoblast, which is narrowly oval, its 
t 


Habitat.—Lake of Tiberias, Palestin 

Type.—Z. KE. V. No. +, Ind. ae 

Unfortunately the material at my disposal is so scanty 
and so imperfect that I am unable to give a fuller description 
or an adequate figure. Only two colonies were found, and one 
of them was not observed until it had been plunged i in spirit. 
The other was carefully narcotized and fixed, but I find on re- 
examining it after some months se it is not in much better 
condition than the other. The species, however, is distin- 
guished from all others that have ae described by two im- 
portant characters, the thick, hyaline, stiff ectocyst without 
a dorsal keel furrow and the yellow colour of the lophophore. 
The latter is a feature, so fanaa I am aware, unique in the 
Polyz zoa. The ectocyst is much thicker than in Plumatella 
javanica and differs from that of P. punctata in not being soft 
and contractile. It shrivels greatly in spirit. My description 
is based mainly on field notes. 

Both colonies were dredged in between 6 and 8 metres of 
water in the channel of the R. Jordan as it flows through the 
south cal of the lake between the village of Semakh and its 
exit, and both were attached to shells of Unio terminalis. 

e, the larger of the two, was growing at one end of one shell 
of a living mollusc, just outside the siphonal aperture; the 
other, which contained the only statoblast seen, was fixed to 


228 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [June, 1913] 


that can be trusted, and I cannot be sure of specific identity in 
this case. 


} 
I have to thank Dr. J. H. Ashworth for seeing the plate 
that illustrates this paper, as well as other plates in the series, 


through thé press. The figures have been drawn by Babu A. C. 
Chowdary with his usual skill. 


Prate VII, figs. 1 and 2. 


Fig. 2.—Plumatella auricomis: fixed statoblast, x 75. 


Jour. As. Soc. Beng, Vol IX, 1913. 


AC-Chowdhary, del 


POLYZOA AND SPONGE—LARVA FROM GALILEE. 


Plate VII. 


Bemrose, Colla, Derby 


30. A Note on Rotifers from Galilee. 
By C. F. Rovussgrer, F.R.MS. 


Communicated by Dr. N. ANNANDALE. 


[During my visit to Galilee, in October, 1912, I made no 
special attempt to collect Rotifera, but specimens of several 
Species have been found by Mr. Rousselet in a tow-netting from 
the surface of the Lake of Tiberias, and two others have 
appeared in large numbers in a bowl of water containing mud 
from the bed of the little pool known as Birket Meskana and 
situated half way between Tiberias and Nazareth. As the num- 
ber of rotifers known from Syria and Palestine is small, a list 
of these species is here published.—N. Annandale.]. 


A. SPECIES TAKEN NEAR THE SURFACE OF THE LAKE 
TIBERIAS. 


1. Brachionus militaris, Ehrenberg. [Abundant on the 
surface of the lake both by day and night throughout the 
greater part of October, 1912.—N. A. 

2. Asplanchna brightwellii, Gosse. A few specimens. 

. Anuraea valga Ehrenberg. One specimen in the 
stomach of Asplanchna. 
onochilus dossuarius, Hudson. Two specimens. 

Brachionus militaris does not occur in England, but is not 
uncommon in Germany, China, Ceylon, 8. Africa, N. America, 
S. America, and Canada. 

Asplanchna brightwellii is common in England. : 

A few Bdelloid Rotifers, fully contracted and not identi- 
fiable, were also found in the tow-netting. 


B. Sprcrrs REARED IN CALCUTTA FROM DRIED MUD. 


[A handful of dried mud from the bed of the Birket Mes- 
kana, then completely dry, was taken on October 10th es 
brought to Calcutta, where, on November 27th, it was placed in 
alarge glass bowl of filtered water. After an interval of ee 
weeks a considerable number of small Entomostraca appeare 


230 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (June, 1913.] 


Rotifera disappeared after a few weeks and neither has since 
(in se Ses re-appeared. Mr. Rousselet has sent the following note 
on them A.] 


Oecistes socialis, Weber. 


This species was first discovered by Dr. Weber in the 
neighbourhood of Geneva and described by him in his paper 
‘*Rotateurs des Environs de Genéve,’’ Arch. de Biologie 1888, 
and afterwards he | a better and fuller account in his greater 

work, ‘‘ Les Rotateurs du Bassin du Léman,’’ Revue Suisse de 
Zoologie V, 1898. 

e animals secrete gelatinous tubes which become agglo- 
merated into a rounded gelatinous ball as much as 5 mm. in 
diameter and containing thousands of individuals. In recent 
years the species has also been found by Dr. de Beauchamp in 
the neighbourhood of Paris (in 1901), and John Shephard found 
it in Victoria, Australia, and gave it the name of Lacinularia 
elongata (1896). In England I have obtained it once from 
Dundee. 

The species is however a rare one, not often seen. 


Limnias ceratophyili, Schrank. 


This is a well-known and fairly common Rhizote or fixed, 
tube-dwelling Rotifer, found in many parts of the world. 
When very abundant and under favourable food conditions, the 
young frequently attach themselves and fix their tubes to the 
parents in a very irregular fashion. All particulars as to their 
anatomy will be found in Hudson and Gosse’s monograph. 
It is a quite cosmopolitan species. 


NS PF ONS UR 


31. Entomostraca from the Lake of Tiberias. 
By Ropert Gurney. 


Communicated by Dr. N. ANNANDALE. 


The collections of Entomostraca submitted to me by Dr. 
Annandale were chiefly plankton samples from Lake Tiberias 
itself, but included also three bottles containing specimens from 
small pools near the Lake. In addition to these collections I 
have had the opportunity of examining specimens hatched 
either in Calcutta or here in England from mud taken by Dr. 
Annandale from other similar pools. 

The plankton of Lake Tiberias seems to be very uniform 
and to consist of the following species :— 

CLADOCERA. 
Diaphanosoma brachyurum, Liévin, 
Ceriodaphnia reticulata, Jurine, 


:; rigaudi, Richard, 
Bosmina longirostris var. cornuta, Jurine. 
CopEPopDa. 
Cyclops leuckarti, Claus. 


All the collections, whether taken by night or by day, con- 
tained an abundance of Copepods, nearly all of them immature. 
The few mature specimens found were all of the one species, 
C. leuckarti. 

The Cladocera seem to show some diurnal migration, since 
they are far more numerous in the night collections than in 
those taken during the day. The latter consist almost entirely 
of immature Copepods. 

The plankton taken by Dr. Annandale in October scarcely 
differs from that described by Dr. Barrois, who visited the La e 
in May.!_ He found precisely the same species, with the addi- 
tion of Daphnia lumholtzi, which he notes is confined to the 
deeper waters and was only once found at the surface. He 
also found the majority of the Cyclops of the plankton to be 
immature. 

The other collections made by Dr. Annandale were as 
follows :— 

(1) Ain-et-Tineh. Townetting in a small pool full of 
Ranunculaceous water-weeds. 7-x-12. 

Cyclops serrulatus, Fischer. 

A few ostracod shells. _ 


Se 


1 Barrois, Rev. biol Nord France, VI, 1894, p. 284. 


232 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. {June, 1913.] 


(2) ),Wad-es-Semakh. Small dirty a oe the shore of the 
Lake ; no Phanerogamic vegetation. 
Macrothrix laticornis, Jurine. 
Cyclops macrurus 
(3) Townetting in the Octagonal Pool at et-Tabghah. 
7-x-12. Bosmina longirostris. A few dried, shrunken 
specimens. 


The following species were hatched from mud taken from 

a dried pool called Birket Meskana in the hills between 
Tiberias and Nazareth 
PHYLLOPODA. 

Estheria gihoni, Baird. 
CLADOOERA. 

Daphnia similis, Baird. 
CoPEPopA. 

Diaptomus similis, Baird. 
OstRacoDA. 

Cyprinotus dentatomarginatus, Baird. 

ina, Brady. 

Eucypris virens, Jurine. 

Cypris pubera, Miiller. var. 

Ilyocypris gibba, Ramdohr. 


ite all the specimens hatched from this mud and sub- 


a 


32. On the Internal Anatomy of the Blind Prawn of 
Galilee (Typhilocaris galilea Calman). 


By EKENDRANATH GHOsH. 


(Plates XV—XVI.) 


Specimens were fixed in picro-formol-acetic solution and pre- 
served in 90% alcohol. In one aslit had been made at the base 
of the two ocular peduncles to allow the fixative to penetrate. 
They were in excellent condition for histological investigation. 

e anatomy of the present animal resembles that of 
the type-genus (Palaemon) of the same family in most of its 
salient features. Consequently, it has been considered best to 
compare the anatomy of these two genera, taking to represent 
the latter the common freshwater prawn (P. carcinus) available 
in Calcutta. 


Digest 
differs from that of Palaemon in a few minor points only. 


corresponds to a tongue-shaped flap of integument in the 
cavity of the cardiac chamber (anterior division) overlying the 
Pala 


234 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (June, 1913. 


| 
Typhlocaris. — Palaemon. 


| 
| 
} 
cast NSS ear ee eer sian lease 


. The liver is elongated, and ‘The liver is less elongated, 
extends from behind the and does not extend beyond 
oesophagus beneath the the cephalothorax. 
endosternite to the first 
abdominal segment. 

. There is around hump-like The hump is less prominent. 
prominence on the dorsa 
aspect situated above the 
attachments of the second — 
and third peraeopods. 


—_ 


bo 


3. Behind the hump, the liver The liver slopes backwards and 
extends to the first abdo- =a _ little downwards behind 
minalsegment inthe form — the hump and terminates In 
of a prominent beak-like a blunt end with a median 
process, being separated § groove on the postero-ven- 


| tral aspect. 


dle-shaped concavity on 
the dorsal aspect. 


In both genera the intestine presents a bulbous swelling 
just before it ends in the anus. 

Vascular system, The pericardiumis triangular in shape, 
being a little narrower than that of Palaemon. It occupies 4 
little less than the posterior half of the cephalothorax, while in 
Palaemon it extends over a little more than the posterior third 
of the length. 

The heart occupies the middle of the pericardial chamber. 
The dorsal surface presents a ridge in the middle line. The 


the sides. There seem to be two pairs of ostea, both placed on 
the dorsal surface of the heart. These correspond to the 


the lateral wall of the pericardi 


Vol. IX, No. 6.] The Blind Prawn of Galilee. 235 
[NV.8.] 


the antennary artery and passing outwards and a little for- 
wards to be attached to the pericardial wall on its ventro- 
lateral aspect. 

he origin and distribution of the main arteries in 7'yphlo- 
carts agree closely with that in Palaemon, with the following 


exceptions :— 


Typhlocaris. | Palaemon. 


| 
1. Ophthalmic Well doves Very poorly deve- 
artery. traced quite easily to loped; scarcely to be 
the base of the ocular traced beyond the 
| peduncles where it is stomach even in in- 
seen to divide into jected specimens. 
two branches. 


2. Antennary © Same in both. 
artery. 
3. Hepatic .. Arise from the lat- | Arise from the ex- 
arteries. eral aspect of the ven- treme anterior end o 
| tral surface at its the ventral surface 
‘posterior border. just behind the apex 
and closer to the mid- 
| : 
die line 
4. Dorsal... | Same in both. 
abdominal — 
artery. 


| 


e muscular strand, described as the gastro-cardiac 

muscle in Palaemon (3), is also present in T'yphlocaris, 
eproductive system. Male. The testis is quite differ- 
ent in shape from that of Palaemon. The two testis lie close 
to each other so as to form a single pentagonal mass lying on 
the dorsal surface of the liver and projecting forwards from 
beneath the heart. Anteriorly the mass seems to be connected 
with the dorsal renal sac (2) lying over the stomach. The vas 


emale. The ovaries, like the testes, are different in shape 
from those of Palaemon. They are placed close to each other 
80 as to form a flattened elongated triangular mass lying over 
the dorsal surface of the liver. The base of th y he 
front and is connected to a thin triangular membrane whic 


236 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [June, 1913. 


seems to be continuous with the dorsal renal sac. The mass is 
bent on itself antero-posteriorly so to form a bow-shaped body 
with the concave surface upward. The dorsal surface of the 
organs is connected with the floor of the pericardium, the heart 
lying in the concavity of the organs. 

e oviduct arises from the outer side of each ovary on 
the dorsal aspect at the junction of the anterior one-third and 
posterior two-thirds of its length. It passes outwards and 
downwards over the surface of the liver to the genital aperture 
placed at the base of the third peraeopod. 

The difference between the genital organs of the two genera 
may be tabulated as follows :— 


Typhlocaris. Palaemon. 


1. Testes ..| A single compact! ‘Two narrow elonga- 


a little in front of the ing from behind the 
er. tomach to the first 

| abdominal segment. 
2. Vas deferens The coils placed) The coils less close 
just behind the testes | and placed on the 
forming a compact outer side of the testes 
“mass. quite separate from it. 
3. Ovaries ., | The ovaries form a The ovaries are 
| Compact triangular elongated _ fusiform 
‘mass with the base bodies placed close to 

forwards. | each other. 


_ Nervous system. The nervous system of I'yphlocaris 
agrees closely with that of Palaemon except in a few details 
corresponding to the degenerate condition of the eyes. The 
differences may be noted in the following table :-— 


Vol. IX, No. 6.] The Blind Prawn of Galilee. 237 
[N.8.] 


Typhlocaris. : Palaemon., 


Cerebral ganglia. | Oval in habe Relatively smaller 
placed close to each | and placed outside the 
other justinside the ocular peduncles in- 
side a hollow semi- 


of. 


ture place e- 


Nerves from the) 
cerebral gang. 
ia— 


| 


(1) Optic nerve | A fine nerve. | A stout nerve. 
(2) Thenerveto Astout nerve. — Finer than (1). 
the first | 


| 

ntenna : 

(3) Thenerveto. Intermediate in| Of the same size as 
the second! thickness between | (2). 
antenna | (1) and (2). | 


Structure of the ocular peduncle.—There is no trace exter- 
nally of visual structure in the ocular peduncles. 
Minute structure.—The ocular peduncle consists of the 
following layers, from without inwards :— 
(1) A thick layer of cuticle, the outer portion of which is 
mogeneous, and chitinous in structure, while the 
inner portion is finely laminated. The cuticle is 
thicker at the sides than towards the tip. 
(2) The core of the peduncle consists of a mass of cells 
hi 


more compact in arrangement than those placed 
towards the centre. The cells are separated from 
one another in many places by small irregu 


is seen in the sections. F. H. Pike (4) has a. 
a similar condition in the degenerate eyes of 


238 


Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [June, 1918. 


monetes eigenmanni, Hay. In this species, however, 
he found a trace of nerve fibres which have not 
been found in the present animal. 


LITERATURE. 


Fic. 


i. 


2 
3. 
4 


Calman, W. T., Trans. Linn. Soc., Zool. (2) XI, p. 98, 
1909. 


Calman, W. T., ‘‘ Crustacea,’ in Lankester’s Text-book 
of Zoo 


ogy. 
panes = E., Introduction to Biology for Indian Stu- 
den 


Pike, Pr. H. , Degenerated eyes of ‘‘ Palaemonetes eiyen- 
manni,’? Hay. Mar. Biol. Lab. Bull., Woods Holl, 
Mass. il, 1906 (pp. 267-276). 


EXPLANATION OF PLATES XV-XVI. 
Typhlocaris galilea, Calman. 


1.—Dorsal view of the cephalothorax, showing the 
heart, x 4; a, ophthalmic artery; 5, heart; ¢, 
one of the anterior pair of ostea; d@, one of the 
posterior pair of ostea; ¢, attachment of mandi- 


bular mu 
oe view of heart x 4; a, origin & = hepatic 
ery; 0, origin of the ‘abdominal a 
3. Doma view of the cephalothorax, ate  peiovel of 
the heart,x 4; a, stomach; 6, mandibular mus- 
cle; c, position of the dorsal renal sac; d,g, liver; 


iu 
5.—Side view of the ovary, x 4, 
6.—-Sid . view of Gauatotiane: x4; a, liver; 8, sto- 


{Mile e genital organ, x 4; a, testes ; b, vas deferens. 
8.—Liver (6) and stomach (a), x 
9. 2 Fongieadina section of the untetior portion of the 
iver,x 5; a, stomach; b, intestine; c, livers 4; 
pyloric chamber of the stomach. 
10.—Side eat of the oo” x 6; a, pyloric chamber ; 
e ardiac chamber ; , 0680} hagus. 
—View of a floor of the ete chamber from above, 
a, guiding ridge. 


Pee guiding odes separated, x 6; a, hastate plate; 
; guiding ridge 


Plate XV. 


Journ. As.Soc. Beng., Vol.IX,1913. 


EN Ghosh, del. A. Chowdhary, lith. 
ANATOMY OF TYPHLOCARIS. 


Journ.As.Soc .Beng.,Vol. IX,1913. 


meaecrimaer yee OF TYPHLOCARI 


Plate XVI. 


—— ae 


13. 


A. Chowdhary, lith. 
3S. 


Vol. 


IX, No. 6.] The Blind Prawn of Galilee, 239 
[V 8.] 


. 13.—Transverse section = the pyloric chamber, x 8; a, 


infra-pyloric pla 
14,—A portion of the ee x 4; a, the posterior end. 
15.—Nervous system (anterior portion) x 4; a, endoster- 


nite; —— hagus; ¢, renal gland; d, ocular 
8; e, thoracic ganglionic m 
16.—Anterior por of the nervous syste 


c, optic nerve; d, nerve to the second antenna; 
€, post-oesophageal loop; /, circum-oesophageal 
ommissure 
17. Bestitth of the ocular peduncle, x 150; a, cuticle; b, 
optic ganglion. 


33. The Crustacea Decapoda of the Lake of Tiberias.’ 


By N. Annanpatez, D.So., F.A.S.B., and Srantey Kemp, 
B.A., F.A.S.B. 


(Plates XII—XIV.) 


Only three species of Crustacea Decapoda have been 
found in the Lake of Tiberias and its immediate vicinity, and 
it is most improbable that any addition will be made to this 
number. 

Two of the three species, namely Atyaephyra desmaresti 
and Potamon potamios, have already been discussed by Barrois * 
in his ‘‘ Liste des Décapodes fluviatiles recueillis en Syrie,’’ 
while the third (T'yphlocaris galilea), by far the most interest- 
ing of the three, was described by Dr. Calman as recently as 
1909. 


Atyaephyra desmaresti has a wide circum-Mediterranean 
distribution and also occurs in some a jacent countries not 
actually on this sea-board; the range of Potamon potamios is 
apparently restricted to the Jordan Valley, lower Egypt and 
the Island of Cyprus, while Typhlocaris galilea is endemic in 
one small pool near the shores of the lake, into which there 
is no evidence that it ever penetrates. 

The last species is of peculiar interest both from a taxo- 
nomic and from a biological point of view, for not only is it 
isolated by its structural characters from all other freshwater 
or marine decapods, but it is apparently modified for a sub- 
terranean existence. The fact that the animal is found living 
in an open and well-lighted pool is, therefore, very strange. We 
may hazard the suggestion that the seismic movements which 


Some change in its mode of life, and that it has been forced 
thereby to abandon the environment by which its special 
modifications were originally induce 
The light cast by the Decapoda on the origin of the fauna 
of the Lake of Tiberias is not a strong one. The onl 
prawn actually found in the lake is essentially a ‘‘ Mediterra- 
1 Published by permission of the Trustees of the Indian Museum. 
® Barrois, Rév. biol. Nord France, V, p. 125 (1892). 


242 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [June, 1918. 


species, whereas the crab has a more restricted dis- 
einen and would seem to indicate an Egyptian, thoug 
not an Ethiopian, affinity. It is noteworthy, however, that, 
for some reason very difficult to explain, it seems to be a gene- 
ral rule that the distribution of freshwater crabs is more 
restricted than that of freshwater prawns; T'yphlocaris is of 
course an exception to this rule, as it also is to others 


Family ATYIDAE, 
Atyaephyra desmaresti (Millet). 
1832. Hippolyte desmaresiii, Millet, Ann. Sci. nat., XXV, p. 


t= o 

1837. ere desmarestii, H. Milne-Edwards, Hist. nat. 
Crust., II, p. 376. 

1843, Carina desmaresi Joly, Ann. Sci. nat., Zool., (2), XIX, 


Pp. 

1849. “Caridina Jemisninie Lucas, Hist. nat. Anim. Explor. 

Igérie, Zool., I, p. 40, pl. iv, fig. 

1863. = Oaetaban desmarestii. Heller, See siidlich. Europ., p- 
238, pl. viii, ‘ 

1366. Atyaephyra rosiana, Co Desc. esp. nov. 

rust. Arachn , Lisboa, p. 6, pl. 1 
1868. Caridina iE rbenlc v. Martens, ah, f. Naturgesch., 
50. 


> p- 
1879. Atyaephyra rosiana, Kingsley, Proc. Acad. Sci. Philadel- 
. 415. 


1880, Donia desmaresti, Bose. Stiid. over Decap. Slaegtsk., 
p. 60, pl. i, fig. 26; pl. ii, fig. 47; iii, figs. 82, 106; pl. v, 
Ss. 151, 163. 
1880. Caridina desmarestii, Stossich, Boll. Soc. Adriat. Sci. 
nat., Trieste, p. 211. 
1888, Caridina desmarestii, Pelseneer, Bull. Mus. Belg., IV, 


1390" S Hakicntiding desmarestii, Ortmann, Zool. Jahrb., Syst., 


> Pp. 
1891. Hemicaridina desmarestii, Thallwitz, Abbandl. Ber. Zool. 
resden, No. 3, p. 27. 
1892. maces desmarestit, Barrois, Rév. biol. Nord 
rance, V, p. 126, figs. 1-3, . 
1895. Atyaephyra hasty Ortmann, Proc. Acad. Sci. 
Philadelphia for 1894, p. 401 
1896. Atyaephyra desmaresti , Picquenard, Bull. Soc. Sci. et 
Medic. de l’Quest, Rennes, p. 45. 
1903. Aigaephara desmaresti, Bouvier, Bull. Soc. Ent. France, 
p. 2 


1905. dig we hae Bouvier, Bull. Sci. France et 
Belg., XXXIX, p 


Vol. os And 6.] Crustacea Decapoda of the L. of Tiberias, 243 
LW.S.] 


1905. Atyaephyra desmarestii, Brézek, Sitz-ber. Bohm. Ges. 
iss., Prag, No. i, p. 1. 
1905. Atyaephyra desmarestii, Chaignon, Bull. Soc. Autun, 
XVII, p. 80. 


This little prawn is represented in the collection before us 
by numerous specimens, which do not, so far as one is able to 
judge from published descriptions, differ in any constant 

. Mo 


in length; the largest ovigerous female is only 19 mm. long and 
some are considerably smaller. The formula of the rostral 
teeth varies considerably, the extremes being represented by 
the following figures us. To some extent, however, varia- 
tion in this respect is due to size and therefore, probably, to 
age, for very small individuals always have a small number of 
teeth both above and below. Of the dorsal teeth, from 1 to 4 
are situated on the carapace behind the orbital notch; asa rule, 
only 2 or 3 occur in this position, the number being rather 
lower than that usually found. . 
The size of the eggs is another variable character. In one 
female eyed eggs were 627 » long by 443 ;. in greatest trans- 
verse diameter; in another in which they were in a somewhat 
mo vanced stage of development, the corresponding 
measurements were 596 » and 394 »; in all cases they had a 
very regular oval contour. : 
iving individuals were sometimes hyaline and practically 
colourless, having only a few scattered pigment-cells on the 
ody and appendages; others were so deeply pigmented as to 
be almost black, while yet others had their pigment distributed 
in regular transverse stripes of a blackish colour on the thorax, 
abdomen and limbs. A few were noticed in which the muscles of 
the body had a distinct yellow tinge and were much 
transparent than usual. Although no very small individuals 
were seen which were deeply pigmented, some ovigerous 


a t 
rm Barrois’s statement as to the sexual differences that 
exist in the third and fourth legs of this species. His figures 
agree well with our own observations. : sith - 
Egg-bearing females were not common in October soically 
rendered probable that the breeding season was then praciica®’ 4 
over by the fact that most of the eggs observed were in @ 


244 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [June, 1913. 


advanced state of development and that most of the females 
had apparently hatched their brood. 

The larva of Atyaephyra was described by Joly in 1843 
(loc. cit.) and we have little to add to his observations, which 
are fully illustrated by good figures. Indeed, larvae from the 
neighbourhood of Tiberias agree with these in every respect, 
except that their tails are more distinctly bilobed and that 
their rostra are more delicate and less prominent. He gives an 
excellent description of the appendages, which closely resemble 
those of the larvae of Caridina wyckii (=nilotica) as described 
by Von Daday ! and of Xiphocaridina compressa as described by 
Ishikawa.? The Tanganyika Atyid larvae described by G. 0. 
Sars* and attributed by him with a query to the genera 
Limnocaridina and Atyella are apparently hatched at a some- 
what earlier stage. 

Atyaephyra desmaresti occurs all round the Mediterranean, 
in N. Africa as well as in Europe. It has been recorded from 
‘Portugal and appears to be widely distributed in France, but 
is not included by Keilhack + among the German freshwater 
Malacostraca. 

In the Lake of Tiberias it is scarce. Barrois®, however, 
obtained a few specimens from a depth of 5 to 8 metres at 
the south end, probably in the channel of the River Jordan 
in which there are submerged beds of Vallisneria. In the 


immediate vicinity of the lake it is, as Barrois states, ex- 


the banks, while in the others it was only noticed among water- 
weeds, especially, but not exclusively, Ranunculus aquatilis. 


ently one or other of the mouth-parts has the power of 


, won Daday, Zool. Jahrb. Anat., XXIV, p. 239 (1907). 
1885) Chiyomatsu Ishikawa, Quart. Journ. Mier. Sci., XXV, p. 391 
8 Sars, Proc. Zool. Soc., London, I, p. 426, pls. vii, lviii (1912). 
* Keilhack, in Brauer’s Wisswanerfatind Deutachiands, XI, Malacos- 
traca, ete. (1909). i 
* Rév. biol Nord France, VI, pp. 280, 281 (1894). 


Vol. a 0. 6.] Crustacea Decapoda of the L. of Tiberias. 245 
YS] 


Family PALAEMONIDAE, 
Subfamily TYPHLOCARIDINAR. 
Typhlocaris galilea, Calman. 
(Plates XII, XIII.) 
1909. T'yphlocaris galilea, Calman, Trans. Linn. Soc., Zool (2), 
XI 93, pl. xix. 


? 


e are in entire agreement. The differential characters of the 

Typhlocaridinae may be briefly stated as follows :— 

The small and feebly developed rostrum. 

The palpless mandible. - 

The rudimentary condition of the additional ramus of 
the outer antennuJar flagellum. 

The undivided distal endite of the maxilla. 

The presence of a pair of longitudinal suture lines 
on the carapace, recalling those found in certain 
Reptantia and Penaeidae. 


In the first of these characters, the subfamily agrees with 
some Pontoniinae and Pa'aemoninae; in the second with all 
members of that subfamily and with some Palaemoninae; in 
the third with the Palaemoninae more than any other subfamily. 
In the fourth and fifth characters T'yphlocaris differs, so far as 
is known, from all other Palaemonidae. 

As 


CO DS 


es 


we are inclined to regard the resemblance between them 
as convergent rather than of genetic origin. : 

It is difficult to say in all cases what are the functions of 
the common characteristics, but it is noteworthy that those 
genera of Pontoniinae (Pontonia, Conchodytes and Typton), in 
which the rostrum is reduced, are, at any rate in most cases, 
of semi-parasitic or symbiotic habits and live in enclosed spaces. 
Nothing is known of the mode of life of the two species 
Euryrhynchus yet described, except that they have been found 
m wells, into which it is probable that they have made their 
way from some subterranean reservoir. T'yphlocaris galilea, as 


246 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [June, 1913. 


is shown below, moves about freely in an open but well-like 
pool fed by a subterranean spring and not in direct communi- 
cation with any large mass of water above ground. It is prob- 
able therefore that Huryrhynchus resembles it in bionomics. 

Dr. Calman’s excellent account of the species leaves little to 
be said as regards its external characters, while Mr. Ekendra- 
nath Ghosh has, in the preceding paper of this series, described 
its internal anatomy in detail. 

e specimens before us indicate that the second peraeo- 
pod of the male mentioned by Calman, in which tbe immovable 
tinger is shorter than the dactylus, is, as he suggests, abnormal; 
but our specimens also show that there is normally a very 
ae ay dissimilarity between the two large chelae of the male 

g. A). 
In the female the two are similar in form, though not 
always equal (fig. B) and agree with Calman’s fig. 11, except that 
they are a little more slender and longer. In the leg of this 


though 
strikingl 
and not much more than half as long as the palm. The 


palm is distinctly flattened and its breadth is to its thickness 
as 10} to 7. The 


a th. The immobile finger is a little shorter than the dac- 
tylus and it i 


is obsolete. 
Dr, Ca. 
male specimen recently seen by him in which the same 


Vol. IX, No. 6.] Crustacea Decapoda of the L. of Tiberias. 247 
[N.S.] 


secondary sexual character is apparent. We have ourselves 
amined four males and three females. 

The colour in life is of a uniform dead white, neither 
opaque nor transparent but rather translucent, resembling that 
of paraffin wax or, more accurately, that of the opalescent 
glass of which lamp-shades are often made. There is no trace 
of external pigmentation ; the partial opacity is inherent in the 
muscles, the integument being perfectly transparent. The 
stomach and the liver can be detected externally as dark 
irregular masses. 


dead matter to aid in concealing the animal, which is a most 
conspicuous object in its natural surroundings. 

So far as it is possible to ascertain from the most careful 
enquiries on the spot, 7'yphlocaris is only found in the octagonal 
pool at et-Tabghah called Birket ‘Ali-ed-Dhaher, in which it has 
long been known to the Bedouins of the district as ,4¥ Y yi! 
or ‘‘ white scorpion.’? The pool (pl. XIII) has recently been 
described in this Journal and the water analysed!; all that we 
need say here is that it is a small artificial pool contain- 
ing from six to ten feet of brackish and sulphurous water and 
about 58 metres in circumference; that it now has no direct 
communication with the Lake of Tiberias, close to the shore of 


which it is situated, but that a connection of a sort, perhaps 


bd 


artificial, existed in historic times. It must be fed by a subter- 


was rooted at the edge, but sent out long floating stems. NO 
other phanerogamic water-plants occurred and the fauna, 


one species of fish (Discognathus lamia rufus, Heckel) =a two 
of Mollusca? (Bithinella spp. nov.) were seen and no examples fe 
Atyaephyra could be discovered, notwithstanding a very care 
examination of the floating grass. 

n its movements T'yphlocaris closely resembles phe gets 
but is rather more sluggish than any Indian species 0 of 
genus with which we are acquainted. Asa rule it gehen 
on the bottom, partly by means of its walking legs ee a hie 
by the use of its swimmerets, the abdomen being rais - oe 
but their 


' Christie, Journ. As. Soc. Bengal, 1913, p 


, p. 25. 
2 For this determination we are indebted to Mr. H. B. Preston. 


248 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. {June, 1913. 


chief functions are to clean the other appendages, including the 
swimmerets, and to convey food to the mouth. Occasionally 
the animal moves forwards through the water by means of the 
swimmerets alone, the fore parts then being raised higher than 
the abdomen. It was not, however, observed to approach the 


species of Palaemon. The manceuvre is executed in the usual 
manner, that is to say by suddenly bending the telson towards 
the base of the thorax. 

So long as the prawn is moving either backwards or forwards, 
the claws are held with the basal segments projecting out from 
the body almost at right angles, but with the carpus and chela 
directed forwards. They have the appearance of protecting 
the anterior part of the body and tosome extent feeling the way. 
The chief part in testing the surface in forward progression is, 
however, played by the outer maxillipeds (pl. XII, fig. 2), with 
which Typhlocaris constantly taps the ground, as does Palaemon. 
The antenna is, as a rule, held directed outwards and often con- 
siderably upwards, while the rami of the antennules are spread 
out so as to cover as large an area as possible. At periods, 
when the animal is at rest, they are held still, but, as a rule, 
they are infrequent motion. It was observed that a movement 
in the water near the prawn sometimes, but not always, caused 
it to dart away. 

Typhlocaris is evidently timid in disposition and, unless en- 


Potamon or Discognathus attacks it. Several of the specimens 
obtained, however, have lost and were regenerating various 
3. 


Y Means: of ite first peraeopods and devour them; but 
tected 


No observations were made whi i 2 
: ch cast any light on the 
— of the sutures in the carapace ; but Btn note that 
t Pere saepets fits tightly round the bases of the legs and thus 
probably assists in respiration by keeping mud from entering 


Vol. hes 6.] Crustacea Decapoda of the L. of Tiberias. 249 
[V.S. 


the gill-chamber. As Dr. Calman has pointed out, the margins 
of the carapace are membranous; this feature, combined with 
the horizontal hinge, may well be useful in the direction 
indicated. 

No direct evidence could be obtained that T'yphlocaris is 
subterranean in habits: it is certainly not exclusively nocturnal. 
As nothing is known of the structure of the pool in which the 
animal lives, it is impossible to say whether it can retire under- 
ground; it may do so periodically to breed or for other pur- 
poses, and one of the monks who live at et-Tabghah on one 
occasion searched for specimens for some months without. being 
able to obtain them. No details, however, are available as to 
the methods he adopted. No specimens were seen by Annan- 

ale on a visit paid to the pool early in the morning, although 


the bottom or forming part of the walls. They frequently 
wandered under other stones and sometimes emerged again 


the fairly strong tight that reached and shone through the clear 
water practically without obstruction. An individual living in 


under natural conditions or in captivity, positively so. 
None of the specimens obtained were actually breeding at 
the time they were killed, but the condition of their gonads 
would suggest that the breeding season was approaching. 
he photographs reproduced on plate XII were taken at 
Tiberias by the Rev. J. Cohen of that town under the supervi- 
sion of one of us. We have to thank him for his courteous 
assistance in the matter. 


Family POTAMONIDAE. 
Potamon (Potamon) potamios (Olivier), Rathbun. 
(Plate XIV, fig. 1). 


£1804. Cancer potamios, Olivier (partim), Voy. Empir. Oth., 
IV, p. 240, atlas, pt. 2, pl. xxx, fig. 2. 


250 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [June, 1913. 
1893. Telphusa fluviatilis, Barrois, Rév. biol. Nord France, V, 
125 


1904. Potumon potamios, Rathbun, Mem. Mus. Hist. Nat. 
(Paris), (4), VI, p. 257. 


the crab accepted by Miss Rathbun as Potamon potamios prob- 
5 is often used some- 


: e have no reason to 
think that the species, as defined by Miss Rathbun, has been 
found within the limits of Syria proper, for Djerach, the only 
‘Syrian ’ locality from which P. potamios is definitely recorded, 
lies near the R. Jabbok in Eastern Palestine considerably south 
of the Lake of Tiberias. Both Miss Rathbun (loc. cit.) and Col. 


opportunity to discuss it in some detail, having good series of 
specimens of most of the forms before us. 
group, as we conceive it, consists of only two species, 
otamon potamios (Olivier), Rathbun, and P. fluviatile (or edule) 
(Latreille), the latter being divided into five local races: 
fluviatile (s.8.); setiger, Rathbun; ibericum, Marschall de Bieber- 
stein; gedrosianum, Aleock, and monticola, Wood-Mason. The 
only one of these forms of which we have not seen specimens is 


monticola from the followinc key, but have figured one of the 
pd som also the only specimen from the Khasi Hills in plate 
a. gs. 6 and 5, respectively. It will be noticed.in these 
‘ eee that the eyes are considerably larger and _ stouter 
than jn P. potamios or in any of the western races of P.fluviatile. 


1 Ree. Ind. Mus., V, p. 258 (1910). 


‘ 


Vol. IX, No. 6.] Crustacea Decapoda of the L. of Tiberias. 251 
[N.S.] 


KEY TO THE CRABS OF THE Poltamon potamios GROUP. 


I. Epigastric crests only a little in advance of post- 
orbitals and parallel to them; post-orbitals 


pted 
or angulate at anterior end of cervical groove P. potamios. 
II. Epigastric crests usually well in advance of post- 


s 
tals sinuous, convex forwards or slanti dis- 
tinetly interr i aa ane get at anterior 
end of cervical groo .. P. fluviatile, s.l. 


Races of P. fluviatile. 
A. Length of carapace nearly seven-eighths its 
a nt oben of last leg less than twice 
bro fluviatile. 
B. Genii of ¢ crea usually less = five-sixths 
th bre adth; p propodus od reg usually at 
t twice as ne as bro 
L_ Carapne setos ; A .. setiger. 
2. Carapace not ai se 
a. Middle portion of cervical groove on — 
obsolete, anterior part not v 


astric crests 
less in advance of peoe Sehteal ate .. gedrosianum. 


So far as we are aye to judge from the descriptions given 
by Miss Rathbun ‘and Dr. Pesta *, we are doubtful whether P. 


mens in the collection of the Indian Museum and oe them in 
an appendix. They may be summarised as follows:~ 

1 Mem, Mus. Hist. Nat., Pars (4), VI, p. 258. ae 3, pl. ix, fig. 2. 
; o~ Ann. k. k. naturhist. Hof mus., Vienna, XXVII, p. 27. text-fig.12. 


8 Cat. Ind. Decap., Crust. I, fase. 2, Potamonidae, pp. 21-23, figs. 
1, 37. 1910, 


252 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [June, 1913. 


CARAPACE, PROPODUS oF 5TH | 


LENGTH + BREADTH, LEG, BREADTH + | - 
x 100. LENGTH x 100. ef 
- i © 
5 Sey See aE ARERR 
. | g . g 3 
5 PSE & 3 e 
pore ete q eB ia 
| ied head a fr S * : 
ont Oo | 3s om oO S ° 
a | ee ee eee ee 
Potamon potamios | 794 80-1 | 821) 441 | 51°68 | 55-0] 7 
| | 
>, fluviatile fluviatile.. 36-0 87-0 | 88-1 | 43-2) 46-1 | 49:2] 6 
| | | | 
» sy Dericum ..) 78-2) 81-7 | 860 | 48:8 53-4 | 59-0 | 18 
| | 
» 5, gedrostanum | 754 819) 843] 465 | 53:5 | 58-4 16 
= PEERS EST | ; 


From this table it would seem that in their proportions, 


Egypt and of the valleys of the Jordan and its tributaries; it 


possibly the Eastern Himalayas and the Khasi Hills in Assam. 
In Northern Africa it is found in 
i 


Race fluviatile, 
Italy, Greece, Morocco, Algiers, Tunis, the Sahara. 

Race ibericum, 
The Crimea. the Caspian Sea, Asia Minor, Northern Syria, 
Persia, Afghanistan and the Jhelum Valley in N. W- 
India. 

Race setiger, 
Northern Syria, Mesopotamia. 


Vol. IX, No. 6.] Crustacea Decapoda of the L. of Tiberias. 253 
[N.S.] 


Race gedrosianum, 
Seistan, Baluchistan, Peshawar and the Punjab Salt 
Range. 


Race (?) monticola, 
Eastern Himalayas and (?) the Khasi Hills, Assam. 


Potamon potamios is extremely common round the edge of 
the Lake of Tiberias and the neighbouring springs, inhabiting 
burrows just above the water-line and thence wandering both 
into the water and on to dry land in search of food. A 
as the first rains of the winter season fall (in 1912 this was on 
October 16th), its landward expeditions are greatly extended. 

ear Tiberias, after rain had fallen, it was noticed in consi- 


passing animals. The food is evidently of a very varied nature. 
Large individuals were observed eating dead fish in the lake; 
others were attracted to (and captured by) a piece of tomato 
attached to a string; a chicken-bone thrown into the spring at 
Ain-et-Tineh was seized and carried away bodily by a crab 
that appeared to issue from under a rock before the bone had 
touched the water ; half-grown individuals were watched runni 
after, seizing in their claws and devouring, large black ants! in 
the highway. ee 
At least three years must elapse before the full size is 


a 
mm. across the carapace, while the great majority of speci- 
mens measure from 30 to 40 mm. Large individuals are com- 
paratively scarce; the largest in the collection of the Indian 
seum measures 61 mm. in breadth, but some that were seen 
in the lake were probably larger. The breeding season 1s 


almost uniform olive green, only the tips of the claws and feet 


1 The large workers of Camponotus maculatus thoracicus, Fabr., v: 
fellah, Bisery: We have to ate Prof. W. M, Wheeler for identifying 
Speci : 


254 Journal oj the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [June, 1913. 


out a trace of violet. Purple individuals seemed to be more 
numerous at the end of October than at the beginning of the 
month, and both of the pair found together belonged to this type. 
It is possible that the purple colouration, which is confined 
to fully mature individuals of both sexes, is periodical. only 
being adopted at the approach of the breeding season. 


Norge on THE Poon INHABITED RY T'yphlocaris. 


One of us has recently received the following note from the 
Rev. S. H. Semple of Tiberias. It is dated July 12th, 1913. 
‘* The doubt as to the source of the abundant water-supply 


Vol. way, 6.| Crustacea Decapoda of the L. of Tiberias. 255 


APPENDIX. 


Measurement of crabs of the Potamon potamios group. 


Proponvus oF 5TH 


CARAPACE. 
R. POD. 
‘ bes pee) 

2 s ae a | S bo ‘ 
ye 13 oes 5 3 ro as 
wo - 8 oom isd PJ sa 
= | a Bey) Ss | i) oy x 
c) & Qf | _ Sa & 
= OQ le , A | 


| 
| 


a 


P. potamios— 
42-1 | 53°0 | 79°4 | 13°25| 66 498 


L. of Tiberias, sta 


35°3 | 44-2 | 799 | 11-6 | 5°75 49°6 
332 75 195 101 5°55 55-0 


| | 
iy 
! 


| 
284 | 35-3 | 805 9°25 4°95 53° 


| 


fof 
$ 
$ 
¢ | 307 | 38:2 | 800 9°65 53 
of 
$ 
reg 


270 | 340 794 87 
Bytia, =<". a | oot | 61-4 | se1 | 16:55 7-3 | 441 
| Sve ents 
P. fluviatile fluviatile— a (OP les 
Florence, se ..| o | 46-4 | 582 872 | 149 68 456 
| gt | 45-2 | 52:1 = 146 63 43-2 
| 7 | 435 | 50-1 | 868 | 132 65 492 
gy | 428 | 486 | 98-1 | 137 625 45°6 
lo | 425 494 | 860 | 13-4 63 | 470 
9 “309 | 408 es | | - 
P. fluviatile ibericum— | ae eet act 
Teheran, 4178 | ¢ 426 510 835 | 128 | 66 | 51°6 
| g | 38°6 oie 79°2 | 125 | 61 a 
| @ | 31-7 | 393 | 80-7 | 98 | 515) 52°6 
(g | 816 | 383 | 825 96 | 52 642 
Shiraz, 40% | 445 | oho | 24 | 124 | 65 | ox 
-g } 399 | 501 | 796 | 115 | 62 | 539 
—¢ i 44-6 | Fete 5°45 | 51-9 


256 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [June, 1913. 
dah Be - | Pnoropus oF 5TH 


POD. 
cee See | 
2) 2 ie) 2) 2 eee 
| § eo eax 8 2. hae 
ee ee ee ee 
P. fluviatile ibericum— | | | | | 
Syria, 1S $ (3675 433 349 105 | 57 543 
@ | 325 | 381 853 99 | 4:95 | 50-0 
ea | 31-6 | 36°75 86-0 | 95 | 49 | 516 
Afghanistan, “* one oe $ | 28:5 | 345 82-6 | 82 | 50 _ 609 
ees aa joo} — | 2. | o 
| g. | 27-6 | 33-2 831 | 75 | 4:3 57°3 
2 | 26-7 | 32:2 82-9 | 78 | 46 59:0 
Afghanistan, sis 2 | 309 | 376 | 82-2 | ke ee 
ae oy ae | oa-66 428 avo | 10-03) 55 re 
2 | 256 32°75, 78:2 | 76 | 43 es 
Transcaspia, 2 te aie bw | 48-0 "80-6 | 1225 6-3 | 514 
P. fluviatile gedrosianum— | | 
Seistan, 70> eeu. | 56-9 | 830 .157 | 8:15) 51-9 
| $ | 39°75] 48-1 | g9°6 11s | 6 2| 52°5 


| of | 38-9 | 47°3 | 82-2  13:05| 6-85) 52° 
: 5554 os 
Seistan, 0 --| 2 | 43:8 | 55:3 | 79-2 1285| 7-5 | 584 


| 


aa © | : | 
Quetta, 4655-8 | gt | 48°9 | 58-4 83°7 | 15°65 8 05) 51°9 


10 


# | 25 | 519 | s1-9 | |e 


Peshin Valley, Balu. $ 320 28:55) 83:0 9:25). 5:26| 568 


chistan, 0.) a* 52-8 | 64-25| 822 15-7 | 8 | 516 
| 2* 45-5 er 83°2 13:15| 7:1 | 540 
ae yar 44°6 | 83-7 9-2 | 50 | 543 
344 | 40-8 | 843 1025 5°75| 56-1 


ah 
’ 


* Types of the race, 


Vol. 1X, No. 6.] » Crustacea Decapoda of the L. of Tiberias. 257 
[NV.S.] 


_Proropus OF 5TH 


of | 29:15) 35:1 | 83:0 | 8-8 50 | 56:7 


CARAPACE. 
| PERAEOPOD 
: e teed ay ae 
<| 3 g3s| 418 BPs 
on 3 |&oam| bw 3 |e8s 
& 2 |8Bx| § 2 |e +x 
. | fe 6d Ff 4 | a | 
P. fluviatile gedrosianum— | 
Peshin Valley, eae 
3 5550 are 
chistan, 5 ae o | 31°6 | 37°75| 83-7 | 9-3 | 5:25) 56-5 


Salt -Range, Punjab, 


| 


| 
| 
sie a ..| 9 | 350 | 462/758! 83 | 43 | 518 
| 
Peshawur, - | ¢ | 38-4 | 483 | 82-9 11-7 | 5-9 | 50-4 
| 
6996 , : Sa ae : : 
Hallur Hahar, “" .. | @ | 25:85] 343 | 75-4 | 925) 42 | 46:5 
nt Se 


P. fluviatile monticola— 
Darjiling, es .. | &*} 18°65] 24-05 75 | 685) 3°35) 48-9 
2*| 17-0 | 20-9 | 813 | 55 | 28 bo 

| $4] 16:85| 21-4 | 78-7 63 | 2-9 | 44-4 


Khasi Hills, a! 


g¢ | 206 | 27°35] 7535 — | _ | - 


* Types of the race. 


258 - Journal of the Asiatic Society ‘of Bengal. [June, 1913.] 


EXPLANATION OF PLATES. 
Pirate XII. 


Adult female of T'yphlocaris galilea (Regd. no. *35*) photo- 
graphed from life. Slightly enlarged. 


Puate XIII. 


he pool, Birket ’Ali-ed-Dhaber, in which Typhlocaris 
galilea is foun 
Fie. 1—The vitae of the pool overgrown with gra 
-The same, from a slightly different Sat ‘of view, 
aiter being clea 
3.—The ar diatlet “of the pool and the steps leading 
the platform that juts out into the water. 
A=the ace water-level of the pool at present; 
B= the ancient outflow. 


+ de 


Puate XIV. 
The carapaces of Potamon (Potamon) potamios and its allies. 
Fic. 1.—Potamon potamios Sanen'l ecseans from Tiberias, 
Palestine (Regd. no. *431). Nat. size. 
», 2.—Potamon fluviatile hasiniits (hotell from Florence, 
Italy (Regd. no. *93*). t. size 


3.—Potamon fluviatile ea Marsch Bieb.) from near 
Shiraz, Persia (Regd. no. *°2*), Slightly reduced. 
4.—Potamon fluviatile gedrosianum, Alcock, from the 
Peshin Valley, Baluchistan (¢ type, Regd. no. *10")- 
Slightly reduced. 
5.—Potamon fluviatile monticola Agito sae t from the 
Khasi Hills, Assam (Regd. no. +937). larged. 
6.—Potamon fluviatile montools fa hates aso from Dar- 
jiling (¢ type, regd. no. +237). Enlarged 


’ 
ia 


w 
v 


“ 
“ 


’ 
id 


Note.—All the specimens figured are adult or apparently adult males. 


11. 


Plate 


» VC 


? a 
Soc. beng 


Jour. As. 


Aquaq ‘0105 ‘asouuag 


(NVWIV9 ‘VaqNnvo9 sl 


YVIOTHdAL)- aatinvys 


JO NMVUd ANINa AHL 


030uUg “4aYyo) c 


A@u 


“NYNWTVO ‘VAaTINVS SIN VIOTHdGAL JO 1LIVLIGVH AHL 


‘fqJaq '0| 0) ‘asouwag YSHVHO-G3-llv, Layyig 


030Ud WN 


Plate X11. 


Vol. IX, 1918. 


, 


Jour. As. Soc. Beng. 


Plate XIV. 


Jour. As. Soc. Beng., Vol IX, 19138. 


*fqsog °0109 ‘esosweg 


dnouyus 


SOINVYLOd NOWWLOd AHL SO SEVHD 


34. The Plays of Bhasa, and King Darsaka of 
Magadha. 
By KaAsui-Prasip JayaswaL, B.A. (Oxon). 


Dr. Geiger in the Introduction to his translation of the 
Mahavaméa! (p. xlv) rejects Dargaka of the Puranic list as 


dhist literature.2 The hero of the play is the faithful Yaugan- 


1 Pali Text Society, 1912. is 

2 i.e. the period pha beer to the Puranas by the alleged 

rei of Ajatagatru, Dargaka and Uday. 

Oe For sorely here in Bhasa it is not to know the secret of the 
charm for capturing elephants that Udayana 1s pion 

ie asked to teach it to his a from spr: 

avids, Buddhist India, p. 5). Here as a prisone . 

teach the Princess Vesa nglnees music of which Udayana was consi 


260 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (July, 1913. 
dharayana, one of the ministers of Udayana, king of the Vat- 


bi. 

Another of the published plays of the same author is (No. 
XV, 1912) the Svapna-Vasaradatia,' the chief work of Bhasa 
as is evidenced by numerous notices of it in the Sahitya litera- 
ture. This forms a sequel to the Pratijfia-Yaugandharayana. 
‘ To secure the prosperity of Kausambi ’, the ministers, with a 
half-willing permission and co-operation of the Queen, circu- 

ated a false rumour to the effect that the Queen Vasavadatta 
was destroyed by the pe which burnt down the camp at Lava- 
naka. The ministers succeeded thereby in bringing about their 
mani 8: second marriage with the Princess Padmavati of 
Magad 

That this Udayana was a contemporary of the Buddha we 
gather: from the Jatakas.? His father was Parantapa and son 
Bodhi* according to the Jatakas. In the Vishnupurana Uday- 
ana’s father is called ‘‘ Satanika ’’, which is apparently a title. 
His real name ‘Parkosips appears in the Vay u-Purana in its 
corrupt reading ‘‘ Paripluta’’. His son, of whose succession we 


Medhavi as Udayana’s immediate successor in the Purana.’ 
The Puranas, therefore, tally here with the Buddhist accounts. 
Before discussing the historical data in Bhasa, I may 


The intr neice to the fair pupil is not barred by any 

peer pee things rset = ee had intended them to deve- 

. There is no occasio r the master to call his pupil ‘‘ you 

hunchback ’’, as Sbabribed ra ae commentator of the Dhammapada, 

and ge to — a denna lady. 

1 We ca be sure whether the title was omnia to be the peer 
vadatta, Resune Vaseosios or Svapna-Vasavadattam. There are conflict 

ing ee of bebe on the fag sperially: with epi to the lator 


— 
° 


wo ide the Sva. Vasva. (No. : 77 n., for evidence of t 
manuscript in t Yavou of the Vasavadatta ; iajadekhara’s pea cs 
ze) savadattasya’’ in favour of the title adopted by the learned 
editor of ols plays (ibid., P. xxi); and in ur of - Vasa 
alta,’’ the evidence of manuscript at p. xxi. The author of 


the Amarakoss tka Sarvasva (a. 1159 a.c.) noe it as Svapna-Vasava- 
dattam, while the ritic Bhimaha (9th century 4.C.) calls the 

work 'Svapra-Vaea vad ia (i bid. , Pp. xxii 

2 Rhys Davids, Buddhist India, p. $; Fausbdll, J. 3. 157. 
; Rhys Davids, pp. eee 

b * The Vayu, 37. 270. e Vishnu introduces five names after Med- 
avi and duplicates Udayana along with his father and four later genera 
tions, Agai nst this we have in the i — three magn 
ames 


wo versio: 2) 
WwW upo introduced both, ae se list Sb nigét It aa er: 
worthy that the lin eae comes to an end four generations later, 


Udayana, was defeated and killed, and his kingdom incot- 
agadhan empire, by Maha-Padma Nanda. 
ayana is misspelt in theVayu as Su unaya, 


Vol. IX, No. 7.] The Plays of Bhasa. 261 
[N.S.] 


permitted to discuss here his age, which is necessary to form an 
idea about the antiquity of those data 


The Age of Bhasa. 


(1) Bhasa, who is placed at the head of old (purana) dra- 
matist by Kalidasa, must be considerably earlier than the 
fifth century of the Padi era, the age of Kalidasa now 
accepted by the Sanskritist 

Il) There is a differance of opinion as to the date of the 
Mriichchhakatika. But whatever may be its date, Bhasa must 
have lived before its author, for Bhasa’s Charudatia, or Daridra- 
Charudatta, is the basis of the Mriichchhakatika, as is clearly 
seen from numerous parallels given by Mr. G. Sastri in his 
sae introduction to the Svapna-Vasavada attam. 

IIT) Aezording to ere the prologue in drama was an 
entice of Bhasa.! And t rologue, which is much devel- 
oped in the Mriichehhaleatike » as well as in the plays of ser tcit 
has generally the crudeness of the primary stage in Bhasa’ 
works.’ 

The Nandi, an invariable feature of all other Sanskrit 
dramas, is outside the scope of the dramatist in Bhasa. There 
it -yet belongs to the domain of histrionics. His play begins 
with Nandyante tatah as stitra-dharah (‘Enter Manager 
at the close of the Nandi’ 

“ The Bharatavakaya is in its primitive stage, as I shall show 
elow. 

A change in location is effected by a new act, no direction 
as to locality is ever given, except as to the Nepathya. Y avan- 
tka is mentioned (Sva. Vasav., p. 75), not to denote a curtain 
but a veil. 

(IV) Bhasa’s language is absolutely free from the kavya 
artificiality which we find as far back as the time of the Rud- 

radaman inscription (second century A.c.). There is not the 
iphtest effort oe alliteration ; the very thing seems to be almost 
unknown to the author. He never uses long Samasas. Also his 
conceits are diese r far-fetched Further, he discloses gushes 
cal archaisms? which would appear as sada or almos 
erroneous to one familiar with the classical kav : 

Similarly there are several more or less schais expressions, 
which Ee us a clue as to the age of the author. The se 


ees eae a 


1 Gecabark ketkasanibhide natakaih Lhaekanieel | mnpiitieate 
yaso lebhe Bhaso devakulairiva || 


Harshacharita I. 15. 
instance, in the Vasavadatta the Sfitra-Dhara alone oe ope 
an — stage and introduces to the audience the theme of gf oapealiy ra oe 
another play, t a eine BE there does not Sanae any 
Svetion at all (S. Vasava., p. x 
. Vasava., pp. alii, Pili. 


262 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [{July, 1913. 


‘* Mahabrahmana’’ is used in good sense,! as we have it in the 
ancient literature,? and not in the bad sense, that of the 
‘funeral priest’ as we find it used in the Maha-Bharata. Like- 
wise we get Aryaputra’ and Ayyaputto in the sense of Kum- 
ara, ‘Prince,’ as in the Siddapur inscription of Asoka. Again, 
in describing the proud family of Udayana, the house of the 
Bharatas, Bhasa identifies it ni the Bharatas of the Veda,’ 
an identification forgotten when the Puranas were written and 
oe ee to light and emphasized by ‘European scholars of 

tr days. Yakshini occurs as a female evil spirit as in the 
easly Buddhist literature.’ In telling a story the sentence 
commences with ‘‘There was King Brahmadatta® of Kdm- 

ptlya’’ "in the familiar style of the J fa taka. 

(V) Out of the twelve plays of Bhasa yet discovered, nine 
pieces dramatise epic stories like those which were staged 
when the Mahi-Bhashya was written. His Pavicha-Ratra (‘‘ the 
Five Nights’ 5% has for its theme the exile of the Pandavas at 
the Virata capital, the war between them and the Kauravas 
in the Virata territory, and Duryodhana’s promise, made before 
that war to Drona, to give half the kingdom to the Pandavas, 
if Drona discovered them i _ five nights —a version unknown to 
our present Maha-Bharata 


above considerations force upon us the conclusion 
that the works of Bhasa are ancient in the classical Sanskrit 
literature and that as dramas idea are the oldest yet discov- 
| §. Vasava., P, 42. 
: Cf. Brit déhad-Aranyaka Ap, u, t 
ba 


3 §. Vasava., pp. 69. he’s mbassador of Pradyota addresses 
the son-in-law of hi is master Udayana as caryRe 
+ Veda Bkahaneemmardyerpro shto P blew Varokak Prati.-Y aug., 


6 es 
6 sak caleale aii based on the date of the Puranas shows that 
Brahmadatts Sey Bonk 250 years before the Buddha. 
asava., p -55. 
Me 8 There is pe pce hiatee which we do not find in the 
Maha-Bharata. Arjuna s son Abhimanyu fights on the side of Duryo 


t sone r. 
ker res on the Maha-Bharata are: the Diita- — based 
n some incident after the death of eiuhiacninad (2) the Madhyama- 
ree which seems to have Bhima-sena as its hero Fre: Hidimva ; 
e Kar 


a n : 
Thigh ” (of Duryo-dhana), S. Vasava, ; ok iii (The information 
perry Pare from the introduction to the Regma V devoaitale a by Mr. Gan 


Vhen 
we cee be in pos on of another version of =e story a the 


Vol. 1X, No. 7.) The Plays of Bhasa. 263 
[V.S.] 


ered in this country. They appear to be older than the edition 
of the Maha-Bharata which we have to-day and which can be 
safely placed about the third century a.c.' The lowest limit 
of the age of Bhasa would be thus cir. 250 a.c. 

In considering the earlier limit we are guided by these 


3 i— 

(I) Buddhism is so familiarly known to the author that 
one of the chief characters—the minister Rumanvat—disguises 
himself as a Sramana.? This familiarity is an indication of 
the post-Asokan period. 

(II) The works depict a society which had just adopted 
Buddhist institutions in the orthodox system, i.e. the society of 
the first orthodox revival (second and first centuries B.C.). Ve 
have the Queen-Dowager of Magadha living the life of an 
orthodox nun. 

(IfIl) At the same time there is an anti-Buddhistic tendency 
noticeable. The Sramana is hated by the Brahmin.* 1e 
Budddhist layman seems to receive a hit in the address * O mad- 
upasaka’®; and the Sramana is on the whole ridiculed as being 
no better than a conjurer.6 The Sramana is hated and ridi- 
culed, but at the same time he is tolerated. This I take to 
point out the closing period of the anti-Buddhistic Brahmin 
Empire of the Sungas and Kanvas. 

(IV) At the end of his plays Bhasa gives a benedictory 
verse which is substantively one and the same. It mostly 
reads as follows :— : 

Imam sagar-paryantam himvadvindhya-kundatam, Mahim 
= ekata patrankam raja-simhah prasastuna re 


[ sai aracuai fenaferqeas | 
aviaaraiag usfde: VagT |) 


“ Let our Raja-Simha rule with sole sovereignity (lit. * ried 
one umbrella’) over this land up to the ocean — 
between the Himalayas and the Vindhyas.”’ 


1 Amongst other things, the tribe of Kanishka (Tusharas) are 
mentioned in the Santi-Parva (LXV, 13-15) amongst foreigners living 
under Hindu Kings. The Hinas are not in that list, and their mention 
elsewhere does not prove their presence within India when the M 
Bharata was cast in its present form. It is not unlikely that they were 
known to the Hindus in the first and the second centuries a.c, Commu- 
Hications with Tartary and China were very frequent in the early cen- 


Prati-Yaug., pp. 43-44. 3 §. Vasava., p. 4. 
* “Shame oe 48 Brahmin-hood that I shall be ee aan 
a abhaya-dina) by a Sramanaka, a wealth-seeker.’’ Prati a 


5 ** Unmattopasaka.’’ Prati.-Yaug., P- 43; also see p. 64. 
5 Ibid., pp. 45-46 


264 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [July, 1913. 


Now, before the time of Kalidasa and before the present 
Maha-Bharata, the fact of having a ‘one-umbrella empire’ ex- 
tending from the Himalayas to the Vindhyas and up to the 
Ocean, could only refer to a period which cannot go back farther 
than the days of Chandragupta Maurya and could not be 


of 325 B.c. has to be brought down to a time after Asoka, in 
view of (a) what has been said in paras. (II) and (III) and (0 


written under the reign of Pushyamitra (cir. 160 B.c). AS 
Bhasa knows the Manava-Dharma Sastra,2 we might pre 
sume that about 100 years would have elapsed between the 
composition of the Manava-Dharma-Sastra and the dramas of 


(V) The benedictory verse refers to the reigning (‘our’) 
sovereign. It is pronounced by any character who happens to 
be the last spokesman on the stage, e.g. by Drona in the Pajicha- 
ratra, by Yaugandharayana in the Paratijna- Yaugandhara- 
yana, by King Udayana in the Svapna-Vasavadatta.*® Raja- 

imha was not therefore Udayana’s or Drona’s but Bhasa’s 
‘sovereign-lion ’. 

_, +f one case we get another word, Upendra, in the place of 
Raja-Simha.* In the Madhyama- V yayoga, the bharata-vakya, 
or, to be more accurate, the last verse (for the expression 
bharata-vakya is not to be found there) runs thus :— 

‘* As the Samudra is the lord (prabhavah sic) of rivers, as 

fire is the lord of offerings, as even mind is the lord 


! The legal journal, the-Calcutta Weekly Notes, 1911, Nos. 41 and 42. 
Of. Kohler, Archiv fiir Reschts-und Wirtschafts philosophi: (1912) V. 4- 
* S. Vasava., p. xxix. It also knows the work ‘ Ram tyana.’ 
his i observed above, another instance of undeveloped 
stage of the technique of Hindu darma in Bhasa. Sometimes there 
is no bharata-vakya given at all, e.g. in the Charudatta (S. Vasava., 
p- Vili), in the Ghatotkacha (ibid., p. ix), in the Uru-bhaga (ibid., p. XVii). 
We notice a very important practice here —the practice of alluding 


under artistic, kavya obscurity. Th Miidra-Rakh has ‘‘ Srima 
Bandhu-bhriityah Chandra-gupt 4 ., rhe Miidra-Rakhasa 


_-..’ Only ‘‘our king’’, nah raja, is mentioned in the Pratima (S. 
Vasava., p. xix). 


Vol. IX, No. 7.] The Plays of Bhasa. 265 
S.] 


of the organs of BOnaCs so our lord (lit. master) is the 
majestic Upendra 
This Upendra seems to ree alluded to quite in the opening line 
in the Nataka which is not named in the manuscript of Mr. 
Ganapati Sastri.2 A more pointed slesha may be found in the 
first verse of the Avimaraka where Upendra is replaced by 
Narayana: 
** May the majestic hoes rule for you this earth under 
‘lofty one umbrella 
Upendra and Narayana are ees terms; which of a 
two is the proper name of the ‘master’ of Bhasa’? What 
again, the connection between Upendra or Narayana and Raja. 
Simha’* And who were they? Either they mean one person, 


there is one name to hinge to or coincide with either 

Upendra or Narayana—the Kanvayana Narayana. 1 am in- 

clined to identify the Kanva Narayana with Bhisa’s Upendra 

and Narayana (about 53-41 8.c.). Upendra= Narayana is not 

called ‘ the sovereign’ but ‘ master’. It is possible ee our 
i n 


[‘ the master ’], the sovereign-minister Narayana, the Kanva.° 

e date thus found is quite in agreement with other lines 
of evidence noticed shee. It is also noteworthy that histri- 
onics seems to have enjoyed a special popularity in the Sunga 
period, as is evidenced by the references in the Maha.Bhashya, 
the theatre at the Jogimara cave, and the recorded notorious 
devotion to the stage of Sumitra, son of Agnimitra. 


tha-ahutinam prabhav 


dro, ya 
ath&é nadinaém peg va he pi tatha prabhur aad 


hutaSah iy athendriyanaém pra 
ape Be esc e ah || S. Vasava., 


ad-Upend 2 S. Vas a., P. XV. 
, S. a te be : ix. Cf. the first word in wir Diata-Ghatotkacha 
= Nerayanastribhuvanaike ” etc. S. Vasava., p. Vil 
d by the present 
The passage of the Vayu has hee *Giseusse i conclusion 


a in his paper on ‘the Brahmin Empire’ , fears 
at the number of the Sune come to is that there were tw 
ungas who sat on the thron 
f Bhasa with Nar 
iss oa ide i of the Naray etn bs Mr. P. Ghana's 5 
ar ‘ writin 
tho ahove in the Dita-vakya Sc h has the ot published sted for enjoying 
ratha.’’ 


ao 


is Sect There is no Prijhadratha in the ee a 
whose country was taken away by Kriih It is a clear Se A 
unfortunate Briihadratha Maurya, with probably a remo ised a ater 
ae Janor-Sandha who was a Briihadratha. The pieces pu oe 
leave no room to doubt that the name of Bhasa’s master was 


266 Journal of the Asiatie Society of Bengal. |July, 1913. 


Probably the Vasavadatta and the Pratijia Yaugandhara- 
yana of Bhasa were based on the famous akhyana-work, the 
Vasavadatta, noticed in the Maha-Bhashya. And allowing even 
fifty years for the earlier career of the Vasavadatta of the 
Maha-Bhashya, the traditions upon which Bhasa most likely 
has drawn, would be only 250 years removed from the reign of 
Darsaka.! If we confine ourselves to the date of Bhasa, on 
the evidence of Kalidasa alone, the data in Bhaisa must be 
placed earlier than the Mahavaméa by a century. If we take 
other pieces of evidence into account, cient are apparently alae 
by five centuries 


The Historical Data in Bhasa. 
Now let us take the historical data in Bhasa. These data 
re ‘— 


(II) That he contacted a political marriage® with Pad- 
mavati, Princess of “ees and sister to the sovereign of 


1 a — Resse scat a period (=before Pataiijal ye 

Nanda period. Mahapadma seals 28 years 

Wee. 37. 322, ashtavimgati varahani; it is not 88 in 

the Vayu, as supposed b y Teanga an Rafat and his 

son, 12 years (Vayu, 37, 329), 

118 =, Udayin, adivendbeos and Mahanandi. 
295 

—50 


» 


for earlier career of the akhyana. 
245 
2 Prati. Yaug., p. 3 
The Ka athe sani oeata confou two and makes Udayana ee 


nds the 
res i atseanenceues The Lalitavistara designates Udayana’s father 
alani, 
f ee ae Vatsa-rajah. Prati. Yaug., p. 31. 
> P- 
* Prati. Yaug. and 8. Vasava. , aon _On M ema see S. Vas 


ahi . i a Yaugandharayana Devyapanaye ka kriita te bud- 
a ug.—Kauéambi-matram paripalayamiti. 

King— 

gus. ing— Yaugandharayana, why this thy ‘psychology to harm the 

Ya ug.—For I wanted to serve the whole of (the state of) Kausambi.] 


Vol. IX, No. 7.] The Plays of Bhasa. 267 
N.S. 


Magadha—the Emperor Daréaka,' ruling at the time at Raja- 
griiha.* 

(IV) That this ‘‘ Vatsa territory’’, which was separated 
from the frontier of Magadha by the Ganges,*® was apparently 
a separate unit under Udayana, whose original kingdom was 
Kausambi with its neighbourhood. The Vatsas as distinct 
from Kausgambi revolted under one Aruni or Arani soon after 
the Magadhan marriage of Udayana while the King was still at 
Rajagriiha, and were put down by the combined forces of - 
Kausambi and Magadha.* 

On the authority of the Jatakas, Pradyota was a contem- 
porary of Ajatasatru, and Udayana survived the Buddha.’ 
After the Buddha’s death Ajatasatru ruled for 27, according 
to the Buddhist documents, and 27 or 17 years according to 


years. Thus in view of these considerations, we can draw the 
conclusion that Drasaka, who did flourish as an emperor of 
Magadha, immediately succeeded Ajatasatru. 

_ The above considerations would exclude an hypothetical 
insertion, between Ajatasatru and Darsaka, of Udayin who is 
1. ee a es 


& was, a generation or two later, abandoned by 
hoo & in favour of Pataliputra. The latter capital is never me 
Ag asa, : | 
‘His references to the house of Kasi (Prati. Yaug., D- 29) eared 
disappeared a generation even before Ajatasatru 1s another rem 
of ancient history. 
- Vasava., pp. 1 


ntioned 


1, 60. ty 
1p. 5: Viisava.,p. 60. Cf. also the patriotic reply of Sangeet 
For —— to serve the whole of Kauéambi’’, as against the 
ys Davids, pp. 8, 13. 6 goes 
: Taking him te 3 30 at the death of the Buddha, if Ajatasatru 
ruled for 25 years, : sere ea 
7 In view of the second marriage (in the reign of rng 
after the death of the Buddha), we would be sceptic about t . pag 
okies! Lalita-Vistara that Udayana was born on the same day 
a. 


268 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (July, 1913. 


placed immediately after Ajatasatru in the Pali chronicles. If 


, = 


place Udayin between Ajatasgatru and Daréaka. Udayin, ac- 
cording to the Vayu, in his fourth year, made Kusumpura 
(Pataliputra), on the southern bank of the Ganges, his capital, 
while, according to Bhasa, in the days of the Darsaka, the 
capital was still at Rajagriiha. 

The reason of the Magadhan marriage of Udayana becomes 
intelligible and also some light is thrown on the above question 
of chronology, if we take into account the political rela- 
tions between the different states of the time. The state 


Avanti. The King of Avanti is called the Mehasana, ‘‘ He of 
the large army "’, in Bhasa, and Chanda, ‘‘the Terrible’’, 
in Buddhist works.! In the latter again we are told that 


must secure the good-will or subjugation of the sovereign of 
the Vatsa® territory. To gain this object he seems to have 


| Rhys Davids, p. 28. 2 Ibid., p. 13. 

In respect of this theory of the dominating position of Avanti, 
I may refer to the order in which the Pradyotas have been placed in the 
Vayu and the subsequent Puranas. These Pradyotas are not Magadhan 


obviously include some of the 
Magadha the Pradyotas seem to have succum 


" e revolt of the Vatsas under Aruni related by Bhasa might 

ave been connected with these political marriages. It is almost con- 
temporaneous with the Magadha alliance. Probably it was fostered by 
the * terrible’ Pradyota or, more likely, by his suecessor. 


Vol. IX, No. 7.] The Plays of Bhasa. ; 269 
[N.S.] 


naturally have been a lukewarm ally of Pradyota. Being a 
buffer between Magadha and Avanti he would have welcomed 
the new alliance which Yaugandharayana describes as brought 
about ‘‘for the welfare of the whole of Kaugambi.’’ The 
second marriage followed the first. It however took place when 
Ajatasatru had passed away, and Daréaka was on the throne at 
Rajagriiha. 

In the light of our data from Bhasa the record in the 
Dvipa-Vaméa and the Maha-VaméSa in respect of the succession 
of Udayi or Udayibhadda must be, I think, admitted as in- 
accurate. I propose here an explanation of the error in the Pali 
documents. The name next to Udayibhadda has been trans- 
posed, and hence all the confusion. I read Nagadasaka which 
is placed after Udayibhadda, as Ndga-Daréaka and identify 
the latter with Dargaka; and the Naga I take to be a member 
of the epithet the Saisu-naga.! The reign-period of Darsaka 
(25) is the same as that of Naga Dasaka (24), the difference of 
a year being accountable on the basis of the well-known differ- 
ence of one year which often arises owing to the two different 
reckonings of Hindu chronologists. 

To sum up, there cannot now remain any reasonable doubt 
as to thas historical existence of Dargaka, nor about the spelling 
of his name. Nor could it be said now of him that nothing 
is known of him.?_ Also the fact is clear that we cannot accept 
the Pali authority on the point. 

Be ee 
The view advanced here on the political significance of these mar- 


= i d clear opinion of the Katha- 
iages is supported by the emphatic and ¢ p acne anlage 


Aj&tasatru and Bimbisara. 2 
V. Smith, Early History of India, 1908, p. 44.‘ Daréaka or Har 
Saka, nothing known.”’ 


Baad oleic ek, ire a alg ace NS eM 


35. Laksmanasena. 


By R. D. Banerui, M.A., Indian Museum, Calcutta. 


The present discussion is based on four stone inscriptions 
discovered in the Gaya District :— 

n inscription, which is at present stuck in the walls 
of a small shrine of Sirya near the Visnupada at Gaya dated 
the year 1813 of the Nirvana era.—According to this inscrip- 
tion a king of the Kama (Kumaon) country, named Purusot- 
tamasimha, seeing that the religion of Buddha was in a 
declining state, sought the help of two neighbouring kings, 
King Asokacalla of the Sapadalaksa (Savalakh) mountains 
and the king of the Chindas, and restored the religion to its 
pure state. The main object of the inscription was to record 
the erection of a temple (Gandhakuti) for the spiritual benefit 
of Manikyasimha, the son of Ratnasri, the daughter of Pur- 
rusottamasimha. The construction of the building was carried 
on under the supervision of the monk Dharmmaraksita, the 
Spiritual adviser of Purusottamasimha..! 

Seat & 


with some other sculptures and inscriptions which are now in 
the Indian Museum.? The last two lines of this inscription 
run as follows :— 

(12) Srimal= Lakh y ° = atita-rajya-sam 51. 

(13) bhadradine 29. 


5, i ipti dis- 
Ty in the Sapadalaksa mountains.—The inscription was 
covered by Mr. V. Hathorne at Bodh-Gaya. Prinsep ip 
his version of the text with an eye-copy 1m an early volume 


341. 
1 A.S.R., Vol. III, p. 126, pl. XXXV. Ind. Ant., Vol X, p. 
2 J.B.B.R.AS., vor. XVI, p. 359; Cunningham’s Mahabodhi, p. 78, 
pl. XXVII A. 
8 Or Laksvana. 


272 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [July, 1913, 


of the Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal.! Rajendra 
Lala Mitra® and Bhagwan Lal Indraji* could not trace it at 
Bodh-Gaya. I saw the inscription on the walls of a modern 
building to the north of the sculpture shed at Bodh-Gaya. Its 
present position was already known to the late Dr. Th. Bloch 
of the Archzological Survey. Recently Dr. Fleet has stated 
that either Asokacalla or Dasaratha of this inscription was 
Jaina,* because Bhagwan Lal read the word Jinendra in the 
first line. But this reading is not correct. Besides, the word 
Jinendra is « well-known epithet of Buddha. The first line 
reads as follows :— 

_ Namo Buddhaya Deyadharmmoyam pravara-mahayanaya- 
yinah paramopasakasya Hevajra-caran = dravinda-makaranda- 
madhukara-phalakara nrpati ve- 

The word Hevajra is distinct even in Mr. Hathorne’s eye- 
copy. It is also a well-known epithet of the Bodhisattva.’ 
The last two lines run as follows :— 

Srimal = Lak : deva padanam atita 

rajya-sam 72 Vaisakha vadi 12 Gurau. 


of Asokacalla-deva.—This record, unfortunately, is not dated. 


1, 8, and Dharmaraksita, the spiritual adviser of the king of 
the Kama country, who is already known to us from inscrip- 
tion no. I, in ll. 9-10, 

_ _The elders of the Ceylon Congregation (Simnghala-sthati- 
ranam) are mentioned in ll. 15-16, and tw adha- 
nika Brahmacata and the Mandalika Sahajapala. These two 
officers are mentioned in inscription no. III. Catabrahma is 


Tn a recent number of the Journal of the Royal Asiatic 
Society Dr. Fleet has expressed a doubt about the identity of 
the Asokacallas mentioned in the four inscriptions quoted 


Vol. IX, No. 7.] Laksmanasena. 273 
[N.S.] 


above. Their identity, however, may be established in the 
following way :— 

Asokacalla is associated with the bhiksu Dharmmarak- 
Sita in inscriptions nos. land IV. In both inscriptions Dharm- 
maraksita is styled Kama-raja-guru and consequently it must 
be admitted that the Asokacallas mentioned in these two in- 
scriptions are one and the same personage. Again, the officers 
of the king mentioned in inscription no. III are also men- 
tioned in inscription no. [V; consequently it must be admit- 
ted that the Asokacallas mentioned in inscriptions no. I, III 
and IV are one and the same person. Inscription no. II 
does not give any detail about the king, but he is most pro- 
bably the same as the one mentioned in the remaining inscrip- 
tions. The correct reading of the name of the king seems to 


Th 
Aégokacalla in inscriptions nos. I and III and Aéokavalla in 
nos. II and IV. The former have been neatly and carefully 


full of spelling mistakes. Consequently the spelling in the 
neater inscriptions should be followed. There is practically 
very little difference between va and ca in inscriptions nos. If 
and IV. 


- The most important point in these inscriptions are the 
dates in no. Il and IIf. The use of the word attta in express- 
ing the date is peculiar, and various scholars have translated 
it in various ways. Some twenty years ago Dr. Kielhorn 


Laksmanasena.? He proved beyond doubt that the initial 
year of the Laksmanasena era was equivalent to Saka 1041 
and not Saka 1028. The modern almanacs of Tirhut, on 
which the former theories were based, are not reliable and the 
grant of Sivasimha which has been published by Dr. Grierson 


‘* During the reign of Laksmanasena the years of bis reign 
would be described as Srimal=Laks ee 


1 Ind. Ant., Vol. X, p. 342. = feat 
3 Madoneats $8. r 3 Ind. Ant., Vol. XIX, p. I. 
+ Proc. A.S B. 1895, p. 144, pl. IIL. 

6 Ep. Ind., Vol. V., App. No. 166. 


274 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (July, 1918. 


from the commencement of the reign of Laksmanasena, that 
reign itself was a thing of the pas t.’! Dr. Kielhorn’s trans- 
lation of the Jast sentence of ins cst No. III possesses the 
advantage of being clearer than those of his predecessors in 
the same field. It leaves no doubt about the fact that the use 
of the word atita is a clear indication of the cessation of 
Laksmanasena’ sreign. Further on he says :— 

en we are told that, at the conquest of Bengal by 
Muhammad Bukhtiyar, which by Mr. Blochmann is placed 
about a.D. 1198-99, the last Hindu King Lakhmaniya had 
been reigning for 80 years, does not this really mean that the 
conquent took place in the year 80 of Laksmanasena-era,— 

02’ 


Timal 
WOL ADL 


sa 

From his ‘synchronistic list for “Northern India® (A.D. 
700-1400) published ay: it appears that Dr. Kielhorn 
had then abandone eo 

In 1896 Babu ia. Nath Vasu in his article 
‘*Chronology of the Sena. Kings of Bengal’’* quoted some 
verses from Danasagara, a work said to be composed by Ballala- 
sena, according to which Ballalasena was alive in 1169 a.D. 
Within a very short time Dr. R. G. Bhandarkar published 
his sixth report on the Search for Sanskrit Manuscripts in 


According to pose verses the pane against Dr. Kielhorn’s 
theory may by summed up as follo 

Two esciariits of Dinasigara, by Ballalasena, King 
of Bengal, contain the following passage 


N ikhila- cakra-tilaka-srimad- Rallihdiemons purne 
Sasi-navadasamite gakavarse Danasagaro racitah. 
One of these MSS. is in the India Office collection® and in 
this the date is given in numerical figures also. The other is 
in the possession of Babu Nagendra Natha Vasu.’ This 
manuscript contains two more verses elucidating the date :-- 
Ravibhaganah sarasista ye bhuta danasagarsy = asya 
Kramaso’ tra samparidanudadya vatsara paiica 
T'ad-evam eka-navaty- RUDE DATS AREAL nvite sake 
Samvatsarah patanti Visvapadarabhya ca 


(2) A a of apenas another work by 

1 toa Ant. , Vol. XI 

sora X, p. 2, note 3. 

8 Ind. Ant., ‘vol. Vv 

i and J.AS.B. 1896 » pt. a 

eport on the Search for sae kri i MSS. in the Bombay Presi- 

Penh ducing the years 1887-88, = 89, 1889-90 and 1890-91. 

6 Eggeling’s India Office Cat., t. ILI, p. 545 

' Sastri’s Notices of poet MSS, 2nd series, Vol. I, p. 170. 

8 J.A.8.B, 1896, pt. I 


Vol. LX, No. 7.] Laksmanasena. 275 
[N.S.] 


Ballalasena, now in the sonapte of the Bombay Government, 
contains the following ve 
Kha-nava-kh = ait =abde arebhe adbhiitasigaram 
Gaudendra Kuijaralana-stambha-vahur = mahipateh.! 


The agreement of the date from two different works 
seems to prove beyond doubt that Ballalasena was alive in 
8. 1090-91, ie. 1168-9 a.p. Consequently it had to be admit- 
ted that Laksmanasena came to the throne after 1169 a.p. 
Bat Dr. Kielhorn had already proved that the initial year of 
the era of Laksmanasena is equivalent to 1119-20 a.p. In 
order to reconcile these sedan fcc sie Nagendra Nath 
Vasu Se - following theo 


news pleased him so much that in his newly conquered king- 
=e pS inaugurated a new era, which he named the Laksmana 


P Sis far as is known at present, nobody has looked into 
the genuineness of the evidence brought against Dr. Kielhorn’s 
theo ory. The manuscript of Danasagara in the eee collec- 


) 
years The copy in the India Office collection is said to be 
written in modern Bengali handwriting’ and consequently it 
cannot be much older than Nagendra Babu’s MS. There is a 
copy of the same work in the collection of the Asiatic Society 
of Bengal.+ Thisis also written in modern Bengali characters, 
and is very nearly v from mistakes. In this copy none o 
the three verses quoted above can be traced, ipa ot the verses 
ee the genealogy of the Sena Kings are give 

ese verses are also absent in a copy of shass same work 
in the library of the Maharaja of Pathuriaghata.° This 
have four an was copied i in Saka 1728, i.e., 1806 a.p. Thus we 


! Report on the Search of Sanskrit MSS. in “ Bombay Presi- 
dency, 1887. 83, 1888-89, 1889-90 and 1890-91, p. Ixxx 
* J.A.S.B. 1896, pt. I, p. 2 
. : Heine s India Office fax Pt III, p. 545. 
I, A., 78. 
Vol. I, oo Lala Mitra’s Notices of Sanskrit MSS., Ist series, 
0. 


276 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. {July, 1913. 


was added at first and we find it in two manuscripts. The 
other two verses were added later on and consequently they 
are not to be found in any other copy. 

The verses quoted by Dr. R. G. Bhandarkar are also to be 
found in one manuscript only. There are several other manu- 
scripts of Adbhutasagara by Ballalasena in various parts of India 

ut these verses do not seem to occur in any one of them ;— 

(1) A manuscript in the Raghunatha temple at Kashmir. 

(2) A manuscript in the collection of the Asiatic Society 
of Bengal.! 

(3) An incomplete manuscript in the Bombay Government 
collection.” 

4) A manuscript in private possession noticed by Maha- 
mahopadhyaya Hara Prasad Sastri.? 

5) To these may be added a manuscript in the India 
Office collection.* 

Th 


1 Government No. 1193. : 

* Report on the Search for Sanskrit MSS. in the Bombay Presi- 
dency, 1883.84. 

5 Sastri Notices of Sanskrit MSS., Vol. IT. 

# India Office Cat. 7 

5 Memoirs A. 8. B., Vol. Il, Ramacarita of Sandhyakara Nandi 
by Mahamahopadhyaya Hara Prasada Sastri, Proc. A.S.B., 1900, 


6 Proc. A.S.B., 1899, p. 39. 


Vol. IX, No. 7.] Laksmanasena. 277 
[NV.S.] 
earlier in date. These two works, Danasagara and Adbhutasa- 


carelessness and igre of the scribes are well known. Dr. 
B r says, ‘‘ Some of them — are unintelligible 
ae to the ein hs of the text.’ 

er factor that contributes to unreliability of modern 


cords. Their paleography proves beyond doubt whether they 
are forgeries or not. vidence based on such records cannot 
be set aside in favour of ere culled from modern copies 
of mss. said to be ancient. I cannot understand what led Dr. 
Kielhorn to abandon his fone views when he had such sure 
ground to stand upon. 

The extracts quoted above from Dr. Kielhorn’s article on 
the Laksmanasena era clearly indicate that the author was o 
on that Laksmanasena had ceased to reign in La-sam 51, 


theory ‘put forward by Babu Nagendra Nath Vasu is 
directly opposed to the epigraphic evidence. Laksmanasena- 
deva who ceased to reign before 1170-71 a.D. could not have 
come to the throne after 1168-69 a.p. as two at least of his 
copper-plate grants were issued in his third year. The initial 


discussion recently. He ante that the era was 
Sémantasena and on the accession of Laksmanasena it ‘‘ was 


has cited several dated inscriptions in Sup pORt of his theory. 
But he has not considered two very serious objections. 

(1) None of the inscriptions quoted by him contain the 
word atita or any of its equivalents. 

(2) None of the Indian eras, now known, seem to have 
hee started by one king and adopte ted and fai by any 

ne of his successors. At least there is no direct evidence in 
Riort of such a view. 

The other theory put forward by Babu Nagendra Nath 
Vasu is based on a rumour (prava ada). Moveover, the establish- 
en of an era by a father in the name of his newly- born son 

unheard of, and the evidence produced in its support is not 
me all trustworthy. 

Before we proceed to examine the statements of the 


' Report on the Search of Sanskrit MSS. in the houbey Presidency, 
~palaiae p. lxxxii. 
2 Proc. and J.A.S.B., Vol. I, p. 45. 


278 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [July, 1913. 


Muhammadan historians on this point, we should examine 


Vikrama Samvat 1232. This inscription of Govindapaladeva 
also contains the word gate. It is evident from the analogy of 
the inscriptions already quoted that his reign must have been 
a thing of the past at Gaya in 1175 a.p. But he was not 
dead at that time, because a manuscript written in the 37th 
year of his reign has been discovered by modern scholars. The 
following references to the reign of Govindapala have been 
discovered as yet. 
(1 he Visnupada temple inscription, Vikrama year 1232, 
regnal year 14. 
‘ Srimad-Govindapaladevanam gata-rajye Caturdasa samvat- 
sare.”’ 


(2) A manuscript of the Astasahasrika-Prajfiaparamita, at 
present preserved in the library of the Royal Asiatic Society of 
London, in which the final colophon runs as follows : ~ 
Paramesvara- Paramabhattaraka- Paramasaugata- Maharaja- 
dhiraja-Srimad Gi ind | Al 4, ayy en maat 4. 


OU ft CLAY 


A manuscript of the well-known lexicon Amarakosa 
preserved in the Library of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, in 
which the final colophon runs as follows :— 

— bhaitaraketyadi-rajavali- pur vvavat-Sri-Govindapaliya, 
samvat 24 Caitra sudi 8 subhamastu-sarvva-jagatam- iti. 
_ (4) The last leaf of a manuscript of Astasahasrika Pra- 
naparamita preserved at the same place, in which the last two. 
lines contain the following historical reference :— 
4. Srimad-Govindapala-devusy-atita 
5. Samvat 18 Karttika-dine 15. 

(5) A manuscript of the Guhyavali-vivrti by Ghanadeva 
preserved in the University Library, Cambridge, in which the 
final colophon runs as follows :-— 

Govindapiladevinim sata 37 sramanadine 11 likhitamidam, 

(6) A Manuscript of the Pajicikara belonging to the 
same collection as above possesses this unique colophon :— 

ae Paramésvaretyadi-rajavali-pirvvavat-éimad- 


6. 
Govindapala-devanam vinasta-rajye Astatriméat-samvatsare. 


7 —s— 


1 AS.R., Vol. III, pl. xxxviii, No. 18. Kielhorn’s No. 166. 


Vol. IX, No. 7.] Laksmanasena. 279 
[V.8.] 


_ (8) A manuscript of the Yogaratnamala preserved in the 
University Library, Cambridge, in which the final colophon 
runs thus :— 


1.4. Paramésvaretyadi-rajavali-pirvvavat Srima. 
1.5. -d=Govindapiladevanim sam 39 bhadra-dine 14. . . 


Only one among these records speaks of King Govinda- 
pala’s reign as vijayarajya-samvatsare, *‘ the year in the vic- 
torious reign.’? Three records state that the king had ceased 
© reign because the word gate in no. 1, atita in no. 4 and no. 
and vinasta in no. 6 cannot be interpreted otherwise. In 
three records the scribe refuses to give the titles of the king 
in full, e.g. no. 3, no. 6 and no. 8, and begins with the 
Phrase :-— 
Paramesvaretyadi or Paramabhaitaraketyadi. 


__ In one record, only no. 5, the historical reference is given 
without any qualifying adjective. 

: must be admitted on the evidence of no. 2 that the 
King Govindapala was alive and reigning in the 4th year from 
his succession (1165 A D.) and that Nalanda was included in 
his dominions as shown by the manuscript copied at that 
Place. We have two records of the 14th year of the king, 
One of which comes from Gaya. In the case of no. 1 the 
mention of the word gata indicates that the reign of Govinda- 
pala had ceased in Gaya, and in the case of no, 3 the omis- 
$10n of the full Imperial titles denotes that the place where 
the manuscript was copied had ceased to be a part of Govin- 
qapale’s dominions. Of such cases two things may be af- 

rmed :— 


(1) that King Govindapala had ceased to reign owing 
to death or abdication, or 
(2) that the area of the dominion os that prince was 


gradually becoming circumscri 


The latter explanation is to be preferred as one ms. of his 
37th year does not refer to his reign as expired. This is con- 
firmed by a ms. of the 38th year copied by the same scribe 


280 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (July, 1913. 


of v.s. 1232 on the other hand shows that once the country 
belonged to Govindapala, but it had ceased to do soin the 14th 


Bihar) in the 38th year of his reign. Z 

The Bodh-Gaya inscription of La-sarn 74 proves that Gaya 
and the country around it continued in the possession of the 
Sena kings of Bengal. 

Nothing is definitely known about the dissolution of the 
empire of the Palas. The last king of the Pala dynasty, 
whose name has come down to us, was Madanapaladeva. 
According to the Ramacarita of Sandhyakara Nandi, this 

adanapala was a contemporary of Candra-Deva of Mahdaya 
(Kanauj)! :— 
imhisuta _vikranten-arjjunadhamna bhuvah  pradipena 
Kamalavikasa bhesajabhisaja Candrena bandhunopetam (-tam) 
Candicarana-saroja-prasada-sampanna-vigrahasrikatn : 
akhalu Madanam sangesamisam-agad jagad-vijaya-laksmih. 

Consequently, it must be admitted that Mr. Venis’s 
assignment of the date of the Kamauli grant of Vaidyadeva 
is not correct. The true date must lie somewhere between 
1026 a.p. and 1090 a.p. The first date is that of the Sarnath 


1 Ramacarita of Sandhyakara Nandi, Memoirs A.S.B., Vol. IL 
2 Epi. Ind.. Vol. IT, p- 256. 


Vol. IX, No. 7.] Laksmanasena. : 281 
[W.8.] ' 


inscription of Mahipala!' and the second that of the Candravats 
plate of Candra-Deva.? Nothing is known about ala 
kings during the first sixty years of the twelfth century. 
Govindapaladeva ascended the throne in 1161 a.p. It is 
generally supposed that he belonged to the Pala dynasty but 
there is no direct evidence in support of this statement. But 
two things are in favour of the above statements. His name 
ends with the word Pala and he was a Buddhist. Even after 
his destruction Buddhist scribes have continued to use his 
name in the colophons of manuscripts for several years. The 
extent of his kingdom is uncertain. But as has been already 
observed, he ruled over a portion of Magadha or South Bihar 
and was gradually losing ground before the Senas. He had a 
long reign of thirty-seven years. If the Tabagat-i-Nasiri is to 
be trusted then the modern city of Bihar was his last strong- 
hold. He was crushed by the Mussulmans in the 38th year of 
his reign (1199 a.p.). 


Christian era remnants of the Pala empire seem ave become 
the prey of the sect kings. ithe rarnacleah ens of 
Kanauj invaded Mag n 1146 a.p. and advan as far as 


Mudgagiri or Mungir. ate ording to one of his bsp blaté 
grants discovered in the village of Lar in the Gorakhpur dis- 
trict, Govindacandra, when in residence in Mudgagiri, bestowed 


Ee vebiy indicates that Gisudacthdra overran Magadha 
1146 a.p. Twenty-five oe afterwards, we find that “Gaya is is 


bkobably nee wero not on Mes terms. It is even hinted in 
one of the Bengali works on the Dharma cult discovered by 
Mahamahopadhyaya Hara Prasad Sastri that the Buddhists | 


anual Report of this Ave, fadevey. ee Lidia; 3 1903-04, p- 229 
pl. isin, ‘No. oe 
> Epi. I ; Vol. IX, p. 302. 
s Bondall’s ‘Cat. of Sans. MSS in the Univ. Liby., Cambridge, Bud- 
—— Sans. MS 
Haverty - a of the Tabagat-i-Nasirt, Bib. Ind. 
Epi. Ind., III, p. 98. 
§ Mahamah opal ay Hara Prasad Sastri’s ‘‘ Discovery of living 
Buddhism in Bengal,’’ 


282 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal [July, 1913. 


Bihar or Magadha was the prey of the neighbouring monarchs 
immediately before the Muhammadan conquest. Gahadavalas, 
Senas and Palas were trying one after another to secure it for 


to defend himself and the Sena king too much occupied with 
internal affairs or family quarrels to properly fortify his 
marches. 

In Bengal proper, we find that two sons of Laksmanasena, 
Visvaripasena and KeSavasena, succeeded him on the throne. 
Both of them are known from copper-plate grants. Keéava- 
sena has also been mentioned in the Ain-i-Akbari. In Colonel 


KeSavasena and the same name occupies the place allotted to 
the donor, cf. 40—43.4 
he proper reading of the plate is:— 
Srimal-Laksmar levapadanudhyata samasta-suprasasty” 
upetasva pati-gajapati-narapati-raja trayadhipati Somakula-vikasa- 
bhaskara Somavamésapradipa-pratipanna Karna  Satyavrata 
Gangeya saranagata-vajrapanjara maharajadhiraja ari raja- 
oo Gaudesvara Strimat-K eésavasenadevapila-vijay- 
-inah. 


Similarly we have— 
Srimal-Laksmana-sena-devah kuégali. 
in the Tarpandighi and Anulia grants of Laksmanasenadeva and 
Sri-Visvari leva-padavijayinal 
in the Madanapada grant of Visvaripasena. If the Beker 
er 


i me to 
sion Mle: he corrected the following verses of the Edilpur 
grant :— : , 


/! Jarrett’s Ain-i Akbari (Bib. Ind.), Vol. IL. p. 146 
2 J.ASB., Vol. VIL pt L ie ae 
$ Ibid., Vol. LXV, pt.I, p. 8. + ‘Ibid., Vol. VIL, pt. I, pl. IV: 


Vol. 1X, No. 7.] Laksmanasena. 283 
S.] 


17... . Htiasmat kathamanyatha ripu badha vaidhavya 
vaddhavrato vikhyata ksitipala maulir-abhavat Sri-Visvavandyo 
into 

Btasmit kathamanyatha ripubadhi...... Sri- Visvaripo 
ny 

3 the ground of this correction Babu Nagendra Nath 
has stated that the Elilpur grant also was issued by Visva- 


adjunct. But if Viévaripo is taken to be a proper name, we 
Shall have to admit that the verses following this refer to 
Visvariipasena and not to Laksmanasena. Consequently Tada- 
devi must be acknowledged to be the queen of Visvarupasena 
and not Laksmanasena. Finally we shall have to acknowledge 
that sie was the son of king Visvarupa by the 
queen Tada-dev 

In reality the Edilpur grant was issued by Kesavasena, a 


os 
Gaudesvara. Thus the existence of two sons of Laksmanasena 
is proved by their inscriptions. It has already been stated 
above that the Edilpur grant of wie mioe contains all the 
verses of the Madaanphds grant and some more in addition. 
The immediate pet from this is. that Visvartpasena was 
KeSavasena’s predecess 

The Edilpur oak ee mentions KeSavasena, and in 


name Visva ian occurs tavice sad in ‘each case it is eile 
that the engraver was very much in want of space. Thee 

was that the four letters are smaller than the other fare in 
the same line. Most probably a name pape’ of three syl- 
lables was erased and the name Visvaripa consisting of four 
syllables engraved in its place. The ae Abad mentions a 
king named Madhi Sen after Lakhan Sen. This name wrongly 
sce ta chats is evidently Madhava Sena, and, if Atkinson ' is 
correct, we possess a record of this king also which however 
has still ye be deciphered. If we assume that in the Madana- 
pada grant the name of Madhava was erased and Visvarupa 
engraved in its stead, we have the following genealogy of the 
Sena kings of Bengal 


1 E. Atkinson’s ees p. 516; see J.A.S.B., 1896, pt. 1, p. 28, 
note 1. 


284 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [July, 1913. 
Virasena. 
Samantasena 
Hemantasena 
Vijayasena 
Vallalasena 
Laksmanasena 


Pee S] 
Madhava Sena (?) Visvaripasena. KeSavasena. 


The genealogical tables of Kulacaryas of Bengal also state 
that KeSavasena was the king who quitted Gauda.' These 
genealogical works are not generally noted for accuracy, but 
in this case the corroboration at least might be of some value. 
Thus in Bengal two or three sons of Laksmanasena actually 
succeeded him at Gauda. The last of them, KeSavasena, was 


Garhwal? Evidently, there was a civil war among the Sena 
princes and the vanquished prince escaped to the far North. 
It may be that he had become intimate with Asokacalladeva 
or Dasaratha, his brother, when they were at Bodh-Gaya on 


1 J.A.8.B., Vol. LXV, 1896, pt. 1, p. 24. 

_? The only known exceptions are the grants of Jayacandra of Ka- 
nauj to the Kgatriya Rajyadharavarman. 
Ind. Ant., Vol. XVIII, pp. 13443. 


Vol. IX, No. 7.] Laksmanasena. 285 
[V.8.] 


pilgrimage. This disturbance must have taken place before 
the fall of Kanauj, as the whole of Northern India was in a 
very disturbed state during the last decade of the twelfth 


followed each other on the throne of Bengal. Consequently 
when Muhammad-i-Bakhtiyar began his raids in Bihar, the 
Buddhist king was too weak and insignificant to repel him and 
the Hindu king too much occupied with his own troubles to 
attend to the peace of his Western border. His governors 
most probably were not strong enough to check these depreda- 
tions. Emboldened by his success, Muhammad-i-Bakhtiyar 
advanced up to Manér, near the junction of the Sone with the 
Ganges. Even the Sone was crossed and in one of his expedi- 
tions he stormed the monastery of Bihar. It was hardly a 
glorious exploit for the invader. What he imagined to be a 
fort was merely a strongly built monastery on a scalable hill- 
top which to a foreigner looked like a fort from a distance. 
The postern was carried by an assault, as the garrison must 
consisted of simple rustics hastily gathered together to 


author visited Bengal forty-two years after the conquest,® and 
his account of the invasion of Bengal seems to be based on the 
Narratives of old soldiers. Later Muhammadan historians 


| J.A.S.B., 1876, pt. I, pp. 331-32. 
2 Ibid. 1875, pt. I, p. 276. On this point compare Babu Monmohon 
Chuckerbutty, J. & P. A.S.B., Vol. V. p. 51. oe 
8 Raverty’s Translation of the Tabaqat-i-Nasiri, p. 663. 
+ Ibid., p. 552. 


286 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [July, 1913. 


have copied the account of the invasion of Bengal from 
Minhaj’s book and consequently are not worth much more. 
They gloat over the invasion and treat it as a mighty perform. 
ance and exaggerate the importance of the conqueror beyond 
all measure. Raverty has done full justice to them in his 
translation. ! 


From this point the Tabagat-i-Nasiri, instead of helping 
us, leads only to confusion. The first important blunder is 
the mention of Laksmanasena as the then king of Bengal 
and the description of his flight. Ihave already proved that 
at that time Kesavasena was on the throne of Bengal and 


clearly understood or Minhaj was not paying sufficient atten- 
tion to the narrative. Minhaj’s account of the conquest of 
Bengal consists of the following words :— 

‘The following year after that, Muhammad-i- Bukhtyar 
caused a force to be prepared, pressed on from Bihar, and 
suddenly appeared before the city of Nudiah, in such wise 
that ,no more than eighteen horsemen could keep up with 
m. 


The statement in itself looks very simple and nobody 
seems to have examined it carefully. Three different roads 
may be followed to reach Nudiah from Bihar :— 

(1) From Bihar to Bhagalpur or Mungir, then across the 
Ganges to Gaur and finally to Nudiah, after crossing the Gan- 


of 
Chota-Nagpur and Birbhum almost parallel to the modern 
(3) Through 
\ Ibid., p. 558. 
2 Tabaqat-i-Nasiri (Raverty’s Translation), p. 557. 


the pass at Sahibganj along the southern 


Vol. 1X, No. 7.] Laksmanasena. 287 
[NV .S.j 


bank of the Ganges and the western bank of the Bhagirathi, 
crossing the Bhagirathi at Nudiah. 

Minhaj has given no description of the route followed by 
the invaders, and it is evident that his store of information 
was very scanty. Out of the three routes mentioned above 
the third and the last one is the most practicable one, and it is 
suited for cavalry manceuvres. The first one involves the 
crossing of the Ganges twice, which seven hundred years ago 


generally followed by the invaders of Bengal and most probab- 
y the first Muhammadan invader of Bengal also followed it. 
The story of the great haste of the leader and his conquest of 
Nudiah with the aid of seventeen horsemen needs no explana- 
ion. The whole narrative is the result of hasty arrangement 
of ill-digested materials. First of all we have no authority to 


of the Sena Kingdom in Laksmanasena’s time was Vijayapura 


the flight of Laksmanasena is one of the grossest misrepresen- 
tations ever found in modern historiography. The reigning 
king KeSavasena was most probably put to flight. Bengal was 


tract between Bihar and Gaur (Gauda or Lakhnauti) in his life- 
time. The southernmost limit was Lakhanor or Lakhnor, 


was not conquered till the time of Mughisuddin Boe el 


of that territory (Rae Lakhmaniah’s), he left the city of 
Nudiah in desolation, and the place which is (now) Lakha- 


! Proc, A.S.B. 1898, p. 192. 2 Proc. & J.A.S.B., Vol. I, p- 45. 


288 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [July, 1913. 


nawati he made the seat of Government.’’ Muhammad i-Bakh- 
tiyar must have turned back from Nudiah and then occupied 
Lakhnauti or Gaur. The King of Jajnagar (Orissa) inva- 
ded Bengal in 1243-44 a.p., and at that time Lakhnor was 
the southernmost stronghold of Muhammadans. Finally we 
have a silver coin of Mughisudbin Yuzbak struck to com- 
memorate the final conquest of Nudiah in 653 a.4. = 1255 a.p.! 
There is hardly any other way of explaining the legend on this 
coin, the proper reading of the margin of which seems to be:— 
Geds « ixiin war, GS Logs worys gly wy i's eye! 402 


a Kleine wawe® 9 


Bengal commemorating the invasion of Assam.+ The Qanauj 
coin of Altamsh is a more perfect parallel, as the wording 


candra was still a reigning monarch. This discovery lends an 
additional support to the theory that the final conquest of 
Qanauj took place at least ten years after the death of Jaya- 
candra. Consequently it has to be admitted that the final 
conquest of Nudiah took place in 1253 a.p. The next step was 
taken 43 years later when the descendants of Balban were 
reigning independently in Bengal. Saptagrama, the part of 

thern Bengal, was reduced in 1298 a.p. by Muhammad 
Zafar Khan, who became its first Governor.§ 

The actual territory conquered by Muhammad-i-Bakhtiyar 
was very small in area, extending only to Deva-Kota or Deo- 


1 Cat. of Coins in the Indian Museum, Vel. II, pt. IL, p. 146, No. 6 
2 J.A.8.B. 1881, pt. I, p. 61. 4 um, Vol. IT, pt. II, p. 
* Cat. of Coins in the Indian Museum, Vol. II, pt. I, p. 2le The 
correct reading is aos and not. ate 
4 Ibid. Vol. II, pt. II, p. 152, No. 38 


6 Annual Report of the Archl. S ) i . 20—21. 
‘P.&TARR Vol ¥. c urv., N. Circle, for 1908, pp 


Vol. 1X, No. 7.] Laksmanasena. 289 
[NV.S.] 


account of the Muhammadan conquest of Bengal! would have 
een the siege and reduction of Gauda or Gaur, but this point 

was passed over in silence. The conqueror Muhammad-i-Bakh- 

tiyar Khilji is generally taken by the later Muhammadan 

on to be the General of Qutbuddin Aibak. Thus we 
ave :— 

‘*The Sultan was overwhelmed with astonishment 
to see this and nominated and appointed him ruler of the 
whole country of Lakhnauti in Bengala and sent him away.’’ * 

II. ‘*And the Kingdom of Bengal as an adjunct of the 
Empire of Delhi was left in the hands of Qutbuddin. Sultan 
Qutbuddin entrusted to Malik Ikhtiyaruddin Muhammad-i- 
Bakhtiyar Khiliji the Viceroyalty of the Provinces of Bihar 

228 ‘ 


booter. He had no connection either with the kings of Ghur 
or his Viceroy in India. 

In April 1911 aninscription of the time of Laksmanasena- 
deva was discovered on the base of an image of the goddess 
Candi at Dalbazar in the town of Dacca. There is an old ghat 
i, which is built entirely of 


a small modern brickbuilt shrine containing a linga and two 
images of stone, one of Candi and the other of Visnu. It 


1 Tabagat i-Nasiri (Raverty’s Trans ), pp. 572-73. ; 
Vl 2 Muntakhabu-t-Tawarikh (Trans. by Ranking in the Bib. Ind.), 
ol. I, pp. 82-83. ; - 
8 Riyazu-s-Salatin (Trans. by Maulavi Abdus Salam in the Bib. 
Ind.), p 59. 


290 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [July, 1913. 


whisk. The main figure stands under a sort of porch or niche 
robably intended to represent a temple. On the pedestal is 
the inscription in two lines on a plain band in front and 
a recessed corner on each side. Below this is a lion couchant 
in front with three devotees kneeling on three recessed corners 
on each side. On the top of the niche or shrine are two 
elephants, one on each side with vases in their upraised trunks 
as if they are pouring water over the head of the goddess. 
The inscription runs as follows :— 
‘ie ' (1) Sri-mal = Laksmana- 
(2) sena-devasya sam 3 
B (1) Maladei suta adhikrta Damodre | 
(2) -na Sri-Candidevi samaravdha tabhradakana 
C (1) Sri-Narayanena. 
tt) Pratisthit = etih. 


‘‘{In] the year 3 of [the reign of] the illustrious Laksmana- 
senadeva [this image of] the goddess Candi was begun by 
the Judge Damodra (Damodara). .. . 5 <0 p06 5.6 ss «Oe 
..+. [and] was dedicated by the illustrious Narayana.” 

The importance of this in cription is three-fold :— 

(1) It is the only stone inscription of the time of Laksmana- 
sena, which has been discovered up to date. The wording of 
the inscription, or more definitely the absence of such phrases 


qualifying phrases, such as pravarddhamana-vijaya-rijye or 


This is a well-known fact and examples are hardly necessary- 
This inscription when compared with those of Asokacalla an 
Daésaratha, of the 51st and 74th years of Laksmanasena res- 


(2) It is the oldest stone inscription in Eastern Bengal © 
according to state of our knowledge at present. 

It proves that though Ramapala was not the Ramavati 
of Ramapaladeva, it was a place of very great importance. 
But of this we shall have to say something more in another 
paper. 


PLATE XXiil. 


Journ, As. Soc. Beng., Vol. IX, 1913. 


IMAGE OF CANDI AT DACCA, DEDICATED IN THE 3RD YEAR OF LAKSMANASENE. 


Journ., As. Soc. Beng., Vol. IX, 1913. PLATE XXIV 


RMA DAT: 
OS AGB oui 


DACCA INSCRIPTION OF LAKSMANASENA, 


THE YEAR 3, 


36. On Two-Shouldered Stone Implements from Assam. 


By Hem Cuanpra Das-Goupta. 


In the collection of prehistoric antiquities of the Indian 
Museum, there are two stone implements which attracted my 
notice on account of their peculiar shape. It is proposed to 
describe them in this short note. 

Both these implements were obtained in Assam. One of 


during his viceroyalty in India. These implements were pre- 
sented to Lord Curzon by Mr. Penny, a tea-planter of Bishnath, 
and were all obtained in course of digging a ditch on his estate 
at Bishnath (Tezpur).. The second specimen (No. 6114) was 
obtained from Konarpara in Cachar. 

Both the adzes, as the accompanying plate shows, are of 
the shouldered type and of small size. The chisel-end of one 
(6114) is very marked and though one of the shoulders is prac- 
tically gone, the other is fairly preserved and gives an idea of 
the peculiarity of the type. An examination of the specimen 
also shows that only one surface has been ground down to 
produce the cutting edge. The other (6103) also appears to 
be crudely fashioned like a chisel and the shoulder is not so 


specimens obtained from Assam. 

After the publication of Theobald’s paper the late Mr. Ball 
described two adzes of the Burmese type, * found in Dhalbhum 
(Singbhum),—the similarity of which was very striking. Ball 
was uncertain of the origin of the implements, 1Le., whe her 
they were indigenous or imported, —though there was nothing 
in the petrology of the rocks used in their manufacture to 
dissuade one from believing in their being of local make. | : 

In an interesting communication to the Asiatic Society 0 

1 Mem. Geol. Surv. Ind., Vol. X, pt. 2, pp. 167-171. 

® Proc. As. Soc. Bengal, 1875, pp. 118-122. 


292 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (July, 1913. 


Bengal dealing with the history of Pegu,! Major-General Sir 
Arthur Phayre pointed out that there was a remarkable simi- 
larity between the language of the Mun (otherwise known as 
Mon or Talaing) of Pegu and that of the Munda of Chutia Nag- 
pur,” and almost immediately after the publication of Mr. Ball’s 
paper Sir Arthur Phayre pointed out that his (Mr. Ball’s) 

nd only corroborated the argument derived from linguistic 
sonuerat Otis. 


As remarked before, the specimen (No. 6114) is of arena- 
ceous clay while the specimen “ante 6103 is of slate. Implement 
No. 6114 was found in Cachar. A very short account of tne 
Geology of the North Gabba: hills has been published by Mr. 
LaTouc the,* and considering that Konarpara, the fin d-spot of 
specimen No. 6114, is situated at the foot of the Tertiary hills, 


al 1 Jour. As. Soc. Béiiadi Vol. XLII, pt. 1, pp. 23-57 me pp. ie 
- Op. Cit 35. 

, s Proc. As. Soc. Bengal, 1876 » P There appears to be a little con- 
foskad in Sir Arthur Phayre’s use of gon word Ko : Hoe uses the terms 
Munda and a as Synonymous, but the word Kol is used to include the 
Munda nd Oraon tribes, and thou gh th Mane and the Ho are 
a 1 sete Pa each ihe the Oraons are nite distinct from both of 
them, 

+ Records, Geol. Surv. Ind., Vol. XVI, pt. 4, pp. 202-203. 


Vol. IX, No. 7.] On Two-Shouldered Stone Implements. 293 
[N.8.] 


we can reasonably suppose that the implement was of local 
manufacture. 

pecimen No. 6103 has been obtained from Bishnath 
situated on the alluvium of the Brahmaputra. The Mikir hills 


as also from the Khasia and the Sylhet trap. It is worthy of 
note, in this connection, that highly decomposed trap was also 
found in the part of the Mikir hills examined, and according 
to Mr. Smith, is nearly related to that discovered by Mr. Medlicott 
in Sylhet.? 
It has been noted before that the discovery of the peculiar 
Burmese type of implements in Singhbhum led to the formation 


of the Archaeological Department, through whose courtesy I 
had an access to these specimens, and also Mr. J. Coggin Brown 
for some useful suggestions while drawing up this note. 


1 Mem. Geol. Surv. Ind., Vol. XXVIII, pp. 71-95. 
2 Op. Cit., p. 80. 


37. The Life and Works of Muhibb Allah of Bihar. 


By Mawuavi M. Hipayar Husain, Lecturer, Presidency 
College, Calcutta. 


It is a fact known to almost all students of Arabic litera- 
ture that the Persians have played a great part in enrich- 
ing that literature. Almost every standard work on various 
branches of learning is the outcome of their labour. 

The Indians too have tried their best to write books in 
the Arabic language, and some of them wrote such learned 


al-Shukir al-Kadi al-Bihari. He was born in Karah, a village 
in Bihar, India. He sat at the feet of Mawlina Kutb al-Din 
al-Shamsabadi (d. a.H. 1121, a.p. 1709), and became one of 
the most eminent Ulama of his time. He paid a visit to the 


pleased with him and he had to resign the service. However, 
through the recommendation of some of the nobles of ‘Alamgir’s 


capital of Afghanistan. 

On the death of the Emperor ‘Alamgir, Muhammad 
Mu‘azzam became the sovereign of India under the title 
of Shah ‘Alam I (a.m. 1119-1124, a.p. 1707-1712), and 

i i ” an 


made him Kadi al-Kudat (chief justice) of the entire Moghul 
Empire; but he did not live long to enjoy this title, and the 
great post, as he died a few months after in aH. 1119, A.D. 
1707. 

He is the author of the following works :— 

(1) al Jawhar al-Fard.—A treatise on indivisible atom 


296 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [July, 1913. 
ia Mahal Library, Lucknow, f. 23; Loth, Ind. Off., No. 581 
I 


2) Musallam al-Subtt.—A_ treatise an the principles of 
Muhammadan jurisprudence according to the Hanafi school, 
Rampur Library, p. 278; Ferangi Mahal Lanes. Lucknow, f. 
118; Bankipur Library, p. 716; Asiatic Society of Bengal (List 
of Arabic Boo oks), p. 23; Nizam’s Library, Hyderabad (Fann-i 
Usil Fikh), p. 4. Brinted in Aligarh a.n. 1297 (1879), and in 
Dehli a.n. 1311 (18 

Several se em are in existence on this work :— 

I. By Mulla Nizam al-Din B. Kutb al-Din al-Saha- 
lawi (d. a.H. 1161, A.D. 1748), Rampur Library, p. 
174; ae Mahal Library, f. 117; Loth, Ind. 
Off. 


II. By Mule Mabin B: Mulla Muhibb Allah al-Lucknawi 
(d. a.H. 1225, a.p. 1810), Rampur Library, p. 


274. 

III. By Bahr al-‘Ulim ‘Abd al-‘Ali Muhammad B. Nizam 
al-din al-Sahalawi (d. a.H. 1125, a.D. 1713) 
entitled Fawa@ ith al-Rahmiit ; Ferangi Mahal 
Library, f. 117; Nizam’s Library (Fann-i-Usil 

ikh), p. 6; lithographed, Lucknow, a.p. 1878. 
IV. By Mulla Hasan B. al-Kadi Ghulam Mustafa, 
Ne ae Library, p. 275; pee s Library, Hy- 
abad (Fann-i-Usiil Fikh), p p. 4. 
¥. Mawlana ‘Abd al-Hak B. Mawlina Fadl Hak al- 
Khairabadi (d. a.H. 1317, ap. 1899), Rampur 
Library, p. 275; lithographed, Cawnpore. 

VI. By Muhasiinad Bashir al-Din, entitled Kashf al- 
mee lithographed, Cawnpore, A.H. 1287 
(A.D. 1870). 


(3) Sullam al-‘Ulim.—A treatise on logic, Rampur Library, 
p. 451; Ferangi Mahal Library, Lucknow, f. 24; Bankipur Li- 
rete p. ee bgt Ind. Off. , 563; - Hekopraphed: Lucknow, a.H. 

5 (A.D 

As the WE forms part of a course in Arabic at the Indian 
Universities, many commentaries and supercommentaries and 
glosses have been written on the boo 

ome of the commentaries are here quoted :— 


By Hamd Allah B. Shukr Allah (d. 4.H. 1160, 4 
1747), Rampur Library, p. 454; Ferangi Mahal 
Library, f. 23; lithographed, Lucknow, a.H. 1264; 
Cawnpur, a.H. 1264 and a.n. 1278. 


Supercommentaries on the above :-— 


(a) By Sharif Khan B. Muhammad Akmal Khan (d. a.H. 
1231, a.p. 1815), Rauper Library, p. 439 


Vol. Tae 7.] Life and Works of Muhibb Allah of Bihar. 297 
] 


(b) By | ene Sa‘d Allah al-Muradabadi (d. a.H. 1294, a.p. 
77), Per eg Library, p. 

(c) Darah Ali B. Shuja‘at ‘Ali al-Lucknawi (d. a.H. 1281, 

1864 4), Rampur Library, p. 439; Ferangi Mahal 


Libra ary, f. 23. 

(d) Asad Allah Panjabi, Rampur Library, p. 440; Banki- 
pur Library, p. 418. 

(e) Ghulam Yahya B. Najm al-Din (d. a.n. 1128, 
1715), Rampur Library, p. 439; Ferangi Mahal Li 


rary, 
(f) Imad akDin al-Usmant, Rampur Library, p. 440. 
(g) Muhammad ‘Alam , Ferangi Mahal Library, f. 23. 
(h) Barkat Allah, Ferangi Mahal Library, f. 23. 
(7) al-Saiyid Muhammad or Maa al-Shi‘l, Ferangi Ma- 
hal Library, Lucknow, f. 2 
(j) and ee B. Fadl Hak i Kaira (d. a.H. 1317, 
1899), printed, La 
(k) Nahi Bakbsh aL-Paidabadt, eee ted: Cawnpur, 


(/) Mufti. ‘Abd ‘Allah Taunki, lithographed, Lahore, a.. 
A.D 


(m) ‘Abd al-Halim B. Amin Allah al-Lucknawi (d. 4.5. 
1285, a.p. 1868) under the title of Kashf al- 
Ishtibah, Rampur Library, p. 461; lithographed , 
ucknow, A.H. 1284. 

II. By Mulla Hasan B. Kadi Ghulam Mustafa, Ram- 
pur Library, p. 453 - Ferangi Mahal Library, f. 
22; Hosted: Lucknow, 1870. 


Supercommentaries :— 
(a) Tirab ‘Ali B. Shuja‘at ‘Ali (d. a.n. 1281, a.p. 1864), 
Ferangi Mahal Library, f. 2 
(6) Muhammad ‘Abd al-Hakim B. Amin Allah al-Lucknawi 
d. a.H. 1285, a.p. 1868), Ferangi Mahal Library, 
f, 23; lithographed, Lucknow, 1870. 
III. By Kadi Mubarak B. Muhammad Da’im Gipama’i 
al-Faraki (d. a.H. 1162, a.p. 1748), Rampur 
Library, p. 455; Ferangi Mahal Library, f. 22 ; 
Loth, Ind. Off., 567; lithographed, Lucknow, 4.4. 
1265 (A. D. 1848). 


Supercommentaries :— 

(a) By Mawlanai Fadl Hak B. Mawlana Fadl Imam al- 
Khairabadi id, cam. 1274, A.D. 1857 cae Bempar 
Library, p. 440; Ferangi Mahal Library, f. 22; Ba 
pur Beno p. 181; lithographed, Dehli, 4.n. 1317 
(A.D. 1899). 


298 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [July, 1913.] 


(b) aoe Muhammad Ahsan B. Muhammad Sadik, known 
Ha fiz Daraz Pishawari (d. a.H. 263, A.D. 
1846), set ie Library, p. 400; Ferangi Mahal Li- 
brary, f. 22. 
(c) mace “Abd al-Hakim B. ‘Abd al-Rabb (d. 4.8. 1288, 
D. 1871), Rampur Library, p. 441 
(d) By Nar al-Islam, Rampur Library, p. 441. 
(e) By Mufti Muhammad Yusuf, B- Muhammad Asghar 
H. 1286, a.D. 1869), Ferangi Mahal Library, 


f. 22. 
(f) By Sa‘d Allah al-Kandhari, shed al-Hawashi al- 
Kashifa, lithographed, Dehli, a.w. 1300 (a.p. 1883). 
IV. By Muhammad Mubin B. Wasa Allah al-Lucknawi 
(d. a.H. 1225, a.p. 1810), entitled Mir‘at al- 
Shurith, Rampur Library, p. 456; Ferangi Mahal 
Library, f. 23; ; lithographed, Lu cknow, A.H. 1266 
By Muhammad ‘Ali al-Mubaraki al- Jawnpiari, en- 
titled Mi‘raj al-Fuhum, Rampur Library, p. 456. 
Vi. By “ane ‘Ali B. Fath Allah al-Husaini al-Sandili 
oe i - 1200, a.p. 1785), Rampur Library, p. 


= 


VII. By Muhammad Wali B. Ghulam Mustafa al-Saha- 
lawi, agri a.H. 1155, a.p. 1742; Rampur 
Library, p. 456. 
VIII. By ‘Abd Allah Muhammad al- Saharanpuri, Ram- 
pur Library, p. 456. 
IX. By gry Sharf al-Din Rampiri, Rampur Library, 


p. 4 
X. Bahr al-‘Ulum ‘Abd al-‘Ali B. Nizam al-Din al- 
Sahalawi (d. a.n. 1225, a.p. 1713), Bankipur 
Library, p. 396; Ferangi Mahal Library, f. 23; 
lithographed, Dehli, 1891 
XI. By Sone aa Firaz B. Muhabbat, Rampur Li- 
. p. 456: Bankipur Library, p. 419. 
XII. By Mulla Ashraf, \ eiooeintg as A.H. 1150, A.D. 


p. 
XIV. By Co ‘Azim Pishawart (d. a.H. 1275, 
A.D. 1859), Loth, Ind. Off., 571. 
XV. me Muhammad “Ali Jawnpart, Loth, Ind. Off., 


‘ stig fe :—Azad al-Bilgirami, Subhat al-Marjan, p. 76; 
Siddik Hasan, reat al-Nubala, p. 905; Fakir Muhammad al- 
Lihari, Hada’ ik al-Hanafiya, p. 431: Brockelmann, Gescht. d. 
Arab: Litter IT, p. 420, and The Encyclopaedia of Islam, Vol. I 


—_~S 


Sp Perey git oy? tt aC poate et 


38. Psychology of Indian Music, 
By AtrreD WestHarpP (Mus. Doc.). 


What does the European know of Oriental music ? 
What does the Englishman, who enjoys the hospitality of 


musical amateur but al those Europeans who treat of 
Oriental music in writing) all hold Oriental, and especially Indian, 
music to be a kind of noise produced sometimes by harsh 
voices and sometimes by a still harsher flute, accompanied by 
the low brumming sound of the native drum. 
uropeans from lack of opportunity have little or no 
ich i y often sacred in 
character and confined to temples, from which not only Euro- 
peans but all unbelievers are rigidly excluded, they have got 
the impression that all Oriental music is a confused medley of 
the subject dared pro- 
Is it not a most remarkable 


country in probing problems of this description, has not 
et, so to speak, entered the antechamber o 
soul of the East. 


f Europe. 
hristianity, the most negative religion of the world, the 
aspirations come 


product of the Hebrew race, whose negative — 


world—Europe. It goes without saying that the positive spirit 
of Europe became over-excited t 


300 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [July, 1913. 


tradiction ; the desire of conquest, perverted according to the 
peaceful character of Christianity, became commercialism. If 
once war killed the bodies of men, now commercialism does 
its best to kill their souls; in this sense an English Bishop has 
himself proclaimed, ‘‘ If feudalism was bad, plutocracy is infin- 
itely worse because of its powers of corruption.’’ There is no 


abandonment to things and objective laws. Did not Christ him- 
self pronounce the Divine sentence : ‘‘ What shall it profit a 
man if he gain the whole world and lose his own soul?’’ 

Th 


true realism.”’ 

The present state of music in Europe and in the East, this 
state which is the cause of the beforementioned lack of musical 
understanding between East and West, is the following: 
Europe, which, in its whole moral life, subordinates, as we have 
seen, her soul to external duties, subordinates her music to the 
laws of sounds, sounds, as sounds, being as exterior to the musi- 
cal soul, as all that surrounds us is exterior to what 7s (or what 
ought to be) in us. What does that mean? The music of 
Europe follows the laws of sounds, of physics and acoustics and 
of physiology, and is not psychological. The basis itself of the 
actual European music, the equal temperament which regulates 

i 8 


’s will. Here you have the musical 


I See for further details the “« Psychology of Sounds,’” of the Ger- 
man Professor Carl Stumpf. SEN OL ere See 


Vol. cope 7.| Psychology of Indian Music. 301 
[V.S.] 


order to please his ear. The Oriental plays or sings in order to. 
express emotions for which there are no words and no gestures, 


no designs and no colours. The ear and sonorousness, in 


regret in their arrogant and ignorant reports; therefore the 
Educational Council yt 


la Devi and Pandit Kishn mbar are alre 
work, and ich musically has found sympathetic 
audience even in London, thanks to Ratan Devi, rs. 


and human duties from an Oriental rather than from the average 
European point of view. 

Now we have to proceed from Indian musical folklore to 
Indian artistic music. We shall again employ European art- 
istic music which we know, as a means of understanding 
Indian artistic music which we know less. We have spoken of 
the laws of acoustics, to which every sound of the present days’ 
European music, in so far (and that is very far) as it employs 
the piano, is subjected. These acoustic laws are termed laws of 
‘*eoncord ’’ ; that is, every sound of European artistic music is 
intentionally abandoned to laws which have nothing whatever 


302 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [July, 1913. 


to do with the artist’s will. It is true the greatness of a com- 
poser consists also in Europe in that he finds new combina- 
tions of sound; but every great composer, who does so, acts 


naturally could not refrain from expressing his own will, has 
been called by the musical authorities of his time a musical 
‘**pig.’’ And the more a composer dares to evade the laws 
of acoustics, the more do the musical authorities endeavour 
to resist him. I need not remind you of the musical history 
of Europe: it will suffice to mention, for instance, the works 
of Monteverdi, or Gluck, or Debussy. 

here is nothing of all that acoustic unmusicality in India. 
The Indian theory of sound relation is the before-mentioned 
theory of ‘‘ Ragas.’’ The ragas are melodies which have no 
harmonic obligation whatever. They are melodies expressing 
feeling freely and frankly. It is true that the composers of 
India are in a certain sense officially bound to keep to the tradi- 
tional ragas as European composers are bound to keep to con- 


even been taken into consideration in European music, and 
which now, so to speak, exists no longer in Europe, that free- 
dom, called improvisation, is the foundation of Indian artistic 
musical theory. Will new Europe—that Euorpe which tries to 
get rid as well of Christianity as of commercialism—will that 


sionally also upon the third part of the European bar. This 
accent of the bar is actually disappearing, and European music 
of to-day has, so to speak, no | 
The accent of the barred measure was its last remnant. In- 
stead of pointing out the predominance of certain sounds of the 


sures the time which has nothing to do with the sounds them- 


Vol. IX, No. 7.] Psychology of Indian Music. 303 
[V.S8.] 


selves, which is as exterior to the sound as acoustics, instead 
of measuring the intensive value of these sounds. This is the 
second psychological sin European musical theory nowadays 
commits. he Indian theory of tala emphasises just this 
intensive value of sounds, which the Europe of to-day ne- 
glects officially more than it ever did before. And what 
is the psychic meaning of intensity in music? Not only 
in music, but in all psychic life, it is changing intensity which 
produces a changing quality of sensations. Consult on the 
subject of this general psychological law the works of scientists 
of first rank, such as Exner, Sigwart and others; in exact 
science Europe is ahead of the rest of the world and it is this 
exact European science which provided me with the means of 
proving the high, the incomparable inner value of Eastern 
music. Musically speaking, it is the intensity of each sound 
which is the ‘‘raison d’etre’’, the mother (so to speak) of 
each sound. And changing intensity is the reason of chang- 
ing pitch of sounds. There is psychologically no feeling in 


= 


comes to the same thing.”’ 

Here you have the psychological reason of the ‘‘tala.’’ 
Tala is a means of causing each sound, which is, as we have 
seen, originated by the free will of the musician, to satisfy by 
changing degrees of intensity all the demands of his musical 
soul and to enter the musical soul of the listener. It is 
true that the Indian tala is in so far related to European 
barred measure, as the series of rhythms which the “ tala’’ 
produce themselves; and this is a point which will have to be 
revised by new India. In any case, even in its present condi- 
tion the tala is much more expressive than the accents of the 
European barred measure, which so to speak have ceased to 
exist in European artistic music and consequently do not 
contribute much to the inner life of the sounds. The tala is 
much longer and much richer in shadings 

x 


most advanced Europeans agree upon the artistic superiority 


r of Tar 
your memory, and a certain lishman, named 
Jones (Sir William Jones), the founder of the spre 
of Bengal, himself said in a speech before this Society : 


304 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [July, 1913.] 


‘*Hindoo system of music has, I believe, been formed on 
‘* truer principles than our own; and all the skill of the native 
‘‘composers is directed to the great subject of their art, the 
‘‘natural expression of strong passions, to which melody ea 
‘*the European sense) indeed is often sacrificed. Why 
should the England of to-day not follow the steps of Sir William 
Jones and undertake the study of Indian music ? 

English national music would undeniably profit by this 
study, as [ explained already in my study ‘‘ The Musical Soul 


that England’s future in India depends very much on Eng- 
land’s understanding of Indian psychology. 


PRERIN ARNO a ate ce 


39. Nor’westers and Monsoon Prediction. 


By EK. Diesy. 


INTRODUCTION, 


These few remarks are set out to suggest a correlation be- 
tween the leading characteristics of the nor’ westers occurrin 
during the hot weather transition periods and the following 
monsoon, together with a discussion of the probable formation 
of these interesting minor storms. The paper is intended to 
be suggestive only since the author has unfortunately collected 
insufficient data to establish the theory or frame anything 
more than tentative rules of forecasting. The latter would 
probably need the experience of some fifteen or twenty years 
before anything of value could be deduced. 

istory of monsoon prediction in India has been a 
chronicle of the continual widening of the area of enquiry and 
observation. Deductions obtained from the preceding winter’s 


is a balancing of conclusions drawn from Abyssinia, South 
America, Australia and the remoter Indian Ocean. A forecast 
based upon so many, often conflicting, variables cannot hope 
to be completely satisfactory, though the Meteorological De- 
partment may congratulate itself upon the near approach to 
success with which the annual problem is attacked. 

One of the main difficulties of the situation is the lack of 
well-marked air disturbances of any great duration during the 
Six months before the rains. In Bengal the date of the re- 
versal of the lower air-currents from north to south and the 
commencement of the hot weather is about the only well- 
marked phenomenon from which deductions can be drawn. 
There are no large cyclonic storms and the investigation of the 
upper air-currents has up to now, for lack of sufficient money 
and trained observers, been insufficiently extensive to prove of 

In order to obtain well-marked phenomena metecrologi- 
cal research has had to travel extensively round the southern 
hemisphere. 

There is, however, one series of events in India itself 
which has been overlooked by investigators in search of ope 


306 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. { Aug.-Sept., 1913. 


observations Seti in his papers on anemographical records 
published in 1910, seem to represent the entire literature on 
the subject. An sirtatoatang project to investigate them more 
thoroughly appears to have been discussed several years ago, 

but it fell through upon, I believe, the death of the scientist 
who made the proposal. Sir John Eliot’s papers contain a 
wealth of statistical detail with respect to accompanying baro- 
metric and wind changes. But there is practically no discus- 


certain specified conditions of the barometric gradient, at the 
intersection of the wind streams down the Ganges and Brahma- 
putra valleys. And there the matter has been left 
To the observer, however, who is interested in watching 
these brief storms, two features ‘will gradually attract attention. 
The first is that a storm on one night will very often be followed 
in the two succeeding evenings by similar but much teebler dis- 
turbances, showing that the large displacements of air and 
the shifting of temperatures have not altogether obliterated cer- 
tain fundamental conditions which gave the storm its particular 


while those of the following year will exhibit a similar family 
resemblance to one another in the same year but not to those 
in the preceding year. One year will produce a series of the 
typically complete nor’ wester with its double line of clouds and 
the lightning occurring after the heavy rain cloud has arrived, 
while another year—such as the present—will me heavy 
lightning for some time before the wind-storm has arriv 

rom this annual grouping of storm types there peo at 
once the probability that careful investigation may show a 


direct relation between the nor’wester type and the character » 


of the following monsoon. 

It is obvious that the cloud form in a nor’ wester is due 
to two main sets of influences—the alterations in pressure gra- 
dients in surrounding territory and the nature of the upper 
air-currents into which it penetrates. Its form can be seen: 


Vol. IX, Nos. 8-9.] Nor’ westers and Monsoon Prediction. 307 
[N.S.] 


smallness of area of the nor’wester is an advantage from this 
point of view. In larger storms the cloud changes are slower 
and more widely diffused. Here they are rapid and concen- 
trated. One observer can therefore do the work that would 
otherwise require a dozen scattered over a prolonged storm 


ea. 
The proving or disproving of the theory tentatively sug- 
gested here is therefore a matter requiring small expense and 
little organization. It requires a single interested observer who 
registers what he sees and is sufficiently aaeniy to extend his 
observation over an adequate number of yea 


Sir J. Eviot’s RESEARCHES. 


As regards the barometric and wind changes, Sir John 
Eliot in his paper of 1876 shows that the conditions under 
which nor’ westers occur are an increase in the relative pres- 
sure oe the middle of the Bay, with its consequent of a dif- 


fused shallow low pressure over the Delta. This he conceives 
fo) oisture current of considerable 

depth from the south-west across the Bay towards the Arracan 
- his current c the flow of the upper northerly 


rent across Bengal, and before the moist current can be de- 
flected into the depression in Bengal a down-rush of cold air 


t m 
increase in pressure in the Bay is probably due to the south- 
west current and not vice versa, this may be accepted provi- 
sionally. He then goes on to show from meteorological statis- 
tics that the distinguishing feature of these storms is an actua 
rise in the barometer as they approach. Then, coincident with 
the greatest rise of the phenieer the temperature suddenly 


t 
nba rapidly and the wind reverses its direction from the south- 

t to the north-west. Afterwards there follows rain which 
may be small or large in amount. He ascribes these changes 
to the sudden displacement vertically downwards of a large 
body of air due to diminished pressure. In the words of 
modern aeronauts the tpt is caused by the vertical filling up 
of a large ‘‘hole’’ in the air. 

In his later paper on ‘‘ Anemographic observations recorded 
at Saugor Island from March 1880 to February 1904’’ (published 
in 1905), Sir John Eliot appears to connect the storms more 
closely with the normal hot weather depression which stretches 
from West Bengal through Chota Nagpur to Upper Sind or the 
North-West Punjab. The three air currents—from the Bay and 
down the Ganges and pert valleys—create a feeble 
cyclonic movement, and w the shallow depression ago 
towards north Bengal the™ Bay winds recurve to pass u 


308 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [ Aug.-Sept., 1913. 


Gangetic plain, and this emphasizing of the cyclonic movement 
gives rise to ‘‘ thunderstorms’’ over the whole of Bengal. 
Nor’westers, he records, occasionally pass seawards, but die 
out not far from land and are therefore only occasionally felt 
on Saugor Island itself. 


THe TypicaL Nor’ WESTER. 

preceding section I have dealt with already 
recorded facts and theories. It is necessary now to consider 
more intimately the individual structure of the nor’ wester. Its 
distinctive features are its rapidity of approach and the rapid 
transverse motion of the clouds in addition to the forward 
movement. The storm, in its most typical form, is first seen 
as a big bank of vapour on the north-western horizon. Its 


ing briskly towards it from the south and south-east. As the 
cloud comes nearer it is seen that in addition to the centre 
core of cloud moving towards the spectator there is a bank of 
somewhat lower cloud also moving forward but having in ad- 
dition a very rapid transverse motion from west to east, or the 
same direction in which the winds revolve in the big cyclonic 
storm systems. Just before this cloud arrives overhead 


appears to rise. But this may be only the effect of the dying 
away of the wind. I have not tested the matter. Under the 


there is a rotary or churning motion or sometimes even & 
rapid motion from the south to north towards the second 
wave. ith the second wave comes a temporary increase of 
the wind which has been continuing to blow from the north- 
west. But the main feature of the second wave is the heavy 


clear up almost completely. As regards the lightning which 
accompanies the storm, it is associated with all three phases, 
but is mainly confined to the second wave and the subsequent 


p : 

This then is the typical storm. But by no means all nor’- 
westers follow it exactly. In many cases there is only one 
transverse-moving wave. In other cases the cloud does not 
clear up after an hour or more of rain. The rain continues to 
fall, but less furiously, and a great deal of lightning takes place 


Vol. IX, Nos. 8-9.j Nor’ westers and Monsoon Prediction. 309 
[N.8.] 


in the cloud canopy, sometimes of an impressive nature. In 


such cases there is often, but by no means always, a recrudes- 
cence of the storm late in the same evening or very early next 
mornin Nor’westers will sometimes come from other 


even from the south, in 66 case the distinguishing feature 
being the presence of the wave or waves of cloud moving for- 
ward rapidly, but with a rapid transverse motion as well. e 
transverse movement, also is occasionally from east to west, 
but in such cases the nor’ wester is of very feeble strength. 


Its FoRMATION. 


n considering the formation of the storm one must 
Bese for the wind, temperature and vapour tension noted 


North. 
pad Sane % South. 


nN hint 
a 4 ia 

nee 
ht a 


A. First storm cloud, moving eno from W.S.W. to E.N.E. and 

trav mgt towards south south-eas 
Area of descending catbiale: winds “clear with a few cloud eddies 

which ss anatase in the cold dr 

C. Main cloud mass, of which the adeait ancing surface has very definite 
outline owing to great difference in temperature and humidity of 
the air-currents. 

a. Southerly wind from Bay. 

b. Still air layer between a and c. 

c. Upper northerly win 

d, First up-current of lower heated a 

e. Dust storm at ground level at pone of the two currents. 

fj. Heavy r 

g. Upper se wind deflected downwards to pass under main cloud 


h. Lightning usually occurs most plentifully at this ae in the cloud— 
seldom cloud to earth, which if it occurs takes at f. 


= Sir John Eliot, and also for the transverse motion and the 

urious double layer of nse ara clouds with a stretch of com- 
paratively clear sky between. My own view is that the storm 
begins in the first bank "of clouds. In any hot country 
where the — _ lower layer of - is heated to a high 
temperature by the sun there must always be a condition 
of veiled instability desiee the daytime between the light 


310 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. { Aug.-Sept., 1913. 


expanded lower layer, and the cold denser air above. Usually 
the tendency to large scale vertical currents is checked by a 
low vertical barometric gradient and by the fact that the air 
currents of the upper and lower atmosphere are moving fairly 
rapidly but in opposite directions. Anything, therefore, that 
would alter the gradient or reduce the speed of the winds 


beginning to flatten out, with the south wind, suddenly de- 
ected upwards, produces an aspirating effect which is shown by 
the dense clouds of dust usually associated with the first cloud. 


Nor a CyYcLone But Aan OBLIQUE AiR Sir. 


from the SSE usually. It forces its way up into a northerly 
air-current. Being a com paratively narrow bank it rapidly 
acquires the new velocity added to its own and their component 
is roughly eastward. 

f this proves ultimately to be the correct explanation of 
the transverse motion two important corollaries follow e 
first place it is evident that this motion is not an evidence of 
any cyclonic motion and the storm we see is not a mild typhoon, 


rently favourable symptoms. But it is exceedingly seldom 
that any hail falls. The absence of a large eddy seems sufti- 
ciently to explain this, and in its turn it supports the above 
theory of the cloud motion. 


at 
at 


i 


Peers 


Mo I dns Ml 


Vol. IX, Nos. 8-9.] Nor’ westers and Monsoon Prediction. 31% 
[NV.8.] 


The second deduction is equally important. This nucleus 
of the first bank of clouds is carried to the west and with it is 
carried the upper part of the column of air that feeds it from 
below. This creates a similar tendency towards an upward 
movement in the lower air to the west. This is emphasized by 
the deflection of the cold wind downwards which so increases 
the pressure on the lower air as to force it upwards. The up- 


ward and south, but actually creates a similar upthrust on its 
westerly side. What happens is that the surface—or rather, the 
layer—of still air separating the lower south wind and the upper 
north wind is being slit rapidly as the storm travels south-east. 
Fresh storm material is being formed there during the motion 
of the storm. It is this which explains the unusually rapid 
motion of the storm across the sky. 

Three motions therefore exist. There is first the general 


is 
it should easily afford information of its height. The structure 
of the bank and of the main cloud will afford evidence of the 
depth of the boundary layer and the conditions prevailing in 
the upper current. 

Speaking generally one would expect that if the upper 
northerly current is, on the average, above its normal strength 
the advance of the monsoon current will be delayed. But if it 
is above its usual strength it will probably be colder and 


312 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [Aug.-Sept., 1913.] 


dryer than usual; the difference in constitution and character 
between the lower and upper currents will be more pronounced ; 
and the nor’wester will be more definite in cloud outline and 
more nearly approaching the type described above. On the 
other hand, if the upper current be weak, thereby indicating 
little opposition to the approach of the monsoon, then the 
clouds will be loose in texture and the transverse motion small. 
That this may possibly prove correct is shown by the fact that 
the nor’westers of the present year differed strikingly from the 
described type, the approach of the first cloud bank being 
anteceded by a smooth very high layer of grey cloud. On the 
other hand some few years ago when the monsoon was by no 
means plentiful almost every nor’wester was of the described 


i. 


(Investigations for which more than one observer is needed). 
(2) Length of path of individual storm. 
(6) Length of storm face. 
(c) Distribution of simultaneous nor’ westers and the dis- 
etween them. 
(d) Velocity of storm travel. 
(e) Variation of rainfall at different points of its path. 
(/) Phenomena at commencement of formation of a nor’- 
wester and during its gradual dispersion. 


I. 


(Investigations which can be conducted by isolated observers). 
(a) Structure of each nor’wester and variation of struc- 
ture during the year. 
(6) Variation of structure from year to year. 
(c) Correlation between the type-structure of the year and 
the date of arrival and the rainfall of the monsoon. 


lai at ee 


40. Notes on the Pollination of Colocasia Antiquorum. 
By Mauve L. CLEa@Hory. 


(With Plate XVII.) 


grows all the year round, but flowers only in the rainy season 
from July to September. It is a near relation of the familiar 


a spadix which is almost completely enclosed in a long narrow 
yellow spathe. The spadix is much shorter than the spathe 

and consists of four distinct parts :— 
(i) An upper smooth pointed portion about an inch or 
two in length which bears no flowers, called the 


pores. Each pair of minute openings, with the 
lobes on either side of it, really represent the top of 
one of the sessile anthers which make up the 


synandrium. 

(iii) A slender middle portion, about an inch long, and 
corresponding in height to the constricted part of the 
spathe, composed of a few elongated and irregularly 
shaped bodies—-rudimentary flowers. 

(iv) The lowest part of the spadix which is rather thick 
and about an inch and a half long is enclosed in the 


green colou 
flowers. Each pistillate flower consists of three 
united carpels forming a one-celled ovary and a 


314 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [Aug.-Sept.; 1913. 


sessile slightly three-lobed stigma. Within the 

numerous orthotropous ovules arranged 
on three parietal placentas. Neither the staminate 
nor pistillate flowers have any perianth. 


In the Kachu plant, as in other Arums, the flowers are 
protogynous, a condition in which the stigmas ripen first. To 
adapt this condition to the employment of insect agency for the 
purposes of cross-pollination the infloresence of the Colocasia 
passes through three stages. In the first: stage the lower dark 


lower part of the spathe gradually closes, and by the evening 
the flies are completely imprisoned in the spathe. The spathe 
is erect, and the narrow portion is not sufficiently constricted 
to prevent the flies passing into the upper portion. On the 
following morning the upper part of the spathe will be found 
to have partly opened, but the lower part remains tightly 
closed. This is the second stage; the staminate flowers are 
mature, and the anthers have commenced to shed their pollen, 


Journ. As. Soc, Beng. Vol [X. 1953, 


PLATE XVI, 


| 
i 


Fig 1. First stage. 


Fig. 2. Second stage. 


ome 
— 
>) 
~~ 
i) 
u 
Oo 
Y 
~ 
) 
> 
} 
x ) 
; 
p= 


-OCASIA ANTIQUORUM. 


Vol, 1X, Nos, 8-9.] The Pollination of Colocasia Antiquorum. 315 
[NV.8.] 


above and passing downwards reach the pistillate flowers, 
where they are imprisoned until the pollen is ready for 
disposal. In the Kachu the lower part of the spathe delib- 
erately opens zai closes to capture the flies, and again opens 
above to release them. The floral mechanism of the Kachu 
differs thavetors Hon that of the cuckoo-pint 
n Arum maculatum the primary attraction is the thick, 
dasiemiedie end of the spadix which projects out of the spathe 
ata very early stage, and the subordinate attraction is the 
decomposing smell of the inflorescence. In the colocasia the 
primary attraction is the strong and unpleasant odour issuing 
out of the partially opened spathe in the first stage, and the 
subordinate attraction, the colour - the appendage and the 
food for the flies. in the form of po 
During the rains when the se is very damp the upper 
part of the spadix while still attached es the plant commences 


the minute maggots of these flies. It seems, therefore, that 
the me of a flies, which have been identified in the Indian 

us ecies of Acalytrate Muscidae, is closely 
pater with that of the Kachu for the purposes of cross- 
pollination. 


BAB PDP 


41. The Date of Asoka’s Coronation. 


By KaAsui-PrasAp JAyaswaL, M.A. (Oxon.). 


The date of the coronation of Asoka is the mio 2it starting 
point in the sip of India before the rise of t ptas 
for the evidence on the point is of the most voliable. kind. The 
hypothetical dats for the accession of Chandra-Gupta ee ae 
which is often taken as the starting date is based m 
surmises, and is far less reliable than the date which we can 5 ie 
from the data connected with the coronation year of Asoka. 

As to the date for the latter event there are at present two 
opinions: according to the one the abhisheka took place in 
264? B.c. and according to the other in 269 B.c.,° both assuming 
321 B.c. as the year of the accession of Chandra-Gupta Maurya. 
The difference between the two results partly from a difference 


Puranas giving twenty-five years, while the Mahavaméa, 
twenty-eight) and ti! from the tentative calculation under- 
lying the latter view.* 4 us now see whether it is possible to 
have a more definite ing. 

The undated seakoaiet of Asoka, which is numbered xiii 
by scholars and which is substantively the last among the rock- 
edicts, gives us the information that when the “edict was 


Antiochus had come to the throne in 261 3.c.6 The date of the 
edict must, therefore, fall between these two years. 

The date of the edict is the date of the publication of the 
complete series of the rock-edicts, for edict xiii is the conclud- 
ing? substantive part of the series, and at the same time it is 


321 B.c. according to V. Smith (Early pag of Tedée; 2nd Ed., 
Pp. 39); between. 320 and 315 8.0. according to Kern (Manual of In d. 
Es p. l 
hys Davids, Encyclopaedia Britannica (llth ed.), II, 764; 
Fleet, ibid , XIV, 623; Geiger, Mahavaméa (1912), xxxiii. 
’ V. Smith, ‘boobs (1910), p 
4 Cf. «*The thirteenth Rook Edict ag mig the synchronism 


Asoka with five Hellenistic kings... date at which ail 
i ere alive together . The ro icts belong to 
the thirteenth and nt coe years of the reign of rec oned fr 


rites othe ene 960-40 is probably nearly correct.’? V. Sm ith, Asoka, 


ise Bevan, House o/ Seleucus, i uate 178. 

6 Rawlinson, Parthia, p. 45. Bevan , Enc. Bri., h ed., xxiv, 604. 

1 The portion numbered ‘ XIV’ by scholars is aaa a colophon to 
the series ; the series really ends with edict ‘ XIII.” 


318 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. {Aug.-Sept., 1913. 


not an earlier edict reproduced but is a new one written for 
the occasion. The date of the publication of the series, and there- 
fore also of edict xiii, cannot be earlier than the fourteenth year of 
the coronation of Asoka, as a preceding edict (No. v) mentions 
that year. 

258 B.c. would be the latest possible date of rock-edict 
xiii. The inscription would not have contained the name of 
Magas among the living, had it been published after 258 B.c., the 
date of his death. Now the edict itself is at least fourteen years 
later than the Abhisheka. Therefore (258+14=) 272 B.o. is 
almost the lowest possible year for the coronation of Agoka. I 


of the publication of the rock-edicts. It is thus possible that 
it was 257 B.c. when the edicts were published in the fourteenth 


on his friendship with these individual rulers, it was a matter 
of vital importance to those charitable institutions established 
in Hellenistic kingdoms and to the propaganda generally to 
send news of a change amongst the personnel of those rulers. 

ven assuming that the missionaries of ASoka remained silent, 


emperor’s friends, the news would have none the less travelled 
into India in a short time. The arch-rebel Magas, who had 


from the political stage would have with all rapidity reached, 
and become widely known in, Bactria which was already 
brewing with the ferment of political ambition similar to that 
of Magas. And if the intelligence department under the 


orses (amongst other things), would not have failed to bring 
the information into this country. If the diplomatic man 


1 I, 14, pp. 24-26: I, 16 
, 3 I, 16, p. 32. 
2 See Artha-Sastra, II, 11, pp. 79, 81; II, 30, p. 133 
of Yo 


> . ; A Bisi mi ht 
all asad Visas, the neighbours Yonas (ie Bactstana| of phe IE. 
ot meee ected with some Chi ace 


a form of Biainas 


inas or Van. I 
Hannah of the Calcutta Bar for the latter suggestion, 


Vol. IX, Nos. 8-9.] The Date of Aéoka’s Coronation. 319 
(N.S. 


failed to do his duty there is no reason why the economic 
man should have also slackened his activity at the same 
oment 


there were resident envoys at the Courts of Asoka 
friends,' at any rate at that of Antiochus, as there had been 
Seleucid ambassadors at Pataliputra, and they would have 
sent all important political news to Pataliputra by messengers and 
couriers. The news of his death must have reached the court 


the Abhisheka.* 

Again, the fourteenth year of ASoka’s Abhisheka could not be 
dated earlier than 261 B.c., that is, the accession of Antiochus. 
The first year of the Abhisheka, therefore, could not be earlier 
than (261 +14) 275 8.c. This would be the highest possible limit 
of the Abhisheka according to our data. The exact date would 
thus be somewhere between 275 B.c. and 271 B.c., both years 
inclusive. 

Let us test the highest limit and see if we could not reduce 


was reigning over the Prachis on the Ganges 
We learn from the Pali authorities that Asoka was conse- 


years, but its details, which seem to be perfect and borne out 
in the main by other documents, appropriate only 133 years to 
the rulers individually. The difference of four years might rep- 
resent the alleged four pre-sacramental years of ASoka’s reign,* 
which would have been regarded by orthodox Hindu chroniclers 


1 It is implied in the edict (XIII) that Agoka’s envoy did go to 
Magas: ‘‘ Even those to whom the ditas of the Devanampriya do not 
go,’’ etc. 

2 The unknown passage from the Indus to Susa of Nearchus had 
taken, with its halts, about six months. A journey overland, at the rate 
i have been casily accomplished in eight 
months, even if we exclude the pace of royal couriers who exis 
India in those days (sighra-vahanas, Arth» Sastra, iI, 34. p. 141). The 
campaign of Alexander from E a taken, with all the diffi- 
aulties and delays of war, only six months. 

8 For the confirmation of this from Indian data see below, p. 322. 


4 Cf. V. Smith, E.H.1., p. 185, n. 


320 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [Aug.-Sept., 1913. 


as a period of interregnum from the point of view of the sacred 
Hindu Law. In any case there is no reason why we oe dis- 
believe the datum of the Pali chronicles on the point 

Taking our highest limit, 275 B.c., we obtain the highest 
possible date of ASoka’s accession as (275 + 4)279B.c. Ifwea add 
to this (24 + 25)! forty-nine years, the period covered by the two 
preceding reigns, we get 328 B.c. according to the calculation as 
a possible date for Chandra-Gupta’s accession. But this as we 
have seen above could not have occurred before 325 B.c. ; thatis, 
at least three years must be deducted from the possible highest 
limit. Hence the accession of Aéoka could not have taken place 
earlier than 276 B.c. (279—3=276), and his Abhisheka earlier 
than (276 —4) 272 8.c. The higher limit, thus, narrowed down, 
near setae with the lowest as obtained above. 

w of this result the tentative dates 264 and 269 B.c., 
it seems, mould now be abandoned. The improbability of the 
264 B.c. date is apparent. According to this Magas would be 
named amongst living kings eight years (264—14= 250 B.C.) 

ht T ; : 


250 B.c., the absence of the name of Diodotus of Bactria, 
who had been Agoka’s next-door neighbour for about five 
years” by that date, would be surprising. The proposed calcula- 
tion giving 264 B.o. would not be gs oe even if we corrected 
the reign of Bindusara from 28 to 25 years, as even then the 
difference between the death of Magas and the edict would be 
too long, viz. of five years.? As to the figure 269 B.c., a similar 
objection suggests itself. Taking this as the abhisheka year, 
we get the result that (269-14) three years after his death 
Magas was described in the edict as a living sovereign. which is 
Bak ee 
corollary to our above calculation we have also to 
revise ths accepted date of Chandra-Gupta’s accession to the 
throne of Magadha. 
and there is no reason to reject, the datum 
of the Pali siehdntaheis. that Asoka reigned for four years before 
he was legally crowned, the date of his _tontgeot ed Ss accession 
to the throne would be dated in the year (272 or 271+4+ 
we 325 or 324 B.c. Thus the date divetally accepted up to 


s fe When the Pali chronicle assigns twenty-sight aie to Bindusara, it 


f ASoka’'s rei Taran atha’s 
Sonia 38 | (Schiefner p. 88) thou h gn 
the Puranas w 2 regard Warsi 8 incorrect in its seinbh digit confirms 


win, ves the d 
Bi ae Per epg sae Pa ate or the a ape of the kingdom of 
> Thi 


ay, aly the ees of the proposed date 
ath and the Pali figure 218 for the years 


aaied ts in my paper on the § igunaga 
et 
reign and the accession of Chaniex: Girt: ee ee Bourse 


Vol. IX, Nos. 8-9.] The Date of Asoka’ s Coronation. 321 
[N.8.] 


this time of Chandra-Gupta’s succession sot B. oe, has to be 
shifted back four (or, perhaps, three) years ea 

The above result would yield the natier-poeres that even 
while ick cake was struggling through the deserts of Sindh 
and Baluchistan, Chandra- Gupte was “busy f ounding his own 
power. The revolt of the ‘‘ mercenary (=Hindu) army 
put to death the Macedonian general Philippos in command over 

e Punjab, in 324 , was probably connected with the early 
ais of Chandra iota! The period 325-324 B.c. appears 
to have been very momentous to him. He must have been 


The final crushing of the remnant of the Macedonian power 
must have followed his capital cil in Magadha and would 
have to be dated in 324-323 B 

The entire theory of the hypothetical date of Chandra- 
Gupta’s accession has been, up to this time, based on the as- 
sumption that he could not have undertake en his operations 
beiore the news of the death of Alexander reached India.? 
But, in the light of the now ascertained date of Asoka’s corona- 
tion, he does not seem to have waited for an opportunity such 
as that to be afforded by the death of Alexander. In fact*there 
was no such necessity, for to all purposes Alexawgier’ s retreat was 
the demise of his prestige in India. Alexander could anticipate 
this, hence his herculean efforts to coax the army to march on 
towards the Nandan forces. His retreat, despite his manu- 
facturing and leaving gigantic camping relics to impress ‘ future 
generations’ or more probably the Prasii who might decide 


fession of weakness. The greatest opportunity was offered by 
the retreat itself; one had not to wait till his death. The 
‘¢ mercenaries’’ removed the symbol of Macedonian power, 
the representative of Alexander, while Alexander was still alive. 
Thus the basis of assigning a later date to Chandra- 
Gupta’s rise, the necessity for waiting till his death, not being 
maintainable, the earlier date (325-324 B.c.), given to us by 
historical data of the first eminence, >, ought to be mocepred. 

1 The story in the Mudra-Rakehasa of of the murder of the ‘mlechehha 
Parvata through Chandragupta’s stratagem of vishakanyd is pr robably 
based a tradition ot the death of Philippos. Philippos in Prakriita 
would have been changed into Pirabo or Pirabao, which when restored 
into Recpesritts would yield Parvata or Parvataka. 

‘* We may feel assu ed that as soon as the news of the conqueror’s 


except the small remnant to which Eudamos yore to cling.’’ V. 
Smith, Barly History of india, pp. 114-5 [Second Editi 


322 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [Aug.-Sept., 1913. 


Indian data: The above conclusion regarding the abhisheka 
year of Asoka is confirmed from an independent datum which is 


forded by rock-edict xiii and the date of Alexander’s invasion, 
we would have been brought to the same conclusion by the 
Indian datum we are going to consider. The date of the death 


of Ma 
aaa the birth of Vikrama or 487 years before the Vikrama 

i.e., (487 + 58) 545 B.c.! Now Sthilabhadra, son of Nanda’s 
udu Sakatala, died 219 years after Mahavira, the year 
Chandra-Gupta obtained sovereignty (1A, 1882, aN The year 
of oe sae s accession thus would be 220 a.mM., or cir. 
325 , and consequently that of Asoka’s wbhishelea (325- 53) 
372 B.C. 

Thus we obtain cir. 272 B.c., both from Indian and foreign 
sources, as the first year of Asoka’s abhisheka and c. 276 B.c. 
for his coming to the throne. 

. Senart’s calculation: Since writing the above note m 
attention aa been drawn to M. Senart’s calculation in the 
Indian Antiquary, XX, 242. The Soe is the same as 
adopted by Mr. V. Sm ith. It runs as follow 

**As the second edict belongs to ne Madentith year, 
we are inevitably led to conclude that his twelfth year 
i to one of the year 260-258 B.c., say, to take 
‘am to the year 259. This calculation would fix his 
“$ wise: at about 269.’’ 


ee 


The points of difference between this and the calculation 
advanced here are these: the basis of my calculation is-edict xiii 
which contains the names of the five ‘Greek’ kings, while 
edict ii has only Antiochus and “ his neighbours?’’; and 


EA. weak, 7, § 13; ef. Dr. Hoernle, On et hppa of 
the ancient cathe * 13) the Ni irvana of M sieke falls in Oct.). 
ut mere oo to the Jaina interpretation (ibid.), it would Mea a Spal earlier 

( n the latter case Chandra-Gupta’s Lea deeb would be dated in 
326 Ger. 85 (Oct.) B.c 


cannot devep e erroneous and medizeval reckoning of Hemachandra. 
was the son a ecesso: 


erse as we find it is not mutilated. 
The mistake can be easily detected in the light of various other chrono- 
ion, eg that gee. Subhadra, 


lier reckoning w diséa 8s hes a 
ology]. 


Vol. IX, Nos. 8-9.] The Date of Asoka’ s Coronation. 323 
[NV 8.] 


the date of the former would be the fourteenth as against 
the thirteenth year assigned to the latter. The difference 


by M. Senart’s taking the 12th year to fall between 260 and 
258 B.C., bese on his own hypothesis the thirteenth falls between 
260-258 


‘* of) the Cholas, - the Greek- — Amtiyoka and also those 
* ki ings + who are neighbours of that Amtiyoka—every dah Devanam - 
Sea od rat ehiheegre has fo Sc two (ind) of hospita 

ths ve in Edi he FB And that eonguest (of 

* Dies wa) “hing beh Poe ed by ‘the Recon dhe both o 
‘amongst all his neighbo urs, up t hundred yojxnas ra gh 

+ an ek- eatin called ' mtiyoka (is) aud berend this seu’ ¢ “er adeed: te 

ed ‘ fo ur . kings jbl rd name of Turama name 

haere BT as they follow tie ea - eh ee 
kid nampriya. 
oS is = be noticed that = the latter edict the named kings are 


co. e Dha & of 
unna sie peste ours of Aethiokia nd, 4 e establishment of hospitals (or 
remedial n-titutions) in their kingdom. " The two references are > distinet 
and sepurate. 


RENNIN NN NAN EO 


42. The Rev. L. Bernard among the Abors, and the 
Cross as a Tattoo Mark (1855). 


A Note by the Rev. H. Hosten, §8.J. 


To complete Fr. Krick’s remarks on the tattoo- ere of 
the Abors (Cf. J.A.S.B., 1913, pp. 107-122), I add me 


was l’Abbé A. Launay, the historian of the Society for 
Foreign Missions Meteo! though he had at his disposal other 
materials on Fr. Bernard’s visit to the Abors. Cf. La Mission 
du Thibet, I. aa 766. We learn from them that, after the 
massacre of his two companions, Messrs. Krick and Boury, in 
the country of the Mishmis, Fr. Bernard, now left alone, boldly 
tried to force his way to Tibet through the land of the Abors. 
He reached the village nielaah Fr. Krick had been in 1853, but 
was obliged to return, the savages apprehending danger to 
themselves, should any aanident befall him. Speaking of the 
Abor tattoo-marks in the form of crosses, which his colleague, 
Fr. Krick, may more than once have commented’ on in his 
presence, Fr. ernard refuses to see in them any Christian 
origin or signification. Nay, he appears to have had Fr. Krick 
in view, when he states that only a pious traveller’s imagina- 
tion could have interpreted them in the sense of Christian signs. 
These remarks, not mentioned by Lau obs ap greatly the 
importance attached by Fr. Gaillard (Cf. 
115, n. 4) to Fr. Krick’s observalsons t in a eon 
The extracts are . ollows 

aikwah, Upper Assam, Deo. 2ist, 1854 (Letter to Arch- 
ees Dr. P. J. Carew of Calcutta ta): ‘*....lintend starting in 
a few days on a new attempt to penetrate to our dear Mission. 


me, and engaged me to trust myself to his father. He said, 
‘The Padre [Fr. Krick] promised he would come to us, and, 
instead of doing so, he went to the wicked Mishmees who killed 
him. Come to us; we shall accompany you on your journey.’ 
And showing me a cross he bears on his forehead he said, 
‘1 do not know the meaning of this: I am but a child, but 
our ancients say it is a sign of religion, and that you are our 


326 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [Aug.-Sept., 1913. 


Padres.’! The youth seems to be a single-minded man. Onl 
I do not know if the acting Deputy Commissioner of Debroo 
will let me go. I did not say a word about it to him; but, he 
told me the other day that a chief of some village in daily 
intercourse with the Aburs told him that be had heard these 
Aburs saying, ‘ if we can get the Padres a little into the interior, 
we shall take advantage of it to put them in some trouble.’ 
I will do what I think the best for the glory of God..... se 
Shaikwah, Jan. 8th, 1555 (Letter to the same): ‘*....1 
am still at Shaikwah. I expect to start in a few days to Thibet, 
through the Abors, if allowed: but if not, through Feizpore.. 
2>8 


make a new attempt to enter our dear Mission of Thibet 
through some of the wild tribes inhabiting the hills north-east 
of Assam. In the beginning of January, I tried to make my 
way through the Abars, a very rude and apparently by no 
means a bloodthirsty tribe. I wished to see, whether it could 
be possible to penetrate into Thibet through that part of the 
country, or if, in case of difficulties which could be overcome 
by time only, they would allow me to remain and establish a 
Mission amongst themselves. These poor unfortunate savages, 
after objecting first to my entering their villages, because they 
had been told that I came to sow some poison’ around their 
houses to kill them, at length consented to admit me, saying: 
‘Well, after all, you may come. you go away, we shall 
kill a dog, and it will keep the evil spirit away from the village.’ 
I was exceedingly well received by everybody; but when I 
informed them of the object of my mission, they told me it was 
utterly impossible for me to go to Thibet through their country, 
on account of the snowy hills, and the difficulties I should 
meet at the hands of the other tribes I should have to go 
through. As to my remaining amongst them, they had many 
difficulties which I solved very easily: viz., that they could 
not give me a nice house, good meat, plenty of wine, etc. But, 
there was a last one not so easy of solution 
& Spy sent by the British Government. 


aca ot et Te Gera Tse on ee mene neoprene ee 


__} The man had probably learned this from Fr. Krick’s intercourse 
with the tribe. 
2 Bengal Catholic Herald, 1855, vol. iii 
8 Ibid. p. | vol, xxviil, p. 18. 


Vol. IX, Nos. 8-9.] The Rev. L. Bernard among the Abors. 327 
[N.8.] 


village, I was obliged to come down to receive the directions I 
expected from my superiors at Paris. I promised the Abars 
that I would come back, if my directors approved of my 
pars: a mission amongst them, because I think they 


dress rather indecently. I believe they are simple in their 
manners; the persons of the other sex are decently dressed, 
and there, like everywhere, they evince, much more than the 

men, signs of great kindness. They have no religious preju- 
dices at all. they only believe in oa existence of some evil 
spirits residing in the far-off hills. J heard some of them saying 
that they had been formerly Christians : that they had the cross on 
their forehead : all this is the mere product of the pious traveller’s 
imagination. The sign they have on their forehead we can hardly 

f : 


not know the meaning of it. They have that sign as the Hindoos 
have sows other. 
‘At present, the route through the Abars is the only one 


e 
would certainly obey, but with the certitude of being murdered. 
Unless I receive other directions from my superiors, I am going 
to make an attempt through Darjeelling. Some cers in 
Assam told me they believed I could there find what I want, 
viz., a village under the protection of the British flag, where 
I could find plenty of Thibetan or Boutan people to enable me 
to learn their language. . I do not at all want to go at once to 
the centre of Thibet. If only, without exposing myself to 
certain death, I can establish myself amongst some native 
population, I will be satisfied. When I shall be in possession 
of the language, I shall be able to do my work slowly. 

‘It is in contemplation of these raed attempts that I came 

down three days ago to Dacca.. 
I have examined Carl Ritter’ s sabatbacte of Wilcox’s jour- 
neys of exploration in Assam (1826-27). There is nothing, 


mission in the south of Tibet among a tribe called Shokhap- 
(Cf. J.A.S. B., 1913, p. 116 and n. 1.) 


1 Jbid., 
2 CE. Be. ae me Theil, II Buch, Band III, Berlin, 1834, pp. 
357-399. I hav» also ex ned Ritter’s references to Asiatic Journal 


n Register, xxii oes 7, 434, 439; Febr. 
i ‘On ly vol, xx iv. 54, 431, alludes to the 


. 624, 
Catholic Missions in Tibet between 1624 and 173 


cw 


43. Notes on the Biological Work of the R.I.M.S.S. 
‘* Investigator ’’ during Survey Seasons, 
IQlO-II and IQII-I2. 


By Carr. R. B. Sstymour Sewet, B.A., I.MS., Surgeon- 
Naturalist to the Marine Survey of India, Hon. Assistant 
Superintendent, Zoological Section, Indian Museum, Cal- 
culta. 

(With one chart, X XV.) 


Up to the present time it has been the custom for succeeding 
Surgeon-Naturalists to furnish an annual report to the autho- 
rities of the Royal Indian Marine dealing with the work carried 

them during each successive survey season. These 


that all biological work by the R.[M.S.S. ‘“‘ Investigator 
has ceased, and the post of Surgeon-Naturalist been abolished. 
The Director of the Royal Indian Marine a 
proached on the matter, and he has kindly given his consent to 
the publication in future of these reports in a more suitable 
periodical. In view of the above-mentioned misconception, I 
have thought it advisable to make the following ‘‘ Notes ”’ as full 
as possible, and in consideration of the fact that the creation of 
the appointment was due largely, if not entirely, to the exertions 
of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, I have decided to submit the 
paper to that Society for publicationin their Journa 

The post of Surgeon-Naturalist was first created in the 
year 1875, at a time when the “‘ Challenger’’ was still engaged 
on her voyage of discovery. ‘The first officer to hold the post 
was Surgeon J. Armstrong: at that time, however. there was 
no survey ship capable of carrying out deep-sea soundings or 
biological investigations, and, in consequence, that officer had 
to confine his energies to shore collecting and dredging or trawl- 
ing i w water. The R.I.M.SS. ‘Investigator ’’ was 


Naturalist G. M. J. Giles, 1M.S., and since then an I.M.S. 
officer been continuously attached to the Marine Survey to 
carry on the biological observations. 


330 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [Aug.-Sept., 1913. 


A list of these officers and the dates during which they 
have held the post is given below :— 


J. Armstrong... -. 1875—79. 
GM. J. Giles -. 1884—88. 
James Wood Mason (offg.) .. 1888. 

A. Alcock a .. 1888—92. 
A. R.S Anderson -. 1892--19090. 
J. Wemyss Grant (offg.) .. 1896—97, 
A. F. McArdle .. .- 1900—02. 
A. C. MacGilchrist .. 1993—05. 
R. E. Lloyd BS, -. 1905—07. 
F. H. Stewart .. -. 1907—10. 
R. B. Seymour Sewell -- 1910—12 
T. L. Bomford (offg.) -. 1912—13 


__ The present R.I.M.S.S. ‘Investigator’? was built by 
Vickers Maxim & Co., in the year 1907, to replace the old 


survey and biological work. She is a single screw steamer, 
fitted with a triple expansion direct inverted engine, developing 
an indicated horse power of 1500. She has a length, over all, 
of 232 feet 6 in. and a beam of 33 feet, her gross tonnage is 


of six surveyi 
Naturalist and a crew of 110 


constructed that it would be impossible to us? a beam-trawl, 
and the present liboratory is merely a small cabin on the 
starboard side lighted only by the usual two portholes, nor are 
here any conveniences such a$ a swinging table or a constant 


» Such as surface tow-nets, which were 
: c S carpenter. Investigations regard- 
ing the salinity and temperature of the Sea-water have hitherto 
ny degree of accuracy, for the onl 

ents were an ordinary ection cule m ra plier 
egistering to the nearest degree Fahrenheit and a set of four 


hydrometer bulbs reading to the nearest degree: nor is the 


Vol. IX, Nos. 8-9.] Biological Work of the ‘‘ Investigator.’’ 331 
[NV 8.] 


annual grant sufficient to enable the Surgeon-Naturalist to do 
more than purchase the necessary stains, microscopic reagents, 
preserving materials, etc. , hecessary for a seven-moniths’ cruise. 


Marine Survey of India. Although of a simple type and not 
fitted with any self-closing apparatus, it worked very fairly 
well and the results obtained amply pete - introduction. 
It is hoped that in the near future the R.I.M.SS. ‘‘ Investi- 
*’ will be fully equipped with nets and other apparatus for 
hydrographical research along the lines laid down ‘by the 
‘* Conseil permanent sripiem panes pourl’exploration le la mer’ 
and thus be in a position to carry out full investigations, as 
regards both the see atthe ani biological features, of the 
various regions of the Indian Ocean and its offshoots. 

n an ordinary year, the R.I.M.S.S. “‘ Investigator ’’ leaves 
Bombay about the middle of October and proceeds to the 
survey ground, arriving there about the end of the month. 
She continues to survey the coast till aboutthe middle of April, 
and then returns to Bombay, which she reaches early in May. 
During the time she is engaged in actual survey work there has 
hitherto been little or no opportunity for making collections of 
the bottom dwellers, and the work of the Surgeon-Naturalist is 
“cae confined to investigating the pian routs wee littoral 


deep-water fauna in the Arabian Sea or Bay of Bengal, as well 
as to carry out a series of deep sea soundings. At the close of 
the survey season in May, the Surgeon-Naturalist repairs to the 
Indian Museum, Calcutta, and spends the recess there working 
out the collections made, or such portions of them as deal with 
the particular group or groups of animals of which he is making 
a specia stu 

Prior to the year 1911, it had been the custom to give a 
‘* Station Number’’ only to those localities, in whic — 
water observations had been made, but during the r 
of that year, it was decided, in ; ieaaibbatios with the ahatties 
of the Indian Museum, that this system of limiting the station 
numbers to the deep-water trawls was not rp OA satis- 


factory, and that in future, as is done elsewhere, a sta‘ion num- 
ber should be given to every locality where electing of any 
kind was carried out. In see cha - e numbered 
stations for the last season shows a great ompared 


with those of any previous year. Unfortunately meter the 
—— season 1911-12 I was only able to rema he 

M.S.S. ‘‘ Investigator ’’ till the wa of Novetiber: being 
re poner to Calcutta to take over temporarily the duties 
of Professor of Biology in the Medical College. 


332 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [Aug.-Sept., 1913. 


During the remainder of the season, however, the series of 
observations on the plankton were continued by my assistant 
Mr. J. Howard, 1.8.M.D., and several mid-water and bottom 
trawls were made during the run back to Bombay in April, and 
the results were preserved and forwarded by him to Calcutta. 

During both seasons 1910-11 and 1911-12 the R.I.M.S.S. 
‘* Investigator ’’ was occupied in surveying the Tenasserim 
coast. 
Roughly speaking the area in which biological investi- 
gations were carried out extends from Hinzé Basin to Tavo 
Point in 1910-11, and from Tavoy Point to the north end of 
Thamila or Iron Island in 1911-12. 

_ These two areas present very considerable differences in 
the general topography of the coast line: in the northern area, 
the coast consists almost entirely of a series of rocky cliffs and 
promontories, interspersed with long stretches of clean sand that 


two areas is to be found in the Tavoy River; this brings down 


1912, p. $50.) 
One of the chief characteristics of the coast is the complete 
a of any beds of ‘‘ weed’’ or algae. Petersen (1911, 


According to Petersen, much of the organic food supply in the 
sea is produced by the breaking down of the tissues of these 


Vol. go aS 8-9.] Biological Work of the ‘‘ Investigator.’’ 333 
[V.8.] 


plants to form a ‘‘ dust-fine detritus ’’ some of which is deposited 
the sea-bottom and which appears to form the chief 
food supply of many of the Uctluaoy. Polychaeta, and Echino- 


Port Owen, Tavoy Island, produced apparently by the ais 
tion and decomposition of land ve getation and brought dow 
to the sea by the streams and rivers at these points. 


SHORE COLLECTING. 
ring the course of the two seasons I have been able to 


f 
tions on the mainland from those on the various islands 
scattered along the coast. 


MarInuaND SraTIons. 

Hinzé Basin.—The entrance to the Basin consists of a 
wide channel about two miles in length and gradually narrow- 
ing from one and a half miles across at the entrance to about 
three quarters of a mile at its inlet into the Basin proper. Th 
shores of the entrance partake of the nature of the neighbour- 
ing coast-line and consist of a series of small sandy bays, 
separated by reefs of rock and boulders. The Basin itself is 

as y the union of three large creeks on the north and 

ast, aid one smaller une on the west; the creek on the south- 
peers "eventually runs into the sea about fourteen miles further 
down the coast. The shores of the Basin, as far as they have 
been sabbapha cane consist almost entirely of Mangrove-swamps 
and mud-flats 

I remained in camp here from December Ist to 13th, 1910, 
and during the whole of that period the water at the entrance 
to the Basin was frequented by a species of Sirenian. These 
were all, apparently, examples of Halicore dugong, Illiger, and 
on one occasion as many as eight were seen together. : 

Close to the camp was a small freshwater stream that 
flowed into the sea just insidethe entrance. This was frequented 

y numbers of larze tadpoles, each marked with a row of 
three or four eraeaaean 54 ocelli on the tail: it is interest- 
ing to note that these appear to belong to the same species as 
certain specimens obtaiied by cock from the Pamirs, at a 
height of 8,500feet. They have been identified by Dr. Annandale 
as the tadpole of Rana alticoia, Bingr. (Annandale, 1912, p. 22, 
pl. iv, fig, 1). 


334 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [Aug.-Sept., 1913. 


PISCES. 

The receding tide left numerous small pools among the 
rocks; the e contained many small fish, among which the 
following were identified. 

Mugil cocruleo-maculatus, Lacépede. 

Mugil jerdoni, Day. 

Mugil waigiensis, Quoy and Gaim. 

Muraena meleagris, Shaw. 

Periophthalmus koelreuteri (Pall). 

Salarias dussumieri, Cuv. and Val. 

Salarias lineatus Cuv. and Val. 

Sciena miles, Cuv. and Val. 

Tetraodon fluviatilis, Ham. Buch. 

Therapon jerbua (Forsk.). 


With the exception of the two species of Salarias, all were 
quite young immature specimens. 

All the freshwater streams flowing into the Basin were 
swarming with examples of Haplochilus panchax (Ham. Buch.), 
and a few exanples of Haplochilus melastigma (McClell.) were 
also obtiined from the same sources. To one of the larger 
Specimens of the former a parasitic Copepod, belonging to the 
Lernaeopodidae, was attached just beneath the left ventral fin. 


INsEcTA. 


@ sample by the Chemical Examiner, Rangoon, gave the 
following results :— 
Total solids = 6035'12 grains per allon. 
Chlorides =3024-00 ge i : 


9? 


_The water was thus nearly three times as concentrated as 
ordinary sea-water and yet these animals were able to live and 
breed in it freely. 

Crustace:.—The following species are all fairly common 
on the beach or in the adjacent Mangrove swamps. 

Grapsus strigosus, Herbst. 

Ocypoda ceratophthalma Pallas), Ortm. 

Ocypoda cordimana, Desm. 

Sesarma quadratum, Fabr. 

Sesarma taeniolatum, White. 


_ The Ocypoda ceratophthalma were exceedingly common ; 
- is well known these crabs burrow in the sand and make holes 
or themselves, in which they live. The larger specimens 


Vol. rr Pha 8-9,] Biological Work of the ‘‘ Investigator.’’ 335 


merely dig out the sand and leave it lying in a small mound 
around the entrance to their burrow, but the smaller examples 
ith a 


Ordinarily the ‘‘ pattern ’’ is very simple, the sand balls 
being irregularly arranged round the entrance with two or three 
well marked paths running radially oucwards (Fig. 1), but in 
certain other cases, and frequently in some particular portion 


Fie. 2. 


of the sandy beach, these crabs arrange the sand-pellets in a 
sortie Laeger sometimes forming as many as six concentric 
es (Fig.2). These seins are not made one after the srining 
& pipes ing Se when the first had been completed, 
but all six would be menced siniultaneously and peetcolly 
continued round -_ fers until the pattern was complete 
For a long time I was unable to ascertain how the crab 
nidneeaenioes ehees > little pellets of sand. That they were not 


336 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [| Aug.-Sept., 1913. 


in origin was shown by the fact that they were far too 
ra ea cases being A Se half the size of the crab itself, 
and further, the intestinal contents are, on examination found 
to be quite soft and free from gritty matter. Apparently what 
happens is this ; the crab with its chelae shovels sand into its 
mouth and here a sorting process is carried out, anything 


those specimens, whose burrows were situated in the damp sand 
between high and low tide marks, were darker in appearance 
than those who inhabit the dry sand in the upper part of the 
beach 


ach. 
Along the edge of the scrub at the upper part of the beach 


in The two species of Sesarma were bot of a dark colour, 
but still showed a distinctly ‘‘ protective’ colouration. The 
examples of quadratum which were found frequenting 


crevices in the rocks and Stones, were of a dark-brown 
colour dotted over with grey and 


Charybdis (Goniosoma) affinis, Dana. 

Charybdis (Goniosoma) crucifera (Fabr.), A. M. Edw. 
Charybdis (Goniosoma) rostrata, A. M. Edw. 

b 


Matuta victor, Fabr., Hilgendorf. 
Varuna litterata (Fabr.), A. M. Edw. 


were obtained from the waters at the entrance, and the rock- 


pools were found to be Swarming with examples of a species of 


eander, many of which were ovigerous females. 


Vol. IX, Nos. 8-9.] Biological Work of the ‘‘ Investigator.’’ 337 
[V.S.] 


Several examples of Palaemon sp. were obtained from the 
small freshwater stream, that flowed into the sea near the 
entrance (vide supra, p. 333). 

XipHosuRA.—Although no specimens of Limulus were ob- 
tained, their cast shells were exceedingly common the long 
stretch of sand, that lies to the south of the entrance (also vide 
Rec..Ind. Mus., Vol. VII, p. 87, Calcutta 1912). | 

Motuusca.—A large collection of shells was made in this 
locality, as in others visited later: unfortunately in the present 
condition of the collection in the Indian Museum, it is impos- 
sible to work them out fully and consequently no detailed 
reference to this group willbe made in this report. A list of the 
species, which have been provisionally identified by comparison 
with named specimens in the Museum collection, and their 
distribution, is given below (Table 1). In all cases the same 
nomenclature as that in use in the Indian Museum has been 
retained. 

Hirvupinga.—Several examples of a leech, probably Lim- 
natis granulosa (Sav.), were obtained from the same stream 
mentioned above. These, along with the rest of the collection 
in the Indian Museum, have been referred to Mr. W. A. Harding 
of Cambridge, England. 

CoELENTERATA.—Small dark-red sea anemonies were fairly 
common on the rocks to the south of the entrance (Kantaung 
Promontory), and several examples of a stalked species were 
obtained from a small patch of sandy mud at the mouth of the 
entrance: these latter were shaped exactly like a wine-glass, ~ 
having a narrow stalk that suddenly widened out below into a 


yikhwaaw Bay.—This bay is situated at the extreme end 


with animal life, among the most conspicuous objects being 
groups of Serpulid worms and _ brilliantly coloured sea-ane- 


Pisces.—Numerous species of fish were obtained from the 
rock pools and from the waters of the bay, and among them the 
following were identified :— 


338 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [Aug.-Sept., 1913. 


Atherina pinguis, Lacépede 
Aner fasciatus (White).* be A. novemjasciatus, Cuv. and 
the 


nx affinis, Riipp. 
Capac hippos (Linn 
Chilodipterus lineatus (Forsk.). 
Clupea longiceps (Cuv. and Val.). 
Eleotris muralis (Quoy and Gaim) Cuyv. and Val. 
quula fasciata, Lacépede. 


y- 
Glyphidodon septemfasciatus, Cuv. and Val. [= Abudefduf 
septemfasciatus (C. V.)] 
Mugil waigiensis, Quoy and Gai 
Muraena nebulosa, Ahl. [= Rehidna nebulosa (Ahl 
‘a tessdlata, Richardson, (= Sonthone. favagi- 
chn. 


Periopihaimus koelreuteri (Pall.). 
' ¢Platycephalus insidiator (Forsk.). [= P. indicus (Forsk.)] 
Platyglossus leparensis pages 
ns 


Plotosus arab (Forsk.). tes rs paraded Lacépede.) 
d 


Pristipoma furcatum (Bl. Schn.). 

Salarias dussumieri, Cuv. and Val. 

Salarias lineatus, Cuv. and Val. 

Salarias quadricornis, Cuy. and Val. (=S. rivulatus, Riipp.) 
ena armata , Sau 

Sebastichthys strongia, a and Val. (=Sebastes strongia 
a 


Serranus boenack (Bloch.). 
Serranus Piece Ree ares 
Sillago sithama (F. (Fo 

Stromateoides ae _(Baphr) 
Therapon jarbua (Forsk 


Day, but on my second visit I found that they had 
considerably as regards their colouration; this difference I 


aie ee 


: the above list was compiled, Dr. Max Weber has published 
his account of the fish obtained by the « Siboga ’ >> (Siboga-Expeditio, 
Monograph LVII. ‘Die Fische ae. Siboga-E iden 

ayes}. d the moieties. T have given 
ses where any change has been 


Vol. IX, Nos. 8-9.] Biological Work of the ‘‘ Investigator.’’ 339 
[NV .S.] 


attribute to the assumption of a special breeding colouration 
(Southwell and Sewell, 1913, p. 10). 

Tunicata.—On several occasions groups of Ascidians were 
washed ashore by the tide; each group consisted of six to eight 
individuals arranged side by side. The mouth and anal apertures 


12” in length and was covered by a separate test, which was 
impregnated with particles of sand and was of a delicate 
purple-blue colour. 

CrustacEa.—As usual thesandy beach was swarming with 


cordimana Desm, and, as in Hinzé Basin, these species showed 
the same peculiarities in both colouration and burrowing. The 
rock reefs were frequented by numerous Grapsoid crabs Grapsus 
strigosus Herbst and Meiapograpsus messor (Forskal) A. M. Edw. 
Other species of crabs obtained in this locality are as follows :— 
Dotilla myctiroides, Edw. 
Epixanthus frontalis (Edw.) Heller. 
Gelasimus annulipes, Latr.; Edw. 


Thalamita crenata (Fabr.) Edw. 
Thalamita danaé Stimpson. 
Thalamita prymna (Herbst.) 


Two of the above species had apparently made their 


appearance in this locality during the interval between my two 
visits. The first example was the Gelasimus annulipes: no 


Edw. 
Sromatoropa.—Several specimens of Gonodactylus chiragra, 


340 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [Aug.-Sept., 1913. 


Fabr. were obtained among the rocks and boulders of the reef to 
the west of the bay. 

EcuInopERMATA.—Several specimens of Astropecten, sp., 
and one example of Pentaceros, sp., were obtained on the sandy 


n 
promontory to the west of the bay numerous examples of 
a spiny sea-urchin, black in colour, were found. 

Large Holothurians, Holothuria atra, Jiger, were common 
on the rock reefs, and two examples of a Crinoid were also 
alit 


plete list of the mollusc fauna of the various localities is given 
in Table I (Appendix). Ihave throughout followed the nomen- 


jrina margaritifera were found. cording to Brown and 
Simpson, (1907, p. 10), the channel between Cap Island and 
the Mainland forms a large Pearl-oyster bed am, however, 


One or two small specimens of a Polypus were found in 
the rock-pools and on one occasion a mass of eggs of some 
fairly large Cephalopod was found attached to a rock near low 
ide mark. 

CoeLENTERATA.—Two different species of coral were found 
growing in the rock-pools, one of these was a species of Porites. 


ae i siliceous spicules : it belongs to the group Ceratina. 
1s Jatter form was interesting as it provided several examples 


Vol. IX, Nos. 8-9.] Biological Work of the ‘‘ Investigator.’ 341 
[V.8.] 


of commensalism : it formed a habitat for numerous Polychaet 
worms and small Ophiuroids, which were living in tubes and 


several specimens of a species of Balanus: these belong to the 
genus Acasia, and probably represent a new species. A single 
small Gebia, sp. was also found inhabiting a — cavity in the 
middle of the sponge; this cavity was about 14” long and had 
three openings on the surface, while at the extreme blind end 
was living a small colony of Ophiuroids. 

On the east side of Tavoy Point, at the entrance to Tavoy 


sand we get 
ere the editbas —fialesilions abounds and a single 


immature, and a single large example of Neptunus pelagi- 
cus. 

During my second visit to Byikhwaaw Bay, an expedition 
was made to Reef Island, which lies close to the right bank of 
the river near the mouth, for the purpose of obtaining speci- 
mens of the whip-scorpion Hypoctonus binghami, Oates, which 
is known to frequent this island. Unfortunately no examples 


genes embedded in mud: specimens of Periophthalmus koel- 
euteri and a single example of a crab were found, but with these 
sebephinin, the shores appeared to be uninhabi ted. 

SLAND Stations.—A chain of islands extends down the 
whole length of the coast in this region ; to the north, off the 
coast between Hinzé Basin and Tavoy Point, are the North, 
Middle, and South groups of the Moscos Islands, while to the 
south of Tavoy River lie Tavoy Island and Tron varitg as 
well as numerous others too small to merit a specific n 

everal occasions I was able to land on the ‘ialanuds 


three pal so I will therefore ape Baga together. In 

every case the shore consists for the most part of rock and 

boulders with an occasional sandy bay. The general fauna is as 
follows : 


so 
ca of the islands in the Moscos Archipelago are me, 
from time to time by the Burmese fishermen as their head- 
qu fartens during fishing expeditions; a few huts are ~~ 


342 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [Aug.-Sept., 1913. 


found here and there on the larger islands, but the majority of 
the fishermen come off from the mainlan 

an ae others they catch the following species in fairly 
large number 


ee sp. 
Chorinemus — petri, Cuy. and Val. [=C. moadeita 
Klun 


-)» 
Dicerobatis eS Cantor. 
Polynemus indicus, Shaw. 
Pristis, sp. 
Rhinobatus, sp. 


Examples of the following species were obtained. 


Ambassis urotaen Be Se 

Atherina pinguis, 

Chilodipterus Vaca ‘ors 

Clupea longiceps (Cuv. and Val.). 

Glyphidodon sordidus, fonk). [= Abudefduf sordidus 
(Forsk. 

Mugil waigiensis, Quoy and Gaim. 

Periophthaimus koelreuteri (Pall. ). 

Platyglossus leparensis (Bleeker). 

Platyglossus notopsis (Bleeker). 

Salarias dussumieri nae and Val. 

Salarias unicolor, Rip 

Therapon puta, Cuv. pe Val. 


Immense shoals of young and immature fish on several 
occasions came in with the rising tide into some of the sandy 
bays round these islands. These shoals consisted mainly of 
examples of Therapon, Atherina and Clupea. These young fish 
are captured by the Burmese fishermen in enormous quantities 
by means of large pocket-seine nets, in some instances as, long 


imported into Burma for the manufacture of “ ngapee.”’ 

On the Mi ddle Moscos North Island a tidal bile was 
found that contained large numbers of Haplochilus melastigma 
(McClell.) ; in these e xamples the whole a the caudal fin was 
edge with a illiant orange-yellow co 


oe ecg Aw = Pe a Beh Bes | # atra, Jager) oc- 


eurred in large numbers among the rocks. Several specimens of 
a black spiny sea-urchin were found in a rock pool on the Middle 
Moscos South Island: these differed somewhat from those 


Vol. ve a 8-9.] Biological Work of the ‘* Investigator.’’ 343 
LV.S.] 


obtained in Byikhwaaw Bay on the mainland in possessing 
longer and more delicate spines, and were apparently of a differ- 
ent species. A species of Spatangid was also found on the 
North Moscos Islands. 

Motivusca.—The crevices and holes in the rocks were filled 
with large numbers of Chiton (Acanthopleura) spiniger, Sow. 
which the natives here collect and use as food. 

Potycouanta.—Examples of Serpulidae are common in the 
rock pools round the islands. 


Island it is almost completely absent, only one or two small 
isolated colonies being found in rock-pools at the north entrance 
to Port Owen. 
Numerous species were obtained on these islands belong- 
ing to the following genera :— 
Favia (two species). 
Fungia (a single species). 
Galaxia cs ag 
Goniastraea ,, 5 
Madrepora (several species). 
Porites (a single species). 
Symphillium (a single species). 
Turbinaria fe oe 
One of the examples of Madrepora was found to be infested 
with a barnacle, living in a small crater-like cavity at the tip 
of nearly every branch. This proved to be Pyrgoma madrepore 
Borradaile, a species hitherto known only from the Maldive 
Islands. 


mauve coloured tentacles, whereas in the second the colours 
were the exact opposite, the disc being a dull purple with 
green tentacles. 
Tavoy Island, Fisher Bay, (station 414). 
I landed here on November 20th 


rock; in the bay itself the shore consists largely of extensive 
mud-flats, which dry at low water, and intervening patches 
mud and stones. 


344 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [Aug.-Sept., 1913. 


PISCEs. 


The freshwater streams contained large numbers of Haplo- 
chilus panchax (Ham. Buch.), andthe mud-flats were fre uented 
by Periophthalmus koelreuteri (Pall.). The following species 
were obtained from the waters of the Bay :— 

Ambassis nalua (Ham Buch.). 
Apogon lineolatus, Cuv. and Val. [= Archamialineolata 
oY 


Equula fasciata (Lacép.). 

Gerres lucidus, Cuv. and Val. 

Gerres oeyena (Forsk.). 

Haplochilus melastigma (McClell.). 

Hemiramphus dispar, Cuv. and Val. 

Lutjanus, sp. 

Mugil waigiensis, Quoy. and Gaim. 

Platycephalus insidiator (Forsk.). (=P. indicus Linn.) 

Platycephalus tuberculatus, Cuy. and Val. 

Sillago sthama (Forsk.). 

Therapon jarbua (Forsk.). 

Teuthis vermiculata (Cuv. and Val.). [= Amphacanthus 
vermiculatus (C. V.)] 


Such rock pools as could be found contained numerous 
fish, for the most part examples of— 

Gobius ornatus, Riipp. 

Salarias lineatus, Cuv. and Val. 

Salarias dussumieri, Cuv. and Val. 


Asingle example of an apparently new species of Cryptocen- 
trus was discovered concealed beneath a large stone on the beach 
between tide-marks. A full acccount of this species will be 
published shortly in the ‘‘ Records of the Indian Museum.’’ 

UrocuorpData.—A Single specimen of a species of Bulano- 
glossus was found half-buried in the mud under a stone between 
tide-marks. 

Crusracea.—The stony beach was swarming with small 
crabs and under nearly every stone between tide-marks a small 

i anid was concealed. e rocks and 


te) 
was of a slow and almost rvt 
accelerated on the approach o 


Vol. LX, Nos. 8-9.] Biological Work of the ‘‘ Investigator.’’? 345 
[N.S.] 


even less violent in those cases where no female was to be seen 
in the vicinity : there was no trace of the excitement described 
by Alcock (1901, p. 67). Pearse (1912, p. 113) has recently 
given a very good account of the habits of the fiddler-crabs in 
the Philippines, and so far as they go, my observations agree 
with his description. 

The colouration of Gelasimus tetragonum (Herbst.) is peculi- 
arly striking: the carapace in front is yellow, turning to a pale 
green in the centre and posteriorly to a bright blue, with a 
very distinct pattern outlined in rows of black dots. 

entrally the abdomen was of a purple-blue tinge while 
the ischium and merus of the external maxilliped was a bright 
blue. The legs were orange in colour turning to a brown on the 
carpus and dactyl. 

The large chela in the male was pale yellow with a splash 
of orange at the base of the fixed digit. In the female the chelae 
were splashed with blue on the hands and the carpus of the 
ambulatory legs was orange, not brown as in the male 

In addition to the above, the following species were 
obtained :— 

Decapoda, Reptantia. 
Charybdis (Goniosoma) merguiensis, de Man. 
Clibanarius padavensis, de Man. 
Epixanthus frontalis (Edw.), Heller. 
Leptodius exaratus, Edw. 
Macrophthalmus errato, de Man. 
Macrophthalmus verreauaxti, Edw. 
Neptunus sanguinolentus (Herbat). juv. 
Pilumnus vespertilio, Fabr. 
Sesarma quadratum (Fabr.) 
Thalamita crenata (Latr.), Edw. 


Several examples of the following species proved to be 
ovigerous females, viz. Gelasimustetragonum, Lepiodius exaratus, 
Metapograpsus messor, and Pilumnus vespertilio. 

As regards the examples of Leptodius, these were all, even 
the ovigerous females, quite small, measuring only 5-6 mm. in 
the breadth of the carapace: several specimens were found to 
be infected with a species of Sacculina and it is possible that the 
small size of the examples was the result of parasitization. 
Decapoda, Natantia. 

Peneus indicus, Edw. juv. 


Numerous, examples of Peneids and Alpheids were 
obtained from the rock-pools; also examples of species of 


Callianidea and Gebia. : 
Stomatopoda.—A single specimen of Gonodaciylus chiragra, 
1 


Fabr. was captured in a rock-pool. 


346 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [Aug.-Sept., 1913. 


KCHINODERMA. 

Two species of Asteropecten were obtained, viz. A. indicus, 
Déderlein and A. andersoni, Sladen. In addition, large black 
Holothurians, Holothurea atra, J ager, were common on the 
beach and two specimens of a smaller variety, having a purple 
colour, were obtained from the same situation. 


NERMERTINEA. 


accompanied by one or more young larval fish. A few 
examples belonging to the genus Cassiopea were also obtained 
in the bay. 

As already mentioned above a few isolated colonies of a 
Species of Favia were found growing in rock-pools near the 
N See to the Bay, but there were no large beds seen any- 
where. 


PoRIFERA.—Two species of Sponge were found growing 
on the rocks. Dr. N. Annandale has been kind enough to 
identify these for me: he informs me that one belongs tu the 
genus Spongosorites and the other is an example of [sodictya 
tubuloramosa, Carter. This att pecies iginally described 
from the Mergui Archipelago (Carter, 1889, p. 70). The present 
Specimens agree closely with the type both in structure an 
external appearance, except that they are of a bright purple 


ets ey ereas the type has completely lost any colour it may 


BOTTOM TRAWLING. 


During the Survey season 1910-11, it was only possible to 
carry out four trawls, at stations 388—391, but during the 
trawls : 


se all belonged to the Turbinolidae 
he following species. 


—— 
Sewell, 1912 (a) 2 Kemp and Sewell, 1912. 


Vol. IX, Nos. 8-9.] Biological Work of the ‘* Investigator.’’ 347 
N.S 


Stephanetrochus oldhami, Alcock. 

Four examples were obtained and although exhibiting 
inter se a considerable range of variation, they appear to fall 
into line with other specimens in the Indian Museum, previousl 
obtained by the R.I.M.S. ‘‘Investigator’’ and described by 
Alcock (1898, p. 19), under the above name. 

Flabellum pavoninum, Lesson. 

A single specimen was obtained and was referred to this 


place of a ‘‘ sessile scar of attachment.’’ Its occurrence serves 
to justify Prof. Stanley Gardiner’s (1904, p. 123) opinion that 
F. pavoninum and F. paripavoninum are, in reality, repre- 
sentatives of the same species. 

Flabellum japonicum, Moseley. 

Thirty representatives of the species were obtained, show- 
ing considerable range of variation both in the condition of the 
columella, as described by Alcock (loc. cit., p. 23), and in the 
form of the septa which varied from perfectly straight plates to 
a markedly crinkled condition, closely resembling that found 
in F. laciniatum. : 

A single example of Cerianthus, sp., was also obtained. — 

Po azta.—Numerous worms belonging to the family 
Maldanidae were obtained together with the tubes in which they 
live. 2 


The results of the six-bottom trawls that were made 
during the survey season 1911-12 are, so far as they have 
been worked out at the present date, given below :— 

Station 392. eee 
a ad at -  Depth—400 fathoms. 

On this occasion three or four sharks about 4 feet in length 
came up with the trawl. Unfortunately while the trawl was 
being brought alongside, two or three of the contained — 
one apparently an example of Coloconger, floated out through the 
mouth, and, although an attempt was made to recover them 
by lowering a boat, the sharks had already made use of their 
opportunity and they were lost irretrievably. 

PIscEs. gs ct 

Macrurus macro us, Alcock. 

Two examples ee obtained and are referred to the above 
species. 
EcHINODERMATA. ede 

Several examples of Ophiuroidea were obtained; also 
several specimens of Asteropzcten and a single Phormosoma, sp- 


348 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [Aug.-Sept., 1913. 


ALCYONARIA, 
Examples of both Umbellula and Pennatula were obtained. 


MADREPORARIA. 


condition found in F. japonicum, Moseley. As regards the 
compressed flat sides and sharp wing-like lateral costae, the 
Specimens were typical of the above species. 


Caryophyllia, sp. 

A single dead corallum, with the calicular margin some- 
what badly damaged, was also obtained and is referred to this 
genus. 

Station 395, 

13° 29’ 00” N. 

97° 30’ 00" E, ; Depth—50 fathoms. 
Station 396. 

13° 29’ 30” N. 

97° 37’ 50" } Depth—50 fathoms. 


These two trawls were made on the same day at a dis- 
tance of a few miles apart. In both cases the nature of the 


given after the names of the species or genera refer to the 
trawl in which the Specimen was obtained. 


Piscrs. 


Amblyopus sp. (396). (= Taenioides sp.). 

Arnoglossus macrolophus Alcock (396). 
voptery. xanthosticta (Alcock) (395,396). 

Bregmaceros Sp. (395), 

Champsodon guentheri Regan (396). 

Ophichthys sp. (396). 

Ostracion turritus Forsk. 396). 

Synaptura altipennis Alcock (395). 

Tetraodon immaculatus Bl. Schn. (396) 

Uranoscopus cognatus Cant. (396). 


Vol. IX, Nos. 8-9.]: Biological Work of the ‘‘ Investigator.’’ 349 
[N.S.] 


CRUSTACEA. 
Aegeon medium, Alcock and And. (396). 
Arcania SO anes Alcock and And. (396). 
Carcinoplax longimanus, De Haan., juv. (396). 
Charybdis (Geincobelenss) hoplites, Wood Mason (395). 
Egeria arachnoides (Rumph), Edw. (396). 
Leucosia obtusifrons, De Haan (396). 
Neptunus (Amphitrite) aetna Sieaie A.M.E. (396). 
Pariphiculus rostratus Alcock (39 


Tw op oon eee of a small species of Munida were obtained 
at sintiog 396 
M sierra monoceros, Fabr. (396). 
Parapeneus ib oi Alcock (395). 
Solenocera sp. (395 ). 
Gebia sp. (395). 


STOMATOPODA. 
example of the rare Squilla fasciata De Haan. was 
obtained at station 395. 


CIRRIPEDIA. 
A single example of the barnacle, Scalpellum rosiratum, 
arwin, was also secured at station 395. Its occurrence of 
interest, as this is, I believe, the first occasion on which it has 
been pooonled fecnii Indian waters, though it is common in the 
Malay Archipelago. The specimen is also from shallower water 
than any other species of the genus previously obtained by the 
R.L.MLS. ‘“ Investigator.’ 


POLYCHAETA. 

Several examples were obtained in both trawls. Subse- 
quent ae shows that they belong to the following 
three familie 

oe (395). 
Polynoidae (395,396). 
Terebellidae (396). 


COELENTERATA. ; 
Examples of Olindias malayensis, Maas, were obtained at 
both stations, as also were numerous specimens of a Hydroid 
belonging to the genus Lytocarpus 
Station 464, 22-iv-1912. 
6° 02’ 30” N: 81° 29 E. 
Total soundings from 68 to 52 fathoms. Net used. Ag- 
assiz trawl. 


350 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [Aug.-Sept., 1913. 


This haul included a large number of Aleyonacea and Gor- 
gonacea, representing about twenty different species; several 
sponges and corals were also present. Attached to these were 
numerous Ophiuroids and Crinoids. The fish were not numer- 
ous and those that were obtained were small, but on the other 
hand the Crustacea were particularly well represented. 


The following species have been identified :— 
PISCES. 


Fistularia serrata, Cuv. (=F. petimba, Lacép.) 
Scorpaena erostris, Alcock. 


CRUSTACEA. 

Cancellus investigatoris, Alcock. 

Charybdis (Goniosoma) orientalis, Dana. 

Eumedonus zebra, Alcock. 

Eupagurus investigatoris, Alcock. 

Hyastenus gracilirostris, Miers. 

Hyastenus pleione (Herbst.). 

Lambrus (Rhinolambrus) cybelis Alcock. 

Nazxia cerastes, Ortmann. 

Nazxia sp. (possibly N. hystrix). 

Ptychogaster, sp. 

Puerulus angulatus, Spence Bate. 

Quadrella coronata, Dana. 

uadrella coronata var. reticulata, Alcock. 

derson. 

Sphenomerus trapezoides, Wood-Mas 


On. 
Spiropagurus spiriger var. profundorum, Alcock. 
Tozeuma armatum, Paulson. 


d in addition several examples of a Munida, an Alpheid, 
and a Porcellanid. 


he example of Nawia cerastes is of interest in that, while 
closely agreeing with the description and the type specimens of 


mens of WN, cerastes and N. investigatoris, 
© spines on the distal ends of the meropodites of the 


» mentioned by Alcock as distinctive of 
N. tnvestigatoris, are greatl 
oes 


StomaTopropa : A single q 
dactylus, (A. M.-Edwards). As Nobii (1906, p. 336) has pointed 


Vol. IX, Nos. 8-9.] Biological Work of the ‘‘ Investigator.’’ 351 
[N.S.] 


out, this scarce form is probably not a true species but a post- 
larval stage of some other member of the genus, probably 
P. ciliata, Fabr. 


Station 465. 22-iv-1912. 
5° 56’ N: 81° 22’ E. 
Nature of bottom. Globigerina ooze. 
Depth of net. 132-109 fathoms. 
Net used. Agassiz trawl. 


PISCEs. 
Antigonia capros (Lowe). 
Callionymus kaianus, Gunther. 
Chelidoperca investigatoris (Alcock). 
Setarches giintheri, Johnson. 


CRUSTACEA. 
Calcinus elegans (Milne-Edwards). 
Mursia bicristimana, Alcock and Anderson. 
Paquristes calvus, Alcock. 
Paguropsis typica, Henderson. 


In addition to the above, examples belonging to the Ce- 
phalopoda, Gastropoda, Echinodermata and Gorgonacea were 
ined, 


Station 466. 26-iv-1912. 
9° 32’ N: 75° 45’ E. 
Nature of bottom. Fine sand and rock. 
Depth. 105 fathoms. 
Net used. Aggassiz trawl. 
While the trawl was being towed it caught on a rock and 
was badly torn, in consequence the resulting catch was very 


mall. 
The following were identified. 


PISCEs. 
Champsodon guenthert Regan. 


CRUSTACEA. 
Metapeneus coniger, Wood-Mason. 


Station 467. 26-iv-1912. 
9° 55’ N: 75° 41’ E. 
Nature of bottom— Coarse sand and mud. 
Depth—75-42 fathoms. 
Net used—Agassiz Trawl. 


352 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [Aug.-Sept., 1913. 


PISCEsS. 
Arnoglossus brevirictis, Alcock. 
Callionymus longicaudatus, Schleg. 
Champsodon guentheri, Regan. 
Dysommopsis, sp. 
Minous inermis, Aleock. 
Piatycephalus, sp. 
Rhomboidichthys polylepis, Alcock. 


CRUSTACEA. 
Charybdis (Goniosoma) orientale, Dana. 
Cryptopodia fornicata (Fabr.). 
Egeria investigatoris, Alcock. 
Heterocrypta, sp. 


Neptunus (Amphitrite) argentatus (White), A. M. Edw. 
Parapeneus longipes, Alcock. 


y derson. 
Spiropagurus spiriger, var. profundorum, Alcock. 


sand and mud with numerous small mollusc shells. The catch, 
which was small in quantity, consisted of the following :— 
PiscEs.—Several young examples of Platycephalus indicus 
Linné) about 2” in length. 
CRUSTACEA. 
Philyra scabriuscula (Fabr.). 
Neptunus sanguinolentus (Herbst.). 
MoLLusca.—Numerous mollusc Shells. A small specimen 
of Loligo, sp. 
EcutnopErmata.—A single Ophiuroid, badly damaged. 
CoELENTERATA.—A few specimens of Alcyonarians, all be- 
longing to the family Aleyonidae ; and 
one or two branches of an Hydrozoon. 


MID-WATER TRAWLING. 


P Re the season 191 1-12, for the first time in the history 
of the Marine Survey of India, a midwater trawl was made use 


Vol. IX, Nos. 8-9.] Biological Work of the ‘‘ Investigator.’”’ 353 
[N.8.] 


of. Up to the present time four successful hauls have been 
made. Unfortunately the net in use at present is not a self- 
closing one, but it is hoped that in the near future this present 
apparatus will be replaced by one of a newer pattern. 


Sation 393. 
7° 21’ 6” N.; Depth of net—400 fathoms. 
85° 7 15” E. | Total sounding—2009 fathoms. 


Although great care was taken, it was found when the net 
was hauled on board that a large number of the specimens, 
especially the smaller fish and the larger crustacea, were some- 
what badly damaged, but the Copepoda were in excellent con- 
dition. 

The following specimens were identified :—- 
PISCEs. 
Cyclothone microdon (Gunther). 


Vinciguerria lucetia, (Garman). 


Examples of Cyclothone microdon (Giinther) were of com- 
mon occurrence: hitherto the ‘‘ Investigator’’ had obtained 
this species on only two occasions, at Stations 13 and 55. 
Further examples have since been obtained with the mid-water 
net at Stations 461, 462, and 463, so that it would appear to 
be a common inhabitant of the mid-water in the Bay of Bengal. 

A few examples of Cyclothone signata (Giinther) were also 
obtained. As has been shown by Murray and Hjort (1912, 
p. 103), this species occurs in great numbers in the middle of the 
North Atlantic at a depth of 500 metres (approx. 270 fathoms), 
whereas C. microdon occurs at a somewhat greater depth, 
about 1,000 fathoms. The depths at which mid-water trawls 
have been made on the “ Investigator ’’ up till the present 
time range from 375 to 475 fathoms, and it is probable that 
the examples of this latter species were caught during either the 
ascent or descent of the net: this would also account for the 
difference in the numbers obtained in the two species. 

A single example of Vinciguerri lucetia, Garman was also 
obtained at this station. This is, I believe, the first occasion 
on which this species has been recorded by the ‘‘ Investiga- 
tor’’: a second specimen was subsequently obtained at Station 
463. At Station 452 a small example of a Myctophum sp. was 
obtained, while at Station 463, examples of a young Argyreo- 
pelecus sp. and Astronesthes sp. were captured: as regards the 
latter, it is too immature to be diagnosed with certainty, but 
appears to be an immature example of A. indicus Brauer. 

Tunicara.—Three examples of a species of Pyrosoma were 
obtained, and specimens of two species of Salpa, S. hexagona. 


354 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [Aug.-Sept., 1913. 


Quoy and Gaim. 


and S. zonaria (Pall.). 


In both these last 


cases it was the asexual form that was obtaine 


CRUSTACEA. 
Acanthephyra, s 
Gen 


nadas eas. “Spence Bate. 
Sernedas scutatus, Bouvier: juv. 


Hymenodora, 


sp. 
Sergestes bisulcatus, Wood Mason. 


Sergestes, sp. 


Numerous examples of Euphausiacea, mostly young, were 
ed. 


also obtain 

CoPEPO 

AGaeee horrdax: Farran. 

Bathycalanus richard. ae ne 

Candacia norvegica, 

Can 

Cornucalanus simples, 
Wolfenden. 

Disseta palumboi, Giesbrecht. 


Euchirella dubia, A. Scott. 


aetanus armiger, Giesbrecht. 
Gaetanus latifrons, G. O. Sars. 
Gaetanus miles, Giesbrecht. 
Heterorhabdus shee 
(Ri elsundi 
Heterorhabdus longicornis 


Giesbrecht). 


Heterorhabdus papilligera 


aus). 


Labidocera —— (Dana). 
Lophothrix fronta 

Sik. 
Lophothrix, sp. 
Lucicutia pareaiaeo 

Wolfenden. 

Lucicutia clausi cgoanea 
Lucicutia m axima, euer 
Megacalanus pri 


Metridia ignota, — 
Metridia macrura 


, Sar 
Metridia princeps, Gissbrechs: 


cia ath Soi ea 


ps, 
Wolfenden. 


Metridia scotti, Giesbrecht. 
esorhabdus truncatus, 
A 


. Scott. 
Paraeuchaeta barbata (Brady). 
Paraeuchaeta bisinuata (Sars). 
Paraeuchaeta californica, 
(Esterly). 
Paraeuchaeta propinqua 
Esterly). 
Paraeuchaeta tonsa 
(Giesbrecht). 
Paraeuchaeta weberi, A. Scott. 
Pleuromamma abdominalis 
Lubbock). 
Pleuromamma gracilis (Claus). 
Pleuromamma quadrungulata 
(F. Da 


hl). 
Pleuromamma xiphias 
(Giesbrecht). 
Rhincalanus cornutus (Dana). 
Rhincalanus nasutus 
Giesbrecht. 
Scolecithrix frontalis 
Giesbrecht). 
Scottocalanus farrani, A. Scott. 
Undeuchaeta intermedia, 
A. Scott. 
Undeuchaeta major, 
Giesbrecht. 
Undeuchaeta plumulosa 
(Lubbock). 
Undinopsis, sp. 
Valdiviella brevicornis, Sars. 


Valdiviella oligarthra, Steuer. 


Vol. IX, Nos. 8-9.] Biological Work of the *‘ Investigator.’ 355 
[V.S.] 


e occurrence of many of these species is of interest, 
especially the rare Metridia scolti, of which numerous examples 
of both sexes were obtained. I am inclined to regard M. air 


the hitherto unknown male _ macrura, Sars, were also 
included in the haul. These Stiles can readily be distin- 
guished from the males of M. princeps, and I cannot agree with 
Wolfenden (1908, p.15) that they are the same species. 
OSTRACODA 
AMPHIPODA 
COELENTERATA. 

A oh example of a purple-coloured deep-water Medusa 
was prese 
Station 461. Ppa 

10210’ No 0o74 

Total counding—1 800 fathoms eee reading on chart: an 

ual sounding was not taken). 
Depths of net—375 fathoms. 


\Numerous examples were obtained. 


PISCES. 

Numerous small fish, including both adult and larval 
forms, were obtained, and amongst the latter was one specimen 
of Antigonia capros, Lowe. 


TUNICATA. 
Numerous Pyrosomata, mostly small gy esate colonies 
of four individuals. Two species of Salpa: S. multitentacu- 


ye 
Forskal, seal wee form 

Crustacea.—As usual sainesoie Copepoda, Ostracoda and 
Amphipoda were obtained ; these at present have not been 
worked out. Among the Decapoda were examples of Acanthe- 
phyra sy terre Wood Mason, and Sergestes, sp. 

CHa atHa.— Numerous examples of Sagitia, sp. 

CoELENTERATA.—Siphonophora were common and one ex- 
ample of a Beroe was obtained. 
Station 462. 20-iv-1912. 

ale Ronit aie 

(a) Surface tow-ne at 

badd face wha t @) (b) Mid-water net at 475 rachivnti 
Pisczs. 

Melamphaes mizolepis, Gnthr. 
TuNnIcaTA. 
A Pyrosoma colony, 4” in length. 


356 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [Aug.-Sept., 1913. 


CRUSTACEA. 
Decapoda. 
Acanthephyra, larva. 
nomura, larva 
Euphausiacea sp., numerous examples. 
Gennadas parvus, Spence Bate. 
Gennadas scutatus, Bouvier, var. 


Gennadas, ®P 
Pasiphaea, sp. lar 
Sergestes ae. "Wood Mason. 
Sergestes, sp. 
In addition there were numerous Copepoda and Ostracoda. 
MoLLusca. 
Three small Cephalopods. 


POLYCHAETA. 
An example of a sige Tomopteris was obtained : the pro- 
portions were as follows 


Length—2} inches. 
Length of seta—4 inches, 
No. of segments—43. 


The narrow caudal region had been broken off ; a detached 
caudal ee probably belonging to this specimen, was present 
measuring | 2”. 


Station 493. 21-iv-1912. 

P3t No SF 20k. 
Nets tae tow net—0 fathoms. 
Mid-water net—400 fathoms. 


PIscEs. 
Vinciguerria lucetia (Garman). 
CRUSTACEA. 


Examples of lekecngen bi anage and Gennadas. 
Numerous Copepoda, e 


SIPHONOPHORA. 
Abyla trigona Q. and G. (2) 
Diphyes appendiculaia Esch. 
POLYCHAETA, 


A second lane } Tomopteris sp. was obtained : its propor- 
tions are as follow 


Vol. IX, Nos. 8-9.] Biological Work of the Investigator.’? 357 
[V.S8.] 


Length of body—34 inches. 
»> 4, Seta,—5i inches. 
No. of segments—43. 
Unfortunately the tube containing the surface collection 
was broken in transit and its contents lost. 


OBSERVATIONS ON THE SURFACE PLANKTON. 


During both years a large number of collections of the 
surface-plankton were made at different stations: in the first 
Survey-season 1910-11 numerous tow-nettings were taken in the 
region of the coast from the Middle Moscos Islands to Tavoy 
Point, and during the second year 1911-12, a further series of 
collections was made at stations extending from Tavoy Point 
to the north end of Iron Island. 

In addition to these, tow-nettings were also taken of the 
plankton at the mouth of Rangoon River (station 394) in 
Hinzé Basin and at stations 393, 395 and 396, where bottom 
trawls were also made. 

The results obtained in the more northerly region as 
regards the occurrence and distribution of the diatom flora and 
Copepoda have already been published. (Sewell. 1912 (b), 

. 349.) pat 
I have there shown that in this region the plankton exhibits 
a regular banded arrangement, so that the region can be 
divided up into four areas: in the more southerly region from 
Tavoy Point to Iron Island there was no indication of any such 
division, the planktonic distribution being uniform throughout 
the whole area. Here the diatoms present were or the most 


but as they were found equally numerous at 
widely-distant stations and at stations where on previous visits 
h 


tions are not sufficiently numerous for the results to be pad 
sive, yet they indicate that the surface plankton was, on the 
whole, more abundant towards the southern end of the area 


358 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [Aug.-Sept., 1913. 


under investigation than in the more northerly region around 
the mouth of Tavoy River. A study of the various results ob- 
tained round Port Owen, Fisher Bay (13:06 N: 98:19 E.), 
also shows that the plankton decidedly increases from early in 
November to the end of December, and beginning of January 
and then once more diminishes. 

In the accompanying tables (Appendix, II and III) I have 
indicated the presence or absence of most I 
stituents of the plankton in the various hauls, and below 
append a few notes on certain animals that appear worthy of 
further notice :— 


belong to the genus Citharichthys, and very closely resembles 
the C. aureus, Day. (1889, p. 440, fig. 156). It is not identical, 
however, with this species, and a full account will, it is hoped, 
be published shortly. 

wo young examples of a species of Monacanthus were 
obtained at Station 443. In both the whole body and head 


occurrence of large 
been observed by Jenkins (1912, p. 51). 
CEPHALOCHORDA. 
Amphioxides valdiviae.—A single example of an Amphioxides 
larva was obtained at station 399, 
In length it measured ot 0  OOE mm: 
Proportion of length to breadth ~« 1136 
Proportion of post-anal length to total length 7-13 


There are twenty gill clefts present, and the mouth extends 
back to the level of the 8th gill bar. The end of the gill region 


Vol. IX, Nos. 8-9.1 Biological Work of the ‘‘ Investigator.’’ 359 
[N.S.] 


is at the level of myotome 24; while the anal opening is at the 
level of myotome 54, and there are twelve post-anal myotomes. 
There are about five fin ray boxes present to every myomere 
throughout the whole length of the animal. 

From the above characters, it would appear that this must 
be an example of A. valdiviae. 

TunicaTa.—The two commonest forms of surface-frequent 
ing tunicates were Salpa cylindrica, Cuv. and Salpa democratica 
Forsk. 


on one occasion as many as 500 were obtained in a single haul. 
They were invariably individuals of the ‘‘ solitary ? type, 
and in the majority of cases possessed a well-marked stolon, 
with a chain of developing young. The examples of S. demo- 
cratica were small, measuring from 6—7 mm. in length. 


CRUSTACEA. 

oda.—Numerous examples of Lucifer were obtained 
in the surface trawls: they all appear to belong to a single 
species, L. typus, Auct.: during the months of March and 


ing from its appearance had 

of Ot a. These females were usually accompanied by 

numerous young that were clinging to the sides of the barrel 
ope —The various species of Copep da obtained 


Point have already been determined and an account of them 
published. (Sewell, 1912 (b)). In the more southerly region 
from Tavoy Point to the north of Iron Islan, she van) 
were obtained, so that it is unnecessary to give any further 
account of them eason 1910-11, a 


During the latter part of the survey Seas ( é 
; ith a view to investi- 


I n camp ashore. 
The results of these investigations have been worked out — 
are given below. Table LV are sempre’ the results derive 
from a series of tow-nettings taken while 
soundings. I have made no attempt to calculate the numbers 
of Copepoda present per cubic-area of water, Q 
disposal was not sufficient ; I have instead reduced see caved 
to the number caught per hour, and, as, in all cases, the 


360 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [Aug -Sept., 1913. 


net was used and the rate of steaming was throughout prac- 
tically constant, viz. five knots per hour—the figures may, at 
least, be taken as having a relative value, indicating the varying 
richness of the Copepod fauna in the different areas at the 
time of investigation. 

A consideration of these results shows very clearly that, 
in this region of the coast, the number of Copepoda frequent- 
ing the surface bears a very close relationship to the state of 
the tide, a tow-netting taken at or near low water always show- 
ing a marked superiority as regards numbers of copepods 


a 
8.am. 


3. 


2. 10. 
Copepoda) 
Bia riby A es J 


: lam, 2. *. 
Bae ae Ser eee ete Copepoda. 
April 5 191. é } pei e4 ai. 
= Tide. 


Eta: Ss; 


Note.—The first column gives the n i 
second indicates the height of the de ia — sp peers 


It appears to me that two i : iati 
2 sh that explanations of this variation 
are possible ; firstly, it might be due to a horizontal move- 


+ 


Vol. 1X, Nos. 8-9.] Biological Work of the ‘‘ Investigator.’ 361 
[N.S.] 


ment, a richer fauna being brought down the coast by the tide, 
which in this region sets up and down the coast, the direc- 
tion of the flood being in the main to the N.-N.-W. and of the 
ebb to the S.-S.-E., or secondly, it might be due toa gon 
movement, the Copepoda sinking below the surface at the tim 
of the flood and high water, and rising again when the ebb tide 
is established. 

That it is not due to the former is shown by the fact that 
(1) the alteration in numbers does not exactly coincide with 


hours before high-water, and (2) although numerous tow-n 
tings were taken all over the region between the Middle Scdoel 
Islands and Byikhwaaw Bay, “there was no evidence of any 
variation in the local richness of the fauna such as this view 
presupposes to exist. We therefore have to fall back on the 
second explanation, and such evidence as | have te able to 
accumulate tends to show that this is the correct on 

A series of vertical hauls of the tow-net taken a different 
states of the tide in or near Byikhwaaw Bay, gave the following 
vertical distribution. 


No. or CoPEPODA OB- | 
TAINED. 


Posirion. | | 
Se ee | 
| State of Tide. 

N Ist 2nd 3rd 

: soe fathom. | fathom. | fathom. | 


| 


| 2,040| 2,550| .. | Adulte. 
se a ac “] 4,080 11,730 .. — Nauplil. 
| - 1,750 | 3,890 1,260 | Adults. 
esd ea es -) 2770 1,210, 3,850 Nauplil. 


3,560 | 1,790 1,630 Adults. 


16,290 | 1,020 3,310 Nauplii. 
Bie Te 1,660 | 2,550} 1,910 | Adults. 
High water ; 


5,090 12,200 11,200 Nauplii. 


he cause of this vertical movement I am inclined to 
attribute to a change in the density of the sea-water. T - 
such a change does actually cause a rise and fall of these animals 
has been shown by Professor Loeb. (1893, p. 96). 2 
Observations on the density of the aawhise were taken 
every morning at 7.30: the readings recorded were the mean 


362 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [Aug.-Sept., 1913. 


of the results obtained from four different hydrometers ; 
already pointed out, these are only capable of recording to 
the nearest degree, so that it was 
accurate result. At the same time t 


obtained have been converted into salinities by calculating the 
chlorine equivalent from Ditmar’s tables in the ‘‘ Challenger ”’ 
Reports (Physics and Chemistry, Vol 1, Table VII, p. 70, 
and Table IX, p. 80) and by multiplying this figure by the 
factor 17974, as given by Ernst Ruppin, 1911. 

Most of the readings were taken at stations widely distant 
from one another, but a few were taken at different dates in 
Byikhwaaw Bay. These have been plotted out, according to 


Rae 


L.W. 
Byikhwaaw Bay, 


Fig. 4, 
—In this and the succeedi . ‘ : 
shows the ri \cceeding diagrams, the interrupted line 
salinity, © rise and fall of the tide, and the continuous line that of the 


a of os tide at which they were obtained, the necessary 
tide: chi § obtained from the observations recorded by the 
party Stationed in the bay itself. The result is shown in 
=~ accompanying diagram. 
though the results obtained : 
: were net very satisfactor 
they tend to show that In this region, at any dite thas ae 2 


tinct fall and subsequent tise in the salinity of the water 


rise of the tide this water is carri i 
ried past Byikhwaaw Bay up the 
coast towards the phe eaeag Islands, a second fall ast rise 


two streams, 


Vol. IX, Nos. 8-9.] Biological Work of the ‘‘ Investigator.’’ 363 
[N.S.] 


During the second season 1911-12 a further attempt was 
made to investigate the changes in the salinity : 
there was no available apparatus on board for 


every hour, both at station 399 at the mouth of Tavoy River, 
and in Port Owen, Tavoy Island, during a period of twelve 


e rise and fall of the tide. 
of AgNO. 
deci-normal strength, but as this could not be done very accu- 
rately the resulting figures have only a relative value. 
The results are given below—figs. 5 and 6—and they show 
‘very clearly that here at any rate there is a distinct fall in 
the salinity during the flood tide and a rise at the ebb. 


SL4) + 


é 
| eo 
ee 
ae 
ae 
a 
oS 
<a 


Loar 
-orro 
or niga!) 


$ 
° 


‘tom 8. 9 10, N12. lama. 3, * 5 6 7 6 
Mouth of Tavoy River 


Fia@. 5. 


* . . . ite to 
In this region the set of the tide is the exact oppos! 
what it isin the northern area. The ebb tide runs N.N W. 
S.S.E., and the results obtained at the different 
localities, combined with a study of the tidal currents, tend to 


ing down the Tavoy River, there is an area of lessened comes 
created in the region round the river-mouth. When the ide 
commences to flood, a strong current sets 1n from the — 
re, and runs in an easterly direction between the 


i N.W. 
direction between the South Moscos and the mainland, and 


the other to the §.8.E. between Tavoy Island and the coast. 


Asa resultthe water of the area of lessened salinity is swept 


364 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [Aug.-Sept., 1913. 


in both directions, part passing northwards past Byikhwaaw 
Bay, thus causing the fall and subsequent rise in the salinity 
curve, and part passing to the south causing the fall in the 
salinity of the sea-water in Port Owen and the region between 
it and the mainland. 

Esterly (1912, p. 294) has, as a result of his experiences in 
the iego region, come to the conclusion that salinity is a 
negligible factor in the distribution of the surface Copepoda, but 
in his observations the range of variation was only from 33-604 
to 33:649, whereas in the present case it varied from 30-618 to 
31°424 at the mouth of Tavoy River and from 30°112 to 31-200 
at Port Owen, and it would seem probable that Esterly’s 


Hu. 4 


HI, 


ei ontewuas mend 
Fig. 6. 
— to obtain any definite results was due to the fact that 
e 7 anges in salinity observed by him were too small. 
n addition to this tidal] variation it was found that 
a 


b Cope f i 
coaabdlanias Pred str requenting the surface showed very 
Hees obtained. 
ound that there was a decided tendenc 

: y for the total plankton 
and the Copepoda to rise to a maximum and then fall to a 


prings) or the phases of 
ble to correlate them with 


Vol. IX, Nos. 8-9.] Biological Work of the ‘‘ Investigator.’ 365 
[N.S.] 


any alteration in the physical conditions present in the sur- 
roundings. 

In addition the results show that there is also an annual 
variation in the numbers of these 
surface : they are numerous during the months of November 
and December and then the numbers gradually diminish, so 
that at the beginning of February, they are comparatively 


During both seasons, daily observations were made on the 
surface temperature of these waters, and the results show that 
there is a very striking constancy in this respect : during the 
whole period covered by the observations, February to April 
1911 and December 1911 to February 19!2 the change in 
temperature never varied more than three degrees from 79° Ff. 
to 82° F., and in the vast majority of cases was between 80° 
and 81°. 


STOMATOPODA. é 
Alima and Erichthus larvae were present throughout the 


On tw 
fortunate enough to obtain specimens of a Discina larva : 
their occurrence is of considerable interest, for hitherto no 
examples of Discina have been found, as far as I am aware, by 
the RI.M.S. ‘« Investigator,’’ and further it shows that this 
species, like Lingula anatina, breeds in this region during the 


was obtained during the months of February to April, while 
Yatsu obtained a single specimen in Misaki Bay, Japan, be- 
tween June and September. : 
Both the present examples were, as is usually the case, 1n 
the 4 p. c. stage. 
EcuinoperMats.—-Ophiopluteus larvae were found to be of 
comparatively frequent occurrence at certa! 
the early part of the season, but as regards oth a ts 
the Phylum, larval forms were comparatively rare; In — 


366 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [Aug.-Sept., 1913. 


respect, however, station 399 is worthy of note, for here the 
surface tow-netting contained, in addition to numerous Ophio- 
pluteus larvae, several minute Asteroids just past the larval 
stage, a few small larval Echinoids, and several Holothurian 
larvae of the ‘‘barrel’’ type. 

oLYCHAETA.—Polychaet larvae were of comparatively fre- 
quent occurrence throughout the whole period of investigation. 
Unfortunately in the present state of our knowledge it is im- 
possible to identify specifically the various forms met with, and 
all that can be done is to refer them to their different families 
or genera. The families represented by their larvae in the col- 
lection are as follows :— 


Alciopidae. Polynoidae. 
Disomidae. Spionidae. 

Poecilochaetus, sp. Syllidae. 
Magelonidae. Terebellidae. 
Nereidae. Tomopteridae. 
Phyllodocidae 


At station 399, several long Polychact worms of a pink 


colour were seen swimm 


e resulting catch was usually fairly copious and con- 
tained the following organisms :— 
Pisces.—Fish ova and larval fish. 
Tunicata—Several examples of a species of Salpa. 
Ascidian larvae. 
Crustacea.—Larval Pagurid crabs. 
ab zoeae. 
Crab megalopae. 
Young Prawns in the post-larval stage. 
Ostracoda. 
Amphipoda. Several species; including exam- 
ples o Ima, sp. 
Lucifer typus, auct. 
Evadne, sp. 
Copepoda (a list of the Gymnoplea has already 
been published). 
Copepod nauplii. 
Lepas nauplii. 
Brachiopoda.—Several examples of Lingula larvae 
Mollusca.—Lamellibranch larvae. . 


Vol. IX, Nos. 8-9.] Biological Work of the ‘‘ Investigator.’’ 367 
[W.9.] 


pcb Barat —-Examples of a species of Sagitta were 


commo 
Palichonia: —Numerous larval forms. 
Coelenterata.—Pleurobrachia sp. were comm 


vhs sor bia —Examples of Clobigerina sa Sinmeein 
Radiolaria.— Examples of Acanthometron, sp. 
Diatomacea —Coscinodiscus. 


Rhizosolenia. 
Thalassiosira. 


As regards the results obtained at stations 395 and 396, 
there is very little tosay. The type e of Plankton approximates 
very closely to that of the region to the west and south-west 
of the South Moscos Islands (Sewell, 1912 (b), area IV). It is 
of the same pink tinge and contains numerous Radiolaria and 
a few Ceratium tripos. 

The surface tow-net at station 393 (7.21.06 N.: 85.07.15 E.) 
is of interest, in that, firstly, it serves as a control to the 
Mid-water ‘Trayi taken at the same station, and secondly, it 
ed a species of Copepod that I have not hitherto obtained 

nthe Bay of Bengal. The following Copepoda (Gymnoplea) 
were identified :— 

Acrocalanus gracilis, Giesbr. 

Acrocalanus longicornis, Giesbr. 

). 


ah oa furcatus ( 
Clausocalanus eaessraes (Dana a). 
Gldeacehlinais arcuicornis, Var ewe nov. 


a 

Temora stylifera (Dana). 

Undinula vulgaris (Dana). 

This was the first occasion on which I had been fortunate 
enough to obtain examples of Centropages ca ni = 
addition to the above there were numerous examples 0 Oncea 
and Sapphirina 

sae the close of the survey season 191 1-12, the 


368 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [Aug.-Sept., 1913. 


R.I.M.S.S. ‘‘ Investigator’’ proceeded to the Nicobar Islands 
in order to carry out a resurvey of Nankouri Harbour. 

She arrived there on March 19th and remained there till 
April 10th. It is greatly to be regretted that during this 
period my assistant did not avail himself of the opportunity to 


examples of Julis lunaris (Linn.) and an immature specimen of 
Caranz armatus (Forsk.), a single specimen of a large Holo- 
thurian, and four tow-nettings of the surface plankton. 


n 
four samples, the bulk of the catch consists of vegetable debris 
with a certain admixture of diatoms mainly Rhizosolenia and 
Chaetoceras, and a few examples of Ceratium tripos. 

The chief animal constituents were :— 


Ascidian tadpoles. Balanus cyprides. 

Crab Zoeae. Pelagic Crustacean ova. 
Copepoda. Lamellibranch larvae. 
Copepod nauplii. Sagitta sp. 

Ostracoda Polychaet larvae. 
Balanus nauplii. Echinoderm larvae. 


THE SUCCESSION OF ORGANISMS IN THE PLANKTON. 


with regard to the breeding seasons of most of the marine 


fauna, | have thought that the following notes may prove of 
interest. 


and there can be no doubt that their season extends for a 
considerable further period, for although no observations could 
be made on the Burma coast, these larvae are found to 


swarm in enormous numb : . ee 
and August. mbers in the Hoogly River during July 


Vol. IX, Nos. 8-9.] Biological Work of the *‘ Investigator.’’ 
[N.8.] 


369 


THE SUCCESSION OF PLANKTONIC ORGANISMS. 


Hinzé Basin to Tavoy Island. 


Burma Coast. 


e | es | § 
2 3s a Ss | | | 3 | 2 ui 
Biel a)/ 8/2] es oie. Rae: 
Le 8 (a dcg) Bae |) Bel 8 |e | Bel § 
ieigigie¢isiSi2/ 3 See ee 
Baa pate: sisi Chel | | 
Leptocephalus larvae ; Soa RNS BH HE | 
eel ae | 
Pelagic Fish Ova 2, | a ee 
; 
Ascidian larvae FE | | 
| | 
Crab Zoeae caeccrmet, | 
Crab Megalopae - | — os ee oe | | | 
Phyllosoma larvae —— for | | | | 
Copepod nauplii : Se eee 
| | | 
ii a ROR ET As the Survey-season only 
Eee henge ee extends from the middle 
B i ‘ | erence eCRORO +20 | of October to the begin- 
alanus cyprides | ; | oe tte 


Alima larvae 

Lingula larvae .. 
Lamellibranch larvae 
Gastropod larvae 
Ophiopluteus larvae 
Polychaet larvae 


Pleurobrachia, sp. 


i J 
. ecu ses aes a 
Noctiluca, Sp. .. és a 
Rhizosolenia .. we er 
Chaetoceras oo er 
Ceratium tripos eat seeca menses 
Peridinians ee ay | cece 


370 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengai. [Aug.-Sept., 1913. 


e would Se sgt and as has been found to 


their magi ge = December, at least one month after the 
crab zoeae, and are to be found for some considerable period 
of time after the 2 zoeae have disappeared, and the same is the 
case with the Balanus nauplii and cyprides. 
comparison of the above table with that of the occur- 
rence of similar organisms in the Plankton of the North 
Atlantic (Johnstone, 1908, p. 96, fig 23) shows that for the 
most part they occur in Indian waters at a somewhat later 
period, and there would appear to be a general tendency for 
marine organisms to have their ivareas season during the 


west monsoon and the consequent disturbance of the waters 
in “ Dons on. 


animals "belonging to the groups in which era are interested, 
and to Capt. T. L. Bomford, I.M.S., who has kindly permitted 
me to include in the above report, his notes on the hauls made 
at stations 461—467, inclusive. 


Vol. IX, Nos. 8-9.] Biological Work of the ‘‘ Investigator.’’ 371 
[V.8.] 


TaBLe 1.—List of Mollusca obtained at various shore- 
collecting stations. 


! 


Cytharea castanea, Lam. . ee 


a = Se ae 
4 z os 3 
<0 (0 Coast. | z 3 4 
: ee 
R= ake = 3 
x a = 
| | 
LAMELLIBRANCHIA. | 
LIPOCEPHALA. | | 
Monomya. | | | | 
| 
Ariculacea. | | 
Meleagrina eoargeri tore Linn. .. | | . eae 
Pina nigra, Ch. . fet: Sade F x 
Ostracea. 

Ammussium tg oeage Dans x bau 
Ostrea cucullata, pep ee eters eee x 
hae crasicostats, igh ae eee eee rir 

n, Sp. Ses Base es x 
Sonaivade, sp. a x 
Heteromya. | 
Mytilacea. 
Mytilus viridis, Linn. .. SPE en Sa, flees 
Mytilus, sp. ee ee. ve oe x* x 
Isomya. | | 
Pholadacea. : | 
Aspergillum, sp. oe eee . eee 
Martesia multistriata, Sow. — Sore ba le x 
Pholas orientalis, Gm 24 oe . 
Myacea. 
Glau psi soe et Rv. Mes Big +: o- x 
Siliqua radiata, Linn. .. eg 4 ae x im 
Solen brevis, pes ae oa . ee 
Veneracea. | 
Circe castrensis, Linn. .. ve a ‘e i 
Circe, sp. ee is : x ernie 
Clione tiara, Wood. fee at x Mee ree 
ista dispar, Ch. c. a a Besuil ank 
Crista divaricata, Ch. xK = x o* 


372 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [Aug.-Sept., 1913. 


TaBLe I.—(Continued.) 


Veneracea.—conid. 


Cytharea erycina, Linn 
ytharea, sp. . 


lac eB as 
actrinula plicataria, Linn. 
eroe picta, Li : 


, Linn. ‘ 
aphia glabrata, Lam, .. 
ullastra cor, Sow. ; 


os 
ellina virgata, Linn. ., 
ellinoides sinuata, 2) ee 


Cardiacea, 


Cardium asiaticum Vo ee 

Cardium dupuchense Rv. 

Cardium retusum, Linn... 

Cardium, sp. .. ws 

Chama multisquamosa, Rv. 
ama, sp. 


Lucinacea. 
Cardita distorta, Riipp... 


Arcacea, 


Scapharca disparilis. Rv, 


Scapharca gubernaculum, Ry, 


Scapharca japonica, Rv. 


rae ah oe ice 


| e ; 
3 
Coast.| 5 
| ¥a 
| Pa) 
aa 
| 
| 
| 
ie 
x | x 
as x 
=e 
a ausieel x 
ey 
x be 
: x 
x ee 
x 
x so 
ae x 
x 
x 
x ie 
oe * 
‘ x 


Moscos 


Islands. 


x x xX 


Vol. [X, Nos. 8-9.] Biological Work of the ‘‘ Investigator.’’ 373 
[NV.S.] 


Taste I.—(Continued.) 


GASTROPODA. 
Opisthobranchia. 
Bullidae. 


Bulla ampulla, Linn. 


Azygobranchia. 
Volutidae. 
Melo indica, Gmelin. is 


Olividae. 
Oliva Anes Borns. 
Oliva , Lam ee 
Oliva tromulina, ‘tan 


Oliv 
Utricalina nebulosa, Lam. 
Utriculina, sp. i 


Mitridae. 


Nebularia, sp. .. Pa 


Buccinidae. 


Eburna canaliculata, Schum. 


Muricidae. 


Fusus colus, Linn. ‘a 

Fusus, sp. 

Homifusu us pugillinus é 
x martinianus, Rv. 


urpura persica, Linn. 
Saas bulbosa, Soland. 


Cancellaridae. 


Cancellaria elegans, Sowb. 


Conidae. 


Chelyconus terminus, Rv. 
Chalyconss. sp. 


z= 
EI 
= 


Hinzé 


bet Re 


ee ake 


| Coast. | 


B | af 
5 s 
Ee cas 
af ge 
Pp ° 
FQ a 
»4 x 
* x 
x ee 
o# x 
x oe 
x ee 
o< x 
x 
* x 
x * 
Se x 
x oe 
x oe 
x 


374 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [Aug.-Sept., 1913. 
TABLE I. a tContinued. ) 
= ee ee sg 3 4 
g ee 
Q = Coast 5 a 8 a 
& Be o 
xq fa aS 
Conidae.—conid. 
Conus angulatus, A. Ad.. ae . x . 
Dendroconus lanier tion. os o. o x ++ 
Lithoconus tesselatus, Born. ate +. + .- x 
Rhizoconus monile, Hw. uk i. xs x oe 
Cypraridae. 
— kgs is Be “in oe x 
Cyprae te x a ae x 
L pane facenide. Duch, ae .s .- x 
Tritonidae, 
Persona cancellina, Desh. P +: a x 
Ranella eae Brod. x es : 
ella, ne x x 
Doliidae. 
Dolium atum, Lam x x 
Ficula dussumieri, Val. .. ; x <5 x 
Cassis glauca, Linn. ‘¢ a x x 
Strombidae. 
Pteroceras lambis, Linn. a Pe a bad x 
Strombus mar, arginatus, eae ne - x x x 
Strombus urceus, Linn age ig i x 
Capulidae, 
Crepidula, sp. e ; 
Crucibulum e extinetorum, Lam. ae x +? 
Crucibulum morbidum, R ar x Aas 
Naticidae, 
Mamma mamilla, Linn. . : : 
Natica lineata, Chem a . . ai 
Natica ee Ch. e ie 
on yas Gm . SS 
x 
re neritoides, Linn. a b : a 
Turritellidae, | | 
Turritella attenuata, Rv. | = 
Turritella duplicata, Len ) : | * Be 
Tarritela ferebes, Hien, | Xf epee 


Se anes Ra 


Vol. IX, Nos. 8-9.] Biological Work of the ** Investigator.’’ 


Taste [.—(Coneluded.) 


Sa ee | a = — —_—___+__— 


Cerithidae. 
Cerithium morus, Lam. .. 
Cerithium 
Vertagus sinensis, , Gm. 


Neritidae. 
Dostia Se Bens. 
Nerita chamaeleon, Linn. 
Nerita costata, Ch. 
Nerita lineata, Linn. 


Trochidae. 


Lunella porphyritis, Mart. 

Monodonta aus i ees m. 

Polyodonta 

Pol — paisa "ig Sch. 

Polyon sp. 

gota: vatinee: Linn. 
chleu 


Ee 


rbo marmoratus, 


Patellidae. 
Patella, sp. me cm 


Fissurellidae. 


Fissurella bombayana, Sow. 


CEPHALOPODA. 


Sepiella i inermis Van Hass. 
Spirula 


4h 8 
e ef 8 (2 


| Byikhwaaw 
Bay. 


375 


376 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [Aug.-Sept., 1913. 


TaBie II.—Showing the occurrence of organisms in 


Survey Season, 1910-11. 


af = 


Hydrophis fasciatus 


rina he a . im 
Car. na ve : 
Citharichthys, sp... - ae 
Coila dussumieri ., - - 
Corica soborna : : a4 
Engra oe . . | 
Baul runconius ei i s 
Gicnticte: a é : 


mphus Ranthonterie 


Xenopterus naritus | 
Salpa cylindrica 


( harybdis (Goniosoma) affinis | 
Charybdis (Gon niosoma) crucifera 
Charybdis 
Char 


J eth astu 

Neptunus = 

Varuna litterata hi 
Sp. 


Lean 


e| 
S| 


Speci phus ee 
Hi 


chiurus savala . 


Races merguiensis | a 
Il ae "lags Ligeia: de iene 


| | | 8 | aio | oe 
m—igois Cai oO} GS ee ree ae | N 
NONININ|N NN intial 
= > x fc | ee} ee 
ba + S oe 
oe * es = 
x «js ’ 
ae » ase 
pee Cares vo ee 
a eas : Boe 
; ce Kale 
per era 
ee . 46} oon ee 
Pa ata eee cole 0) ee be ach eee ° pe 
eee Pal set es cee ee 
sew [es [eects é | K | ee] setae] oe lee . 
a) ae cele | .| 1 ae eh ea z 
. rr are . i ee i 
o. ee wd jes ° Joa [eed eet ee Bes 
Ae aa Spa wil ae cathe mien jee " : 
| x EVO RSSEN ee bax | 
. re ce pl mee ve eae re eae oe | daca 
ei iee 1% | | | ioe: | Aah | . 
gue aes ees ie 
Being: Pip aot * dw all ae s 
bee | “| X} | ef ee fer] ee ejeeds we 
| SER wep ee oe. a hs | ae eee oie? 
- co] KM] oe] - | oe e nee: Vy a 
ere se] Kee 3: MK ee eae ve 
| | ree 
Ries So he ee . gee a i i 
eat ae oe ALS J oo] ee] | , 
| | | | | eS ad oY 
Peek. 5 Pie Or te eg a Gr en tree ope 6: eee 
| | | | ara Me Nea Se cs 
bia ‘Seto Belek eee? = eles eee ek oo 
As ae" Dag | es ok 2 ae alee ie 
ee tee Pas Fee Pe eae eee re rf 
were PR Ley os) 0 fet RE : 
| | | | | 1 | ppes ae 
ele oe coe cele Gidea akalee elses be ee] | ge x 
rpeebee| eel oe| Mp esl mi Me  veree| “i 
A a | eT] Sete bee be ee poate pee ood E 
| | ere rt 
bag oer hata a4 lh Weer . ee] . ae | ae] tt 
cole i Os Pegs opie tee pes es . 
| | fasber| oe 
eis Caveat (ois fa Ue, ag aca Re el oo EIS | tes 
| | x cabee | aa eee 
fo. Meee ee A 8 OE . ee bs | eer 
Sak She oe : wel ae es 


377 


8-9.] Biological Work of the ‘** Investigator.’’ 


Vol, 1X, Nos. 


[W.8.] 


the Plankton obtained with the large surface tow-net. 


Survey Season, 1911-12. 


SPF | Sat: YS ee eee ee eee toss tee 
Lit ts ee eee Paik ies tt Chee 
fii 3 ft: 1 itt See ek ee ee eer eae 
4 eee oo ee om ook eae ge eee ee 
OF) fo flilitit<. eee ‘SESS ceux tt See ee 
507 | Tere | ae fe SS errr eens 
€0F et ts ee rere ee 
308 | cee Ul CRS 1 SU RR. a 23% foe 
Wl. of hilt: See tS aes ee 
¢ hee hae Re ex See errs 
“uy” i a ae 
(eee 8 ee tS RA is Sos oe pa eee 
Al ro igs: tee ey ee ee 
eee TERPS ese Seem see 
Je ered tee eee iS 
oe eee ee Se co ee 
oe S580: 1 Ch Dh eee Sie 
M2 $2 ls See LS Sea es me See rea 
oe rte: le Ste Pee ee 
WPL Ss 2 ye ee Se tee ee ee 
po) fits ea ee ed ee te 
a | ee ete ae yc Ee Wy we ae Mg ee See 
: : Re oe eee Se reer arrears 
| a | ee pee RN rs cy ee meri yeeain ae : | 
CG ee eee eS ee ee eer 
ley ee eee) Pe aee CPOUR SCR 1g geet es pers | 
| bz i PERERERMOe Os Ge OE 


378 


Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [Aug. Sept., 1913. 


Taste ITI.—Occurrence of organisms in the 


Survey-Sea 


Pelagic Fish ova 


Ascidian larvae a 
Crab zoea an ve 
Crab megalopa es 
Copepoda Nr ae 
Copepod nauplii ey 
Ostracoda. es | 
Balanus nauplii ae 
Balanus cyprides ae: 
Evadne,sp. .. 2 
Lingula larvae a 
Lamellibranch larvae .. 
Gastropod larvae aa 
Ophioplutens larvae... 
Sagitta,sp. ., a 
Polychaet larvae a 
Noctiluc1, sp... ce 


7 9) o#) Sal ew 


po *1 ele ef 


oo Mee K 
eae 
heleol Mle 

Pl 
bah 
SPeie ise setee 


| 


Mea lou, | 


| | 
} 


xx a ee 


| | } 


{ 


* 


| 


Ls | x eles 


| 


| 


4 | 


| 
Se cols eissiog 


| 
| ey 
>| 


\ 


Saas Pa | x 1% 13¢] Ix[.ofeele=foat x 


\*,* eleeles Ix |.-] x Bies eevee 


| 


eo Reese 
| | | laq'| ao 
i 1D | ty JO Se 
I [2 |S Visio ssssesseessseeslesee 
|S |S | | }D | S90 Cl RS wl ie ‘Sg 
ag 3% BS SS FSSSS$ S/F SS SS SS aS 
i "4 siaslecl Mleelee| ¥lesle cles lemhe nina 
n0[ Bi RIKI Ks. rete Klee eeieeleeieeioeice) le ejee! MX 
a ine 
a , eae 
Lee} Kine X Cleelewis eel ele are ee Ale aie ote ee oe Me 
| | if 
ae | | ae slaaleslecte 5} el eeis eiam 
oe | iy Bape | : 
MMII K KK) KL x pe] KL LLL Loe bod |e Lew Ls 96 pe 1 
lpr a | 4 2 
eet MPS cl esis lests cles! Rial XM loal KX loal x Bal a a bs) 
pak | |_| | [oat é 
pret ee | Miele el eel HK lente el 1K [eel 1K 11 le elec le 0 Em Leena 
Bobet b | | ond | | } 
! } | } | | i 
Jntjee|ee]% Le}... Heeteslasteaty ytsates ts we lee] X jo opm loam 
aks eae ea | 


x |e! 


| "| 
| Bape: 
Bere 


oo joing ee 


| j | 
eleeleclsclecios 
| eae | | 
| | } 
| | | 


| 
x 


| 


i 

! 

| 
oe 

j 


} Lode fot ‘ 
Tete ee ce ee ee eel . 


\ i Lotte 


Vol. IX, Nos. 8-9.] Biological Work of the “ Investigator.’’ 
[v.98] 


Plankton obtained by small surface tow-net. 


son, IQII-12. 


NS ee ee 
| / 

Bi% |x |X) x 
sll 
ise bs ic | x Ix 


a ae a 


x 


: a ae 
99 IH 19 {co [rx 
QUIN int 

$1518 818) 


| 


oe 


x 


+ 


Sie eleeleeles|selewla'e fod ecleeloele et 


{ 


ee) 
nN 
a 


ool Mee MR EM ite le ela. ef x 


ovleelse Nhs far Oe eeee reise oe 
} | ; 
| 


gelsisies 2s 
sid sil ail al al f 


Ml Ries 
| 


| 

| | | 
ec eeis 

| | 


af | pod | | [ 
sae SeSeeesis 
} i | 


379 


Mileetewls of Mia biewls et SUl 


1K] Melee te wes x x GES a Mary rare Seed oes Ps ees Bree poem el Bd en 


ele obi dalieticlaxiw . Jeels 


| 


Cae teres oe! oe * ere +e ee oe ee 


FO 220 Oe OC 


| 
OK ae 


oof |x| a ele ateefet mao 


| 


OI OI 


die | 6 al ea bee fiat pilcsion oe KK Keowee 


Klesiecieeioe! KM ee ce MIM ae 


| 
| 
ealeets ales ae wee Kee eee ee KK ee ee elee ee ee ee KK ce ee Moe 


| 
t / 
? 
i 
| | 
] 
| 
| 
j | 


| ; 
awe oof M fos Xe ele ole) x] Ix 
es | gs a 


| ee | * 
| } | | | | 


bend 


valeateris ale eel aa aise, 


MIM isle. K[ xt. . 1 Lx rile Kove ee eee x 
| { 


| 
| 
| i 
| j 
ee 


H 
| ete x 
ee ees wee 
a 


eles Kites veil jesteelee 1%} had bee es 
| | 


' i } i 
Sele ele eleelewicociesiconlisaviesissise Mis soles) Mee ee eelee © 6) 6 ewlesise sale) add | 
| | : | : i 
: | | } i ' 


Loo] 21s 01 1301 enleslow{ora| Me] los] K1M1H 1H leelecle olen! x x oeee|Kiee 


| 


eam 


far 


} 
| hele xxl. 


| 


x|safvfos}e loots sleelsofoof eviewe 


P14 | 


| 
] i eee eee 


ee eves seer iee oe eeleslesioe * 


| i ; | 


+ 
oo fea} E | S/o bl hdl Xe. x 


i | : | 

i i 
se 0 
{ 

j 

lee seen ve 


380 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [Aug.-Sept., 1913. 


Taste IV.—Record of tow-nettings from ship during day-time. 


: ; 
| “Ga Date. | State of Tide. Position from | Position to Bere 
| | per hour. 
| February | 3 ? West of Middle Moscos Islands. | 1386 
| . | 7 ? 13.45 | 97.57 | 13.45 | 97.55 | 296 
| - | 8 (a) Ge ebb 13.55 | 97.56} | 14 15} 97-56} 4725 
| | (0) Flood and | 14.15} / 97.56; 14.13 97.555 | 97:25 
[<P Bla) | Ebb | | | (143-5 
| | 14.13 97.555 14.10} | 97.573 
| (b) | Early flood ee 
” 10 (a) | High water ) | | | 22°6 
| eb) | tow water | Mt UOt | 92-578 | 14.00 | 98-00 ee 
| fe | 
| ee | Late ebb .. | 13.41 | 97.564 | 13.43 | 98-00 | 156°25 
|» | 18(a) "Flood .. | 18,524 | 97.69} | 13.50 | 97.50; | 644 
| @)| Ebb Be | 13.50 | 97.59) 13.45 | 97.55 | 1012 
| 16 (a) | Late flood ... (13.47 | 97.514 | 13.49 | 97.513 | 3636 
| (6) Ebb .| 18.64 | 97.51 | 13.54 | 97.54 | 562 
* | H@) Late flood .. 13,553 97.57} | 13.54} 98.1 | 141 
| (6) ‘Early ebb .. 13.54 | 98.0% | 13.514 | 98.2 | 237 
18 | Flood 13.48 97.57 13°474 97.595 275 
March | 2 (a) Late flood .. | 14.43 | 97.514 | 14.3 | 98.00 | 775 
_ (®) Ebb 14.2 | 97.52 14.14 | 97.53} | 1250 
*» ++| 3(a) | Late flood .. 14.03 | 97.503 14.0) | 97.513 100 
| (b) Ebb -- | 13.59} | 97.573 | .. re 558°3 
tee | 14(a) Barly ebb .. | 13.34; 97.45 13.34 | 97.403 | 156 
| | (b) “Late ebb | 13.34 97.46 13.34 | 98,22 | 5125 
| Fig | 16 (a) hes ; | 13.395 97.55 13.41 | 98.2; | 400 
| ——-@) | Ebb - | 18.415 | 97.52 | 13.42 98.2 | 1000 
oS | 17 (a) “Flood ; | 13.38) | 97.52 13.38) | 97.423 | 175 
(b) | Bibb 4 | 13.393 | 97.483 | 13.40 | 98.5 800 


eos a 


Vol. ea: Nos. 8-9.] Biological Work oj the ‘‘ Investigator.’ 381 
WS.) 


TaBLE IV.—(Concluded). 


Copepod 


| | | 
th. | xs 
raat) | Date. ‘State of Tide.| Positionfrom Position to catch 


| per hour. 
pie ei 


| Birest ul EES SEH 


| 


| Ni KE, A Bega tie DP 


“March -- 18(a} Early flood.. 13.37} | 98.0} 13.37$ 97.58 | 1800 
| (0) Late ebb .. 13.363 | 97.543 13.36} | 97. 553 600 
aes 20 | Flood -- 13.314 | 98.33 | 13.34 | 97.54 | 312 
e | eye aie - eb! ey) ee As wee aoe 
f/| ,, ..| 29(a) | High water.. | 13:57 | 97.42 | 18.66 | 97.48 | 240 


(0) | Lateebb .. 13 554 | 97.483 13.54 | 97.41; | 336 
tes | 30 (a) ‘High water.. | 13.522 | 97.40 13.52 | 97.50 | 250 
| (6) | Late ebb... | 18 514 | 97.46 | 13. 504 | 97.47% | 300 
13.49 | 97.40 13°48 97.50 362% 


ary | 31 (a) Late flood .. 

| (b) | Ebb .. | 13.47 | 97.46, 1346 97.431 | 275 

| & | 

April ../ 1 High water. . 
” .. 3(a) Late flood .. 13.453 | 97.523 13 463 | 97.46 212°5 


13.45 | 97.47 | 13.443 | 97.54 862°5 


| (6) Early ebb .. 13.47 | 97.49} 13.49 97.493 825 

| Aes | 4 (a) Fane flood .. | 13. 524 | 97 524 | 13: 533 97. 471 600 

| (0) Ebb | 13.59 | 97.47 14 .. 97.46} 6166 

| ++ | 6(a) | Early flood.. | 14.2 | 97.42 14.3 | 97.403 | 1850 

. | | (8) Flood i. | 14.3 | 97.403 | 14.3 | 97.463 1150 
4 | l €) pe Good i. | 14.2} | 97.46} 14.44 97.413 350 
| (d) | High water. . | 14.43 | 97.47 | 14, 44 | 97. 444 | 478 

Ew ‘Ebb __.. | 14.44 | 97.89 14.5) 97.414 | 975 


| ++) 6(a) | Low water.. 14.33 | 97.413 114.4 | 97.45} | 
~ (6) Early flood.. 


(14.4 | 97.45 | 14.44 | 97.483 400 
(c) | Late flood .. 14.45 | 97.41 (14.5) 97.445 275 
(d) | High water.. 14.5} | 97.45 | 14.3% | 97.47 625 
(e) | Ebb .. | 13,583 | 97.59 | 13.58 97.87} | 825 


[Aug.-Sept., 1913. 


382 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. 


oS 
= 
| 
val 


OL NOWMISOg | WOUd NOLLISOg is | 
ey | 


ees | | 
7°36 | Lest | $F '86 | SOL eee pod) = OK | OKT 
| | | | | | 
| | | | | | oe Pon ae 
0°86) Fel) F'86) WEL ST) “MY fy PE I ee ea Lee 8 | 8K 
| | | | | | 
0°86 | ot; (pee | te-yr | s | ‘MMN | °° qa : creat (9) IK 
| | 
| | | | | "T ‘H "T 
$1°86 | 9 FT| f9'86| foFl| 3| “AN | °° poor | fog th) Le ee FORT OP i ee 
| | | | 
| (8 | “ANNAN ++ qqo Suze “ard og | cdg | r@ | px 
. . | Saarre | | | 
0°86 | LOST | feo"L6 | 9¢'ST | | | | ‘| oa | a 
| a ‘ass poo | “urd, jue gt-6 | 08-6 | OFS | 08-8 | 9s | (7) Te | OA 
| | 
feo'l6 | feat | f¥'96 Ie'et| 2 Mt age oye] jurrdog-g j-urd og | | (9) aK 
| | | | 
| bg |  *qqe Ajave ; Hl 3 oR ee 
7°86 | 19'et| ¥'86 | fep-et) 1 | Peete eee co ‘rdog-e |= “WOT | GIT | OFS | OTT | Ore | (7) FI | PA 
| | | Areniqejy 
i | 
eR ths an vee aa | 
“71 *B007|‘N N ‘9@'T |" “Buoy “Ny °9”T | 
x | jo oquag OPAL JOepwag | “Surmoy, jo oun, | a o9eq 


MOTT pu YS JO sourry, | 


ne, ne 84az0MN Be sie) Ut ang una worl sbuyyjai-noy, fo psoragy— A TIAVI, 


Vol. IX, Nos. 8-9.] Biological Work of the ** Investigator.”? 383 
[V.S.] 


TaBLe VI.—Surface tow-net stations for large surface tow-net. 


Station. Date. 


1910-11. Night. 


| Position, 
| 


; | 16/17-12-10 
17/18-12-10 
18/19-12-10 
. 19/20-12-10 
3/41-11 
4/5-1-11 
5/6-1-11 


+» | 16/17-1-11 
.. | 18/19-1-11 
S 19:20-L11 
if 2 (28/29-1-11 
ays -. 81/1 


| 
. | 14° 43’ 26" N.: 
.. | 14° 48’ 25° NL: 


| 
~. | 14° 43’ 26° NY: 


, | 14° 36’ N.: 
14° 26’ 30’ N.: 
14° 22’ 30” N.: 


14° 36’ N.: 
|, | 14° 19 10° N.: 
s | 14° 29’ 30" N.: 
.. | 14° 27" N.: 
|, | 14° 94" 15" Nv: 


14° 6’ N.: 


97° 48’ E. 


97° 48’ E. 

97° 48’ E, 

97° 45’ E, 

97° 52’ EB. 

97° 52’ E. 

97° 49’ 30” BE. 
97° 56’ 35” E. 
97° 43’ E. 

97° 44’ EB. 
97° 47’ 15” FE. 
97° 45’ 30” E. 


384 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [Aug.-Sept., 1913. 


TaBLE VII.—List 4g ‘eas gee pened enone, Night—both 
arge and small n 


i oy 
Station. Date. Position. ¢ q a | — 
Zam reading. 
Pout 
A - ..| 1/2211 .-/ 14.10 | 97.50 | 81 a 
aes | 2/9211 147 | 97.48 82 10225 
Cc = we | 3/4211 .. 14.10 | 97.46 81 | 1022 
D a -. | 4/6211 eo | 18. 38 | 98.8; 80 | 1022 
E +e | 5/6-2-11 ..| 13.33 | 98.8: 80 | 1022 
ee es) .» 13.45 | 97.55 80 | 1022 
ee 1 | 7/8211 .. | 13.55 | 97.66} 80-5 1022 
H ; : | 8/9-2-11 .. | 14048 | 97.56 80 | 1022°5 
I . .. | 9/10-2-11 .. | 14.108 | 97.573 79 1023 
a. «+ | 10/11-2-11 .» 140 | 98.0 | 80 | 1028 
L «<P 1/12 211 <é | 13.33 | 98.83 | 80 | 1023 
M 4 .. | 12/13-2-11 sa | 13.33 | 98 8} | 80°5 | 1023 
N : .» | 18/14-2-11 ../ 18.43 | 98.0 | 80 | 1023 
O 14 15-2-11 -. | 13.524 | 97.595 | 81 1023 
P . | 15/16-2-11 -- | 13.46 | 97.55 | 81 | 1023 
Q .» | 16/17-2-11 -. | 13.574 | 97.55 30 —-|:1022°5 
R ee .. |1718-2-11 -- | 18.48 | 97.57 | 81 | 1023 
s ie | 18'19-2-11 -» | 13.33 | 98.8: | 81 | 1023 
T me .» | 19/20-2-11 -. | 13.33 | 98.8; | 80-5 | 1023 
U - .» | 20/21-2-11 -- | 13.47 | 98.0 | 80 | 1023 
Vv = .. | 21/22-9-11 -. | 13.52 | 97.593 | 80-5 | 1028 
We. .» | 1/2311 -» | 14.44 | 97.58 | go | 1023°5 
D8 i -. | 3/$S-11 : | 14.5 | 98.0 | 80 | 1023 
Roe. 9/4511 _ 13.58} 98.1 80 1023 
Z BS . | 4/5-3-11 «« | 13.33 | 98.83 | sos | 1023 
ia licris kaa ee dea | 


Vol. LX, Nos. 8-9.] Biological Work of the ‘‘ Investigator.’’ 385 
[N.S.] 


TaBLe VII,—(Concluded.) 


| 8 a. Hydro- 

Station. Date. | Position. £3 meter 

| ees reading 

ie oe 

Aa 5/6-3-11 ; | 13, 33 | 98. 84 | 80 | 1023 

Ab | 6/7-3-11 ; | 13. 58 | 98.14 80 1023°5 
Me | 7/8811 13.46) | 98.25 81 | 1023 
Ad a | 8/9-3-11 | 13, 45} | 98. 2 80-1023 
Ao s | 9/10-3-11 (13.42 98.25 80 | 1088 
Sees . | 10/11-3-11 . | 13.395 98.3 80°5 1028 
Ag os : | 11/12-3-11 : 13.33 | 98.83 | 81 | 1023 
Ah (1213-3-11 13.33 | 98.8 80 | 1023 
Aj : 11314341 13. 34} | 98. 3h sl 1022 
Ak 5 | 14/15-3-11 13.36 | 98.3 81 | 1022 
Al nF | 15/16-3-11 13. 383 | 98.2: | 80 | 1023 
Am : | 16/17-3-11 13.382 | 98.74 | 81 | 1023 
An i “aise 13.393 | 98.43 81 | 1023 
Ao : | 18/19-3-11 13.33 | 98.8; 81 | 1023 
Ap a 19/20-3-11 18.33 | 98.8) 92 | 1023 
Ag oe 20/21-3-11 13.39 | 97.56 | 82 | 1023 
Ar | 28/29-3-11 (13.55 | 97.51 | 82 1028 
As : ee | 13.54 | 97.52 82 1028 
At || 30/31-3-11 "13.50 (97.52 82 - 1022 
Au : rere | 13. 45 | 97.43 | 82 | 1022 
Av | 2-411 13.33 | 98.81 30 “1022 
Aw ; | 2/3411 . | 13.33 | 98.84 | 81 | 1022 
Ax 34411 x | 13.51 97.515 82 =| 1022 
Ay ..| 4/5411 14.13 | 97.493 | 81 | 1022 
Az | 5/6411 14.2} | 97.45 | 82 | 1022 
Ba 6/7-4-11 . | 13.5608 98.0 | 82 | 1022 


386 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [Aug.-Sept., 1913. 
Tasie VIII.—Surjace collecting stations, 1911-12. 

£3 | Date. Position. go Temp, pea Tota 

ease | reading.) ton ces. 
Scant ahr Se oo tetas ie IIe Se ye PE coue Sec 
| ee aes ee | | 

394 1 & 3-11-11 .. |16, 16.00:96. 21.00 Gims. 80 1002 | 

307 O/1O--11 .. 18. 7.4098.17.45 6fms. 80 | 10205, 

398 10/1L-1L11 .. | 13,07 Pe gs at -10202~S 
1244-11 .. | ditto | ditt> 9 81 1020 2 
“WABILI .. ditto | ditto | o< bigi | 1020-32 

by ie -+ 13.25 | 98,23 | | 80 | meee 5 

400 1411-11, | 13.204 (98. 93. 45! § fms. | [oe 

401 Peer 1 116 98. 26 | 81 | 1020 | 1 

sa) ihe -+ 13.02 | 98,95 | oe ae | 3 
MOATAL-IL ..| 13.20 | 98,23 | 6 | ge | 1019-5}. 2 


I7/18-11-11 .. 13. 64 98.19) 123 | 83 |. 10205]. 1 


4 | | 
a eae FOR ERO 796.90 | 1e-| ep | j000-5| os 
406 | 19/20-11-11 5 | 


ve * Takon from ship while sounding. 


|-13..06 | 98. 20 | 12% 805 1020'5. 120 

ae PIRI O22 | 9 |g, | j9a0 2 
aD (Steal “+ | 13.22 bea 9-4 ft. 81 1020°5 2°5 
409 | 22/23-11-11 ++ | 13,25 | 98,20 i | 82 | 1020 | 1 
410 | 23 2411-11 ., | 18.274 / 98.16 | 7:54.) 81 | 1020 | 15 
411 | 24/25-11-11 . (23 28 | 98.18 | 64 ft. | 81 | 1021 | 3 
412 | 2526-11-11 .. | 13 6} cee 8-2 ft. 81 | 1020 | 72 
413 | 26/27-11-11 .. | 13, 63 | 98. 195 | 8-2 ft. | | 10205, 3 
415 | 27/28-11-11 .. | 13, 63 98.193 82 ft. 81 | 1020 | 3 
416 | 2829-11-11 .. | 13, 63 98.19) es s2 | ate : 
417 | 7/8-12-11 | 13.29 | 98.10 | 04.1 ,. | 1019 19 
418 | 8/9-12-11 .. 113,95 | 98.18 | ee 81 | 1020 | 12 


Vol. IX, Nos. 8-9.] Biological Work of the ‘* Investigator.’’ 387 
[N.S. ] 


TaBie VIII. eee ) 


as ae 


| E 

oe | | Hydro- Total 
35 Date, Position. ae | Fabr. meter  Plank- 
x b | reading. ton ces. 


et ee Sea Fe ol MOS Ce 


N. E. | 
9,10-12-11 .. 13. 6} 98, 194 


| 
| 
419 | 8:3 ft as 1019 
| | 
420 | LO/LI-12-11 .. | 13, 6} | 98.194 | 83H.) 81 | 1019 | 15% 
421 | 1112:12-11 ..| 13.38 | 989° | 46%} 81 | 1019 | 2 


422  12/13-12-11 .. | 13.33 98.9 | 45 ft.) 81 | 1018 18 


423 13/1412-11 .. 1318 | 98.23 44 ft./ 82 0205 
42414151211 .. 13.172 98.22 44 ft, | st | 1019) Os 
425 1516-12-11 .. 13.14} 98.21 83H. 81 | 1020 | 4 
426 16/17-12-11 «| 13.13 “98.23 | 55 ft 81 | 1019 | 4 
427 17181211 .. 13.13 “98. 23 | 55 ft. 815 101917 
428 | 18/19-12-11 .. | 13.05} 98.23. 74 ft. 81 | 1020 1 
429 19/201211 .. 13.06 98.22) 73ft. 81 ws 4 


| | 
30/31-12-11 .. 13,06: 9819 65 ft. 80 | 1019 105 
431 |311-1-12  .. 13.06} | 98.19 | 65%.) .. | 1020 | 200 
432 1/2-1-12 .. 13,06} 98.19 65 ft. 80 | 1020 33 


| 


433 | 2/2-1-12 ..| 13.074 | 98.12 | 17-2 ft. 79 | 1020 | 18 


434 3,4-1-12 13. 02 "98.14 171 ft.) 79 | 1019 | 58 
435 | 4/5-1-12 .. 13.08} | 9812 | 16 | 80 | 1020 | 116 
436 6/6112 .. | 13, 14} | 98.15 | 29 | 81 | 1020 | 14(+) 
437 | 67-1-12 ..| 13.06 | 98.18 | 15 | 80 | 10195) 65 
438 | 7/81-12 .:| 13,06 |98.18 | 15 | 80 | 1019 | 17 


429 8/91-12 ../ 12.56 | 98.13 | 174 ft. 79 10185 10 


440 | 9/10-1-12 ..| 12.65 98.13} | 162%. 79 1018 | 7 

441 “1o/M-L-12 | 12.58 98. 15} | I52ft. 79 | 1018 | 125 

42/12 13:12 ..| 12.65 | 98.92 | 16 | 79 | 1018 7 
3 15/16-1-12 ., | 13.00} 98.22 7-1 it. 79°| 1018'| 3 


| 


444 | 17/18-1-12 ae 06 98.18: 6 | go | 1019 | 35 
! : aw - - 


388 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [Aug.-Sept., 1913. 


26/27-1-12 
446 | 27/28-1-12 
447 | 28/29-1-12 
448 | 29/30-1-12 
449 | 31/31-1-12 


450 | 31/1-2.12 
451 | 1/2-2-12 
452 | 2/3-2-19 
453 | 7/8-2-12 
454 

455 . 
456 


Taste VIII.—( cence) 


1 as mee “ee ae 
. |12. 49. 30.98. 22. 45 


| 
| 


a 


. 13.06. 3098.18 45 


13. 06. 30.98. 18. 45 


Sound- ‘Temp. Hyde dro- - Tot 
| Fahe. reading. | ton ccs. 


| 
| 


30 80 | 10200 83618 
: | 
6 


| 


13. 03. 45.98. 31.10 4 80°5 1020 1°25 
. |12. 57. 3098.31.30 4:3 ft. 80 | 1020 9 
. |12.57.3098.31.30 43 ft. 30 1020 12 


| 


12.57 98.24.00 13-1 ft. 80 1020 20 
12.57 96.26 | 13-1 ft. 80 | 


_ 
° 
ee 
© 
— 
Ou 


. 12. 47. 3098. 24.45 64ft.| 80 | 1019 30 
| | 


80 1019 
80 «1019 
| | 80 1019 


Alcock, 1895 .. 


Alcock, 1898 . . 


Alcock, 1901 .. 


Alcock, 1902 .. 
Annandale, 1912 


REFERENCES. 


Materials for a carcinological fauna 
of India. No.1. Journal Asiatic 
ae of Bengal, vol. lxiv, part ii. 

le 

An account of the Deep-Sea Madre- 
poraria, collected by the R.I.M.S.8. 
‘‘Investigator.’’ Calcutta. 

Zoological gleanings from the 
R.I.M.S.S. ‘‘ Investigator.’’ Scien- 
tific ig ia hig Medical mg 


of the Army in India. Part xii, 
No. 3 Simla. 
itl Expedition. Report on the 


Deep-Sea Madreporaria. Leyden. 
Zoological results of the Abor Expe- 
dition. I. Batrachia. fase Ind. 


Mus., vol. viii, Caleutt 


Vol. IX, Nos. 
N.S. 


Carter, 1889 .. 


Day, 1889 

Esterly, 1912 

Gardiner, I. Stanley, 
1804. 

Jenkins, 1912 


Johnstone, 1908 


emp and Sowell, 1912. 


Loeb, 1893 
Murray and Hjort, 1912 
Nobili, 1906 .. 


Pearse, 1912 ., 


Petersen, 1911 
Rudmose-Brown and 


Simpson, 1907. 


Ruppin, E. , 1911 


Sewell, 1912 .. 


Sewell, 1912 .. 


8-9.] Biological Work of the “ Investigator.’’ 


389 


Sponges from the Mergui — 
pelago. Journ. Linn. Soc., v 
xxi, p. 61. London. (Repr inted 
in Anderson’s Fauna of Mergui 
Archipelago). 


. Fishes of India (Fauna of British 


India), vol. ii. London 
The occurrence and vertical distribu- 


“ South African corals of the genus 
pect > Marine Investigations 

n South Africa ca, vol.ii. Cape Town. 

ie Obsetiastieia on the shallow-water 


“Ca leu 
gis fu jestanmte Physiol. Pflugers, 
liv. Bon 
The: depths of ass Ocean. Macmillan 


“Pans Carcinologique de la Mer 
Rouge: Décapodes et Stomato- 


> 


podes.’ Ann. Da at. Zool., 
Ser. 9, vol iv. Paris. 

‘* The habits of fiddler crabs.’’ The 
eae s Journa' of Science, vol. 

i, Sec. D., No. 3, p. 113. Manilla. 

Raton of the Danish oe 
Station, XX. Copenh 

Report on the Pearl Oy ies Wisber: 
ies of the Mergui Archipelago and 
Moskos Islan - Government 
Printing Office on 

Zeitschrift fur cnr chemie. 
Ba 232. Leipzig. 


" Investigator ”’ during the Sur- 
vey-Season 1910-11. ee Ind. 
Mus., vol. vii. Caleu 

(6) Notes on the afore Cope- 
poda of the Bay of Bengal, 1 and 
il. Ree. # Mus., vol. vii. 

Calcutta. 


390 Journal of the.Asiatic Society of Bengal. [Aug.-Sept., 1913.] 


Sewell, 1912 .. rs (-), Note on the development of 
Lingula larva. Rec. Ind. Mus., 
vol. vii. cutta. 
Southwell and Sewell. N: a on the Fish fauna of certain 
1913. sin Benga 


Seni bulletin No. 1. Depart. Agri- 
cult. Behar and Orissa. Ranchi 
Wolfenden, 1908 -- Crustacea, VIII. Copepoda. Nation- 
al Antarctic Expedition. Vol. iv. 
Zoology. London. 


NNN NS FN PRINT IN EN 


Jour. As. Soc. Beng. Vol. IX, 1913. 


Plate XXV. 


Stake 
421-2. 


Nauwi Ris 4, 


I Sta. 
(Ooi. 


= 


Sta. 
‘ esta. eri. 
| \ 410. 
ny. ie 
y0 .. 
v r ie —s@Sta Sta 
‘ a ® 418. tig 
% * 
hg : 
: 
\., & oh 
. a. 00. 
a ier ‘ 
‘, ' : : 
g yi ae 
\ (7) @Sta. 403 
} i 
\ ae : 
j s@ota 
\ Stag /O425 ! 
1 4249) 
1 i 
\ ee / Sta. 
, o a , o's. 
Ng Seen \ a 
Bee ae 
ps Vy 
/ 
: i 
} 
. Sta. ! 
4388, \ 
\ @433.) 
/ \ 


30 33 


ee) 
Chart of the Burma Coast in the Neighbourhood of Tavoy Island. 


ie og High : atts, } 
rl a A 
/ Black Aks © See aa Sia : @Sta 449-50 
"eS Bitton @>'2 a iS 
‘ ue 451-2 , ’ 
if _ ; 
\ Great Canister fe @Sta 439. j B 
@Sta. +40 
~/ 
a. 
Oost, 
Serene Yeast 
to; ie: ‘ieee er ae 
\ 
eet saat 
Sylitle Canister 
— tee 
TO eb aon ee mows gee pena 0 . 
a ae 
o ee i 
‘ ta 
= Fi 
“~~~ 3 Fathoms , es 
OMG@soe Ak. 3 a 
ee ry 
rs AJ rs 
- 
——————S—— 


44. The Limestone Caves of Burma and the Malay 
eninsula.* 


By N. ANNANDALE, D.Sc., F.A.S.B.; J. Cogarn Brown, 
M.Sc., F.G.S.; and F. H. Gravecy, M.Sc. 


(Plates XVIII - XXII.) 

Page 

INTRODUCTION vse i is oo” 39] 
Part I. Geology of the Cave-bearing Limestones of 

Burma and the Malay Peninsula. J. Coggin Brown 396 

Part II. Fauna of the Limestone Caves of Burma 

and the Malay Peninsula. N. Annandale and F. H. 

avely 


Gr - se ae ». 402 
APPENDIX. Notes on clay tablets. B. B. Bidyabinod 
and C. Duroiselle _ ae 4 va le 


INTRODUCTION. 


The caves of the Oriental Region do not possess the 
interest of those of some parts of Europe and America. As a 
rule they are not of vast size or impressive interior; few or 
none of them contain streams or lakes; their fauna does not 


have not, so far as we know, been the home of races whose 
civilization is extinct. It is, however, no less necessary to study 
what is ordinary than what is striking; indeed, the former is in 
many cases the more important from a scientific point of view. 
Comparatively little attention has yet been directed to the 
Structure and fauna of the limestone caves of Burma and the 
adjacent countries, and it has seemed worth while, if only in 
order to stimulate further study, to gather together the scat- 
tered and often somewhat inaccessible references in literature, 
and to add the results, imperfect as they are, of our own 
several investigations in the Shan States, Tenasserim, the 
Siamese and the Federated Malay States. 

Although the caves are scattered over an area of great 
extent—it extends from western China in the north to Borneo 


ee ere ee ee ee ee te ee ee 


* Published by permission of the Trustees of the Indian Museum and 
of the Director of the Geological Survey of India. 


392 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [November, 1913. 


d rise 
conspicuous in flat land devoted to or suitable for agriculture, 
most commonly contain the caves, eaten out of their centres 


of the hills, sometimes they open on the face of precipitous 
cliffs, which may have almost the appearance of white marble, 
or may be almost black on account of weatherin 


great chambers within the hill. In many cases there are 
several series of passages and caverns, the latter of consider- 
able diameter, of great height and usually of circular form 
with a domed roof. The passages, which are as a rule less 


length of many hundred yards. lt is very common for there 
to be a small aperture like a skylight in the roof of the 
larger chambers, and sometimes the roof has collapsed more or 


Vol. IX, No. 10.] The Limestone Caves of Burma, 393 
[N.S.] 


manure, which, both in Burma and in Siamese territory, is 
collected annually in many of them. The subject, so far as 
Burma is concerned, is discussed by Mr. I. H. Burkill in a 
pamphlet issued as No. 1 in the Agricultural Ledger (Calcutta), 
for 1911. 

The earliest description of any of the caves appears to be 
that given by Capt. W. Foley in his ‘‘ Notes on the Geology, 
etc. of the Country in the Neighbourhood of Maulamyeng 
(vulg. Moulmein)’’ published in the Journal of this Society 
for 1836 (Vol. V, pp. 269-281, pl. VII). He mentions as the 
principal caverns of the district those at Yétséy, Tyokhla, 
Joe-ka-beng, Damatha, Nyown-beng-zeite, Phabia, and describes 
the Buddha-cave at Dhammathat (or Damatha) and also a small 
cave a little further to the south near the summit of the hill 


name of Khayon or ‘‘ Farm Caves.’ 

Another cave near Moulmein which Capt. Foley mentions 
is situated at Phabowng Thowng, a limestone hill on the banks 
of the Atbaran; this cave has a stream running through it. 


of different localities; but he did not describe the caves 
Theobald, another member of the Geological Survey of India, 
mentions them in his ‘‘Geolozgy of Pegu’’ (Mems. Geo. Surv. 
Ind., X [2], p. 139) but does not add greatly to our knowledge 


i lat es Sy ee ea Soild 


1 It is probable that these are still in the Society’s possession, but 
our Burmese MSS. have not yet been adequately catalogued. 

N i ns 

the Ataran River. ‘There is a ferry there on the road from Moulmein to 
the caves, and it is the only village on the journey. 


394 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [November, 1913. 


oulmein and, in an interesting letter ! published by the Geolo- 
gical Society of Italy (Bull. Soc. Geogr. Ital., 1888) dealt with 


€ Batu caves near Kuala Lumpur in the Malay State of 
Selangor were investigated by Ridley at the request of the 
British Association, in whose Report for 1898 (pp. 572-582) he 
published the results of his researches. Four caves are care- 
fully described and diagrams of two of them are given; the 
animals inhabiting their darker parts are recorded with notes 
on their habits. 


ings of the Zoological Society of London, 1900-1903), closely 
allied to those found by Fea in the Farm Caves. In June, 
July, October and November, 1902, the Jalor caves were 
visited again by Robinson and Annandale; their collections 
have been described in Fasciculi Malayenses (Liverpool, 1903- 
1905), in the supplement (<< Itinerary ’’) to which notes‘on the 
caves themselves will be found (pp. vi and xxv-xxviii 


has given certain particulars about those on the coast of Trang 
in the Supplement to Fasciculj Malayenses (p. xv) and in the 
anthropological part of that work (vol. I, p. 63). 
neient clay tablets found in caves in Trang and Kedah are 
described in the following papers :—‘* Short Notes on a Buddhist 
Votive Tablet ’’ by C. O. Blagden (Journ. Straits Branch Roy. 
8. Soc , 1903, p. 205); « Clay Tablets from Caves in Siamese 
Malaya’’ by A. Steffen with notes by Nelson Annandale (Man, 
vol. IT, No. 125, pl. M, 1902) ; ‘*‘ Notes on Clay Tablets from the 
Malay Peninsula’? by Rakhaldas Banerji, with an Introductory 
Note by N. Annandale (Journ, As. Soc. Bengal, {n. s.] vol. II, 
p. 459, 1907). 
The date of the tablets from Trang appears to be about 
the 8th to the 11th century a.D. Professor Kern of Leyden 
eae 


_ | Fea’s more detailed account of his wanderings (‘‘ Quatro Anni % 
Birmaine et le Tribu Limitri ”*)is unfortunately not available in Calcutta. 


Vol. IX, No. 10.] The Limestone Caves of Burma. 395 
[V.S.] 


{who had, however, seen only a photograph) attributed one 
from Kedah to the 10th century; but Babu Binod Bihari 
Bidyabinod of the Indian Museum, who has examined this and 
other specimens from Kedah which Dr. R. Hanitsch, Director 
of the Raffles Museum, Singapore, has been kind enough to 
lend us, informs us that they must be considerably older. He 
is of the opinion, on palaeographic grounds, that they belong 
to the 7th century ; his note is printed in the appendix to this 
paper (p. 423). Inany case their script (pl. XVIII) is North 
Indian, as is also that of the Trang tablets. 


are commonly foun caves in Jalor Pahang. These 
tablets probably date from the 18th century a.p. 0) 
them bear the image of a Buddha seated beneath a seven 
headed cobra with expanded hood (pl According to 


India in the use of the protecting many-headed cobra as an 
emblem. : 
Archeological descriptions of limestone caves in_ the 
Amherst district of Tenasserim are given by Taw Sein Ko in 
The Indian Antiquary, vol. XXI, p. 377 (1892), and by Temple 
in vol. XXII, p. 327 (1893), of the same publication. Photo- 


n Tenasserim and Jalor many limestone caves are still 
. used as Buddhist temples, while in Trang and other Siamese 
States, and also in Yiinnan (pl. X XI), they serve the same pur- 
pose for Chinese worship. 

n parts of both the British and the Siamese Malay 
States small caves are occupied temporarily as habitations by 
jungle-tribes (see Skeat and Blagden, Pagan Races of the 


il it desecrated by Chinese 
Single large cavern was, until it was a tuceboecas 
the Orang Laut Kappir or Pagan Sea-Gypsies (Annandale, 
). : 
The folklore of the caves in Burma and neat aa 4 
bably very extensive, as they are universally regarded wi 


394 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [November, 1913. : 


of the caverns themselves, although he makes an important 


contribution to the geology of the rocks containing them. 


F 
the interior of any of the caves. He visited those 
Moulmein and, in an interesting letter! published by the Ge 
gical Society of Italy (Bull. Soc. Geogr. Ital., 1888) dealt with 
their peculiarities and his collecting in them. The zoological 
results of his journey are published in the Ann. Civ. Mus. Stor. 
Nat., 1869-1897; many cave-haunting species are described b 
specialists in this important series of papers. 
e Batu caves near Kuala Lumpur in the Malay State of 
Selangor were investigated by Ridley at the request of t 
British Association, in whose Report for 1898 (pp. 572-582) 
published the results of his researches. Four caves are cate 
fully described and diagrams of two of them are given; the 
animals inhabiting their darker parts are recorded with notes 
on their habits. ee 
In 1899 the members of the Skeat Expedition to the 
Malay Peninsula visited the caves near Biserat in the Sia 
State of Jalor, which had not previously been invest 
In these they discovered several new cavern-haunting 
(described in Reports on the Expedition, mostly in the Pro 
igs of the Zoological Society of London, 1900-1903), © 
allied to those found by Fea in the Farm Caves. 


have been described in Fasciculi Malayenses (Liverpool, It 

1905), in the supplement (‘‘Itinerary’’) to which notes ee 

caves themselves will be found (pp. vi and xxv-xxViil). | 

The caves of the islands in the Talé Sap are describe 

Skeat in his report to the British Association (1900) also 
in his Fi in Siam. 


Bi 1 Fea’s more detailed account of his wanderings (‘ Quave 
wmaine et le Tribu Limitri’’) is unfortunately not available 


Vol. IX, No. 10.] The Limestone Caves of Burma. 397 
[N.S.] 


age of the whole given as Palaeozoic, the Moulmein beds 
being provisionally placed in the ‘‘ lower carboniferous group 
of European geologists.’’ 

In 1863 W. Theobald from the evidence of a few fossils 
procured from Zwah-ga-byn, a limestone hill which forms a 
prominent landmark above Moulmein po is popu — known 
as the ‘*Duke of York’s nose,’’ prono ced the age of the 
limestone as equivalent to the jarbonirous fiinentotie of 
Europe. He also regarded it as probable that the limestone 
met with in the Mergui Archipelago belonged to the same 
formation.! 

To quote from Theobald’s Memoir :— 

‘*The most marked feature of this limestone is its mode 
of occurrence in steeply scarped hills, the sides of which 
overhang, as may be seen in the case of the ve P near 
Moulmein, which rise abruptly from the low inun 
plains between the Gaine and the Attaran rivers, a 
exhibit the precise appearance of what they undoubtedly 
were at no remcte geological period—sea-girt rocks, such 
as still stud the Mergui Archipelago, and which from their 
position in low-lying alluvial plains even now, during the 
rains, are approachable only by boats, through a mimic 
freshwater sea,’ 

Theobald also speaks of the existence of other extensive 


caves to the north-east beyond Toungoo 
It is not known what became of ‘the fossils mentioned 


by B. N. B : 
llowing nee were determined by F. Noetling* 


The fo 
who pronounced = to be of carboniferous (probably upper 


carboniferous) ag 
Schonpertas oldhami, Noetl. 
Lonsdaleia salinaria, Waag. and Wentz. 


nov 
Araepora cf ramosa, Waag and Wentz. 
Polypora cf. biarmica, Keyser 
Productus cf. sumatrensis, F. Roemer. 
Athyris, sp. 
Spirifer, sp. 
Bellerophon, sp. 
Vol. vat, Bhs ‘Theobald, On the Geology of Pegu. Mem. “Geol. Surv. India, 
0. 
a F, Neat ing, Carboniferous Fossils from Tenasserim. Ree. Geol. 
Surv. India, Vol XXVI, Pt. 3, pp. 96—100. 


398 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [November,1913. 


Pleurotomaria afi. durga, Waag. 
Murchisonia, sp. 

This fauna is one in which Indian and Sumatran types are 

mixed and it is probably of the same age as that from Zwah- 

ga-byn hill. 

It is in every degree probable that similar limestones of 
anthracolithic age extend to the far south through the Malay 
Peninsula, and that the caves of that area are in identical 
formations ! 

In the state of Pahang (F. M. S.), an extensive calcareous 
series consisting chiefly of limestones exists. It has been termed 
the Raub Series by J. B. Serivenor who writes *:— 

The big limestone hills form a picturesque feature in 
the landscape wherever they occur, similar to those on 
the west of the Main Range. Gunong Sinyum, with its 


The caves found in the hills are as beautiful as caves 


elsewhere in limestone country, but present no special 
feature.’ 


other structures have been reported, as well as some fairly 
good remains of Cephalopoda which C. C. Crick believes belong 
to the genera Orthoceras 
Cyrioceras 
Gyroceras 
and Solenocheilus, 


rom Lubok Sukum imperfect casts and impressions have 


been obtained which Messrs. Newton and Crick think may be 


| Caves in the Malay Peninsula. Brit. Assoc. Repts.,1898, p- 571. 
. pe ee The Geology and Mining Industries of Ulu 
Pp 


Vol. IX, No. 10.] The Limestone Caves of Burma. 399 
[V.8.] 


as er it among them being an Aviculopectinoid impres- 
sion and some possible Br achiopod remains. 

J. eM alana is of the opinion that the Raub Series will 
prove to resemble the limestones and shales of the Southern 
Shan States described by C. S. Middlemiss. 

Skeat, observing the occurrence of fossils on some 
of the images of Buddha in the ono part of the 
Malay Sune was led to search for the ilps y from which 
the rock was obtained out of which the i ie gin carved, 
and it was at length found on the western flank of the great 
central axis of the Peninsula. 

From the fossiliferous limestone so obtained Prof. T. 
Mckenny Hughes determined a trilobite Up roctesh, encrinite 
stems and arms, hit d brachio- 
pods, including at least one Chonetes. ‘« Thereis se aalt anceeks ved 
and highly ornamented Pleurotomaria and a Cephalopod, which 
by its horse-shoe lobes confirms what is suggested by the general 
facies, namely, that the deposit belongs to the highest beds of 
the Carboniferous, or rather, perhaps, to beds intermediate 
between the Carboniferous and the overlying system to which 
thecom promise name of Perm o-Carboniferous has been applied. 

It is interesting to note that Messrs. Newton and Crick 
consider their fossils younger than the ones referred to above; 
but according to Dr. Annandale the limestone from which 
Skeat’s fossils were obtained was very different in structure 


2 P. 


Lo 34. s 
Nios the above account was W ritten, J rivenor has pu 


an 
iferous, 
age of the rocks; they may be calpenaaecas or permo-carboni 
Other evidence’ unknown at the time when eee fesile were described, 
makes it improbable that they are permian’’ (p. 35%) adios 


shee. © Ichirs. He expressed the opinion, how 

sulied thet the Raub. Sor ae apparently a southwa d extension _- 

Portion of the dolomitic Smears of the_ m Shan acne ge 

ly einai, SE their upper parts and pointing to the teineres he 
the car ous sea southwards, fellowes ar an eastward retreat 0 
he . - 

* Gotd ; ivanaland. Oceurrence and Geographical Distribution, 

a tee . Brit. 


° Natural Ore oe ee of the Malay Peninsula. 
Assoc, stig 1901, 


400 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [November, 1913. 


and appearance from that which formed the walls of caves in 
the neighbourhood. 

iam, the whole of the great range on the west which 

h 


limestone beds are found throughout the Malayan 
Provinces and in the Ratburi district. The Chieng Mai district 


towards the north and west, and where the Mekong turns from. 
east to south they again appear as a barrier of ever-decreasing 


the junction of the Nam Mun and the main river the great 


of Central Siam. Limestone pinnacles are found piercing the 
alluvium of Central Siam, as at Chainat, Prabat, and 


Permo-Carboniferous limestones are known to occur in 
Sumatra, Toba-landan, Timor and Rotti2 In Western Borneo 
they contain caves which are very similar to the Burmese and 
Malayan ones. 

Further to the east in Tongking and the Laos, limestones 
of the same age have been identified. 

To the north of the Moulmein, Amherst and Thaton 
districts the limestones stretch through Karenni into the Shan 
States. Caves are found in them along the edge of the hills 
bordering on the Shan States and dividing them from the 
broad plains of the Irrawaddy valley. These caves are well 
known as they yield large quantities of bat guano.* In the 


The dark-grey limestone frequently weathers almost 
, into pin- 
nacled crags, weather-beaten towers and walls: into deep 
basins and swallow holes (often as regular and circular as 


1 W. A, Graham Siam, Lond 3 

: ’ , on, 1912, pp. 86-98. 

See literature quoted by J. B. Seri L 
Brit. Assoc. Reve 1993, p “oo es 


No ie urkhill, Guano in India, The Agricultural Ledger, 1911, 


Vol. IX, No. 10.] The Limestone Caves of Burma. 40} 
[N.8.] 


a gigantic amphitheatre, but sometimes funnel-shaped) : 

into strange valley systems, without connection one with 

the other, and that often end mysteriously either as 
st 


themselves and become lost, as marshe 
where evaporation helped out no doubt by subterranean 
percolation causes a disappearance of th to 


innumerable caves and passages beneath the ground, some 
now high and dry from the waters that caused them and 


others again unknown fame and rich in their eae 
beauty of stalactitic ulate 


In the Northern Shan States Bees limestones are well 
known, and have been described in various papers appearing 
in the publications of the Geokoalaal Survey of India by 
T. D. La Touche.» Wherever they have been examined in 
this area by myself, depressions appearing on che surface of 
the ground hich they u nderlay have always been a striking 
feature, as has also been the fact that their drainage very 


these depressions vary in size from ‘‘ ee : 


of which the latter are by far the most common, and froth thse 
to enclosed valleys oe miles in length and breadth, tra- 
versed by running streams. These phenomena are due to 
“ahaa dissolution “of the rock and the consequent set- 
tling down of the roof of a cavity or cavern, too weak to 
support its own weight. Owing to the c 
the Sov sireamaes in the Northern Shan States, as a result of the 


In the Southern Shan States caverns are 
it is believed that systematic searching would reveal the 
presence of many others. 

. Deiner has described rich collections of antbracolithic 
fossils collected by La Touche and Middlemiss in the Northern 
and Southern Shes States. His opinion regarding their ages is 
quoted below 

‘In brief the anthracolithic faunas of Burma and of ei 
Indian region (Salt Range-Himalayas), so closely — 


rts 
1 C. 8. Middlemiss, Report on a Geological Reconnaissance in pa 
of the Sccuicer ane oa 8 tates nd Karenni. General Rept., esa 
India, 1899-1900, "130-13 
eens especially T. “p, La Touche, stig oS oe the Northern. 
Shan States. Mem. Geol. Surv. India, Vol. XXTX, P' 


402 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [November, 1913. 


geographically, must be considered as belonging to the 
same zoogeographical province. Their similarity may be 
interpreted as due both to their proximity in geographical 

ition, and to their stratigraphical homotaxis. i 
correlation places the anthracolithic faunas of the Shan 
States on the same level as the middle and upper Pro- 
ductus limestone of the Salt Range or of exotic block of 
Chitichun No. 1.’’! 


Although somewhat beyond the region treated of in 
this paper mention may be made of the fact that both devo- 


nian and anthracolithic limestones attain a considerable 


Mogok, Ruby Mines District, and in some of the Jalor caves 
there are large beds of freshwater shells and mammalian bones. 


PART IIl.—THE FAUNA OF THE CAVES. 


___ The following list of the animals that have been recorded 
from the limestone caves o Burma and Malaya, or are repre- 


Malayenses, and from papers on the late Signor Fea’s Burmese 
collection in the Ann. Civ, M us. Genova (1889-1897). 

© have added obeservations of our own, more particu- 
larly on the Orthoptera and Pedipalpi. 


! C, Diener, Anthracolithi oe a sae 
New Series, Vol. II, ep ae Pagans of the Shan States. Pal. Ind., 


403 


tone Caves of Burma. 


Vol. IX, No. 10.] The Limes 
[NV.S.] 


“AMOY JUEASYIpP B 4B QUSIY Hurye serveds aeorves ouios UII pe] BIOOsse UeEeq cau 
osu Avul qeyquUnMVYG 4yv Duodouryy eYy yeYyy e[qissod si 41 pue ‘soteds aeSavy youw v jo srequinu [remus Aq pemojjoy o10m 
8Bq SSeUL “Froujnow, cage soejiut yZ *uoom]eg ey, uO yesedpy yu oAvO Bw WO; wees esuep 8 Ul snjpoud snwounofiay yo 
eDUETIOUIE EY} SEeqIIOSep ‘g-/ GR] IEA JeIOyZo eyy Joy vipuy jo Aoarng ourseyy, oyg Jo qlodey uonvaysiurmpy oy3 ut ‘uOsiepuy | 


‘soroods Surjuney-eavo uouUIOD Vy By (‘uyong) snypoyd snmourohyy 
‘OABD ONT[-[OUUNY ‘34Bp ‘SU0T EYy ur ‘setoeds aeyyo 
jo uolsnfoxe ey} | Apyuoredde 04 ‘stoquinu eSaey ur punog | -- yeyjyewureyq | -* “Hoon ‘wnpphydosovm puodousyay 


“Wma, ‘snuanjoo2nE 


"SOOWI [BIO] OFUI 4SBa] 4B Peprlarp ( wiuley,) 1070929 
eq sse[}qnop ][[M 10 Ueeq eavy soroads 04} jo peroAag | pace (Jsa0]) 8NgA.107 uM 
‘UoIgNg!44SsSIp Opi Jo sofoads Suryuneq-oavo uouwio, | (“jyood) vmapnep ad 
| (‘SSpoy) abrwun snuaprsodde zy 

“JSIOH ‘4ousw et 
"Js10H ‘stuiflo snydojouryy 
BOARD WaT | °° ** (uosqoq) vanjads sruozohuopy 
: (‘YOay) vpopnnoixazdun vikdanyuny 


‘SOAGD Ue y O49 WOAT uMouy A[uo 


‘osBO OUO UL SroquINU esavy ut Aortpry Aq punowy | ° soaey neg | °° ‘ds ‘snuagdoufig 
‘eaoydoayy 
‘SOABO JOSABl, OY} JO 9UO 04 dDUBIQUO 
oy} Ul UOlyIpedxy qroyg oey3 Aq paddea} sem usunaeds y | °° yedlesiqa IVAN |** "*  (ABig)) suadsaubou snynoisog 
*BIOATJOOSUT 
‘anduin’y] vyeny avou soaed ul sqsea AJuowu10) | °° soARy ngeg | °° 2 “oy ‘easbeg eyag 
*BIOATUIBS 
| 
| “VITVNWV 
‘SHAVING YT ‘ALIIVOOT WAVO “SLI NT 


[November, 1913. 


404 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. 


‘SeABD 0} pouyUoD suvew ou £q | 


| 


‘S@ABO UL puNoy st (Moleq eas) osvyd oped 


‘ersunf 

ey} Ul puUNo} Ose yng eAvO vB WO’y poqtosep AT/eUIsIIO 
‘ejsunl oy} Ur puno} osye : vpngs 

‘uluog Avpep oy} Jo syavd guesoyrp ul seavo ur uoUIUIOD 


*SOABO UL Spoolg 


(S161) set “4 “snpy “4g ‘wry “yO 
ur ;‘aoyxyopAT Aq eumyuayams sisuaqnuns srusoowdng 
poy[vo st (eov1 40) soroods eyy, ‘soyou quonbesqns oag 


‘Avp oy} Sulnp soavo url sdoquinu esae] ur sysoa ATyUoreddy 
‘Sunquepes, ‘WY ‘apy Aq peuturexe Useq sey [[Nys [Issojqns y 
“Weyy 04 aur[noed you 4nq seawo esey} Ul UOUIMIOD 

‘SOAWO SOY} JO GUO UI veg Aq USYye] sea UOTUTDEdS V 


‘SuUUVNAYT 


( «é jose eet 
aoe oe 


“yaRiry ‘wadsn ofng 


ze | (aoyjguny) poqual ‘* 
" soaeg nyeg | > Jesuejnog Wed 00 4 
| *VIHOVULV EG 
oper fsoaeg nyeg °° a2 *(edog) snuneuan, ak 
"SIPIGEO 
"Wi llLd yy 
sad SaABy nye bee Jesuanog ‘wnprydojoos vuosobhry 
(‘Kvay) snyayojnd snjphjovpowwhp 
“BRITT 1008'T 
‘WITILAIS YY 
deg 987, | es euUInyT ‘nypUnuouUL DIQDI0}I0D 
“SomTqoOLo By 
“SHAY 
| 
iojer | °° Iain ‘ewnyuajons snpapysowmasy 
| “BigueUTUIN yy 
’ aoyep | ** “Away ‘207048 xingehyy 


M 
° 
ww 
° 

= 


oe IOTe(’ | ee e* 
SOAR) IST | °° ** (Away) ‘s27p80pi4jo enanwog 
“eR uepory 
| 
| 


‘ALITVOO'T DAVO “INV NT 


405 


- 10.] The Limestone Caves of Burma, 


, No 
[V.8.] 


Vol. 1X 


‘SI[TH 902877 ©Y} Iveu ereymou st 


qedestyy PUL “qUsedIg¢ pel]vo wpNsuTUEg ABB OY} ut eoed OU ST OO] ‘O1VMB OLB OM SBAIBSOg ~“AOTeL UI 4wAOSTE, Jo pooysnoqysieu 


oy} WOdF ULB 4f PUB < SII INAV] O43 Wo’ sem Yorym ‘edd, oyy gou st 4I 


‘o[spuvuuy “N pus uosuiqoy ‘Op “Ht ‘srssey_y Aq 


uine=NjYy Ysigiia eyy 07 peyueseid Moueg ABpeyy eYy JO UL[S OY} OF SB JUOUIE}BIS S.10TINB SIZ UT peoljou eq ABU S10dI0 OMY | 


“Serpry Aq pepsooexy | e 


‘AT[Boytoeds peyiuept yoy soavy nivg 
SOAR) IO]BE OY} WOsy UMOUy ATUG | -° r sore 


‘BUIY U4oY JOU WOdy pepsoves OsTy 
‘e[sunl oy4 ur punoy seroeds wv yyim [BoryUepT 
*eABO B UT puNo; AjuUQ | - - 


SOAR WB ST 

Arqyunoo uereyy 
ee 

‘wABlB UL 80.80 EpIsyno serseds uoMUIOD ge "* Joyer 


a6 


‘sse[{no[oo puwe pulfq ‘ sezoeds Surpooeid ygrm punoy 
‘soho 
qyiM pues peinojoo AjyUeTpiIUq { seaRo woij UMOUy AjUQ | '- ny. 


‘uedo ey} Ul poom jo sZo[ aopun osje uowUuooun 9ON | *° SOABD UWB T 


‘eABD V WOIS UMOUY ATUG, 


ee cs 
| { ** soper 
‘ABO B UOJ} ST[OYUS pBap Wody UMOUY ATUDO SOABD WIRY 
"S8AR0 
UI SB [[OM SB SYI[O Jepun soloeds uouIMIOD y "MOOG Gag 
"OABO B UOIJ UMOUY ATUG 
“BOARD OF OPIS]NO SOIFITBOOT [BIOAES WOI, popsoIo YT 


o* os ee 
** JoTee 
SOAR) ULB 


a “ds ‘snanjavoawmsh pr 
eo 
‘ds 
being peyopupuun 
rouunig ‘4oz090un cusuaiites 
(Aquryy ‘auawunug 4g) ‘waoydoporydnyy 
TAO ‘2oj8ab DyD)Qoanjpadg 
( wary ‘punvtsaup 4) ‘ds maunjpdesay 
“IQB,] ‘O%u0uL saysosyayD 
‘s1oydoyqig 
“* suraiy ‘sunjpnwis snuspoydhp 


"* surcry ‘opungepnd vanuna yr 
the Same oireg, i bee 

PNOC ‘enapur aidne 
“ernuesAyy, 


*VLOESNT 


seyAg ‘apusaan sisdo.ueg 
soadg “serppunwup DuLojs0yjsydgQ 
uoyserg ‘suav0uur spadgC 


‘SIOW Op ‘asuazayayo, epadosos} 
esur[09 ‘ennjpw) nuojsojeedhi zy 
uosueg ‘2hayuny sanjdang 
*epodosey 
‘VOSOTIOY 


406 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. {[November, 1913. 


~ 


YSIyM 09 ‘SOABO DSO} JO YSODIB] OY} UT spaeiq Ayjueasddy “s 


qt ‘deAOMOY 


OAR IBC] | *” 


} 
| 
if 
H 


SOABD NIV | ** 
*S0ABI 0} pouguod you Ajqeqoig “ Laie 


. 
® 
“ 

. 

. 


‘SOABO OF pouUgUod you A\qeqoid ‘! sejou aay * 


. 
n 
” 
. 


‘soroeds snopootuseavo ong) B sdeyieg * 
‘9ABO B UI puNnoy you sem solooeds sty} Jo urroy Teord sy ayy, °° 


SeARD Ue °° 
‘OABO B WOT) UMOUYy AUG | * ies 


‘satoeds snojoorudteABo endg BION ** ** qojap | ** 
‘soyisvied-qeq | -- ** qoper | 
‘(MOTO 99s) [eBuag 
ut uedo oy} ur punoy soroods wv jo wos ofed v ace as ies 


‘so1oeds snopooluaeARd ond] B éqeqoag'| lee “ ae 
‘pouyuod 4ou sr 41 
SCAB) ULTeg | * 
“spoarq ATJUo1edde 
‘yorum Ul ‘seARd ©} peUyuod suvBoM ou Aq | :: “* sores 


‘uletU[NOP, IvEU SEAS UT YUepUNqy | ** SVARO Weg | 
| 


‘SuUVINGY ‘ALIIVOO'TT FTAVO | 


"awry 


eae ee ors careers Bere ete 


os “aou ‘ds ‘snzianypD 
*souotdioog 
“VadINHOVay 

os os ‘ds «é 

**  (‘q1e,4) suardraap ie 

*? pIDyNID UL 

***(aqe.q) seusoo/6u0z onounun 

“BISIBJOZIYIG 


(3000047) ana/ nyduownynqung 
“IBA "G9090d) pajoo sisdojpqupy 
TBLIUIG {N7091UL9ADI SnzOUOIDLOGT 
(s10J0.7) snuDnoon) pu sryany shor 

“ByyeusopyD 
*VaOdVINANW 


dostedg ‘asuampis uoindipoos fr 

aestedyy ‘wnavpobod nrpuowhoy 

ea Sat ‘sisUaUroguiD DIRDgQtLIq9A AT 

T}qeunIg ‘susosaq_nd Danrd 

“B1OZAICT 

youre ‘vanjads sihyjsdhup 

a ‘qan,) ‘sepnj;o1d suns 

"* goygng ‘seuuadeunf{ senuig 
*e19ydopida'T 

"* “IBA JOSOy “s2Uyu0o piaUu0g 
“e19ydoueuré 


"aIWV N 


407 


S 
= ‘ 
ma) “pulq Ss! OAD WB E51, YX Jo syydop oy} Ul poom Burdvoep jo sooard Suourw tuoay AToAway) Aq poyoeyjoo podosy 
‘> Fe 7e4F SU S119} Ose OFF =*paystjqnd useq eavy 0} savedde seroods sty} so ao\dit9sep ou yey} geyy sn SUIOJUL OBUTT[oH “apy 7 
% ~: “ri pallinetaes > —— —— = SS ar tesa apna — — a aaa sara 7 SS re RW Papa Reams ae aA eee eee SS 
& ; 
= 1'Setoads oyy Jo royyne ou | 
oS T2AOdSIP 07 9[q’ Ueeq jou eaBYy eM = ‘Aa(pryT &q pepsoovey | +: Seaey nyeg | -- a snjxusaqur xt 
= ‘@ABO B WOME UMOUY A(UG) roTes | ** ‘pun'T-oppug ‘snznosn{ur oprpnus 
cS “epodosy 
$ | “VYROVISOU,) 
Ss | SOARD une sa oF oe ‘ds ‘npodoig 
Pan ‘LIROW 
S ‘sofoods snojooluseavo ona you A\quqo4sg { Wrusce bc, Ss aie ae uous ‘s1edoup snajoyg 
ae eh ‘IOUT, ‘engoul endayn py 

ie | SCAB) WIey | °° "* SOUT, '210G11L4aAn9 saistunpy F 
a j | | ‘oRouvIy 
= “UPEW[NOW JO pooynogyFiou ey ur seavo woay uMmouy [UG | ** Wiosse ue], | Se ae ‘IOUT, ‘snprsnd snabojn5 
4 ‘soveds yeep | 
rs os 07 paver Ajosora §saavo 10[Bp) OF 07 pauyuod ATquqoag | °° qmojep | ‘UOIUTY ‘8n199199 snulshydobhig 

* he ‘(89}0U 0as) UleuTjNOP;, weou svavo oY} 0} pauyguoad Afquqo4y | -* ulosseuay | °° (“401,],) mpoours2an0 snuhahiyd bhig 
a ot, "80480 O04} OI) UMOUY A;UG ae rs | ‘+ AJOxBay ‘nzootussava (+499 +8) snumozyasy 

: om | re sn S94VQ *snsousof 5 Hs 
= S9AB0 07 pouyUuod JON | { SOAR) WIR | .f (se7°Q) 2uospu-poom snuojaodh py 
S _ ‘tdjedipeg 


408 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [November, 1913. 


MAMMALIA. 
TInterature. 


1876. Dobson, Catalogue of the Chiroptera in the British 
useum. 
1889 Thomas and Doria, Ann. Mus. Civ. Genova (2) VII, 
2 


1888-1891. Blanford, Fauna of British India, Mammalia. 

1900. Bonhote, Proc. Zool. Soc. London, 1400, p. 86: 

1903. Bonhote, Report on the Mammals, Fasciculi Malay- 
enses (Zool.) 1, p. 1 


The species recorded in our list are named for the most 
part on the authority of Dobson, who described one of the 
bats ; of Oldfield Thomas and Doria, who worked out the collec- 


recently sent for identification, with the teeth of a large tiger, 
to the Geological Survey of India. 
ne of the mammals are cavernicolous in the sense of 
living in caves without ever abandoning them. The bats, of 


has collapsed , frequenting them habitually for the purpose of 
dropping its dung. 


gg 
Ss 
ao) 
2 
s 
© 
=} 
pou 
S 
° 
=} 
oO 
2 
Ss 
eS 
° 
© 
4 
o 
5 
i=} 
-— 


in other antel 


_ _ Animals such as Mus surifer belong to a third category, 6a 
it is probable that certain individuals of the species take up 4 
permanent abode in cav 
or the whole of their fo 
however, not cavernicolous. 

One of the cave-haunting mammals of Burma or Malaya, 
to what ver category they belong, appear to be modifi 
Structurally in accordance with this habit. Most of the species 


Vol. IX, No. 10.] The Limestone Caves of Burma. 409 
[N.S.] 


have a fairly wide distribution outside caves, but Honycteris 
spelaea has only been taken in the Farm Caves, and in any case 


smaller Burmo-Malayan mammals, owing to the intensive 
study of the Oriental species now in progress in European and 
American museums. 
BIRDS. 
Literature. 
1895. Blanford, Fauna of British India, Birds IIL. 
1901. Bonhote, Proc. Zool. Soc. London, p. 68. 


then known, from C. francica (Gmel.), which is found in Ten- 
asserim, the Andaman and the Nicobar Is., as well as in the 
Malay Archipelago on the one hand and Arrakan on the other. 
C. innominata is known from the Andamans and from Tenas- 
Serim as well as the Malay Peninsula. 


REPTILES and BATRACHIA. 
Literature. 
1898. Ridley, Rep. Brit. Ass., p. 572. ae 
1903. Boulenger, ‘‘ Report on the Reptiles.’’ Fasciculi 
Malayenses (Zool.) I, p. 133. 
1203, 1904. Butler, Jour. Bombay Nat. Hist. Soc. XV, pp. 
387 


1912. Boulenger, Fauna of the Malay Peninsula, Reptiles 
d Batrachia. 


N : 
the caves of Burma and Malaya, and no species of either 
hem. 


410 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [November, 1913. 


typical form have been discovered sparingly in different parts 
of the Malay Peninsula, in which the species (except in caves) 
is apparently much scarcer than it is in other parts of its 
range. This is wide, extending from Malaya into Burma and 
the neighbouring countries, the Eastern Himalayas and North- 
ern China. No very young individual has yet been found in 
caves, but the smallest yet obtained in them—it was captured 


s 
may be stated with some confidence that Coluber taeniu- 


however, enter the caves: these find a plentiful food-supply in 
the bats and so grow to their full size without emerging. This 


phases (pl. XXII). 
The lizard Gymnodactylus pulchellus is a species occasion: 
ally found on tree-trunks in the jungle far from caves. It 


Tenasserim, it has not yet been found in any Burmese cave. 
‘ 8 e other lizard on our list (Lygosoma scotophilum), al- 
t ne Be it was originally captured in the inner parts of one 0 
u Cav 


: €8, has no striking peculiarity of colouration and 
has since been taken in the junge 


Vol. IX, No. 10.] The Limestone Caves of Burma. 411 
[NV.8.] 


trunks in which, owing to the coalesence of the buttresses 
characteristic of some jungle trees, pools of water accumulate. 
t is sometimes almost amphibious in habits. 
The Batrachia recorded from the Batu Caves are noctur- 
nal species that also occur in the jungle and have no particular 
spelaeological interest. 


MOLLUSCA. 
Literature. 
1871. Stoliczka, Journ. As. Soc. Bengal, XL (2), pp. 148, 
217. 
1902. Collinge, Journ, Malac. IX, p. 71. 
1903. Sykes, Proc. Zool. Soc. London, vol. 1, p. 194. 
1908. Blanford and Godwin-Austen, Faun. Brit. Ind., 
Mollusca, I. 
1910. Preston, Rec. Ind. Mus., V, p. 33. 


In addition to the species of Mollusca included in our list 
there are others that have been found occasionally in caves ; 
for some land-snails occurring only on the limestone cliffs o 
the Siamese Malay States and Tenasserim, and also others of 
less restricted range (e.g. several species of Rhiostoma and 
Cyclophorus), occasionally make their way into caverns, while 
floods not infrequently wash in the shells of water-snails such 
as Ampullaria and Vivipara. Some of the terrestrial species 


Leas 
° 
3 
5 
(71 
z 
cr 
> 
a) 
io) 
oS 
= 
— 
Sant 
=) 
i? 
pads 
1 
@ 
5s) 
ot 
°o 
R 
~ 
= 
® 
> 
—) 
8 
~—) 
iv) 
iva) 
= 
~~) 
= 
® 
< 
s 
ise) 
ive) 
5 
© 
o 
Qu 
% 
S 
® 
So 


poses of protection or to seek food. The Streptaxis is so com- 
mon in the Farm Caves that we see no reason to think that it 
does not do so, while the Prosopeas occurs not infrequently in 
enormous numbers in the darkest part of the Jalor and Selangor 
Caves, apparently feeding on bats’ dung. Opeas mnocens, 
Preston, is only known from the Farm Caves, in which, how- 
€ver, only dead shells were found. 


under overhanging cliffs as well as in caves. ? si the 
The other molluscs, the names of which are given In 


412 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal |November, 1913. 


list, are minute colourless species found as yet only on the floor 
of caves. They are probably cavernicolous in a strict sense, 
but nothing is known of their habits or anatomy. 


INSECTS. 
Literature. 


COLLEMBOLA. 
1912. Imms, Proc. Zool. Soc. London, p. 80. 


ORTHOPTERA. 

1888. Brunner von Wattenwyl, Verh. K. K. Zool. Bot. 
Gesells. Wien. XX XVIII, p. 229. 

1893. Brunner von Wattenwyl, 4nn Civ. Mus. Genova 
(2) XIII (X XXIII), p. 193. 

1897. Bolivar, Ann. Civ. Mus. Genova (2) XVIII 
(XXXVIII), p. 32. 

1900. Annandale, Ent. Record, X11, p. 75. 

1908. Kirby, Rec. Ind. Mus., I, p. 43. 


HYMENOPTERA. 
1913, Wheeler, Rec. Ind. Mus. VIII, p. 233. 


LEPIDOPTERA. 
1903. Swinhoe, « Report on the Moths ’’, Fascic. Malay. 


Zool., I, p. 99. 
1909. Meyrick, Ree. Ind. Mus., I, p. 399. 


DipTEeRa. 


1903. Speiser, “Report on the Diptera Pupipara”’. 
Fascic. Malay. (Zool.) sp. 
1912. Brunnetti, Faun. Brit. Ind., Dipt. Nemocera. 
A noteworthy feature of our list of the insects of the Bur- 
mese and Malayan caves is the total absence of the names of 
beetles. Many species of the order must actually occur, but 


fication. This is also the case with the few Rhynchota that 
have been collected. 

the two Collembola (Neanura pudibunda and Cyphode- 
rus simulans) described by Imms from the Farm Caves, one 


apparently because it is colourless and blind; but other species 
of the genus precisely similar in these respects are found in 


Vol. IX, No. 10.] The Limestone Caves of Burma. 413 
[N.S ] 


ants’ or termites’ nests and even under stones at the edge of 
water (see Carpenter, Journ. As. Soc. Bengal, 1913, p. 215). 
Neanura pudibunda is of a bright red colour and possesses eyes. 
The two species occur together. 

Among the Orthoptera of the caves the most interesting 
are the wingless grasshoppers of the subfamily Stenopelmati- 
nae, of which three species have been recorded from them, one 
from the Farm Caves (Diestrammena unicolor, Brunner), one 
from those of Jalor (D. annandalei, Kirby), and one from the 
Batu Caves (Diestrammena, sp.). A fourth was discovered by 
Gravely in the Farm Caves, but its specific identification is a 
little doubtful. It belongs to the genus Rhaphidophora and is 
identical with one (probably R. brunneri, Kirby) that occurs in 
the jungles of the same district. Unlike the species of Diestram- 
mena, which live as a rule on the cave-walls and on rocks 


D. unicolor is reported to occur in northern China (Vladi- 
vostok and Pekin) as well in the Farm Caves, but in Tenas- 
serim has only been taken in them and in those at Dhammathat 
in the same district. In the caves it is extremely abundant. 
It exhibits considerable individual variation in colour, and the 


nh nhene of our specimens are both antennae complete, but in 


caves has not been identified, and may be the same as one 0 


alor have not been observed to do so. aaa . 
Most of the other Orthoptera in the list (including the 


414 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [November, 1913. 


earwig Chelisoches morio) are nocturnal species which probably 
leave the caves at night. " 


to prove that they are modified in correlation with a caverni- 
colous life; indeed, they are darker than the typical form of 


The three species of moths found in the caves belong to 
two genera both of which are represented by many non- 
cavernicolous species. Meyrick, who described the Microlepi- 
dopteron Crypsithyris spelea from the Farm Caves, believes it 
to be especially modified in that it is colourless except for its 
eyes, which are, however, well pigmented. A similar moth 


he four Species of Diptera recorded from the caves 
three B Nicteribosea amboinensis, Raymondia pagodarum and 
: no 


Vol. 1X, No. 10.] The Limestone Caves of Burma. 415 
[N.8.] 


The insects actually identified and recorded from the caves 
probably represent only a small proportion of those that occur. 


MYRIAPODA. 
[nterature. 
1890, 1891, 1893. Pocock, Ann. Civ. Mus. Genova (2) X 
(XXX), pp. 384. 401, XTIL (XXXII), p. 390. 
1898. Ridley, Rep. Brit. As., p. 580. 
1901. Sinclair, Proc. Zool. Soc. Londen, p- 517. 


Millepedes are often common in the caves, which. in Jalor 
at any rate, are a favourite resort of large Polydesmidz (such 
as Platyrachis malaccanus) by no means exclusively caverni- 
colovs. It is probable, however, that some Oriental Myriapoda 


A particular interest attaches itself to the Scutigerae, 
which are often found in caves as well as under stones and logs 
in the open, for very little is yet known of the Oriental repre- 
sentatives of the family. Probably no species of this family 
on our list is strictly confined to caves, and all are strongly 
pigmented. 


An individual seen on an 


! Specimens of this species often become brown in spirit, but in life 
the animal is very nearly white. 


416 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [November, 1913. 


armless and does not attempt to bite when captured. It 


e have to thank Professor Silvestri and Mr. A. 8. Hirst 
for naming several of the Myriapoda mentioned in our list. 


ARACHNIDA. 
Literature 
1889. Thorell, Ann. Civ. Mus. Genova (2) VII (X XVII). 
1889 (1890). Oates, Journ As. Soc. Bengal, LVIIL, p. 4. 
1898. Ridley, Rep. Brit. As., p. 580. 
1898. Thorell, 4nn. Civ. Mus. Genova (2) XIX (XXXIX), 
2 


p. 279. 

1900. Pocock. Faun. Brit. Ind., Arachnida. 

1901. Simon, Proc. Zool Soc. London, p. 76. 

1912. Gravely, Rec. Ind. Mus., VII, p. 107. 

Among the Arachnida of the caves the Pedipalpi, of 
which one of us has made special study, are of particular 


: Pp : le fi 
interest. We propose therefore to deal with them family by 
family in considerable detail. 


PEDIPALPI, 
THELYPHONIDAE. 
Hypoctonus wood-masoni (Oates). 


Gravely obtained a n 
Scorpion und 


The few immature specimens of Hypoctonus which were 
found in and around the Farm Caves probably belong to this 
i to the Moulmein form, H formosus, Butler ; 
Farm Caves resemble those at Dhammathat 


Vol. IX, No. 10.] The Limestone Caves of Burma. 417 
[N.S.] 


more closely than those at Moulmein, and the Farm Caves do 
not appear to be separated from Dhammathat more completely 
than is Dhammathat from the next rocks in the direction of 
Mulai-yit or the Dawna Range. 


’*Hypoctonus formosus, Butler. 


This species is said by Thorell to have been found by Fea 
in the Farm Caves (Ann. Civ Mus. Genova [2] VII [X XVII], 
p. 526), but he does not appear to have seen Oates’ paper 


species had been described ; nor does he appear to have noticed 
any such differences himself. Moreover, it is impossible to tell 
from his paper whether the specimens he saw from the Farm 
Caves were sufficiently mature to admit of specific identifica- 
tion. 

SCHIZOMIDAE. 


Schizomus (s. str.) cavernicola, Gravely. 


prising as many non-cavernicolous forms are without recog- 
nizable eyes, while a species from Prome, on the other hand, 
has real eyes with a convex vitreous cornea. 

ne or two immature specimens of this family were seen 
under stones in a sheltered crevice of the rocks outside, but 
none oi them were captured and we cannot say whether they 
belong to this species or not. 


TTARANTULIDAE. 


Simon. The former occurs in the caves of northern Tenasserim, 
the latter in those of Jalor. 


418 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [November, 1913. 


a distinct species; for Saigon must be quite as completely 
separated from Khayon as Jalor is. Flower records the occur- 


July 1801. p. 49); doubtless this is also a Stygophrynus. Mr. 


from Klingkang, a limestone mountain range in Borneo. The 
great length of the femora of its antenniform legs suggests 


Stygophrynus cavernicola, Thorell. 


Thorell described this species from specimens obtained by 

ea in the Farm Caves (Ann Cir. Mus. Genova (2) VIL. 

(X XVII) 1889). It has since been obtained at the same place 

both by Annandale and by Gravely, while the litter found a 

few specimens also in dark corners of the small! and we'l-lighted 

Buddha Cave at Dhammathat, but none in the long dark Guano 
Cave at the same place. 


are directed a little backwards and upwards, not directly out- 
wards as in the genus Phrynichus. 

1s scorpion-spider, like Phrynichus. seems to regard its 
extreme flatness as its best protection against ordinary enemies, 
and on the approach of a collector with a light it only clings the 


) ility totouch This m 
the fact that their cavernicolous life practically limits their food 


Vol. IX, No. 10.] The Limestone Caves of Burma. 419 
[V.8.] 


supply to insects of the sub-family nine which 
have enormously long and very sensitive ante ti 
gerous specimens of 8, sieeraiioe se to have 
been pees “although Gravely made a special search for them 
and obtained a number of specimens which appear to be 
mature. | — the species breeds during the rains, as do 


Stygophrynus cerberus, Simon, 


Simon described this species from specimens obtained in 
caves in the neighbourhood of Biserat in the Siamese State of 
Jalor (Proc. Zool. Soc., 1901, p. 76). 

It is much more abundant than the Moulmein species, and 
is larger, darker in colour, and more heavily built. It is known 
to breed in May and June, the female carrying her eggs in a 
sac covering the lower surface of the abdomen as in other 
species of T'arantulidae. It resembles the Tenasserim species 
in its habits; both sexes sit on the walls of the caves in total 
darkness, with the femora of the antenniform legs crossed over 
their backs; they feed on the Locustid Diestrammena annan- 
dalei, which they catch with their arms, in spite of the fact 
that the insect is very active and is cons tantly feeling for the 
approach of enemies with its enormously long antennae, 

Sections of the eyes have shown them to be pigmented 
and apparently well oe but it is sindbis whether 
they are sensitive to light or n 


Catagius pusillus, Thorell. 


Fea obtained the type of this species in the Farm Caves 
(Ann. Civ. Mus. Genova [2a] VII [XX VIT] 1889, p. 531). 
Gravely has since obtained other specimens from the same 
place and from the Buddha Cave at Dhammathat. They live 
under stones, especially in the large Farm Cave, at the end 
furthest from the entrance; one or two immature specimens 
were found under stones in a crevice on the outside of the 

rocks. No ovigerous specimens have as yet been seen. 

The antenniform legs are unusually variable in length; as 
a rule their femora are about twice as long as the carapace is 
broad, as in non-cavernicolous species; .but in one or two speci- 
mens they are about three times as long as the carapace is 
broad, i.e. very nearly as long, in proportion to the size of the 
body, as in ieee cavernicola. 


In addition to the Pedipalpi, a species of scorpion of the 
genus Chaerilus (stated to be new but not described) is recorded 
by Ridley from the Batu Caves; while three kinds of appar- 


1 At k loakt one of them contains ova, apparently ready for extrusion. 


420 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [November, 1913. 


ently cavernicolous spiders are known from different localities 
in Burma and the Siamese Malay States. 

One of the spiders (Talanites cavernicola, Thorell) belongs 
to the family Drassidae. Thorell described this species from 
a single mutilated specimen obtained by Fea in the Farm Caves, 
and we believe it to be the one common on the floor of the 
large Farm Cave and of the Guano Cave at Dhammathat. 

The other two spiders are Pholcids and spin webs among 
rocks in the caves, but it is very doubtful whether either of 
them is strictly cavernicolous ; indeed, one of the two, which 
lives on the walls in the Farm Caves, is also found in the Karen 
Cheba Hills ; this is Althepus pictus, Thorell. The other species 
(Pholcus diopsis, Simon) is only known from the caves of Jalor. 

everal mites were found on the bat Rhinopoma micro- 
phyllum from the Guano Cave in Dhammathat, one of which 
has been referred by Warburton to the genus Uropoda. 


CRUSTACEA. 
Literature. 
1898. Ridley, Rep. Brit. As , p. 581. 
1902. Budde-Lund in Lanchester, Proc. Zool. Soc., p. 379. 


The only Crustacea recorded from the caves are two 
wood-lice, one described from Jalor and one recorded from the 
Batu Caves near Selangor. It is noteworthy that although the 
former (Armadillo infuscatus, Budde-Lund) is paler in colour 

some species of its genus, it is no paler than one (4. pal- 


soy stones or logs, from which it d 
vat pie Bh ye as much in the dark, and has almost as 
es oa os for well-developed ‘*feelers,’? as one that 

ples the darkest recesses of a cave. It is in relation t0 @ 


Vol. IX, No. 10.] The Limestone Caves of Burma. 42] 
[N.S] 


furtive existence in the open that the sensory peculiarities of 
the Tarantulidae and the Stenopelmatinae have probabl 
originated. 

Nevertheless, a cavernicolous life is not in all respects 


e 
frequent it by day (especially the bats) bring in with them 
from outside an abundant food-supply for animals that can 


in 
case for the predator to possess organs of perception, in order 
that it may detect the presence of vigilant prey ; in the other 
for the prey to possess similar organs whereby it may be 


form legs of the Arachnid and the antennae of the insect are 
even longer and more delicate than is usually the case in their 
respective families. 


As a general rule, among the groups represented in the 
Burmo-Malayan cave-fauna, colouration is more readily 


the moth Crypsithyris spelaea and the myriapod Cambalamor- 
pha feae) it is probable that feebleness of pigmentation has 


422 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. {[November, 1918. 


cavernicolous life. The question whether we are dealing here 
with two entirely different sets of phenomena, or merely wit 
cases in some of which an individual peculiarity has become 
hereditary, can hardly be discussed without a consideration of 
the possibility of the inheritance of acquired characters. And 
sufficient evidence is not forthcoming. 

In any case, there can be no danger in asserting that 
no species found in the caves of Burma and the Malay Penin- 


first. to consider another, to wit, What cavernicolous forms 
are most highly specialized in the palaearctic zone? Many of 


from the light of day; these chambers and the passages that 
lead to and from them contain streams and lakes on which 


necessarily correlated, the former has undoubtedly played a 
very Important part in the production of the peculiarities of 
faunas such as that of the Mammoth Cave 


the similarit 


fauna of the countries we are considering is that involved in 
or m les t , 
separated localities, but not, apparently, at any intermediate 


Vol. IX, No. 10.] The Limestone Caves of Burma. 423 
[V.S.] 


point. Any statement as to this phenomenon must be quali- 


specific identity but with instances of convergence? At 
present it is not possible to give a satisfactory answer to these 
questions. 
APPENDIX. 
1. Note on clay tablets from a cave in Kedah. 
(Plate XVIII). 

The inscriptions on the fragments of the clay tablet are not 
sufficiently distinct to be read fully and their subject to be 
ascertained certainly. From the letters which form a word 
and render sense, and are identifiable without doubt, my idea 
is that they contain something more than the usual Buddhist 
creed, the ‘‘ YE DHARMA,” etc. 

As regards the age of the inscription, its script pushes 
it down the later part of the 7th century A.D. The letters 
which T have identified without doubt are eight in the large 
fragment and eight in the small one. The eight letters: MA, 
HA, VO, DHI, forming the word ‘‘MAHAVODHI”’: the ini. 
tialin fourth line; and TA, THA, GA, TO, forming the word 
“ TATHAGATO’? placed towards the end of the tenth line of 
the large fragment, resemble MA, HA, VA, DHA, TA, THA, 
GA, in table IV, column XVIII, XIX of G. Buhler’s ‘‘ Grundriss 
der Indo Arischen Philologie und Altertumskunde.’’ And 
this is also the case with the other eight. In the small frag- 
ment the four distinct letters DHA, MA, HA, TA, forming 
word ‘‘ DHA (R) MAH (EK) T(U)’’ in the beginning of the first 
line and TA, THA GA, TO, forming the word ‘‘ TATHAGA- 


to his own statement, of 675 .D., and belong to the alphabet 
of that period which is called the Kutila variety of the Maga- 
dha alphabet of the 7th century A.D. Consulting the fac- 
Similes of the inscriptions of that period, I find that the © 
letters I identified in the tablets are allied to those in the 


424 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [November, 1913. 


inscriptions of Adityasena and Jivita Gupta II published by Dr. 
Fleet in his Corpus, Vol. III. The letters TA, THA, VA, GA, 
DHA, HA agree with those in Adityasena’s Aphsad stone and 
Shapur image inscriptions; while the ‘ MA’ agrees with that in 
Jivita Gupta’s Deo-Baranark s 

The rest of the characters, which I did not gather from the 
tablets as I could not make any sense of them, appear akin to 
the same inscription. For instanceit may be noted that ‘‘YA’’, 
the first letter in the second line, *‘ LA’’, the third letter count- 
ing from the right side in the sixth line of the large fragment, and 
VI, PU, LA, the three letters occurring after two letters in the 
second line of the small fragment, conform to those characters 
ia the said inscription. Moreover the mode of affixing vowels 
to tir terest agrees throughout with that of the said 


: : 
nscriptions. B. B. BrpyaBINoD. 


2. Note on clay tablets from caves near Moulmein.' 
(Plate XX), 


This representation of Gotama seems to be peculiar to the 
Burmese, the Shans and the Siamese. It is called in Burma 
a ‘‘Zabupade’’; it always represents the Buddha in full regal 
dress; the head-dress is often, as in these tablets, a three-tiered 
crown surmounted by a pointed ornament; on both sides, 
attached to the crown, are appendages or wings; from the large 
holes in the lobes of the ears depend two ear ornaments the 
ends of which touch the shoulders, both arms have large arm- 
lets; the dress appears to be richly embroidered, with side 
ornaments at the shoulders. 

It is called Zabupade (Pali: Jambupati) because, it is said, 
there was once in India a king, Jambupati by name, exceed- 
ingly proud and fond of rich dress; the Buddha, to curb his 
pride and vanity, assumed miraculously a regal dress in com- 
parison with which the king’s was simplicity itself, and preached 
to him a sermon on the vanity of the things of this world. 


It is to commemorate this event that the Buddha is thus 
represented. 


sence of Shan or t ntry. 
These tablets appear to be not earlier than the 18th ce™ 
A.D. 


tury C. DuRotsELLe. 


sei ils SOS Ne ee es oe 
! The specimen figured, which is now in the Indian Museum, is #ro™ 
the Buddha Cave at Dhammathat and not, asstated on the plate, from the 
m Caves. The specimen found in the Farm Caves bore the sam 
design, but was broken in two an was more strongly weathered. 


Jour. As. Soc. Beng.,Vol IX, 1913. Plate XVIII. 


Bemrose, Colle. Derty. 


ENLARGED PHOTOGRAPHS OF FRAGMENTS OF 
CLAY TABLETS FROM A CAVE IN KEDAH. 


— Specimens in the Raffles Museum, Singapore. 


Jour. As. Soc. Beng, Vol IX, 1913. Plate XIX 


oe ca 


BSE AG gies or ry ecru ee : 
a i i Raetthtedinstimstldinsionsianteniiaen, we 


Bermrose, Colts Derby 


CLAY TABLET FROM A CAVE IN PAHANG. 4 


Specimen in the Raffies Museum, Singapore. 


Plate XX 


3eng., Vol. IX, 1913. 


As. Soc. Ben, 


eh ae ae a 


Benrose, Cotte. Derby 


CLAY TABLET FROM THE FARM CAVES NEAR MOULMEIN. 


late XXI. 


TD 
|= 
f 


GES AT ENTRANCE TO CAVE IN LOWER CARBONIFEROUS LIMESTONE 


TA~SHIH- 


“WO, 


YUNG-CH’ANG FU PREFECTURE, YUNNAN, CHINA. 


Plate XXI1. 


Jour. As. Soc. Beng., Vol. IX, 1913. 


Se a 


Sa 


Oe 
Fete \ IDS 


‘ 


22 
_ 


ata 
ARN 


Ss 
~~ <aoe 
* wR ik" 
% .* 
DWE, WSR B 
SS = hy 


Sa Pe 
or a a ae 
Seg ti Tg AO wre 
i oo 
oe 


sa AN” age 


—— _ 
wae 
ee er 
hy, Sxac a _ 


2 
5 
~ 
1) 
= 
a 
= 
r 
< 
= 
a 
Ww 
o 
Ke 
— 
© 
C 


4 


ay Sear a eee 


45. The Preparation and Decomposition of Monochloro 
and Dichlorobenzylamines. 


By Rasix Lat Darra. 


The interaction of dichlorocarbamide with both aliphatic 


and aromatic amines was studied in brief in a paper to the 


n 2 
with the secondary ones. The chlorination proceeds quietly 
igher members, while with 


was specially studied with benzylamine, which, according to 
the proportions of dichlorocarbamide, gave both monochloro 
and dichlorobenzylamines. ; 
The original method of obtaining these chloramines 
depends upon the action of sodium or calcium hypochlorite on 
amines (Berg, Compt. Rend, 1893, 116, 327),—in fact this was 
the only method known. The present method is almost as 
simple, yielding, moreover, a purer product. In order to pre- 


of dichloro-derivatives. In both cases, the reaction takes place 


oa 
@ 
5 
N 
= 
@ 
te 
foe 
© 
E 
3 
} 
S. 
5 
4 
5 
} 
SF: 
o 
> 
ro 
o 
bar 3 
S 
— 
2 
g. 
a 


426 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [November, 1913.] 


to take place, for the valuation of halogen after the — of 
some days showed that the substance had remained intact 
*3474 gave °5470 Cl: Cl=38-95. 
Cale. for C,H,;. CH,. NC1l,: Cl= 40°34. 
seen, however, that aft er the lapse of a long time 
hydrolysis had indeed taken place, benzaldelyde being as before 
a produc 


On the other hand, when dichlorobenzylamine was left in 
a stoppered bottle for a few days, it was found that small crys- 
tals made their appearance on the sides of the bottle in con- 
tact with the liquid. On opening the stopper, a pressure was 
felt from within, and besides the smell of this compound, a dis- 
tinct smell of free chlorine was gee The bottle was stop- 
pered again and allowed to remain, the pressure being released 
from time to time; the whole liquid ultimately solidified into 
a mass of crystals, which on examination was found to be ben- 
zoic acid. The reaction is explainable thus :— 

C,H,CH,NCl, + 0,=C,H,.COOH + HCl + N + Cl. 

the oxygen required for the reaction being evidently obtained 
from air confined in the bottle. The above equation necessi- 
tates the liberation of oe which could not be detected 
under ~ above circumstances 


verified. 
My thanks are due to Professor P. C. Ray:for his encour- 
agement in carrying on the above investigation. 


a ‘ 
ee i ae BP ODO eee 


46. India in the Avesta of the Parsis. 


By SHams-ut-utMAa Dr. Jivanst Jamsueps1 Mont, B.A., 
PH.D 


Anquetil Du Perron, the great French scholar, having 
seen a few stray pages of the Avesta writings in his country, 
had come to this country as a soldier-adventurer to study that 
language, and, after passing through this city, had gone and 
settled at Surat, the then head-quarters of the Parsis. 
Having studied the Zend Avesta there for some years, he 
returned to France and published in 1771 his Zend Avesta, 
containing the French translation of the Scriptures of the 
Parsis. Sir W. Jones was the first to run him down 
one duped by the Parsis of Surat. He said that the Avesta 
books he had brought to the notice of scholars in Europe were 
not genuine and were a fabrication of the priests. The late 
Prof. James Darmesteter, a talented country-man of Anquetil 
Du Perron, who has for the first time translated into 


Avesta, which it pronounced a forgery. It was the future 
founder of the Royal Asiatic Society, William Jones, a young 
Oxonian then, who opened the war. He had been wounded 
to the quick by the scornful tone adopted by Anquetil towards 
Hyde and a few other English scholars: the Zend Avesta suf- 
fered for the fault of its introducer, Zoroaster for Anquetil.... . 
It is true that Anquetil had given full scope to satire by the 
stvle he had adopted: he cared very little for literary elegance, 
and did not mind writing Zend and Persian in French; so the 
new and strange ideas he had to express looked stranger still 
in the outlandish garb he gave them.’’' Summing up t . 


that the Avesta books he had discovered were genuine. Some 
of them in showing this, took the help of the Sanskrit 
guage, of the scientific study of which Sir W. Jones h 


1 $.B.E., Vol. IV (1880), pp. xv-xvi. 2 Thid., p. xvii. 


428 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [November, 1913, 


laid the foundation. Had Sir William Jones himself lived 
long, he would have soon corrected his somewhat hasty con- 
clusion, for which, one must say, the translations of Anquetil 


themselves were, a certain extent, responsible, because, 
though they did all credit to him as a great scholar, they were 
after all crude. Sir ones had no opportunity to see the 


Ree S88 he eee ee ae ae 


and in the peninsula of eee As the 
Parsis are the ruins of a people, so are their sacred books the 


n this short paper, I want to collect those passages in 
“that small book, the Avesta,’ which refer to the land of 
‘the tolerant Hindus,’’? who kindly gave to the Parsis the 

h m 99 


important branches of the Aryan or the Indo-Iranian stock of 
people, knew something of each other’s country from ve 
ti : 


Mysore 
Opponents of these Pahlavs. They are supposed by some to 
e the same as Sa uk 
general of Alexander the Great. If so, we see in this opposi- 


Ibid., Xi-xii. 
aeenores of Hindu Law or The Ordinances of Menu,’’ by W. 


Q ts 
Jones (1794), p 294, 


ee ee ee ee 


Vol. IX, No. 10.] India in the Avesta of the Parsis. 429 
[V.S.] 


tion another instance of the constant struggle oe the al 
and the Persians for the su upremacy in the Kas The coins 
of the Pahlavas were found in the dominions of Kan ‘ahha, a 
Buddhist king, because they lived in his extensive dominions. 
These coins had the name of Avesta deities on them 
Radjatarangini, the History of Cashmir,? si to some 
Gandhara Brahamins (ara s@qa) of the Mlechha dynasty 
(Wade aw) in the reign of a king Mihira Cula, the Mirkhul of 
the Ain-i-Akbari. This Mihira Cula is depicted by the author 
of the Radjatarangini as a wicked king in whose reign the 
Mlechhas had an ascendancy. He had founded a temple of 
Mihiréswara and cos city of Mihirapur ‘‘ in which the Gandhar 
Brahmans, a low race.............- were permitted to seize 
upon the endowments of the more respectable order of the 
priesthoo 
While t teil in Cashmere some years ago, a learned 
Pandit of Shrinagar told me, that the Gandharva Brahmans 
referred to in the Radjatarangini were Zoroastrian Mobads or 
priests. Some other statements in the Radjatarangini* about 
them seem to confirm this identification. These references to 
the Zoroastrians of Persia show that India knew Iran from 
very old times. Similarly, we nes from the Avesta te 
Tran knew India from very remote tim 
o the Iranians of the times of se. Avesta, the then asin 
world consisted of five countries. These are mentioned in the 
Farvardin Yasht which is, as it were, the canon of the ancient 
Zoroastrians. It contains the names of the ancient Iranian 
saints whose Farohars or good spirits are invoked in prayers. 
In it, the saints of the following five countries are invoked :— 
1. Airyanim dakhyundm, i.e. the country of the Airyas. 
2. Tuiryanim dakhyundm, i.e. the country of the Turani- 


ans. 
3. Sairimanim dakhyunam, i.e. the country given to 
elam by king hala tea country of Rum, or 
Asia Mi nor and Eastern Europe. 
Saniniam dakhyunam, i.e. the country of China. 
D&hinam dakhyunam, i.e. the country of the Dahe, a 
people of Central Asia. 


or 


dian Anti- 
1 Vide ** Zoroastrian Deities on Indo-Scythian Coins. (In 
quary, Vol. XVI Part CCVII). Vide Mon. E. Druin’s aie hegre 
‘*Le Nimbe et les Signues de 1’ Apothéose sur les Monn. ora es ego 
Scythes’’ (Revue Nummismatique. Quatriémme Série, Tome 

wees Pele 190). r ‘Cashmere and the ancient Persians,’’ 


arc 
* Bk. I, slokas 306-309. 
5 Farvardin Yasht (Yasht XIII, 144). 


430 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [November, 1913. 


catalogue, the first being Airyana-Vaéja, or the Iran Vej, the 
Tran proper of the early Iranians, or, what can be called the 


Hindus. India forms a part of the country of the Airyas named 
in the Farvardin Yasht. 

Coming to the question of the direct references to India 
itself in the Avesta, we find, in all, four references. They are . 
the following :— 

I. The Vendidad, Chap. I, 19. 

If. Yagna (Sarosh Yasht) |g 3 Bee's 
III. Meher Yasht, 104. 
IV. Tir Yasht, 32. 

{. Of these four, the first, viz. the reference in the 
Vendidad, seems to be the oldest and the most important. The 
passage runs thus :— 

anchadasem asanghamcha shdithranamcha vahishtem 
frathweresem, azem yo Ahuré Mazdao yO Hapta-Hindu, hacha 


Indus) up to the West of the Hindu. Then, th 
created therein, as a counter-act (against its excellence) exces- 
sive menstruation and excessive hea ‘ 
e learn from this passage of the Vendidad the follow- 
ing facts about India:— 
(1) That India was the fifteenth of the 16 Aryan countries, 
known to the early Iranians as created or blessed 
by God 


y : 

(2) It was known as Hapta Hindu. 

(3) The country watered by the Indus formed India, and 
its boundary latterly extended further both ways, 
towards the East and the West. 

(4) It had, as it were, two curses or miseries associated 
with it. Let us now examine these facts. 


1. Firstly, let us consi er, why is India spoken of in the 
Vendidad as the 15th country? The answer to this question 


the Vendidad, were those to which the ancient Aryan or the 
{ndo-Iranian race migrated one after another. Others, like Dr. 


Vol. IX, No. 10.] India in the Avesta of the Parsis. 431 
NS. 


Spiegel, thought, that this chapter only contained a list of the 
countries known to the ancient Iranians. Prof. Darmesteter 
took it merely as ‘‘a geographical description of Iran.’’ I 
think, that the chapter contains an enumeration of the countries 
which were occupied, one after another, by the ancient Irani- 
ans, and in which the ancient Mazdayacnan religion prevailed 
to a more or less extent. e very beginning of the chapter 
helps us to say so. It runs thus :— 

‘““Mraot Ahuro Mazd4o Spitamai Zarathushtrai azem 
dadham Spitama Zarathushtra aso ramé-daitim noit kudat- 
shaitim. Yedhi zi azem ndit daidhyim Spitama Zarathushtra 
aso ramo-daitim ndit kudat-shditim vispo anghush astvao 


Translation.—Abura Mazda said to Spitama Zarathush- 
tra: O Spitama Zarathushtra! I have created (all) countries 


O Spitama Zarathushtra! Had I not created (all) countries to 
give pleasure to its inhabitants, but had created them as 
destructive of pleasure, then the whole of the living world 
have crowded in the country of Airyana Vaeja 


with large snakes. After creating Iran, as the first of the 


crowded Iran. Thus, one after another, as one city or country 
got overcrowded, another was created and made h 
All such countries had with their advantages, one or another 
ached to them. India was the 
fifteenth country in the list, and the disadvantages attached to 
it were, ‘a) that it was excessively hot, and (b) that there, 
women had to pass through the state of menstruation at a 
very early age of life. 

/ e the countries named in the Vendidad are the 
following :— 


Names in the Avesta Modern names. 
1. Airyana Vaéja - Iran. ae 
2. Sugdha (Sogdiana of the Greeks) Samarkan 

6uru : :. Merv. 


. Méur 23 oo 
4. Bakhdhi 46. 4 ~~ sealkh. 


432 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. 


5. Nisaya 
6. Haréyi 


7. Vaékéréta 
8. Urva 

9. Veharkana 
10. Harakhaiti 
11. Haétument 
12. Ragha 

13. Chakhra 
14, Varéna 

15. 
16. 


Scholars differ on the question of the identification of 
some of these countries. 


mentioned well-nigh last. 
is very doubtful. 


re of Panjab 


Hapt-Hindu 
The country ne 


ar Rangha 


Vedas. 


The Hapta-Hindu of the 


{[November, 1913. 

Nishapur. 

Herat, or 

Nimrouz or Seis- 
tan. 

Kabul. 

Gourgan. 

Sarasvati. 

Helmand. 

Rae. 


Hapta- 


The word shows 


Vedic names. 


Sindhu 
Vitasta 


Parushani 
ipas 

Satadhru 

Kubha 


and 


. The seven branches were the following :— 
idek niches Mahabharata Modern names. 
| names. 
Indus Lae ewres Sindhu. 
Hydas .. | Jhelum. 
Akesinis Tchandrabhaga | Chenaub. 
Hydraortes Airavati Jaf ew, 
Hyphasis ipasa Biya. 
Hesydrus Satadru Sutlej. 
ophen oe teas 


It looks strange, but it is a fact, that the co 
its people were known to the ancient Greeks and are even 


— 


Vol. IX, No. 10.] India in the Avesta of the Parsis. 433 
[N.S.] 


now known to the moderns including the cori sete en 
by their Iranian names. The indigenous Vedic 

country, through which the Indus (which has veil at nam 
India, to the country) flows, is Sapt-Sindhu. So, the sitions 
ought to have been kno wn by the name Sindhustan and sh 
Hindustan whic th is a fonina of the old Iranian name. 

river has preserved its old Indian name, viz. Sindhu, but the 
country has taken its Iranian name Hindu (Hindustan). The 


all the other Westerners, knew this country and know it even 
now, by its Iranian name. 

e Greek name of one of the branches of the Indus, viz. 
sete eae Jhelum (Vedic Vitasta), i is Hydaspes. This name is 
Tra e word ‘‘ aspes’’, which forms the second part of 
sha name, is Avesta ‘‘as a” corresponding to the Sanskrit 
a4 (asia) ates equus,’ horse. We find the word in the 
Avesta and Greek names of another Persian river also. It 
is the Hvaspa of the Avesta,! the Choaspes of the Greeks, 
the modern Cherkheh. Unfortunately, we have not in the 
extant Avesta the names of the seven branches of the Indus. 
But this Greek name of one of the branches shows that the 

ranch was named by the Greeks after its Iranian name. 

Similarly, the main river and the country itself were named 
after their Iranian names 

In the Sassanian times of the later wings hi commentators 

of the Avesta, the Indus having only five branches, the 


covered another reason for the name. ‘They said: ‘‘ Av 
hapt-Hindukanih hand Aigh sar-khuda haft ait, 8 4.6, i¢ is 
called Hapt-Hindu, because there are seven rulers over it. 
Possibly there were seven rulers ruling over the land of the 
Indus ~ hs tim 

As stated by. Dr. Haug, at least two facts lead to show 
that the go in which the name of India occurs as 
Hapt-Hindu, was written many centuries before Christ. 


had founded Ecbatana (Agabatana, Hamdan). That was in 
B.C. 708. This great city of ancient Persia is not mentioned 


the Vendidad, was written Hane before B.C. 708. 
Secon ndly,, the city of Balkh, which is named as eee in 
the Vendidad, is — of there as the vad of ‘‘ Eredh 


| Zamy&d Yasht, 67. Vide my paper on the river Karun (Asiatic 
Papers, 1- 
"Spiegels Text of the Pahlavi Vendidad, p. 7, 1. 1. 
3 Bk. 


434 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [November, 1913. 


drafshim,”’ i.e. the city of the exalted drapeau.’’ This state- 

ment shows that it was still at that time the capital city of 

Bactria, carrying the royal banner. Now, we know, that 
ria fell i 


as Hapt-Hindu, i.e. as ‘‘ the country of the seven rivers of the 
Indus,’’ a long time before 1200 B.c. 

- Coming to the third fact, we find that the country of 
India, as first known to the Iranians, before about 1200 B.0., 


tarem Hendum,’’ j.e. the country of Hindustan, extends 
from the East of the Indus to the West of the Indus. This 
sentence is not found in some of the old manuscripts of the 
Vendidad.' So, it seems, that it is a later addition by 
way of a comment. The later Pahlavi rendering of the 


So, it appears that the Avesta sentence is a later addition 
_» # commentator. Anyhow, what we find from this passage 
is this: At first, it was only the country watered by the Hindu 

was known as the country of Hindustan (India), 
but latterly, gradually, the country both on the west and the 
east of the country so watered by the Indus was included: in 
the name Hindu or India. : 


astly, we come to the question of the curse on the 


heat and its women had to pass through a period of menstrua- 
tion ata very early period of their life. We know that this is 
true of India even now. 

F aving examined the four inferences that can be drawn 
tom the passage of the Vendidad which is the first and the 


i; I Vide Westergaard’s Text, p. 346, note 5 to para 19, where he says 
25 Ko, R omit these six words hacha Hindum.’’ 
2 Spiegel’s Text, p. 7, 1. 3. 


Vol, ren 10.] India in the Avesta of the Parsis. 435 
[V.S.] 


principal reference “ = in the Avesta, we will now look 
into the other refere 

bi ee gs apptes to India in the Yagna (LVII, 29) runs 
thus :— 

a Yatchit ushastairé Hendv6 ageurvayeité yatchit daosh- 
tairé Nigné 

Translation—Who goes from Hindustan in the East to 
Nineveh in t 

Here Siaoela, re Yazata or Angel presiding over Obedi- 
ence, is represented as marching in his chariot of swift horses, 
from the East to the West. India (Hindva) is here represented 
as the Eastern boundary and Nineveh as the Western boun- 
dary of the then known Iranian country. Scholars differ as to 
the meaning of the last word nigné. Some do not take it to 
be a proper noun. Darmesteter takes the eastern boundary 
to be the river Indus, and the western the river Tigris. But 


Yagna speaks of ‘India as = eastern boundary of the terri- 
tories of the country of Ira 

III. The reference to ae in the Meher Yasht (104) 
runs thus:— 

Mithrem vouru-gaoyaoitim yazamaidé yenghé 
daregachit bazava fragerewenti mithrd-aojangho, yatehit ushas- 
tairé Hindvé ageurvayeiti yatchit daoshatairé 

ranslation--We invoke Mithra of wide Sashes owe ews 
whose extended arms bali that person who aks to his 
promise (mithra), whether that person be in Hindustan in 
the East of Nineveh in the West 

he Meher Yasht treats of Mithra, the Yazata or Angel o of 
Light, who is believed to preside over ‘‘truthfulness.’’ He 


they happen to be in India in the East or Nineveh in the West. 
The phraseology ogee = same as that in the Yacna, the 
aie ee also is the sa 

Fro e above wi references of the Yacna and the 
Meher Yasht, we find the following two facts :—- 

Ve Firstly, they have dropped the word Hapta or seven 
from the name of the country and no longer speak of it as 
Hapta-Hindu, bat speak of : only as Hindu. This shows, ~ 
latterly, the name Hindu r India was not confined to the 
country watered by the poet but was extended to be 
other than this. 

2. Secondly, the rule of Persia ——— at the time 
gee Nineveh in the West to India in the Eas 

. The last reference to India in the Tee that in the 
Tir Yacht (32). It speaks not of India itself but of one of its 
mountains—the Hindukush. The passage runs thas :— 


436 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [November, 1913. 


“Aat tat dunman ham-hishtenti us Hindvat paiti 
garoit.’’ 
Translation—Then vapour arises from the mount Hindu. 
Tistrya is the Yazata or angel presiding over rain. So, 
in the Yasht which treats of an account of this Yazata, the 
watery vapour which forms rain, is referred to as arising from 
Mount Hindu, which is identified with the Hindukush. 


DE INO SUS kX bk ye 


47. The Twelve Bhuiyas or Landlords of Bengal. 
By the Rev. H. Hosrsn, S$.J. 


Bengal.’’ 
Prof. Blochmann wrote in Contributions to the Geography 
M 


Dr. J. Wise pushed the subject considerably further in 
J.A.8.B., 1874, p. 197 et sqq.; 1875, pp. 181-183; and Mr. 
H. Beveridge offered some other important elucidations in 
J.A.S.B., 1904, pp. 57-63. 

. Wise quoted among his authorities (1874) the Latin 
edition of du Jarric. We shall translate presently two pas 


of Bengala, which comprises about two hundred leagues of sea- 
coast, was inhabited partly by native Bengalis, who are gener- 
ally Pagans, partly by Saracens, for the most part Patans or 
Parthians [Persians], who, having been driven from the King- 

om of Mogor, which they h 


1 Allusion to the events of 1576. 


438 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, [November, 1913. 


above them. Yet, they do not call themselves kings, though 
they consider themselves such; but, Boyons, which means 
perhaps the same as Princes. All the Patans and native Ben- 
galis obey these Boyons : three of them are Gentiles, namely those 
of Chandecan, of Siripur, and of Bacala. The others are 
Saracens; however, the King of Aracan, called King of the 
Mogos, also holds part of it.’’ Cf. Hist. des choses plus 
memorables...., Bovrdeavs, 1614, Vol. III, 826-827. 

In Vol. I, 602, we find: ‘‘ The great Mogor attacked them 
with a powerful army, and having killed the tyrant [King Daud], 
who had usurped this country, with his chief partisans, he left 
the government of that kingdom in the hands of twelve per- 
sons, who plotting secretly against him subdued those of 


dolin or Maasudalin, as some call him. The King of Arracan 
also possesses part of it, even of what is on the frontiers, 


quoted by Dr. Wise through d’ Avily, J.A.8.B., 1875, p. 181. 
Several other references to the Bhiiiyas can be found in 
the Portuguese historians. 
bout 1605, Philip de Brito de Nicote tried to persuade 


of] Sundiva, where he fortified himself, and the twelve Boides 
tendered him their submission, and that he determined to 
march upon Chatigaio [Chittagong] and pass into Arracao; 
and that, at the very time when the Mogor marched against 
Siripur, the Mogo went to Bengala with all his fleet, for the 
sake of attacking his neighbour, the King of Tupara [Tippera], 
but that he withdrew to Arracio, leaving the greater part of 
his fleet and artillery at Catigao [sic].’’* 


1 Cf. Colleegao d» documentos ineditos tT i 
. 2 ..., Tom. Vi, 1¢ Serie, Decada 
= ~ iG da India por A. Bocarro, Lisboa, 1876, pp. 131, 440. 
- £0id., Tom. VII, 1* Serie, Vol. II, Lisboa 1834, p. 226.—At 


Vol. IX, No. 10.] The Twelve Bhiiyas of Bengal. 439 
[V.S.] 


Added to this, we have the authority of Manrique, whom 
his sojourn of a year at Higli, of about 6 years at Chittagong, 
and his travels in Orissa (1640), to Dacca, Gaur, and Rajmahal, 
had made acquainted with the whole tract over which the 
Bhiiyas ruled. The twelve Bhiliiyads, according to him, were 
those of: 1. Bengala; 2. Angelim [Hijili]; 3. Ourixa [Orissa]; 
4, Jassor (Jessore]; 5. Chandevan; 6. Midinimpur [Midnapore]; 
7. Catrabo [Katrabuh]; 8. Bacala [Bakla] ; 9. Solimanvas [Sulai- 
manibad]; 10. Bulvé; 11. Daca; 12. Rajamol [Rajmahal]. (Cf. 
Itinerario, 1649, p. 20, col. 2.) 


the twelve Boiones, and ave mentioned them too. The 
whole tract is most fertile. The largest towns are Daack, or 
Daca, Rajamol, or Ragmehel, Midinimpur, Burduan, Katra- 
bo, Cateca. Its most frequented barbours are Vgulim (Higli]. 
a Portuguese foundation, Piple in the Kingdom of Ourixa, and 
Balassor in the same Kingdom. It has other harbours; but, 
being less frequented, they are less known. All these lands are 
limited to the south by the Gangetic strait, into which by 
four vast mouths the Ganges discharges its voluminous, rapid 
and wholesome waters.’’ 


after Sulaiman Shah of Bengal, and he suggests that the name 
i j ars 


son, Prince Selim, afterwards known as Prince Jahangir. i 


Beveridge, The District of Bakargan), pp. 118-119 
“¢In the Introduction to a Samskrt dictionary, the author 
gives the following genealogy of his patron: Muchha or Murch- 
4 Khan: son of ‘Isa Khan, son of ’Silamana Khan. (Note by 


& —_— a . e . 
Babi Manmohan Chakravarti.) From the proximity of Soli- 


of the tain of the 
lao. Cf. Index, p. 762. 


440 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [November, 1913. 


manvas to the ancestral possessions of ‘Ist Khan we might 
conclude that it was thus called after ‘Isa Khan’s father. 

In the case of Solimanvas, the ending vds represents the 
abad of many Muhammadan towns, altered by the Hindis to 
a form they understood. As for Ilahabad, the reverse change 
took place. Cf. J.A.S.B., 1904, p.78. Thévenot and Valentyn 
wrote Halabas, and Bernier Zlabas. 

2. Catrabo.—This place is identified by Mr. Beveridge 
with Katrabuh or Katibari near Sabhar, in the Manikganj sub- 

ivision, where there is still a ‘‘tappa’’ called Kathorabo. 
Cf. Proc. A.S.B., 1903, pp. 133-134. After other attempts at 
identification, he proposed the same solution in J.A S.B.,1904, 
p- 62, Dr. Wise had advanced a more satisfactory solution, 
I believe, in J.A.8.B., 1875, XLIV, p. 182. “Catrabo is 
Katrabo, now a ‘tappa’ on the Lakhya, opposite Khizrpar, 
which for long was the property of the descendants of ‘Isa 
Khan, Masnad-i-‘Ali.’’ According to Dr. Wise, branches of 


: : ; cp. These con- 
clusions of Dr. Wise are favoured by the fact that Van den 


(Tamluk} on the Meghna — Loricul and Siripur goes strongly 
A : 2 


“ 0 
have Katrabih), which was ‘Isa’s residence. J.A.S.B., 1904, 


rose in importance, and that it. was close to Sonargion, Mr. 


H. Beveridge’s identification of Katrabih with Goraboe of. 


Vol. IX, No. 10.] The Twelve Bhitiyas of Bengal. 441 
[N.S.] 


Rennell’s map, N. of Dacca, and a little N. of Ekdallah, on 
the right bank of the Lakhia or Banar (Cf. ibid., p. 59) does 
not appear to me acceptable. 

3. Chandecan.—The kingdom of Chandecan has been 
identified, correctly I believe, by Mr. H. Beveridge with 
Dhi amghat, near the modern bazar of Kaliganj, on the Madhu- 
mati. For the discussion of the proofs, mostly based on the 
early Jesuit letters (1598-1602) cf. H. BrvERipGE, Bi, 
1876, pp. 71-76, and The District of Bakarganj, London, Triib- 

o Proc. A.S.B. 


Hiigli itself, was then called the river of Chandecan. In | 

the Jesuit Residence at Higli was dete as situated i in the 
Chandecan district.2 Cf. J.A.9.B., 1911, p. 16. ‘* Chandecan 
or Ciandecan,’’ writes Mr. Beveridge, a evidently the same 
as Chand Khan, which as we nae from the life of Rajah 
Pratapaditya by Ram Ram Bosu (modernised by Hari 
Chandra Tarkalankar), was the name of the former proprie- 
tor of the estate in the Sunderbans which Pratapaditya’s 
father mente i got from ines Daoud. Chand Khan 


relapsed into eile Reis ; 

would be ruined, as he had taken upon himself to resist the 
Emperor of Delhi, and therefore Bikramaditya, who was his 
minister, took the precaution of establishing a retreat for him- 


ett 
Linschoten’s Le Grand Routier de “Mer, A maidens - 1638, 


eo 

already published as Pt. II of his I — ofte ie _ eee Te 
orte 

1596, Ch. XI. Navigation d& cours des I It is to be regretted 


a Ventrée du fleuve Ganges au Royaume de Bengala. 
that Burnell and Tiele did nat oe it in eis Hakluyt edn. of van 
L 
cater s work. I made in List of Portuguese 

Jesuits in Bengal, J.A.S. oe 25. the Catalogu 
‘* College of Bengal’’ is eae ed in the Va 

a a _J., who has had access to 
tes of Chandecan. Fr. H. Josson, 8.J how the mistake 


: b 
above the o, which gave the look of 1664 hs a mis 
Sear froin "Brass rae 14 Aug. 1913). 

3 Masnad-i-‘ 


442 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [November, 1913. 


but to the King of Guouro”? [Gaur]. Seizing his lands would 

put an end to ‘‘Akbar’s”’ i 

Bengal.' It was not advisable either that the treasures of the — 

King of Chandecao, a man de pouco poder e de gente pusillanime, 

should be let fall into Akbar’s hands? 
In a letter of Bishop Dom Pedro to Dom Jeronymo de 

Azevedo, Viceroy of Goa (Lisbon, 15 March 1613), there is 


t. Beveridge could find no mention of Chandecan in the 
old maps. I find it referred to as ‘‘Ile de Chandecan’’ in a 


n 
¢ao de documentos ineditos, Tom. VII, 1¢ Serie, Tom. [, 
Lisbon, 1880, p. : 

3 a 


354, 
Cf. ibid., Tom. VIII, 14 Serie, Tom. II, Lisbon, 1884, p. 392. 


Vol. IX, No. 10.) The Twelve Bhiiyas of Bengal. 443 
[N.8.] 


map of Sir Thomas Roe (1632) reprinted by the Scottish Geo- 
graphical Magazine, 1902. A copy of it can be seen along the 
staircase of the Imperial Library, Calcutta. Again, it is to be 
traced in the earlier editions of van ripen oes Sieg Angelim 
[Hijili] is placed in the Island of Chandec Father A, 
Monserrate’s map (ante 1600) mentions also Gunes He 
places it on the coast, at the mouth of one of the outlets of the 
Ganges; but, as he did not visit Bengal, his authority in this 
matter amounts to little. Bernouilli was, probably, not far 
wrong when he stated that the Province of Satgaon was 
esate called Kandecan.! 

The Bhiiyas proposed by Dr. Wise for the period 1576-93 


are: — 
1. Fazl Ghazi of Bhowal. 
2. Chand Rai and Kedar Rai of Bikrampir (Sripar). 
3. Lak’han Manik of Bhalua 
4. Kandarpa Narayana Rai of ‘Chandradwip. 
5. Isa Khan, Masnad- Lae of Khizrpur. 
6. Raja Pratapaditya of Jessore. 
7. Perhaps, Mukund Rai of Sane (J.A.S.B., 1874, 


p. 199. 

Blo-zhmann speaks of the Bhiiyas of Bhaluah, oni 
Chandradip, Faridpur, the 24- Parganahs. and ‘Isa Khan, 
tioned in the Akbarnamah as the chief of the Twelve Bhiaiyas 
(J.A.S.B., 1895, p. 305). 

These lists do not agree. Taking the Jesuit list of 1599 as 
our standard, we find that the Masandolin of the Jesuits was 
‘Isa Khan, Masnad-i-‘ Ali, yet seat was at Katrabuh, rather 
than at Khizrpur, as shown y Mr. H. Beveridge, J. AS.B., 
1904, p.58. The Bhiiya of Bouts (Bakla) corresponds (?) to 
Dr. Wise’s No. 4; the Bhiiya of Siripur to Dr. Wise’s No. 2; 
the Bhiiya of Chandecan is Manrique’s No. 5 and Biosiunann” 8 
Bhiiya of the 24- Parganas, (with Jessore excluded, oe 
Manrique). The Bhuiya of Solimanvas (Manrique’s No. 5), 
Muhammadan, as we should expect, tallies with Blochmann’ 8 
Bhiiiya of Faridpu 

Even after ata out the Bhiiya of Bosnah in Dr. 
Wise’s list, we see that his list, which refers to a period only 
slightly earlier than that of the Sele contains more than 
three Hindi Bhitiyas, i.e., Nos. 2, 3, 4, 6.” True, we are in 

1 Cf. Deser. Histor. et Géogr. de l'Inde, Vol. II, Pt. I, p. 408. — 

otes on Prataipaditya’s life ef. H. Ratney, f attnees Bes Sel, 


Krishnagu, in Sel. from the Calcutta Review, VI (Febr.-May wagtt ie 
267-287, or Calcutta Review, XXV (July 1885), pp- 104-1163 ot guid 
: es 


1 the son of the Raja of *‘ Busna, Hindi S oecacile a 
Christian, while in captivity at Chittagong, and took the name of Don 


444 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. {November, 1913. 


the same case with regard to Manrique’s catalogue, the 
Bhiiiyas of Chandekan, Jassor, Bacala, and Bulva suggesting 
Hindu Zamindars, and it does not follow that Manrique or Dr. 
Wise is wrong for the period each refers to. 

Dr. Wise’s list has the disadvantage of relegating to a 


enumeration takes in the whole of Bengal. Dr. Wise objected 
to it because Orissa, ‘* Jagannath,’ and Midinipir could not have 
had separate rulers, and the name of Bengala seemed to recall 
the fabulous city on which so much was written by the travel- 
lers of the XVIth and XVIIth centuries. (J.4.8.B. 1875, 9. 


o a town, can never 
have created any difficulty to the travellers visiting Bengal in 
the XVIth and XVIIth centuries, Unfortunately, so little 


attention has been paid to the accounts of Bengal written 


Satgaon, Chittagong, and even such places as Higli an 


time. It is easy to understand why ‘‘ Bengala’’ should have 
been placed at Chittagong by Portuguese cartographers. The 
first Portuguese settlement was at Chittagong from about 1534, 


and, till the time when they founded Hiigli (1578), ‘to go to 


Bengala, placed it at Chittagong, on the Cosmi (Bassein) 
tiver, too. We have letters from Chandernagar dated ‘‘ A 


a - But, this is no reason why we should get impatient 
and speak of Bengala as a mythical city, or fancy that it was 
somewhere in the Sundarbans and has long since been swept 


Antonio do Rozario. Set free, he vai is rya 
Fv0 : ’ prevailed on many of his ryats to 
come Christians. The descendants isti w mostly 
; * Ps ge of these Christians are now most 


Vol. IX, No. 10.] The Twelve Bhiiiyas of Bengal, -- 445 
[NV.8.] 


away by a tidal wave. This theory, lately revived by one of 
our University lecturers, has no chance of finding favour.' 
Since the twelve Bhiiyas are invariably represented as 
vassals of a King Emperor, we should understand that the 
King was not himself one of the Twelve. This conclusion is 
borne out by the practice still in vogue in Arakan in 1631. (Cf. 
infra). We saw above (p. 442) that the Bhiiiydsare spoken of in 
1610 as subject to the King of Gaur. Manrique says that the 
Monarch of Bengala ‘‘who resided formerly at Gaur’? (cf. 
p. 20, col. 2) had under him ‘‘ twelve petty Kings in the twelve 
Provinces under him.’’ The Bhiliya of Manrique’s Bengala must 
then have been governor, not of a mythical city, but of the dis- 
trict where the King or Emperor had his capital at the time being. 
Now, since the twelve Bhiliiyas depended in 1640 from the 
Moghul Emperor, and Gaur was reduced to a heap of ruins, 


can, who had been Emperor of Bengal before the Moors 

conquered it,’’ which I find in an unpublished letter of Fr. 

John Cabral, S.J., November 12, 1633, serves to puzzle 
i by Babi 


Cosmographie, ou okes, é 

of the whole World, and all the principall Kingdomes, Provinces, 

Isles thereo on 652, jons the following towns in Benga 
r possibly Chittagong], Ta 


on, 
ala, Gouro, Catigan [Satgaon, I ge <p 
[Tanda], Porto Grande [Chittagong], and Porto Pequeno [Higli]. Ben- 
gala is thus described: it ‘‘ gave name to t py 


he 
@ branch of the River Ganges, and reckoned for on 
ful towns of all the Indies. Exceedingly enriched by trade, but m “ 
by Pilgrimages, by reason of holyness and divine operations ascribe 
y the dans the waters of it: there being few years in which PS 
visited by three or four thousand Pilgrims.’’ (Cf. Bengal Past and. P a 
sent, Vol ). Now, this part of Heyleyn’s compilation is yap 
n Purch Description of India, Ch. II J. TALBOY habe hd 
aca Travels in India, Calcutta, i p. 5.) : Pati she oa Risen ¢ saa 
Speaks anga Sagar which I SO : 
Cay alone, and w an ;m three Ae Res hundred pari pilgrims 


ng ed at 
there is question in Purchas of a Governor of Bengala w 
Particulars. 


446 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [November, 1913. 


It had become the capital of Bengal after Gaur, and was a 
favourite residence of the Moghul Governors of Bengal until 
the middle of the XVIIth century. 

3. There is no difficulty to admit that the Bhiiya of 
Orissa had his capital at Cuttack. In Bruton’s time (1632) 
the Nawab of Orissa lived at Cuttack. 

Between 1628 and 1640 there was a Bhiliya at Hijili, 
whom Manrique styles the Masandolim, under which, we recog- 
nize again the sonorous title of Masnad-i-‘Ali. In 1697 the 
Governor of Higli was appointed to Hijili. Cf. C. R. Wizson, 
Old Fort William in Bengal, I, 22. 

5 e trouble which Manrique must have taken to get 
at the names of the Twelve Bhiiiyas and his researches among 
the revenue papers of Rajmahal, Multan and Kandahar (p. 
409, col. 2) are a guarantee of his correctness about the Bh tiya 
of Midnapore. 

- Dr. Wise’s objections to Manrique’s list appear to rest 
on the supposition that Bhati, the country where the Barah 
Bhiiyas ruled, was ‘‘ the lowland subject to the influx of the 
tide.’” Cf. Buocamann, Contributions to the Geogr. and Hist. 
of Bengal, p.18. Col. Jarrett described it similarly as ‘‘ the 
coast-strip of the Sunderbuns from Hijli to the Meghna.’’ Cf. 
Ain, II, 116, n. 3. Indeed, Abul Fazl has puzzled all his 


extremities of the hills of Tibet.’ Cf. Exxiorr, Hist. of India, 
VI. 72-73, and H. BEVERIDGE, J.A.S.B., 1904, p. 58 


Bhati given by Abul Fazl, viz., “South Tanda,’’ may be @ 
mistake for Landa which in the Riyazu-s-Salatin is given as 
one of the boundaries of Orissa, I do not, however, know 
what place is meant by the author of the Riyaz. The passage 

i 


as Jasur (the MSS. do not agree), and Professor Dowson has 
rendered this as Jessore (Extiorr, VI. 73). But Abul Fazl calls 


a Sarkar in his time, 
Pargana. I therefore believe that the boundary meant is 


Vol. IX, No. 10.] The Twelve Bhiiiyas of Bengal. 447 
[N.S.] 


Jaintia which in the Ain is spelt Jesa (Jarrert, 11,139). Per- 
haps, this may help to explain Abul Fazl’s impossible northern 
boundary, viz., ya daryd-i-shor, the ocean. Perhaps what he 
meant, or his informants meant, was daryd-i-surma, 1.e. 
river Soorma.’’ (J.A.S B., 1904, pp. 62-63.) 

We might ask our philologists whether any other meaning 
could be found for the word Bhati than that proposed by Abul 
Fazl, ‘‘a low-lying country, because it lies lower than Bengal 
(?),°? or the one proposed by Dowson: ‘‘ Bhati=down the 
stream.’’ (Exuiotr, VI, 72.) What moved Wilford, a good 
linguist, to speak of ‘* the twelve Bhiiyas, or Bhattis or princt- 
palities of Bengal’’? Cf. supra. 

he dignity of the Barah Bhiliyas appears to have had its 
roots in a very ancient institution, the origin of which we must 
leave to others to investigate. The following points deserve 
attention :— 


are enumerated, twelve persons are always mentioned, but the 
actual names vary, just as in the case of the Muhammadan 
Panch Pir different saints are counted by different people. It 
seems to have been the practice in this part of India for Kings 
to appoint twelve advisers or governors. Nar Narayan had 
twelve ministers of state; twelve chiefs or dolois administered 
the hilly portions of the Raja of Jaintia’s dominions, and there 
were twelve State Councillors in Nepal.’’ 


-) Before the ceremony, twelve Lords of Arakan were 
crowned Kings (pp. 204, col. 1; 212), and eight days were 
spent in festivities after the coronation of each. On the day 
of the Emperor’s coronation, these twelve vassal kings walked 
before him in procession and stood around his throne (p. 215, 

ol. 2). 


1 Horrible to relate! The ‘‘ Emperor ’’ of Arakan fearing to be over- 


tains. 
ay were carried at night to a deep hollow between two at te plain 


448 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [November, 1913. 


Hugh Murray has summarised for us from Manrique the 
chief proceedings of the investiture of the Twelve Bhiiyas of 
rakan. 


‘*Six months were employed without intermission through- 
out the kingdom in making preparations, and in particular a 
copious supply was brought of the holy waters of Sagur. As 
the time approached, such crowds came from all the kingdoms, 
states, and cities of Indostan, Ava, Siam, Sumatra, and other 
various islands and countries, that Arracan became, as it were, 
an epitome of the East. The ceremony began with the coro- 
nation of twelve kings, who were each to reign over one of the 
provinces subject to Arracan. On this occasion, the emperor 
being seated on a splendid throne, with all his lords in atten- 

e 


nificent processions by land and water, and in keeping open 
table for all the citizens.’? (Cf. Histor. Account of Discoveries 


A pi 6. langoma, 7. Lauran, 8. 9. Truco, 10. 11. Cablan, 
Ki lam. Cf. pu Jarric, Histoire. ..., 1.616. And since the 
ing of Arakan was on several occasions master of Pegu, we 


cries ‘of the ge at soe in rose to such a pitch that an insurrection was 


4 r © in the history of Mexi der the Aztecs. 
we barat on Itinerario, ch. 3l, or H. Mensie. ts peggy ae of Dis 
ves and Travels in Asia, Edinburgh, 1820, Vol. II, pp. 109-111. 


Vol. IX, No. 10.] The Twelve Bhuiyas of Bengal. 449 
[N.8.] 


may suppose that these twelve sub-kings were also among those 
**on the crowns of whose heads the soles of his feet always 
rested.’’ : 

Again, Father Monserrate (1581-82) speaks of Rana Partab 

‘“cui duodecim reguli parebant.’’ May we 
not also compare with this a sentence in Friar Jordanus’ 
Mirabilia descripta: ‘‘In this Greater India are twelve idola- 
trous Kings, and more’’? Of. Yuin, The Wonders of the East, 
Hakluyt edn., 1863, p. 39. 

‘*In Malabar,’’ writes Ibn Batuta, ‘‘ there are twelve 
idolatrous Sultans, among whom some are powerful, with 
armies amounting to fifty thousand men; some weak, their 
army consisting only of three thousand men.’’ Cf. C. 
Derrémery and B. R. Sanaurnett1, Voyages d’ Ibn Batuta, 
Paris, 1858, IV, 75.! 


Singh of Udaipir, 


probably under the Hindi Rajas of Gaur. In view also of the 
fact that the dignity still flourished in Arakan in 1631, we do 
not think that the number fwelve was merely conventional, or 
that in the minds of the people all dignitaries next to a Raja 
belonged to the Council of Twelve. (Yuu, Op. cit., p. 39 n. 2; 
Garr, Op. cit , p. 37.) Yet, if the title was not hereditary, but 
bestowed at will by a suzerain on the occasion of his accession 


term. The term Bhiiya has now fallen from its high estate in 
Eastern Bengal, and has become a com appellative. 
(J.A.S.B., 1874, p. 198.) The same has happened to the term 
Ra 


Island of Formosa] there is a kind of Senate, consisting of twelve persons, 
which are changed every two years.’’ The pa 


48, The Pitt Diamond and the Eyes of Jaggannath, 
Puri. 


A further note by the Rev. H. Hosren, S.J. 


Qui cherche, trouve, though very often we make our dis- 
coveries long after we have given up the search, and while we 
are looking for something else. 

Here is another reference to the rubies in the eyes of 
Jagannath. ! 

‘*On Thursday, the 4th of August [1701], we passed pretty 
close to the famous Pagode Jam-grenats, the Statue of which is, 


country. : 

This passage strengthens considerably our conclusion that 
the Pitt Diamond did not come from Puri. About December 
1701 Jaurchund offered Pitt the famous diamond ;* Pitt bought 
it at Madras about February 1702 and sent it home on October 
9 of that year. Already in a letter from Madras dated October 
18, 1701, he had written to Sir Stephen Evance, his London 


P > 
“A massive statue of gold, as large as St. Christopher.’ 
This expression of Biron’s is worth comparing with Friar Odo- 


! Cf. our previous notes in J.A.S.B., 1912, pp. 133-144; ad bre ae 
2 Cf. C. Biron, Curiositez de la Nature et de V Art, a gong 
deux Voyages des Indes: l'un aux * Occtdent ¢: MDOCITI p. 

utre aux Indes d’Orient en 1701: & 1702. Paris M ig 


$ Cf. Yule, Diary of W. Hedges, IIL, pp. exxv, cxxvi, oxxxvil, 
* Cf. Ibid., pp. exxi, exxii. 


452 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [December, 1913. 


The idol,’’ says Odoric, ‘is as bi as St. Christopher is 
commonly represented by the painters, and it is entirely of 
ted hr 
round its neck it hath a collar of gems of immense value. And 
the church of this idol is also of pure gold, roof (and walls) and 
I, p. 81. 


less remote from our own days, who had had the advantage of 
coming closer to Puri. The point to be remembered is that in 


Odoric. Is it not rather tradition reasserting itself about 400 
years later? Biron’s informers had not seen the idol of Puri, 


described it to Odoric. Yet, in bot es, itis c ared to 
the giant St Christopher, who according to the Légende dorée de 
oragine (Paris edn. 1843 | Pp. 179) was ‘* terrible in appear- 


ance, and twelve cubits hia Wile 
___ I must quote still another allusion to diamonds in Jagan- 
nath’s eyes. I take it from “An account of the Countries, 


Vol. IX, No. 11.] The Pitt Diamond. 453 
[N.S.] 


‘Cities and Towns, adjacent to Bengal, contained in Mr. Plaisted’ s 
Map, by a Gentleman who resided there many years,’”! 

; ‘At Jagranaut, there is a Pagod of another kind, which is 
resorted to by Pilgrims from all parts of India. It stands in a 
Plain about a Mile from the Sea, and is built of Stone in the 
shape of a Canary Pipe set on the end. It has no Windows, 
but is illuminated with Hundreds of Wax Tapers, which burn 
Day and Night. The Idol is an irregular Figure of Black Stone, 
with two rich Diamonds placed near the Top to represent Eyes, 
and the Nose and Mouth are not carved but painted with a 
red Colour....’’ 

Our researches have reached a stage where we may con- 
fidently deny all connection between Pitt’s diamond and the 


would form a fruitful theme for sagacity and critical acumen ; 
ut, we do not feel specially tempted just now to bring the 
texts together. 
Summary of the Question. 


Pitt’s allusion to the diamond in his letter (Madras, 
October 18, 1701) to Sir Stephen Evance, London, supposes 
an earlier allusion from his correspondent. The diamond was 
offered to Pitt at Madras in December 1701, bought by him in 
February (2) 1702, and sent home on October 9, 1702. On 


cused o v. : 

] 

Company probably apprehended trouble from the Great Moghul, 
betors honk seal seat appears oe have charged Pitt of 


that it had lett the country long ago. Pitt’s emphatic declara- 
tion (Bergen, July 29, 17 10) of how he obtained the diamond 
from the jeweller Jarchand leaves us in the dark about its pro- 
venance; but, Hamilton’s account (ante 1728) obtained from 
Glover, who had introduced Jarchand to Pitt, points to the 
Golkonda mines. So does the account of Salmon (1752), who 
absolves Pitt from all manner of compulsion. The diamond 
had been sold to France in 1717. 


i ist 1 from Calcutta 
I 1] Bartholomew Plaisted’s A Journa 
in Reagan Oe 3 aoe England in the year MDCCL. 2nd _ grrr 
1757. “Our Calcutta libraries appear not to possess any copy o ve 
60. C : ‘*The East India 


here [at Cuttack], some of the 
Factory here [ 17? ] 50." ‘ct z 
Past and Present, Vols. III & IV, pp. 602-603, through which I quote. 


454 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (December, 1913. 


We have traced the legend of previous stones in the eyes 
of Jagannath in the following authors :— 

1. Friar Odoric de Pordenone (c. 1321) may be understood 
as describing the idol of Jagannath. had a collar of gems 
about its neck, and was as great as St. Christopher. 

. Tavernier, who was at Hugli in 1666, writes that the 
idol had two diamond eyes, and a diamond hanging from its 
neck. A jeweller, who was making off with them, was struck 
down on the threshold by the irate god. 

3. The Vabcirat-ul-Nazirin, referring to facts which oc- 
curred between 1690 and 1713, states that the eyes of the idol 
consisted of two jewels, and that the statue was sent to Aurang- 
zib at Bijapur, where it was broken on the steps of the mosque. 
us Bae given our reasons for considering this story as apocry- 
phal. 

4, The ubiquitous Manucci, writing between 1699 and 
1701, relates how two Portuguese, brothers, dressed up as jogis, 
were a to live in the temple and ran away with its 
diamonds. 

5. On August 4, 1701, C. Biron passing near Puri, heard 
of two rubies in the eyes of the idol, which was as big as St. 
Christopher. Note the proximity of this date to October 18, 
1701, when Pitt wrote to Sir Stephen Evance about the stone 
which he acquired so soon after. 

6. Fr. G. Tachard, S.J., in a letter from Chandernagar 
(January 18, 1711) speaks of a Frenchman who, disguised as 
a jogt, introduced himself into the temple and stole a ruby 
from one of the idol’s eyes. The story had happened about 30 
years before! 

7. Fr. Bouchet, 8.J., writing from Pondicherry (April 19, 
1719) reproduces part of Tavernier’s description of eS idol, and 
suggests that the other things he relates (the theft of a ruby, 


of France. 
aimed at. Coming so 


iding the stone in a gash in his thigh, 

brought it from the mines of Parkat to Madina 

ane Anquetil du Perron, passing through Puri on June 6. 
» was told that the idol’s eyes consisted of a ruby and a 

carbuncle and that a Dutchman had stolen the rub 


ry . 7: 
es ave also compared with these stories four eatlier ones 
hailing from other places, 


Vol. IX, No. 11.] The Pitt Diamond. 455 
[N.S.] 


According to Alberiini, an idol at Multan had two precious 
stones in its eyes. 

e Jesuits relate in 1604 that the idol of Mahesse 
(Maheswar ?) of Diu had had its eyes (consisting, probably, of 
precious stones) gouged out by a Portuguese soldier. 
inally, Faria y Sousa describes an idol seized at Calicut 
by the Portuguese in 1502, which had two emeralds in its eyes 
and a large ruby on its breast. Another idol at Cranganor had 
three rubies on its forehead. The two passages in Faria y 
Sousa bear some resemblance to Tavernier’s description of the 
Jagannath idol. 


eS 8 Oe Oe ss 


A REPORT ON THE BIOLOGY OF THE 
LAKE OF TIBERIAS. 
TuirD SERIES. 


List of Subjects dealt with in Third Series. 


Page 
Planarians ge ; .. R. H. Whitehouse, M.Sc, .. 459 
Molluses a & .. H. B. Preston .. .- 465 
Aquatic and Semi-aquatic Rhynchota .. Dr. G. Horvath a«. S47 


The first series of papers in this Report was published in Vol. IX, 
No. 1, of this Journal, pp. 17-88 (1913); the second series in the same 
Volume, No. 6, pp. 111-258 (1913). 


49. The Planarians of the Lake of Tiberias. 
By R. H. Wuirrnovuss, M.So., Queen’s University, Belfast. 
Communicated by Dr. N. ANNANDALE. 


(Plate XXVI). 


. One o 
them, Planaria tiberiensis, was obtained in three localities, viz. 
from ‘‘a small brackish spring running into the lake near 


and from ‘‘a pool near Ain-et-Tineh, under stones.’’ 
second species (Planaria salina) was obtained from ‘‘ the lower 
surface of stones in saline water near et-Tabghah’’; while the 
third (Planaria barroisi) was taken from the edge of the Lake at 
Tiberias. 


year they lack sexual organs and reproduce by fission. Thus 
when only non-sexual individuals are available, their identifica- 
ays remain uncertain, and the matter cannot be 
finally settled until periodic observations can be made. 
of the animals in this collection were non-sexual, and 
thus their identification is at present only provisional ; but it 
is hoped that the descriptions and figures given will be a useful 
foundation for any future periodic work that may be attempted 
at the Lake of Tiberias. 


Planania tiberiensis, n. sp. (Pl. xxvi, figs. 1 to 4.) 


This species was collected in three localities, two near 
Mejdal and one near Ain-et-Tineh. The only difference 
between the animals from these collections was that the ees 
ity taken from the spring at Mejdal were smaller than in the 
other collections, which merely indicated that most of them 
were younger specimens. i 

e a length of the animals from the brackish 


trunk 13mm ‘ ‘ 
when apparently full grown. The specimens from the spring 


460 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [December, 1913. 


running into the lake at Magdala were much smaller and 
measured slightly under 3 mm. in length and barely half a milli- 
metre in breadth. However one specimen measured 5°7 mm. 
and another 4 mm., while one attained a length of only 2:4 mm. 

Dorsally, the colour in spirit is a dull and rather dark 
brown, and evenly distributed; the ventral surface is some. 
what paler in colour than the dorsal, though the difference is 
not very marked ; in fact in many cases the colour was similar 
on both sides. ! 


blunt anterior end; as a result of the lappets a well-marked 
neck region is present. In the collection taken from the spring 
at Mejdal the form of the head in most cases was semicircular 


_ Careful search has been made to detect the presence of 
auricular sense organs (lateral sensory grooves) on the side of 
the head, but they could not be detected with certainty on the 
whole animal. Serial sections however revealed these structures 


Dr. Annandale informs m : Be ee ; 
@ that the animals were dark rey in colour 
_ eanented, but that the fixative had the effect of chain the 
erey to brown. The fixative used was that recommended by Steinmana 


—30 ce. str itri : : : 
40 cv. dist. war a acid, 30 ec. concentrated corrosive sublimate and 


Vol. [X, No. 11.] The Planarians of the Lake of Tiberias. 46% 
[N.S.] 


cedarwood oil. The pharynx normally occupies the middle of 
the body, but its position may vary considerably; such varia- 
tion is easily explained if the animal reproduces by transverse 
fission. for, at least in other species where this method is 
adopted, the constriction occurs immediately posterior to the 
mouth of the parent. The mouth is the only aperture present. 


gut were not so wide and appeared only as a delicate ramify- 
ing system. 

It is particularly interesting to trace the course of the 
digestive system in the bifurcated caudal region of the speci- 
men which showed this feature prominently. A glance at fig. 
4, which was drawn with the aid of a camera lucida, shows: 
that at the level of the mouth a well-marked branch is given 
off from the main posterior lateral branch, thus fully providing 
for the nutrition of this secondary part; moreover, this subsi- 
diary gut will be seen to form a definite forking a little beyond 
half-way along its course in strong resemblance to that of the 
main body. Further, sectionizing proved that the nervous 
system was represented in the ‘‘limb’’ in the typical way, viz. 
by two lateral nerves. Without asserting it to be the case, the 
suggestion nevertheless occurs to one that a new individual 


It has already been remarked that no trace of reproduc- 
tive organs could be found; it must be concluded therefore 
that fission in some form occurs, at any rate at some period. 


Planaria salina, n. sp. (Pl. xxvi, figs. 5 & 6.) 

his species was collected in saline water near et-Tabghah. 
on an average 

25mm. and 1 mm. in length and breadth reapece Yo s 

largest was 3-2 mm in length and 1 mm. in breadth, were of 

smallest attained only a length of 1:6 mm. and a breadth o 

‘8mm. 

In colour they are distinctly pale; 

b 


The short head is typically —— and preg i ern 
: i a neck; 

k, with no oe just behind the 
head, but it can scarcely be called a neck in the same sense ae 
in the previous species. 
rounded anteriorly. : 

e eyes sie a forward position in the body, though 


462 Journal of the Asiatic Socrety of Bengal. (December, 1913. 


relatively far back on the head, being in Jine with the angle 
formed at the junction of the head and the trunk; they are 
closer to one another than to the side of the body, and no 
pigmentless area is distinguishable round them. 

The auricular sense organs are not visible in the whole 
animal, but in section they are present as a patch of ciliated 
epidermis, devoid of rhabdites, with an underlying nervous 
felt-work situated at about the level of the eyes. 

As a rule the animal tapers rather suddenly to a blunt 
point posteriorly. The gut is varied in appearance, sometimes 


lobate terminations to fine branches. The pharynx varies in 
position from the middle to almost the posterior extremity. 
Gonads are completely absent. 


Planaria barroisi, n. sp. (Pl. xxvi, fig. 7.) 


Among the Palestine collection was a planarian which 
probably corresponds to the ‘‘ planaire noire indéterminée”’ 
referred to by Barrois! as being found in the Lake of Tiberias. 

nly a single specimen was collected, and from its brittle and 
contorted body appears to have been dead when collected; in 


Beas auricular sense organs are very clearly seen as elon 

gated clear areas exactly on the lateral head lobes. 

2 p mouth, the only aperture on the ventral side, is placed 

Speier: Pipripiid end, and in front of it is the pharynx, 

is to ha a and °5 mm. wide, no trace of reproductive organs 
In colour, dorsall : 

. » dorsally the animal is a very dark brown, 
pd gi black in spirit ; ventrally the colour is somewhat 
aa _-t appears to be quite a distinct species from P. tibert- 

, Snce its size, colour and particularly the prominence and 


' Th. Barrois, * Contributi s : ES 
: : > ution & |’étud de Syrie- 
Revue Biologique du nord de Ja France T 1. hove eon ges 


Vol. IX, No. 11.] The Planarians of the Lake of Tiberias. 463 
[N.S.] 


form of the auricular sense organs are quite unlike those of this 
species. 


EXPLANATION OF PLATE XXVI. 


Figures 1, 5 and 7 were drawn by the aid of Bausch and 


Lomb’s projection drawing apparatus ; figures 2, 3,4 and 6b 
camera lucida. 


Fic. 1.—Planaria tiberiensis as seen when cleared in cedar- 
wood oi E 


> 


nlarged 12 times. 

2.Form of head in same species, showing position and 
form of auricular sense organs (a. s. 0.) Enlarged 
20 times. 

3.Form of the head of a young specimen of the same 
species. Enlarged 16 times. 

4.—Bifurcated caudal region of a specimen of the same 
species showing the course of the gut in the branch 
(to left of figure) ; ph. pharynx; g. gut; s. subsidiary 
lobe; m. main trun 

5.—Planaria salina as seen when cleared in cedar-wood 
il. Enlarged 16 times. 

6.—Outline of another specimen of same species. 

7.—Head region of Pianaria barroisi as seen when cleared 
in cedar-wood oil. Enlarged 12 times. 


Journ.,As Soc. Beng.,Vol. IX,1913. Plate XXVIL. 


5x 16. 


PLANARIANS FROM PALESTINE. 


so. A Molluscan Faunal List of the Lake of Tiberias, 
with Descriptions of new Species. 


By H. B. PREsToN. 
(Plate X XVII.) 


The following paper is the result of a request by Dr. N. 
Annandale to identify an extensive collection of mollusca re- 
cently collected by him in the Lake of Tiberias. giving at the 
same time a molluscan faunal list of the Lake with the geogra 
phical distribution of each species. 

The student of fluviatile and lacustrine mollusca willat once 
be struck by either the total absence or paucity in number of 
the thinner and more fragile genera, such as Limnea, Physa, 
Ancylus, Pisidium, etc., while the heavier, ‘‘ shelly ’’ forms 
such as Unio, Theodoxis, and Corbicula appear to be well repre- 
sented, a fact which is probably due to a surfeit of suspended 
mineral matter in the waters of the Lake. 

The species enumerated are given on the faith of the 
various authorities who have been consulted in the compilation 
of the list, but the author himself in no way vouches for their 
specific validity, as many of them (notably those of Messieurs 
Bourguignat and Lozard) have not been accessible to him. 


onclusion the author wishes to proffer hanks to 
his friends Mes ude C. Legassicke-Crespin, to 
he former for much useful bibliozraphical assist and t 


Family LIMNAIDAE. 
1. Limnza auricularia (Linné). 


Distribution: Northern Europe, Siberia; two specimens 
which I am unable to separate from this species were collected 
by Dr. Annandale at the north end of the Lake; | am unable 
to find any other record of its having been collected in the 
Syrian Lakes. 

[Those specimens were taken, with those of Physa tiberia- 
densis, in filamentous algae in a boat submerged in the R. Jordan 
at its entry into the lake.—N. Annandale.] 


466° Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. {December, 1913. 


2. Limnaea virginea, sp. n. 


(Plate XXVII, fig. 1.) 


inflated, marked with oblique growth striae only ; suture im- 


direction, diffused above into an outwardly spreading, well 
defined, parietal callus which reaches to the upper margin of the 
labrum ; labrum acute ; aperture very large, broad and some- 
what dilated below. 

Alt. 5°75, diam. maj. 4, diam. min. 3 mm. 

Aperture: alt. 4:5, diam. 2°75 mm. 

Hab.—Semakh to exit of the River Jordan (Type) ; also 
W.-es Semakh (young specimens only) (Annandale). 


. 


in about 6 metres of water in the 


Family PHYSIDAE. 
3. Physa tiberiadensis, sp. n. 
(Plate XXVII, fig. 2.) 


Shell ovate, perforate, dark brown ; whorls 4 rapidly increas- 
ing, convex, shouldered above, the last large, marked with rather 
coarse, transverse growth striae; suture impressed ; umbilicus 
deep, moderately wide ; columella margin what vitreous, out- 
wardly expanded and reflexed, rather vertically descending, 
extending above into a thickish, well defined, parietal callus 
which joins it with the upper margin of the labrum and gives 
to this almost the appearance of being continuous; labrum 
simple, slightly dilated at the base and very slightly bent 
inwards over the aperture above ; aperture ovate. 

Alt. 13°75, diam. maj. 9, diam min. 7 mm 

Aperture : alt. 7:5, diam. 5:5 mm. 

Hab.—Mouth of River Jordan, N. end of Lake of Tiberias. 
among algae. (Annandale). 


Family MELANIIDAE. 
4. Meélania tuberculata, Miill. 
: Mousson, Cog. Terr. Prof. Roth, Zurich, 1861, pp. 60-61, sp- 
Generally distributed throughout Southern Asia, N. and 


N. E. Africa, N. Australia and the Mala i 
1S Malay Archipelago. 
Off the Jewish cemetery near Tiberias in 84 metres ; 8S. end 


Vol. 1X, No. 11.] Molluscan Faunal List of L. of Tiberias, 467 
[N.8.] 


of Lake of Tiberias off Semakh in 4-5 metres; bed of Jordan 
at its exit from the Lake (dead specimens): between the exit of 
the River Jordan and Semakh, south end of the Lake (4-6 
metres) (Annandale). 


4a, Var. elongata, Locard. 


Arch. Mus. Hist. Nat., Lyon, iti, 1883, pp. 225-226. 
Occurring generally with the ty pica form. (Annandale). 


of from 4 to & metres. ’ De ad wells are sebaule common in 
the R. Jordan at its exit from the lake.—N. Annandale.] 


5 M. ies. Noress. ( ?=tuberculata, Mill.) 


Tristram, Proc. Zool. Soc., London, 1865, p. 541. 
Lake of Tiberias (Mousson, Tristram). 


6. Melanopsis costata. Oliv. 


Distribution : Spain, N. Africa, Syria. Dr. Annandale’s 
collection contains examples from Tabghab, Mejdal, Wad-es- 
Semakh, Ain-et-Tineh and Lake of Tiberias generally, also from 
the River Jordan at its exit from the Lake and asingle specimen 
of rather large size from a small mineral spring at Dalmanutha 

near Tiberias. 
is mollusc is extremely abundant in the lake, ps puaaed 
near the shore; it is found as deep as 22 met 
Annandale.| 
6a, Vor: jordanica, Roth. 


= R. Roth, Moll. species, 1839, p. 25, Pl. IL, figs. 12-13. 
River Jordan (Roth, Tristram, Locard) ; Lake of Homs 
(Locard) ; Lake of Tiberias (Barrois). 


6b. Var. degenerata, var. n. 
(Plate X XVII, fig. 9.) 


iflering from the typical form in its much smaller size 

and in being proportionately mach narrower ; it is also of a 
uniform purplish black iets 

Alt. 8°25, diam. maj. 4m 

Aperture : alt. 4, diam. re 

Hab.— Lake of gh me at the exit of see Jordan (Annan- 
dale). 

7, M. buccinoidea, Oliv. 


Locard, Arch. Mus. Hist. Nat., Lyon, Vol. U1, pp. 204- 205. 
Syria generally. 


468 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [December, 1913. 


8. M. praerosa, Lin. 


Dautzenberg, Rev, Biol. Nord France, 1894, pp. pe” 

Generally distributed throughout Syria. Dr. andale 
procured specimens trom Tabghah, Mejdal, etc. : eet in quan- 
tity from a small mineral spring ~ ees near Tiberias 
and from the Barada River, Damas 

[Much more abundant in Aitining ‘water than in stagnant. 
—N. Annandale.] 


Family HY DROBIIDAE. 
9. Pyrgula barroisi, Dtz. 


Dautzenberg, Rev. Biol. Nord France, 1894, pp. 345-346. 
Lake of ‘Tiberias | Barrois) ; exit of Jordan from Lake of 
Tiberias (dead specimens only). (Annandale). 


10. Bithinia badiella, Parr. 


Dautzenberg, T. C. pp. 347-348 

Lake of Homs; Nahr el Tebeath : Tell el Kadi; Stream 
at Damascus ; marshes of Ain. él Musaieh ; Lake of Tiberias 
(Barrois). Lake of Tiberias, on lower surface of stones ; exit 
of River Jordan from the Lake, and from a small dirty pool 
near the east shore of the Lake. ~(Annandale). 


[Not uncommon under stones at the edge of the lake. 
—N. Annandale} 


ll. Bithinia gennesaretensis, sp. n. 


(Plate XXVIIT, fig. 8.) 


Shell perforate, ovately fusiform, semitransparent, polished, 


shining, pale reddish yellow; whorls s 44, rather rapidly 1 InCreas” 
ing, convex, marked with ens 


; m simple, dilated below ; aperture 
ovate; operculum calcareous, white, mitltilaminiferous, with 
central nucleus. 
It. 7, diam, maj. 4-25, diam. min. 375 mm. 
Aperture; alt. 3, diam. 2 
ab. 


—Semakh to exit of Jordan. Lake of Tiberias. 
(Annandale). 


nly taken in the channel of the Jordan in the lake.—N- 
Annandale.) 


Vol. IX, No. 11.] Molluscan Faunal List of L. of Tiberias. 469 
[V.S.]} 


12. Bithinia semakhensis, sp n 
(Plate XX VIL, fig. 3.) 


Shell ovately fusiform, smooth; whorls 4, regularly increas- 
ing, moderately convex, marked with transverse growth lines 
and on the upper whorls showing traces of spiral striation ; 
suture impressed ; columella curved especially above; labrum 
simple, continuous; aperture obliquely ovate. 

Alt. 4:5, diam. maj. 2 5, diam. min. 2°25 mm. 

Aperture: alt. 2, diam. 1:25 mm. 

Hab.—Wad-es-Semakh, edge of Lake of Tiberias, from a 
small dirty pool. (Annandale). 

When the Lake is full, the pool in which this species was 
found must be joined to it.—N. Annandale | 


13. Bithinella contempta, Dautzenberg. 


Rev. Biol. Nord France, 1894, p. 348. 

Nahr-el-Haroun; Zerraa: marshes of Ain-el-Musaieh; 
stream at Damascus; ford across the Jordan at EI-Tell (Bar- 
rois); Mejdal, Lake of Tiberias. (Annandale). 


14. Bithinella annandalei, sp. n. 
(Plate X XVII, fig. 6.) 


ing, smooth, without sculpture; suture lightly impressed , 
broadly margined below; columella gently curved, diffused 
above into a well-defined, parietal callus which reaches to the 
upper margin of the labrum ; labrum simple, somewhat dilated 
the base; aperture sub-elliptical. 

Alt. 1:75 diam. maj. 1 mm. 

Hab.—Ain-et-Tineh (Type), also octagonal pool at et-Tab- 
ghah and Mejdal, Lake of Tiberias. (Annandale). 


15. Bithinella syngenes, Sp. 0. 
(Plate XX VII, fig. 7.) 


mm. 
Hab.—Ain-et-Tineh, Lake of Tiberias, from small pool. 
(Annandale). 


470 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [December, 1913. 


16. Bithinella galilaeae, sp. n. 
(Plate XXVII, fig. 5.) 


Shell imperforate, fusiform with acuminate spire, greenish ; 
whorls 6, regularly increasing, flattish, marked with closely set, 
transverse striae; suture impressed; columella descending in 
an oblique curve; extending above into a well-defined, perietal 
callus which reaches the upper margin of the labrum; labrum 
acute, slightly dilated below and bent inwards over the aper- 
ture above; aperture ovate. 

Alt. 3°75, diam. maj. 2 mm. (nearly). 
Hab.—Wad-es-Semakh, Lake of Tiberias, in stream (N. 
Annandale). 

17. Bithinella vexillum, sp. n. 
(Plate XXVII, fig. 4.) 


Shell moderately small, perforate, fusiformly conic, dark 
yellowish brown painted with narrow, equidistant, transverse 
bands of reddish chestnut; whorls 5, the first two small, the 
last three large in proportion, the last convex and bearing traces 
of microscopic, spiral striae; suture impressed; umbilicus 
somewhat narrow, deep; columella strongly arched above, 
gently curved below with erect, though slightly bent, margin 
extending above into a thick, well defined, parietal callus which 


unites it with the upper margin of the labrum; labrum simple; 
aperture ovate. 
Al 


t. 2°5, diam. maj. 175 mm. 
Hab.—Octagonal pool at et-Tabghah. (N. Annandale). 


Family VALVATIDAE. 
18. Valvata saulcyi, Brgt 


Dautzenberg, Rev. Biol. Nord France, 1894, p. 349. 
Birket- Kosseir ; Homs; marshes of Orontes; Lake of 
Yamotneh ; stream at Damascus (Barrois). 


Family NERITIDAE. 
19. Theodoxis jordani (Sow ). 
Dautzenberg, T-C., pp. 349—351. 
Lake of Homs; Ain Mallahah; Lake of Houleh; El-Tell, 


Vol. 1X, No. 11.] Molluscan Faunal List of L. of Tiberias. 471 
[N.S.] 


20. T. michoni (Brgt). 
yaar Arch. Mus. Hist. Nat., Lyon, Vol. Il], pp. 283— 
4. 


-el-Min, Syria; Tell-el-Kadi  Nahr-el-Heroun; Ain- 
Mellahat El-Tell, River Jordan; stream at Damascus ; Ras el; 
Ain, near Naplouse: Bir Jalotid; Ain-es-Sultan ; Ain- Feschkah- 
Ain-Rhoneir ; Ain- Djeddi (Barrois) : Ain-et- Tineh, Lake of 


dale). Some of the specimens collected by Dr. Annandale, 
especially those from the exit of the Jordan, would appear to 
ink up this and the preceding species, from which it would 
seem that the one is merely an extreme form of the other. 


21. T. bellardi (Mouss.). 
Mousson, Cog. Terr., Prof. Roth, Zurich, 1861, pp. 60-61, 
sp. 64. 
Valley of B’ka, between Lebanon and Anti- Lebanon (Type) ; 
Lake of Tiberias. 
Family UNIONIDAE. 
22. Unio requieni, Mich. 
Mousson, Cog. Terr., Prof. Roth, Ziirich, 1861, pp. 66-67, 
sp. 73. 
Entire circummeditteranean Region. 
23. U. pietri, Locard. 
Arch. Mus. Hist. Nat., Lyon, Vol. U1, pp. 210-2 
Lake of Tiberias (Lortet) : Lake of Tiberias Al exit of 
River Jordan from the lake (Annandale. ) 
24. U. tiberianensis, Let. 
Locard, 7'.C., pp. 216-217. 
Lake of Tiberias (Letourneux). 
25. U. tristrami, Loc. 


T.C., pp. 209-210. 
Lake of Tiberias (Lortet). North end of the Lake o 
Tiberias at the mouth of the River Jordan (Annandale). 


26. U. terminalis, Brgt. 


Bour sch at Test. Nov. Saulcy, 1852, p. 31, No. 9; Cat. 
rais. Moll. Terr. Fluv. Sauley, Paris, 1853, pp: 76-17, pl. TH, 
figs. 4-6, 


472 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [|December, 1913. 


Lake of Tiberias (Dr. Sauley, Annandale). oe 

By far the greater part of Dr. Annandale’s collection is 
composed of the present species, the series ranging from quite 

young x eS to what are apparently adult and whic’ corres- 
pond in every way to specimens in the British Museum labelled 
as having been collected by Dr. Tristram in the Lake of 
Tiberias. Bourguignat’s figures are of somewhat larger shells, but 
in all other respects they agree absolutely with the above. 

The following are the dimensions of Dr. Annandale’s 
largest specimen taken with many smaller examples at the 
exit of the R. Jordan 

Long. 35°25, lat. 62, diam. 28°25 m 

[Occurs in the lake at depths of Born less than 1 to over 22 
metres.—N. Annandale.] 


27. U. jordanicus, Brgt. 

Mousson, Coq. Terr., Prof. Roth. Ziirich, a p. 66, sp. 72. 
River Jordan (de Saulcy) ; Lake of Tiberia 
28. U. zabulonicus, Bret. 

Locard, Arch. Mus. Nat. Hist., Lyon, Vol. III, pp. 220- 


‘Lake of Tiberias (Letourneux). 


29. U. prosacrus, Bret. 
TG ¢ 
Lake of Tiberias (Lortet, Letourneux, Annandale). 


30. U. littoralis, Lk. 


Mousson , Cog. Terr., Prof. Roth. Ziirich, 1861, p. 64, sp. 70. 
Southern Europe ; Asia Minor ; Syria ; Morocco, Algiers. 


31. U_ ellipsoideus, Bret. 


Locard, Arch. Mus. Hist. Nat., Lyon, Vol. ILI, pp. 211-212. 
Lake of Tiberias (Bourguignat ): 


32 U. genezarethanus, Let 
T'.0.5 park 
Lake of Tiberias (Letournenx). 


33. U. rothi, Bret. 
1.0. pp. 2 
Lake of Tiberias (Roth. ); River Jordan (Lortet). 


Vol. IX, No. 11] Molluscan Faunal List of L. of Tiberias. 473 
[V.8.] 


34, U. simonis, Tristrami. 


Proc. Zool. Soc., London, 1865, p. 544. 
Recorded from Lake of Tiberias; River Jordan, River 
Orontes ; River Leontes ; Lake of Antioch: also ‘‘ off Semakh ”” 


ale 
he several specimens obtained from the Lake by Dr. 
Annandale, though showing slight variation can all undoubted- 
ly be referred to this species. 
[The beautiful pink iridescence of the nacre fades con- 
siderably in a short time.—N. Annandale.] 


35. U. galilaei, Loc. 


Locard, Arch. Mus. Nat. Hist., Lyon, Vol. III, pp. 206-207. 
Lake of Tiberias (Lortet, Letourneux) ; off Semakh and 
from Semakh to the exit of the River Jordan, etc. (Annandale). 


36. U. raymondi, Brgt. 
T.C., pp. 208-209. 
Lake of Tiberias (Bourguignat). 

37. U. lorteti, Locard. 
T.C., pp. 215-216. 
Lake of Tiberias (Lortet, Letourneux). 

38 Unio chinnerethensis, sp. n. 
(Plate X XVII, figs. 10, i 0a.) 


Shell elongately ovate, rather thin, pale yellowish olive, both 
valves marked with concentric growth lines, obliquely angled 
in a posterior direction from the umbones downward and 


474 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [December, 1913. 


Long. 23°5, lat. 39°5, diam. 16°5 mm 
Hab.—Lake of Tiberias (Annandale). 


Family CYRENIDAE. 
39. Corbicula fluminalis (Mull.). 
Bourguignat, Cat. rais. Moll. Terr. Fluv. Saulcy., Paris 
1853, p. 79. 
Distribution: Southern Asia, North, East, West and Central 
Africa. Taken by Dr. Annandale at Mejdal, Wad-es- Semakh, 


from Semakh to a. exit of the River Jordan and other locali- 
ties in the Lake of Tiberias 


40. C. cor. Lk. 


Tristram, Proc. Zool. Soc., London, 1865, p. 5 
River Jordan, Lake of Huleh - - Lake of TE ike "ice 


41. C, crassula (Mousson). 

Mousson, Cog. Terr. Fluv. Bellardi, 1854, p. 54, pl. XU. 

Lebanon : also Lake of Tiberias (Annan dale 

Dr. Annandale’s collection contains a number of specimens 
which agree very well with Mousson’s t cimen in the 

iti useum, of which the dimensions, together with those 

Pa ac Annandale’s largest and smallest specimens, are as 
) 


Long. Lat. Diam. 
Type ‘ 13-5 13 10°75 mm. 
Largest .. 25 24 19°25 mm. 
Smallest .. 12°5 13 9-75 mm. 


@ species may sy possibly ultimately prove to be but 
a variety of the preceding 


42. C. syriaca, Bret. 
Locard, Arch. Mus. Nat. Hist., Lyon, Vol I11, pp. 223-224. 


Shore at Tiberias ( Annandale). The species is ‘also recorded 
from Antioch and Hom 


43, C. feliciani, Bret. 


Lake of Tiberias, a single specimen, agreeing with the 
figures of this species, collected by Dr. Annandale. 


Vol. 1X, No. 11.] Molluscan Faunal List of L. of Tiberias. 475 
[V.S.] 


EXPLANATION OF PLATE XXVII. 


Limnaea virginea, sp. nov. 
Physa tiberiadensis, sp. nov. 
Bithinia semakhensis, sp. nov. 
Bithinella vexillum, sp. nov. 
Bithinella galilaeae, sp. nov. 
Bithinella annandalei, sp. nov. 
Bithinella syngenes, sp. nov. 
», 8. Bithinia gennesaretensis, sp. nov. 
», 9. Melanospsis costata, Oliv., var. degenerata, nov. 
Fies.10,10a. Unio chinnerethensis, sp. nov. 


aS St G8 tO 


Journ. As. Soc. Beno. Vol. IX, 1913. PLATE XXVII. 


Fig. ¥, 


Fig. 2. 


Fig.3. Fig.5. 


NEW SHELLS FROM THE LAKE OF TIBERIAS. 
-$ of India Offices, Caleutta.151¢. 
Photogravure-Survey rs 


Aquatic and semi-aquatic Rhynchota from the Lake 
of Tiberias and its immediate vicinity. 


on 


By Dr. G. Horvata. 
(Communicated by Dr. N. ANNANDALE.) 


(With 2 figures.) 


genus Gerris—79 specimens of aquatic and semi-aquatic Rhyn- 
chota. These represent 21 species, three of which are new 
to science, viz. Ochterus strigicollis, Micronecta annandalet and 
perparva. | 
This small collection shows, in general. the clraracters of 
the South- European fauna, but it bears in some respects those 


Rhagovelia nigrians Burm., a widespread species in the E 
pian and Oriental regions, is confined in the Palaearctic © 
to Syria and Egypt. Ranatra vicina Sign. described originally 
from Egypt and recorded since from South Persia and the 
Western parts of the Ethiopian region 
hitherto not known from Syria. 


Semi-aquatic species. 


1. Hebrus pusillus Fall.—Edge of the Lake of Tiberias, 
under stones, 2 ¢ ¢,1 2; Wad-es-Semakh, 2 2 °- ; 
__ 2: Mesovelia vittigera Horv.—Plain of Gennesaret, | ? ; 
Tiberias, 1¢. Both specimens apterous. ee 
. Dipsocoris alienus H. Sch.—Edge of the Lake of Tiberias, 
under stones, | 3. 
ro 4. Hydrometra stagnorum L.—Wad-es-Semakh, |! apter- 
us 9. 


Gerr g 
: __Plain of Gennesaret, 29 ,; 
erris paludum Fabr. — - pees. bee 


nymphs, Wad-es-Semakh, 1 3, 2 
See ee 


types of these species will be preserved in the Indian Museum. 
Oras Ak ‘ 


478 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [December, 1913. 


belong to the brachypterous form, with the elytra reaching 
about to the middle of the abdomen. 

6. Limnogonus aegyptiacus Put.—Plain of Gennesaret, 
23¢,2 929. All the specimens are apterous with the meso- 
and metanotum and the abdomen above shining black. The 
abdomen of the 9° 9 is marked above in the middle with a 
very narrow longitudinal yellow line. 

. Naboandelus bergevini Berg.—Plain of Gennesaret, 
1 ¢.91; Wad-es-Semakh, 2 9 °. 

8. Rhagovelia nigricans Burm.—Plain of Gennesaret, 
82 2; Wad-es-‘Semakh, 1 9: mouth of Jordan, 1 9. The 
two latter specimens are macropterous, the others apterous. 

. Microvelia pygmaea Duf.—Plain of Gennesaret, 1 2 ; 
Wad-es Semakh, 1 °. 

10. Patapius spinosus Rossi var. nigriceps Horv.—Edge 
of the Lake of Tiberias, under stones, 1 ¢. This variety is 
known only from Syria. 

11. Hrianotus lanosus Duf. —Edge of the Lake of Tiberias, 
under stones, 2 9 9. 

12. Acanthia variabilis H.-Sch. var. connectens Horv.—Wad- 
es-Semakh 1 g. The single specimen differs from the European 
form in the shorter hairs of the surface, the shorter antennae 
, a8 well as in the less produced membrane: the 


mesocorium, but limited to the ectocorium ; 
the black colour of the femora is more extended. 


' hierus strigicollis n. sp.—Niger, opacus; capite 


vergentibus, ab antic 
articulis duo 
atiore 


margineque angusto postico versus latera flavo-testaceis, 
macula illa nigro-punctata, marginibus lateralibus explanatis 
0 edium striola obliqua 


tt 

is ornatis, margine laterali maculis quatuor 

estaceis notato, membrana glauco-consperss ; 
anguste albido-marginatis ; pedibus albido- 
nigris, tibiie postage eee ame femorum, tibiarum et tarsorum 

srs, tiblis posticis spinulis obscure testaceis, e punctis nigris 
nascentibus praeditis, Long. 54 mill. 

ad-es Semakh, 1 9. : 

“ PP os from O. marginatus Latr. in the more prominent 

ead, the less elevated eyes, the somewhat narrower, less 
tounded margins of the pronotum, which are marked only with 


Vol. IX, No. 11.] Aquatic and semi-aquatic Rhynchota. 479 
[N.8. 


a pale oblique streak (fig. 1), and the narrowly pale-margined 
anterior acetabulae. 

The laminately ampliated lateral margins of the pronotum 
of O. marginatus Latr. are broader, more rounded and almost 
entirely pale, black only at the anterior angle (fig. 2). The 
exterior angle of the eyes, seen from before, is more elevated 
than the vertex. 


Fig. 1.—Ochterus strigicollis n. sp. Fig. 2.—Ochterus marginatus Latr. 
Head and pronotum. Head and pronotum. 


Aquatic species 


14. Ranatra vicina Sign.—Octagonal pool at et-Tabghah, 


de See : 
15. Plea letourneuxi Sign.—Limestone basin at Ain-et- 
Tineh, amidst Ranunculus aquatilis, 4 specimens aa 

mer Anisops producta Fieb.—Plain of Gennesaret,2 ¢ ¢, 

3 9 9: mouth of Jordan,3 ¢ 0,5 2° 

17. Notonecta glauca L.-- Plain of Gennesaret, 1 omen 

18. Arctocorisa hieroglyphica _Duf.—Plain of appar 
1 o ; edge of the Lake of Tiberias, 1 2; Wad-es-Semakh, 
6 ¢,8 22 

19 


: : . ope 
vertice laevigato, medio quam pr be cc etata notato ; pronoto 


i i lavi late 

is, margine scutellari c i 

bus longitudinalibus ee 
i um 

instructo, fossula subcostali longa. ee oe 

elytrorum extensa, membrana elytri sinistri hy : 

4} mi 


‘ad-es-Semakh, in small dirty pool at edge of Lake 


WwW 
: aes M : plicata Costa, but distinguished by the larger 


480 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [December, 1913.] 


size of the body and the almost equai length° of the head and 
pronotum, as well as by the more transverse pronotum, the 

anterior and posterior margins of which are less arcuated. 
: tcronecta isis Horv.—Plain of Gennesaret, 2 ¢ 3, 

2 22; Wad-es-Semakh, 1 °. 

t ta perparva n. sp.—Oblongo-ovata, albida, 
laevigata, glabra, nitidula; capite antrorsum fortiter producto 
quam pronoto fere duplo longiore (12: 7), vertice medio 


° 
= 
5 
& 
et 
° 
in| 
S 
6B 
° 
aad 
° 
om 
- 
fas) 
4 
a 
— 
2) 
=) 
ie] 
~_ 
er 
= 
Q. 
Ll 
=} 
oO 
if] 
= 
Ss) 
5 
@ 
Q. 
_ 
2 
load 
Lar 
oO 
aa 
~ 
— 
Zz 
° 
o 
cr 


optime determinata nigra notato ; scutello distincte transverso : 
elytris striolis nonnullis longitudinalibus fuscescentibus, sed 
obsoletis signatis, sutura clavi angustissime nigra, margine 
costali corii strolis binis nigricantibus notato, fossula subcos- 
tali longa, retrorsum pone medium elytri extensa; femoribus 
et tibiis posticis subtus linea subtilissima percurrente nigra 
pictis, tarsis posticis apice nigris. Long. 1+ mill. . 
Tiberias, on the surface of the lake, at night, 1 ?. 

_ This fine species to be placed near M. capttata Horv. from 
which it differs by the smaller size, the whitish colour of the 
whole surface, the well-determined black line on the hind 
margin of pronotum, the more transverse scutellum and by 
me black lines on the ventral surface of the hind femora and 
ibiae. 


52. NUMISMATIC SUPPLEMENT No. XXI. 


Note. The numeration of the articles below is continued 
from p. 559 of the ‘‘ Journal and Proceedings ’’ 


for 1912. 
(With plates X-XI.) 


122. A FIND OF EPHTHALITE OR Wurie Hun Corns. 


White Hun coins was found at a spot sixteen feet west of the 
main monastery wall. I have been allowed to publish these 
coins, the types of which are in the first of the two plates 
lustrating this paper. 

is probable that the rouleau was originally wrapped in 
or The coins appeared to be of copper, but this turned out 
to be a superficial deposit only, and was easily removed. On 
analysis the coins were found to be silver with a small admix- 
ture of copper. 

The specimens illustrated are ten in number, the reverse 
sides of all exhibiting the usual fire altar and its guardians. 
The first is obviously a double-struck coin, the original being 

to 5 appe m 


Coin No. 7 is different, and bears the Brahmi character cha; 
probably No.6 is the same as No. 7. Coins Nos. 8 and 9 are 
single specimens, while there were four like No. 10. The 
design in the left lower field of No. 10 may be a mere ornament, 
or may be the character thai reversed. 

Coin No. 10 is the only one which appears to have been 
previously published—see Sir A. Cunningham’s monograph on 
the coins of the Ephthalites or White Huns, Plate VIII, No. 14. 
[Num. Chron. piled He describes the legend on the coin as 
i the coins now described 


some kncwn language. I ma 
Greek inscriptions described in Sieghan’ $ paper 


The White Hun symbol PV is prominent on these coins, 
and must have been adopted by the Ephthalites from the 
Sassanians, because this nomad horde had no money or 


482 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [December, 1913. 


written language of its own at the time of its collision with the 
Sassanians, and it was customary for the victorious White 


og very like the planetary symbol =) used by the Indo- 


Parthian king Gondophares. When the Ephthalites invaded 
India they struck coins of Indo-Sassanian types exhibit- 
ing legends in Brahmi characters. So Coins Nos. 2 to 10 
belong to a type intermediate between the Sassanian and Indo- 
Sassanian, as they bear a Brahmi character in the field, but the 
legends have not become Indian. This accords well with their 
find-spot on the Indian Frontier. An interesting and clear 
description of the various types of White Hun coin is contained 
in Mons. E. Drouin’s paper ‘‘ Le type monétaire sassanide et le 
monnayage indien.’’ (Mémoires du Congrés International de 
Numismatique de Paris, 1900). 
I 


now described, which is anew type. It is almost identical with 
the smaller piece, Coins of the White Huns (Cunningham, Num. 
Chron. 1894), Pl. IX, 23, but the inscriptions differ. 
: This is similar to White-King Sale Catalogue, 
Part I, No. 864. The reverse merely consists of the Ephthalite 
symbol within a double circle. It may be a coin of Napki 
Malka—Cp. Cunningham, ‘Coins of the White Huns,” Pl. X, 2. 
No. 138. This coin is akin to the money of Napki Malka. 
It bears the White Hun symbol, and a legend in what may be 
corrupt Greek characters . . . . oshano. 


PLATE X, 


Journ., As. Soc,, Beng,, Vol. 1X,, 1913, 


WHITE HUN COINS. N. §. XXI. ART 122 


PLATE XI. 


Journ., As. Soc., Beng , Vol, IX, 1913. 


2, 
WHITE HUN COINS N. S. XXI. ART 12 


Vol. IX, No. 11.] Numismatic Supplement. 483 
[NV .8.] 


words [Shahi] Jarukha. This is a new name. Coin No. 13, 
Pl. VIII of Cunningham’s “‘ Coins of the White Huns,’’ is a very 
similar piece, but the name on that is Jabula. 

No. 18. Cp. ‘‘ Coins of the White Huns,’’ Plate IX, No. 1. 
Cunningham read the inscription as Vaiga, but it may be 
Khega, or Khege. 

No 


Q 


ae. - ‘*White-King Sale Catalogue,’’ Part I, 
No. 890. The object in front of the bust looks like a closed 
umbrella. There was probably an inscription to tight and left 
of the upper field, but this is off the coin. 

No. 20. An intaglio probably in agate, of good artistic 
execution. The male figure is nude except for a waist-cloth, 
and carries a bow and arrow. To the right is a Kharoshthi 
legend which I read as Sagavatigasa. 

he reverse sides of Coins Nos. 11 to 19, with the excep- 
tion of No. 12, are of the usual Sassanian type. 


R. B. WurteHzapD. 


123. Tar Oxpsst British MURSHIDABAD RUPEE. 


A most difficult problem has always been to distinguish 
the native-fashioned Murshidabad rupees into three series = 

lst—those coined at Murshidabad by the Nawab of Bengal ; 

2nd—the same coined under British control ; and 
3rd—those struck at Calcutta by the Company; all three 
sets bearing the mint-name Murshidabad. 

The latest contribution to this question is, so far I am 
aware, a paper of Mr. H. N. Wright in J.A.S.B. 1904 (Num. 
Suppl. No. 28) which can be resumed as follows :— ae 

(a) Between 1171 and 1176 a.m. the Company's Mint a 


m . 

Murshidabad rupees, did not 
- it seems that no coins were 
bad during this year. 
poses a new riddle ; 


484 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (December, 1913. 


it is a rupee of Murshidabad, fourth regnal year, 1176 a.H. (1762- 
3) in all particulars resembling the piece of Calcutta No. 67, Brit 
Mus. Cat. It is undoubtedly of European fabric, struck froma 
highly polished die, well engraved, perfectiy round and of a 
superior workmanship. Whether it is steuck in a ring or from 
a free die is not easy to decide, the edge having probably beer 
hammered. 


Calcutta Mint, designed after the order to suppress the word 
‘‘Calcutta’’ on the dies of this mint. The pattern and the 


at this date the mint was again, and for ever, removed from 
Murshidabad to Calcutta, 


EK. V. ZAMBAUR, 
Wiener-Neustadt, Austria. 


124. Tur MINT-TOWN ZAIN-UL-BILAD. 


is very small and it has hitherto been 
it, like Zinat-ul-bilad, is an 
epithet or Synonym of Ahmadabad. 

_ Vr. Taylor has pointed out to me that the period during 
which the term is found is entirely unrepresented by any 
coins from Ahmadabad. 

© presumption for the ascription of the epithet to 
Ahmadabad is thus strengthened and an extract from the Mir’ ati 
Ahmadi (Bo Lith. : i 


ad,’ ‘The City of Ahmadabad, the Glory of 
sc, _, OO page 4 of the same edition, it is mentioned that the 
city is also called << Zinat-ul-bilad’? and « ‘Uriis-i-mamlikat ”’ 


Vol. IX, No. 11.] Numismatic Supplement. 485 
[V.S 


(the Bride of the Realm). I have never met with the latter 
epithet. ; 

I have also been shown a Persian document, in which 
Ahmadabad is called <* Baldat-i-Mahfiza Zain-ul-bilad Ahmad- 


and I am told that it is a common thing for documents drawn 
up in Ahmadabad about this period to use the epithet, which 
is the subject of this note. 
A. Masrrr. 
Surat. 


PROCEEDINGS 
For the year 
1915 


JANUARY, 1913. 


he Adjourned Monthly General Meeting of the Society 
was held on Wednesday. the Sth Januarv, 1913, at 9-15 P.M. 


Cotonri G. F. A. Harris, C.8.1., M.D., F.R.C.P..1.MS., 
President, in the chair. 


The following members werg present :— 
Maulavi Abdul Wali, Dr. N. Annandale, Dr. W. A. K. 
Christie, Mr. F. Doxey, Mr. T. P. Ghosh, Mr. F. ‘i. Gravely, Mr. 
G. Graves, Mr. H. H. Hayden, C.I. E., Mr. D. Hooper, Dr. 
C. Hossack, Mr. 8S. W. Kemp, . Indumadhab Mallick, 
an, R. B. Seymour Sewell, I.M.S., Mr. G. Stadler, Dr. Satis 
Chandra Vidyabhusana, Rev. A. W. Young. 
Visitors: —Dr. W. M. Haftkine, Miss A. Karpeles, Miss 
S. Karpeles, and another. 


The minutes of the last meeting were read the confirmed. 
Forty presentations were announced. 


The General Secretary reported the death of Raja Binay 
Krishna Deb Bahadur and Pandit Mohanlal Vishunlal Pandia. 


The Council reported that there was a vacancy in the list of 
Associate members, and therefore recommended Mr. Ekendra- 
nath Ghosh, L.M.S., B.Sc., Asst. Prof. of Biology, Medical Col- 
lege, Calcutta, for election as an Associate member at the 
next meeting. 

ie followiny gentlemen were balloted for as Ordinary 
Members :— # 

Capt. J. H. Burgess, 1.M.S., Government Place, propos 
by Major L. Rogers ive M.S., seconded by Capt. J. D. Sandes, 
[M.S.; Count Karl L. Lurburg, Imperial chanat General for 
Germany, proposed by Dr. N. Annandale, seconded by Mr. 8. W. 
oe i Pod; eb Bar.-at-Law, Jubbulpore, proposed 

Mr. H. Hayden, C.LE., seconded by Dr. -W. A. N 
Chane: Se S. G. ured: CS. vs FR. if : BH i pe by Dr. N. 
Annandale, seconded by Mr. S. W. ‘Kem 

oe following papers were read :— : 

ew Series of the Double SS oh Barium with 


tasik LAL 
Spas of the Hetero-cyclic Ammonium 
Darra and Hartpas SEN, Part I. Foiennieaied by Dr. P. C. 
Ray. 


ii Proceedings of the Asiat. Soc. of Bengal. {Jan., 1913.] 


2. The A-ch’ ang (Maingtha) Tribe of Hohsa-Lahsa, Yunnan. 
By J. Coaain Brown, M.Sc. 
These two papers will be published in a subsequent number 
of the Fin . 


3. Some Noxious Diptera ge eae: By E. BRuNEITI. 
Cabaret be Dr. N. ANNA 

4. A Forgotten Kingdom esd Bengal. By Nattxti 
Kanta BHaTTACHARJEE, M.A. cee catpe by Tue Hon. 
JUSTICE ze AsuTOSH MUKHOPADHYAY 
‘ Jour paper will be published in a locals number of 
the 

Notes on Fishes, Batrachia and Reptiles of the Lake of 

Tiberian By N. Annanvatz, D.Sc., ¥.A.S.B. 


The Adjourned Meeting of the Medical Section of the 
Society was held at the seamed 3 Rooms*on Wednesday, the 
15th January, 1913, at 9-30 p 


Ligut.-Cot. L. Rogers, C.I.E., I.M.S., in the chair. 

The following members were present :-— 

Dr. Sivanath Bhattacharjee, Lieut.-Col. J. T. Calvert, 
I.M.S., Dr. Gopal Chandra Chat a Dr. K. K. Chatterjee 
Dr. H. Finck, = C. R. M. Green, I.M.S., Major E. D. W. 
Grieg, I.M.S., WC. Hossack, Dr. Indumadhab Mallick, 
Major E. A. RB. Meweaba I.M.S., Lt.-Col. F. O’Kenealy, LMS., 
Major J. F. A. Rait, LMS. , Capt. J.D. Sandes, IMS 


Visitors :—Capt. pr Serta wa L M. S., Lieut.-Col. Burke, 
I.M.S., Dr. A. Gupta, Major A. Gwyther, LMS., 


., Capt. 
Lloyd, I.M.S., Dr. G. C. Mitra, Col. W. B. Sutherland, LM.8 
and another 


The minutes of the last meeting were read and confirmed. 


Dr. Chartterj 


rjee showed a large lipomatous tumour removed 
from the scrotum 


m and a case of multiple fibromata. 
Col. Sutherland 


, read a pa Anaphylaxis and pointed 
out its use in practic if ie oe oe P 


al medicine 


. ao Green, Col. O’K Kenealy, Major Rait, Lieut.-Col. Rogers, 
tr. Hossack spoke, and Col. Sutherland replied. 


FEBRUARY, 1913. 


The Annual Meeting of the Society was held on Wednes- 
day, the 5th February, 1913, at 9-15 p.m. 


OLONEL G. F.-A. Harris, C.S.I., M.D., F.B.C.P., I.M.S., 
President, in the chair. 


The following members were present :— 
Maulavi Abdul Wali, Dr. N. Annandale, Mr. J. Coggin 
Brown, Lieut.-Col. W. J. Buchanan, I.M.S., Babu Nilmani 


Kirkpatrick, Mr. W. A. Lee, Rev. W. R. LeQuesne, Mr. D. 
McLean, Hon. Justice Sir Asutosh Mukhapadhyaya, Kt., Dr. 
Girindranath Mukerjee, Major E. A. R. Newman, IMS. Ca apt. 
C. L. Peart, Dr. G. E. Pilgrim, Mahamahopadhyaya Haraprasad 
Sastri, C.I.E., Mr. M. Kazim Shirazi, Mr. G. Stadler, Dr. 
Satis Chandra Vidyabhusana, Rev. A. W. Young. 


Visitors. —Babu Hem Chandra Das-Gupta, Mr. P. Sacisoly, 
Mrs. Newman and others. 


The President ordered the dara hocee of the voting papers 
for the election of Officers and Members of Council for 1913, 
and appointed Messrs. R. D. Mehta ae “F. H. Gravely to be 
scrutineers. 


The President also ordered the distribution of the voting 
papers for the election of Fellows of the Society, and appointed 
Messrs. R. D. Mehta and F. H. Gravely to be scrutineers. 

The President announced that sixteen essays have been 
received in competition for the Elliott Prize for aa 
Research for the year 1912 which have been sent to the i 
tor of Public Instruction, Bengal, on of the Trustees, for 
report, and that the result has not yet been received. 

I 

The President also announced that the vag tie Memoria 
Medal for the year 1913 has been offered to Maj r W. Glen 
Liston, M.D., C.I.E., I-MS. 


The Annual Report was then presented. 


iv Annual Report. [February, 1913. 


(PNNUAL FREPORT FOR 1012. 


The Council of the Asiatic Society has the honour to sub- 
mit the following report on the state a Society’s affairs 
during the year ending 31st December, 19 


Member List. 


The number of Ordinary Members at the close of the year 
was 517. Forty-two Ordinary Members were elected during 
1912. Out of these, 4 have not yet paid their entrance fees. 
The number of Ordinary Members, therefore, added to the list 
is 38. On the other hand 24 withdrew, 8 died oe 8 were 
struck off under Rule 40. 

The numbers of Ordinary Members in the past six years 
are as follows :— 


lees 
PayIne, Non-Payina. | . 
a cera ty lee eg icra gece 
ven |e | og) ce bgeel ee 
Ss | ae & ta ee oR ee z 
eae) 8) 3 |g | € Reel! 3 
} ) | =I | ro) } 
fe | Se ee eas | © 
Prore OE a See Cm eS Ws 
1907 | 174) 176) 290°| 369) 20 30: |" 1 }61 | ae 
1908 .. | 181) 1937 17 | 391| 19 | 38 | 57 | 448 
1909... | 183 | 217| 13 |. 413| 20 | 40 60 473 
| | | 
1910... | 209! 917/ 16 | 4421 93 | 49 66 508 
| 
1911 | 200; 225/ 19 | 444/ 29 | 53 | 75 | 519 
| | 
POLS + | 0908 | 220) 20) deh | ose. 66 | 517 
Engen Wg e bio as 
Wa taltivetn, 


ines Sri Ram Ohahdca Bhunj , Mr. W. H. Hashes, 
IC. hand Bural, hehe Mahendra Nath De, 
ishna Deb, Babu Girish epg aire 
Lif ember), 
wie en st i ea hc 
Bis have ay at ak the death of one Honorary Fellow, 
,» Lord Lister; the nu mber is now 27. 
e number of Special Honorary Centenary Members 
remains unchanged. 
om the list of Associate Members, the name of Mr 
Moore has been 


removed as he died some years ago. The 
number now stands at 13. 


February, 1913.] Annual Report. Vv 


Two members, the Hon. Justice Sir Ashutosh Mukhopa- 
dhyaya, Kt., and Mahamahopadhyaya Haraprasad Shastri, 
I.E., have compounded for their subscriptions during the year. 


Indian Museum. 


During the year there’ has been no change in the Society’s 
Trusteeship and the Hon. Justice Sir Ashutosh Mukhopadhyaya, 
Kt., C.S.1., DSc., F.R.A.S., F.R.S.E., continues to be a 
member of the Board of Trustees of the Indian Museum on 
behalf of the Society under the Indian Museum Act X of 1910. 

The Hon. Sir William Duke, K.C.I.E., presented to the 
Society fifteen sculptures from the grounds at Belvedere, and the 
Council has presented them to the Indian Museum for exhibi- 
tion in the Archaeological Court in accordance with the provi- 
sions of the Indian Museum Act. 

On a suggestion by the Director of the Geological Survey of 
India, the Council has agreed to the disposal of certain mineral 
specimens belonging to the Society, with other collections pre- 
pared for distribution to educational institutions, as loans from 
the Society. 

Deputations, 


Mr. G. H. Tipper, the General Secretary, represented the 
Society at the 250th Anniversary of the Royal Society of Lon- 
d 


Finance. 


The accounts of the Society are shown in the Appendix 
under the usual heads. Statement No. XII contains the 
Balance Sheet of the Society and of the different funds ad- 

inistered through it. 
mThe Credit Ralnice of the Society at the close of the year 
was Rs. 2,32,334-7-8 against Rs. 2,32,014-1-4 at the close of 
the preceding year. 

"The Budget for 1912 was estimated at the following 
figures :— 

Receipts a yo eee: ri 
Expenditure .. oe , 

The Budget estimate of receipts excludes «* Admission 

Fees ’’ and ‘‘ Compounded Subscriptions. 


vi Annual Report. [February, 1913. 


8 compounded subscriptions. The sum of Rs. 1,400 
has been credited to the Permanent Reserve Fund, which now 
stands at Rs. 1,63,350. The receipts have exceeded the 
estimate under the heads of ‘Sale of Publications,’’ ‘* Rent 

f Room,’’ and “ Miscellaneous ’’ by Rs. 610, Rs. 50, and 
Rs. 171, respectively. The “‘ Sale of Publications ’’ has been 
increased owing tc demands for back numbers of the Society’s 
publications. by various libraries and individuals; ‘‘Rent of 
Room ”’ 


rent for the month of December 1911 from the Automobile 
Association of Bengal; ‘Miscellaneous ’’ is higher owing to the 
sum of Rs. 100 being voluntarily contributed to the Library 

Ahm usain Khan Bahadur of 
Partabgarh, and Rs. 90 being realized from Mr. B. N. De, the 
‘tag of a typed copy of the manuscript of Tajul Maasir damaged 
y him. 


The receipts have fallen short. of the estimate under the 
head of ‘‘ Subscriptions for the Society’s Journal and Proceed- 
Ings and Memoirs,’’ owing to non-payment of subscriptions. 

_ Inthe Budget, the expenditure was estimated at Rs. 28,188 
distributed under 17 heads. The actual expenditure has 


“Salaries’’ have been exceeded owing to increments granted 

to the Lama attached to the Tibetan Section and the typist. 

Stationery’ is higher on account of the purchase of dupli- 
tio 


p 
the year Rs. 73,950, against. Rs, 1,61,950 and Rs. 75,350 res- 
nie year. The Trust Fund at 
8. 
The Budget estimate Shen : 
1913 has been calculated at es Receipts and Expenditure for 


Receipts . 
Expenditure bi ; ataee. 


February, 1913.] Annual Report. vii 


The Budget estimate of Receipts is about Rs. 1,895 less 
than the actuals of 1912. This is due to admission fees and 
compounded subscriptions. 

e Budget estimate of Expenditure is about Rs 2,260 
more than the actuals of 1912, owing to the provisions made 
to the following items, viz.: ‘‘ Books’’ shows an increase of 
Rs. 1,418 as it is proposed to purchase more books for the 


‘ sum of Rs. 2,206-5 has been remitted to the 
Central Bureau, London. 
r. D. Hooper continued Honorary Treasurer throughout 
the year. 
BUDGET ESTIMATE FOR 1913. 


Receipts. 
1912. I9IZ;: * 1818; 
Estimate. Actuals. Estimate. 
: Rs. 8. 
Members’ Subscriptions oc) 42uv 41,010 11,500 
Subscriptions for the Society’s 
** Journal and Proceedings ”’ 


and ‘* Memoirs : ; 1,608 1,560 1,608 
Sale of Publications .. .. 2,000 2,610 2,000 
Interest on Investments fo 8,388 8,320 8,392 
Rent of R , ie 650 


600 600 
Government Allowances . 3,000 3,000 3000 
Do. (for —— in 
History, Religion, Ethnolog 
and Folk-lore of Bengal) pp OOO on eens 
Miscellaneous ia La 


Loan refunded ‘ 1,500 oon 1,210 

Admission fees os ie ee 

Compounded Subscriptions ae 
Total ... $2,000 33,905 32,010 

Expenditure. 

Helactes $4 v4 se OOD dey afte 

‘Commission cs i 600 “ = 

Pension .. ne Ke 420 420 


Carried over .. 7,570 7,745 7,770 


viii Annual Report. {February, 1913. 


1912. 1912. 1913. 
Estimate. Actuals. Estimate. 
Rs. s. Ss. 
Brought forward .. 17,570 7,745 7,770 
Stationery 3 he 150 205 150 
Light and Fans es as 260 ~=1,071 260 
Municipal Taxe ee fee BAS 1,503 1,495 
Postages .. os e 675 831 700 
Freight .. MP Sh 225 330 250 
Contingencies z5 ws 700 616 700 
Books... .. 1,200 1,182 2,600 
Binding .. . -. 1,000 1,405 1,000 
‘Journal and Proceedings ’’ and 
‘* Memoirs ’’ es -- 10,600 9,831 12,000 
Printing (circulars, ete.) : 350 248 
Auditors’ fee S 100 100 150 
Petty Repairs es - 75 198 100 
Insurance ee vs 188 344 344 
Salary (for Researches in History, 
Religion, Ethnology and Folk- 
lore of Bengal) -. 3,600 3,600 3,600 
Total -- 28,188 29,209 31,469 
Extraordinary Expenditure. 
Repairs vs a s+ 4 e8.:1,930 
Agencies, 


Mr. Bernard Quaritch and Mr. Otto Harrassowitz have 
continued as the Society’s Agents in Europe. 

The number of the Copies of the Journal and Proceedings 
and of the Memoirs sent to Mr. Quaritch during the year 1912 
was 147 valued at £24-18-6, and of the Bibliotheca Indica 389 
valued at Rs. 466-8. Of these, copies to the value of £26-9-11 
Id. 

The number of the copies of the Journal and Proceedings 
and of the Memoirs sent to Mr. Harrassowitz during 1912 was 
182 valued at £23.1 1-8, and of the Bibliotheca Indica 561 valued 
at Rs. 919-4. The sale-proceeds have been £28-3-9 and 
Rs. 803-13 tespectively, 

Library, 

The total number of volumes and arts of magazines 
added to the Library during the year was 1932, of @nioh 103 
— bari and 1829 were either presented or received in 

On an application from Rev. H. Hosten, 8.J., an Associate 
Member, the Council has agreed to lend him books from the 


Library in connection with his researches for the Society. 


February, 1913.] Annual Report. ix 


Khan Bahadur Shaikh Ahmed Husain, Taluqdar of Pary- 
awan, Partabgarh, a member of the Society, offered Rs. 100 
to the Library Fund; the Council has accepted with thanks 
his generous gift. With this money, a volume of Turki MSS. 
consisting of a collection of fifteen Turkish works by the cele- 
brated Mir Ali Shir was purchased for the Library. 

copy of the Kanarak Album containing about 250 
bromide photographs, price Rs. 300, was also purchased for the 
ibrary. 


t has been proposed to prepare a catalogue of the serial 
publications dealing with Natural Sciences that are available in 
Calcutta, and a small Sub-committee has been formed to work 
out the scheme. Various libraries and institutions possessing 
scientific periodicals have been asked to co-operate, and there 
will be a meeting of the Sub-committee shortly to consider the 
matter further. ; 

In addition to Rs. 600 granted to the Rev. H. Hosten, 
S.J., during 1911, the Council has sanctioned a further sum of 
Rs. 400 towards obtaining photographic facsimiles of historical 
documents referring to the Mogul Empire, Tibet, Bengal an 
Pegu (Burma). 

Mr. J. H. Elliott has continued as Assistant Secretary 
throughout the year. 

Pandit Balai Lal Dutt, B.A., has been appointed pandit of 
the Society in the place of Pandit Nava Kumar Lahiri, B.A., 
and Babu Ramesh Chandra Chatterji has been confirmed in the 

ost of ist. , 
The Council has decided to dispense with the services of 
Munshi Ahmad Hosain from the 3lst January, and to appoint 
an English-speaking Maulavi on Rs. 50 per mensem, in his 
place. 


International Catalogue of Scientific Literature, 


Messrs. I. H. Burkill and F. H. Gravely acted as joint 
secretaries of the Regional Bureau until Mr. Burkill’s retirement 
from India, when the Natural History Secretary took over his 
work, _ : 

The Bureau suffered in efficiency during the year by “ge 
recurring illness of the clerk in charge, and only 387 index slips 
were despatched. Arrangements have now been made, however, 
for expediting the she aes 

Two hundred and seventy-six V 

£147-7-6 was remitted to the Central Bureau. 


lumes were distributed and 
The cost of 


of the indexing of scientific literature pu 
taken over by a Regional 
timated its assent. 


x Annual Report. [February, 1913. 


The following — are indexed by the Bureau. 
Authors publishing elsewhere are asked to submit reprints in 
order to call attention to their ore _ 


SociETIES. 


Journal of the Asiatic Society of ein 

Memoirs of the Asiatic Society of Beng 

Journal of the Bombay Natural story ety. 
- 5, 5, Astronomical Society of India. 


moo bo 


OFFICIAL PUBLICATIONS. 
Meteorology. 


Annual Summary of the Indian Weather Review. 
Indian Meteorological Memoirs, Calcutta. 


= 


Chemistry. 


~J 


Memoirs of the Department of Agriculture in India, 
Chemical Series. 


Botany. 


Records of the Botanical Survey of India. 

Annals of the Royal Botanical Gardens, ates 

10, Annals of the Royal Botanic Gardens, Peraden 

11. Memoirs of the Department of Agriculture in adie, 
Botanical Series. 


bak ed 


Zoology, Animal Physiology and Bacteriology. 
12. Records of the Indian Museum. 
13. Memoirs of the Indian Museum. 
14. Indian Civil Veterinary Department Memoirs. 
15. Memoirs of the Department of Agriculture in India, 
Entomological eae 
16. Indian Medical Gaz 
17. Journal of ee peerene Science. 
18. Paludism 
Geologs 


19. Memoirs of she Geological Survey in India. 
20. cords, Geological Survey of India. 
21. Palaconologi Indica, Geological Survey of India. 


Mixed. 


22. Scientific Memoirs by Officers of the Medical and Sani 
tary Departments of the Government of India 
23. ‘Indian Forest Records. 


ad 


February, 1913.) Annual. Report. xi 


Fellows of the Society. 


On the recommendation of the Fellows, the Council re- 
solved that in future the names of the proposers be ee in 
each case on the list of members proposed for Fello 

At the Annual Meeting held on 7th Febroncy, 1912, Mr. 
H. Beveridge, I.C.S. (retd)., Mr. J. C. Bose, C.S.L, .E., 
M.A., D.Se., Prof. P. J. Briihl, F.C.S., Capt. S. R. Christophers, 
I.M. S., and _ C. 8S. Mi ddlemisa, B. A., F.G.S., were elected 
Welles « of the Society. 


Elliott Prize for Scientific Research. 


Twelve essays were received in competition A de 191] 
and two were awarded Prizes: viz. one on the *‘ Preparation 
of Potassium Carbonate and Potassium Bicarbonate on a large 
scale from Nitre,’’ by Babu Jitendra Nath Rakshit, and the 
other on “A few new Ketonic Dyes,’’ by Jatindra Mohan 
atta 
The Trustees have again sanctioned the award of four Prizes 
for the year 1912 for original work or investigations by the 
essayist, in Physical, Chemical, Mathematical and Natural 
Sciences. This notification was printed in the Calcutta 
Gazette of the 3rd July, 1912. Sixteen essays have been 
received i rs 0 ee and have been referred to the Trustees 
for repor 
Barclay Memorial Medal. 


In connection with the award of the Barclay Memorial 
Medal for 1913, the following members were appointed to form 
a ‘*Special Committee *’ to record their recommendations for 
the consideration Council: Dr. W. A. K. Christie, B.Sc., 
Major A. T. Gage, I.M.S., Dr. G. E. Pilgrim, F.C.S., Capt 
McCay, I.M.S., Mr. F. L Gravely, M.Sc. 


Society's Premises and Property. 


ed the 
The Hungarian Academy of Sciences has present 
Society with Kp eee bust of Alexander Csoma de KGrés. = 


President unveiled the bust at the Monthly 
the ard April 1912, 0 it is placed in the rooms of the snats 


o the list of the portraits in the 
he request of the Committee of the 


is , d 
The portrait, which is by 


for safe keeping. by public subscription and 


the How: Jolin: Collier, was obta: ned 
ha h the Society’s roo 
E The Monthiy General I Meeting t table has been repaired at a 


xii Annual Report. [February, 1915. 


cost of Rs. 168. It is now in ten separate pieces, and can be 
removed easily for lectures and other public meetings. 

ere was a serious outbreak of fire at the main entrance 
of the Society’s premises caused by the fusion of the main wires 
of the Electric Supply, but fortunately no damage resulted. 
The electric fittings have been completely changed by Messrs. 
Kilburn & Co. at a cost of Rs. 590, and the electric meter 


increased the amount by Rs. 1,25,000. The new Policy has 
been issued in favour of the Society by the Alliance Assurance 


Sub-Committee. Permission has been granted to the Corpora- 
tion of Calcutta 


Society for widening Park Street as soon as they require it. 


Exchange of Publications, 
During 1912, the Council acce icati 
, th pted two applications for 
Le aN of publications : viz. (1) from the Tohaku Imperial 
eee: Sendai, Japan, the Society’s Journal, Proceedings 
od Reet in exchange for the University’s Science Reports ; 
pes ) from the Bureau of Productive Industry, Government 
ot Formosa, the Society’s Journal, Proceedings and Memoirs in 
exchange for all publications of the Bureau. 
An iar i seers with the Editor of the Journal 
j clerinary Science has been stopped owing to the 
discontinuance of the Journal by the Gedbieedit of Tin. 


"4 Publications. 
ere were published during the year twel : f 
Journal and Proceedings (Vol. LXXvV, Parts 1.2 Vol VIL, 


No. 8-11; vidi : 
- “lesa and Vol. VIII, Nos, 1-8) containing 1102 pages and 


February, 1913.] Annual Report. xiii’ 


Of Memoirs only one number was published (Vol. III, 
No. 5) containing 82 pages. 

Numismatic Supplements Nos. 16-18 have been published 
in the Journal and Proceedings, Vol. VII, No. 10, and Vol. VIII, 
Nos. 3 and 5-6, under the editorship of Mr. H. Nelson Wright. 
Of the Numismatic Supplement 200 extra copies have been 
printed ; 70 copies are subscribed for by the Numismatic Society 
of India and 30 copies are sent to the Numismatic Secretary 
for distribution ; the remaining 100 copies are for sale. 

second list of Arabic and Persian MSS. acquired on 
behalf of the Government of India by the Asiatic Society of 
Bengal during 1908-1910 has also been published, and copies 
are supplied to members on application. 

Mr. G. H. Tipper held the post of General Secretary and 
editor of the Proceedings until the middle of June when he left 
for Europe and Mr. S. W. Kemp was appointed to officiate for 
him until his return. Dr. E. D. Ross left for Europe in the 
middle of March and Lieut.-Col. D. C. Phillott was appointed to 
carry on the work of the Philological Secretary and editor of the 
Philological Section of the Journal duriag his absence. Lieut.- 
Col. Phillott officiated until May when he retired from India 
and Captain C. L. Peart was appointed to succeed him. Mr. 
I. H. Burkill carried on the duties of Natural History Secretary 
and editor of the Natural History Section of the Journal 
up to March, when he left for Europe and Dr. W. A a 
Christie was appointed to act for him. In October, Mr. sf 
resigned his office, and Dr. Christie was permanently appointed. 
Dr. N. Annandale was Anthropological Secretary and editor of 
the Anthropological Section of the Journal until May, when he 
left for Europe and Captain ‘ 
appointed serait for hie Dr. Annandale returned in Novem- 
a and took over charge Bis reg o> 

andra Vidyabhisana carried on the Pico 
logical Secrsehty and was in e488 Bibliotheca Indica, 
while Mahamahopadhyaya Haraprasa astrl, U.1.™> 
seb ieahan of Rs Search for Bardic ——. . _ 
work of collecting Sanskrit Manuscripts throughout J oa Aaa 
r. Ross was also in charge of the Search for Arabic and Fe : 
Manuscripts until his departure from India, when ah es 
carried on the current duties of the search. vee Dito ; 
leaving for Europe, Captain Peart was appol J. D. Sandes 
charge of the Arabic and Persian Search. oT . 
continued as Medical Secretary throughout the yous as. 
Cabinet was in charge of Mr. H Nelson g $i. 
reported on all Treasure Trove coins sent to the Society. 


Lectures. 
_ During the year, the following four 
in the Society’s rooms: 1. On Rec 


lectures were delivered: 
ent Advances in our 


xiv Annual Report. [February, 1913. 


Knowledge of the Freshwater Fauna of India, with lantern 
slides by Dr. N. Annandale, C.M.Z.S., F.A.S.B., on the 27th 
March. 2. Notes of a Botanist in the Abor Hills, with lantern 
slides, by Mr. I. H. Burkil!, M.A., F.L.S., F.A.S.B., on the 
12th April. 3. On Engravings. illustrated by numerous 
lantern slides showing the history of the art from 1770 to 1870, 
by W. H. Phelps, two lectures on the 8th and 9th July. 4. 
On the Sea of Galilee and its Fauna, with lantern slides, by Dr. 
N. Annandale, C.M.Z.S., F.A.S.B., on the 13th December, 1912. 


Philology, ete. 


In the March number Father Hosten throws some new 
light on the Asoka Pillars near Bettiah by translating an ex- 
tract from the writings of Padre Marco della Tomba; and 


HE DU arious anecdotes concerning 
the Pitt diamond collected by Father Hosten. x 


February, 1913.] Annuai Report. Xv 


India in the July and August number. His note on the tradi- 
tion that subterranean passages exist, connecting Delhi with 
several places in its vicinity, has a topical interest ; while in 
his article on the ‘* Mouthless Indians of Megasthenes,’’ he ad- 
vances an ingenious theory as to how a historian and an ambas- 
sador came to report the existence of a people who lived on 
the smell of fruits, and having therefore no use for mouths, 
presumably had none. A hundred modern Arabic Proverbs: 
collected by Captain Murphy of the 30th Punjabis, during a 
six months’ stay in Damascus, should prove very useful to the 
increasingly large number of officers, and others who are now 
interested in modern Arabic. The same Journal—viz. that of 
August— contains a poem in Persian by the Emperor Shah 
Alam II. Side by side is a translation by Maulavi Hidayat 
Hussain. 

The December number is remarkable for a very beautiful 
- and ingenious quatrain by the late Mr. Azoo. It is in Arabic 


written on the quatrain by Dr. Suhrawardy. i 
The ‘‘Vyavaharamatrka of Jimitavahana ” forms the 
subject of a Memoir by the Hon’ble Justice Sir Ashutosh 
i 


disputed questions as the acquisition of title by prescription, 
adoption of an only son, etc. abu | “ee 

a paper on ‘‘ The date of Varaha Mihira” supposes that Varaha 
Mihira chose the Saka year 427. (a.D. 505) as the starting point 
of his astronomical calculations very probably to — 
rate the date of his own birth. ‘ Who were the Sungas ? é 
is the title of a paper in which Mahamahopadhyaya ri co 

Shastri maintains that epee ee nore be cachig rt 

i e Buddhists 

po pa sper Persian origin aS was previously 
e Brahmans of the Samavedic 
rm_horse-sacrifices. Mahamaho- 


padhyaya Shastri ina note on neal 
Sata naomi eee iano inane Nath i 
Shastri in a note on ‘‘ Cavalry mh coos ‘. sein rere 
Nae nH 
Brahmana Bhatti sae eo en Dhravasena ILI of Valabhi 
me ingot, rarer of the China Branch of the 


xvi Annual Report. [February, 1913. 


Royal Asiatic Society, has contributed a paper to the Journal 
throwing a good deal of new light, from Chinese sources, on 
some important questions connected with the era of Vikrama- 
ditya and foundation of the Kushan Kingdom in India. It is 
stated that the word ‘‘ Kyniska,”’ or ‘‘ Kaniska,’’ is not a proper 
name, but that it simply means a king, and that the real founder 
of the Kushan dynasty was Kadiphes who was surnamed ‘‘ Ksa- 
traonam Ksatra Kyniska Kosano,” hero of heroes, King of Kush- 
anas. Kadiphes who took possesion of the Punjab and Wes- 
tern Magadha in 57 B.c. is supposed to have been identical 
with King Vikramaditya of Hindu tradition. 

. KE. D. Ross reprints in a special number of the Journal, 
entitled Tibetan studies, fourteen articles by Alexander Csoma 
de Korés. These articles which were contributed to the Journal 
by Csoma during the years 1832-1840 are of permanent value 
to Tibetan scholars. They lay scattered over eight different 
volumes until they were carefully collected together in one 

i Ross 


_ A paper by Lama Dawa Somdup contains the English trans- 
lation of Gejor Dumpa’s prayer which gives a picture of the 


viously supposed, and that there is nothing ambiguous or 
unintelligible in it. Pandit Mohanlall Vishnulall Pandia makes 
a critical examination of the transcript of Atapura Inscription 


giving an account of the Belkhara Inscription and the 
Machli-Sahara grant, Babu Rakhal Das Banerji states that the 
inscription set upon a stone-pillar at Belkhara in the Mirzapore 


. an ects King Harisa Candra, son of J aya Candra, 
e in u seven ‘ ; ri 
battle of: Ohatilawds Acs amoune Cr eee 


February, 1913.] Annual Report. xvii 


Narasimha, by others with Varaha. The writer does not place 
much reliance on the theory that the temple was originally a 
Saivite one, and was afterwards converted intoa Vaisnava tem- 
ple by Ramanuj in the twelfth century a.p. Rai Bahadur B. A. 
Gupte contributes a note on ‘‘ Somavati Vrata’’ which is a 
Hindu ceremony celebrated by women on dark Mondays. 


Natural History, ete, 
Fourteen scientific papers were issued, all in the Journal, 
in the year under review, six botanical, five chemical, three 
zoological and one physical. 


Borany. 
Two further instalments of that monumental work, 
‘‘ Materials for a Flora of the Malayan Peninsula,’’ both by 
J. S. Gamble, C.I.E, F.R.S., have been issued, and form 
Parts 1 and 2 of Vol. LXXV of the old series of the Journal 
The other botanical papers are :— 
New and Revised Species of Gramineae from Bombay, and 
two more species of Gramineae from Bombay-—By 
K. Burr, Assistant Economic Botanist, Bombay. 
Corchorus capsularis var. ooci 
common jute plant— 


INLOW. 
Polarity of the Bulbils of Dioscorea bulbifera Linn.—By 
I. H. BurKILL 


3 


ZooLoey. 
Some Recent Advances in our Knowledge of the Freshwa 
Fauna of India.—By N. ANNANDALE, D.Sc., ot 
Freshwater Sting-Rays of the Ganges.—By B. L. Cuav- 
HURI 


Contribution to our Knowledge of Indian Earwigs.—By 
Matcoim Burr, D.So., M.A., F.E.S. 


ter 
B. 


XViii Annual Report. {[February, 1913.. 


CHEMISTRY. 

Allylammonium Nitrite —By Prarutta CHanpRa Ray 
and Rastk Lat Datta. 

On Isomeric Allylamines——By PraruLta CHANDRA Ray 
and Rasrk Lat Darra. (Preliminary Communica- 
tion). 

CH;.CO 


OH. co? : Na.— 


Preliminary note on Sodium diacetamide 


By Jirenpra Natu Raksuir. 
Piperazinium Nitrite—By Prarutta CHanpra Ray and 
JireENDRA Natu Raxsuit. (Preliminary Communica- 


tion). 

A wossible chemical method of distinguishing between 
seasoned and unseasoned Teak-wood.— NU 
CHANDRA Srrcar, M.A., F.C.S. 


Puysics. . 
Note on the Secular Cooling of the Earth and a Problem in 
Conduction of Heat.—By D. N. Matix. 


Notes were also read on “ Further Spreading of Croton 
sparsiflorus (Moruna),’’ by I. H. Burkill, “ emi- 
cal Affinity,’’ by M Banerji, and ‘‘ The Classification, 


Bae 
Habits and Nidification of the Ravens of India,’’ by P. T. L 


of living Pedipalpi, by F. H. Gravely, who contributed a note 
for the Proceedings on the distribution of the order. 


Anthropology and Allied Sciences. 


Much of the work published by the Society as ‘‘ Philo- 
ogy, i 


vanished races. In the J 


February, 1913.] Annual Report. xix 


that may be claimed as anthropological have been published, 
and two longer papers (one on the manufacture and distribu- 
tion of chank-shell ornaments, the other on Pushtu folk-tales) 

are now in the press for the Memoirs. It cannot therefore 
be claimed that anything of a nomraheusive nature or of 


premature results. Next year, however, we may look forward 


Dunbar, and Messrs. 8. W. Kemp and J. es Brown ander: 
taken on the North- Bast Frontier of the Indian Empire, in part 
at least as a result of the Abor Expedition of 1911-1912. 


Medical Section. 

Monthly meetings have been held regularly throughout the 
year and there has been a fair average attendance. Several 
important papers were read and interesting discussions took 
place. Major Rogers was, as usu ual, the largest contributor and 
continued to supply regularly further interesting Gleanings 
from the Calcutta Post-mortem Records. He also gave a 
hip on his experiences in Palermo during the cholera epi- 
den Dr. W. C. Hoss 


Treatment, Some new "nope of Calcutta, Morbidity of 


to the most important articles in the M — Journal have been 
regularly circulated to members 
pierre ss to act as Medical Secretary eesaghont the year. 
Lt.-Col. Drury, on Laniden to Behar, resigned his position as 
Vice-President and was succeeded by Major Rogers. 


Bibliotheca Indica. 
b- 
Of the 42 fasciculi of texts of different dimensions pu 
lished in the Bibliotheca Indica series during the year under 


iculi i Bev I kba 
(vol. III, fase. iT) ; Mahamahopadhyaya Dr. Ganga Nath — 
Jha f T travartika ( 
be ‘De ae Chairs Vidyabhigana’ 8 edition of the 
Sanskrit-Tibetan Amarkosa (fase. 


). This fase 
Amarakosa completes the ‘work. When the bilingual index is 


XX. Annual Report. [February, 1913. 


prepared, it will be a reliable Tibetan-Sanskrit dictionary of 
great historical weight. 

Of the new works sanctioned last year, 10 fasciculi have 
been published this year, viz. :— 

1. Amaratika-kamadhenu, the Tibetan version of a com- 

prehensive Buddhist-Sanskrit commentary on the 

_ Amarakosa, edited by Mahamahopadhyaya, Dr. Satis 

Chandra Vidyabhisana. The original commentary 

mal oy hari by a Buddhist sage named Subhiti 

‘s 


bo 
ee 
zy 
3 
a 
ce 
aS 
= 
hs 
Q 
o 
Ss 
pt 
=x 
oO 
2 
=e 
@o 
= 
© 
=] 
< 
© 
Lae 
er 
° 
=) 
° 
r+ 
= 
Cay 
$1 
jot 
2 
= 
2 
n 
et 
° 
| 
o 


edited by Dr. E. D. Ross. 
Sadukti-Karnamrta, edited by Professor Ramavatara 
arma. The work contains a large number of melo- 
dious Sanskrit verses collected by Poet Sridhara 
Dasa during the reign of Laksana Sena in the 
twelfth century a.p. ag 

Bhasa-Vriti, a Sanskrit commentary on P&anini’s 
grammar, by Purusottama Deva with a gloss by 
Srstidharacarya, edited by Pandit Giris Chandra 
Vedantatirtha. : a) 

Smrtiprakasa, a Sanskrit work on the Utkala school of 
Smrti, by Vasudeva Ratha, edited by Mahamaho- 

_padhyaya Sadasiva Miéra, 

Strisarvasva, a Sanskrit work on Utkala Smrti, by 
Govinda Kavibhisana Samantaraya, edited by 
Pandit Jagannath Misgra. 

Gulriz, a Persian fairy tale by Zia‘u’d-Din Nakhshabi. 
of Badaun who died in 1350 A.D., edited by Agha 
Muhammad Kazi Plog and the late Mr. A. F. Azoo. 

ahmasp, a Persi i 
60D, C. Philos, PhD. 

Shah-‘ Alam Nama, a noeepty of Shah-Alam, edited 

a e. 


oe 


oe 


Ce gle 


so * 
a = 
43 = 
7 g 
+p! 3 
era) bd 
=! & 
= toa) 
g S) 
iS KS 
ha 

3 
oS 
| 4 
1 
B 
x 
i] 
5 
01 
a 
o 
Se 
a 
S 
5 
5 
B 
99 
°.: 


—_ 
— 
by 
$ 

= 
= 
ea 
& 
8 
Be 
GH 
Sy 
= 
Q 
3 
& 
3 
RI 
= 
e 
> 
= 
by 
= 
Qi 
." 


Search for Sanskrit Manuscripts. 


Though engaged in the arduous t i | 
t é ask of catal 
manuscripts during the year, the Shastri fotnd seine ner se 


February, 1913.} Annual Report. xxi 


a small but very important collection of manuscripts, mostly 
on palm-leaf and very ancient 


well known as a commentator of Manu. The standard com- 
mentary on Manu by Kulluka Bhatta of the fifteenth centur 


The author’s father was Madhava Bhatta, while the father of 
the king Govindachandra was Madanapala. So the commenta- 
tor of Manu was not the same person as the king of Kanouj. 

Smrtimafijari treats of Acara and Prayascitta, and is the 
oldest compilation of Smrti yet discovered. 

Along with the manuscript of Smrtimafijari came the 
manuscript of Parasgara Smrti, written by the same hand, but 
three years earlier. 


Library of Nepal, the last page of which has been photographed 
in the Shastri’s Nepal Catalogue of 1905. The said manuscript 
of Lankavatara is dated a.p. 908. The present manuscript con- 
tains a later Buddhist work, probably of the Sahajiy a School. 
The work is entitled Paramadya Mahakalparaja and treats at 
some length of Mudras, rituals, mantras and so on. But 


ing of Karaka, Samasa, Taddhita, Krt and Tip. SekoddeSatip- 
ani is a commentary on a 


xxii Annual Report. [February, 1913. 


Vajrayana School of the Buddhists. The commentary is 
written by a very great man, Krsnacaryya or Kahnapada, one 
of the founders of the Sahajiyaé School. A mutilated copy of 
the commentary in Bengali Law of 1198 is to be found in 
Cambridge. 

Coins, 


g 
were presented to the Cabinet during 1911. Of these the only 
one of more than ordinary interest was the gold coin presented 


which are the words ‘‘Sri Jagadeva.’ The coin may have 
been struck by a Jagadeva who reigned in South India about 
the 12th century (cf. Elliot’s Coins of Southern India). The 
reverse of the coin is blank. 
others, two were Gadhiya coins, two (billon) of the 

Pathan series, six Mughal, one Durrani, one of Nadir Shah, 
one (copper) of the Gujarat Sultanat, three of Native States. 

even coins were presented by the Bombay Branch of the 
Royal Asiatic Society, three by the Central Provinces Govern- 
ment, two by the Commissioner of Ajmere and two by the 
Agent to the Governor-General in Central India. 

The Numismatic Secretary examined twelve finds consist- 
ing of 300 coins during the year for the Central Provinces and 
Punjab Government. None of these finds contained any coin 
of unusual interest. 


Search for Arabic and Persian MSS. 


8 for this purpose, and it is proposed to publish even- 

tually lists of the whereabouts of such important MSS. as the 
ociety have so far discovered. 

n compliance with a request made by the Librarian of 

the Imperial Libra ’ Maulavi Qasim Hasir was allowed to 

assist in the preparation of a Catalogue raisonné of the books 


February, 1913.] Annual Report. Xxili 


of the Bohar library, on which work he was engaged from 6th 
May to 28th November 1912. 


Bardie Chronicles, 

Mahamahopadhyaya Haraprasid Shastri, M.A., C.LE., 
made his third tour this year in search of Bardic Chronicles. 
At Bharatpur, he examined a large collection of Sanskrit and ( 
Bardic manuscripts in the State Library. The best Bardic 
work is Sujan Carit of the life of Surajmal, the founder of the 
Jat greatness in the Subah of Agra. The author 
Sudhan Kavi. The other Bardic works generally contain des- 


At Bundi, too, the Shastri examined the Raj Library, 
containing about 2,000 manuscripts both Sanskrit and Bardic. 
The Bardic works treat generally of the Hada Rajput family of 
Bundi. The principal work is VamSabhaskara written about 
70 years ago by Varhat Siirajmall of Bundi. He was a good 
poet, a good historian and a voluminous writer. He was abl 
aided by the then reigning prince of Bundi, who collected for 
him all the available materials for his history, the history of 
Hada Cauhans. The author deals with all the Rajput princi- 
palities that came in contact with the Bundi tate. h 
work Vam&a Bhaskara was designed to be completed in 12 
Rasis or signs of Zodiac. But the author died after the com- 
pletion of the tenth. It has now been published with a com- 


Ganga Sahaya, the late Prim fo coral 
imself a voluminous writer bo Hindi. 

The library contains many important Bardic works including : 

1) Vaméa-Kallola by Dayaram. — 

an Yasahprakasa by Rao See 

(3) Satru Salya Rasau by Rao Vagn 

(4) Vamsavali of the Hadas. See 

(5) Vamsabharana by Misan mn oy 

(6) Hambira Rasau by Mahesa a 4 es 

(7) RanasuyaSascandrika by Mune a ae : 

(8) VamSavalivartika by Dayaram Sela 
(9) Visnu Singha Carita by Dayaram taney. — 
10) Ummeda Singha Carita by the same. 


Dungar Singh. 


XXxiv . Annual Report. [February, 1913. 


At Ujjain the Bhats sometimes come. But Bardic works: 
are not much encouraged. There are, however, Jagais who keep 
the genealogies of all the inhabitants; and these genealogies are 
very ancient and they are taken as evidence in the Civil Courts 
in the Native States. Ujjain is a very ancient city and its. 
exploration by competent scholars is ikely to lead to important 
results. The city stands on the eastern bank of the Sipra. 
The ancient town was to the north of the modern city. The 
site of the ancient city is now a heap of ruins, rising from 10 
to 30 feet above the level of the surrounding country. The site 
of the modern city was anciently occupied by the temple of 
Mahakala, the palace of the king, his offices, and the gardens 
belonging tothe temple and the palace. Kalidasa speaks of the 
royal gardens being on the Sipra and the temple gardens on the 
Gandhavati ; the latter was a considerable stream in the poet’s 
time and fashionable women delighted to bathe in it. But the 
stream does not exist at the present moment and it was only 
after a good deal of search and investigation that its course has: 

een found out, Itis no longer a stream now but a narrow 
drainage channel called the Gandhanala, which, rising at the 
Gomukhatekri just behind the Ujjain College, passes first 
through the Ksirasagara, then through the most populous part 
of the city, and falls into the Sipra at the northernmost point of 
what is regarded as the most sacred Ksettra on the Sipra. 


Samvat 1547. The first inscription records the conquest of 
Malwa by Maharajadhiraja Paramesvara Jaya Singha Deva. 
But the most important inscription lately discovered in the 
country of Malwa is at Mandasore. It is dated in the Malava 
Samvat 464. that is, A.D. 407. It speaks of the reigning 
prince as Naravarma, the son of Siddhavarma and the grandson 
of Jaya Varma. Read with other inscriptions, found at Manda- 
sore and published in the third volume of I nscriptum Indicarum, 


it gives the history of Western Mal 
before and after ibs c rh Malwa for about 150 years, both 


Society of Bengal. 
(1) Ajita-Carita in verse (contains a hi araj 

ee = istory of Maharaja 
vas are Preegictinr I and Ajit Singha. po Seca ; 
ata or history i hi 1 araj 

Wea Singh 0 story in prose, from Pufij to Maharaja 

3 ata or history j + ae 
YaSovanta Singha is ne oe wee OR panes y ene 


February, 1913.] Annual Report. XXV 


(4) Khyata or history in prose, from, Maharaja Dala Pan- 
gula Jaya Cand to Maharaja Ajita Singha. i 

(5) Khyata or history in prose, by Manayet Nain Singh. 

(6) Gunabhasacittra, a history in verse of Maharaja Gaja 
Singha. 

(7) Dholé Maravaniki Vat, a historical tale in prose. 

(8) Bhojaki panarami Vidya, a historical tale. 

(9) Jagadevapamarkivat, a historical tale in prose of 
Jagadevapamar, whose daughter was married to Samalavarma, 
a king of Eastern Bengal. 

(10) Giigolikavat, a historical tale. 

(Ll) Sivas Thakur Kupavat Khiva Karn ki Kundalia. 

(12) Maharaja Man Singh ki Gita by Sandu Carana Caindan. 
Besides these, 45 more works are in the course of being copied, 
62 have been collected from outside and information with regard 
to about 193 has been gathered. Thakur Saheb Guman Singh 
Khici and his staff deserve the thanks of all those who are 
interested in the Bardic Chronicles of Rajputana. The Regent, 

Arai i GCs... GC.B., LL.D., is 
most liberally assisting the Asiatic Society in collecting these 
chronicles, and he has promised to continue the Bardic Section 
of the Historical Department of the State as long as the Society 


held in the first week of December, 1912, by Pandit N anu Ram 
Brahma Bhat, of some chapters of the real Prthvirajrasau, as 
inguished ancestor Cand Vardai, the Court 


large. stor taken by the 
n ‘ 
Though a good deal of interest has Deen sedis aati 


Maharaja of Bikanir in the collection of Bardic 
State, little has been done, as both 


the time at his disposal in paying 4 visit to Dilac 
chief seat of an interesting religion called a ee 
The religion was preached b od by herr soeits 
e a survival of the Light Worship of some a oe 
Iran, as the ancient history of this religion gran pepe 
the name of Sams-Tabrez, the sun of Tabrez. ; 


Xxvi Annual Report. [February, 1913. 


then it has never been allowed to go out. They say it emits no 


their names have been found even in the Rg. Veda. A study 
of this book opens a wide vista for research into the origin of 
di 


Catalogue of Sanskrit Manuscripts. 


Mahamahopadhyaya Haraprasad Shastri, M.A., C.LE., and 
his two assistants Pandits Ashutosh Tarkatirtha and Nani 
Gopal Banerjee were engaged durin i 


described during the years 1910 and 1911; 1600 more have 
tse of the year under review and the 
700 


Raja Rajendralal Mitra, C.I.E., LL.D., collected altogether 
3157 manuscripts. As these manus n 
to the Shastri, they 


of the work will be a little more rapid. 
required to complete the catalogue, 
are given to him. 

The descriptive catalogue, so fa 
of a large number of Jaina, Vaidika and T 


edge. Bra highest importance in all the 
vatious branches of knowledge 


also await description. It is, 


February, 1913.] Annual Address. "  XXVii 


therefore, undesirable to publish anything before the comple- 
tion of the catalogue in manuscript. If the cata ogue is pub- 
lished after its completion, it will be possible to fix the 
chronology of many important branches of Sanskrit knowledge 
and also the dates of many important works. 


Bureau of Information. 


The Bureau of Information in the Asiatic Society was 
engaged in preparing a complete catalogue of the manuscripts 
found in the Bishop’s College, Calcutta. It has also answered 
questions put to it by Civil Officers. 


——>— 


The Hon. Justice Sir Asutosh Mukhopadhyaya, Kt., Senior 
Vice-President, delivered an address to the Society. 


Annual Address, 1913. 


Mr. PRESIDENT AND MEMBERS OF THE SOCIETY, 

I deem it a high privilege to be permitted to deliver the 
aa T tat I may look forward to the 
this learned audience as I 
ithstanding the imperfec- 
tions of my attempt to give, in response to the call from the 
Chair, a brief outline of the activities of the Society during the 
last twelve months. “s 

It is a matter for congratulation that the material pros- 
perity of the Society has been well maintained during the oa 
year. There is no substantial falling-off in our numerica 
er of paying members has in- 
list of non-paying 
and our expendi- 


ay luable Libra 
quake would mean the complete ruin of our im a cas Saas 


The question of a substantia! genes of needful expansion 
on us with increasing 


insistence. As a result of the 
Committee during the last twelve mo 


xxviii ~ Annual Address. [February, 1913. 


Let us now turn for a moment to the literary and scientific 
work accomplished by our members during the last twelve 
months ; here we are gratified to find that a high standard 
has been maintained from the quantitative as well as the 
qualitative point of view. In the department of Philology and 
ne the researches of our members connect themselves 

work o 


proper name 


at all but a generic name for a king, and that the real founder 


m ya 
the thesis that the Sungas, who und 
successfully persecuted the Buddhists and ultimately overthrew 


February, 1913.} Annual Address. Xxix 


the Maurya Empire, were not Persians as had been previously 
supposed, but were Brahmins of the Sama Vedic School accus- 
tomed to horse-sacrifice. The same writer quotes a passage 
from a palm-leaf manuscript to show that the poet Bhatti was 
the son of Sridhar Swami of Valabhi. On the other hand, a 
young scholar, Babu Surendranath Sastri, endeavours to estab- 
lish that the poet was no other than the Bhatti Bhatta to 
whom Dhruba Sen, the third of Valabhi, granted a village in 
653 a.p. Babu Brajalal Mookerjee takes up the question of 
the date of the great astronomer Varahamihira and reaches the 
conclusion that he chose the ‘Saka year 427 as the starting- 
point of his astronomical calculations, possibly to commemorate 
the date of his own birth. Mr. Pargiter, one of our ex-presi- 
dents, whose retirement from this country deprived us of the 
last member of the Indian Civil Service who had attained 


In addition to this paper, 
ical contributions. Mr. 
Ramaprasad. Chanda endeavours to establish that the Kam- 
d that the inscription on the 
ple of Siva 


Vaishnabait purposes b 
ese contributions 4 


1 . bee : y 
‘igtena oeiearredis ge 8 che ‘ which constitute po 
Bibliotheca Indica Series are of considerable importance an 
deserve more than a passing notice. 


XXX Annual Address. [February, 1913. 


Sanskrit lexicon, Amarkosh, edited by Dr. Satischandra Vidya- 
bhushan, who had previously brought to light the text of the 
lexicon itself from Tibetan sources. We have here a fresh 
illustration of the great possibilities of useful research in the 
domain of Sanskrit learning through the medium of Tibetan 


disappointment that our progress in the pursuit of Tibetan 


our illustrious member Csoma de Koros, whose collected 
papers were recently republished by us and whose impressive 
figure will henceforth adorn our rooms through the courtesy of 


placed at the disposal of the learned world ; In fact, the zeal 
has been so great that the 
publication of these works has 
€ must either press for a substantial 


Manuscripts is vigorously 


: ersian 
carried on, fresh materials are brought to light which it is 


February, 1913.] Annual Address. XXXF 


incumbent on us as a learned body to bring within the easy 
reach of scholars interested in the progress of Oriental studies. 
To take one illustration only, Mahamahopadhyaya Haraprasad 
Sastri has, in the course of his searches for Sanskrit manu- 
scripts, come across a copy of an important work on Hindu 
Law called Smriti Manjari by Gobindaraja, the great commen- 
tator on the Institutes of Manu. This manuscript dates back 
to the year 1145 and effectively contradicts the theory put 
forward by Prof. Julius Jolly that Gobindaraja flourished 
between the 11th and the 15th centuries and could be identified 
with King Gobindachandra of Kanauj. One can imagine 
without difficulty the stir which would be created in the learned 
world of Orientalists by the publication of an accurate edition 
of this work. The Sastri has also been fortunate enough to 
come across a palm-leaf manuscript of Parasara Smriti, copied 
in 1142. We cannot but lament that the funds at our disposal 


ion to generation by the bards 


; t : 
Fat oes eons ie maa, the Gieidital 


of Rajputana. In the course 0 ay 

come ‘aston important collections at Ujjain, rape te 

Mundi, and has discovered the original of the real Erithviraja 
C 


illustrious Court-poet o 
rasau, composed. by Chand, the illustri hi. It is now 


form, was of moderate length, : : 

by successive accretions not always easy to renee niin 

the genuine original. ‘The field of work thus broug c 
Ss ee e results achieved 


> * rt of th 
extensive, and as soon as the final repo Sk tuake ‘out a; strong 


; odyin 
have a number of important papers embory’ this la 
researches which it is not easy to make ee ne —: 
mind. It is sufficient to say that two ee — Goonbis we 
been published of the monumental work © . 


xxxii Annual Address. [February, 1913. 


the Flora of the Malayan Peninsula. Dr. Praphullachandra 
Ray and his pupils have made important contributions, well 
calculated to maintain the reputation of the chemical labora- 
tory of the Presidency College. Dr. Annandale has given us a 
paper on some recent advances in our knowledge of the fresh- 
water fauna in India, and we are all grateful to him in that he 
puts the most recondite things in Zoology in a way intelligible 
to persons, who, like me, can make no pretension to technical 


scientific papers published in our journal do not by any means 
afford a fair indication of the true extent of the scientific 
activities of our members. It cannot be overlooked that their 


researches are, in the main, published in official periodicals 


the last twelve months: but I venture to express the hope that 
even this imperfect account may, in some measure, serve to 


to wateh ou interest seme® and scholar who has conse 
. erests and presid ‘ ‘ 
during the next twelve months. baer er Cole aa 


Feb., 1913.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. xxxiii 


The President announced the election of Paves and Mem- 
bers of Council for the year 1913 to be as follows 
President : 
His Excellency the Right Hon. Thomas David Baron Carmichael 
of Skirling, G.C.I.E., K.C.M.G. 
Vice- Presidents : 


Colonel G. F. A. Harris, C.S.I., M.D., F.R.C.P., I.M.S. 
G. Thibaut, Esq., C.LE. , Ph.D. , DSe., F.AS.B. 
Mahamahopadhyaya Haraprasad Shastri, C.L.E., M.A., F.A.S.B. 
D. Hooper, Esq., F.C.S., F.LS., F.AS.B. 

Secretary and Treasurer : 


General Secretary :—G. H. Tipper, Esq., M.A., F. 
eae. :—The Hon. Justice Sir Asutosh Mukhopadhyaya, 
., C.S.I., D.L., D.Sc., F.RS.E., F.R.AS., F.A.8.B. 
Additional Secretaries : 
Philological Secretary:—Capt. C. L. Peart, 106th Hazara 
joneer 

Natural History Secretary :—W. A. K. Christie, Esq., B.Sc., 
Ph.D. 

Anthropological Secretary:—J. Coggin Brown, Esq., M.A., 
F. ¢ Bikes 

Joint Philological Secretary :—Mahamahopadhyaya Satis 
Chandra Vidyabhusana, M.A., Ph.D., F.A.S.B. 

Medical Rechetary :—Capt. J. D. Sandes, M.B., LMS. 

Other Members of Council : 


KE. P. Harrison, Esq., Ph.D. 
H. H. Hayden, Esq., C.LE., B.A., BAL, F.GS., FASB. 


N. Annandale, Esq., D.Sc., CM.ZS., F.LS., F.AS.B. 
W. K. Dods, Esq. 

S. W. Kemp, 6 

H. G. Tomkins, Esq.,°C.1.E., ees AS 

PO Hoth a a LR.CP., LMS. 


Capt. R. B. sates Sewell, M.R.C.S., 
The Gta also announced the election of Fellows to be 
as follow: 


Major A. - Gage, I.M.S. 
eT eee ee B.L., B.Sc., A-R.MS., A.B.C.8., F.G.S 
J. P. Vogel, Esq., Ph.D., Litt.D. 

S. W. Kemp, Esq. mae: 8 


xxxiv Proceedings of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [Feb., 1913.}, 

The meeting was then resolved into the Ordinary General 
Meeting. 

CotoneL G. F. A. Harris, CS.[., M.D., F.R.C.S., I.M.S., 
in the chair. 

The minutes of the last meeting were read and confirmed. 

Fifty-nine presentations were announced. 

The General Secretary reported the death of Mr. V. 
Venkayya. 

Mr. Ekendranath Ghosh, L.M.S., B.Se., was balloted for 
as an Associate Member. 

The following papers were read :— 


l. Indian Dermaptera collected by Dr. A. D. Imms. By 
Matcotm Burr. Communicated by Dr. N. ANNANDALE. 


_ This paper will be published in a subsequent number of 
the Journal. 


2. The Composition of the Water of the Lake of Tiberias. 
By Dr. W. A. K. Curistie. 


3. Aquatic Oligochaeta of the Lake of Tiberias. By Masor 
J. SvEPHENSON. 

These two papers have been published in the Journal for 
January 1913. 

4. Notes on Fr. C. Gomez Rodeles’ article on the Earliest 
Jesuit Printing in India. By Rev. H. Hosren, 8.J. 


This paper will be published in a subsequent number of 
the Journal. 


ecm fe 
_The Adjourned Meeting of the Medica] Section of the 
Society was held at the Societ 


y’s Rooms on Wednesday, the 
12th February, 1913, at 9-30 P.x. é 


Dr. W. ©. Hossacx in the chair. 
The following members were present :— 

Dr. Adrian Caddy, Major E. D. W. Greig, ILM.S., Lieut 
. Col. A. H. Nott, I.M.S., Lieut.-Col, L. Rogers. LMS. 


The minutes of the last meeting were re 
The following Paper was read :-— 


On Causes of death and errors of Diagnosis in one thousand 
Post-Mortems,— By Lrevt.-Con. L,. Racane, C.I.E., I.M.S. 


FOE ei i a PN ION Ae 


ad and confirmed. 


LIST OF MEMBERS 


OF THE 


ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL. 


PN THE 31ST PECEMBER, 1912, 


LIST OF OFFICERS AND MEMBERS OF COUNCIL 
OF THE ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL 
FOR THE YEAR 1912. 


as 


President : 
Colonel G. F. A. Harris, C.S.I., M.D. £m. LMS. 


Vice-Presidents : 


3 


The Hon’ble Justice Sir Asutosh spon yoke Kt., C.S. I. 
M.A., D.L., D.Sc., F.R.S.E., F.R.A.S., F.A.S.B. 

G. Thibaut, Esq., Ph.D., G.I. E., F.A 

Mahamahopadhyaya Haraprasid : Sastei, ULE, <MA., 
F.A.8.B 


Lieut.-Colonel L. Rogers, C.I.E., M.D., I.M.S. 


Secretary and T'reasurer. \ 


General Secretary :—G. H. Tipper, — es A., F.G.S. 
Treasurer :—D. Hooper, Ksq., F.C.S., F.L.S., F.A.S.B. 
Additional Secretaries. 
Philological Secretary :—E. D. Ross, Hsq., Ph.D., F.A.S.B. 
ore History Secretary :—W, A. K. Christie, "Esa. + DSC. 
hD. 
Anthropological Secretary :—N. Annandale, Esq., D.Sc., 
C.M.Z.S., F.A.S.B. 


gr philological Secretary : -Mahamahopadhyaya Satié 
ra Vidydbhisana, M. A., Ph.D., M.R.A.S., F.A.S.B. 
roy Secretary : - - Capt. J. D. Sanden. M.B., I. M. S. 


Other Members of Council. 
oe F. P. Maynard, M.D., F.R.C. Mey Uk, 


The Hon. Mr. Justice H. Holmwood, I.C.S. 

E. P. Harrison, Esq., Ph.D, 

Lieut.-Colonel D. C. Phillott, F.A.S.B. 

H. H. Hayden, Esq., C.L.E., | B.A., F.G.S., F.A.S.B. 
- Dods, Esq. 


Lieut. 
I.) 


S. W. Kemp, Ksq., B.A. 


= 


LIST OF ORDINARY MEMBERS. 


a ae 


R.= Resident. N.R.=Non-Resident. A.=Absent. L.M. = Life Member. 
F.M.=Foreign Member 


An Asterisk is prefixed to the names of the Fellows of the Society. 


eS 


N.B.—Members Mere have changed their residence since the list was 
drawn up are requested to give intimation of such a vig nge to the Honorary 
General Secretary, in order that the necessary alteration may be made in the 


subsequent edition. Errors or omissions in the fo iawite list should also be 
communicated to the Honorary Genera eepbesi 


ance with Rule 40 of the rules, their names will be remo ved trou e list ve 
the expiration of three years from the time of their scart India. 


ES 


Date of Election. 

1907 April 3. | N.R. | Abdul Ali, Abul Faiz Muhammad, a A., Deputy 
Magistrate. Netrokona, Mymens 

1909 Mar. 3.|N.R. Abdul Gaga Syed, Deputy Magistrate. 


Barisal. : 
1894 Sept. 27.) L.M. | Abdul Wali Maulavi. 23, Buropean Asylum 


Lane, Calcutta. 


1912 Aug. 7. | N.R. Abdulla-ul-Musewy, Syed, 3.4, Zemindar. 
Bohar, Bur 

1909 July 7.) R. Abdur Rahim, Meader: 51, Taltolla Lane, 
Cale 


utta. ; : 

1895 May 1.} R. Abdus Salam, Maulavi, ™.4., Presidency 
Magistrate. Calcutta 5 

1903 April 1, | N R.| Abul Aas, Maulavi Sayid, Raees and Zemin- 

dar. Langar raf de greets 

1904 Sept. 28,| N.R. | Ahmad Hasa han, Mun: ie 

1911 het 5.|N.R.| Ahmad Husain, Shaikh, Khan Bahadur, Rais 

of Pargawan, Partabgarh, Dist. Ow : - 

1888 April 4,| R. Ahmud, Shams-ul- Maulavi. 3, Mau- 


Lucknow. 
1899 Jan. 4.|N.R.| Ali Huss: in Khan, Nawab. 
1903 Oct. 28.1 R. Allan, Alozander Smith, M.B. 9, Esplanade, 


East, Caleut 
1893 Aug. 31,| N.R. | Anderson, Lieut -Col. Adam ee cm 
ie ae B.A. MBs; DPH, CML 8» LIS. Chitta 
1884 Sept. 3.| A. Anderson, J. A. “Bur — Tooklai E 
Andr bert Arthur, B.A- ooklar Lape- 
Ce sal nai genie tation, Oinnenara P.O. Jerks 


Assam. 


XXXVili 


Date of Election, 


1904 Sept. 


1910 Apl. 
1909 May 


1911 May 
1904 July 
1909 May 
1870 Feb. 

1891 Mar. 
1909 Feb. 
1910 Dee. 
1905 Mar. 
1907 Jan. 

1908 Mar. 
1896 Mar. 

1911 June 
1869 Dee. 
1885 Noy. 
1898 Mar. 


1908 Nov. 4 


1902 May 7. 
1894 Sep. 27. 
1903 Feb. 


1909 July 


1895 July 3. 


28.) R. 


| *Annandale, Nelson, D.S0.,°- C.M.7Z.S., ¥.AS.0. 
Superintendent, Seed Museum. Calcutta. 
6.|N.R.| Ascolt, Frank David, 1. Dacca. 
3d. | R. Ashgar, Ae, Barrister Law. 8, European 
Asylum Lane: Caleutt 
3. Serta hgerk Suche. 11, Loudon Street, 
6. | N.R. Awtea’ Hasah, Sayid, Khan Bahadur, Inspector 
of Registration. Dacca. 
5.| R. | Azad, Maulavi Abul- Kala am Mohyuddin 
Ahmad. 13, McLeod Street, Calcutta. 
2.|L.M.| Baden-Powell, Baden - Henr C.1.E. 
Ferlys Lodge, 29, oni. ‘Road, "Oxford, 
ngland. 
4. | N.R.| Baillie, Hon. My. Duncan Colvin, 1.c.s., Mem- 
| sti Board of Revenue, North-West jee 
| of Agra and Oudh. Allahabad. 
3.1 N.R. | Fal tec, Charn Deb, B.a., nt.s. Allahabad. 
7.|N.R.) Banerji, Devendra Kumar. Dacca College, 
acea, 
LR ha Moralidhar. Sanskrit College, 
tt 
Zee, ye ee Das, M.a. 45/4, Simla Street, 
| 
\ 
ne R. Baer Satis Kumar. 45, Baniatola Lane, 
a. 
A. | NLR. Banerji Satish Chandra, m.a., LL.p., Advo- 
| igh Court. Allahabad 
fF SS R. a rani Lall, ay Chandchaura, 
aya, 
1. ot | Barker, Robert Arnold, u.p., r.c.s. Thorncroft, 
| orndean Road, Enisworth, Hants, England. 
4. | B. neem Damodar Das. 55, Clive Street, Cal- 
2. ie R. Baia, Herbert Charles, a.a., 1.0.8, , Magistrate 
and Gallester: Sythe 
4. |N.R.| Barnes, James Hector B.8C,, B.1 a 


4. 
7. 


LM 


.| Batra, 


Bartlett, gt aa elteag John. 
boy East, Caleut 
asu, Nagendra N va: 20, 
Bagbazaar, Caleutta, 


4, Esplan- 
slog des er bane, 
M.A.; 


Girgaon, Bombay. 


hunr: sina 
gor ce — » Nicholas Dodd, B.A., 


XXX1X 


Date of of Election. ] 


1907 Feb. 6. 3 


N.R. | Bell, Charles = d, 
1909 April 7. SSRI ST co ds ap son 


N.R. Ben tley, Char + MB, D.P.H. Special 


1906 Nov. 7. NR. | Bergtheil, Cyril. Sirseah, Mozuffe e, 
1876 Nov. 15, | F.M. *Beveridge, Henry, F.a.s.B., Lert retired), 
bar bigs Shottermill, Haslemere, Surrey, Eng- 


1908 Noy. 4. INR. Bhattacharji, Bisvesvar, Settlement Officer. 
1909 Aug. 4. [NB Bhntase cea Jyotis Chandra, M.a.,, B.L. 
1910 April 6. | R Binks Ramakanta. 77, Lansdowne 
1909 July 7. | R.  ehatteavartee Shib Nath, m.s. 26, Patal- 


| danga Street. —_ 

1911 April 5.| R | | Bion, H. §S., B.se., F.G.8., ‘Assistant Superinten- 
dard; Geclogical Survey of India. Calcutta 
1910 May 4.| NR. Bere H., M.R.C.S., L.R.C.S,, D.P.H. Pakasy, 

Pabna Dist 
1893 Feb. 1. |N.R. ‘Bodding Revd. P.O. Dumka, Sonthal Par- 


1912 Oct. 30.) NLR, Bolton, H H. 0. Graham’s Building, een 


1912 July 3. R. Bomford, Tieek Trevor Lawrence, I.M.S., 
esas. ee Lrce. 27, Chowringhi Road. 


Calcutta. 
1909 July 7.) R. | Boner, Hitinidaied Curran. 11, Bally- 
gunge Circular Road, Caleutta 
1895 July 3. /N.R R. Bonham: Carter, Hon. Mr. Norman, 1.C.8. 
cca. 
1898 Feb. 2.| R | Bos e, Amrita Lal, Dramatist. 9-2, Ram 
Chandra Maitra’s ‘Lane, Calcutta 
1908 June 3.| R. | Bose, Hira Lall, Dewan ene L.M.s. 25/2, 
| Mott’s Lane, Caleutta 
1895 Mar. G4 Ro _— Jogadi Chandra, C. 
1910 July 6. me | 
191) Nov. fe N. R 
Kurram Valley Militia, Parschiaar, Kurram 
ne 


Valley. N.-W. 
1906 Sept. 19.| N.R.| | Bewley a Francis Bradley, 1.0.8. Khulna. 
1908 Jan. 1.| R. dra Nath, M.A., m.p. 10, 


ce 
| “hdw ard’s “Lane ek Cav 


tta. 

-Col. Edwin Harold, M.D., 1.31.5. 
retired). 4, Harinton mies Oatentta. 
1907 ohn C G.8., 

J as pr tie Se eeeaieit, G aie garry 
of India. Calcutta. 

wn, Percy, 4-R.C.A- 

a "Caleutta. 


Government School of 


| 
aia 


1909 Oct. 6. k 


x] 


Date of Election, 
sate Mar. I. . | Brown, William Barclay, Lc.s. Europe. 
9 Oct.-6. |N.R.| *Brihl, Paul Johannes, r.a.sis. Bangalore. 
1801 Sept. 25.) R Buchanan, Lieut.-Col. Walter James, 1.M.8. 
United Service Club, Calcutta. 
1901 June 5.|F.M.) *Burkill, Isaac Henry, m.a., r.a.s.p. Botani- 
cal, Garden, Singapur. 
1896 Jan. 8. |N.R. Burn, Hon. Mr. Richard, 1.¢.s. Allahubad 
1912 Apl. 3.| R. Burns, William Alexander, B.A. 4, Metapooker 
Road, Kidderpur. 
1900 May 2. |N.R. | Butcher, Flora, m.p. Lohaghat, Almera Dist. 
1898 Sept.30.| A. | Cable, Sir Ernest, kt. Europ 
1906 Dec. 5.) R. Caddy, Adrian, m.p, Soleg y ¥. R.c.s. (Eng 
» M.R.C.P.s. (Lond 2-2, Paseo 
Street, Calcutta. 
1907 Apl. 3.| R. | Calvert, Lieut. -Col. John Telfer, i B., M.R.C.P., 
| LLMs. 14, Russell Street, Caleut 
1907 Mar. 6. L.M.| Cama, Camaji Byramji Siero B.A., LL.B., 
| I.C.8, a pur. 
1901 Mar. 6. | NR. | Campbell, William Edgar Marmaduke, 1.¢.s. 
ucknow. 
1895 July 3.) N.R.) | Cantyis, Hon. Sir Robert Warrand, «.¢.s.! 
| O.L.E., 1.0.8., othe: and Agriculture and 
| P.W.D mber, Government of India. 
\» |.sim 
1912 Mar. 6.| R. | Verereteal aes wy the Right Hon’ble 
1 oe as Baron, of Skirling, 6.C.1.8., 
| K.0.M.6. ern of Ben iO leutta. 
1911 Feb. 1. | R. “Camduft ‘on . Ju ice Herb ste William 
| oe ee 10.8, 5, Hungerford St., 
1910 May 4. ae Bhs Capt. Robert Markham, 1.1.8. Bomba 
‘ y- 
1905 May 3. | R. Restate 1, Dwarkanath, wa. p.t., Wakil, 
High Court. Cal 
1890 June 4.|N.R *Chakravarti, Monm mohan, M.A., B.L., F.A.S.B., 
| __Deputy Magistrate, Khulna. 
1909 Mar. 3.| R | Chakravant Nilmani, ua, Presidency College, 
aleutta. 
1905 July 5.) NR. gre chat Vanamali. Sri Pratab Colle je, 
rinaga 
1906 Jan. 3.) R. | Cha nieey That oma Librarian, Im- 
per rary. Caleu 
1908 Feb. 5, R. i a es — oe. M.B. Medical Col- 
1911 June 7.) R. Chatterjee Katana Kumar, F.x.¢,s, (184, Dha- 
‘ ramiova St., Calcutta. 
1909 Mar. 3./| R. oa - s Nath, mp. 295/1, 
1907 « Circular Road, Calcutta. 
7 Sept. 25.) R. wal “ni od » Fromode Prakas. 8, Dizon Lane, 


xli 


Date of of Election. 


1902 “Aug. 27.) 
1893 Sept. 98 | 


1911 Mar. 1. 
1912 Aug. 7. 
1907 July 3. 


1909 Nov. 3 
1902 April 2. 
1906 Nov. 7. 
1907 Dec. 4. 
1906 July 4. 
1910 July 6. 


1908 Nov. 4. 


1912 June 5. RK 


1898 June 1. | 
1907 July 3. 
1908 Jan. 1. 
1901 June 5. 


1876 Mar. 1. 
1887 Ang. 25.| 
1912 May 1. 
1895 July 3. 


1873 Dec. 3. 


1901 Aug. 28. 


| 


R. _ Chaudhari, Hon. Mr. Justice Ashutosh. 47 
Old Ball, ygunges Calcutta 


R. | Chaudhuri, ari ial. RA Edin. ), 
| PR8.E, FL . “(hows ) 120, ene Circular 
' Road, Calcu 
N.R. | | Chaudhuri, pe Chandra, Zemindar, Sher-, 
pur Town, Mymensingh Dist 
NR. Chetty, S. Ramulu. 5, Seba Muthia, 
| Mndelly, Street, Georgetown, Madras 
R. | Christie, William Alexander Kyn Ook, B.Se., 
| Php. Chemist, Geological Survey 5 India, 
| Ca lentta 
N.R. | “*Ohristophers, Major Samuel Richmond, s.s., 
F.A.S.B,1LM.S. JIesearch Laboratory, Kuieuli. 
R. | Chunder, Rajchunder, Attorney-at-Law. 2, 
| Old Post Office Street, Calcutta. 
N.R.| Clarke, Geoffre 1.0.8. _Postmaster- 
General, Allahabad. 
A. Cohen, Rachel Nathaniel, M.B.,  F.R.C.8. 
 _ Europe. 
A. Connor, Captain Frank Powell, F.k.c.s. (Eng. ), 
L.R.c.P. (Lond.), 1.M.s, urope. 
N.R _ Conyngbas, Major G P, Tanok. r.8. Dehra 
Dun. 
N.R. | | Cook, Capt. Lewis, ms. Midna 
| Coppinger, mae Walter Valentine, M. B., B.S¢ 
FRCS, LMS. 6, vington Street, 
leutta. 
FM.) pee 2 De Palmyr. 20, Bonlavard Caeehitite 
20, Hanoi ( Tonkin), French Indo-Chin 
R. Cotter, Geraldde Purcell, Assistant Sinsaehaiece 
dent, Geological Survey of India. Calcutta. 
R. Crake, Dr. Herbert Milverton. 15, Park 
Street, Calentta. : 
A. “Crawford, Lieut.-Col. Dirom Grey, Lm. 
a d). Thorn- 
¥ M. Crawfurd, James, B.A., 1.0.8. (retired ). 
wood, Uddington, Lanarkshire, Scotland. 
R. | “cripes, | witlan Risdon, F.0.8., F.1.C., A.R.5.M. 
Bae: 
BR. ‘Cullis, aoe “ "Thorean, ros. U.S. Club, 
'  Caleutta 
| Ouenant Mr. John Ghest, ¢.1 
y . Lc. 2 Ben Govt. of Bengal, Revenue aa 
Genl. Dept., Calcutta. 
| rth, 1.0.8. (retired). 
FM. | _— eo anny Guildford, Surrey, 


| in r. Wodeland Road, 
| oe 
NR. Dee gn Durgakund, Benares City. 


xlii 


Date of Election. 


1896 Mar. 4. 


R. Das-Gupta, Jogendra Nath, B.a. (Oxon), Bar- 
ster-at-Law. Hughli College, Chinsura. 
1912 April 3.| N.R. Das, ae Nath, Prof. Ravenshawe College. 


tack, 
1879 April 7.| N.R. Bea, i Saran, Rai Bahadur, m.a., Manager, 
Oudh Commercial Bank, Ld. Fyzaba d. 

1910 Jan. 5. | R. | nto David A. 55, Free School Street, 

Calcutta. 
De, Bick Chandra, B.a., 1.¢.s. Dacca. 

a Lieut.-Col. Benjamin Hobbs, M.r.c.s. 
| (Eng.), t.e.c.e. (Lond.), p.p.H. (Cantab), 
— United Service Olub. 


1895 Sept. 19, N.R. 
1906 Dec 


1899 Aug. 30.) N.R. | | Deb, Raja aay era Tribhuban, Feuda- 
tory Chief of Bam Deogarh, Bamra. 
1904 Sept. 28. NR. | DeCourey, William AS ate abe Silchar 
.O., Oachar. 
1912 May 1,| R. Bente tried Stephen. 2/1 Russell Street, 
aleut 


1906 Dec. 5 | N.R. | Dentith, foes William, 1.c.s. Gooch Behar. 
1904 Jan. 6. NR. ‘Dev-Sharman, Gulab Shanker, F.1.8., MRA. 
| —— Secretary to H.H. the Maharani 
| _ Sahiba of Bettiah. Allahabad. 
1901 June 5. | R. Dey, ae Chinsura. 
1910 Dee. 7. A. Beas mapala, The Anagarika Hevavitarana. 


rope. 
1910 May 4. | 1 M | Dhara Sankara Balaji, aC, - Nawadah. 
1912 July 3. | R. Dig by,Everard, Bp. so. (Lond.). 1, Garstin’s 
ace, Oaleutt 
1907 Oct. 30. By -R. | Dixit, Pandit Sn Ram, B.A., Dewan of Banswara, 
1898 Jan. 5.| R. Dods, William Kane. Agent, Hongkong and 
anghai Banking Cor oration. Calcutta. ’ 
1906 Dee. 5. | N.R. | Donnan, Major Willi ang Indian Army, Ex- 
| ee a of ieee Daten: Accounts in 
1a. Luckno 
1909 Nov. 3, IN. R. Donovan, Lien Gol. oe M.D., I.M.S. 


1902 July 2. | R. a Frederick. 47/1. Pheatre Road, Onl 


“909 Aug. 4. |N. R. | Drake ‘Brockann, _ Sir Digby Livingstone, 
I.c.s. Jha 


1892 Sept. 22 N.R. | Dru yy _Lient. Col. 


1912 Nov. INR Dube: se nana. ‘lahs 
ildar, Dist lla, U.P. 
1912 April - IN. R. | ee Sutherland- Dinaba ne sp Pane George, 
rt., tse t, Milit P Luk- 
| A. 'D himpur, Dibruga } ilitary Police. 
unnett, James (rhe Europe. 
R. cele _ Kedar r Nath. 1, Sibtaegavi Lane, Cal- 


Francis James, 1.M.S. 


1905 April 5. 
1877 Aug. 30, 


xlhil 


— 


Date of Election, , 


1906 Nov. 7. 


1900 July 4. 


1910 April 6. 


1903 May 6 


1910 May 6. 
1910 April 6. 
1911 Nov. 1. 


1901 Mar. 6. 
1904 Aug. 3. 


1908 Sept. 2. 
1906 Dee. 5 


1906 Oct. 31. 
1907 Mar. 6. 
191¢ Sept. 7.| 


1906 Dec. 
191vu April 6. 


1910 Nov. 2. 
1903 Mar. 4. 


1893 Jan. 11. 
1912 Mar. 6, 
1909 Mar. 3. 
1909 Oct. 7. 
1908 Feb. 5. 
1908 Jan. 1. 
1905 May 3. 


F.M. | 


ER. 
IN R.| 


N.R. 
R. 


N.R | 


Govt. of Assam. 


A: 
N.R. 
N.R: 

R. 


R. 
N.R. 
N.R. 
N.R. 


| oe cis, 


| a Major 
F.L.S., ~ 8. 


eer Capt. soni Inglis. 97th Deccan [n- 
fan o Messrs. Grindlay & Co, 45, 
Posliamont Street, London 

| ar: es Sir Archdale: K.0,1.8., 1.0.8, 


Shill 
pts ‘Capt F.T.P 73rd Cavalry, Trichino- 


poly. 
Edwards, Walter Noel. Huro 


rope. 
.| Edwards, Lieut. W. M., Indian Army. Barian, 


Murree Hills. 
Soy Dr. Cecil H. 2, Middleton Row, Calcutta. 
sch. V. J., Architect. 25, Park St., Calcutta. 


2 | Fergusson, John Carlyle, 1.c.s. Saharanpur. 
| mor, Lewis Leigh, a. iy FG. 
| Superintendent, Geological Survey of India. 
alcutta. 
| Fida Ali, Syed, Arrah. 
man H. , Surgeon to the 


F Finck, Her 
Consulate-General for Casiany. 
| Street, Calcutta. 
Finlow, Robert Steel, 
Dacca. 

i a Walter Kelly, M.4., 8.D., 


19, Camae 


Fibre Expert to the 


urop 

‘ “Portes, ee Archer Irvine, B8.A.M.C. 
Ben 

| Poster, anche Henry Bertram, 1.m.s Europe. 


Lieut. Reginald Frankland, Indian 
Army. Ju eine Punjab. 
“Friend: Pereira, Joseph Ernest, 8.a. Bhagalpur. 


Andrew Thomas, 
Royal Botanic Gar ys gs 


How 
| *Gait, poet Mr. Edward Albert, ©.1.£., 1.0.5. 


hi. 

li. Manmohan, District Engineer. 
50, Raja Rajballava’ 8 : Bivest Calcutta. 

Gangali ‘Mati Rat Bahadur. Qurrency Office, 
Galen 

ae ae Kumar. 

_ n Gerald Gardner, M.A. Di- 

iniggee College, Indore. 

. Magistra 


12, Ganguli’s 


nd Depy. Collector. ‘Dota: 
hiss; Homendr Prasad, Zemindar an 
Litterateur. Prasad Lodge, chosen 


P.O., Jessore. 


xliv 


Date of Election. 
—_— 


1889 Jan. 2. 


1909 Dee. 1, 


1905 July 5. 


1912 Aug. 7. 


1907 Oct. 30. 


1912 Mar. 6. 
1907 Mar. 6. 


1869 Feb. 3. 


1912 Sept. 4. 


\ 


R. | peemees Tégeades a M.A., B.L., Pleader. 
| 25, Hurrish Chunder Mookerj ce Road, 
| Biman Galina. 

A. | Ghose, ences M.A. Bur 

R Ghosh, A ulya Charan, Pil diheinns 66, 

Manicktolla Street, Calcutta. 

R osh, A ehari, M.A., B.L. 59, Sookea’s 

Street, Calcu 

R. | Ghosh, Birendra Nath, L.M.s., Medical Practi- 
| tioner. 109, College Street. Calcutta. 

R. | Ghosh, Hariuath; M.D., Asst. Surgeon. 91, 

Maincktala Street, Galbutio: 

R. | Ghosh, Prafulla Chundra, M.A. 27/3, Boita- 
ana Bazar Road, Oiloutta. 

N.R. Ghosh, Pratapa Chandra, 8.A. Vindyachal. 

R. Ghosh, ‘arapada 14, Piteapuker Seoul. 

Kidder pur. 


1902 June 4. | N.R.. 
1909 April a R. 


1907 Mar. 6. | 


1905 July 5. 
1909 Jan. 6. 


1910 Sept. 7. 


1905 May 3. 
1910 Nov. 2. 
1907 June 5. 


1910 Mar. 2 


1910 Sept. 7. 


1900 Dee. 5. 
1910 April 6 


1901 April 3. 


1898 June 1. 
1911 Aug. 2 
1901 Mar. 


6. | 


R. 
N.R. 
R. 
R. 
R. 


N.R 


L.M. 


A. 


N.R. 


R. 


_Ghuznavi, Abu Ahmed. Mymensingh. 

| Goenka, nhs Mohan. 24, Binetstle Street, 
Caleu 

| Goenke, Rcoteuath 
Cu 

| | Goasain, chine hea Extra Assistant Com- 
missioner. 

| Gourlay : William. Fert. L.C.S. 

| House, Calcutta 

| Gravely, Predade Henry, m.sc., Asstt. Supdt., 
Tedias Museum. Calcut 


57, Burtolla Street, Cal- 


Government 


Graves, Henry George, a. : s.m. 1, Council 
Hoa: Street, Caleutta. 
-| Graves-Law, H. ae Les. The Regency, 


Hyderabad, Decca 
Green, Tilak -Col. Chases Robert Mortimer, 
M. 6, 


M.D., F.R.C.S., Harrington Street, 
Calcutta. 


greets Indian Army. 
Asst. Political ca, Loraly. Quetta. 

s Wyndham Alleyne, Deputy 
orests. Darjeeling. 
Euro 


aes Abhaya Sankar, Extra Assistant Com- 


ow” 
| Gupta, Begin Behari. Hooghly College, Chinsura. 


N.R. Habiber Rahman, ee  poaee: Telegraph 


N.R. 


Department. Allahab 
| tate Rahman Khaw Maulavi, 


Raees.. 
Bhikanpur, Dt. A ligarh, 


xlv 


Date of Election, 


1892 Jan. 6. EM. Haig, Lieut.-Col. Wolseley, Indian Army. 


1907 Aug, 7. 


1909 Nov. 3. 


1908 June 3. 


1906 July 4. 
1908 April 1. 
1910 May 4. 
1897 Feb. 3. 


1911 June 7. 
1907 Nov. 6. 


1908 June 3. 
1911 April 5. 


1908 April 1. 
1906 Dec. 5. 


1891 July 1. 


1908 July 1. 
1910 Jan. 5. 
1898 Feb. 2. 


1909 May 5. 
1901 Dee. 4. 


1873 Jan. 2. 
1905 July 5. 


my, Shillong. 
F.M. | Hirst, Reginald John. 
d 9, Pall 


ya She S. King & Co. 9, Pall Mall, London, 
N.R Hoses Henry Haselfoot, ¥.c.s.,  F.L.s. 
Nag 


u 
R. | Hale, met xander, M.I.C.E.1 wrah, 
R. | Hallowes, Kenneth ese. ‘ide ht, Fe 
A.R.S.M., F.G.8., Assistant Bicpeintentans 
Geological Survey of India. Calcutta. 
.|N.R.| Hallward, Norman Leslie. eae 


N.R. Hasee | Lieug. G. 56th jor EP, cease 
R. | Harris, Col. George Francis An sls, 
M.D., F-R.C.P., 1M.8. Ins spector General of 
Civil Hospitals, Bengal. Calcu 
A. | Harrison, Edward Philip, Ph.D. oe wrope. 
N.R.| Harvey, Captain William Fr ederick, 1.M.S. 
Pasteur Institute, Kasaulz. 
R. | *Hayden, Henry Herbert, 0.1£., 
F.A.8.B., F.G.S., Director, Geological Survey of 
| India. Caloutta. 
R. | Hedayat Husain, M., Lecturer, Presidency Col- 
A 


lege, 7-1, Ramsankar Roy’s Lane, Calcutta. 
Hepper, Captain Lionel Lees. Royal Artil- 
lery, 
N.R. | He ee ena Fe Macmillan, B.sc. Poon 
N.R. | Hiralal, Rai Bahadur, B.A., M-R.A-8., Extra aie 
Commissioner. Jubbulp @, OP. 
N.R.| Hirst, Captain edaiee ‘Oheistian. Indian 


and Co. - ah anes, 
* omas 
— meme: ~ F.R.S. real. “ale? oy 
h sah . England. 
R | ee "Hot n. Mr. Justice Herbert, 0:8. 
"| 22, Theatre Road, Caleutta. | 
R. | Hope, Geoffroy D., BSc, Ph.D. Indian 


| i sent r.Ls., F.aAs.B. I, 


Aligarh. 
tz, Tonel,:P MA 0. College, Alrg 
es ale William eer M.D., D.P.H. Grand 


leutta. 
L.M | Feuer joongs L., F.G.s. Johnstone Castle, 
| freushire, Scotland. Ps 8 


N.R. | | Howell, Evel 
-W.F. 


| 


Montfort, B.A., 1-C.8., 
. 


de 
sone | Humphries — Pertabgarh, Oud 


Settlement Officer. 


xlvi 


Date of Election. 
1908 June’ 3. | NR. Hutchinson, C. M. Pusa. 
1911 Feb. 1.) R. | Insch, Jas. 89, Park Street, Calcutta. 
1906 Dec. 5.|N.R. | Jack, James Charles, 1.c.s., Settlement Offi- 
cer, Faridpur. 
1904 Jan. 6.|N.R.: Jackson, Victor Herbert, m.a. Patna College, 
ankipur. 
1908 Nov. 4.|N.R.| Jacob, Sydney Montague, r.c.s. (C/o Messrs. 
King King § Co., Bomba 
1907 Dec. 4.| R. James, He Rosher, MA., Bengal Educa- 
_ tion — Principal, Presidency College, 
Calcu 
1905 May 3./ R. TaneeeL, ‘Kashi Prasad, Bar.-at-Law, High 
| Conrt. “Calcutta. 
1907 Sept. 25.) N.R.| Jenkins, Owen Francis, 1.c.s., Offg. Joint 
| Magistrate. Budaon 
1912 Mar. 6.| R. Bier a Wes 2h: Chowringhee Road, Cal- 
1908 June 3.| R. | ‘ecu Herbert Cecil, a.R.s.M .C.8., F.G.8., 
Asst. Supdt., Geological Survey of India. 
| Calcutta 
1911 Sept. 1.| N.R.| Inge arao, Sir Raja Ankitam Venkata. Zemin- 
of eee, Dabagardens, 
Vinton 
1911 Nov. 1.|N.R.| Kamaluddin Ahmed, Maulavi. Supdt.._ Govt. 
_ Madrassa, Chittagon 
1891 Feb. 4. NR. Kapur, Raja Ban Behari, ¢.s.1. Burdwa 
1911 Jan. 1.|N.R. Kaye, George Rusby. Registrar, Govt. of 
India, Dept. of Education. Simla. 
1910 May 4.) R.. Kemp, Stanle B.A., Senior ‘Assistant 
_ Superintendent, Indian Museum. Calcutia. 
1882 Mar. 1. N.R. Ke ennedy, Pringle, M.A., B.L., Vakil. Mozaffer- 
ir, 
1906 Aug.1. | R. | Kennedy, William coining ke M.A., M.D-; 
ee M.RS.C., L.R.C.P. 36, Chowringhee, 
L 
1906 Sept. 19.) R. Pde ser Charles Henry, Solicitor to er 
men 6, Dalhousie Square, Calcut 
1909 Oct, 6.{ R. | Khalihuddin Ahmed, Dr. 36, acatis Lane, 
Calcutta. 
1909 April 7. | N.R. Kilner, John a aes M.B., L.R.C.S., L.R.C.P. 
1908 Feb N.R. Airs a 
8 Feb. 5. |N. King, Captain Geos , M.B., 1.M.s. Midnapur. 
1910 Mar. 2./ R Kirkpatrick, W. Chartered Bank Buildings, 
Calcutta 
1904 May 4.|N.R.| Knox, Kenneth Neville, 1.c.s. Almor 
1911 Jan, 4. | NR. | Koul, Anand. Supdt., Customs an Excise 


Department, Srinagar, Kashmir. 


xlvii 


Date of Election. 


1896 July 1. 


1910 Sept. 7. 
1912 Mar. 6. 
1887 May 4. 
1889 Mar. 6. 
1911 Feb. 1. 
1909 Jan. 6. 
1902 July 2. 


1909 April 7. 


1889 Nov. 6. 
1909 Mar. 3. 


1889 Feb. 6. 
1907 Dec. 4. 


1907 Mar. 6. 
1909 Nov. 3. 
1911 May 3. 
1906 Oct. 31. 


1910 April 6. 
1902 July 2. 


1905 Aug. 2. 


1870 April 7. 


1905 Aug. 2. 
1912 April 3. 


1906 April 4. 
1912 June 5, 


R. 


Machier, Hon. Mr. George William, c.1.£., 
De of Public Eirseden. Bengal 


N.R. pce pies Ram. Thakurdware, Moradabad. 


N.R. i Major Claytan, M.D., 


L.M. 
L.M. 
R. 
R. 
N.R. 


N.R. 
R. 


N.R. 


L.M. 


Pie a 


bg: 


N.R. 


.| Little, Charles, M.A. 
.| Little, 


, Civil Sur- 
g Berhampur 

Catan: Charles Rockwell, 9, dedi ‘hon 
Cambridge, Massachusetts, U.S. Am 


*La Touche, Thomas Henry hoon, BAL, 
F.A.S.B., F.G.8. Alfriston Hills Road, Qam- 
bridge, England. alcutta. 

Law, Narendra Nath. 96, Amherst St., 

Leake, A. Martin, r¥.B.c.s., v.c. 14, Garden 
Reach Road, Calcutta 

Econom 


Leake, Henry Martin 
Botanist to the eae of “Gnited a8 
vinces. Nawabgunj, Cawn 


eo 
.| Leather, J. Walter, ph.p., Imperial Agricul- 


tural Chemist. Pusa. 
Lee, William A., F.R.M.S. 

Calcutta. 
LeQuesne, 

College 


38, Strand Road, 


Rev. W. R. London nee 
Bhowanipur Road, Calcu 
coaugs pertieg oe 
James Assistant aster, 
Nawab Bahadur’s oT eetation. Murshidabad. 
pes Captain Richard Ernest, M.B., B.Sc., 
Eur 


merope. 
Liter, Emanuel Mano. Europe. 
x, U.E., ma. 11, Loudon Street, Calcutta. 


Lom 
Spade Coats Charles Eckford, Indian Army, 


u.a. (Oxon). Resident, Indore. 

frase ee Gudur. 

Luke, Jaane Journalist. 5, Camac Street, 
Calcutt 

tabla oe Hon. pungen tote - Charles 
Parde. 


K.¢ 
adil cag tte Taian "iedical Service, 
tonee B. Smith. att Locust Street, Phila- 
delphia, U.S. Ameri 


tus. Medical 


McCay, Captain David, ™.B., 

College, Hohner 
MacCabe, : eth 
ee aleutt 
ak Evan; Church of Scotland. gen 
Post 


Mackie, Capt. Frederick Percival, C/o 
Master. Gawhati, Assam. 


Frederik, F. 2, 


xlviil 


Date of Election, 

1893 Jan. 11.| L.M. Tene Hon. Mr. Edward Douglas, m.a., 
; cretary, Government of In dia, 

Huivesivs and Agriculture Department. 
Simla. 
1912 May 1. | R. | McLean, David. 6, Russell Street, Calcutta. 
1911 April 5.|N.R.| Maemahon, Hon. Sir Arthur Henry, K.c.L£,, 
C.81., OAS, P.L.8., . KS. BR 6.8 
F.Z.8., F.RAS., FSA. Secretary, Gover 
ment of India, coma Doyactniare 
imla. 
1899 Mar. 1. | N.R.| McMinn, Charles W., og 1.0.8. (retired). 
Jath Tal, Bhim P.O., Kumaon 
1891 Feb. 4.| R. Macpherson, Hon. Mr. Dancan James, M.A., 
C.LE., 1.0.8. Chinsurah. 

191] Aug. 2. | N.R. Macrae, Capt. William, r.£., Govt. pe 

of Railways, No. 3 Circle. Luckno 

1912 Mar. 6.| R. | McWatters, Arthur Cecil, I.c.s., Tedertea 

Commerce and Industry Dept. United 
Service Club, Calcutta. 
1893 Jan. 11.| L.M.} Madho Rao sere nea His Highness 
Maharajah Sir, jah Bahadur, G.C.8.1 
G.C.¥.0., A.D.C., LL.D. co olor of Gwalior. 
at Bilas, wali aor. 

1906 Dec. 5.| R. | Mahalanobis, Subodh Chandra, B.sSc., F.R.S.E., 

F.R.M.S. 210, Cornwallis Street, Calcutta. 

1911 Mar. 1. Mahatap, Hon. Sir Bijoy Chand, k.c.8.1., 

Maharajadhiraj of Burdwan. 6, Alipur 
Road, Calcutta. 

1898 Nov. 2. | N.R. Maitra, Akshaya Kumar, Ba. B.L. Raj- 

shahi. 

1901 July 6.|N.R.| Malyon, Lieut. Frank Hailstone. 21st Pun- 

jabis. Peshawar. 

1901 June 5.|N.R.| Mann, Harold Hart, p.sc., m. oes F.L.s., Prin- 

cipal, Agricultural College. 
1899 Aug.30.|N.R.| Mannu Rai Bahadur, Civil ‘Surgeon. 
Saintant kt. 

1905 Dec. 6. | F.M.| Marsden, Edmund, 8.a., F.R.G.s. , Blerdale 
Road, Hampstead, London 

1911 June 7.) N.R. Matarin, Lieut. Hugh Geoffrey, 61st King 
George’s Own Pioneers. United Service Club, 
Simla. 

1911 Aug, 2.|F.M.! Maulik, Samarendra. Fitzwilliam Hall, Cam- 

: bridge, England. 

1892 April 6.| R. eden Lieut.-Col. Frederic Pinsent, M.B., 
ee F.R.C. See .M.s., Professor of Ophtbal- 
mic Surge edical Colle: Calcutta 

1912 Jan. 10. N.R | Mazumder, Rai Sect an Bakador, Guerin 

ment Pleader 

1905 Feb. 1. | A. 


Jess 
Megaw, Gastein Jone: Willais Dick, M.B., 1.M.S. 
Burope. 


xlix 


Date of Election, 


1886 Mar. 3. | L.M. 


1911 Nov. R. 
1895 July 3 FM. 


1911 April 5.| N.R. 


1884 Nov. 5 | R. 


1905 Dec. 6. | R. 
1884 Sept 3.) R. 
1904 April 6. 


1906 Mar. 7. | N.R. 
1912 June 5. | NLR. 
1911 July 5. |N.R. 
1997 Jan. 6.| NR. 


1906 June 6.;| R. 
1910 July 6.| R. 


1908 Dee. 


1909 Mar. 3 


1899 Sept. 29. 
1911 Feb. 1, 


R 
1909 Jan. 6.| R. 
R 
R 


.| Morton, Captain Sidney. 


Mehta, Rustomjee ron aseaped C.1.E, 55, 
Canning Street, Calcutt 

Meldrum, Rev. Niel, 2, Russell St, Calcutta, 

Melitus, Hon. Mr. Paul Gregory, ¢.1.£.,1.¢.s 
C/o Messrs. Grindlay & Co., 54, ’ Parliament 
Street, oe 

Meston, Hon, Sir J. S., K.¢.8.1, ©.8.1., €.8., 
Governmen = ouse. Lucknow 

*Middlemiss, Charles Stewart, 
F.G.S., Superintendent, Geological Survey of 
lidis. Calcutta. 

Midhut Mohamed Hossain Khan. 8, Golam 
Sobhan’s Lane, Calcutta 

Miles, William Harry. 7, Ohurch Lane, Cal- 
cutta. 

Miller, Sir John Ontario, 6.8.1, 1.0.8 Europe. 

Milsted, Walter Percy Spencer. Bor ys’ High 
School, Allahabad. 

ie Champaram, Tahsildar. Kaiserguny, 
Bahraich. 

Misra, Shyam Behari, 8.4., 1.0.8, Revenue 
Member, Council of Regency. Jodhpur 

Misra, Tulsi oie Se M.A., Prof., Garnkula 
Academy. Hard 

Mitra, Kumar Micinathe Nath. 34, Sham- 
ukur Street, Calcutta. 

pe ets Srikrishna. 10/1, St. James’s 


Malley, Maninathe hae: Land holder. Seram- 
Mollison, James. 


2. Molony, Edmund peeve ei 1.¢.s. Gorakhpur. 
_| Monohan, Francis John, 1.¢.S., Jalpaigury. 


Monohar Lal, u.a. Barrac 


cRpore. : 
.| More, Lieut. James Carmichael. 51st Sikhs. 


La. 
U.S. Club, Sim 24th Punjabis. 


Ban nu, N.-W.F. 


Capt. Owen St. Joh 
arr Resident P Physician, Medical Coliege 


Calcu 
ane Brajalal, M.A. 9, Old Post Office 


leutt 
Mukieree, Govind Lall. 9, Old Post Office 
, Caleu 
Elton ome? spe Nath, 8.a., Solicitor. 3, 
Old Post Office Street, Caleu 
Mukherjee. Manmathanat®. Sub-Divisiona 
Uluberia. Howra 
Bhooe emge8 Phani Bhusan, p.se. 57, Jhowtola 
Road, obra Calcutta 


Date of Election. | | 


1910 June l.| R. eee sib: Pramatha Nath, m.a. 9, St. 
ames’s Square, Calcutta. 
1898 May 4.| R. Mulhetioe. Sir Rajendra Nath, k.c.1.2. 7, 
Harington Street, Calcutta. 
1894 Aug. 30.) R. | Mukherjee. Sibnarayan. Uttarpara, Bally. 
1886 May 5./L.M.| *Mukhopadhyaya, Hon. Justice Sir peers 
Kt., C.8.1., M.A., D.L., D.Sc., F.R.S.E., F.R.A.S., 
F.A.S.B., Ju dge, High Court. Calcutta. 
R Muktondthvess, Girindra Nath, B.A, M.B. 
0, Russa Road, North, eee ae, Caleutta. 
1892 Dec. 7. | R. Mukhopadhyaya, Panchan echoo 
Chatterji’s Street, Caloutta. 
1909 Mar. 3.| R. | Mullick, Indu Madhab, .a., u.v. 70, Harrison 
oad, Calcutta, 
1901 April 3. | R. | Mullick, Pramatha Nath, Zemindar. 7, Pra- 
sonno Kumar Tagore’s Street, oo ta. 
1906 July 4.; A. | Mulvany, Major John, 1m 
1906 Dec. 5.|N.R.| Murphy, oe Charles Geail: ahowe 30th 
Punjabis, Simla. 
1910 Nov. 2. has Murray, William Alfred, b.a. (Cantab), M.B. 
Europe. 
1911 Sept. 1. | N.R Miietasn Hosein Khan, Nawab, Vakil and 
Zemindar, Katra abu Torabkhan. ee 
1908 Sept. 23.) N.R.| Muzaffur Ali Khan Bahadur, Syed, Zemin- 
dar and Rais. Jausath, Dist. Muzaffar- 


nagar. 


1908 Feb. 5. 


1906 Mar. 7.| R. a —- Chand. 28, Harrison Road, 
Cal 


1908 Sept. 23. | N.R. owes "ia Jyotiprakas, digas pe — 
RY Pee. Nathan, Robert, C.8.1L, 10.8. Caleou 

1890 Feb. 5. | N.R.| Nesfield, Capt. Vincent Gastiie F.R.C.S., 

L.R.C.P., M.S. Sanitary Conuniscioner, Agra 

1901 Mar. 6. | N.R.| Nevill, Hei Rivers, 1.¢.s., Editor, District 

Gazettecrs, United Provinces. Nainital. 

1910 May 4.| R. | Newman, Major Ernest Alan Robert, 1.M.s. 

Gener al Hospital, Calcutta. 

1889 Aug. 29.|L.M.| Nimmo, John Duncan. C/o Messrs, Walter 

rp van & Co., 137, West George Street, 
la 

1894 June 6. | N.R. Reade. Shinms-al-Ulans Maulavi Shibli. 

Lucknow 

1906 Dec. 5.;N.R. pines Henry Campbell, m.a, Queen’s Col- 


lege, Benar 
1908 Feb. 5.| R. Nott ‘eat Cok Arthur Holbrook, m.p., 1.M.s. 


1900 Dee. 5. | F.M.| 0’ Connor, Major William Frederick Travers, 
C.LE. , Royal Artillery. H.B. M.’s Consulate- 
Gen eral, Shiraz, Persia. 


Date of Election. 


| 


1906 Dec. 5./ R. | O’Kinealy, Lieut. Col. Frederick, .R.¢.s. 

| ag L.R.C.P. (Lond. ), 1.M.s. General Hos- 
i, Calcutta. 

1905 May 3. | NLR. otlenbach, Alfred James, B.a., 1.C.s. Oordite 
| Factory, Aruvankadu P.O., Nilgiris, S. India. 

1905 Nov.1. | R. |O’Malley, Lewis Sydney Steward, B.a., 1.0.8 

United Service Club, Calcutta 

1906 Aug. 1.| A. | Osburn, Captain Arthur C., ™.R.¢.8., L.R.C.P. 
(Lond.), R.AM.C. Hur 

1908 Aug. 5. NR. Owens, Capt. Terence Francis, 1.M.8., Chemi- 


| cal eee: to the Government of Burma. 

| 

1909 April 7. | N. R. Ones pes -Col. Fairlie Russell, 1..s. 

| Jask, Persian Gulf. 

1907 July 3.) A. | Page, William Walter Keightley. Europe. 

1901 Jan. 2. | NLR. | Pande, Ramavatar, B.a., 1.C.8., District Judge. 
| Mirsapur, 

1907 Feb. 6.| R. Beis John ‘Emanuel, L.k.c.P. (Lond.), 

s. (Edin.). 19, Royd Street, Cal- 


| 
| Cui ee a. 
1901 Aug. 28.| A. | Panton, Edward Brooks Henderson, B.a., 1.C.s. 


1904, Aug. 3.|N.R. Fe Dattalraya Balwant. Satara. 

1910 April 6.| N.R.| Patuck, Pestonji Sorabji, 1.c.s. Wardha. 

1899 Aug. 2.| R. | Peake, Charles William, m.a., Meteorological 
| _ Reporter to the Government of Bengal. 
| Calcutta 

1906 Dec. 5.) R. | Peart, Captain Charles Lubé. 106th Hazara 
| Pioneers, Secreta ~ and Member, Board of 

| Examiners, Caleu 

Pennell, an om Peciead, .A., Barrister-at- 


1888 June 6. | LM. 


aw. 
Peters, th "Col. soning Thomas, M.B., 


L.M.s. (retired). 
ees David. Oraiuat Tuiblligenes Office. 


1907 Feb. 6 IN.R. 


1906 April 4. ie R. Poleaiehian Leonidar. 4, Clive Ghat Street, 
Jalou 


tla. 
1889 Noy. $.| L.M. *Phillott, Lieut.-Colonel “Douglas Craven, 
sp. Indian Army (retired). C/o 
Messrs. Grindlay & Co., 54, Parliament 
Street, London. ae 


: - ‘Superintendent, igo Survey of India. 


a cutia 
1908 Jan. 1.| A. pileeat Lieut. = Herbert Wilson, ™.8., 
M.S. 


F.R.C.S., 1M. ur ope. 
1910 Aug. 3.| R. | Podamraj. 9, Joggomohan Mullick’s Lane, 
Calcutta. 


li 


Date ails Election. 


1910 Feb. 2. 
1906 Aug. 1. 


1907 Jan. 2. 


1910 Dec. 7. 
1880 April 7. 
1895 Aug. 29. 


1912 June 5. 
1908 Feb. 5. 
1908 July 1. 


1905 Jan. 4. 
1907 Aug. 7. 
1911 May 3. 


1904 Mar. 4. 
1890 Mar. 5. 


1887 May 4. 


1905 May 3. 
1908 Feb. 5. 


1910 April 6. 
1907 Feb. 6, 


1903 Mar. 4. 


1900 April 4. 


1901 Dee. 4. 


1889 June 5. 
1903 July 1. 


1910 Sept. 7, 


1909 Nov. 3. 
1908 June 3. 


1906 Feb. 7 


1908 Feb. 5. 


| 
iN | Popa Sri Ram. Kabul Gate, Del 
NR Price, Charles Stanley. Victoria Bowe School, 
Kurseon 
| A. Pulley, hes tt Henry Cuthbert, 12th Pioneers. 
| Europe. 
x Re Radha Krishna, eal Chauk, Patna City, 
R.| Rai, Bepin Chandra. Giridih, Chota Mapper 
| * R.| Rai Chendhuri,J; atindranath , M.A., B.L., Zemin- 
ar. Taki, Jessore. 
R, | Rait, Major John W. Forbes, M.8., B.s., I.M.S. 
Campbell Hospital, Calcutta 
N.R.| Randle, es bert Neil, B.a. “uion's College, 
Benar 
N.R. Pian as Ss. V., Aryavaraguru, 
Arshya Library, Vizagapatam. 
N.R.) Rankin, James Thomas, 1.c.s.  Shillang. 
N.R. saga Lieut. James, Civil Lines, Meerut, U.P. 
N.R. Rao, T, A. Gopinath, m.a., Supdt. of Archaeo- 
| ee ‘Tetvaudriei: 
F.M.| Rapson, E. J. 8, Mortimer Road, ee 
R. | * Ray, Prafulla Chandra, p.sc., FA.s. 
fessor, Presidency College. Calcutta 
R. | Ray, Prasanna Kumar D.8e. (Lond, and | Bain. a 
, Ballygunge Circular Road, Calcutta 
R. Richardson, Hon. Mr, Justice Thomas William, 
1.0.8. , Judge, High Court. Calcutta 
F.M. Rigo-de-Righie, Alceste Carlo. Ojo Messrs. 
Comabé Eckford & Co., Chefoo, ahaa eee 
rov. North China. 
A. | Robertson, A, White, c.P, Hurope. 
A. ler Major ont Alan. 15th Lancers. 
N.R. Pesce Charis Gilbert, F.L.s., F.C.H., oe 
Department. Port B Blair, Andaman 
R. | *Rogers, Lt.-Col. Leonard, c.1.e, B.S., 
F.R.C P., F.R.C.S., F.A.8.B., I.M. 8. "Medical 
College, Calcutta. 
A. | *Ross, Edward Denison, ph.p. ,F.AS.B. Hurope. 
N.R.| Roy, Maharaja Girjanath. Din nagepore. 
L.M.| Roy, Maharaja she oma Bahadur. 
6, Lansdowne Road, Caleutt 
N.R Roy, — Sarat Sone Dayarampur, 
a [| Rungpur. 
N.R. Bogchaudkinry. 1 Mrityunjoy. Shyampur P. és 
N.R. get ay ry Sur ete Chandra, Zem 
N.R.| R soe pagy 
; toe ussell, Charlee M.A. noe College, Bankipur. 
N.R.| Russell, Robert vam, I.C.s., ere pe Gane 


teer and Ethnography. Mandla, OP 


hii 


Date of Election, | 


1911 Nov. 1| N.R.| Sahni, Dayaram, M.A., Supdt. of Archaeology. 
: | Srinagar, Kashmi 
1896 Aug. 27, R. | Samman, Herbert Frederick, 1.0.8. Magistrate, 


1910 May 4. R ‘Sandes, Capt. J. Se ed Medion 


1906 June 6. | N.R. is Sanial, Surendra Prasad, M.A., F.C.8., Private 
| Secretary to Raja Bahadur. haw 

1899 June 7. es N.R.) Sarkar, ChandraKumar. Kawkanzk, Moulme 

1898 Mar. 2. | N.R. | Sarkar, Jadunath. Patna Oollege, Saskeen 


1909 Mar, 3. -R. | Sarvadhikari, Hon. Mr. Deva Prasad, M.A., B.L, 
| Old Post Office Street, Oulcustta, 

1911 Jan. 4., RB. | |Sarvadhikari, Dr. Suresh Prasad, 79-1, 
Amherst St., Calcutta 

1902 Mar. 5., R. “Sastri, Rajendra ial: Rai Bahadur 

Bengali Ce pice to the Gikssoxnant ‘of 


vies Henry Charles, Ph.D. 4, 
Pollock Street, Calcutta. 
1900 Dec. 5. ‘N -R. | oh watcek Imre Geo eorge, Expert in Indian 
hi. 


1902 Feb. 5.| R. 


1908 July 1. | N-R. | Seal, Brojendra Nath, m.a. Victoria Oollege, 


ooch Behar. 

1911 June 7. NR. Seconde, Lieut. Emile Charles. 16th Rajputs, 
Bareilly, ge 

1906 Feb. 7. R. | Sen, Girindra Kumar. 303, Bowbazaar Street, 


| | Calcutta 
1902 May 7.| R. | Sen, Jogendra Nath, Vidyabhusana, M.a. 31, 
| | Prasanna uae aed s Street, Calcutta. 
1905 Jan. 4. | R. | Sen, Sukum 220, Lower Circular Road, 
alcutta. 
1897 Dee. 1. R. Seth, Mesrovb J. 11, Wellesley Square, 
Cale 
1911 July 5.; R | Sewell, Capt. Robert Beresford Seymour, 
M.R.C.S., L.R.C.P., £M.8. Indian Museum, Cal- 


cutta. 
Shah Munir. Alam, 8.4., 41.3. Mainpura, 


1907 Aug. 7.| NLR. 
Ghaztpore. 

1909 Jan. 6.) R. - | i Hon ot ae Syed, Judge, 
High Court. Cale 

1906 Dec. 5.|N.R. Sharp, Henry, Pus Depy. Secy., 
& | Govt. of Fadia, Tai. of Education. 

1885 Feb. 4. 2 M. _ eapacwyeraas i Haraprasad, 
| LE, MA. FASB. 26, Pataldanga Street, 


C ae M 


Calcu 
1902 Dee. 3. | NR she | Shasted, Pe ssin Goswami. Hindu College, 
elhi. 
1912 Jan. 10. | | R. | Shirasi, Maulavi Muhamad Kazim. 23, Lower 
| | Chitpur Road, Calcutta. 


liv 


Date of Election. 


1909 Jan. 6. 


1908 Mar. 4. 


1902 Feb. 5. 


1899 May 3. 
1909 April 7. 


N.R. | 
R. 


N.R. 


N.R. 


FM. 


1903 Aug. 26, N.R. 


1912 Sept. 5. 


R. 


1901 Aug. 7. R. 


1904 Mar. 4. | NR. | 


1894 July 4. 
1895 Aug. 


1912 May. 1. 
1893 Mar. 1. 


1892 Mar. 


1899 Aug. 29. 


1909 April 7, 


1889 Nov. 
1912 Mar. 
1894 Feb 

1897 Jan. 
1898 Aug. 


1909 aay 
1907 Dec 


1911 Mar. 1. 
1907 Mar. 6. 


1909 Feb. 


ad 


29. 


2. 


N.R. 
R 
R. 

N.R. 


L.M. 
N.R. 


N.R. 
N.R. 
R 


8 


| 


-| Singh, H.H. 


.| Sita Ram 


khpur 
| Loingh, Bakaduc Sing, 


‘Shirreff, Alexander Grierson, B.a.,  1.¢.s. 
Gonda, U.P. 
Shujaat Ali, Nasurul Mamalik Mirza, Khan 


Bahadur, Acting Consul- re for Persia. 
10, Hungerford Street, Calcut 


Shyam Lal, Lala, M.A., LL.B., paptity Col- 
c awabgung, Cawn ur. 
Silberrad, Charles Arthur, B.A., B.8¢., I.¢.s. 
Jha 


rediconag George sions D.Se. 
London Bank, Sim 

Simpson, John ee .C.S., Registrar of Co- 
operative anh Bochotioa, Upper Prov- 
inces. _ Gora 


C/o Delhi and 


47, Ripon Street, Cal- 
outta. 

“Singh, Chandra He oa" Pa Bahadur. 82, 

ea Road, Calc 

end laces as Raj, 

va 2a oA Pakaink Distric 

Singh Raja Kushal Pal, M.a. Work. 

ngh, Lachmi Né¢ arayan, M.A., B.L., Pleader, 

High Court. Calcutta. 

Singh Ray, Lalit Mohan, Rai Bahadur. 


4, 
Creek Row, Calcutta. 


(retired). hiascar, Allaha 
Singh, Raja paras Pratab, ns "Raja of 
Bhinga. Bhi 


Singh, H.H. The Maharaja Sir Prabhu 
Narain, Bahadur, 6.0.1.5 tg araja of 
. amnagar Fort, t, Ben 
Singh, Raja Prithwipal. Talukdar of Suraj- 
pur, District Barabanki. Oudh. 
Singh, H. on. Maharaja Sir Ramesh- 
wara, Bahadur, &.c.1.8. Durbha anga. 
Singh, Maharaja Ranjit, of Nasirpur. 58, 
Chowringhee Road, Oalcutta 
he Mahara aja Vishwa Nath 
Chhatturpur, Bundelkhund. 
Amrita Lal, F.¢.s., Leu. 51, Sankari- 
tolla Lane, Calcutta 
. Depy. Magistrate a 
Smith, Capt. H. Emslie 


Hu : 
Smith, oe Col Joka Be aly Indian 
»C.L.E. Resident, Nepa 
Smith, a O. A. 27th jie ey Europe. 
Sofiulla : Saifudaddin Ahmed, Maulavi, In- 


Spector of Excise. 


Silchar. 
Sommstfelt Prof. E. 


Europe, 


lv 


Date of Blection. | 
1912 Jan.10.| R 
1901 Dee. 4. IN.R 
1912 May 1.| R. 
1912 Oct 30. pe R | 
1909 April 7. A. 
1904 Sept. 28.| N.R. 


1908 Dec. 2.| A 
1904 June 1.| BR 


1899 Aug. 30. R. 


1900 Sug. 29.) IN RB 
R. 
1907 June 5. law 
1906 Dec. 5. | F. M 
| 
1911 Feb. 1.| R. 


1907 Aug.7 |N.R 
1907 June 5. | R. 


1907 June 5. | N 


} 
| 


1909 Jan. 6., BR. 
1898 April6.| R. 


1906 Mar. 7.| R. 
1904 July 6. NR. 
1910 Ang. 3.|N.R| 
1893 Aug. 31.| N.R. 


1909 Jan. 6.|N.R 
1910 April 6. | NR. 


1906 Dec. 5.|N-R. 
1878 June 5. NR. 


ey T., Fishery Dept. Writers’ Build- 


ls -Sipponck, David Brainerd, Ph.p., Archwologi- 
eal Surveyor. Bankipor 

| Stadler George L, Cousul ‘for Belgium. 37, 
Chowringhee Road, Calcutta 

Stallard, Dr. Philip Tinie: District 

urgeon. G.I.P. Railway, Jhansi. 

Stanley, Sir John, kt., K.0.1.8,K.c. Europe. 

Stapleton, Henry Ernest, B.A., B.Sc. Dacca. 
Steen, Capt. Hugh Barkley, M.B., I.M,8. Hurop 

Stephen, Hon, Mr. Justice Harry a ood 
Judge, High Court. Calcut 

Stephen, St. John, B.A. LL. - Barrister-at- 
Law. 7, Russell Street, Calcutta. 

| Stephenson, Major ohn é. 

Stevens, Major C. R., 1m.s. Medical College, 
Calcutta. 

Stewart, Capt. Francis Hugh, 1.m.s. Bombay 

| soley: Captain Claude Bayfield, Military ri 

Teheran, Persia 

| Simaieule Leehve W, Chief Engineer, 

| Messrs. Burn & Co., 7, Hastings St., Calcutta. 

| Subramania Iyer, arene’ Ext tra Asst. 
Conversator of Forests. Coimbator 

Suhrawardy Abdulla al-Mamun vif D.Litt., 
LL.D., Barrister-at-Law. 34, "Elliott Road 
Citoutie: 


a 


kt.) Swinhoe. Rodway Charles John, Solicitor. 


Mandalay, Upper Burma 


| Tagore, Kshitindranath, 8.a. Howrah. 
Tagore, Hon. Maharaja Sir Prodyat Coomar, 
| Bahadur, xt. Pathuriaghatta, Calcutta. 
| Tagore, Kumar Shyama Kumar, Zemindar. 
| 65, Pathuriaghutta Street, Calcutta. 
Talbot Walter hier 1.0.8., Revenue Com- 
sioner. 
| Tancock, Capt. emodee Charles. 31st Pun- 
fabis owshera, N.-W.F.P. 
Assistant Super- 
intendent, Survey of India. pea te 
Taylor, Charles Somers, B.Sc. 
Teesdale, Capt. Frank Robinson. 25th Doicls y 
F. 


Tek Chand. pag B.A., M.R.A.S., 1.0.8., Deputy 
Gujranwala, Punjab. 

Carnac, Bart., 
C/o Messrs. King, King 


Indian Army, ¢.1E 
bay. 


lvi 


Date of Election. 


1904 May 4. 


1875 June 2.| 


1911 Mar. 1. 
1909 Aug, + 
1908 Nov. 4. 
1898 Noy. 2 


1911 Mar. 1. | 


1911 July 5. 


1904 June 1. | 


1912 Nov. 6. 


1909 Dee. 
1910 Dee. 


1907 Feb. 6.) 


1861 June 5 


1900 Aug. 29. | 


1890 Feb. 5. | 


1909 May 5. 
1902 June 4. 


1901 Mar. 6. 


1894 Sept. 27. 


Te 


Patel Street, Fort, 

| R. | *Thibaut, G., Ph.p., a F.A.S.B. 18, Royd 
Street. Cala. 

F.M.| Thomas,F. W. , Librarian, India Office. London. 


| 

NR. Thanawala, Framjee eciee: 90, Cawasjee 
my: 

| 


eA Thompson, Fabri Perronet, M.A.,1.¢.8. Lahore. 
N.R 


.R.| Thornely, Capt. Michael Harris, 1M.S. Arrah. 
R. esas Sea F.R.I.B.A. 6 Clive Street, 


Cal 
A. Thor eg audios Francis. val Pilot Ser- 
Eur 


vice. rope. 

INR. | Phorston, Capt. Edward Owen, 1.m.s., B.S., 

C rdwan. 

NR. ‘Tipper, Gua ‘ge Howlett, m.a., Assistant 

| Superintendent, Geological ataee of India. 
| Karachi. 

R. | Tomkins, H. G., c.1.k.. F.R.A.S. 9, Riverside, 

rackpur. 

| _R. | Toth. Kugene. 13, Sudder Street, Calcutta. 

N.R.| Towle, J.H Principal, M.A.O. ee Aligarh. 

INR. eT ravers, Morris William, p.se., F. 

| | Director of Indian Institute of “Science. 

Bangalore. 


| UM. Tremlett, James Dyer, M.A., 1.¢.8. (retired). 
| nd. 


Dedhum, Essex, Engla 


ney 
.N.R.)| Vaughan, Lieut Joseph Charles Stoelke, 
| IM.s. Bhagulp 

R 


2. | *Venis, thes ae D.Litt., C.IE., F.A.S.B. 

: [ Simla. 
N.R. Venkayya, V.,. Govt. Epigraphist in India. 
R. So Laer Mahamahopadhyaya Satis 


Chandra, M.a., php. F.A.8,B. 26/1, Kanay 
Lal Dhur’s ok Calcutta 


N.R.| Vogel, Jean Philippe, Litt.D. Archaeological 
L.M. Vost, Lieut. Col. W 


1902 Oct. 29 R _ Vredenburg, Ernest, g.1. , B.Sc., A.R.S.M., A.R.C.S-s 
| FGS. 27, Chowringhee Road. 
1909 Jan. 6. NR. *Walker, Gilbert. Thomas, D.sc., F.R.S., F.A.S.B.; 
1907 July 3 | - Maes are, of Peeeties. geo 
Pacey i were intendent, Geological Survey 


1900 Jan. 19. 
1901 June 5. 


Rl Wolk Ern 


Wallace, David Ro +a Europe. 
rnest Herbert Cooper, C.8.L, 1.C.S- 


lvii 


Date of Election. 
1909 July 7. 
1911 Feb. 1. 
1905 Dec. 6. 
1912 Mar. 6. 
1910 Sept. 7. 
1909 Dec. 1. 
1907 April 3. 


1907 Feb. 6. 


1906 Sept. 19. 


1909 April 7. 
1910 April 6. 
1911 July 5, 


1909 Mar. 3, 


1910 Dec. 7. 


1904 Mar. 4. 


1909 April 7. 
1906 July 4. 
1912 Mar. 6. 
1906 Mar. 7. 


1908 April 1. 


1907 June 5. 
1894 Aug. 30. 


1905 Mar, 1. 


1911 Aug. 2, 
1906 June 6. 
1910 April 6. 


NR. 
R. 
N.R. 


A. 
N.R. 


N.R. 
N.R. 
F.M. 


N.R. 


A. 


Ae, 


‘ bie a here 


Waters ae Ernest Edwin, 1.M.s. vg a 
Waters, D ret eee F.R.LP.H. Huro 


M.A Dac 
ev. d., Principal, " Seottish ee 
ge. 4, Coriballas Street, Oaleutta 
Watts, H. P.,B.a, (Cantab). 11, Loudon Street, 
Calcutta 
Webster, 7 .E.,1.¢.8. Kohima, Naga Hills, Assam, 


Arthur Denham, By B.A. 
General diy rset Calcutta. 
Gordon High- 


White, Lieut. 


Williams, Garfield Hodd 
M,R.C.S., L.R.C.P. St. John’s College, A 
Williams, Major Henry John, King’s Dr agoon 
Guard, Umbala, Punjab. 
H.M. Inspec- ° 


Wilson, J .R,, M.1.C.E., F.G 
tor of Mines, Woodiandé: Wawa Lane, 


Windsor, Maj Frank Needham, 1.M.s. 
Medical College, Calcutta, 

Wood, William Henry pn, May ¥.C.8., 
F.R.G.S., Besubinal: La Martiniére. 11, Loris 


don Street, Leonie: 
Woodhouse, E. J., rope. 
Rev: oe iiae an M.A. Europe 
Woodroffe, Hon. Mr. Se poet John George. 
13, Alexandra Court, Caleu 


Woolner, Alfr a er, M. “~ "Principal, Ori- 
ental College. Lah 
Wordsworth, William Chris topher. Asst. 


Director of Public Instraction, Bengal. 
Writers’ Buildings, Calcutta. 


Wee “RE aAm..LcC.E. E.R. House, 
Calcu re 
Wri ht, Taw Nelson, B.A., 1.¢.8., District 

indi, Bareilly. 
23, Chow- 


Young, Rev. — Willifer. 
Calcu 
, Gerald BE ost. BA: i. Tee 

1 Charles Gainbiar, at 
Young, sg no4 Th oiiis Charles McCombie, 


M.B., Dacea. 


lviii . 


SPECIAL HONORARY CENTENARY MEMBERS. 


Date of + Hlection.. 


1884 Jozi -E5, 
1884 Jan. 15. 


1884 Jan. 15. 


Dr. Binst a ie Piifediabie in the Usiiverdity of 
Pri 


Revd. peorieuds A H. Sayce, Professor of Assyrio-— 
logy, Queen’s College.  eerd. England. 

Monsieur se Senart. 18, Rue Frangots Ter, 
Paris, Fran 


HONORARY FELLOWS. 


Date of Election, 


4. 


1879 June 
1879 J une 
1883 Feb. 
° 1894 Mar. 
1895 June 


1865 June 5. 


1896 Feb. 
1899 Feb. 
1899 Dec. 


1899 Dee. 
1899 Dee. 
1901 Mar. 


1902 Noy. 


1904 Mar. 
1904 Mar. 


1904 Mar. 
1904 Mar. 


+. 


o 
yb 
D. 


3) 
>. 
1 


Dr. Albert Giinther, m.a., Ph.D., Meche F.R.S. 
23, Lichfield Road, K. ew, Rivas. Lingla 

Dr. Jules Janssen. Observataire PAnrondete 
Physique de Paris, France. 


Dr. Alfred Russell Wallace, u1.p., p.¢.1 -» F.L,8., F.Z.8:, 
‘RS. Curfe View, Parkstone, Dorset, Baslsad 
Professor Theodor Noeldeke, Clo Mr. Karl T. 

Tribner, Strassburg, Germany, 

Lord Rayle eigh, M.A., D.C.L., D.sc., LL Ph.D., F.R.A.S., 
PRS.  Ferling ee Witham, ove England. 
i H. Tawney, Esq., M.A. C.1.E. C/o India 

e, London. 
Backauees Charles Rockwell Lanman. 9, Farrar 
Street, Cambridge, Sareea U.S. America. 


Pierce Edward Bixadts Tylor, D.0.%;, oe mss F.R.S., 
Keeper, University Museum. Oxford, England. 
Professor Edw ard Suess, Ph.D, Phas of Geology 
na, 


in the 
Professor John Wesley Judd, ¢.8., u.p.. p. R.8., -F.G.8:, 


ate Prof. of the Royal College of Science. 
30, _ Cumberland Road, Kew v, Englan 


0 
- |. Professor Hendrick Kern. Utrecht, Holla 


nd. 
Perse: Sir Ramkrishna Gopal Bhandarkar, K.C.L.E., 
a. 


‘oon 
..| Professor Ignaz Goldziher, PhD., | DAK | TLD 


Budapest, Hungary 


all, M.a., K.C.8.1, C.LE., LbD. 82, 
Cornwall Gardens, London, S.W. 


lix. : 


Date of Elections 


1904 Mar. 2. 
1904 July 2. 
1906 Mar. 7, 


1908 July 1. 
1908 July 1. 
1911 Sept. 6. 


1911 Sept. 6, 
1911 Sept. 6. 
1911 Sept. 6. 
1911 Sept. 6. 


Sir William Ramsay, Ph.p. (Tiib.), LL.D., Se.D 
University College, "Gotwer 
HO; 

. George Abraham Grierson, Ph.D., D.Litt., C.LE., 

S c.s. (retired). Rothfarnham, Camberley, Surrey, 
nglan 

The Right Hon’ble Baron Curzon of Kedleston, 

_— D.O.L., F.R.s. 1, Carlton House Terrace, Lon- 


“ae 
a Col Henry Haversham Godwin-Austen, F.R.S., 
F.Z.Si, a.s. Nora Godalming, Surrey, England. 
Dr. Es Oidenberg The University, Gottingen. 


Ger 
Lieut, Ga ‘Alfred William Aleock, 1.M.8., C.1.E., 
LL.D., O.M.Z.S, F.R.S. Heathlaniis, Brith Roud. 
Belvedere, Kent, Ente 
Prof. Edward M.B., M.B.C.S., 
L.R.C,P., M-R.A.S. Pe bor: Ootlaye. Cambridge. 
Dr. A. Engler, Prof. of Systematic Botany, Univer- 
sity of Berlin, Prussia, 
Sir Clements Markham, 4 
Eccleston se a London, S. 
Mahamahopadhya se aakbyaneth Tarkavagisa. 
111-4, Shambazar ag ee Calcut ta. 


FELLOWS. 


Date of Klection. 


1910 Feb. 2. 
1910 Feb. 2. 


1910 Feb. 2. 


1910 Feb. 2. 
1910 Feb. 2. 


1911 Feb. 1. 


Dr. N. Annandale, D.se. F.L.S. 

er Hon'ble Justice Sir Y aera VMokhovadby syn: 
C.8.L, M.A., DeL., D-S¢., F.R.A-S., 

a ay Burkill, Esq. 


Mahamahopadhyaya Feeapela ad Sashtri, C.1.E., M.A. 

Sir Thomas Holland, K.C.L-E., D.Se., A-K- C.8., F.G.S., F.R.S 

D. Hooper, Esq. 

T, H. D. LaTouche, Esq., 8 a 2 

Babu Monmohan, Chakrayart 

Lieut.-Colonel D. C. Phillott, "tndian pone 

Dr. Prafulla Chandra Ray, D.Se. 1.M.8. 
B.S.5 F.R.C.P., F.B.C.S., 


Major L. Bement | ¢,L6,, M.D., 
D 
Mabamabopedyaye Satis Chandra Vidyabhusana, 
M.A., 
Dr. G. Thien, a C.1.E. 
Dr. M. ses gc., F.R.S. 
A. Venis, to 
at G. 4, Weer oa... M,A., F-B.S. , 
E. A. Gait, Esq., ¢-1.£-, 1.¢,8. 


lx 


Date of Election, 


1911 Feb, 1. 
1912 Feb. 5, 
1912 Feb. 5. 
1912 Feb. 5. 
1912 Feb. 5. 
1912 Feb. 5. 


H. H. Hayden, Esq., c...5., B.A., B.E., F.C.S. 
H. Beveridge, Esq., 1.¢.s, (retired). 

J. C. Bose, Esq., a C.1.E., M.A., D.Sc, 

Prof. x J. Bruhl, F 

Capt. S taiephahe 1M 

Charles Stewart Middlemiss, Hin, , B.A., F.G,S. 


ASSOCIATE MEMBERS. 


Date of Election, 

1875 Dec. 1. 
1882 June 7. 
1885 Dec. 2. 
1886 Dec. 1. 
1899 April 5. 
1899 Nov. 1. 
1902 June 4. 
1908 July 1. 
1908 July 1. 
1909 Mar. 3. 
1910 Sept. 7. 


1910 Sept. 7, 
1910 Dee. 7, 


LIST OF MEMBERS WHO HAVE 
INDI 


moved from the List of Members 


T 
ber List o 


he efela he members 
f the 


Revd. J. D. Bate. 
Folkstone, Kent, Englan 

Herbert Giles, Esq. Brorope 

Dr. A. Fihrer. urop 

Sarat Chandra Das, "Rak Bahadur, ¢.1.n. 32, Creek 
Row, Calcutta. 


ae St. John’s Church Road, 


Pandit Visnu Prasa Raj Bhandari. Chief 
Librarian, Bir Libra Nabe, Nepal 
Revd. E. Fra ancotte, s. I. 30, Park Street, Cal- 


cutta. 
gist A. H. Francke. Niesky Ober -Lausitz, Ger- 


Babes ‘Dinesh Chandra Sen. 19, Kantapuker Lane, 
Cal 

ibeede Pather J. Hoffmann, s.z, 

anch 

Rai Balkrishna op a Gupte, Bahadur. 
Musenm, Caleu 

drew Ul tne: Maul 
Azeez Bag, City-Hyderabad, Decca 

Anantha Krishna Iyer, Esq. "Dh 

The Rev. H. Hosten, s.3. 30, Park Meu “Oidesitin: 


Mauresa House, 


Indian 


BEEN ABSENT FROM 
A THREE DS.* 


YEARS AND UPWARD 


ived 


will be removed from the next Mem- 
Society under the operation of the above Rule: 


A. Anderson, Esq. 


eae Evan Mackeniia 


lxi 


Capt. Arthur C. Osburn, R.a.m 
Major George Alan Robertson, “Tsth Lancers. 
Prof. E, Sommerfedt. 


LOSS OF MEMBERS DURING 1912. 
By RetTIREMENT. 


Brajendra Nath De, Esgq., .a., 1.c.8. (retired). 
William Ferrall Bolton, Esq. 

The Most Revd. Dr. Reginald Stephen Copleston, p.p. 
Major H. W. Gratten, R.4.M.c 

J.C. R. Deter Esq. 


me 9 s, Esq. 
Major Victor Edward Hugh ee M.B., M.S. 
James Paster ne Esq., M.A.y 1.C.8. 

Capt. A. E. J. Lister, 

Major Ralp h Henry Maddox, LM.S. 


Capt. John George Patrick itaray, LM.S. 

Mir Nasir Ali Khan Bahadur. 
. Nasir Hosein Khan. 

The Hon Mr. Charles Evelyn Arbuthnot William 
Oldham, i C.8. 

Dr. D. Quinlan. 

Rey. plete Cyril Ridsdale. 

H. A. Rose, Esq., 1.0.8. 

Major G. M. Routh. R.a. 

Capt. H. Stewart, 1. 

Capt. John Johnson Urwin, M.8., 1.M.S. 

Capt. Herbert James Magee M.B. 

S. C. Williams, Esq., B 


By Dear. 


Ordinary Members. 
Maharaja Sri Ram Chandra Bhanj Deb. 
WwW. 0.8. 


Raja Binoy Krishna Deb. 
Babu Girish Chandra Ghosh. 
Eyre Loftus Preston, Esq. 
Life Member. 
Pandit Mohanlal Vishnulal Pandia, ¥.1.S. 


lx 
Honorary Fellow. 


Lord Lister, ¥.R.C.s., D.C.L, M.D., LL.D., D.8C., F.R.S. 


Associate Member. 


F. Moore, Esq., ¥.1.s 


Unver Rute 40. 
Percy Bramley, Esq. 
Albert Pendrill Charles, Ksq., 1.¢,8. 
Dr, Olin Eakins, m.p. 
Sir Andrew Henderson Leith Fraser, K.C.S.1. 
Benjamin Grey Horniman, Esq. 


ELLIOTT GOLD MEDAL 


RecIPIENTs. 


BARCLAY MEMORIAL MEDAL. 
Recipients. 
1901 BE. Ernest Green, E 


sq. 

1903 a. Ronald Ross, F.R.C.S., 0.B., C.1.E., F.R.8., I.M.8. 
re : 

1905 Lieut.-Colonel_D. D. Cunningham, F.R.s., ¢.1.B., 

LMS. (retired). 

1907 Lient.- olonel Alfred William Alcock, M.B., LL.D., 

-LE., F.R.S. 

1909  Lieut.-Colonel David Prain, M.A.,, M.B., LL.D., 
F.R.S., LMS. (retired). 


1911 Dr. Karl Diener 


ade eng acd miei ea ee ee] a= (eee eT oa 


APPENDIX. | 


ABSTRACT STATEMENTS 
OF 
RECEIPTS AND DISBURSEMENTS 
OF THE 
ASIATIC SocIETY OF BENGAL 
A 


FOR 


THE YEAR 1912. 


lxiv 


STATEMENT 
1912. Asiatic Society 


Bi 
To EsTaBLISHMENT. 
Ra. Wer P. 
Salaries : G7tsb.3 
Deas Officer in charge for Researches in 
'fistory, cee oe and Folklore 

in Bengal) 3,600 0 O 
ase rea ae ae Bt 611 uv -3 

Penk - ta ce 420 0 

To CoNnTINGENCIEs. 
Stationery ... a ae i 204 13 6 
axes ae - oe 1,502 8 O 
Postages 831 0 
Freight 329 12 4 
Auditing . 100 0 
Lights and Fans ne 1,079 12 O 
Insurance fee as vc me 343 lz O 
pairs 1,930 0 0 
Petty Repairs 197 15 0 
Typewriters My oe 219 0 0 
Miscellaneous = . 615.9 2 
To Lisrary and Co.Ltection. 
Books ee ee cons on Lis? 3 


< 
Binding 1,404 9 0 
Purchase of Manuscripts IEF 0. © 


To Pustications. 
** Journal and Proc oceedings” and ‘‘Memoirs” 9,830 11 9 
To printing charges of Circulars, etc. a 248 0 


» Personal Account (written off and miscellaneous) ... 


To EXTRAORDINARY EXPENDITURE. 
Royal Society’s Scientific Catalogue 
Balance 


foe oee 


Rs. As. 


11,344 15 


7,405 3 


2,697 12 


10,078 11 
452 


2,598 13 
2,32,384 7 


P: 


6 


0 


7 


9 
0 


6 
8 


Toran Rs. 


2,66,912 5 


0 


No. 1. 
of Bengal. 


By Balance from last Report 


By Casu REcEIPTs. 


Publications sold for cash 
Intere 


Rent of room in the Society’s prem 
Allowance from Govechmens of mas for 
publication of papers on Anthropological — 
Cognate subjects 
Do. do. Chief Commissioner of Assam 
o. 
Do. do, Government of Bengal es 
Researches in Hist 
Religion, Ethnology, aad 
Folklore in “ee 


Loan oe 
Miscellaneous 


L912. 


Rs. As. P, Rs. As. P. 
2,382,014 1 4 


Bags 

(o} 

ty Sy 
oO So 
i? Mer) 


Se 
by Gree 
3c 

Koo 
oS 

oo 


ul 
Linn Iss 3 B 


By EXTRAORDINARY RECEIPTS, 


Subscriptions to Royal Society’s Scientific 
Catalogue re eee ce 


362 2 0 


By PersonaL ACcoUNT, 


Admission fees 
e 


= 
a 
a 
as 
a 
wm A 
oo 
2 
z 
3 


riptio 
Compound st hence oeioe 
Subscriptions for etn . Journal and 
oceedings”’ and “ Memoirs’ 
Sales on credit 
Miscellaneous 


Tota Rs. 


D. Hooper, 
Honora. 


1,184 
11,335 
200 


———_ 16,133 15 2 


onorary Treas 
Asiatic Riclety | of Bengal. 


2,66,912 5 


0 


lxvi 


STATEMENT 
19172. Oriental Publication Fund, No. 1,in 


Loe: 
To CasH EXPENDITURE, 
Rs. As. P. Rs. As. P. 
Salaries... 1,735 4 3 
Commission 68 1 4 
Postage... ie ae 288 2 0 
Editing charges ba as a 3,413 12 0 
Contingencies we 57° 1° 9 
Printing charges 6,722 9 O 
Statione: tip ae aie 14 6 
Freig eae ee as me ten a 
Lights and Fans “ie a 48 8 0 


— 12,466 12 8 
To Personal Account (written off and miscella- 
neous) ... : ; 


ney ae iG 59 2 
Balance ae He 3,193 5 5 
3 


Tora Rs. he 15,719 


STATEMENT 
1912. Oriental Publication Fund, No.2, in 


Dr. 
To Caso EXPENDITURE. 
Rs. As. y 
Printing charges on 7,074 3 O 
Balance 625 3.0 


Toran Rs. ee 7,699 6 OQ 


lxvii 
No. 2. 
Acct. with the Asiatic Soe. of Bengal. 1912. 


Cr. 


Rs. As. P. Rs, As. P. 
By Balance from last Report oe he ses 2,488 13 7 


By Casu Receipts. 


Government Allowances ss oo 9,000 0 0 

Publications sold sd cash car ne 1415 2 6 

Advances recover ies ee 105-9. 7 
— 10,520 12 1 

By Personat ACCOUNT. 
Sales on credit He on ue ia 2,709 10 O 
Tota Rs. ie 15,719 3 8 
D. Hooper, 
Hono Treasu 


Asiatic Society of Bengal. 


No. 8. 
Acct. with the Asiatic Soc. of Bengal. 1912. 


Cr. 
Rs. As. P. 
6 
By Balance from last Report... a ake 6,699 0 
By Casu REcEIPTs. 
0 0 
Government Allowance a $e ae 1,000 ih 
Tora Rs. 7,699 6 0 
D. Hooper, 
Honorary T 


Asiatic "Bociety oof Bengal. 


Ixvili 
STATEMENT 
1912. Oriental Publication Fund, No. 3, in 


Dr. 
To CasH EXPENDITURE. 
Ra. As. iP; 
To Balance 1198 9 6 
Torta. Rs. 1,198 9 6 
STATEMENT 


1912. Sanskrit Manuscript Fund in Acct. 


Dr. 


To CasH EXPENDITURE. 


Rs. As. P. Rs. As. P. 
Salaries ~ 1,536 12 6 
onus is a ee 37 8 0 
Contingencies cae ok sea 119 12 6 
Insurance ... me vas Sy 125 0 O 
Stationery ... ce ay oe 14 7 0 
Purchase of Manuscripts ° 219 0 O 
Postages A $76 

— 2,055 15 6. 

Balance — = 2,394 4 8 


Totat Rs. 4450 4 2 


No. 4, 
Acct. with the Asiatic Soc. of Bengal. 1912. 


Cr. 
Re: Agro. 
By Balance from last Report je cee 2 6 
ToTat Rs. We ae 35108 28 8 
D. Hooper, 


Honorary Treas 
Asiatic Society of Bengal. 


No. 8. 
with the Asiatie Society of Bengal. 1912. 


Cr. 
Rs: As. P. Rs. As. P. 
By Balance from last Report 1,195 13 11 
By Cash REcEIPTs. 
ent Allowance ove 3,200 0 0 
aber sold for cash ae 1G a ; a 
Advances recovered ue ie ek a 
By PersonaL ACcoUnNT. as 
ore 3 
Sales on credit ue 5 ae 
Tora Rs. ine 4,450 4 2 


D. Hooper, 


Honorary Treasurer, 
Asiatic Society of Bengal. 


STATEMENT 
1912. Arabie and Persian MSS. Fund in 
Dr. 


To CasH EXPENDITURE, 


Rs, As. P. Bao As; 2: 


Salaries... ane Ms ane 2,198 3 6 
onus she = ee. bps 6--0°.0 
Contingencies fe re sae 510 0 
insurance ... a se nee a1. 4- 0 
Stationery... 2 sas Ms L126 
Postages ... AS as is baa 6 
Loan refunded NES a ae 1,500 0 O 

_ —— 3,738 1 O 

Balance me ae 1,230 2 8 

Totat Rs. np 4,968 3 8 

STATEMENT 


1912. Bardie Chronicles MSS. Fund in 


Dr. 
To Casn EXPENDITURE. 


Rs. As. P. He: Ag Fr: 

Travelling charges a se a 
Balance re Bok 28810 6 
TotaL Rs os 1,153 15 6 


xxi 

No. 6. 

Acct. with the Asiatie Soc. of Bengal. 1912, 
Cr. 


Rs, As. P, Rs. As. P, 
By Balance from last Report _... ee: ee 634 14 4 


By Casn Receipts, 


‘Government Allowance ae Ly Pat 4338 5 4 
TorTaL Ks. eee 4,968 3 8 
D. Hooper, 
Honorary Trea 


Asiatic Society tp Bengal. 


a 7, 
Aect. with the Asiatio So Soe. of J Bengal. 1912. 
4 ad 
Re. As. F. Rs. As. P. 
By Balance from last Report .. 1,158 15 6 
Tortat Rs. 1,153 16 6 
D. Hooprr, 


Honorary Trea 
Asiatic Boctety of Bengal. 


Ixxi 


STATEMENT 

TI9{2. Personal 
Dr. 

: Bs. As, P. Kea. Ag:: P- 

To Balance from last Report ae ee Se 5,212 13 3 


To CasH EXPENDITURE. 


Advances a # scone of Manuscripts, ete ... ike 1,053 0-4 
To Asiatic Society we 1613816 -.2 
ty, Renin Publication Fund, No.1 ee 2,709 10 0 
» Sanskrit Manuscript Fund mae oT: 7 3 
iii 18 88Y 0° 6 
Tota. Rs, fe 25,146 14 O 
STATEMENT 
1912. ; | Invest- 
or. 
Value. Cost. 
Be SP. Ra Ae 8, 
To Balance from last Report... me a 0 0 2.35.95! 0 10 
Tota Rs. oe '2,38,700 0 O 2,35,951 0 10 
PERMANENT RESERVE, Temporary KEsERVE. 
Funps. Total Cost. 
Value, Cost. Value. Cost. 

; Rs, |A|P.| Rs, |AJP| Re [Alp AJP.| Rs. |A.|P. 
Asiatic Society ++ | 1,63,350} 0! 0} 1,62,035} 9 73, 2 10 
Trust Fand | 1,400} 0! 0 11330 al 0 Balt a tod snl 0 

Torat Rs. --- | 1,64.7501 0 0} 1,63,874115| &| 78,950) of d 72 570) if 2| 2| 2,385,951 oo 


lxxili 


No. 8. 
Account. 1912 
Cr. 
Rg. As, P, Rs. As. P. 
By Cash agin soll one ar i 19,421.12 5 
» Asiatic Soc as 452 5 O 
»» Oriental Publicetion Fund, No. 1 ak ou 2 0 
—_ — 511 -7...0 
By Balance. Due to the Due by the 
Society. Society. | 
Rs. | Ase} P. | Rs. |As. | Pe 
—— 4,091} 10} 10} 186) 6] 0 | 
uu ir 41 0] . 
Empl 330 | O} OF 100; OF}; 0 
Onna Publication 
432; 0} 0 wie 
srit MA, Fund 300 | Of} OF ... 
~ime att a 696 | 15] Of 424/14) 0 
5,874 | 14; 7] 661; 4) 0 
| cal ie 5,218 10 7 
Torat Be. is 25,146 14 0 
D. Hooper, 
Honorary Treasure 
Asiatic Society ‘of Bengal. 
NO. O: 
ment 1912. 
OF: Value. Cost. 
Rs. As. P. Rs. As. P. 
O 2,835,951 010 
By Balance “ ” sd mune retort —_— 
Totat Rs a 2,388,700 0 0 2,35,951 “oh 


D. Hooper, 


lxxiv 


STATEMENT 
1912 Trust 
Dr. 
Rs. As. P 
i eee aided 48 0 0 
To Pension Pa aiaes Ke = 1,467 11 10 
ToTaL Rs. ies 1,515 11 10 
STATEMENT 
Tae. Cash 
ior. 
Re; As. P, 
To Balance from last Report aa 5,688 7 11 
RECEIPTs. 
He. As. P. 
To Asiatic Socie ++ 18,764 4 6 
» Oriental Pubkeation Fund, No. 1 » 1052012 1 
9 ‘Do. do. No. ,000 0 
» Sanskrit fener Fand 3,216 15 0 
» Arabic and Persian MSS. Fund 4,333 4 
» Personal ess ant . : 19,421 12 5 
Trust Fun iis 0 


57,306 1 4 


Tota Rs. ee 62,994 9 3 


Ixxv 


No. 10 
Fund. 3 1912. 
Cr. 
he. Aer bs 
c Tecra oe he ee ve oF 1,466 11 10 
nterest on Investments ; 2 a 49 0 0 
ToTat Rs. i 1,515 11 10 
D. Hooper, 
Honorary Treasw 
Asiatic Society ea Bengal. 
No. 11. 
Account. 1912. 
Cr. 
EXPENDITURE. 
Rs Aa. P: Re, «As. P. 
ate Asiatic Socie — Bie 8 4 
99 Ori me Publieation ‘Fund, No. F .. 12,466 12 3 
9 Sanskrit ede ripts und wo 
Arabic and Persian Mancusi tind 8S 2 
,, Bardic Chronicles MSS. Fund oe 867 5 0 
Person co 1,053 0 4 
Trus 48 0 0 
2 oe OLA 18 5 
Balance 1,565 11 10 
SL rete pacar 
Torat RBs. 62,994 9 3 
D. Hooper, 


onorary Treasurer, 
Asiatic Society of Bengal. 


Ixxvi 


STATEMENT 
1912. Balance 
LIABILITIES. 

Be. As -P, Ba. Aa 
Asiatic Society .. 2,382,334 7 8 
Orie ae leant Fund, ay 1. 2 198 5 5 
aie 625 3 0 
ae No. 3. af: 1198 9 6 
pe Manusoripts Fund ae 2,394 4 8 
vip and Pers eee Fund ate 1,280 2 8 
Bardic cuxticies MSS. Fund “eh 86 10 6 
Trust Fund 1,467 11 10 

; 2,42,730 7 8 

Tota Rs. Be 2,42,730 7 3 


We have examined = above Balance Sheet, and the appended detailed 
Accounts with the books and vouchers presente d to us, and certify that it is 
in accordance therewith, pene hs setting forth the position of the Society as 
at the 3lst December, 1912. 

3 Catcurta, Mevueens, Kine & Co., 
26th February, 1913. hartered Accountants, 
Auditor 


8. 


Ixxvli 


No. 12. 
Sheet. 1912. 
ASSETS. 
Ra, ‘Ag. Po Bs... Ag, P, 
Personal Accow 5,213 10 7 
Investments (3¥l Government Pro. ‘Notes Oost 2, ~ 951 0 10 
Cash Accoun 565 11 10 
——_—__ ———. 2,42,730 7 8 
3°/, Government Pro. Note at the Bank of 
Bengal’s Safe a Account, Cashier’s 
Security Deposit, Rs. 5 
Totat Rs, me 242,730 7 3 


D, Hoopsr, 
Honorary Treasure 
Asiatic Society hy Bengal. 


MAREH, 1913. 


The Monthly General Meeting of the sean was held on 
Wednesday, the 5th March, 1913, at 9-15 p 


MAHAMAHOPADHYAYA HarapRasaD SuHastri, C.I.E., Vice- 
President, in the chair. 


Maulavi Abdul Wali, Dr. N. Annandale, Mr. J. Coggin 
Brown, Babu Nilmani Chakravarti, Mr. F. Doxey, Mr. 
Ekendra Nath Ghosh, Mr. T. P. Ghosh, i F. H. Gravely, 
Mr. H.G Bien Mr. A. H. Harley, Mr. D. Hooper, Rev. H. 
Hosten, S.J, J. Insch, Mr. K. P. Jayaswal, Babu Broja- 
gopal Nakheel: “De Satis Chandra Vidyabhusana, Rev. J. 

att. 


Visitor :—Mrs. Insch. 
The minutes of the last meeting were read and confirmed. 
Twenty-five presentations were announced. 


The General Secretary reported that Rai Rajendra Chandra 
Sastri Bahadur and Major H. J. Williams, King’s Dragoon 
Guards, have expressed a wish to withdraw from the Society. 
The General Secretary read the names of the gama 
gentlemen who were appointed to serve on the various Com 
mittees ties 1913. 
Finance Committee. 


Dr. N. Annandale, Dr. W. A. K. Christie, Mahamahopa- 
W. K. Dods, 


dhyaya Haraprasad Shastri, C.LE., Mr. Mr. R. D. 
Mehta, C.I.E., Mr. H. G. Tomkins, CLE. 


Labrary Committee. 
Dr. N. Annandale, Dr. W. A. K. Christie, Mahamahopa- 
dhyaya Haraprasad Shastri, C. LE., Mr. J. A. Chapman, 
Dr. KE. P. Harrison, Mr. H. H. Hayden, i i Lieut.-Col. F. P. 
Maynard, I.M.S., Capt. J. D. Sande 
C.1L.E. Taek C. te Peart, I.A., Dr. G. "Phibaut, OLE. ‘Dr. D. B. 
Spooner, Mr. J. Coggin Brown. 


Philoiogical Committee. 


Mr. Abdulla al-Mamun Suhrawardy, Hon. Mr. E. A. Gait, 
C.LE., Dr. Girindra Nath Mukhopadhaya, Mahamahopadhyaya 
H araprasad Shastri, C.I.E., Babu Monmohan Chakravarti, 


Ixxx Proceedings of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. {March, 


Babu Muralidhar Banerji, Babu Nogendra Nath Vasu, Babu 

Rakhal Das Banerji, Dr. E. D. Ross, C.I.E., Capt. C. L. Peart, 

I.A., Dr. Satis Chandra Vidyabhusana, Dr. G. Thibaut, C.1.E., 
Maulavi Abdul Wali, Mr. A. Venis, Babu Nilmani Chakravarti. 


The a EN gentlemen were balloted for as Ordinary 
Member. 


ea, P. S. Macmahon, Canning ane Lucknow, pro- 
posed by Mr. S. W. Kemp, seconded by Dr. W. A. K. Chris- 
tie ; Prof. T. L. Simonsen, Presidency Callens Madras, pro- 
posed by Mr. S. W. ee a by Dr. W. A. K, Christie ; 
Capt. David Munro, M.B., I.M.S., proposed By Lieut.-Col. L. 
Rogers, C.I.E. , seconded by Capt. iD. Sandes, I.M.S. 


be i Jayaswal exhibited an elephant-headed drain- -pipe 
found in 1900 in the ruins of the old Rajagriha of the Brihad- 
rathas and the Sisunagar. 


The following papers were read :— 


1. Tipulidae and Culicidae from the Lake of Tiberias and 
Damascus. By ¥. W. Epw WARDS, B.A., F.G.S. Communicated 
by Dr. N. hein. 


: This paper has been published in the Journal for January 
913. 


2. A Preliminary Account of a revised Classification of 
Indo-Australian Passalidae. By F. H 


; This paper has been published in the Journal for Novem- 
er 1912. 


3. Materials for a Flora of the M. alayan Peninsula, No 24. 
By J. Sykes Gamprez, C.I.E. M.A. , F.R.S., late of the Indian 


Pekcotee “te cwhioniig Communicated - by the Natural History 
ecreta 


4. : Notes on the Biological work of the RI.M.S. ‘‘ Investi- 
gator ’’ during the Survey Seasons 1910-1] and 1911-12. By 
Capr. R. B. Szymour SEWELL, IMS. 


The Internal Anatomy of the Blind Prawn of Galilee 
(yphioeari balilee Gas alm). By Ekenpranata Guosz, L.M.S.. 


6. A Note on o., digi Galilee. 
F.Z.S. Communicated bh 

These ried 
ber of the Jou: 


5 A F. RovussBLET, 
NNANDA 


Be aa nt Seg ina ee num- 


7. On the enfin of the Soma Plant. By Brasa Lab 
Mouxueri, M.A 


This paper has been returned to author for condensation. 


1913.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. Ixxxi 


8. The Ancient Civilization a rig By MawamaHopPa- 
DHYAYA HaraprasaD Suastri, C.1.E 
This paper has not yet been wabaiited to the Publication 
Committee. 
ae 
The Adjourned Meeting of the Medical Section of the 
Society was held at the Society’s Rooms on Wednesday, the 
12th March, 1913, at 9-30 p.m. 
Cou. G. F. A. Harris, C.S.I., in the chair. 


The following members were present :— 

Dr. A. §. Allan, Capt. J. H. Burgess, I.M.S., Major 
E. D. W. Greig, LMS., Dr. W. C. Hossack, Surgeon-Captain 
F. F. MacCabe, Major D. McCay, L.MS., Lt.-Col. A. R. 
Newman, LMS. , Dr. Indumadhab Mallick, Lt.-Col. A. “EL. Nott, 
I.M.S., Lt.-Col. roe Kinealy, I.M.S., Capt. J. D. Sandes, 
I.M.S., Honorary Secretary. 

sitors :—Capt. Green Armytage, I.M.S., Dr. G. N. Chat- 

terjee, Mtajor Dickinson, I.M.S., Dr. E. H. Hankin an R. B. 
Lloyd, I.M.8., Capt. E C. Phelan, LMS., r. D. Quinl n, Lt.- 
Col. A. Smith, I.M.S., Col. Sutherland, L s ‘8. , Major Winter, 
I.M.S., and two others. 

The minutes of the last meeting were read and confirmed. 


I. Clinical cases were shown :— 

1. Lt.-Col. Nott showed a case of nerve thickening. 

2. Lt.-Col. Newman showed a new form of towel clip and 
some new dressing materials. 

II. The following paper was read :— 

Sero diagnosis of Syphilis—By Lt. -Col. Sutherland, I.M.S. 

— Greig, Lt.-Col. O’Kinealy, Lt. -Col. Nott, Capt. 
Green Armytage, Dr. Mallick, Col. Harris spoke, and Col. 
Suthaiend replied. 


eal 
ON i acter cated 


APRIL, 1913. 


The Monthly General Meeting of the ey was held on 
Wednesday, the 2nd April, 1913, at 9-15 p.m 

His Excellency the Right Hon’ble Toomas Davip Baron 
ama OF SKIRLING, G.C.I.E., K.C.M.G., President, in 
the cha 


The following members were present :— 
Maulavi Abdul Wali, Mr. J. C. Brown, Prof. P. J. Briihl, 


Mr. S. W. Kemp, Mr. R. D. Mehta, C. LE., “Babu Brajolal 
Mukerjee, Capt. C. L. Peart, Mahamahopadhyaya Haraprasad 
Shastri, C.I.E., Rai Bahadur Lolitmohan Singha Ray, Mr. G. 
Stadler, Mahamahopadhyaya Dr. Satis Chandra Siac ebhanaks, 
Rev. J. Wat 

Visitor :— Mr, G. M. Philips. 

The minutes of the last meeting were read and confirmed. 

Sixteen presentations were announced. 

The General Secretary reported that Major G. P. Lenox- 
Conyngham nd Mr. H. Wright have expressed a wish to 
withdraw from ‘the Society. 

aa ee gentlemen were balloted for as Ordinary 
es } 
2 S. Bhatnagar, rite Judge, Shahpura, Rajputana, 
si saa by Rai Bahadur Ram Saran Das, seconded by Rai 
Bahadur Munna Lal; Mr. pereer Cumming Calder, Curator of 
Herbarium, Royal Botanic Garden, Sibpur, libiione proposed 
by Mr. D. Hooper, seconded by Mr. 8. ; Mr. M. 8. 
Rama Swami, Officiating Curator of the Recucin, Royal 
Botanic Garden, Sibpur, Howrah, , proposed by Mr. D. Hopper, 
seconded by Mr S. W. Kemp; Ah. 


pur, roposed by u 
Bet pe fy Mahamahopadiyaya Haraprasad Shastri, : I ae : 
Mr. Bernard Alfred White, 
proposed by tie W. Kirkpatrick, seconded by Col. a. z. * 
Harris, C.8.1. 

W. Kemp and J. Coggin-Brown exhibited a 


Ss. 
solo illustrati ve of “abet and Galong Ethnology. 


Ixxxiv Proceedings of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [April, 


ee following papers were read :— 
Copies of two Recently Sota Letiers of Major 

ha Rennell.—By Rev. W. K. Firmince 

2. Entomostraca from Lake oie. i: RoBERT GUR- 
NEY. Communicated by the Natural History Secretary. 

This bare’ will be published in a subsequent number of 
the Journ 

3. is ‘Srid- -pa-ho: a Tibeto-Chinese tortoise chart of divina- 
tion.—By Dr. Satis CHaNDRA VIDYABHUSANA. 

This paper will be published in the Memoirs. 

4. Ancient History of Bengal: the portion of Banga 


Bagadha race-—By MAHAMAHOPADHYAYA HARAPRASAD SHAS- 
TRI, C.I 


This ; paper has not yet been submitted to the Publication 
Committee. 


5. Sarcocolla.—By Davip Hooper. 
——>—— 


The Adjourned Meeting of the Medical Section of the 
Society was held at the Society’ s Rooms on Wednesday, the 
9th April, 1913, at 9-30 p.m 

Masor D. McCay, I.MS., in the chair. 

The following members were present :— 

Dr. Adrian Caddy, Dr. K. K. Chatterjee, Col. B. H. 
Deare, I.M.S., Major H. B. Foster, I.M.S., Dr. Harinath ere 


Dr. Indumadhay ue Major J. W. F. Rait, I.M.S., 
Col. L. Rogers, C.1.E., LMS. 


Visttors:—Dr. Nanilal Pan and Dr. D. D. Wilson. 

The minutes of the last meeting were read and confirmed. 
I. Clinical cases were shown. 

II. Lieut-Colonel L. Rogers showed a diagram and col- 


oured drawings illustrating the distribution of the lesions of 
the bowels in dysentery. 


III. A paper was read by Dr. Hari Nath Ghosh, Rai Ba- 
hadur, on the results of trial of four indigenous’ drugs at the 
Campbell Hospital. 


(1) Ixora Coccinea (Rangon Phull) for dysente 

(2) Holarrhena Antidysenterica (ure) fo anise: 
(3) Meia Azadirachta (Nim) for fev: 

(4) Berberis Lyceum (Sario ixidgs. for fevers. 


1913.] Proceedings of the Astatic Society of Bengal. \xxxv 
Major Rait showed a patient from whom he had removed 
the spleen for rupture of the organ. 


Dr. Caddy showed two X-ray photos illustrating a case 
of Antrum disease. 


MAY, 1013. 


The Monthly General Meeting of a era d was held on 
Wednesday, the 7th May, 1913, at 9-15 


D. Hooper, Esq., F.C.8., F.L.S., ees in the chair. 


The following members were present :— 

Maulavi Abdul Wali, Mr. J. Coggin Brown, Dr. P. J. 
ger Dr. L. L. Fermor, Rev. H. Hosten, 8.J., Mr. J. Insch, 
Mr. H. C. Jones, Mr. W. A. Lee, Mr. G. Stad 


The Minutes of the last Meeting were read and confirmed. 


Twenty-three presentations were announced. 


Henry MacMahon, K.C.I.E.; Major a Frederick Travers 
O’Connor, C.IL.E., R.A.; Mr. H. T. Cullis, 1.C.S.; Nawab Ali 
Hossain Khan Sahib, Mr. C. Hocgtiedl! gor Mr. D. Petrie 
have expressed a wish to withdraw from the Society. 


The Chairman announced that Mr. G. H. Tipper had taken 
charge of the office of General Secretary from Mr. 8. W. Kemp. 


Mu ied erede gentlemen were balloted for as Ordinary 
“em 

& < H. Hankin, M.A., D.Sc., Grand Hotel, Calcutta, 
proposed i Lieut.-Col. L. Rogers ; OLE, se eonded by 5 46 
J. D. Sandes, I.M.S.; and Pandit ’ Manoharlal Zutshi 
Head Mister. Government High School, are he bolt pro- 
posed by Ram Saran Das, Rai Bahadur, seconded by Dr unna 
Lal, Rai Bahadur. 


er following papers were read :— 
A Synopsis of the Dioscoreas of 
sieleabea’ with descriptions of new species and of varieti 
D. Prar and I. H. B 
This paper will be poate’ in a subsequent number of the 
rnal. 


the Old World, Africa 
es.—By 


ei nanthemum indicum 


On Variations in the Flowers of Lim ed by the Natural 


= 
Thwaites—By H. M. Carpper. Communi eat 
Hi Koeors Secretary. a 
3. Notes on Pollination of Colocasia eg ad 
Prema = CLecHorn. Communicated by the Na 
Secreta 


Ixxxviii Proceedings of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [May, 


This paper will be published in a subsequent number of the 
Journal. 
4. A Double compound of mercuric oxide with Acetone.— 
By Jitenpra Natu Raxksuit. Communicated by Dr. P. C. Ray. 
Gunning (Zeit. anal. Chem., 24, 147) observed that acetone 
has the property of dissolving precipitated mercuric oxide and 
devised the well-known method for the detection of acetone. 
Emerson Reynolds (Proc. Royal Soc., /7, 431) and Kutscheroff 
(Ber. 17, 20) have prepared the compound 3HgO, 2C,H,O0 from 
the solution of mercuric oxide in acetone. By the following 
rocess another condensation product is obtained. To a 
saturated solution of mercuric chloride excess of caustic soda 
is added. The mereuric oxide thus precipitated is washed 
twice with its equal bulk of water, so that the alkali is not 
completely removed. Then acetone is added drop by drop 
with constant agitation, till about two-thirds of mercuric oxide 
is dissolved, Finally it is shaken vigorously and allowed to 


f 
solution of mercuric chloride and acetone by alkali carbonates, 
ammonia and substituted ammonium bases. 

e products formed, however, are not of the same appear- 
ance. Iam engaged in preparing compounds of mercury and 
pete: metals with other compounds containing ketonic radi- 
cals, 


5. Firoz Shah’s Tunnels at Delhi: a note by Rev. H. 

Hosten, 8.J. ; 
I have twice already dealt with this subject (cf. J.A.S.B., 

1911, pp. 99-108 ; 1912, pp. 279-281). Sir Edward Maclagan, 


a letter dated Hodal, June 3, 1857, and addressed by P. H. 
(probably Mr. Harvey) to Colonel Becher, Camp, Delhi. 

‘The Raja of Bullubghur, a scoundrel, sent me the en- 
closed last night: ‘ There are unknown covered ways running 
all through the north part of Delhi’; but Metcalfe should 
know about these, one being supposed to run from Hindoo 
Rao’s house to the Palace.’’ ! 

| Cf. Cox. Kurra Youna, Delhi,—1857, London, 1902, p. 77. This 
reference, being more than a month earlier than the incident related in 
J.A.S.B., 1912. pp. 280-281, may explain how the soldiers, having got 
hold of the tradition, ‘‘ would not be convinced but that the rebels were 
working a mine under their feet.’” 


1913.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. Ixxxix 


I am also informed that Mr. Gordon of the P.W.D. found 
lately in a cemetery lying between the Ludlow Castle Road and 
Underhill Road two shafts of an underground passage. They are 
about 30 ft. deep. Mr. Gordon thought they were almost cer- 
tainly used for bringing water from the canal to feed some wells 
under the ridge. The connecting tunnel was about 4 ft. high out 
and filled with canal silt. The Executive Engineer at Delhi 
suggested the same explanation. If so, it is argued that the © 
tunnel would not be earlier than the canal, viz., ‘Ali Mardan 
Khan’s time. i 

Since ‘Ali Mardin Khan was at Delhi between 1637 and 
1657, I answer that, if the shafts now discovered prove to be 
connected with his canal, they do not disprove the existence of 
Firoz Shah’s tunnels, these being mentioned much earlier by 
Monserrate (1581), by Abi-l Fazl (ante 1596) and Finch (1611). 
If Firoz Shah’s tunnels had been aqueducts too, how is it pos- 
sible that, two centuries at most after their construction, and 
at a time when they were in a much better state of preservation 
than they may be now, tradition stated they had been used by 
Firoz Shah to go from one place to another ‘ 

Firoz Shalf was himself a great builder of canals (cf. 
Etuior, Hist. of India, III. 300, 483; IV. 8, 11; VI. 225; Vil. 
86); but I fancy that these canals must have been open, above 
ground, Even, if in parts they should not have been so, it 


would be hard to understand how Aba-l Fazl should have Ae 
; : ; ni 


a : irozaba . Ain, Col. Jarrett’s transl., II. 279. 
Shah near Firozabad. Cf. Ain, Co CC otyag aie 


Shah to Delhi, Within the fort of Hisar Firozah ‘a palace 


and, 
here in search of him 


Ss. 
( irikh-i Firoz Shahi of 
This extract is taken from the Tarikh-s aan (Exx107, 


complete (ibid., p. 


The underground P cong in the Palace of Hisar Firozah 


xe Proceedings of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [May, 


remind us of similar ones found in the Agra and Delhi forts. 
Tradition says that during the Mutiny two or three soldiers 
ventured into the underground passages of the Agra Fort, and 
were never heard of after. 

Equally curious is a passage in Ibn Batiita, who was 
appointed judge of Delhi in the time of Firoz Shah’s immediate 
predecessor, Muhammad IT, ibn Tughlag (reigned 1325-51), 
son of Ghiyagu-d-din Tughlag Shah I (reigned 1320-25). 


ain 
which is the principal * * *?? (ELLIoT st. ] f 
589.500). Pp p ( oT, Hist. of India, III 

It is difficult to see where were those walls within which 
horsemen and foot-soldiers could pass along from one end of the 
town to the other: whether at old Dehli or Pithaura, at Siri, 
where Ghiyasu-d-din Balban had his court and would have 
stored his grain; or at Jahan-panah, where Muhammad Shah 


how Firoz Shah, one of the greatest builders, if not the greatest, 
of the Delhi kings, should have thought of, and cn in, 


1913.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. xci 


connecting Pithaura, Firozabad, the Kushk-i-Shikar and the 
river by means of three tunnels broad enough to allow the 
ladies of his harem to pass along in mounted procession. 
After my visit to Delhi in January 1913, I am by no means 
sure that the ridge (saltus), which Monserrate speaks of, does 


pillar on the northern ridge, and the ground near the Kotila is 
high and broken enough to justify the term salius. If Monser- 
rate can be understood as referring to the Kotila, the under- 
ground passage alluded to as going to Old Delhi, must have 
started from there, and so the tradition voiced by Monserrate, 
Abi-l-Fazl and Finch would with perfect uniformity have fixed 
upon the Kotila as the point whence the tunnels started and 
radiated. This may be an important clue to the archeologist. 
One of the exits must have been near the river, another near 
the Kushk-i-Shikar, a third near Rai Pithaura. A small distance 
from the Kotila, there is a partly covered passage ; but besides 
appearing too narrow to justify the traditional explanations of 
Menserrate and Abia-l Fazl, it leads to a well or baoli. Still, I 
think that the ground should first be explored thoroughly in 
that direction. In case of ill-suecess, some excavations might 
be tried in a southerly direction from the baoli near Hindu 
Rao’s house. If this also fails, let Ahmad Khan’s lines not be 
forgotten: ‘‘It is evident that by Old Dehli we must under- 
stand the castle and town of Raja Pithaura, for the third pas- 
sage is in that place, and very old people say that he [Firoz 
Shah] went as far as a marvellous place and a special basin 
[tank].’’ The special basin, according to Ahmad Khan, is the 
Hauz’ Alai or Hauz-i-Khas.’ . 

The Life and Works of Muhibb Allah of Bihar.— By 

N 


ee 
Mautavi M. Hipayat HossaIn. 
his paper will be published in a subsequent number of 
U 


T 
the Journal. 


1 J.A.S.B., 1911, p. 100. 2 J.A.S.B., 1911, p. 103, n. 7. 


awe eee 
Se opie. CaS 


JUNE, 1913. 


Wednesday, the 4th June, 1913, at 9-15 Pp 
MAHAMAHOPADHYAYA HARAPRASAD SHASTRI, C.I1.E., 
F.A.S.B., Vice-President, in the chair. 


The following members were present :— 

Dr. N. Annandale, Mr. J. Coggin Brown, Dr. P. J. Briihl, 
Mr. H. G. Graves, Dr. E. H. Hankin, Mr. D. Hooper, Mr. K. P. 
Jayaswal, Mr. W. Jessop, Mr. S. W. Kemp, Lt.-Col. F. P. May- 
nard, I.M.S., Hon. Mr. Justice T. W. Richardson, Maulavi 
Muhamad Kazim Shirazi, Mr. G. H. Tipper. 


The minutes of the last meeting were read and confirmed. 


The Monthly General Meeting of the Society was held on 
15 P.M. 


Fourteen presentations were announced. 
The General Secretary reported that Mr. J. C. Jack, I.C.S., 


has expressed a wish to withdraw from the Society. 
General Secretary laid on the table ei following 


appeal for contributions to the Lister Memorial Fun 
Tue Roya Society, 
Buruineton Hovse, 
Lonpon, W. 
19th March, 1913. 
SIR, ; 
The remarkable advance of surgical science achieved by 


the late Lord Lister, and the priceless benefits conferred by him 
ation of suffering and the 


for the purpose of raising the funds 

to his memory, and a comic sey hould be of a 
; A t t emorial 8 

scribed. It is proposed that the imple marble medal- 


xciv Proceedings of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [June, 


either grants in aid of researches bearing on Surgery or rewards 
in recognition of important contributions to Surgical Science 
ionality. 


shall be made, irrespective of nation 


be willing to assist in this movement to perpetuate his memory. 
e sum already subscribed or promised is, perhaps, 


the adequate establishment of the third object. On behalf, 


therefore, of the Lister Memorial Committee we make this 


evidence of the appreciation with which Lord Lister’s services 
are regarded. 
We trust that in the important institution over which you 


ister was a member of many learned Academies 
and Societies throughout the world, and held Honorary Degrees 
from many foreign Universities. To these various institutions 
an appeal is also being made for contributions to the Fund. 
Signed, in the name of the Lister Memorial Committee, 
-JoHN Rosz Braprorp, 
Honorary Secretary. 
The President, Asiatic Society of Bengal, Calcutta. 


The following gentlemen were balloted for as Ordinary 
Members :— 


Mr. P. Chaudhuri, Bar.-at-Law, 2, Bright Street, Bally- 
gunge, Calcutta, proposed by Mr. K. P. Jayaswal, seconded by 
Hon. Justice Sir Asutosh Mukherji, Kt.; Babu Romesh Chan- 
dra Mazumdar, M.A., 16, Chandranath Chatterji’s Street, 
Bhowanipur, proposed by Dr. Satis Chandra Vidyabhusana, — 
seconded by the Hon. Justice Sir Asutosh Mukherji, Kt. 


The following papers were read :-— 


1. The Pitt Diamond and the B B? a Duel 
By Rev. H. Hosten, 8.J. le Lyes of Jagannath, Puri 


oe paper has been published in the Journal for’ May, 


1913. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. xev 


2. The a a Asoka’s Coronation (a new caleulation).— 
By K. P. Jaya 

3. The Pay e Bhasa, and sii Darsaka of Magadha.— 
By K. P. Jay 

i pion —. will be published in a subsequent 
ba of the Jou 

The Action oy Nitrosyl Chloride on Secondary tees 
Metigihenadase and pis Sagar tari —By 
AL Datta. Communicated by D ) 

5. A New Compound of ipseacau with Mercuric 
Oxide.—By SaratcHanpRa Jana. Communicated by Dr. P. C. 
Roy. 


Ethylacetoacetate, when shaken up with yellow oxide of 
mercury, gradually combines with it forming a white amorphous 
powder. This is washed with ether to free it from the excess 
of ester and dried on the water bath. oie substance on 
analysis gave C= 246, H=3'4 and Hg=51 The white 
powder is probably a double compound of neg ester and the 
oxide having the formula 

3HgO . 4CH,CO.CH,COOC,H, 


Theory for the latter demands C = 24°68, H=3°42, Hg=51°4. 

The white powder is insoluble in water. It regenerates the 
ester on shaking up with dilute hydrochloric acid and the oxide 
of mercury goes into solution. 

On warming the white powder with strong caustic potash 
solution the compound breaks up into its components, namely 
HgO and ester, and the latter undergoes hydrolysis, alcohol 
and acetic acid being formed— 

CH,COCH,COOC,H, + 2KOH = 2CH,COOK + C,H,OH. 


The addition of mercuric oxide to the ester and the forma- 
tion of the double compound suggests the possibility of the 
formation of similar double compounds with ketonic esters. I 
am at present engaged in the preparation of similar double 
a aa with other organic substances containing the CO 


he Double Mercuri-periodides of Substituted Ammonium 

Bases. Terrapropylammonium M ercuri-periodide.—By — 

ao Darra and Haripas Muxers1. Communicated by Dr 
P. C. Roy 


—B 
CF On T T'wo-shouldered Stone Implements from Assam.—By 
Hem Cuanpra Das-Gupra. Communicated by the Anthropo- 


logical Secretary. ihe 
This ates will be published in a subsequent number o 


the Jou 


xevi Proceedings of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (June, 1913.] 
A new Springtail from Galilee.— By PROFESSOR GEORGE 

H. Careenter. Communicated by Dr. N. ANNANDALE 
2 Polyzoa from the Lake of Tiberias.—By Dr. N. chee: 


Note on a Sponge Larva from the Lake of Tiberias.— 
By oO N. pepe: 


SON PRN ENR RN OO 


JULY? Fe: 


The Monthly General Meeting of ne rae! was held on 
Wednesday, the 2nd July, 1913, at 9-15 

MAHAMAHOPADHYAYA MHaARAPRASAD SuHastRI, (C.I.E., 
F.A8.B., Vice-President, in the chair. 


The following members were present :— 

Maulavi Abdul Wali, Dr. N. Annandale, Mr. A. C. Atkinson, 
Lieut. T. L. Bomford, I.M.S., Mr. B. L. Chaudhuri, Dr. E. H. 
Hankin, Rev. H. Hosten, 8 J., Mr. W. Jessop, Mr. H. C. Jones, 
Mr. W. A. Lee, Mr. R. D. Mehta, 0.L.E. , Capt. C. L. Peart, I.A., 
Mr. =: Stadler, Dr. Satis Chandra Vidyabhusana, Rev. A. W. 

oun 


ws :—Mr. K. S. Antia, Mrs. Atkinson, Mr. A 


r. . ; : 
Saklat, Mrs. E. C. Spooner, Mr. J. D. Yuzdar, Mr. E. P. 
Yuzdar 

The minutes of the last meeting were read and confirmed. 

Twenty-six presentations were announced. 

hah nae Secretary reported that Mr. A. C. Mc Watters, 
LC.S., Major C. C R. Murphy, 30th Punjabis, Mr. R. C. 
ieee  Maice t Mulvany, I.M.S., Rev. Neil Meldrum and 
Mr. A. Hale have Pee. a wish to withdraw from the 
Society. 

The General oe reported the death of Rai Ram 

Saran Das, Bahadur 


d that owing to pressure of other 
ie. GH ‘ai ig resiened the office of General 


work, Mr. G. H. 
Secretary and Captain C. L. Peart had been appointed in his 
plac 


XCViil Procs. of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (July, 1913.] 


Ram, seconded by Mahamahopadhyaya Haraprasad Shastri, 
37 8 E.; Babu Shiva Prasad, B.A., Offg. Junior Secretary to the 
Board. of Revenue, United fee ae proposed by Lala Sita 
Rafa, seconded by Mahamahopadhyaya Haraprasad Shastri, 
CLE: ; Mr. P. T. Srinivas Iyenger, Principal M.A.V.N. College, 
Vizagapatam, proposed by Sir Raja A. V. Jugga Row, seconded 
y Mr. S. P. V. Ranganathasvami. 
The following papers were read :— 
1. Note on the Dragonflies of Syria and the Jordan acs 
—By F. : LaipLaw. Communicated by Dr. N. ANNANDALE. 
2. The Crustacea Decapoda of the Lake of ES —By 
N. eatin D.Sc., F.A.S.B., and 8. W. Kemp, B.A., 
F.A.8.B. 
These two papers have been published in the Journal for 
June, Seg 
Mirza Zi-l Qarnain, the tens “ the Agra College 
soa d.c. 1660).__B y Rev. H. Hosten, 
This paper may be published in a ae number of 
the Journal. 
India in the Avesta of the Parsees. —By SHAMSULOLMA 
Dr. Jivanst JAMSHEDJI Mont, B.A., Pu#.D. Communicated by 
the General Secretary. 


8 paper has not yet been submitted to the Publication 
Cntinatttee: 


ea ee 


AUGUST, 10913. 


The Monthly General Meeting of the Society was held on 
Wednesday, the 6th August, 1913, at 9-15 p.m. 


MAHAMAHOPADHYAYA HARAPRASAD Swastri, C.I.E., M.A., 
F.A.S.B., Vice-President, in the chair. 


The following members were present :— 

Maulavi Abdul Wali, Dr. N. Annandale, Dr. Lg J. Brihl, 
Mr. E. Digby, Rev. H. Hosten, S.J., Mr. W. Kirkpatrick, Mr. 
W. A. Lee, Mr. G. Stadler. 


The minutes of the last meeting were read and confirmed. 
Seventy-five presentations were announced. 


The General Secretary reported that Mr. T. A. Gopinath 
Rao, M.A., Superintendent of Archeology, Trivandrum, and 
Capt. F. R. Teesdale, Staff College, Quetta, have expressed a 
wish to withdraw from the Society. 

The General Secretary reported the death of Mr. James 
Luke. : 

The following gentleman was balloted for as an Ordinary 
Member :— : 

Professor C. J. Brown, Canning College, Lucknow, propose 
by Prof. P. 8S. MacMahon and seconded by Mr. G. H. Tipper. 

; i f taking 

Dr. P. J. Brith] protested against the custom 0 
papers as read, and suggested that authors might be asked to 
attend and read their own papers. 

The matter was referred to the Council, and it was decided 
to comply with the request as far as possible. ; 
Dr. N. Annandale remarked that the ae Gena 
express its regret that office-bearers of the Bou chs Sooke 
it convenient to attend the Ordinary Meetings 
with greater regularity. ne 

This was reported to the Council and they concurred. — 

Dr. Brithl proposed that an abstract of — ate 
be issued in advance, and Father Hosten Phan Sak the 
abstract might be circulated with the Programm 
Meeting. 


The Council agreed to the proposal. 


c Proes. of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. {August, 1913.) 


The following paper was read :— 
1. Nor’ westers and Monsoon Prediction. By E. Diasy. 
The reading of the following papers were postponed :— 


1. Constitutents of Andrographis paniculata. By Ksuttt- 
BHUSAN BuapuRI. Communicated by Dr. U. N. BRanMacHARI. 


2. Sayings of Lalesvari. By ANAND Kovut. 


3. Birat and its neighbourhood. ae ABANICHAN DRA CHAT- 
TERJI. Communicated by Mr. 


4. The Belabo Grant of Poe By R. D. BANERSI. 
——$—— 


The Adjourned Meeting of the Medical Section of the 
Society was held at the Pie s Rooms on Wednesday, the 
13th August. 1913, at 9-30 Pp 

Lizvt.-CoLongt L, ani C.I.E., I.M.S., in the chair. 

bs following members were present :— 

Upendra Nath Brahmachari, Dr. K. K. Sn 
Dr. tetnk tat Mallick, Dr. Girindra Nath Mukerj 
Visitors :—Dr. 8. N. Mitter, Dr. H. C. Ganguly. 
The minutes of the April meeting were read and confirmed. 
A Clinical Case of Parotial Tumour in which post-opera- 
tive fever due to previous septre 

II. The following papers were read :— 

(1) The Staining Reaction of Anthrax Bacilli. —By S. N. 
(2) An investigation into the physico-chemical mechanism 
f haemolysis by specific haemolysins. (Prelimi- 


pa Conenuniotin’ —By U. N. Brahmachari, 
M.A., M.D. 


SEPTEMBER, 10913. 


The Monthly General Meeting of the Society was held on 
Wednesday, the 3rd September, 1913, at 9-15 p.m. 


ManaMAHOPADHYAYA HaraprasaD Sawastri, M.A., C.LE., 
F.A.S.B., Vice-President, in the chair. 

The following members were present :— 

Maulavi Abdul Wali, Mr. J. Coggin Brown, Dr. P. J. 
Briihl, Dr. Ekendranath Ghosh, Mr. T. P. Ghosh, Dr. E. H. 
Hankin, Mr. H. H. Hayden, C.I.E., Mr. D. Hooper, Rev. H. 
Hosten, S.J., Mr. J. Insch, Mr. W. Jessop, Mr. 8. W. Kemp, 
Mr. W. Kirkpatrick, Capt. C. L. Peart, 1.A., Lt.-Col. L. Rogers, 
C.I.E., Mr. G. Stadler, Dr. Satis Chandra Vidyabhusana, Rev. 
J. Watt. 

Visitor :—Mr. A. H. Kingston. 

The minutes of the last meeting were read and confirmed. 

Forty-two presentations were announced. 

The General Secretary reported that Capt. F. P. Mackie, 
I.M.S., Babu Satis Kumar Banerji and Shah Munir Alam have 
expressed a wish to withdraw from the Society. 

The General Secretary laid on the table the following 
letter from Mr. H. G. Lyons asking for a contribution to 

ooker Memoria] :— 
5, HEaTHVIEW GARDENS, 
Rorampton, S.W. 

August 2nd, 1913. 

Dear Sir, 
The Dean and Chapter of Westminster Abbey having 
assented to a Memorial to the late Sir Joseph Hooker being 
placed in the Abbey, a sub-committee has been appointed by 
the Royal Society to take the necessary steps. Your iewerend 
with which I believe Sir Joseph Hooker was long connected, 


short inscription, will not cost : ired 
contributions will suffice to provide the en Se ee 


Yours faithfully, 
H. G. Lyons, : 
Hon. Sec., Hooker Memorial. 


The Secretary, Asiatic Society, Bengal. 


cii Proes. of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (September, 1913.] 


e Chairman announced that the Elliott Prizes for 
Scientific Research for the year 1912 will not be awarded as 
the essays received in competition were not of sufficient merit 
to justify the award of the Prizes 


The following gentlemen were balloted for as Ordinary 
Members :— 

A. Rogalsky, Attaché to the Imperial Russian 
Consiidates General, — by Dr. E. Denison Ross, seconded 
by Mr. G. H. Tipper; P rof. Ambica Charan Raksit, M.A., 
City College, Calcutta, proposed by Dr. Satis Chandra Vidya- 
bhusana, seconded by Hon. Justice Sir Asutosh Mukhopa- 
dhyaya, Kt. 


Mr. S. W. Kemp, on behalf of Mr. E. C. Stuart Baker, 
exhibited a small collection of birds recently made in the 
Mishmi Hills by Capt. R. eS aed I.M.S., and presented 
by him to the Indian Museu 


Mr. Hooper exhibited a specimen of the gum of Livistona 
chinensis from Singapore 
ae following papers were read :— 


Sy piaerig of Andrographis paniculata. By Ksuttt- 
slot Baap Communicated by Dr. U. N. BRAHMACHARI. 
(Postponed ain ee meeting). 


This paper will not be published in the Journal. 


2. Sayings of Lalesvari. By ANanpd Kou. (Postponed 
from last Meeting). 


3. Birat and its neighbourhood. By ABANICHANDRA CHAT- 

TERJI. Communicated by Mr. K.C. DE. (Postponed from last 
). 

These two papers have been referred back to the authors. 


4. The Belabo Grant ny Ne nigat By R. D. BANEBJI. 
(Postponed from last Meetin 


This paper will be tiated in a subsequent number of 
the Journal. 


NOVEMBER, 1913. 


The Monthly General Meeting of the eety. was held on 
Wednesday, the 5th November, 1913, a t 9-1 


D. Hooprr, Esq., F.C.8., F.L.S.; F.A.S.B. "Vie Prosigient. 
in the chair. 

The following members were present :— 

Maulavi Abdul Wali, Dr. N. Annandale, Mr. J. Coggin 
Brown, Dr. E. H. Hankin, the Rev. H. Hosten, S.J., Mr. J. 
Insch, Mr. W. Kirkpatrick, Capt. C. L. Peart, LA., Dr G. E. 
Pilgrim, ee -Col. L. Rogers, I.M.S., Mr. G. Stadler and the Rey. 

. W. Young. 


Visitor :—Mr. E. M. Hayward. 
The minutes of the last meeting were read and confirmed. 
Kighty-four presentations were announced. 


The Chairman, in unveiling a brass memorial tablet in 
commemoration of the late David Waldie, made the following 
remarks :— 

Da vid Waldie was born at Linlithgow, Scotland, on Febru- 
ary 27th, 1813. He studied medicine in Edinbur urgh and prac- 
tised for some time as an apothecary in his native town. ‘Sub. 
sequently he went to Liverpool as an assistant in the Liverpool 
eed a it and ultimately succeeded Dr. Brett, the com- 
pany’s chem While in Liverpool he played an important 
part in the oe of the annenthilie property of chloroform. 
Chloroform was discovered by Soubeiran, a French chemist, in 
1831, and by Liebig in 1832. It received its present name 
from Dumas in 1834. In 1837 or 1838 it was introduced into 
England as chloric ether and was used as a spirituous solution. 
Waldie altered the process and prepared a liquor of uniform 
strength without the disagreeable flavour. In 1847 Dr. (after- 
wards Sir J. Y.) Simpson “made enquiries for a new anaesthetic 
in place of ether, and Waldie recommended chloroform. Experi- 
ments were made and the substance proved so satisfactory that 
the results were communicated by Dr. Simpson to the por 
Chirurgical Society of Edinburgh on the 10th —— of t : 
year. Since then it has become ie - the : _ wages 
mankind in surgical o ons. aldie 
in 1853 ae BR WN Be works, the first of their kind, at 
Cossipore, which were afterwards transferred to Konn <a : 
also undertook several investigations of a aga’) na pi 
Waldie joined the Asiatic Society of Bengal in 1865. He serv 


v — Proceedings of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [Nov., 1913. 


on the Council from 1879 tothe time of his death, and was made 
Vice-President in 1884 and 1885. He was a most regular atten- 
dant at the monthly meetings, and was always ready to further 
the work of the Society in auditing accounts and giving his 
services on various committees. He published several papers in 
the Journal and Proceedings, most of which were connected 
with the important subject of the water-supply of Calcutta. Be- 
tween 1866 and 1867 he made an extensive series of observations 
on the water of the Hooghly, the results of which went to 
show that the water of the river was the purest that could be 
obtained—a conclusion that was at first controverted, but the 
correctness of which has since been confirmed. In 1873 Waldie 
contributed a paper ‘‘On the muddy water of the Hooghly 
during the rainy season with reference to its purification and 
to the Calcutta water-supply,’’ in which the causes of the 
difficulties attending filtration were examined and explained. 
Dr. Waldie throughout his long period of residence in Calcutta 
never went to Europe nor visited the hills, and his health 
never oe to suffer. He died here on the 23rd June 1889, 
aged 76 yea 
This bean the 100th anniversary of the birth of David 
Waldie, a memorial tablet is being erected in Linlithgow the 
place of his birth. Since he was also a citizen of Calcutta and a 
prominent member of the Society, the Council have been 
pleased to arrange for the erection of a tablet to his memory in 
the Society’s building. 
The General Secretary reported that Capt. W. Mac 

R.E., Major J. W. F. Rait, I.M.S., and Sir Ei tebdale Barle, 
K.C.I. E., had expressed a wish iB withdraw from the 
Society. 


The following gentlemen were balloted for as Ordinary 
Members :— 


Mr. Cyril 8. Fox, Geological Survey of India, proposed by 
Dr. W. A. K. Christie, seconded by Mr. G. H. Tipper; Mr. 


The pee papers were read :— 

‘3 Molluscan Faunal List of the Lake of Tiberias with 
epee of new species.—By H. B. Preston. Communi- 
cated by N. ANNANDALE. 

The Planarians of the Lake of Tiberias.—By R. H. 
Warmer. Communicated by N. ANNANDALE. 


Nov., 1913.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. cv 


3. Aquatic and Semi- —— Rhynchota from the Lake of 
Tiberias and its immediate vicinity. —By G. Horvatu. Com 
municated by N. ANNANDALE. 

These papers will be published in the Journal. 

4. The Limestone Caves of Burma and the Malay Penin- 
sula.—By N. ANNANDALE, J. Coaain Brown, and F. H. 
GRAVELY. 


—>—— 


The Adjourned Meeting of the Medical Section of the 
Society was held at the oe s Rooms on Wednesday, the 
12th November, 1913, at 9-30 Pp 

Lizvut.-CoLoneL W. J. ie I.M.S., in the chair. 

The following members were present :— 

Dr. A. 8. Allan, Dr. U.N. Brahmachari, Dr. Adrian eee 
Dr. Bi Chatterjee, Major E. D. W. Greig, I.M.S., 
Hankin, Dr. Indumadhab Mallick, Lieut. ee B. _ 
Newman, I.M.S., Lieut.-Colonel A. H. Nott, ILM. oe, Lieut.- 
Colonel L. Rogers, I.M.S., Capt. J. D. Sana, I.M.S., Honor- 
ary Secretary. 

Visitors :—Dr. C. Banks, Dr. W. S. Allan. 

The minutes of the August meeting were read and con- 
firmed. 

The Emetine and other treatments of Amoebic Dysentery 
and Hepatitis (including Liver abscess) were discussed. 

Col. Rogers opened the discussion. 

Papers were read by Lieut.-Colonel Nott, Lieut.-Colonel 
Newman, Major Munro and Dr. Seal. 


The other papers were postponed. 


SON ER 


DECEMBER, 1913. 


The Monthly General Meeting of the cespged was held on 
Wednesday, the 3rd December, 1913, at 9-15 P 


MAHAMAHOPADHYAYA HARAPRASAD SuHastTet, C.I1.E., M.A., 
F.A.S.B., Vice-President, in the chair 


The following members were present :— 

Maulvi Abdul Wali, Dr. N. Annandale, Dr. P. J. Brihl, 
Mr. J. Coggin Brown, Dr. Gopal Chandra Chatterji, The Hon. 
Mr. J. G. Cumming, Mr. T. P. Ghosh, Mr. H. Gravely, Mr. 
H. G. Graves, The Rev. i. Hosten, 8.J., Mr. W. Kirkpatrick, 
Capt. C. L. Peart, Mr. G. Stadler, Dr. Satis Chandra Vidya- 
bhusana. 

Visitors :—The Rev. A. Gille, 8.J., The Rev. P. Molitor, 
S.J., Mr. D. N. Mukerji, Dr. Young. 

The minutes of the last meeting were read and confirmed. 


Forty-one presentations were announced. 
ss A Lane, I.MLS., 
Mr. W. Leather, Mr. F. radley-Birt, Mr. E. B. Ho well, 


as Tiwi dee I.M.S., Tis ; 
Mr. J. H. Towle, Mr. P. N. Mukerjie, Capt. G. King, I.M.S., 


have expressed a wish to withdraw from the Society. 
ek sari gentlemen were balloted for as Ordinary 
Member | 
abu Prayag Prasad Tripathi, Asst. Master, Govt. Hig 
School, Arrah repeal by Dr. Satis Chandra Vidyabhusana, 


hopadhyaya Hara Pe Shastri, C.L.E.; 
seconded by Mahamahopa 249 tou ‘P Pak haan 


Major Roger Parker Wilson : 

Campbell Hospital, Sealdah House, ae proposed y 
Lieut.-Col. L. Rogers, C.LE., 1.M.8., seconded by Capt. J. D. 

; harles Aubrey Godson, I.M.S., Resident 

Medical Officer, Medical College, Calcutta, proposed by Lieut.- 
seconded by Major E. aad 


Col. 1 Rogen, Janes aed Santen, 

Greig, 1.M.S. ; Capt. James Alire : 

i ‘MR. , Offg. ye nates of Phymelvgy: Medical College, Caleutta, 

proposed by Lieut.-Col. L. Rogers , C.LE., 1.M.S, secon 

by Major E. D. W. Greig, 1.M.S. 
— following papers were read :— 

The twelve Bhuiyas or Landlords of Bengal.—By the 
J. 


En H. Hoste, 8. 


evili Proceedings of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [December, 
cae paper has been published in the Journal for Novem- 
ber 191 


2. The Rev. L. Bernard among the Abors, ~~ hy cross as 
a tattoo-mark (1855).-- A note by the Rev. H. Hosten, S.J. 


This paper has been published in the : a re August 
13. 


3. Jayamangali.—By 8. P. V. RAMANUJASWAMI. 


4. Fr. Jerome Xavier’s Persian Lives of the Apostles.—By 
the Rev. H. Hosten, 8.J., with a pebeed by H. Beveridge 
and Aga Muhammad Kazim Shirazi 


These two papers will be publeied ina hibit oc number 
of the Journal. 
The Pitt Dimond and the sags 4 Jagannath, Puri. A 
Acie note by the Rev. H. Hostzn 
6. The Nature of moksa in the Nyaya and vaisesika 
systems.— By VANAMALI CHAKRAVARTI 


7. The Localization of certain Genii of the Rigveda.—By 
MAHAMAHOPADHYAYA SATIS CHANDRA VibyaBHusana, M.A., 
Ph.D. 


These two papers will be published in a subsequent number 
of the Journal. 
——<>—— 

The Adjourned Meeting of the Medical Section of the 
Society was held at the renal 8s Rooms on Wednesday, the 
10th December, 1913, at 9-30 p 

Lizut.-Cotongen A. H. Nose: I.M.S., in the chair. 

The following members were present :— 


apt. J H. Burgess, LMS., Dr. Adrian Caddy, Dr. 
Gopal Chandra Chatterjee, Dr. K. -K. Chatterjee, Dr. C. H. 


Visitors mere — ee I.M.S., Dr. W. M. 
Haffkine, Dr. J. B. Molon 


Minutes of the last hae were read and confirmed. 
he Discussion on the Emetine and other treatments of 
Amoebic Dysentery and Hepatitis were continued and other 
papers on the subject were read. 


Col. Newman showed a new steam steriliser. 


1913.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. cix 
Col. Newman read a paper on Liver abscess and advocated 
opening and drainage as the best treatment. 


Dr. Chatterjee and Capt. Sandes read papers on the 
same subject. 


INDEX 
TO THE 


SOCIETY'S JOURNAL AND PROCEEDINGS, 
Vol. IX, 1918. 


INDEX. 


A 


Abhisheka of Aéoka, 318. 
aes an n 1068 cinta of 37 expedition 
107. 
Abyla Pare , Q. an nd G. (2), 356. 
Acanthephyra, larva, 356. 
= sp., 354. 
a sanquinea, W o0o0d- 
ason 
ecient bri nie ks H.-Seh., var. 
ectens Horv., 4 
dinthomancn: sp., 
Acetone wit ercuric — a 
ae nar compound of, 


Ixx 
A-ch’ang “(Maingtha) ribe of 
Hoh an, 137, 
duckie praciiy Giesbe, 367. 
long , Giesbr., 


"307. 
Adbhutasagara, manuscript of, 274. 
ge Aleock and And., 

9. 


ria on Sarcocolla, 178. 
Alburnus sellal, Hekl., 31, 33. 
Aloiopidae, 366. 


365 
Allodahlia macropyga, Westw., 186. 
Almeida, Father Michael vs 157. 
Althepus pictus, Thor., , 420. 
Ambalacata, Tamil, Basan, and 
‘« Malabar ” Printing in, 165. 
Ambassis pottaodicrs am. Buch.), 
rotaenia, Bleeke: er, 342. 


Amblyopus Us 5 Bi a : 
mines, ondary, action of 
sieoeet “abloride 0 n, 207. 
Ammonium substituted, 
Double Mercuri-periodides 


Amphioxides nar omg 358. 

yar am be 359. 

Am pullaria 

aed ses ‘rons, Burm., 219. 

Anatomy of blind Prawn of 
G 


Anderson, cs a ath the A-ch’angs, | 
138. \ 


Anderson, John, on the dress of 
Men and Women the 
A-ch’ang tribe, 140, 141 

Anisolabis pees Lue. 184. 

Anomura, larva 

Angamale and Cranganor, Chaldean 
Printing in, 16 

Anisops producta. Fieb., 479. 

Anopheles roan haan Giles, 48. 

palestinensts fc Nala ), 4 


Anopheline larvae f the lake ot 
Tiberias, 22. 

An Pa Steeda 3 

Anthracolithic faunas of Shan 


tates, age O 
Antigonia ere, (Lowe). nie 355. 
? Antocha opalizans, O 
Anuraea mie Bthrenberg, "520, 


Anzarut: SEER 
Aphrodite Mirth 
patti fasciatus, Loan 338 

v. and Val., 


"34 
seers: 406, 412-420. 
f Limestone caves of 

Burma, 
Araepora, ci. ramosa, Waag and 

Wentz 

an, Twelve Bhiliyas of, 448 
Arcania quinquespinosa, Aleock 

and And., 349. 


pam ns hierogly phica, Duf., 479. 
— ha dapeuatior Budde-Lund, 


seid intermixtus, 4 


Armadi 
pasate set ta 18, rn 352. 
olophus, Alcock, 


maculatum, 
sentir pn 3 
Asiatic ; Society of ‘Bengal, its ia tock: 
Agoka’s Coronation, the Date of, 
doubt about their 
brightwellit, Gosse, 229. 
red Stone Im- 


pene Two-shoulde 
plements from, 291. 


exli 


raced som 357. 
Asteropecten, 347. 
» sp., 340. 
andersoni, Sladen, 346. 
icus Déderlein, 346. 
Atherina pinpats: Lacépe de, 338. 
Athyris, sp., 39 
epee abe desmaresti, (Millet), 21, 
39, 2 


9° 


Atyidae, fa ravi 

Augaptilus Hh ae Farr 

Avadanaégataka, the ocinane Bud- 
dhistic text, 126. 

Avanti, ie of the dominating 

on of, 268. 

Aves, 404, 

beat of the Parsin, India in the, 

427. 


B 
Bacteriastrum. 357. 


Badaga, Tamil and ‘‘ Malabar 
"Printing in acer pe nie 
ake 


Bahr Tuba ariya : 
Tiberi 
Pakbtiyee Khilji, Muhammad-i : 
ai ham mmad-i-Bakhtiyar 


Badlnieatoescs iy 
Balanus 
Balkh, City as e short note on, 


Barbier, Father 


Barbus beddom omes,( fan ol a2, 3a. 
} & V. 3 


31, 33. 
ind cha ange s, Sir 
liot’s researches regard- 

ing, 307. 
thycalanus onesie 354. 
Batrachin, 39, 40, 
of the tans ie Tiberias, 


° 
Pen 
Beccari, plore Camillo, 153. 
Beller ophon 397. 
Bengal. Condition bal before the 
Muhammadan Cease, 


Genealogical er of the 
Sena kin 


ngs of, 2 
ee ears Bhiiyas pe ‘Tend 
1 of, 437. 
Benzylamines, Monochloro and 
ichloro, preparation and 
decomposition of, 425 
way R 


ong 
and the Cross as 
Tattoo Mark, 325. 


Inder 


Beschi, Father Joseph Constantius 
166. 


Bhasa, - to ale 
e His 


ie Saka of Magadha 
paca Bisogpht or Landlords of 


biases r a 
Bidyabinod, B. note on the clay 
veri from a cave in Kedah, 


‘ake ee of, before the 


i 
i EC Re toa pence 
a 


of ae ois of Tiberias, A 


Report on the, (Second 
Series), 209. 
7. 2208 the Lake of Ti 


ert on,(T hird noes 


Biron, = Frene h sti on Jagan- 
h of Puri, 451. 

Birds a the Limesta tone Caves of 

Burma and Malay Peatnadta: 


Bischopinek, the Jesuit Mission- 


Bithinala annandalei, sp.n 
contempta, ‘Dastasaheas 
469. 


29 aint sp. n., 470. 
nes, sp. n., 469. 
sp. n., 470. 
Bithinia Badcolle, yA , 468. 
vis coaretensis, p n., scr 
makh, sp. n 
Blanc ian tes pilaiblecetien: 218, 
Blenniidee, 3 31, 33. 
Blenn 


arenas ‘ern A Bl, 34. 
» Risso, 31,. 
ities. Pree ens "Barak. Bhiai- 
yas of Bengal, 437 
Block-printing, Histo tory of, 149. 
B “Gaya Inscription, 271 
Bosmina —— trostris var. cornuta, 


Jurine, 231. 
Bouchet, o.. , on Jagannath of Puri, 
Brachionus militaris, Ehrenberg, 


| 
| Bra achiopoda, 365, 366. 
— themis leucosticta, Burm., 
| Brac oN use of the term, 150. 
Brpesivg. sp., 
| Buddhism, Northern, 124. 
note on, 123. 


Index. 


Buddhistic oe 123. 
a; s, Comparison of the 
oWorthes ern and South- 


ern, ; 
Bufo asper, Gravh., 404. 
>, vtridis, Laur., 39, 40. 
Burma, The fauna of the Limestone 
ave , 40 
oe Caves of, 391 
Bu rnouf, n Buddhism, 125 


Sustadiaibe: Juan de, 153. 


Cc 


Cabral, Father John, 116. 
mse arse Father ste eer 116. 
minor, ( 
Calon elegans (Milne- -Edwards), 
35 


Calmette, the Jesuit Missionary ,150. 
rag acepien ssaneas , Giinther, 351. 
caudat tus, Schleg., 


pa este 8 fe eae, 415. 
‘ambalopsis calva Passe), var., 


Candacia norvegica, poles 354. 
ethiopica, Dana, 3 
pene ee ctyla, Daa. 354, 


Candi at Dalbadar, Dacca, Image 


Canthocalanus pauper, (Giesbr. ie 
Caranx affinis, Riipp, 33 
a hing 368. 

bes “ri is. ), 338. 
Carcharias, 8 sp.; 
sce wi: longimanus, De Haan, 


> 


(gain. Rev. ae e Earlies 
ait Printing in a endia, 1. 

Caridina secloeion 244, 

vxbesaskee ay , 348. 

Cassiopea 

Catagius p ies Thorell, 407, oe 

— Aantificakion of the to 


Give Limeat one, of Burma and 
ay Peninsula, 391. 
tropages furcatus, (Dana), 367. 

8 


na, 340. 
Sete tripos, 357. 368. 
Jertanthus, sp-> 
Jeriodaphn nia reticulata, Jurine, 231. 
ete aude. Richard, 231. 


AGoooocoa 
Sd 
is 


Chae vitae, sp. no 
Chaetoceras, 357, 307, 368. 


Chaetognatha, 355, 367 


exill 

Chaetospania thoracica, Dohrn, 185 

Cha ser ooo Fees ! in Angamale and 
166. 


yn ite oulgaris, Gray, 4 
Champsodon guentheri, nde 348, 
351, 352 
Chandecan, identification of the 
of, 

Chandra ‘Gupta’ s ae. Date of, 

Oharjodee Sow hoplites, 
WwW 

Charybdis ( Gontiooma) affinis , Dana, 
336. 

one ee Bd Fabr.), 

A.M -» 330. 

merguienao, de 

Man, 345 

orténtalis, Dana, 

350, 352. 


Sakae Aco M. 


99 3° 


Chelidoperca Gucseneeganurie | Alcock) : 


Chelisoches morio., Fabr, 405, 414. 

Chilodipterus lineat tus, (Fo rsk.), 

Chiton (Acanthopleura) spiniger, 
ow., : 

Chorinemus sancti petri, Cuv. and 
Val., 

Christianity, note on, 299. 

Cichlidae, ue ae 34. 

Cirripedia, 


eae "aER. 
peg Day, 358. 
Cladocera, 231 
cera a V.), 3 
Packers en, Dana, 
Clay tablets from Kedah, the Malay 
sula and Moulmei in, 423. 

Sama aie rivulata, Valenc, 

39, 40. La 
Clibanarius padavensis, de 
Clupea a ei. a4 "and val} ), 


Cochin,—*« Malabar,” Printing in, 


Coelenterata, age? Met 343, 346, 
, 350, 352, 355. 
of praieat Bay, 


of Hinzé Basin, 337. 


y Island, 
Coeurdoux, the Jesuit Missionary, 


: 
Coin of Mughigudbin Yuzbak, 288. 
Coins, Numismatic Supplement 
si, articles 122-124, 481. 


CX1V 


Collembola, 215 
Collocalia pant i Guiiak ), 409. 
ye inata, Hume, 404, 
Colocasia Antiqu sorum, notes on the 
ollination of, 313. 
Coloconger, 347. 
Coluber taeniurus (Cope) 404, 409, 


meee taeniurus, var. ridleyz, 
onlenger, 409. 

pC oy ner eaD. 

Conochilus dossuarius, Hudson, 229. 

SER woo (Wied 

Copepoda, 231, 232, 354, 357, 359, 


Corbicula cor, Lk. 
aabula: {Moussom 474. 
a jeliciani. B 
ae flum scspart (afl) 474. 
: 6yrta rgt., 474. | 
Cornucalanus soebiae. Wolfenden, 


Cortispon gills, — nov., 62, 66. 84. 
barroist (Topsent), 


58, 59, 67, 85. 
Corvospongilla, Annandale, 61, 78. 
Coscinodiscus, 357, 367. 
Cox, Major , on Sarcocolla, 177. 
Cranganor and Angamale, Chaldean 
Pri . 166. 


i bead og 


Crocothemis erythraea, 
Croix, Father r Stephen de la, 158. 
oss as a Tattoo Mark among the 
Abors, 325. 
Crustacea, 334-337, 339, 342, 344, 
349, 350, 351, 352, 354, 
356, 359, 366, 368, 
407. 


of Byikhwaaw Bay, 338. 
ae of thé Limestone Caves 
oO Back an the 
alay Peninsula, 420. 
> of Tavoy Island, 


D 
: ' Tiberias, : 
Orypsithyrsis spelaea, Meyrick, 406, 
Cryp topodia fornicata, rae 352. 
shes laticinctus, s oS 
“oy us, Fic i 
rs 
Culicider f jean. the Lake of Damas- 
47. 


cus, 47. 
»» from the Lake of Tiberias, 


Tiberias 


47. 
Culicine larvae tg the Lake of 


Index. 


Cushing, Dr., on the A-ch’ang 
people, 143. 

Cyclophorus, ‘411 
Cyclops ieoeckee: —— 231. 

An TUTUS 232. 

oma Pither. 231. 
Cyelothone econo (GHinther), 353. 
ta (Giinther), 353. 

Cymopterus, ro 40 
Cyphoderus jimiiliese. Imms, 405, 


Cyprinidae, 31, 32, 33. 
— odon, 21. 
bee Yr, oo. 
ms nto, Hck, 32, 
3 Heo une Deir Ble ot 
5, 38. 
hiae, Hekl, 32, 38. 
Cyprinodontidae, ser 
Cyprinot entatomarginatus 
ni rd, 232. 
na, Brady, 232. 
Cypris pubera, Maller. var., 232. 


D 
Damascus, gichoaee' from the Lake 


oy Culicidae from the Lake 


Dinasaygara, manuscript of, 274. 
Daphnia ——* 

milis aa 232. 
Darinesteter, James, on the Avesta, 


427, 
Dargaka, King of onesie and the 
plays of Bhas 
Date of Agoka’s joes Bye Elk 
Py is ndra-Gupta’s accession, 


Davies, on Ach’ ee tribe, 1 
i i ae 


ae Abie of 


hs , 143. 
Dae rises "35, 356, 359. 
- Rept antia. 345 5 
Natantia, 3 

Delhi, taba Shah’s Tunnels at, 
Ixx 

Deiner, C., i description of An- 
thrac olithic fossils of Shan 


tates, 40 
Deratonotus cavernicola, 415. 
apse 183 137. 

Indian, =p ty by 
‘Dr. A. D. Imms, 183. 
Diaphanosoma adieu. "Liévin, 


Di aptomus similis, egos 232. 
Dias, Father Manoel, 1 
Dicerobatis eregoodoo, Sher 342. 


Index. 


Dichloro and Nee. 


mines, Lbigerpers 
mpos ,4 
bieiecuadaeee 8, 5, preparation 
ecomposition of, 425. 


Diestrammena anna eagree Kirby, 


oo pe 
mn sopien 


Sp-> 
ease “Nikaya, a Boddian MS., 


Dina Wass Blanchard, 211. 
5 saab Se ets 212. 

lat 
Diphyes rappendiculata Esch., 356. 
Dipsocoris alie a vis Sch 47 
Diptera, sa 45, 475 412. 

cilen: 43. 

Diplatys faleatus, Burr, 183. 
Discin 
este 2 lamta ies me )s 


29 > 


Disomidae, 3 
Disseta palu sr ae Giesbrecht, 354. 
‘itr pe sie is cavernae, Sykes, 
vadana, the No rthern-Bud- 


B 
Bhiiyas of Benga. 
Doratonotus cavernt cha Sinclair, 


tuta, Fabr. 


ao 
\dw 
Tia a - x 7 Ge 
ey, aie 

sahuabierr 54 C., on 
Moulmein, 

Dutrueil au — Tourist in North 
In 


las tablets from 


pede on  Sarcoeall 178. 
Dysommopsis, SP-> 


E 
Eales, te kan on the A-ch’ang 
peo 143. 
Bae cenit 340, 342, on 347, 
352, 68. 


365 
of Byikhwaaw 


eS 


ay: 
of Tavey Island, 


9° 


Echinosoma sumatranum, Haan, 


Edil ur grant, 
Eggert oe cae (Rumpb.), 
Edw. 


investigatoris. Alcock, 352. 


2? 


Elaunon bipartitus, Kirby, 1 
Eleotris muralis, (Quoy and peat 
! Cuv. and Val... 338, 

Eliot, Sir J., researches regarding 
the barometric and wind 
changes, 307. 

Emys orbicularis (Linn.), ni 41. 

Entomobryidae family, 2 

Entomo mejecins pe - eg Take of 


pieces me (Dobson), 403, 
lophthalite, Ne a Hun Coins, a 

Bphydatia fh ivi syriaca, 'Top- 
Bpizantis pista Me (Edw. ) se 


mare | R 386, 
Duf 


EHqu ares ee sciata, 
Erianotus lanosus, 


§ 
< 
8 
3 

. 258. 
5 
ae 


a new compound of, 
xev. 
Eucalanus attenuatus, reas 354, 
367. 


crassus, Gi 


i 
“ 


esbr. 
an. rire 
354. 


elongatus 
Buc marina, ( Prestand), 3 
Buchel rau A . Scott, 3 
wom Checbrosiit, 364. 
2 olfe nden, 354. 
pulehr ’ (Lubbock), 354. 
Hue ucypris virens, Juri oe 232. 
Eumedonus zebra, Alcock, 350. 
Eupagurus goons Alcock, 
3 
Euphausiacoa, sp, 
Eudoh meal, pees: 187. 
Europe, a, ioe 


abe reser ag OA, 


Faria, Father de, 
| Fauna 


F 


of the setlaeosoe caves of 
urma, 402- 

ae the Limestone. caves of 
ah, 402. 


Fausbill, 128. 
Favia, 3 


Fea, 0 on the caves of Burma, 394. 
Felis tigris, 
Fernandez, 
Firoz = oat Tunnels 


Father ‘Antonio, 156. 
at Delhi, 


@XVi Index. 


Fishes - the Lake of Tiberias, notes 


Fis folate serrata, Cuv., 350 
Flabellum japonicum, Moseley, 347, 
fi laciniatum, 347 


” paripavoninum, tie ok, 
Be: 


num, Lesson, 347. 
Fiakohe see 6 Satooouthe. 177. 
Flowers of Lim mnanthemum indicum, | 
Thwaites, on variations in 


the, 5 
Fo oraminifera, 367. 
Foley, Capt. W., on the Caves of | 
pia a and Malay Peninsula, 
93. 


Forcipula indica Kirby, 184. 
trispinosa, Dona, 184, 
Forficula aceris, 186. 


86. 
ranciscan issiowiaries of the 
mbs 


XIVth Century, Two to 
of, 170. 
Fredericella cunningtoni, Rousselet, | 


s sultana vse mma 225. 


a danica, 223. 
Fungia, 343. 
G 
Gaetanus oe G. O.. Sars, 354. 
gt vag sere "364, 


Ga te 
Gaudhans Brahmins, a short note 


on, 429. 
Gandharbsena, King of eae 
brief series of, 198 
Ganeé Koul, 1 
Galilee, sea a see also Lake of 
Tiberias. 


e noyri t fram 


gl js fot 


43. 
fe on the Internal Anatom my 
ye" 7 blind Prawn of, 


anote on Rotifers from, 229, 
w Springtail from, 215. 
Gemedpian: 373-375. 
Gebia, sp.. 349. 
pada Kanjars, Marriage cere- 
mony and = of, 89. 
Gelasimus annulip Latr 
tetragonum [Betet), 344, 
Genealogical tables of the Sena 
kings of Ben: 284. 


gal, 


Gennadas, <P. : 

rvus, gee Bate, 
“34 356. 

utatus, Bouvier, 354, 


> 


7356. 

cole ae 191- 
Geolog of the Limestone Caves of 

, 396. 


ae of the cave-bearing Lime- 
of Burma and Malay 
eninsula, 3 96. 
Geranomyia annandalei » 47. 
Gerres . act Cuv. and Val. “344. 
Forsk.), 3 


nae ( 
Gerris i Baty Fabr., 4 71. 
poe mes family, 213. 
| Glyceridae, 
| Capaioden nota, Day, 338. 
em/asciatue, Cuv. 


Qorisstesed: 2 

Gon nodactylus 2 

| Go ees paige Srolcaka), 410. 
Bro the 


‘be le 15 59, 
ROE jor wi i a of Kanauj, 281. 
Govindapaladeva of Magadha, 278 
| Grapsus grapsus (Linn.), 344. 
5 strigosus, Herbst, 334, 339. 
| Grierson, Sir G. n the dialects 


| Guldé 
| Gunjidah : see ee inaah. 177. 
_ Gurdon, Col., 
| Gurney, Robert rt, on Entomostraca 
from the Lake of Tiberias 
23 


Gymnodactylus pulchellus (Gray), 


Gypsies, Europe ean, Comparative 
Vocabulary of, 93. 
H 
Haemopsis Sengsestga, (Linn.), 211. 
Halichondrina, 340. 
Saeed dugong, Illiger, 333. 
nxleden, eds Jesuit ‘Missionary, 
Haplochilus melastigma (McClell.), 
> panchax (Ham. Buch.}), 


Hasan, the Historian al a a 
brief account of, 


Index. 


Hausegger, the Jesuit Missionary, 


Hebrus pusillus, ae 477. 
Helodrilus lacustris nov., 6 
Hemichromis sacer, ’Glinther, my 34, 


Hemidactylus turcicus (Linn.), 41. 
Hemiramphus par., Cuv. and 
Val., 344. 
Herpobdella wight lineata (O. F. 
Miiller), 211. 
ek subf. concolor, nov., 
212. 
Herpobdellidae, family, 213. 
Heterocrypta, sp., 352. 
Heterorhabdus grimaldi (Richard), 


és aha ee Same - 
brecht), 3 

ry papilligera peer 
354, 


Romnichal and Collo- 
Comparative Me abe 
93. 


Hindustani, 
qui rial, 
ary of the language of 


Hinzé Basin, 333. 
Hippoboscidae, 44. 
Hippobosca equina, 
Hipposiderus armiger ( ), 403. 
+ bicolor (Temm.), 403. 
9 diadem a (Geo off. ), 4 403. 
larvatus aeigie “ 403. 


Hirudines of Hinzé Bas 

Hirudinean a of he cree of 
Tiberias any 

History of Kasm 195. 

Hodgson, tag Houghton 124, ue 


Hohsa-L , the A-ch’ang (Main 
he) tbe of, 137. 

Holothuria atra, Jager, 340, 342, 

34 46. 

Homotages feae, Borm., 

Houghton, on cag yee 
aap 143 

Hpon tribe 


Hughes, T. perils, on the Lime- 
stone Caves of Burma, 399. 

Husain, Mir Muhammad, on Sarco- 
colla, 177. 

Hyastenus pletone neha ), 350. 

Hydrometra stagnor 77 

Hyla arborea sa itt “Au douin, 


D., 354. 


12. 
nee 341. 


exVii 


Hypurgus humeralis, Kirby, 187. 
Hyastenus sb sag Misrs, 350. 
ons grotet, Gra 


I 


I lyocypris gibba, Ramdohr, 232. 
India in the Avesta of the Parsis, 
27. 
India, Earliest Jesuit Printing in, 
Indian Data of the Date of Asoka’s 
Abhisheka, 322. 
+ ee collected by Dr. 
mms, 
Music, Psychology of, 299. 
Inscription ie the time of Laksma- 
va, “eh 
Laieciptianie, four in 
Gaya Dist, 1 L. 
3 Portu the 
Kap alegvara pln 
at Mailaps r (Mad- 


ant ey 43-45, 47-51, “ise 405, eee 
Insect: el Pep ase Caves 


‘Bir 
Tranians, a carers of Aryan Stock, 


Isodictya tubuloramosa, Carter, 346. 


J 


Jagannath. Puri, Pitt Diamond and 
the Eyes of, 189, 451. 

Japyx ie , 405. 

Jatakas, 

abvawhar a Fecd, work of Muhibb 


Jesuit Missions in India, Ethiopia, 
d Japan, gr sik of, an 
recente, gant 
a — ing, Earliest, i in India, 


Jo&o iL int, ‘King D., and Indian 
, 156. 
Jones, Sir ae Willie; on the Avesta, 


i 3 on ‘Indian 
Music, 304. 
neaahea Ride conde d Syria, ne ote on 


he Dragon flies of, 219. 
Julis Pe (Linn.), 368. 


K 


| Kaissa, a Mishmi chief, 107. 


Kalocrania picta, Guer., 183. 
Kamran, Mirzé, his work Mirza 


Kanauj, Govindcandradeva of, 281. 


eXxvili 


Kapalesvara Temple of Mailapur 
Madras), two rehasacaiey In- 
scriptions in 

Kashi-Prasad Ja Zyasw wil, on the Date 
of Agoka’s 


Coronation, 37. 
Kaémir, Histo 95. 


ory of, 
Kleuker, on the Avesta 427. 
KeSavasena, son of Laksmanasena, 


Kiclhorn, on the era of Lakgmana- 


iekbard pserrn 157. 
Kun-judah : see Sarcocolla, 17i, 


L 
Labia curvicauda, Motsch., 185. 
oe i tea, Borm., 1 
ronata, Stil, 185. 
tabiden, | fami i} 
Labidocera deruncate (Dana), 354. 


minuta, Giesbr., 367. 
Labidura erent, Dohrn, 184. 
tparia, Pa ve 4, 


Labiduridae, fami nee 84. 
ache : ae ng. © f Kagmir, a brief 


199. 
tahsa Hohea, ce Aaa (Maing- 
tha) tribe of, 137. 
Latiopteryz zanthosticta, (Aleock), 
Lake of Tiberias : : see also Galilee, 
sea 0: 

composition of 
e water of, 


2? 9 


explanation of 
the photo 


ne, of ‘the fishes 
sol. 
” ies eieohansien: of, 
im 
Laksmanasena, 271. 


Laksmanasenadeva, Inscription at 
the time of, 289. 


dhistic text, 126 
La ee: Leach, 352. 
” nolambrus) elie, 
Aleock, 350. Ni 


Lamellibranchia, 368, 3 371, 372. 
Landlords or Boggs e Bhuiyas of 


in North India, 125, 
of the Lake of Tibet 211. 
Lepidoptera, ag 412. 

Leptocephalus, 358. 


Index. 


Leptodius exaratus, Edw., 345. 
| Leucosia obtusifrons, De Sidon: 349. 
unidentata, 3 352. 
| Leuctscus zaregt, Hekl., 31, 32, 33. 
| Levi, M. Sylv: vain, his rem 
s. Search in N Fi awe 129. 
| Limestone paves of B a, Fauna 


of, 

of Bott and 
Malay __ Penin- 
yg Reptiles, 
Limnaea =a aa (inne ), 465. 


in scum, variations 
e flowers of, 191. 
Limnias cenalophylt Schrank., 230. 
Limnogonus aegyp 


Limnophora tonitrui, Wie 
Limulus so peas nus, 341. 
Lingula, 3 


neal a, 365. 
Lithostrotion, ane; nov., 397. 
Loligo sp., 
mang jsalinaria, Waag and 


oO 
Lophotheths fae 354, 
ce frontalis, | Giesbrecht, 
i ities C. C., on = classification of 
© A chin 
Lunia ere a Waieketin: 354. 
’ rh (Cosh aagety 354. 
ma, Steuer, 
Luwifer typ, tome 359, 366. 
Lupocyclus tundatus, Adams and 
Whi 


pie hg 


sp., 344. 
Tychatenien, 346. ; 
Ly scotophilum, Boulenger, 
410. 


pedapte sm a mi inuta, Bezzi, 43. 


Lyphoderus, Nicole ti; ZEB, 

” genne. serae, sp. nov., 

215, 217. 
Lytocarpus, 349. 
M 

Maclaren, a M., on aig ena! 

Caves of Burm 
Macrophthalmus erato, de ‘Man, 246. 
Mins trte laticornis, Jurine, 232. 
Macrurus Pranoouiaar us, Alcoe k, 
Madanapaladeva, 280 
Madrepora, 343. 
Magelonides: 668 


pe Aga e_ Norther-Buddhis 
tie t 


Index. 


pees (Madras), the Ka = snl 
a Temple of, Two Por 
pase se Inscriptions in, 169. 
Maingtha = ibe of Hohsa-Lahsa, 
Yiinnan: see A-ch’ang Tribe, 


Majthima Nikaya, a Buddhist MS., 


Malabar Badaga, and Tam 
Py a ning in Arba 
, 165. 
: Ponting in Cochin, 
of the term, st 
Malay gare Limestone Cave 
of, 


Mammalia, 40 3, 
Manr , on tl Bhiiyas of 
1,4 
Manucci, = Jagannath of Puri, 454. 
Maru dialec 
Matuta neselg habe ), Hilgendorf, 
— 339. 


vera v4 & 

Media, ‘Desc of, 433. 

M egacalanus princeps, Walfenden, 
54. 


Meher Pais reference to India in, 


ike mizolepis, Giinther, 
53, 355. 


4q, 20. 
iene ‘rothiana, Noress, 467. 
berculata, Mull, 466. 


9 


elong a, Lacord, 461. 
—— buccinoide | arr 467. 


” fordanaéa, 

oth, 467. 
praerosa, Lin., 468. 

elea agrina margaritijera 


var. 


5 

e on 
8 . 
i] 


Mareutigedatds of substituted 
Ammoni 


onium , 205. 
Mercuri-periodide, Tetra-propy!- 
ammonium, A 

Mesorhabdus truncatus, A. Scott, 
Mesovelia Psiote kare Horv., 477. 

etapeneus coniger, Wood-Mason, 

Bien 
onoceros, Fabr., 349. 
Methylbenzylnitrosamine, 208. 


116. 
| Mirza, a short note 
ma 


| 
var. r degenerata, 
467. 


CxXix 


Metopograpsus messor ( . : rs : . l ob 


Metridia ue 0 Batol, pte 
, 354. 
ber S Guataes 354. 
rot, " Giesbrecht, 354. 
‘Malcohnerot 84. 
Micronecta annandale’, SP 479. 
Paces 


a, n, ? 

Pes eae Me, OP gsi oy pauls 
Microvelia Liha Duf., 478 

Middlemiss, C. 8., the Limestone 

os of Maine Peninsula, 


Mihira “Ch la; 429, 

Minhaj Ayr account of the conquest 
f engal, 

Minous inermis, ’ Aleock, 352, 

Mir Jumla, 


Mirza Namah of mo 
with an English bneraas 


Mirzaship, on the rules of the code 
of, 3, 4. 
Mollusca, ie tt 343, 352, 356, 


of Byi ikhwaaw Bay, 340. 
of Hinzé Basin, 337. 


Molluscan ior list of the Lake of 
Tiberias, with descriptions 
ot new 6 
Monacanthus, 
caper ats a Dichlorobenzy- 
es, the preparation and 
res pune ion of, 425. 
Monochlorobenzylamines, prepara- 
and decomposition of, 
Monsoon ‘and Nor’westers Predic- 
‘tion, 30 
the Jesuit missionary, 
Yuz 


bak, tog of, oa 
_ Use é- 


. 


CxXX 


gem nt i he Bihar, the life and 
orks 
Mula Ahmnd, iis Persian History 


oO a 
Muraena melon 8, 334, 
sellata, ‘Richardson, 338. 
Murchisonia sp., 
Mur ee a gh, ee ‘Twelve Bhiiyas 
akan, 
Marshidpna casi the oldest 
British, 483. 
Mursia biritimana, Alcock and 
An peaks 
Mus ee Mille r, 404 


Muscllnn atS ia ‘work is Mabibb 
Alla 
Musca domestica, L438. 
sp 43. 
Masoidas: Hs 


Muscinae, 43 
Music in bite ide 
an, Bechet SS 299. 
eau ue: a note on, 173. 
Mira Insti. Alcock, 352. 
Myriapoda, 405 
is of the Limestone Caves 
f Burma, 415. 
Myrmecaelurus, sp., 4 


N 


Nabonndelus ye eta Berg., 478. 
act ele Nath Vasu, on the era of 


Narayan of Bhisa. Tracked 
with that of a 

Navia cerastes, Ortm ann., "350. 

Naria. sp , 350. 

Navia' tnvestiqatoriz, Aleock, 350. 

Neanura pulibunda Imms, 405, 


Nemachilus galilaeus, Gthr., 31, 32, 


leo ntiiae; Lort. , 32, 33. 
N emorhaedua swettenhami, ‘Butler, 
408. 


Nereidae, 366 
N 


ermertinea 
Neuroptera. ), 220, 405. 
Nephelis arse pe 12. 
us ( 


; “Rondani, 


Nitrosyl chloride, the action of , on 
secondary amines, 207. 


Index. 


N’mai Hka Valley, 

Silat Father ie ae 150, 165. 

Noe ia F, on the species deter- 
ned by, 397. 

Nor’ westers ae Monsoon Préedic- 


305. 
Nudiah, pie roads from Bihar to, 


Notonecta glauca, L., 479. 


Nudospongilla, gen. nov taht 84. 
Nudosponyilla aster, sp. nov., 58, 
9, 5, 85. 
vy mappa,sp. nov., 58, 
59, 64, 85, 221. 
Pp sah sp. nov., 58, 
eaperovs vis XXI, 


, 122-124, 4 
Nyemenenn amboinensis, Rondani, 


Nyctinomus plicatus, (Buchn.), 403. 


O 


ieee strigicollis, n. sp., 
poda ceratophthalma 
Ortm., 334, 3 

ae cordim mana, Desm., 


( Pallas " 
339. 
334, 


Odoric, on Jecaduath of pila, 452. 

Ovsinies socialis, Weber, 

Oikopleura, 359. 

Oldham Lae pl A the Limestone 
s of Peco 396. 

Ghia: 53-56. 

» sept go ee the Lake 


: as, 53; 
Olindias haiays nsis, ste > 349. 
Opeas innocens, Preston , 405, 411. 


Ophichthye, sp., 348. 
Ophiopluteus ; 365. 
Ophistho ostoma annandaleti, Sykes, 


piesa: music, 300. 
rth et Simi are aaa Burm., 219. 

Orthocesra. 405, 412. 

Ostracion turritus, Forsk., 348. 

Ostracoda, 232, 355, 368. 


Pr 
Pachydictyum, oe 62, 81. 
Padam Tribe, 
+ Pcs marks among, 


Pagur — bidet ca, Henderson, 351. 


Palaka, s f Pradyota » 322, 
Palaemon » digestive, vascular > 
re paacat ae. nervous 


erat of, 233-239. 
 Palnenionidas, family, 245. 


Index. 


Panca-Ratra, work of se ge 262. 
Paquristes c an Alcock, 351. 
Paracalanus aculeatus, Gleb 367. 
Parasnniae Wena: rs), 354. 
iM cali cin pide 


9? 


propingua, 


tonsa, (Giesbrecht), | 
ero: Scott, 354. 
Parapeneus lisiyipea: Alcock, 349, | 
Paratilapia magdalenae, (Lort.), 32, 
Pariphiculus tesaneas eee 3 
i dia in Avest ‘ 
Hania ie: larva 
ors’ Garden, a fe Sk; 158. 
Pudusubinned: nov., 
60. 


Pienaar and some obsc 
gen — Shen ere Le 
asic ‘spine os 
eps, Boe 478." 
Peditia. War aI soins 
aaemene o' bch ngs Limestone Caves 


Pelletier, ahs “chemical Aampreaainat 
f Sarcocolla, 

hese Tourist on aes India, 125. 

Pen 178. 


se ae. 178. 
Peneus indicus, Edw. Juv.. 345. 
Pennatula, ¢ 348. 
Pentaceros, sp., 340. 
Periophthalmus bod wer (Pall.), 
334, 33: , 044. 
epee 1h cp ( 2? americana, 
, 405 
eat ‘Agipectil Du, 427. 
ae = , his story of 
theft of Pitt 


Diamond, 189. 


Persian History of Kaémir, by 
Mula A 


195. © 
Philaema NSUGNIS , 
Philyra scabriuscula, (Fabr.), 352 
Phlebotomus minu Rond., 44. 

papatast, Scop., 44. 

Pholeus diopsis, Simon, 407, 420. 
P osoma, sp., 
Phronima, 359. 
Phyllodocidae, 366. 
Phyllopoda, 232 
Physa tiberiadensis, 
Piiumnus vespertilio, Fabr., 345. 


Subfamily, — 


Pi a the Jesuit missionary, 

Plc a 39, 334, 337-339, 341, 342, 
344, 347, 348, 350, 351, 352, 
353, 3 358. 366. 


CXxi 


Pisces, of Byikhwaaw Bay, 337. 
of Ta 
Pitt ye oer 


Jagannath, Puri, 189, 
| »Placobdella o carinata, Diciaay 213, 
“ catenigera, (Moq-Tand.). 
Planaria barroisi, n. sp., 462. 
y alina, n. sp., be 
sberisiiles 


Planarians of the Lake ot poi 


Plankton, Surface, Observations on, 


49. _ Planktonic Sr ie the succes- 


Plétyoaphiittas, da 352. 


indicus, 352 
insidiator , (Forsk. ), 
338, 344. 


tuberculatus, Sage R 

and Va 

Platyglossus resect “1 Blockae), 
338, 


9? 


me notopsis, " (Bleeker), 
sles sinc malactanus; 415. 
(Peters), 


Plea tetourneurt, Sign. 479. 
Plesiops nigricans. Riipp-. 3 
Pleuromamma nidowivealile (Lub- 
bock), 
oon ( Cla us), 
354 


o? 


quadrungulata, (F. 
ahl), 354. 


rs scabies (Gies- 
brecht), 354. 
Pleurotomaria, aff. durga, Waag, 


Plotosus ~~ hese ),.338. 


Plumatell 
Aare nov., 227. 


Poe cilochaetus, sp., 
Polychae — st 347, 349, 356, 366, 
367, 3 


Polynemus sips Shaw, 342. 

Polynoidae, 

Polypora, ae: 397. 

Polystomella, 

i 201238. ae 
of the Lake of Tiberias, 


Pomacentrus littoralis. Cuv., and 
al., 338. 


Pons, the 
Pontellina plumata, Dana, 367. 
Porifera. eet ee 221, 222. 340, 346. 


exxll 


Poriféra, of Byikhwaaw Bay, 340. 
of Tavoy Island, 346. 

Porites, 343. 

Portuguese eoercip the 

palesvara ais 


at £Nailipox (Madras), 
Ae histo orians, reference 
mel Barah Bhiiyas 
438. 
Potamogeto 
Pota 8 hall, 62, 80. 


Lotonadapiiie. < nov. , ak md 84. 


Potamon "fuviatile, nteill}, et 


An potamioa, Rathbun, ery 
257 


Goan Key to 
the Crabs of, 


251. 
Group, Measure- 
Se of crabs 
De 


Potamonidae, family, “249, 
S eee a contemporary of Ajata. 
ve 


Pratijna- a ee a play 
of Bhas 


Preston, rH a Mollus 
faunal list or the we “ 
te vii with descriptions 

cies, 465. 


areca "Barlvet Jesuit, in India, 


Pre ress, origin at Goa, 153. 
Pristis, sp., 342 
Pristipoma furcatum 


Productus, F. Roem 


Proenga, "Pathe Rana de, 165. 
Prosopeas - A a de Morg, 
405, 4 


(Bl. Schn.), 


Protozoa, 36 
a Vad 184. 
femoralis, Dohrn, 184. 
Paoudbeotioie” ‘ini, sp. n., 184, 


Pseudosquilla monodactylus (A. M. 
Edwards), 3 


Psilocnemis kervillei, Martin, 219. 
Dayoholgy: of ae usic, 299. 
chogaster, sp., 
Puerulus iene Us, "Spence Bate, 


Punicael, ‘Tamil bi in, 164. 
ait erin family, 183. 
Pyralis, 414. 
3 tpennis, Butler, 406, 
14. 


»  pictalis, Curt., 406, 414. 


Index. 


| Pyrgula barroisi, Dtz., 468. 
Pyrosoma, 353 


Q 


Quadrella coronata var reticulata, 
Aleoeck, 350. 


R 


0 oe Printing in, 161. 
Radiol: 
Rafi ‘1- eee ‘Mirza, La 
Ragas, theory of, 3 ae 
Rana alticola, Blngr., 
‘ culenta reeoete. Pallas, 
39, 
> gla ndulos Osa, ag 404. 
me hora bose ther), 4 
oo of Kemi, a brief 
unt eo 197. 
ie eeek. Queen of Randaditya, 
00 


oc ak, 
Raninoides serratijrons, Ricca, 
7 
Raub Series, a note on, 398. 
Raymondia pagodarum, Speiser, 
406, 414 
Rennell, Major James, two letters 
of, 173. 


Report on ‘tho Biolo 
of Tiberias, 


gy of the Lak 
(Recond Series), 


Reptiles of the Lake of Tiberias, 


note on, 31. 
;, of the Limestone Caves of 
ntti and Malay Penin- 


Reptilia, 39, 40, al, — asia 
Rhagovelia ica 
Phsshidiophors (? caers, “icisby), 


Rhincalanus cornutus, (Dana), 354. 
nasutus, Giesbrecht, 


Rhinolophus affinis, Horsf., 403. 

Rhinolophus minor, Horsf., 403. 

Rhinopoma microphyllum, Geoff. , 
403. 


Rhiostoma, 411. 
Rhizomys sumatrensis, (Raff.), 404, 


Rhizosolenia, 357, 
Rhomboidichthys ie Alcock, 
352. 


Aquatic and 


Rhynchota, Sem 
uatic, from the Lake of 
d 


Tiberias and its immediat 
vicinity, 477. 


Index. 


Rhys Davids, 

Ribeiro, hie Diego, 157. 

Rodeles, Rev. o Gomez, on 
the E srliost pe Printing 

ndia, 
Romnichal or “colloyuied ae 
» a Comparative voc 

hoe of, 93. 

Roth, ee ihe Jesuit missionary 


stu ei te Sanskrit, 150. 
Rotifera, "220, 
om ae a note on, 
Rousselet, C. F gg on Rotifers 
from Ga. ce 
Roz, Father Coe ar 


8 


rages 355, 
t. Thomas, regen of, in India, 


Salarias dussumiers , Cuv. and Val., 
334, 338 
342, 344, 
lineatus, Cuv. and Val, 
38, 344 
quadricornis, Cuv. and 
MM es p Se 
7, Riipp. 
Saldanha, Fa ee Antonio doy 164. 
Salpa cylindrica, Cuv 
355, 


democratica, eed. 
59. 


a> 


hexagona, Quoy and Gaim., 
353. 


’ 
’ 


multitentaculata, Quoy and 
ard, ae 


Pia 
ria ‘a (Pall), 35 
Satabsena, King of Kasi, a brief 
unt S44 ‘ 
enccaolld. Wire 
chemical examination 


9? 


of, 180. 
composition of, 180. 
Sawbwas or chiefs of Hohsa and 
Lahsa, 139. 
ee jpeoketer t 


349. 
Schizo icola, Gravely, 


7. 
ieaasaey : Noetl, 397. 


atridorsalis (Gray), 404. 
Scolecithrix frontalis (Giesbrecht), 


na armata, Sauv., 


{ 


pae auv., 338. ; 
Scott, Sir George, on the A-ch’ang 


people, 143. _ 
Scottocalanus farrani, A-Scott, 354. 


CXxiii 
Scrivenor, J. B., on the Limestone 
Ci vei 


aves of isorin, - 
406, 4 


oe Peet ne sied 415 
ais as (Fete. ), 406. 
, 406. 
Sebastishthys spr sok Cuv. and 
Val., 338. 
Sena Kings of Bengal, genealogical 
tables of, 284. 
Senart, on Buddhism 
enart, M., on the “ot ie Asoka’s 
ates ska, 322; 


ssiiefousin sp.» 354, 355, 356. 
bisulcatus, Wood-Mason, 


354, 
Serranus boenack (Bloch -), 338. 
pantherinus  (Lacépede), 
Sesarma quadratum, Fabr., 334, 
9, 
niolatum, esi Se 
Setarches inter, : —— 
| Shan s, Age artnet 
ite of, 401 


Sillago pices Pons ), 338, 344. 
Siluridae 
Sipbonophors, 286 


Skea flay on the Limestone 
ae Burma, 399. 

Solenocer 

Solim anves, wien esate of the 


own of, 439. 
Soriculus metres 8, 403. 
Sousa, Fr. Francis ds his study of 
Sanskrit 150. 
Spelacoblatta geatroi, Bolivar, 405, 
Sphenomerus seperate: W ood- 
Mas 
Spionidae, 368. 
Spirifer, sp., 397. 
Spir urua spirig 
cit ett sat , Ale iy 350, 352. 
Sponges S the take of Tiberias, an 


pro- 


L iberias 
rg’ wd pe distribution 


Sponge-Larva from the Lake of 


Tiberias, note on, 221. 

S fa : ae 78 
Sen o note on Dermal Pore- 

ce in, 
ee observations on cer- 
tain gen wot 

ongilli > 59, 78, 84. 
ep mi ts classification of some 
obscure genera of, 


CXxXi1V 
Spongosorites, 346 
' Spongovostor semiflavus, Borm. 
Sprin ngt tail, wh tke re Galilee, 215. 
ta 
cals e 
lhydrazine, inh 
“aie pester F., 49. 

— Tourist in North 
cubic aaa ' eldhami, Alcock, 
S tephens, Father Stephen, 161. 
—— — J., Aquatic Oligo- 
dips, the Lake of Ti- 

nese 
Shauiabobade, 339, 345, 349, 350, 
365. 3 


of Byikhwaaw Bay, 
Stomoxys calcitrans, L., 43. 
Stone Implements from Assam, 


Two-s aes red, 291. 
venlcclriey ay 
Str sar Bsn., 405, 411. 
Rendchianociics sinensis, Euphr., 338, 


3 


Stygophrynus cavernicola, Thorell, 
406, 418. 
a cer bers. Simon, 406, 
413, 417, "419. 
Sullum eh tim. work of Muhibb 
Sirak, “King of oro a brief 
of, 1 
ative, Taseipciok in the walls of 
the shrine of, 
sage Vasavadatt, chief work of 
Bhasa, 
Syllida , 366. 
Sy sainhithele, 343. 
TS : —— Alcock, 348. 
e Jo 


Syria and t 
on Pra Tiesicciaflien of, 219. 


gi 


Tabaqat-i-Nasiri, 285. 
Tabpirat-ulN fain, on Jagannath 
, 454, 


Thchand, Fr. a. on Jagannath of 
i, 454. 


bee “ Mababar” 
Ambalacata, 


65. 
Taphozous longimanus, Hardw., 


> _ saccolaemus, Temm., 
403. 


rdan Valley, note 


Index. 


Tattoo marks among the Padams, 
Tattoo Mark, the Cross asa, among 
e Abors, 325, 
even on Sihsnsseish of Puri, 
Temora discaudata, Giesbr., 367. 
ylifera, Dana, 367. 
ihetedes 349, 366. 
piss tbera, Pallas 
aodon fluvi atilis, ie -Buch., 


iA Smehaculatus, Bl. Schn., 


ii aa Mercuri- 


Teuthis ecaiealun (Cuv. and Val.), 


Thalassios ostr 
Thala dae. ) Edw., 345. 
* rit nae, Stimpson, 339. 
mna, ( Harbst: ), 339. 
Thelyphonidae, bts 
Theobal wae Dies Dress 
oe of Bae 
Theodozxis bellar di, jpvaconst * 471. 
ay jordani, (Sow.), 470. 
on 


7 
2b.), 471. 
therapin or (Porak. ), 334, 338, 
344 


puta, C and Val., 342. 
Tiberias (Lake atid pire hea of the 


sponges e, 57. 
4 Aquatic Otackbecta from 
the, 


$s Aquatic and Semi-aquatic 
Rhynchota from the, 
i Bibliography oe the 
adh of ee 5. 
Bi Climate o , 19 
9s si wings a oe of 
41. 


i Culicidas from the, 47. 
re Entomostraca from the, 


ng 
59 Hirudinean fauna of the, 


it 
35 Leeches of the, 211. 
x Molluscan faunal list of 


the, with descriptions 
of new species, 465. 

2 Planarians of he, 459. 

Py Polyzoa of the, 223. 

»» Report on the Biology of 
the, 17, 209, 459. 


%> itr sree from the, 


Tipulidse m the, 47, 
Tieffentaller, the reer missionary. 
150. 


Index. 


Tilapia Rook jovenbé. (Lort.), 32, 33. 
»,  galilaea, (Artedi), 32. 
93 0 > * | 


- nis, Ae 
»»  eztllit, (Gervais), 32 
geese from the nig of Tiberias _ 
amasc 
Tit ake, Se spo to. India in, | 
5. 
ba oa of Franciscan Missionaries 
the XIVth oe 170. 
Torroptetsdae, er 
mr tee Sp., 
Topsent, on iphviatia fluviatilis | 


syria os 
Tozeuma arma 


, Paulson, 350, 
Triacanthus esac Sete , 341. 
3 revirostria. 341. 
Trionyx triunguis, Forsk., 39. 


Trithemis annulata, (Palisot de | 
Beauvois), 219. 
Tunicata, oe Lhe 355, 359, 366. 
ne waaw Bay, 3 : 
Tufjina, King” of ra a a brief | 
account of, 1 
Tunnels of Firoz Shah at Delhi, | 
Ixxxviii. | 
sbaparae (S43; | 
welve, sacredness of the number, 


8 
o 2° 


Typhlocaridinae, subfamily, 245. 
Typhlocaris, oe 
c 


the pool, 
"nhabiteted by, 


pail, sep 21, 


Typhlops simont, bea: Cs aE 
Typton, 245. 


U 
Udayana, oo of Dargaka, 260. 
Umbellula, 34 
ndeuchaeta padi A. Scott., 
major , Giesbrecht, 


2? 


354. 
re plumulosa, Lubbock, 
Pie 
ndinopsis, sp., 354. 
Undinula zd Dana, 367. 
Unio, 
chinneret iene sp. — 473. 


ee aol 


ee yee 344. 
Uro 


jordanieus, Brgt., 472. 


CXXV 


Unio, tens: Lk., 472. 
3. 0Or é, Locard, 473. 
os petra, 


is prosacrus, Bret. 472, 
ee 


amo 
ie ieominatta, Brgt., ah 


3,  tiberianensis, Let., 471. 
tristrami, rd, 471. 
zabulonicus, Brgt , 472. 

eroot : see A t,t 


Upanisads, evolution of Buddhism 
Uranotaenia unguiculata, sp. n,, 51. 


, 407. 


iene: ada: 61, 79. 


Vv 
_ Vainyaditya, King of sage a 
bri or of, 20: 


Vaipicot 
Vajraditya, “Kin ng of 
ief account of 


Kaémir, a 
20%). 


oligarthra, Steuer, 354. 
Valignano, — ewan tee 159 
Vallisneria, 


Valvata kegs, rgt., 
Varicorhinus soles Ba, “(C. WD; 
Pe sauvagei, Lort., 31, 


socialis, (Hekl.), 31, 


syriacus, (Gthr.), 31. 
Varuna litterata (Fabr.), A. M. 
Vatsa territory, 267. 
luspa, 61, 


pagan“ reference of India in, 


Vinciguerria lucetia, (Garman), 356. 
ree libetina xanthina, (Gray. ), 


Viévardpasena,, son of Laksmana- 
sena, 

Vivipara, 411. 

WwW 

Ww , David, a short life of, ciii. 

Webb Morgan; on the A-ch’angs, 
138, 

Wilford, Fr., on Barah Bhiiyas of 
Bengal, 437. 


Wise, Dr., on Barah Bhiiyds of 


Bengal, 437. 
Wind and Barometric changes 
Sir ye researches poh 


gar 
Worms of he Lake of Tiberias, 22. 


x 

Xantharpyia 
(Geoff ), 403. 
Xavier, St, Francis, his catechism, 


amplexicaudata 


Xiphosura, 337. . 


L BPP LO 


Index. 


Yagna, reference to India in, o. 


Tribe of Hohew. Bye: 137. 
Z 
Zain-ul-Abdin, King of Kagmir, 196, 
Zain-ul bilad, the mint-town, 484 
Zend Avesta, 427. 
Zi diale 
Z 


ialect, 143. 
ooplancton of Lake of Tiberias, 21. 
Zott, 93. 


PLP OSS